PROCEEDINGS

ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

PHILADELPHIA.

1893.

COMMITTEE ON PUBLICATION.

John H. Redfield, Edward J. Nolan, M. D. ,

Thomas Meehan, Charles E. Smith,

George H, Horn, M. D.

Editor: EinVARD J. NOLAN, M. D.

*-"

''^''

PHILADELPHIA :
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCE.^,

LOGAN SQUARE,

1894.
39

Academy of Natural Sciences ok Philadelphia,

March 29, 1894

I hereby certify that copies of the Proceedings for 1893 have been
presented at the meetings of the Academy as follows : —

^es 9

to

56

" 57

to

72

" 73

to

120

" 121

to

168

" 169 to

200

" 201

to

216

" 217

to

232

" 233

to

312

'■ 313

to

344

" 345

to

360

" 361

to

376

" 377

to 424

" 425

to 456

" 457

to

520

" 521

to

552

March

:SIarch

March

April

April

May

July

September

October

October

December

January

February'

ISIarch

March

1893.
1893.
1893.
1893.
1893.
1893.
1893.
1893.
1893.
1893.
1893.
1894.
1894.
1894.
1894.

I

f}SL

K U6

EDWARD J. NOLAN,

Recording Secretary.

I'RI\T(;l?^ AMI FNCiRAVERS, PHILA.

LIST OF CONTRIBUTORS.

With reference to ttie several articles contributed by each.

For Verbal Comniunicatious see General Index.

Brown, Arthur Erwiu. Notes on some Snakes from Tropical
America lately living in the Collection of the Zoological

Society of Philadelphia 429

Calvert, Philip P. The Odonate genus Ortholestes 377

Chapman, Henry C, JM. D. The interpretation of certain verses

of the First Chapter of Genesis in the light of paleontology 68
Notes on Choeropsis liberiensis (Morton) (Plate IV) . . ; . . 185
Observations on the Japanese Salamander, Cryptobranchus

maximus (Schlegel) (Plates V, VI and VII) 227

Chapman, Henry C, M. D. and Albert?. Brubaker, M. D. The

radius of curvatures of the Cornea 349

Cope, Edward I). A new extinct species of Cyprinidae 19

A contribution to the herpetology of British Columbia . . . 181
Description of a lower jaw of Tetrabelodon Shepardii Leid^-. 202
On a collection of Batrachia and Eeptilia from southwest

Missouri 383

On the Batrachia and Reptilia of the Plains at Latitude 36°

30' 386

Geographic variations in Bassariscus astutus, with descrip-
tion of a new subspecies 413

Dall, W. H. The phj'logeny of the Doeoglossa 285

Dixon, Samuel G., M. D. Involution form of the Tubercle Bacil-
lus and the eflect of subcutaneous injection of organic sub-
stances on inflammations 100

Ellis, J. B. and B. il. Everhart. New species of North Ameri-
can Fungi from various localities 128

New species of Fungi from various localities 440

Fox, "William J, The North American Larrida? 467

Goldsmith, E. Notes on some minerals and rocks (Plates I and

II) 174

A tempered steel meteorite (Plate IX) 373

Keller, Ida A. The glandular hairs of Brasenia peltata Pursh

(Plate III) 188

Meehan, Thomas. Contributions to the life histories of plants.

No. 9 289

Meehan, William E. A contribution to the flora of Greenland . 205

Meyer, Abraham. Notes on the occurrence of quartz and other
minerals in the Chemung Measures, near the line of Ly-
coming and Tioga Counties, Pennsylvania 194

Pyrophyllite slate in Northern Pennsylvania 197

Moore, J. Percy. On some Leech-like parasites of American

Crayfishes (Plate XII) 419

Kex, George A., M. D. New North American Myxomycetes . . 364

Khoads, Samuel R. The birds observed in British Columbia and

Washington during the spring and summer, 1892 21

Description of new species of North American .Mammals with
remarks on species of the genus Perognathus 404

Ryder, John A. The inheritance of modifications due to distur-
bances of the earlj' stage of development, especially in the

Japanese domesticated races of Gold-Carp 75

The vascular respiratory mechanism of the vertical fins of the
viviparous Embiotocidpe 95

Sharp, Benjamin, M. D. Catalogue of the Crustaceans in the
Museum of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadel-
phia 104

Sterki, V. Observations on Vallouia (Plate VIII) 234

Growth changes in the radula in Laud Mollusks (Plates X,
XI) 388

Stone, Witmer. Description of a new species of Neotoma from

Pennsylvania 16

Strecker, Herman. Descriptions of two new species of North

American Bombycid^e 282

Tarr, Ralphs. Notes on the physical geography t>f Texas . . . 313

PROCEEDINGS

ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

PHILADELPHIA.

189:

January 3.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.

Sixty-three persons present.

A paper entitled " The Interpretation of Certain Verses of the
First Chapter of Genesis in the Light of Paleontology," by Henry
C. Chapman, M. D., was presented for publication.

The Council reported that the following Standing Committees
had been appointed to serve during the ensuing year: —

On Library. — W. S. W. Ruschenberger, M. D., Henry C.
Chapman, M. D., Gavin W. Hart, Charles P. Perot and J. Bernard
Brinton, M. D.

On Publications. — John H. Redfield, Charles E. Smith, Thomas
Meehan, George H. Horn, M. D., and Edward J. Nolan, M. D.

On Instruction and Lectures. — Charles Morris, Isaac C.
Martindale, Harold Wingate, George A. Rex, M. D., and J. Bernard
Brinton, M. D.

Standing Committee of Council on By-Laws. — W. S. W.
Ruschenberger, M. D., Theo. D. Rand, William Sellers and Isaac
J. Wistar.
2

10 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

The deaths of AVm. S. Pine, a member and P. R. Hoy, a cor-
respondent, were announced.

The death on the .3rd inst. of Isaac C. Martindale, the Treasurer
of the Academy, having been announced the following minute was
adopted : —

The Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, in view of
the sudden death of Mr. Isaac C. Martindale, its late Treasurer,
expresses its profound regret thereat, and records its sense of the
great service rendered by him in the faithful, laborious and efficient
discharge of his duties as custodian of the Academy's funds.

As a naturalist Mr. Martindale won the confidence and respect
of his fellow Academicians. He was regarded as one of the best
analytical botanists in the United States. His knowledge of special
American, European and Australian floras was very exact and wide.
His herbarium was one of the standard collections of the country,
frequently consulted by students of plants and always generously
placed at the service of his fellow botanists.

As an entomologist he had acquired a good knowledge and
a valuable collection of Lepidoptera. At his death he was the Vice?
President of the American Entomological Society and Ento-
mological Section of the Academy.

Mr. Martindale's relations to his associates were always most
pleasant and helpful. His invariable courtesy, willingness to aid
his fellow naturalists and his unselfish interest in the advancement
of science and especially the prosperity of the Academy are here
most cordially recognized and recorded.

Metumorplmm of Sedimentary Rock.^. — Mr. Jos. Willcox stated
that he had observed an example of the metamorphism of sedi-
mentary deposits into crystalline rocks on an island in Rideau Lake,
Canada, about 40 miles north of Alexandria Bay. At this locality
the Laurentian granite is covered by gneiss rocks which in some
cases appear like a coarse granite containing cleavable feldspar as
large as an egg. The sedimentary origin of these gneiss rocks is
indicated by many enclosed, smooth, round quartz pebbles some of
which are more than two inches in diameter.

January 10.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Forty persons present.
Papers under the following titles were presented for publication : —

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 11

" On a now extinct species of Cyprinid?e," by Edw. D. Cope.

"On the Inheritance of ^lodifications due to the Disturbance of
the Early Stage of Development in the Japanese Domesticated
Races of Gold Carp," by John A. Ryder.

" The Vascular Respiratory ]\Iechanisni of the Vertical Fins in the
Viviparous Embiotocidse," by John A. Ryder.

January 17.
The President, General Isaac J. AVistar, in the chair.
Fifty-three persons present.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication : —
" Catalogue of the Crustaceans in the Museum of the Academy
of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia," by Benjamin Sharp, M. D.
" Description of a New Species of Neotonia," by Witmer Stone.
Mr. Chas. p. Perot was elected Treasurer to fill the vacancy
caused by the death of Mr. Isaac C. Martindale.

January- 24.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Fifty-nine persons present.

A paper entitled " New Species of North American Fungi from
various localities," by J. B. Ellis and B. i\I. Everhart, was presented
for publication.

The deaths of Dr. J. S. Newberry and Sir Richard Owen, corres-
pondents, were announced.

The Forms of Edentulous Jmvs in the Human Subject. — Dr. Har-
rison Allen demonstrated the peculiarities of the edentulous
upper and lower jaws of the human subject. He held that the
statement made that the jaws exhibit the result of uniform absorp-
tion of the alveolar processes was not true. The bone tissue which
held the teeth in place being a complemental structure is indeed
rapidly absorbed after the teeth are lost. But when the alveolar
processes have disappeared, a secondary process of adaptive hyperos-
tosis takes place. These statements relate in the main to the upper
jaw, but the conclusions can be applied also to the lower jaw.

This adaptive process occurs in three regions, namely, that for
the incisor teeth, that for the canine tooth and the first bicuspid tooth,
and that for the second bicuspid tooth and the molar teeth. These

12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

regions answer roughly to those occupied by various kinds of teeth,
and differ in much the same way as the incisiform, caniniform
and molariform teeth differ from one another. The region of the
incisor teeth is compressed and beaked, that of the canine tooth and
the first bicuspid tooth is coarsely conical or tubercular, while that
of the second bicuspid and molar teeth is either broad and massive,
or compressed. It is rare to find an edentulous dental arch uni-
formly hyperostosed or uniformly atrophied, but one or more of the
regions above named assume the form described, or at least exhibit
indications of changes different in character from the mere loss of
the alveolar processes.

The lower jaw passes up in front of the upper jaw in aged individ-
uals who have lost teeth. As a result, the attrition of the incisorial
region of the lower jaw is secured against the front of the upper jaw.
The result attained by such attrition Dr. Allen called "shearing."
Shearing takes place in proportion as the upper jaw at its anterior
arc is beaked. It is interesting to find that when "shearing "is
present the articular surface of the condyloid process is invariably
at the anterior part.

The loss of the alveolar process in the incisorial region of the
upper jaw causes the incisive foramen to assume an absolutely new
position in relation to the line of mastication. It exhibits a dispo-
sition to lie in the dental arch instead of back of it. The attri-
tion by "shearing" however, protects the contents of the foramen
from pressure.

The region in the upper alveolar arch directly back of the last
molar is apt to become symmetrically hyperostosed. These masses
appear to be dominated by the pyramidal process of the palatal
bones and the pterygoid process of the sphenoid bone. At least
they are not used for mastication.

The subdivision of the teeth into kinds, which answer to the
incisors, canines, bicuspids and molars, correlates to the strongest
suture lines in the face, that is to say, the incisors correspond to the
premaxillo-vomerine junction, the canine and first bicuspid to the
fronto-maxillaryjunction, and the remaining teeth to the fronto-raalar
junction.

The edentulous skulls examined were 14 in number, distributed
as follows; Ancient Egyptian, 3; Arabian, 2; Hindu, 2; Peru-
vian, 2 ; Negro, 1 ; X. A. Indian, 2 ; Anglo-American, 2. Of this
number the Anglo-Americans alone could by any possibility repre-
sent the teeth of persons who could have worn artifical teeth, and in
this way modify^ the act of mastication in the aged. Since one of
the Anglo-American crania was that of an idiot, the probability is
reduced to a minimum that an artificial denture had been used
during life in any of the specimens examined.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCKS OF PHILADELPHIA. 13

f Entire arch hyperostosed, 3.
\ Enlire arch absorbed, 4.
( Left side arch hj'perostosed, ].
{ Right side arch liyperos'osed, 0.
( Left side arch absorbed, 2.
\ Right side arch absorbed, 4.

Region of incisors hyperostosed (" beaked "), 6.

Region of incisors " sheared, 5.

f r Right and Left, 2

I Region of canine and first bi-cuspid hyperostosed-^ Left, 1

J ' (Right, 1

1 r Right and Left, 2

I Region of canine and first bi-cuspid absorbed < Left, 0

L i Right, 0

r> • r J u- -J J r Riijht and Left, 2.

Region of second bicuspid and 1 t 7. i

molars h)perostosed J ,^ / -.'

T> • r J 1 • • 1 J ( Riijlit and Left, 0-

Region of second bicuspid and 1 i r, i

molars absorbed 1 ,,. ,' ,,"

I Right, 2.

13 • r J u- J J f Right and Left,

Region of second bicuspid and 1 , ^^

molars " beaked " J „. ,' ,,'

(^ Right, ().

Symmetrical hyperostoses in alveolar arch in front of pterygoid process 8.
Incisive foramen in hne of dental arch 8.

It is noteworthy that from the entire series only four showed com-
plete absence of any secondary bone adaptation consequent upon
the loss of alveolar processes, and that all of these were from civil-
ized races, two ancient Egyptian and two Anglo-American. The
want of harmony between the secondary adaptations probably cor-
relates with the irregular rate at which the teeth are lost. Individ-
ual peculiarities in this regard are doubtless numerous.

Dr. Allen assumed that the coarse food of savage and semi-savage
people caused the jaws even in an edentulous condition to be used
actively in the act of mastication, while the more carefully prepared
food suitable to the aged of civilized people enabled the jaws to have
comparative rest, and hence the mechanical conditions which pre-
determined the localization of new structures were not active. The
speaker concluded that the series of observations strengthens the
position taken that the same forces which differentiate the kind of
teeth operate in fashioning the shape of the jaws, even after the loss
of the teeth.

Dr. C. N. Pierce remarked that the four superior arches, which
Doctor Allen has presented as being representatives of civilized
races, could not be accepted as indicating a uniform condition of
edentulous jaws at the present time. The crania collected from
civilized communities in the ftiture will, in their edentulous jaws,
certainly show less irregularity in the individual alveolar ridges
than was present in the several specimens exhibited by Dr.
Allen, and in the absence or ))resence of a ridge would not

14 PROCKEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

display the iinitbrmity seen in the four exhibited. In the future,
the greatest variations will certainly be exhibited. In some a prom-
inence will be present, which in life amounted to almost a monstros-
ity, while in others there will be found a complete atrophy or
absorption of the entire ridge in both the superior and inferior
maxilla. The symmetry of the ridge will in a measure be due to
the uniformity of pressure from an artificial denture, and an absence of
the forces alluded to by Dr. Allen, which doubtless had had in some
cases an influence in the secondary development of bony structure,
while those parts were forced to perform the function of the teeth
which had been prematurely lost, though some of the prominences
to which attention had been drawn, were, in the estimation of Dr.
Pierce, due to the diflTerence in the time of the loss of the teeth.
Why some maxillaries should show such complete atrophy, while
others had secondary development, Dr. Pierce could not explain, but
he believed it was associated with temperamental and nutritional
conditions. The development certainly indicated a healthy recupera-
tive power on the part of the individual.

With reference to the protrusion of the lower jaw and chin, and the
change in adaptation of condyle to glenoid cavity, which Dr. Allen
had so aptly illustrated. Dr. Pierce thought they could be explained
upon the principle of use and disuse, with adaptation of structures.
In infancy, the angle resulting from the relation of the ramus to the
body of the bone was much greater than a right angle, indeed the
ramus was but little above the same horizontal plane occupied by the
body of the bone, and the jaw was capable only of vertical and antero-
posterior motion, such as is essential to sucking or nursing. As the
three true or permanent molars are developed, the ramus assumes its
vertical position, forming almost a right angle with the body of the
bone, and at the same time making lateral or horizontal movement
possible while establishing the concomitant relation between the
condyles and glenoid cavities. As these permanent molars later in
life are lost, the force upon the jaw in occlusion is confined to the
anterior part or incisive locality, which would necessarily tend to
increase the angle and protrude the chin. This occurs sometimes
quite early in life and while all the anterior teeth are in position.
At the same time that the vertical motion is exerting this influence
the necessity for lateral motion has ceased, by the loss of the
grinders; hence the change in the relative position of the condyle,
which was so well shown by the previous speaker, and which has
been necessitated by a return to the vertical and anteroposterior
motion common to infancy, with the loss of the horizontal or lateral
motion of maturity.

In consequence of his election to the office of Treasurer, Mr.
Chas. P. Perot resigned from the Finance Committee. Dr. Geo. H.
Horn was elected to fill the vacancy.

1893.] natural sciences of philadelphia. 15

January 31.
The President, General Isaac J. AVistar, in the chair.

One hundred and one persons present.

The deaths of Nicholas Koksharow and Axel Gadoliu, corre-
spondents, were announced.

Mr. Thomas A. Robinson was elected to fill a vacancy in the
Council caused by the ex-officio membership therein of Mr. Chas.
P. Perot.

The following were elected members : —

Geo. M. Warren, Nelson H. Strong, Norris J. Scott, Thomas Say
Speakman, Clarence B. Moore, Mary K. Gibson, Jr., J. Howard
Gibson, Thomas Bradley, Edwin Greble Dreer, Richard C. Schiedt,
Charles N. B. Camac, Wm. Evans Wood, John C. Sims, William
D. Winsor, Clarence B. Newbold, Wm. H. Joyce, Alexander J.
Cassatt, Samuel F. Houston, Alexander E. Harvey, Charles Hacker,
Edw. A. Buckley, Jr., Mark T. Patterson, Geo. B. Heckel, Benjamin
W. Richards, Eugene Delano, Malcolm Lloyd, Charles H. Banes,
Theodore C. Search, William H. Ingham and Algernon Sydney
Logan.

The following were elected correspondents : — William Libbey, Jr.
of Princeton, N. J., Alfred Russell Wallace of London, G. B., and
G. H. Theodor Eimer of Tubingen, Germany.

The following were ordered to be printed : —

16 proceedings of the academy of [1893.

description of a new species of neotoma from pennsylvania.
By Witmer Stone.

I have recently obtained through the kindness of Mr. J. G. Dillin

two specimens of a Avood rat which were secured near the top of
South Mountain (2,000 ft.), Cumberland County, Penna., some six
miles from Pine Grove, at u point known as Lewis's Cave,
which constitute the first record of the occurrence of the genus
Neotoma in this State.

The first specimen of this rat secured by Mr. Dillin was a
male, and was taken in a trap set for raccoons. It was at once rec-
ognized as different from the common brown rat, and was preserved
with a view to having its identity settled, but was afterward unfor-
tunately lost.

The next day, Dec. 2, 1892, a female specimen was secured and
was brought to me in the flesh. At my request INIr. Dillin wrote
to friends who were hunting on South Mountain and secured one
more specimen.

After comparing these two specimens with a series of Neotomas
from the collection of the American Museum of Natural History
kindly loaned me by Mr. F. M. Chapman and some specimens
loaned by Dr. C. Hart Merriam, of the U. S. Department of Agri-
culture, I am convinced that they represent an undescribed species,
for which I propose the name of Neotoma pennsylvanica.

This species may be distinguished from N. floridana of the South
Atlantic and Gulf States by its larger size, its densely hairy and
distinctly bicolored tail and by certain well marked cranial charac-
ters.

The specimens here described are both females, and are perhaps
not quite full sized, though evidently adult. The male specimen,
according to Mr. Dillin's account, must have been at least twenty
inches (508 mm.) long, and had the tail more hairy than the two in
my possession. The detailed description follows :

Neotoma pennsylvanica sp. iiov. Pennsylvania Wood Rat.

Type No. 156 Collection of Witmer Stone, 9 South Mountain,
Cumberland County, Penna., Dec. 2, 1892. J. G. Dillin.

General color similar to that of N. floridana, plumbeous above
with a number of black hairs interspersed and a yellowish brown

Tail (Vert).

Hind Foot.

mm.

mm.

185

41

190

43

1898.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 17

undertone which is pure and bright on the sides of the head and
body, becoming almost a pinkish tint on the flanks. Feet and lower
surface pure white.

Tail densely hairy, surpassing in this respect any specimens of
either N. floridana or N. mexieana that I have seen. The color of
the tail is black above and pure white beneath, the line of demarc-
ation being very sharp ; viewed from directly above, the scales are
completely hidden by the hairs. The two females in my possession
measure as follows :

Length,
mm.

No. 1.56, Collection W. S 403

No. 1.57, " " 416

Comparing the skull of N. pennsylvanica with that of N. floridana
we find it larger and proportionately longer and narrower. The
upper surface is more nearly horizontal {i. e. not so much curved),
the frontal bones are much depressed along the frontal suture, the
outer edges next to the orbits forming decided ridges. The ptery-
goid processes are larger and converge more than in N. floridana,
so that the meso-pterygoid fossa is longer and narrower. The upper
margin of the infra-orbital foramen as viewed from above is also
much narrower in N. pennsylvanica. The teeth are rather heavier
than in N. floridana, and the distance between the anterior molar
and the incisor (from the alveolse) is relatively greater.

A table of cranial measurements follows, the measurements of a
male (No. 1,129) and female (No. 1,127) N. floridana from Gaines-
ville, Florida, Amer. Mas. Nat. Hist, collection, being given for
comparison : —

18 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

N. pennsyl-

vanica.

Coll. W. Stone

No. 157. No. 1.56

Occipito-nasal length 53 —

Basilar length (from foramen magnum to incisor). 449 54

Zygomatic breadth 27 27

Mastoid breadth 20 6 20

Interorbital constriction 7 66

Length of nasals 20 21

Foramen magnum to incisive foramen 31 —

Foramen magnum to palate 20"6 i —

Length of upper molar series (on alveolcc) 9*8 10

Length of incisive foramen 10 106

Length of mandible (symphysis to angle) 30'5 30

I
<< " " (symphysis to condyle) ' 322' 31

Coronoid process from angle 153 14'5

Ratios to Basilar Length.

Zygomatic breadth 60*1 j

Mastoid breadth 45*9 j

Nasals 44-5

Upper molar series (on alveolae) 2r8

Incisive foramen 22'2

Foramen magnum to incisive foramen 69 !

Foramen magnum to palate | 45"8 '

[1893.

N. floridana. |

Am.M

IS. Nat.

Hist.

No. 1127

No.1129

49-8 1

60

40-5

40

25-2

25

19

19-2

61

7-3

18-5

18-9

27-2

27

20

19-5

9-2

9

10-2

10-5

28-5

27-5

31

29-6

13-8

12-2

62-2

46-9

45-6

22-7

25-1

671

49-4

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 19

A NEW EXTINCT SPECIES OF CYPRINID^.

By E. D. Cope.

Dr. J. Lindalil, Geologist of Illinois, recently sent me some spec-
imens of fossil fishes which were found in Pulaski County, in the
southern part of that State. They are indifferently preserved on
lamina? of a papier kohl of lacustrine origin, which is frequently
impregnated with pyrite. Five specimens present characters of
value, but no one of them is sufficiently well preserved to furnish all
the necessary definitions. However, the specimens agree in all
points where comparisons can be made, so that I believe them to
pertain to a single species.

The characters displayed by this fish refer it to the Cyprinidae,
and to the neighborhood of the genus Leuciscus. In specimen No.
8,402 a cast of one of the inferior pharyngeal bones is preserved,
and this displacj's three obtusely conical teeth of an external row,
and a trace of a single smaller tooth of the internal row. There
was apparently another tooth of the external row inferior to and
larger than the others ; the four forming a series on a curved line
corresponding with the axis of the bone. The ajjices of these
teeth are not perfect. The fins do not present any conspicuous
spines; and the front of the dorsal fin is above the ventral ; mouth
terminal. These characters would refer this fish to Minnilus or
Cliola, but another character appears to distinguish it from these.
This is the absence of scales. In none of the dozen specimens sent
is any trace of scales to be found. As compared with the scaleless
genera, the American Meda, and the Old World Aulopyrie, the
present fish differs in the absence of conspicuous spines at the front
of the dorsal and anal fins. Supposing the absence of scales to be
normal, I refer the Illinois species to a new genus under the name
of AphelichtJiys. The species I describe as
Aphelichthys lindahlii sp. nov.

The specific characters are derived from four specimens. These

I tabulate as follows:

Fin rays.

Dorsal Vert. Caudal Vert. D. A. V. C.
No. 8,4(i2 1-5 12 11

No. 8,404 -^ 2] 13

No. 8,397 15 , 20

20 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

The caudal fin is emargiuate. The general form is moderately
slender, much as in our chubs of the genus Semotilus. The length
of the head measured above, enters the length to the caudal notch
about five times ; and when measured on the side about four times ;
and the depth at the front of the dorsal fin enters the same about
four times. The mouth is directed obliquely upward, and its rictus
appears to be nearly in the line of the anterior border of the orbit.
The paired fins are rather short, the pectorals not reaching the ven-
trals, nor the ventrals the anal (No. 8,404). The borders of the
dorsal and anal are straight (8,402, 8,404). The ribs and vertebral
spines are slender. The vertebx-al bodies have on each side a lon-
gitudinal median keel, which is bounded above and below by a
fossa.

Dimensions.

MM.

Length of superior surface of head of No. 8,402 15"5

Length of No. 8,404a to no|,ch of caudal fin 39*5

Length of head of No. 8,404a on side 9

Total length of No. 8,397 160

Length of head of No. 8,397 on side 41

Length from end of muzzle-to origin of dorsal fin (No. 8,397) 77

The earliest Cyprinidce in North America whose horizon is posi-
tively known are from the Idaho beds of Idaho and eastern Oregon,
which are of Pliocene age. It is likely that the lake deposit in
which the Aphelichthys lindahlii is found is not of an earlier age
than the Idaho beds. Species of existing genera of the family
occur, however, in the middle Miocene of Eurojie. I dedicate the
species to my friend Dr. Josua Lindahl, State Geologist of Illinois.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 21

THE BIRDS OBSERVED IN BRITISH COLUMBIA AND WASHINGTON
DURING SPRING AND SUMMER, 1892.

. BY SAMUEL N. RHOADS.

It is proposed to present in the following pages an ornithologi-
cal resume of a collecting trip made in Washington and British
Columbia, from March 24 to September 8, 1892, together with an
annotated list of the birds observed in those regions.

While ornithology claimed the greater part of my time, collec-
tions were also made of the mammals, reptiles, shells and plants of
the districts visited, concerning which further publications will prob-
ably appear in the " Proceedings."

The bibliography of Washington and British Columbian ornithol-
ogy is very meagre. Since the Cooper-Suckley Pacific Railroad
Reports, nothing of much value relating to Washiugton birds has
been published except the local lists of Mr. R. N. Lawrence.^
Publications relating especially to British Columbia birds may be
included under three titles: " The Naturalist in British Columbia,"
J. K. Lord, 1866 ; " On a Collection of Birds made by Mr. C. P.
Streator in British Columbia," etc., 1890, F. M. Chapman; and
"Check List of British Columbia Birds," John Fannin, 1891. Of
these the second is authoritative, and based on authentic specimens
a remark which in the end equally applies to Mr. Fannin's list, some
of his most questionable statements being given on the authority of
other persons and his mistakes the evident result of not having con-
sulted series of specimens from different localities. Lord's list, given
in the appendix to volume second of his work, if judged by the
strictest standard of the modern faunal list is nearly worthless in the
present connection. It is based on many observations and a few
specimens taken on both sides of the forty-ninth parallel, between
British Columbia and Washington. On this account I am forced to
ignore it. Mr. Chapman's list includes 160 species, while that of
Mr. Fannin enumerates 308. To their combined lists I am enabled
to add twenty-one species coming under my own observation, seven-
teen of which are in the collection. With these additions, the British
Columbia list, after throwing out two synonyms (jj^chmophonis
I ^ — —

lAuk, Jan. and Oct., 1892.

22

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1893.

clarkiKJ) and Dendrioca uestiva morcomi) and excluding Drijohates
puhescem from Fannin's list, numbers 326.
The additional species are :

SimorJnjnch ».s puxillus.
Charadriws dominieus fulvus.
CaUipepla californica vallicola.
Buho virf/iiiiaiim.
Bubo rin/'nn(i)im subarcticiis.
GhtKCuUiiin f/iioma.
Perisoreus canadensis capitalis.
Chondestes grammacus strigatus.
Zonotrichia quenila.
Spizella socialis.
PassereUa iliaca schidacea.

Clivicola ripavia.
Vireo huttoni obscurus.
Helviinthophila ruficapilla gid-

turalis.
Dendroica maculosa.
Sylvania pusilla.
Icteria virens longicauda.
Certhia familiaris montana,
Parus hudsonicus Columbia nus.
Turdus ustulatus suminsonii.
Turdus aonalaschkoe pallasii.

One of these, Parus Imdsonicus columbianus, is described as new,
a detailed notice of which, together with that of ten other species
given in this paper, appears in the Auk for January, 1893.

To the combined lists of Cooper, Suckley and Lawrence,
twenty-five species of Washington birds are added. These, with
those not included in Mr. Lawence's Gray's Harbor lists, are:

Cohjmbns holb(ellii.
Urinator arcticus.
Swiorhynchus pusiUus.
Synth/iboramphus antiquus.
Brachijramph as marmoratiis.'^
Cepphns coliimba.^
Uria troile californica.
Lams aryentatiis smithsonianus.
La /-UN cu lifornieus.^
Larn.-< delawarensls^
Larus brae hyrhynclms.
Phalacrocorax dilophus cincin-

atas.
Merga nser serrator.^
Lop h odi/tes cucullatus.^
Anas di.'<cors.
Spatula clypeata.^
Aix sponsa.^

Tringa canvtus.

Totanus flavipes.

Arenaria interpres.^

Hoematopus baclim an i.

Oreortyx pictus.^^

CaUipepla californica vallicola.

Den dragajJ us fran klin ii.^'^

Lagopus leucurus.

Cathartes aura.^

Circus hudsonius.

Falco peregrinus pealei.

Falco columbarius suckleyi.

Asio Wilson ian us.

Syrnium occidentale.

Megascopic asio hennicottii.^

Dryobates pubescens gairdneri.*

Sphyrapicus ruher.^

Cypseloides niger.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 23

Chcetura vauxii.

Aythya americana.
Histrion icus histrionwus.^^
Anser alhifrons gambeli.'^^
Branta canadensis hutchinsiL*
Branta canadensis, oceidentalis.*
Branta canadensis minima.
Olor buccinator.'^
Grxis me.vicana.
Porza n a caro Una.
Fulica americana.*

Pica pica hudsonica.

Acjelaiiis phcenicens.*

Progne subis.*

Vireo solitarius cassinii.*

Dendroica coronata.*

Sitta cayoline)isis nculeata.*

Sitta canadensis.*

Parus atricapilhs occidentalis.

Owing to the former incompleteness of bird material from the
northwest, the relationships of some western forms to their eastern
allies has remained a vexed question. The series in my possession
have, in some instances, supplied this deficiency and seem to justify
certain changes in nonienclature. Of these may be mentioned, 1.
CorvKs caarinus merged with the northwest form of C. amerlcanii.%
and conjointly separated from eastern C. ameriranus under the name
Corvus americanus cauriniis. 2, The relegation of Melospiza lineolnl
striata to synonymy. 3. The elevation of the northwest Warbling
Vireo to its former rank of Vireo gilvus sivainsonii. 4. St/lvania pus-
ilia p II eo lata ma.de synonymous yvith Sylvania jnisilla. 5. The possi-
bility that Turdiis aonalaschkce and Tardus aonalaschkae pallasil are
specifically distinct.

The localities where collections were made number fourteen. In
order of sequence they may thus be separately described :

1. Tacoma, Washington, March 4-28.

2. Nisqually Flats, Washington, March 29-Apri] 22.

The situation of Tacoma on Puget Sound is well known, that of
Nisqually Flats, fourteen miles southwest of it, at the mouth of the
river of the same name, though less known, is far more historic ground,
being part of the territory surveyed by the well known naturalists
of the Pacific Railroad Expedition of 1853-55. The country in
this region is moderately hilly and densely forest-clad, save where
intervening level, park-like areas indicate by their stunted vegeta-
tion the presence of vast beds of glacial gravel. The shore lines
of Puget Sound present an almost unbroken frontage of abrupt,
fir-clad slopes from 100 to 500 feet high ; many rocky islands, some
of goodly size, intervene and the uplands are well interspersed with

* Asterisk after species given by Suckley and Cooper.

24 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

lakes. Alluvial tide meadows, of which the Nisqually rank as
the most extensive, occasionally break the monotony of the shore.
These are grass grown, and, along the river banks, bear cottouwood,
aspen, vine-maple, willow and giant cedar, in some places joined by
bush and vine in an inextricable tangle. The tides fall from nine
to twelve feet below high water, exposing at Nisqually thousands of
acres of mud-flats which afford subsistence to myriads of water fowl.
During the winter of 1891-2 it did not snow, nor did the ground
freeze, at Tacoma. Twenty-three of the thirty April days spent in
this region were rainy ; only two were cloudless ; but the total pre-
cipitation for the month was less than four and a half inches.
There are no mountains in the near vicinity, the central Cascades
being forty miles distant.

3. Victoria, B. C, ) o ok

4. Goldstream,B.C.,i^^^^y'^-2^-

Goldstream is a ranch about twenty miles north of Victoria,
Vancouver Island. The features of the southern part of the island
are those of a rocky, open, hill-country, sometimes densely wooded
but often relieved by open stretches of a park-like character dotted
with lakes. An exceptional feature is the presence ot oaks, Quer-
cus garryana, which appear here and nowhere else in British Colum-
bia, nor in Washington. The mountains rarely attain an elevation
of 2,000 feet ; precipitation less and summer temperature greater
than on Puget Sound.

5. Lulu Island, B. C, May 26-June 1.

A delta of the Frazer River, two and a half feet below neap
tides, dyked throughout and covered with grass, bushes and isolated
higher tracts of woodland. Much of the laud is fertile and well
cultivated.

6. Ashcroft, B. C, June 2-12.

Ashcroft is on the northernmost frontier of the Great Basin or
arid upper Sonoran region, or, as Dr. Merriam rightly terms it, in
the area of "Transition " from that life-region to the Boreal Zone.
British Columbia rainfall is here at its minimum, and summer tem-
perature at its maximum. Fauna and flora coincide remarkably
with those of Arizona found above an elevation of 4,000 feet, the
mountains about Ashcroft rarely reaching that altitude. Ashcroft
is on the west bank of the Thompson River, in a narrow valley,
1,500 feet above the sea, hemmed in by mountains thinly clad with

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 25

bunch grass, cacti, sage brush aud rose bushes, and bearing on their
summits open forests of fir and pine.

7. Bonaparte, B. C, June 13-17.

The first stopping place on the famous Cariboo Road which con-
nects Ashcroft with the northern mining regions, and twenty miles
away from the latter place. Bonaparte is at the southern limit of
the true Boreal region and the northern limit of abundant cacti and
sage brush. Its mean elevation is 1,000 feet higher than Ashcroft.
Salpincte.9 obsoletus, Tijranuiis vertiealis, S((ijorni'< mi/a and Ideriis
bullockii draw the line at this point.

8. Clinton, B. C, } ^ i« T i 7

9. Lac La Hache, B. C, i ^""^ ^^"^^^^ ^-

Clinton, thirty miles north of Ashcroft, rests in a green valley at
the foot of outlying spurs of the Cascades. Its elevation is about
2,500 feet. It is the first step into the typical Boreal environment
of pine, fir, spruce, juniper and aspen, preparing one for the upland
lake plateaus in which lakes La Hache and Quesnel form a con-
spicuous feature.

To reach La Hache from Clinton the stage line passes for twenty
miles over a broad, wooded ridge, 4,000 to 5,000 feet high, and
descends again to 2,400 feet in the La Hache Valley. Both locali-
ties are semi-arid, well wooded, devoid of much under-growth, cov-
ered with nutritious grasses and thickly dotted with alkaline and
fresh-water lakes which have no visible outlet. The climate is not
rigorous and singularly equable for the latitude.

Lac La Hache was the northern terminus of my journey, 200
miles north of the United States, in latitude 52°.

10. Kamloops, B.C., July 12-15.

Fifty miles east of Ashcroft at head of Kamloops Lake. Simi-
lar in situation and environment to Ashcroft Avith slightly greater
rainfall. The border of the arid region continues eastwardly along
the Canadian Pacific Kailway, from Kamloops, fifty miles, nearly
to Salmon River, where it descends directly south to the head of
Okanagan Lake, thence east to the foot of the Gold Range which
bounds it on that side to within twenty miles of the United States.
At this point it widens suddenly, extending eastwardly to and
beyond the valley of the Columbia River.

il. Sicamous, k C, July 16-19.

A railroad Junction of the Canadian Pacific Railway with the
Shuswap and Okanagan branch which runs fifty miles south into

26 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

the best agricultural valley of the Province. Sicamous overlooks
Shuswap Lake, into which it is nearly crowded by the surrounding
mountains that here flank the western slopes of the Gold Range.
The mountains are rugged, densely wooded, and those above 5,000
feet are topped with snow. We begin here to have a reproduction of
the climatic conditions which, in the more easterly Selkirk Range,
correspond so nearly to those of the west slopes of the Cascades.

12. Vernon, B. C, July 21-August 11.

Terminus of Okanagan and Shuswap railway, in the midst of the
famous Spulamacheen Valley. Rainfall is sufficient to mature sta-
ple crops without irrigation. Vernon is surrounded by a rolling,
open, mountainous country with wooded elevations. The variety
and abundance of its fauna and flora are astonishing. Mean eleva-
tion of the valley is 1,100 feet, that of the surrounding mountains
2,500 to 3,000 feet. Climate, that of northern Pennsylvania, with
less rainfall.

13. Nelson, B. C, August 16-23.

A mining town in the southern Selkirks on the west shore of
Kootenay Lake. Situated among rugged, cliflT-like mountains at
1,200 feet. While its climate is less moist than that of the west
slope, the abundant vegetation is characteristic of the Selkirks.

14. Field, B. C, August 27-September 3.

In the central Rocky Mountains, 5,000 feet above the sea and on
the line of the Canadian Pacific Railway, through Kicking Horse
Pass, eight miles west of the eastern boundary of British Columbia
and thirty miles east of the Columbia River. The scenery around
Field is a fitting climax to that which greets the eye from every
point of vantage in the mountain-burdened Province of British
Columbia. From boreal to alpine is a comparatively short step in
the natural history of Field.

In general, the faunal position of those parts of Puget Sound,
South Vancouver Island and Lulu Island visited by me is simple,
but in British Columbia, as a whole, it is quite complex. The for-
mer localities are included in the typical northwest coast region of
excessive rainfall which varies from sixty to one hundred inches
yearly in the localities where collections were made. The coast
region, while essentially boreal in character, possesses many ele-
ments peculiar to itself, due to moisture, cloudy skies, temperate and
equable climate and the density of the resulting vegetation. It also
aff^ords shelter for some species which have been considered repre-

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 27

sentative of Californian and Sonoran sub-regions, such as Glauci-
dium gnoma calijornkmm, Sijru'unn occidentale, Coceyzus americanus
oceidentalis, Vireo hutfoni (^obsennis), Salpinctes ohsoletax, and Psal-
tnparus inmimus. There is also a slight intermingling element of
typical eastern forms in the central and northerly part of the Pacific
coast fauna due to similarity of its climate to that of the North
Atlantic coast and the accessibility of the region to migrants from
the northwest interior and Alaska. Thus we have Spizella socialis,
Empidonax pusillus tmUlii, Dendroica coronata, Spinus tristis, Colap-
tes auratus (?) and Si/lvcmia pudUa breeding on Vancouver Island,
while in the interior of British Columbia, east of the Cascades, these
are wholly, or for the most part, replaced hy Spizella socialis arizonoe,
Empidonax pu8illi(-<!, Dctidroica auduboni and Colapte^ cafer, Spinus
tristis appearing (?) to be absent.

As a whole, the province of British Columbia includes a diversity
of fauna] characters which no single geographic area in America
can match. As a result it may further boast of a longer list of
summer residents than any equal area included in the A. O. U.
check list limits. Approximately these number 330 in British Col-
umbia. In the rest of British America, an area ten times larger^
it is about 365 ; in the Middle States, 177, and in the United
States east of the Mississippi, 300. This exceptional showing is
brought about by a conjunction, intrusion and overlapping of the
Arctic, Boreal and Transition life zones. It is further complicated
by the westerly extension of Atlantic-boreal forms to the Pacific,
the intrusion of upper Sonoran species into the central, arid region,
the straggling of Pacific coast forms across the Cascades, the sojourn
of Arctic species on the higher mountains and " barren grounds "
of the north and the southward migration of all, including land and
marine species of the polar regions, across common territory. This
cosmopolitan feature of British Columbian biology makes the study
of its zoogeography both difficult and fascinating. Mr. Chapman
has pointed out some of these peculiarities in his paper on the
Streator collection, and considering that he had no personal acquain-
tance with the country, his deductions are remarkably just. After
what has been said on the subject, however, we cannot admit that
in British Columbia "faunal lines are not so complicated " as in.
"northern California," for they are infinitely more so. Mr. Chapman
has drawn close lines for the eastern boundary of the habitat of
so-called " coast forms," but of the thirty-one species enumerated

28 TROCEEDINGS OK THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

by him as limited thereto, ten: — Dendragapus obscurus ftdigiiiosu-'',
Bonasa nmhellm sabini, Megascops a-<io kennicottii, Bubo virghdanus
saturutux, Colaptfs cafer sataratior, Jinico hyemalis oregonux, Melo^piza
fasciata guttata, TroglodifteH hieinalis paclficus, Regnlus satrapa oliva-
ceus and Turdus aonalaschkcp, are represented in various localities
between and including the Cascades and the Rockies. Of those
restricted by him to territory east of the Cascades, Dendragapus
franklinii, Bona'<a nmheJlus togafa, Bubo nr go nanus {f), Falco pere-
grinus anaium, Falco colntnbarhi", Aniinodtxonns sandu'ieJien.^is alau-
dintis and Sylvania pu-^il/a, are also found west of them.

It is thus seen that coast and interior species overlap across wide
areas. This is probably due less to migration than to isolated
reproduction of eastern and western environments in alternate sec-
tions of country induced by altitude, the Japan current, prevailing
winds, parallel and intervening mountain ranges and the projection
of an arid Transito-Sonoran area, 200 miles wide and 100 long,
into the midst of the southern section of the Province. I am
nowise convinced that we are to look east or west for an annual
supply of those birds assigned to so-called "eastern or western
races " which are found in out-of-the-way or unlooked-for localities
in British Columbia. On the contrary, it is probable they are the
native born product of similar isolated environments and, while of
the same ancestral stock, have become so isolated by changes in the
climate and topography of intervening territory. In other cases
they will be found, by a more thorough exploration of the country,
to be connected with the type habitat by narrow lines of distribu-
tion, projecting south and west from Alaska and Great Slave Lake
and east and west through the low passes of the Cascades and
Northern Rockies. Such aspects of distribution have little to do
with the mere annual north and south movement which we call
migration ; evolution of environment and evolution in accord with
environment are the responsible factors. These have made possible
the occurrence of Spizella socialis on Vancouver Island and of Bubo
virginianus saturatus in Labrador, each represented over a vast
intervening territory by a distinct race. The migration of eastern
forms resident in southern British Columbia is undoubtedly over an
independent Great Basin route and not, as Mr. Chapman surmises,
along the western edge of the Great Plains.

To Edwards Bros, of Tacoma, Messrs Fannin, Maynard and
Lindley of Victoria, the Messrs McKinley of Lac La Hache, and Mr.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 29

Pound of Vernon, British Columbia, my sincere thanks are due for
professional and friendly courtesies received. Also to Messrs
R. Ridgway of the Smithsonian Institution, and J. A. Allen of
the American Museum of Natural History of New York, for loan of
material for the identification of specimens, and to Mr. Witmer Stone
of Philadelphia, for the care of the collections during my absence, and
aid in their identification. I wish further to particularly acknowl-
edge the kindly loan of 200 specimens collected by my companions,
Messrs G. S. Morris and J. W. Evans, during our sojourn together
in Washington and Vancouver Island.

The collection, from which the following list, for the most part, is
compiled, numbers 1300 specimens. An asterisk precedes the name
of species not represented in the collection. Unless otherwise speci-
fied, the annotations refer to the status of the species in both
Washington and British Columbia. A list, giving the number of each
sj^ecies in the collection and locality of capture, will be found at
the end of the paper.

•1. ^chmophorus occidentalis. Western (irebe.

Shores of Puget Sound and Vancouver Island in April and May,
Lac La Hache, July. Abundant resident in British Columbia.

*2. Colymbus holboellii. Ilolboell's (irebe.

Nisqually in April. Tolerably abundant on lakes of British
Columbia interior in summer.

3. Colymbus auritus. Horned Grebe.

Nisqually in April. Breeds on interior lakes as far south as
Ashcroft.

4. Podilymbus podiceps. Pied-billed Grebe.

Breeds on Vancouver Island and throughout mainland of British
Columbia.

5. TJrinator imber. Loon.

An abundant resident everywhere.

6. TJrinator arcticus, Black-throated Loon.

A female was secured at Nisqually and others noted there during
early April.
'7. *Urinator paciflcus. Pacific Loon.

Two mounted specimens from near Taconia are in the collection
of Edwards Bros., of that city.

30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

*8. Urinator lumme. Red-throated Loon.

Specimens examined were from the coast as far soutli as Tacoma.
None met with inland.
*9. Lunda cirrhata. Tufted Puffin,

Abundant on coast and Islands of Straits of Fuca and Gulf of
Georgia. Not noted on Puget Sound.
*10. Ptychoramphus aleuticus. Cassin's Auklet.

Specimens from Puget Sound in Edwards Bros, collection.
*11. Simorhynchus pusillus (?). Least Auklet.

A straggler on Puget Sound — Ed wards Bros.^

12. Synthliboramphus antiquus. Ancient Murrelet.

A specimen from the northwest coast of Vancouver Island, taken
by W. S. Lindley, is in the collection.

13, Brachyramphus marmoratus. Marbled Murrelet.
Abundant resident on Puget Sound and Gulf of Georgia.

*14. Cepphus columba. Pigeon (Tuillemot.

Abundant. Same distribution as last.
*15. Uria troile californipa. California Mune.

A pair seen on Puget Sound near Nisqually.

16. Larus glaucescens. Glaucous-winged Gull,
Abound in the Sound and sea-coast harbors.

17. Larus occidentalis. Western Gull.
Associates abundantly with preceding.

-••18. Larus argentatus smithsonianus. American Herring Gull.
Less abundant than preceding species.

19. Larus californicus. California Gull.

jNIore abundant than L. a. smithsonianus.

20. Larus delawarensis. Ring-billed Gull.

Abundantly associating with next species in all sea-coast harbors
and inlets.

21. Larus brachyrhynchus. .-^hort-billed Gull.
The most abundant of the Pacific Larida'.

22. Larus Philadelphia. Bonaparte's Gull.

Migrating and feeding in dense flocks over sea-coast harbors and
river mouths the latter part of April. Breed about interior lakes
and rivers of British Columbia.

lAuk, Januaiy, 1893.

1893.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 31

»23. Sterna — T

Two Terns were seen on the Columbia River, at the head of
upper Arrow Lake, in August. At first they resembled Larusphil-
adelphia, but a nearer approach showed them to be Terns, probably
Sterna paraducea.

•24. Phalacrocorax dilophus cinoinatus. White-crested Cormorant.
*25. Phalacrocorax pelagicus robustus. Violet-green Cormorant.

Edw^ards Bros, have secured both species on Puget Sound. I
have seen one, if not both, on the coast of Vancouver Island.

■26. Pelecanus erythrorhynchos. American AVhite Pelican.

Occasional as far north as Stewart's Lake and Peace River, Brit-
ish Columbia, according to Mr. G. Hamilton, an ex-Factor of Fort
James. I was told by the McKinley Bros, that " white pelicans "
were formerly numerous " in the migrations " at La Hache, Williams
and Quesnel Lakes. I saw a fine male in the shop of Mr. Pound,
at Vernon, which was shot this spring on Okanagan Lake. From
accounts, its distribution in British Columbia, once general, is
yearly becoming restricted to the southern districts. Puget Sound,
Edwards Bros.

"■27. Pelecanus californicus. California Brown Pelican.

This species has been seen by Mr. Hamilton on La Hache and
Williams Lakes in company with the preceding. Mr. J. F. Brown,
of Empire Valley, has noted them in the Chilcotin district, British
Columbia. I did not meet with either species. Tacoma, Edwards
Bros.

28. Merganser americanus. American Merganser.

29. Merganser serrator. Red-breasted Merganser.

On the coast there was little difference in the abundance of these
resident species. Americanus was rare in the interior, where both
were breeding.

''30 Lophodytes cucullatus. Hooded Mergan.-er.

Evenly distributed everywhere, but nowhere abundant.
*31. Anas boschas. Mallard.

Mallards were abundant and resident in every locality below
4,000 feet elevation.
*32. Anas strepera. (iadwall.

Rare. Specimens from Puget Sound in Edwards Bros, collec-
tion.

32 PROCEEDINUS OK Tll|.; ACADKMY OK [1893.

33. Alias americann. l>iilil|i;ito.

\'ery jibuiulant on PaciHc* Coast ami Paget Sound in spring.
Hivedinu' in the iiitoi-ioi- lako districts. Aslioroft, Clinton, T>ac La
Iladu'.

34. Anas oarolineiisis. (iici'n-wiiif; 'I'oal.

Assonihlini:- in inoredible numbers on the Hats of Nisqually
River. Kosortiuii- with others to the interior in summer.

35. Anas discors. I'luc wins; Teal.

Mr. Fannin calls this a " very rare bird " in British Columbia. I
found it breeding about several of the small lakes in the vicinity of
Tjac La Hache. A nuile, female and three young were secured.

36. Anas cyauopteia. ('imiiimoii 'I'omI.

To Mr. I'^annin's two records of this species I can add several.
Ill the smaller, more retired, woodlaml lakes along the Cariboo
Road above Clinton, I frequently Unshed the Cinnamon Teal.
Only one specimen was secured. ^Ir. I). ^LcKinley, Lac La Hache,
says the " red teal " breeds sparingly in that neighborhood every
year.

37. Spatula clypeata. Shoveller.

Numerous on Puget Sound in s|)ring. A few found breeding
along the Cariboo Road.

38. Dafila acuta, rintail.

Abundant in all coast waters during migrations; breeding
throughout the interior.
*39. Aix sponsa. Woinl IMu-K.

Karely met with. Pugel Simnd specimens in Ivlwards Pros,
museum.

40. Aythya americana. lUvI lu-ml.

Reported as a rare duck in the vicinity of Tacoma, by Edwards
Bros. A few were found breeding with .1. ralli!<iieria about an
alkali lake luar Lac La Hache.

41. Aythya vallisneria. Cnnv;!* bsiok.

Sparingly distributed over the entire country and summering on
the more inaccessible lakes of the northern interior.

'42. Aythya inarila nearotica. .Xiuoiioini Soiinp Duok.

Plentifully distributed. .\ snmiuer resident east of Cascades in
all parts visited.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCKS OK I'HILAIJKI.I'HI A. 38

'43. Aythya affinis. Lesser Scaup Duck.

Kiirc. A specimen iu Edwards Bros, collection and one in the
Briti.sh Columbia Museum, at Victoria, belong to this species.

44. Glaucionetta clangula americana. Aiueiican Golden Kye.

Several seen at Ni^^qually. In the interior an abundant summer
resident. They occasionally nest on the ground.

45. Glaucionetta islandica. Harrow's Golden Eye.

Two specimens collected on Puget Sound by Jos. Edwards, who
pronounces them to be rare. In the eastern Cascade region they
asssociate and breed with G. clangula amerienna in the proportion
of one to three.

46. Charitonetta albeola. liufHe Head.

Same distribution as Glaucionetta clangula americana.
*47. Clangula hyemalis. Old Squaw.

A few seen on the Vancouver Island coast. Puget Sound ;
Edwards Bros.

*48. Histrionicus histrionicus. Harleiiuin I>uck.

Rare in Puget Sound, P^dwards 15ros. Rare at Lac La Hache,
Duncan McKinley.

49. Oidemia amerioaua. American Scoter.

A few noted at Nisqually among flocks of 0. deglandi.

*.50. Oidemia deglandi. White-winged Scoter.

j\[ost abundant of the genus, both on the coast and mainland
interior. I am convinced it breeds as far south as 150-Mile House,
Cariboo Road, individuals being .seen at Lac I>a Hache July 4.

*51. Oidemia perspicillata. Surf Scoter.

Fairly abundant on coast sounds and harbors during my stay.
"'52. Erismatura rubida. Kuddy Duck.

Sparingly represented on the interior lakes during sunnner.
Not met with on coast. Puget Sound, I{!dwards Bros.

■••53. Anser albifrons gambeli. American White-fronte<l (ioose.

A few seen at Nisqually are referable to this species. Tacoma,
Edwards Bros. It is not probable that they breed on Puget Sound.
54. Branta canadensis. Canada Goose.

In flocks on the mud flats of Puget Sound during April. Accord-
ing to the McKinleys it breeds about the mainland lakes and is dis-
tinguished from smaller races by the name of " Honker." One

34 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

specimen shot at Nisqually is referable to this species, but resembles
occidentalls in color of lower parts.

55. Branta canadensis hutchinsii. Hutchin's Goose.

66. Branta canadensis occidentalls. White-cheeked Goose.

*57. Branta canadensis minima. Cackling Goose.

Intergrades connect any series of Washington birds of this group
so completely that it is impossible to class every individual by its
size or coloration. Three specimens obtained from the same
flock may be severally referred to Imtehinsii and occidentalis, one
of them being intermediate between Imtehinsii and occidentalls and
another between huichinsii and minima. All the Canada geese
obtained on my trip were secured at Nisqually in April and were
migrants. If Mr. Fannin's statements are based on authentic
records and on specimens taken in the proper season, canadensis and
hutchinsii breed in the same localities on the mainland, a state of
affairs unknown east of the Rockies and inconsistent with their
classification as it now stands in the books. The bulk of Pacific
coast skins examined present a most puzzling constancy in their inter-
mediate size coupled with an inconstancy of coloration which makes
their classification by the most adjustable formula of little value.

The faunal position of Puget Sound and the Gulf of Georgia
makes them the winter resort not only of canadensis but of all its
three ofishoots, thus presenting an array of combinations in winter
which the magic wand of migration alone can classify. Until we
follow and secure them on their breeding grounds the true relation-
ships of the Branta canadensis group in British Columbia will
remain a mystery. Bat it is probable it will resolve itself at that sea-
son into a case of parallel intergradation, occidentalis east of the
Cascades insensibly diminishing into minima, and west of the Cas-
cades, canadensis merging into hutchinsii, as they severally approach
the Arctic Circle.

*58. Branta nigricans. Black Brant.

Numerous on the larger bodies of salt water during March and
April.

•■59. Olor columbianus. Whistling Swan.

Puget Sound, Edwards Bros. ; Vancouver Island, W. Lindley ;
Vernon, W. C. Pound ; La Hache and Williams Lakes (breeds),
G. Hamilton.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 35

*60. Olor buccinator. - Trumpeter Swan.

Six Trumpeters were seen at Nisqually. They migrate along the
Columbia and visit Lac La Hache in fall.

*61. Botaurus lentiginosus. American Bittern.

Noted only in the interior of British Columbia where it breeds.

62. Ardea herodias. Great Blue Heron.

Abounds on the coast. Contrary to Mr. Fannin's experience, I
was struck by the total absence of this heron from the interior, none
being seen or heard of An old male from Nisqually is darker on
sides of neck than any other examples examined. Mr. Chapman
informs me that it is possible, from imperfect specimens sent to the
American Museum of Natural History from the Queen Charlotte
Islands, that a darker race inhabits the region of maximum rainfall
on the Pacific coast. Specimens in the Victoria Museum, from
Vancouver Island, neither strengthen nor disprove this theory.

-■■■63. Grus canadensis. Little Brown Crane.

Passing in flocks along the shores of Puget Sound with the next
species. Heard of, but not seen, in the interior of British Columbia.
*64. Grus mexicana. Sandhill Crane.

Breeding in isolated pairs through the lake region of British
Columbia. Young found in early July.

•■65. Rallus virginianus. Virginia Rail.

Tacoma, Edwards Bros. ; Victoria, A. J. Maynard.
66. Porzana Carolina. Sora.

Breeding commonly throughout British Columbia. Not seen in
Washington.

*67. Fulica americana. American Coot.

Oftener heard than seen about the lakes of coast and interior,
where they breed.
68. Crymophilus fulicarius. Kyil Phalarope.

None seen. A female in the collection was taken by Mr. Lindley
near Victoria.
*69. Gallinago delicata. Wilson's Snipe.

Abundant in spring along the coast. Breeds sparingly in the
east Cascade region.
*70. Macrorhamphus scolopaceus. Long-billed Dowitcher.

A few seen among flocks of Tringas at Nisqually.

36 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

*71. Tringa canutus. Knot.

Sparingly, associated with preceding during spring migration
along the coast.

72. Tringa minutilla. Least Sandpiper.

Six seen and two shot at Nelson. Breed sparingly by the lakes
of Okanagan Valley and Rocky Mountain districts. Migrant on
coast of Washington and Vancouver Island.

73. Tringa alpina pacifica. Red-backed Sandpiper.

Abundant about coast waters in spring. None seen during
breeding season.

74. Ereunetes occidentalis. AVestern Sandpiper.

Common on coast in spring and breeding in suitable parts of the
interior. Two male specimens from Tacoma and Victoria are
smaller than the minimum measurements assigned by Mr. Ridgway
to occidentalis but their bills exceed the average for j:)».«i/^us. Color-
ation in all is that of occidentalis. Perhaps, if Mr. Chapman's
specimen of " pusilhts," taken at Ducks, British Columbia, shows
rusty tinge of upper parts it may be considered a dwarf example
of the western species.

75. Totanus melanoleucus. Greater Yellow Legs.

Found along coast during migrations. Breeding about inland
lakes as far south as Clinton. At this season both sexes stand sen-
tinel on the tops of trees in the vicinity of the nest, rarely alighting
on the ground during the presence of an intruder. The newly
fledged young often follow the example of their parents in this
respect. From this elevated position the male keeps up an inces-
sant clamor throughout the day. One series of notes, uttered only
during periods of fancied security, is peculiar and unquestionably
a love song.

'=76. Totanus flavipes. Yellow Legs.

One seen (?) at Nisqually. Specimen seen in central British Col-
umbia.

77. Actitis macularia. Spotted Sandpiper.

Two seen on the shores of Puget Sound. Rare at Tacoma.
Fairly abundant about all interior lakes.

78. Numenius longirostris. Long-billed Curlew.

Seen at Victoria and Lulu Island in May. Breeding at Lac La
Hache and Vernon.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 37

*79. Numenius hudsonicus. Hudsonian Curlew,

Several were noted on Tacoma flats and one near Victoria.
Specimens in collection of Edwards Bros.

80. Charadrius dominicus fulvus. Pacific tiolden Plover.

A male, shot in winter at Victoria by Mr. Lindley, may be pro-
visionally referred to this subspecies. Mr. Fannin does not recog-
nize the existence of it in his list. Until more material is secured
it remains an open question whether Julvns migrates along the
Pacific coast of America.

81. Aegialitis vocifera. KiMeer.

Heard migrating on the coast, where it is considered rare by
Edwards Bros. Breeds sparingly about inland lakes as far as 53°.
Nowhere abundant.

*82. Arenaria interpres. Turnstone.

Puget Sound, Edwards Bros. None seen alive.

*83- Haematopus bachmani. Black Oyster Catcher.

Islands of Gulf of Georgia. Puget Sound, Edwards Bros.

■84. Oreortyx pictus. Mountain I'urtridge.

A few seen at Nisqually. Tacoma, Edwards Bros. The vicinity
of Puget Sound at present is debatable ground between the intro-
duced and indigenous birds of this species. The northern limit of
Oreortyx pictus in Washington, prior to the introduction of Cali-
fornia and Oregon birds probably reached the southern shores of
Puget Sound. At present they reside in suitable places over east-
ern Washington, southern Vancouver Island and the southern Cas-
cade region of British Columbia.

85. Callipepla californica. California Partridge.

86. Callipepla californica vallicola. Valley Partridge.

A male, taken at Nisqually, is a nearly typical vallicola. Three
males from Vancouver Island are intermediate between californica
and vallicola, but agree more nearly with the latter. So complete
has been the admixture of native with introduced birds of both
forms from California that typical exam})les of either are a rarity.
One, if not both, is indigenous to the coast and interior valleys of cer-
tain parts of Washington, but to what extent it will now be impos-
sible to determine. In common with the preceding species and two
species of Asiatic Pheasant, both California and Valley Quail have

38 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

become naturalized and abundant throughout the settled parts of
Vancouver Island.

87. Dendragapus obscurus faliginosus. Sooty Clrouse.

Abundant everywhere and at all elevations west of the Cascades.
This form reappears on the higher areas of increased rainfall
between the Rocky Mountains and Cascades in British Columbia.

88. Dendragapus obscurus riohardsonii. Richardson's Grouse.
Everywhere throughout the interior of British Columbia. A

complete series of this race from all parts of British Columbia com-
pared with a like series of fuliginosns will be likely to present cer-
tain facts of distribution and differentiation quite at variance with
our present view of the subject.

89. Dendragapus franklinii. Franklin's Grouse.

Numerous on the slopes and summits of the higher mountains of
the mainland to and including the Cascades and Rockies. On the
Cascades as far south as Nachess Pass, Washington.

90. Bonasa umbellus togata. Canadian RuflFed Grouse.

91. Bonasa umbellus sabini. Oregon RuflFed Grouse.

Specimens from districts between Cascade and Rocky Mountains
in British Columbia are pretty uniformly colored, one male alone
showing red phase of sabini. Intermediates nearly connect the grayest
coast specimens of sabini with darkest examples of togata from the
interior. A male sabini from Lulu Island has a nearly typical
togata tail. I find no eastern specimens in the Academy's collection
comparable in grayness with any from British Columbia or Wash-
ington.

*92. Bonasa umbellus umbelloides. Gray Ruflfed Grouse.

Of the Ruffed Grouse found in the Rocky Mountains at Field I
failed to secure specimens. Mr. Fannin classes them a.s umbelloide''.

93. Lagopus rupestris. Rook Ptarmigan.

Summits of Cascades, Clinton, Lac La Hache ; also on summits
of Rocky Mountains, Field, Hector, Ottertail. Abundant, descend-
ing to 4,000 feet in winter.

*94. Lagopus leucurus. White-tailed Ptarmigan.

Residents inform me this species is also found sparingly in winter
in Kicking Horse Pass, British Columbia. One obtained at Hector
examined. Reported from Soues Mountain, Clinton, by Mr. Jos.
Smith, also from Mount Tacoma, Washington ; Edwards Bros.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 39

95. Pediocaetes phasianellus columbianus. Columbian Sharp-tailed Grouse.
AbouudiDg in central British Columbia. This Grouse is not

essentially a plain-haunting bird. I found them frequent on the
densely wooded plateau extending from Clinton to 108-Mile House,
Cariboo Road in country 5,000 feet above the sea level.

96. Columba fasciata. Band-tail Pigeon.

Found at Tacoma, Vancouver Island and Lulu Island. Not met
with elsewhere nor reported from east of Cascades.

97. Zenaidura macroura. Mourning Dove.

Sparingly represented in interior of British Columbia as far
north as Clinton.
•'98. Pseudogryphus californianus. California Vulture.

Seen on Lulu Island as late as " three or four years ago " by Mr.
W. London. " None seen since, used to be common."

*99. Cathartes aura. Turkey Vulture.

Numerous on Puget Sound. In greatly diminished numbers over
the whole Province of British Columbia as far north as Lac La
Hache.

100. Circus hudsonius. Marsh Hawk.

Noted at every stopping place. Nowhere abundant.

101. Accipiter velox. Sharp-shinned Hawk.

Cosmpolitan but not abundant.

102. Acciptier cooperi. Cooper's Hawk.

Distribution general. Breeding at Lac La Hache. Rocky Moun-
tains, 7,000 feet. Rare.
*103. Accipiter atricapillus. American Goshawk.

Seen only at Vernon.
*104. Buteo borealis calurus. Western Red Tail.

Distribution and abundance like that of the eastern form. Breed-
ing near the summits of Rockies at Field.
*105. Buteo lineatus elegans. Red-bellied Hawk.

Hawks, presumably of this species, were thrice seen in the Brit-
ish Columbia interior.
106. Buteo swainsoni, Swainson's Hawk.

Breeds in the arid, mountainous interior. In July I found them
abundant on the higher unwooded elevations at the head of Okana-
gan Lake near Vernon. One evening they congregated about the

40 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

summit of a rocky eminence, 3,000 feet above the lake, to the num-
ber of three or four hundred, every large boulder seating one or
more birds, and many others sitting contentedly on the flat ground.
Xinety per cent of those which flew near me were in the dark phases
of plumage, some of them appearing uniformly black as they swept
past. Three females secured had the crop stufied exclusively with
grasshoppers.
107. Archibuteo lagopus sancti-johannis. American Rough-legged Hawk.

One seen at Vernon, and a specimen seen at the same place in the
collection of Mr. Pound. Another, shot on Vancouver Island, is in
the possession of Mr. Lindley, of Victoria. Considered a very rare
bird on the Pacific Coast.

*108. Aquila chrysaetos. Golden Eagle.

Seen two or three times in the interior mountains. As rare in
British Columbia as on the Atlantic seaboard.

*109. Haliaeetus leucocephalus. Bald Eagle.

As omnipresent in British Columbia and Washington as the lakes
and streams.

*110. Falco peregrinus anatum. Duck Hawk.

Rare. I refer two specimens seen east of the Cascades to this
species. They reach the Pacific.
*111. Falco peregrinus pealei. Peale's Falcon.

^Mounted specimens seen in the shop of Mr, Inglis, of Vancouver,
British Columbia. Duck Hawks of both (?) races were seen at
Ni.squally.

112. Falco columbarius. Pigeon Hawk.

A mated pair shot at Lac La Hache.

113. Falco columbarius suckleyi. Black Merlin.

Examples seen on the coast should be classed under this name,
though Mr. Fannin has found both west of the Cascades. A speci-
men from Victoria is in the collection.

114. Falco richardsonii. Richardson's Merlin.

One shot at the head of Okanagan Lake.

115. Falco sparverius. American Sparrow Hawk.

Everywhere the most abundant Raptore.
*116. Pandion haliaetus carolinensis. American Osprey.

Wherever fish abound in the northwest these fishermen have
"preempted the claim."

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 41

*117. Asio wilsonfanus. Long-eared Owl.

Rare everywhere, but likely to turn up anywhere in Washington
or British Cohimbia. Tacoma, Edwards Bros.
118. Asio accipitrinus. Short-eared Owl.

Vancouver and Luhi Islands ; at Nisqually and about the lakes
of the interior.
*119. Syrnium occidentale. Spotted Owl.

A specimen taken near Tacoma by Edwards Bros, is in the col-
lection. Others have been seen and taken in that vicinity.

*120. Scotiaptex cinerea. Great (iray Owl.

One shot near Vernon was mounted by Mr. Pound last year.

121. Nyctala acadica. Saw-whet Owl.

An immature male taken at Vernon in July. Specimens
mounted in the collections of gentlemen at Victoria, Vancouver
and Tacoma.

122. Megascops asio kennicottii. Kennicott's Owl.

I obtained a male from Mr. Lindley, of A'ictoria. This Owl
entirely escaped notice during my trip.

123. Bubo virginianus. Great Horned Owl.

124. Bubo virginianus subarcticus. AVestern Horned Owl.
*125. Bubo virginianus arcticus . Arctic Horned Owl.
126. Bubo virginianus saturatus. Dusky Horned Owl.

A discussion of the Horned Owls of Washington and British
Columbia will be found in the article in the Auk already referred
to. It is probable that all the races of Bubo virginianus are to be
found in British Columbia.
*127. Surnia ulula caparoch. Hawk Owl.

Vancouver Island, W. F. Lindley. Vernon, W. C. Pound.
*128. Speotyto cunicularia hypogaea. Burrowing Owl.

A special trip was made in the vicinity of Kamloops and Ash-
croft for this species, but no trace remained of the colonies once
existing there. The last pair known to remain in that locality
lived in a badger's burrow on the bank of Thompson River, near
the ferryman's house. None have been seen at Kamloops or Ash-
croft since 1890.
129. Glaucidium gnoma. Pygmy Owl.

Interior British Columbia birds secured at Vernon are true
gnoma. ]\Ir. Pound says they winter there.

42 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

130. Glaucidium gnoma califomicum. California Pygmy Owl.
Numerous w(;st of Cascades.

131. Ceryle alcyon. Kingfisher.

Cosmopolitan and re.sideut on the coast all winter.

132. Dryobates villosus leucomelas. Northern Hairy Woodpecker.

In a series of eight skins, one, a young female, lacks the white
spotting on wing coverts characteristic of leucomelas. It is also
much smaller than the rest, whose measurements correspond to those
given by Mr. Ridgway for leucomelas.

133. Dryobates villosus harrisii. Harris's AVooilpecker.

Three, of nine specimens, have unspotted wing coverts, the rest
are spotted in varying degrees but less so than darkest examples of
villosus. An adult male from Nisqually, with unspotted wing cov-
erts, lacks the sooty suffusion of under parts in a remarkable
degree.

134. Dryobates pubescens oreoecus. Batchelder's Woodpecker.

Mr. Fannin includes D. pubescens as a "common resident east of
and including Cascades," a statement which my series of twenty-
one specimens fails to prove. Four interior specimens contained in
the Streator collection are classed as intermediates between pubes-
cens and oreoecus. On examination I find that these agree with
mine in the lack of distinct markings of lower tail coverts, one of
these and six of the others showing traces of streaks on that part.
In lack of white markings of wing coverts and secondaries the
majority of the series agree with oreoeeu^, six being intermediate
between that race and pubescens.

*135. Xenopious albolarvatus. White-headed Woodppcker.

This bird has a claim to notice in this paper, solely on evidence
of woodsmen at Vernon, who assert they sometimes see a " little
white-headed sapsucker " in the forests at the head of Lake Okana-
gan. The striking difference between this and any other species of
Woodpecker makes this testimony worth notice.

136. Sphyrapicus varius nuchalis. Red-naped Sapsucker.

Generally distributed and breeding throughout the interior. Did
not see it in Washington nor on the British Columbia coast.

137. Sphyrapicus ruber. Red-breasted Sapsucker.

A male, shot near Tacoma was the only one seen.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. .43

138. Ceophloeus pileatus. Pileated Woodpecker.

Found in comparative abundance everywhere.

139. Melanerpes torquatus. Lewis' Woodpecker.

East of Cascades only. Rare in some localities, in others abun-
dant.

"■140. Colaptes auratus. Flicker.

Two specimens in the Victoria Museum appear to be unmixed
miratus. I neither saw nor heard of pure auratus in the interior of
British Columbia nor in Washington.

141. Colaptes cafer. Red-shafted Flicker.

142. Colaptes cafer saturatior. Northwest Flicker.

While cafer- seems to be exclusively an eastern Cascade species,
saturatior cannot be said to confine itself to the coast, examples from
local areas of great rainfall in the interior being indistinguishable
from ordinary Vancouver Island specimens. Hybrids between
these forms and auratus are exceptionally abundant in the north-
west and have been made the subject of a special paper in Science,
Vol. XX, No. 514, to which the reader is referred.

143. Chordeiles virginianus. Nighthawk.
Abundant in all interior localities.

144. Chordeiles virginianus henryi. Western Nighthawk.

Had not arrived on coast during my stay. Tacoma, Edwards
Bros.

145. Cypseloides niger. Black Swift.

First seen at Lulu Island, May 25th, and more seen on the 26th,
migrating leisurely. Frequently seen in great flocks on the Thomp-
son and over the lakes near Ashcroft. On the 7th of June my
notes report " 2,000 hovering low about a small lake," the only
chance I had to secure specimens. They remained there all that
day but were gone the next day. Occasional flocks appeared at
Clinton, Lac La Hache, Ashcroft and Kamloops until June 12th.
They were again seen at Vernon, June 22nd. At no time did they
appear singly or in detached pairs.

The mystery of their nidification I was unable to solve, as they
appeared on all occasions to be gregarious and nomadic, rarely
remaining two days in the same place. None were seen on the
mountains during ascent, but they frequently disappeared among
them after a foray in the valley. At no time did they

44 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

display the arts indicative of the breeding period seen in other
birds, not a call note or other sign of recognition being detected
during my extended acquaintance with them.

146. Chaetura vauxii. Vaux's Swift.

Arrived April 11th, at Nisqually and May 18th at Goldstream,
where they were an abundant migrant, associating at times with C.
niger. Seen at Lac La Hache, July 1st.

147. Selasphorus rufus. Tlufous Ilumming-birJ.

Incredibly numerous on the coast during April migration ; nest-
ing at Nisqually while night frosts still lingered and mercury aver-
aged 45° to 50° during the day. Scarcely less common in many
parts of the interior districts and found on the summits of highest
mountains, including the Rockies. Xests with eggs nearly hatched
found April 18th.

*148. Stellula calliope. Calliope Humming-bird.

A few very small " hummers" frequenting the interior and south-
ern Rocky Mountain districts were probably S. calliope.

149. Tyrannus tyrannus. Kingbird.
Abundant in the interior.

150. Tyrannus verticalis. Arkansas Kingbird.

Finds its northern limit a few miles south of Clinton. Ranges
west in the breeding season to the Selkirk Mountains. I did not
find it on the coast.

151. Sayornis saya. Say's Flycatcher.

Not common. Same distribution as preceding species.

152. Contopus borealis. Olive-sided Flycatcher.

Breeding at high altitudes in the east Cascade and Rocky Moun-
tain districts.

153. Contopus richardsonii. Western Wood Pewee.

Not abundant, but represented in all localities visited.

154. Empidonax difficilis. Western Flycatcher.

Mr. Streator says that this species, Avhile " common in the coast
region," is " more so in the interior." Not only is this disproved by
the specimens taken by him but by my own skins, all of which
came from west of the Cascades.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 45

155. Empidonax pusillus. Little Flycatcher.

156. Empidonax pusillus traillii. Traill's Flycatcher.

The relationships of these forms in British Columbia are confus-
ing, apparently reversing the relative distribution of eastern and
Avestern as it obtains farther south. Six specimens from Ashcroft,
Vernon and Lac La Hache, a.re piisilhis ; one from Lac La Hache
is evidently traillii. Three from Lulu Island, slightly yellower
below and browner above than interior skins, appear to be traillii.
Three of Mr. Streator's birds are from tbe eastern and three from
the western Cascade regions, yet all appear to be traillii with larger
bills, while all of mine from the same regions more nearly resemble
jmsillus. I incline to the theory that traillii ranges boreally
through northern, eastern and western British Columbia, centrally
receiving a slight admixture of pusillus through the intrusion of
the upper Sonoran element into the country around Ashcroft.

157. Empidonax hammondi. Hammond's Flycatcher.

Of uniform distribution over mainland and islands. Breeding
wherever found.

158. Otoooris alpestris merrilli. Dusky-horned Lark.
Breeding in the highland valleys near Ashcroft.

159. Pica pica hudsonica. American Magpie.

Well scattered over the interior but nowhere so common as in
Okanagan ^"alley near Vernon.

160. Cyanocitta stelleri. Steller's Jay.

Found only on the coast and west Cascade slopes. Both Fannin
and Streator assert they are found in the interior, a statement dis-
proved by all the specimens secured.

161. Cyanocitta stelleri annectens. Black-headed Jay.

While many of the interior specimens are intermediate, all are
more referable to a)uiectens than stelleri.

162. Perisoreus canadensis capitalis. Rocky Mountain Jay.

I noted these Jays at Lac La Hache, Bonaparte, Vernon, Nelson
and Field.

163. Perisoreus obscurus. Oregon Jay.

One specimen was taken at Nisqually. They are not numerous
on Vancouver Island and may be said to be rare in summer on the
coast. Mr. Fannin seems to have confounded this species with P.
canadensis caintalis as a resident of the interior. I have no mate-

46 PROCEEDUXGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

rial to show how far obscnrns reaches eastward, nor just where the
western range of capitalis terminates.

164. (T) Corvus corax sinuatus. American Raven.

Ravens were abundant in the Cascades, rare in the Bonaparte
Valley, at Lac La Hache and at Vernon, but at Nelson became
abundant again. One specimen secured at the latter place
approaches more nearly to si7iuaiu-< than pi-incijjalis, the latter being
given by Mr. Fannin for British Columbia.

165. Corvus americanus. ' v *i, » r.

jiorthwest Crow.
Corvus caurinus. -•

On the west coast crows are abundant. In the interior of British
Columbia they are found in diminished numbers. Their habits and
voices are essentially the same. In size they are extremely variable,
the smallest individuals being found on the shores of the Pacific,
the larger ones coming from the interior of British Columbia.
These are connected by an unbroken series of intergrades. In col-
oration they are also variable, many specimens of both large and
small birds differing but slightly from americanus of the east, but
the average of all British Columbia specimens is less glossy than
that of eastern birds, the reflections being confined chiefly to head,
neck and wing coverts, and often lacking on lower parts. Large
and small birds pair together, both east and west of the Cascades.
Average measurements of northwest crows, as compared with those
of birds from the Atlantic slope are decidedly less. These facts not
only confirm Baird's theory that caurinus is a "dwarfed race" of
americanus, but show that they, together with the larger crows of
the northwest, should be separated from Corvus americanus of the
east under the name Corvus americanu'< caurinus. A detailed dis-
cussion of the relationships of the birds in question, with tables of
comparative measurements, is contained in the Auk for January,
1893.

166. Picicorvus columbianus. Clarke's Xuteracker.

Extending from the summits of Cascades to the summits of
Rocky Mountains in summer. Rare at Clinton and Lac La Hache
but wintering wherever found. The Indians declare they breed in
February and again in July.

167. Molothras ater. Cowbird.

A young male was shot at Vernon. Mr. D. McKiuley reports
them as occasionally visiting the cattle corrals at Lac La Hache.

1893.] NATURAL SCIKNCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 47

'■168. Xanthooephalus xanthocephalus. Yellow-headed Blackbird.

I saw a skin of this bird, shot at Vernon. Clinton ; J. Smith.
Lac La Hache, McKinley Bros. ; White Valley, Okanagan. Cas-
ually breeding in British Columbia.

169. Agelaius phoeniceus. Red-wing Blackbird.

Of very local occurrence. Found breeding at Victoria, Lulu
Island and Vernon. In a series of twenty-three Washington and
British Columbia skins no differences are apparent between these
and Atlantic coast specimens.

170. Sturnella magna neglecta. Western Meadowlark.

Very rare at Lac La Hache. In all other open situations abun-
dant, from Vancouver Island to the Rocky Mountain foothills.

171. Icterus buUockii. Bullock's Oriole.

Rare at Ashci'oft and disappearing midway between Ashcroft
and Clinton, on the Bonaparte River. More numerous at Kam-
loops and abundant around Swan Lake, at Vernon.

172. Scolecophagus cyanocephalus. Brewers Blackbird.

Breeding in suitable localities, both east and west of Cascades to
Vernon, in the south, and Lac La Hache in the north.

173. Pinicola enucleator. Pine Grosbeak.

East and west Cascade and Rocky Mountain regions of British
Columbia. Not common.

174. Carpodacus purpureus californicus. California Purjile Fincb.

Found breeding on the coast.

••175. Carpodacus cassinii. Cassin"s Purple Finch.

A few examples, probably of this species, were found breeding in
the interior.

176. Loxia curvirostra minor. American Crossbill.

Coextensive with coniferous forests at all elevations. East and
west of Cascades.

177. Leucosticte tephrocotis. Gray-crowned Finch.

A flock of these was seen on the Rocky Mountain summits near
Fiehl.

178. Acanthis 1 Redpoll.

A Redpoll secured by Mr. Lindley at ^'ictoria resembles lin-
aria but is larger and otherwise different. From my lack
of specimens of the other forms its identity remains questionable.

48 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

179. Spinus pinus. Pine Siskin.

A very abundant resident iu all localities.

180. Poocaetes gramineus. Vesper Sparrow.

Numerous in all open situations between the Cascades and
Rockies as far north as Lac La Hache. The presence of birds
in the Ashcroft region, so nearly identical with Atlantic coast
specimens, is at variance with the prevailing tendency of west-
ern forms to supplant the Boreal in that locality.
*181. (?) Poocaetes gramineus confinis. Western Vesper Sparrow.

I wounded a singing male Vesper Sparrow near Victoria, but
it w^as lost. Fannin calls the coast Poocaetes, P. gramineus con-
finis. If it differs at all from P. (jramineus I am disposed to
think it will prove to be P. gramineus affinis.

182. Ammodramus sandwichensis. Sandwich Sj)arrow.

183. Ammodramus sandwichensis alaudinus. AVestern Savanna Sparrow.

Mr. Chapman having kindly loaned me the entii*e series of
Ammodramus in the Streator collection, I am enabled, in connec-
tion with my own series, to trace the relations and distribution
of the two forms with some exactness. Sixty-five skins from
twenty localities in Washington and British Columbia, taken dur-
ing regular intervals from April to October inclusive, form the
basis of this examination. Alaudinus breeds in all localities in
Washington and British Columbia, from the Rocky Mountains
to the coast (including the islands), from sea level to an eleva-
tion of 5,000 feet. It probably winters sparingly on the south
shores of Puget Sound, and begins to breed there the second
week in April. In the interior it was not found nesting before
June 1st, laying probably the latter part of May.

Intermediates referable to alaudinus were passing northward
in flocks on Vancouver Island after typical alaudinus had begun
to breed there. These connect so perfectly the two forms breed-
ing respectively in Alaska and southern British Columbia that it
is impossible to classify satisfactorily any but the extremes. It
is on this account, probably, that Mr. Fannin has included Van-
couver Island in the breeding range of sandwiehenxis. On the
contrary, typical sandwichensis have all passed Victoria by the
middle of May, leaving behind them typical alaudinus and a few
intermediates as summer residents. In the interior this iutergrad-
ing is scarcely noticeable, due, probably, to the absence of sand-

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 49

wichensis as a migrant east of the Cascades. The proportion of
typical saudivichensls to alandhms during migrations on the coast
is as one in twenty, but if Ave include among the former the
largest intermediates the proportion would be one in ten. The
bulk of typical sandwichenms probably winter on the coast north
of Victoria, while the majority of the larger intermediates found
migrating at Victoria breed south of the o5th parallel. Many
intermediates closely resemble A. mndwichensu savanna. It is
probable one of these, taken in San Diego, California, by W.
O. Emerson, that Mr. Ridgway has wrongly identified as belong-
ing to the eastern race.^

*184. Chondestes grammacus strigatus. Western Lark S]iarrow.

Seen only at Vernon, where two pairs of adult birds were feeding
their newly fledged young. This is the first authentic record of
Chondestes north of the United States boundary.

*185. Zonotrichia querula. Harris Sparrow.

A specimen of this unlooked-for species, shot by Mr. Maynard
near Victoria, was shown me by Mr. Fannin. As it has not, to
my knowledge, been put on record, I take the liberty of mention-
ing it here. It is not only the first record for British Columbia,
but the first capture of the species on the Pacific side of the Rocky
Mountains. It was shot early in April, 1891.

186. Zonotricliia leucophrys intermedia. Intermediate Sparrow.

During migrations this race is sparingly scattered as far west as
Vancouver Island, where I took two specimens. It becomes more
frequent on the western slope of the Cascades and in the interior I
found it breeding at higher latitudes and altitudes.

187. Zonotrichia leucophrys gambeli. Gaiubel's Sparrow.

A very abundant summer resident on the coasts of British Col-
umbia and Washington.

188. Zonotrichia coronata. Golden-crowned Sparrow.

In abundant flocks during our stay at Coldstream. I am inclined
to doubt Mr. Fannin's statement that they are resident on Van-
couver Island and would restrict their southern range in summer to
the Queen Charlotte Islands,

' Zo3, April, 1890, p. 45.

50 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

189. Spizella socialis. Chipping Sparrow.

190. Spizella socialis arizonae. Western Chipping Sparrow.

The Chipping Sparrows of British Columbia present color char-
acters analogous to those already given for Empidcniax pusillu.-< and
E. pusillus trailid. Measurements of six specimens from Victoria
coincide with those of average socialis. In color they are like soci-
alis, being darker on under parts than arizonce. In color of upper
parts many may be referred to either or both forms with equal pro-
priety. In fact, differences between breeding specimens, now before
me, of socialis and arizonae, from such widely remote points as Fort
Simpson, Philadelphia, California and central Mexico, are so slight
and inconstant as to make their separation of questionable import,
I would refer all British Columbia specimens collected by Mr.
Streator and myself, including those from the coast, to socialis, with
the exception, possibly,of six skins collected at Ashcroft, Avhich I
agree with Mr. Chapman in calling " intermediates." Average
measurements of the eastern and western forms as given by Mr.
Ridgway, with those of specimens from Ashcroft and Victoria, are
appended :

Wing.

Tail.

E:

jcposed Culmen.

Socialis

2-75

2-47

•35

Arizonie

2-88

2-51

.35

Ashcroft

2-75

2-32

•35

Vancouver

Ish

and

2-77

2-37

•35

191. Spizella breweri. Brewer's Sparrow.

I was induced by the unusually sweet song of a " chipping spar-
row" in the pine-wood mountains above Ashcroft, to shoot it. It
proved the onl}-^ specimen of Brewer's Sparrow noted during the
trip.

192. Junco hyemalis oregonus. Oregon Junco.

193. (1) Junco hyemalis shufeldti. Rocky Mountain Juneo.

After comparing my series of thirty Juncos from British Colum-
bia and Washington with Mr. Chapman^s lengthy discussion of the
Streator series, I cannot say that he has characterized any constant
differences between eastern and western Cascade forms. The extent
of black markings and intensity of color shows itself to be depend-
ent mainly on the make-up of the skin and the season in which it
was taken, and the white areas on the rectrices of my series show

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPAIA. 51

decidedly that this character has no diagnostic value whatever.
How Mr. Coale's type of slnifeldti can be, as Mr. Chapman says,
"intermediate" between coast and interior birds from British Col-
umbia I cannot conceive. It is highly probable that the Juncos of
western North America are as susceptible to local diflfereuces of
environment occurring throughout their extensive breeding range as
any other genus in the country and that a recurrence of any form
is liable to happen at any isolated point where physical conditions
are duplicated. A thorough overhauling of the group on this prin-
ciple may yet rescue it from the sacrilegious hands of the species
hunter and synonymist. I think it is safe to say that birds indistin-
guishable from oregonus breed on the better-watered mountains of
interior British Columbia. The only approach to " shufeldti" (sic)
is found in birds from the most arid lowlands and most eastern
Rockies, but their diflerences are too slight and fortuitous to war-
rant a distinction.

194. Melospiza fasciata guttata. Rusty Song Sparrow.

Specimens collected during the breeding season show that Melo-
spiza fasciata rujjna is not present on the southern coasts of British
Columbia at that time. The distribution of gnttala in Washington
and British Columbia is singularly uniform in all kinds of localities,
no difterence between coast and interior individuals being apparent.

Melbspiza hncolni striata. )

■ Lincoln's Finch.

195. Melospiza lincolni, ]

As given in my notice of this species in the Auk, further mate-
rial from the type district of striata shows that the characters
assigned to that race are too slight and variable to distinguish it
from lincolni. Since the paper referred to went to press I have
received Mr. Brewster's series of striata but see no reason to alter
my previous statements regarding that race.

196. Passerella iliaca unalaschensis. Townsend's Sparrow.

197. Passerella iliaca schistacea. Slate-colored Sparrow.

Fifty-two skins of unalaschensis, including the Smithsonian Insti.
tution series and those collected by Mr. Streator, present the sub-
joined facts. Starting in the Rocky Mountains, we have first a light
gray specimen of typical schistacea from Nelson ; going west we find
another slightly darker and another of the same shade with slightly
larger bill which Mr. Chapman labels "sub-sp. nov.," both of which
a.re sch istacea intermediates. From the west Cascades, British Col-

52 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

umbia, AVestern Oregon and Washington we find average unalasch-
enxis. Two winter specimens from Vancouver Island show the
extreme of the melauistic coast tendency, being nearly black and
very dark specimens from Kalama, Washington and Humboldt
Bay, California, show the direction and extent of the migration of
this phase along the coast. Alaska specimens are lighter, three
from Koniuski Island being nearly as light above as schistacea, so
that extremes of dark and light from south and north, respectively,
appear like distinct species, but they are connected by a perfect
intergradation. Winter specimens of schistacea all come from Cali-
fornia, while all Oregon specimens are winter unalaschen-ns. Brit-
ish Columbia thus forms common ground for unalaschensis and schis-
tacea, the Cascades being the habitat of intermediates in the breed-
ing season. Unalaschensix breeds on Vancouver Island and north-
ward. While unalaschensis from north Alaska is nearly as light
as schistacea, there is a marked difference between the two, the for-
mer retaining the brown shade above as contrasted with the ashy
cast of upper parts in the latter.

198. Pipilo muculatus megalonyx. Spui red Towhee.

Abundantly haunting the woodlands of the interior in all locali-
ties visited, uj) to 4,000 feet.

199. Pipilo maculatus oregonus. Oregon Towhee.

Replacing megalonyx west of the Cascades. Its exact counterpart
in habits and habitat.

200. Habia melanocepliala. Black-headetl Grosbeak.

Not met with alive. Many skins from parts of Washington and
British Columbia examined.

201. Passerina amoena. Lazuli Bunting.

This beautiful finch is very abundant between the coast range
and the Rockies, but does not extend farther north than Bonaparte.
Its habitat, in this respect, coincides with that of other species of
southern extraction in British Columbia.

202. Piranga ludoviciana. Louisiana Tanager.

Fairly abundant and uniformly distributed over the coasts,
islands and mainland of Washington and British C^olumbia.

203. Progne subis. Purple Martin.

Only one specimen, a male from Victoria, being secured, it is dif-
ficult to state whether the Martins of Vancouver Island belong to

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 53

the eastern or western form. The specimen in question closely
resembles examples from Pennsylvania. Victoria, Tacoma and
Seattle were the only localities where Martins were noted.

204. Petrochelidon lunifrons. Cliff Swallow.

205. Chelidon erythrogaster. Barn Swallow.

206. Tachycineta bicolor. White-bellied Swallow.

207. Tachycineta thalassina. Violet-green Swallow.

AVith the possible exception of P. lunijrons, which was not noted
west of the Cascades/ these Swallows were nniformly abundant
through the length and breadth of the land, up to an elevation of
5,000 feet, thalassina being noted 2,000 feet higher.

208. Clivicola riparia. Bank Swallow.

Found breeding along the Thompson River at Ashcroft, and
more' abundantly at Kamloops. Its distribution in British
Columbia is very local. Not included in Messrs. Chapman's or
Fannin's lists.

209. Stelgidopteryx serripennis. Rough-wing Swallow.

Not as common but of the same distribution as Lhelidon erythro-
gaster.

210. Ampelis cedrorum. Cedar Bird.

A common species, as erratic in presence and abundance as its
eastern counterpait.

211. Lanius borealis. Northern Shrike.

Two specimens from Vancouver Island are in the collection.

212. Vireo olivaceus. Ked-eyed Vireo.

I did not find the Red-eye west of the Cascades, but over the interior
it was commonly distributed, and a few were found at Lac La
Hache.

213. Vireo gilvus swainsonii. Western Warbling Vireo.

Warbling Vireos abound in Washington and British Columbia.
As has been pointed out more fully in the Auk, birds from the
northwest indicate the ten ability of swainsonii as a subspecies of
eastern gilvus.

214. Vireo solitarius cassinii. Cassin's Vireo.

This species is represented by specimens from nearly every local-
ity in British Columbia, including Vancouver Island, Lac La
Hache and Vernon. It is found in the open timber at higher eleva-

^Tacoma, Edwards Bros.

54 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

tions, mostly inhabiting the tops of loftiest Conifene. Coast and
interior specimens are alike.

215. Vireo huttonii (obscurus.) Anthony's Vireo.

May be considered a rare visitor to Vancouv^er Island. I secured
one near Victoria. This specimen, also two secured by Mr. Maynard
in the spring of 1891, near the same place, are of the strongly
marked race of huttonii, proposed by A. W. Anthony in 1890.'

216. HelminthopMla ruficapilla gutturalis. Calaveras Warbler.

Two examples of the Calaveras Warbler were taken at Vernon
and others were seen at Nelson. They may be considered as neither
rare nor abundant in British Columbia.

217. Helminthophila celata. Orange-crowned Warbler.

Five specimens from the interior of British Columbia are distin-
guishable from the coast form, which does not appear to cross the
Cascades. This species is sparsely scattered over the whole interior
region.

218. Helminthophila celata lutescens. Lutescent Warbler.

A very abundant summer resident on the Pacific slope, coast and
islands. All but one of the series can be separated from celata by
the darker yellow lower tail coverts.

219. Deudroica aestiva. Yellow AVarbler.

The most omnipresent and abundant species of the genus.

220. Dendroica coronata. Myrtle Warbler.

I did not meet with the " Yellow-rump " east of the Cascades,
but found it associating with D.auduhoni in A^ancouver Island and
Washington during the migrations. It is much less abundant than
auduboni. The distribution of this bird in British Columbia is, in
some respects, unique.

221. Dendroica auduboni. Audubon's Warbler.

Abundant summer resident everywhere.

222. Dendroica maculosa. Magnolia Warbler.

A specimen taken at Field and two or three observed at Vernon
entitle this species to a jilace in the fauna of British Columbia.
*223. Dendroica nigrescens. Black -throated Gray Warbler.

On Vancouver Island the peculiar song of nigrescens was occa-
sionally detected but no birds secured. I feel quite sure that I saw
a pair on the mountains near Clinton.

> Zoe, Dec, 1890, p. 307.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 55

224. Dendroica townsendi. Townsend's Warbler.

Rare east of Cascades, but abundant in Washington and on Van-
couver Island.

225. Seiuras noveboracensis notabilis. Grinnel's AVater Thrush.

Found breeding along interior streams. Lac La Hache and
Bonaparte.

226. Geothlypis macgillivrayi. Macgillivray's Warbler.
Found breeding at all localities and elevations.

227. Geothlypis trichas occidentalis. Western Yellow-throat.

Rare on Vancouver Island. Abundant at Lulu Island and about
the shores of reedy lakes in the interior of British Columbia.

228. Icteria virens longicauda. Long-tailed Chat.

In the bushes which line the banks of the Thompson River below
Ashcroft I secured two males of this species. Another was heard
singing on a ranch above the town. Fort Lapwai, Idaho, was here-
tofore the most northern record for this Chat.

229. Sylvania pusilla. Wilson's AVarbler.
Sylvania pusilla pileolata. Pileolated Warbler.

The series of Wilson's Warblers taken in eastern and western
British Columbia, compared among themselves and with specimens
from the Atlantic States, are devoid of any differences which would
justify their separation. There is a singular uniformity in the aver-
age measurements of specimens from all localities and, saving two
specimens from Vancouver Island which show deeper yellow on the
forehead, their coloration is remarkably uniform. Judged by the
specimens examined, there is not, when we consider its transconti-
nental range, a more "hard and fast" species than Sylvania pusilla.

North of the United States S. pusilla pileolata has no better claim
to recognition than Dendroica aestiva morcomi.

230. Setophaga ruticilla. Redstart.

Well represented all over interior British Columbia.

231. Anthus pensilvanicus. American Pipit.

Washington and the Province of British Columbia at large.
Breeding sparsely on the plateaus and' mesas of the interior, up to
4,000 feet.

232. Cinclus mexicanus. American Dipper.

Associated with all dashing streams, from the mountains to the sea.

56 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

233. Galeoscoptes carolinensis. Cat Bird.

Not abundant anywhere and very local in its distribution. It
does not appear to get farther north than Clinton. The brownish
cast of upper parts, especially on the crown, rarely seen in eastern
skins, is very marked in some British Columbia examples and is
present in nearly all of them. Western birds average darker
beneath than specimens from the Atlantic coast. Measurements of
thirteen specimens (including the Streator series) from British Col-
umbia, give the following averages as compared with those of a
series of ten from the eastern United States.

Wing. Tail. Exposed Culmen. Tarsus.

British Columbia 2-58 3-78 -62 MO

Atlantic States 3-54 3-75 '63 1-12

Both of these differences and those of coloration are too slight
and variable to warrant any subdivision of the species.
■234. Salpinctes obsoletus. Rock Wren.

Found about Ashcroft and northward to Cache Creek; also at
Kamloops where one was nesting in a " section house," ten feet from
the railroad tracks. Five specimens from Ashcroft do not materially
differ from Arizona and Utah skins.

235. Thryothorus bewickii spilurus-. Vigor's Wren.

Abundant in the west Cascade region of Washington and Brit-
ish Columbia. It is doubtful whether this species ever crosses the
coast mountains to the interior, it being essentially a lover of lower
levels.

236. Troglodytes aedon parkmanii. Parkman's Wren.

I never found Farkman's Wren above the 2,000-foot limit. It is
not as abundant or evenly distributed in the interior as coastwise.

237. Troglodytes hiemalis pacificus. Western Winter Wren.
Abounding on the coast. Two moulting birds from the Selkirk

Mountains near Nelson are even darker than skins from Puget
Sound. I did not find any Winter Wrens in the arid interior of
British Columbia west of the Gold Range, nor at Lac La Hache.
The reappearance in the Selkirks of typical pacificus and its absence
again from the Rockies at Field tallies perfectly with the alterna-
ting climatic conditions already pointed out as occurring across this
vast area. Dr. jNIerriam calls the Winter Wren foimd by him in
the Saw Tooth Mountains, Idaho, hiemalis.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 57

238. Cistothoms palustris paludicola. Tule Wren.

Breeding over the lake country east of Cascades. I found it
abundant at Lac La Hache. It must range much farther north
than this, probably (G. Hamilton) to Stewart's Lake, British Col-
umbia, latitude 54°.

239. Certhia familiaris montana. Kocky Mountain Creeper.

Rare in British Columbia. A male Creeper from Nelson appears
to be montana.

240. Certhia familiaris occidentalis. California Creeper.

Neither rare nor common on the Pacific slope. Rare at Nis-
qually. Probably reappears on interior mountain peaks.

241. Sitta carolinensis aculeata. Slender-billed Nuthatch.

One specimen was taken at Tacoma. It is rare on the coast but
abounds in the wooded hills of the interior of British Columbia.

242. Sitta canadensis. Red-bellied Nuthatch.

East and West of Cascades ; also in the Rocky Mountains.

243. Sitta pygmaea. Pygmy Nuthatch.

Only found, and that sparingly, at Vernon.

244. Par us atricapillus septentrionalis. Long-tailed Chickadee.

Abound in the inter-mountainous region of British Columbia, up
to 3,000 feet.

245. Paras atricapillus occidentalis. Oregon Chickadee.
Abound in the coast region.

246. Parus gambeli. Mountain Chickadee.

Found in the interior mountains of British Columbia but not in
the Rockies.

247. Parus hudsonicus columbianus, subsp. nov. Columbian Chickadee.

Four specimens of this strongly differentiated ally of hudsonicus
were secured in the high mountains surrounding Field, British Col-
umbia. They were abundant in the deepest and darkest recesses of
the coniferous forest, associating in flocks of ten to twenty individ-
uals after the familiar manner of the genus. A description of this
new form having already appeared in the Auk, it is useless to refer
to it further here except to say that it is larger and darker than
hudsonicus, with a much larger bill and with the throat patch jet
black instead of brownish-black.
5

58 PKOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

248. Parus rufescens. Ch«stnut-backed Chickadee.

Very couimoa ou the coast aud Islands but never found east of
the Cascades.

249. Begulas satrapa olivaoeas. Western Golden-crown«d Kinglet.

I can tiud uo color diHereuce between the east and west Cascade
Kinglets. In this respect they agree with the British Columbia
"Winter Wrens,

250. Eegulus calendula. Ruby -crowned Kinglet.

Numerous ou the coast in spring. Breeding in the interior. The
nuptial song of this tiny bird is a truly marvellous production.
Perched in the top of a giant tir it will remain motionless for thirty
minutes at a stretch, singing an incessant hurly-burly loud enough
to be heard half a mile away.

251. Mjadestes townsendii. Townsend's Solitaire.

I secured a Solitaire on Vancouver Island in May. They were
met with at high altitudes on both slopes of the Cascades, Selkirks
and Rockies, as far north as the 52nd parallel, increasing in abun-
dance eastward ly.

252. Turdus fasoesens salicicolas. Willow Thrush.

In all visited localities of the interior. Breeding at Lac La
Hache. This extends Mr. Streator's nesting record of the species
150 miles farther north.

253. Ttirdas ustulatus. Russet-back Thrash.
Abundant coastwise.

254. Turdus ustulatus swainsonii. Swainson'is Thrush.

A female and young male in nesting plumage shot at Nelson
where they were tairly abundant.

255. Turdus aonalaschkae. Dwarf Hermit Thrush.

On the coast in migrations. Probably breed in the Cascades and
mountains of Vancouver Island. I was surprised to again meet
this species at Field, where I saw many aud secured three birds.
One of these in spotted nesting plumage proves that the summer
habitat of the Dwarf Thrush is far more extended than formerly
supposed and accounts for the appearance of this form in Utah aud
Nevada in fall migrations.

256. Turdus aonalaschkae pallasii. llermit Thrush.

That j)allasii aud not auduboni breed in the region around Lac
La Hache is attested by certain skins in the collection. Neither

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 59

form wa3 found iu any other part of British Columbia, If it be
found that aonalaschkce and paUasii breed indifferently across com-
mon ground in the interior and Rocky Mountain regions of British
•Columbia, without the intervention of intermediates, a more com-
plete separation of the two than is now recognized must be made.
At least two points are established by skins in the collection — 1st
the breeding of aotudaschkae in the Rocky Mountains of British
■Columbia ; 2nd, the breeding of pallasii west of the Rockies and
south of the 52nd parallel.

257. Merulamigratoria propinqua. Weeteru Robin.
Uniformly abundant everywhere.

258. Hesperooichla naevia. Varied Thrush.

Abundant on the coast, but by no means confined thereto, being
found at high altitudes on all the mountains of the interior to the
Rocky Mountain summits.

259. Sialia mexicana. AVestern Bluebird.

Not common anywhere but less so in the east Cascade districts
where it does not range beyond the Transition Zone.

260. Sialia arotica. Arctic Bluebird.

Abundant in northern and western interior portions of British
Columbia.

A tabulated list of all the specimens forming the author's collec-
tion of British Columbia and Washington birds, including those
collected by Messrs Morris and Evans in the same region, is appen-
ded. The collection has been recently purchased by the Academy
of Natural Sciences.

60

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1893.

m

u

0

P3

tT

L)

CJ

a.

U

c

oi

o

^

B

o
a

hJ

1

O

c

0

^

(4

^

Colymbus auritus

Podilymbus podiceps

Urinator imber

Urinator arcticus

Synthliboramphus antiquus

Brachyramphus marmoratus

Lams glaucescens

Larus occidentalis

Larus californicus

Larus delawarensis

Larus brachyrhynchus

Larus Philadelphia

Merganser americanus

Merganser serrator

Anas boschas

Anas americana

Anas carolinensis

Anas discors

Anas cyanoptera

Spatula clypeata

Dafila acuta

Aythya vallisneria

Glaucionetta clangula americana

Glaucionetta islandica

Charitonetta albeola

Oidemia deglandi

Branta canadensis

Branta canadensis hutchinsii

Branta canadensis occidentalis

Ardea herodias

Forzana Carolina

1893.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

61

.c

u

d

►2

n

pq

^

(J

(j

u

«

cJ

0

s
s

4J

■3

1— 1

la

i

0

u

pq

"in

0

•a

2
0

pg
J"

1

d

c
0

a.
0
0

1

pq

3
0
s

0
0

u

pq

a
0

pq

cuo

a

JS

s

c

u

CS

w^

s

rt

"3

in

0

•■^

ns

c«

0

<u

OJ

m

cu

>

J

<

CQ U

h-l

i4

W

>

^

£

Crymophilus fulicarius

1

Tringa minutilla

1

Tringa alpina pacifica

3

2

Ereunetes occidentalis

3

8

Totanus melanoleucus

1

2

1

Actitis macularia

1

3

Numenius longirostris

1

1

■Charadrius dominicus fulvus(?)

1

Aegialitis vocifera

3

•Callipepla californica

1

2

■Callipepla californica vallicola

1

Dendragapus obscurus fuligi-

nosus

2

5

JDendragapus obscurus richard-

sonii

1

2

Dendragapus franklinii

1

iBonasa umbellus togata

2

2

4

Bonasa umbellus sabini

3

1

Pediocaetes phasianellus colum-

bianus

3

1

Columba fasciata

2

Zenaidura macroura

1

2

•Circus hudsonicus

1

1

1

Accipiter velox

1

1

1

1

Accipiter cooperi

2

Buteo swainsoni

3

Falco columbarius

2

Falco columbarius suckleyi

1

Falco richardsonii

1

Falco sparverius

7

1

2

2

I

2

•

Asio accipitrinus

1

Symium occidentale

2

Nyctala acadica

1

Megascops asio kennicottii

1

62

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

[1893.

u

pa

'ji

0

u

i-i

m

P9

1)

o

1— 1

o

u

u

B

^

pa

> ihJ i<! ipa

u

u

cJ

1
i

pa

1

«

u

U

o

pq

pa

pq

pa

u

n

•*

^

pa'

^5

o

a

H-l

'e

S

o

s

s

2

C^

CS

o

4J

I-I

i4

yj

>

^;

u.

Bubo virginianus
Bubo virginianus subarcticus
Bubo virginianus saturatus
Glaucidium gnoma
Glaucidium gnoma californicum
Ceryle alcyon

Dryobates villosus leucomelas
Dryobates villosus harrisii
Dryobates pubescens gairdneri
Dryobates pubescens oreoecus
Sphyrapicus varius nuchalis
Sphjrapicus ruber
Ceophlocus pileatus
Melanerpes torquatus
Colaptes cafer
Colaptes cafer saturatior
Chordeiles virginianus
Cypseloides niger
Trochilus rufus
Tyrannus tyrannus
Tyrannus verticalis
Sayornis saya
Contopus borealis
Contopus richardsonii
Empidonax difficilis
Empidonax pusillus
Empidonax pusillus traillii
Empidonax hammondi
Otocoris alpe&tris merrilli
Pica pica hudsonica
Cyanocitta stelleri

11

12

11

1893.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

65

^

(J

u

J*

m

m

•V

a

"m

(J

U

U

§

V

>
a
o
o

a

1— 1

3

2

o

C9

c
o

a

o

ifl

3
O

a

05

3

O

'^

ti

CU

>

J

<

M

U

U

t4

OJ

Cyanocitta stelleri annectens

Perisoreus canadensis capitalis

Perisoreus obscurus

Gsrvus corax sinuatus

Corvus americanus caurinus

Picicorvus columbianus

Molothrus ater

Agelaius phoeniceus

Sturnella magna neglecta

Icterus bullockii

Scolecophagus cyanocephalus

Pinicola enucleator

Carpodacus purpureas califomi-
cus

Loxia curvirostra minor

Acanthis ?

Spinus pinus

Poocaetes gramineus

Ammodramus sandwichensis

Ammodramus sandwichensis al-
audinus

2^notrichia leucophrys interme-
dia

Zonotrichia leucophrys gambeli

Zonotrichia coronata

Spizella socialis

Spizella socialis arizonae

Spizella breweri

Junco hiemalis oregonus

Junco hiemalis shufeldtii ?

Melospiza fasciata guttata

Melospiza lincolni

Passerella iliaca unalaschensis

1

1

1

1

8

3

2

1

2

2

6

6

3

3

3
2

3

5

1

1
1

8

11

2

1

1

8

4

6

1

3

2

1

5

12

2

6

2

3

5

4

5
17
8

2
3
1

4

12

4

2

1

3

3

U

5

1
1

6

3

1
1

64

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1893.

U

n

0

u

u

u

U

M

n

<u

PQ

M

n"

PQ

n

u

in

1— t

2

u

<

a,

c]

c
o

o
c

5

o

o

01

3
O

E

o

c75

B
O

>

c

12;

2

Passerella iliaca schistacea

Piplio maculatus megalonyx

Pipilo maculatus oregonus

Habia melanocephala

Passerina amoena

Piranga ludoviciana

Progne ?

Petrochelidon lunifrons

Chelidon erythrogaster

Tachycineta bicolor

Tachycineta thalassina

Clivicola riparia

Stelgidopteryx serripennis

Ampelis cedrorum

Lanius borealis

Vireo olivaceus

Vireo gilvus swainsonii

Vireo solitarius cassinii

Vireo huttoni ( obscurus)

Helminthophila ruficapilla gut
turalis

Helminthophila celata

Helminthophila celata lutescens

Dendroica aestiva

Dendroica coronata

Dendroica auduboni

Dendroica maculosa

Dendroica townsendii

Seiurus noveboracensis notabilis

Geothlypis macgillivrayi

Geothlypis trichas occidentalis

Icteria virens longicauda

1893.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

65

JS

o

cJ

f i

3

o
w

'v
CJQ .

3 :
Oh

'in \

1—1

4)

% \

8

c

>

0

3

:3

2

o !

JS !

< 1

PQ

i-

s
o
CQ

oq
1
0

V
U

o
o

en

3
O

i

u

M

c
o

□

>

u

pg

c
o
J2

V

0

^ylvania pusilla

8

1

1

1

Selophaga ruticilla

Anthus pensilvanicus

8

1

Cinclus mexicana

6

•Galoescoptes carolinensis

2

5

1

Thryothorus bewicki spilurus

4

1

1

Troglodytes aedon parkmani

3

4

1

Troglodytes hiemalis pacificus

3

3

2

Cistothorus palustris paludicola

2

7

Certhia familiaris montana

1

Certhia familiaris occidentalis

3

Sitta carolinensis aculeata

1

2

2

Sitta canadensis

4

Sitta pygmaea

3

Parus atricapillus septentrionalis

1

1

1

1

1

Parus atricapillus occidentalis

8

5

Parus gambeli

2

2

1

3

Parus hudsonicus columbianus

4

Parus rufescens

10

6

Regulus satrapa olivaceus

4

6

1

1

2

2

Regulus calendulus

2

1

Myadestes townsendi

J

1

Turdus fuscescens salicicolus

1

1

2

2

Turdus ustulatus

9

2

Turdus ustulatus swainsonii

2

Turdus aonalaschkse

3

Turdus aonalaschkse pallasii

2

Manila migratoria propinqua

4

5

2

1

1

3

1

Hesperocichla naevia

9

4

1

Sialia mexicana

2

2

Sialia arctica

1

1

1

5

66 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

February 7.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistae, in the chair.

Fifty-nine persons present.

The deaths of the following members were announced : — John
Markoe, February 1, 1893 ; F. A. Genth, M. D., February 2, 1893.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication: —

" Notes on some Minerals and Rocks," by Edw. Goldsmith.

" A Contribution to the Herpetology of British Columbia," by
Edw. D. Cope.

" Pyrophyllite Slate in Northern Pennsylvania," by Abraham
Meyer.

" Notes on the Occurrence of Quartz and other Minerals in the
Chemung Measures near the Line of Wyoming and Tioga Counties,"
by Abraham Meyer.

February 14.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Forty-two persons present.

The death of Joseph C. Turnpenny, a member, July, 1892, was
announced.

February 21.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Forty-seven persons present.

A paper entitled " Involution Form of the Tubercle Bacillus and
the Effect of Subcutaneous Injection of Organic Substances on
Inflammations," by S. G. Dixon, M. D., was presented for publication.

February 28.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Twenty-eight persons present.

The death on the 26th inst of Mr. Jacob Binder, Curator of the
William S. Vaux Collections, was announced, whereupon the follow-
ing minute was adopted : —

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 6T

The Academy having heard with sincere regret of the death, the
26th inst., of Mr. Jacob Binder, the Curator of the William S.
Vaux Collections, it is fitting that a record be made of the society's-
appreciation of the loss which it has thereby sustained.

During the latter years of Mr. Binder's life, from his election to-
membership in January 1879 until incapacitated by the lingering
illness which has just terminated fatally, his best energies have
been devoted to farthering the interests of the Academy.

He performed his duties as Curator from January 1883 tO'
January 1892, as member of the Board of Trustees of the Build-
ing Fund from January 1884 to February 1890 and as Curator of
the William S. Vaux Collections since 1883, with energy, discretion
and liberality. His knowledge of business details was of the utmost
value in the financial administration of the society, while his^
personal qualities were such as to endear him to his associates.

The Academy desires to convey to Mr. Binder's wife and children?
the assurance of its profound sympathy in their bereavement.

On the recommendation of the Council the following were elected
to constitute the Committee on the Hayden Memorial Geological
Award : — Angelo Heilpriu, J. P. Lesley, Persifor Frazer, Benjamin
Smith Lyman and William B. Scott.

The Council reported the election of Benjamin Sharp, M. D.,
to fill the vacancy in the Committee on Instruction and Lecturer
caused by the death of Mr. Isaac C. Martindale.

The following were elected members : —

Joseph Sailor, M. D., Henry Erben, Warner J. Banes, Walter
Erben, Charles M. Thomas, M. D., Harold H. Kynett, M. D.,
Ernest La Place, M. D., Edw. C. Kirk, M. D., Henry L. Taggart,,
William B. Scott and H. Frank Moore.

The following were elected correspondents : —

The Rt. Hon. Lord Kelvin, Leonard Stejneger of Washington, D.
C, Charles B. Cory of Boston, Mass., Arnold Lang of Jena,
Germany, Robert Ridgway of New York, William Brewster of
Boston, Mass. and J. A. Allen of Cambridge, Mass.

The following were ordered to be printed : —

68 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

THE INTERPRETATION OF CERTAIN VERSES OF THE FIRST CHAPTER
OF GENESIS IN THE LIGHT OF PALEONTOLOGY.

BY HENRY C. CHAPMAN, M. D.

To those unfamiliar with the fact that the text of Genesis has
Ijefore now constituted a subject of discussion before the Academy,^
some apology on the part of the author might be thought appropri-
ate for the introduction of such a subject for its consideration. It
might naturally be supposed also that there could be but little left
to say as to the interpretation of the first chapter of Genesis in the
light of paleontological research, especially in view of the consid-
eration recently given to that subject by such distinguished contro-
versialists as Mr. Gladstone^ and Prof. Huxley.^ As the latter dis-
cussion, as well as many other similar ones, appears to have been
based almost entirely upon the text of the English version of the
Old Testament, revised or otherwise, it may not be regarded as
superfluous if the order of the creation of life as given in the
original Hebrew and literally translated, be compared with the
order in which life appeared according to the testimony of the
rocks. To those having no knowledge of Hebrew it should be
mentioned that the language is an exceedingly elastic one, especially
in the hands of those skilled in Hebrew exegesis — the same word
having undoubtedly very many different meanings, according to the
context, etc. By far the greater number of the stem words in Hebrew
consist of three consonants and the system of " pointing," or the
vocalization of such stem words by the addition of points, was
introduced by the Jews with the view of fixing definitely the mean-
ing of the stem words. Thus, for example, the word CIS Adm,
read in Hebrew from right to left, will mean either " he was red,"
^' red," or " man," according as DIJ^ is written with the points, as
DlX, DIX, DIK. The system of pointing or the vocalization of

the stem words was, however, only introduced in comparatively
recent times (in the interval between the composition of the Targum
from the third to the sixth centuries and the making of gram-
mars by the Jews in the Arabic language in the beginning of the
tenth century) and therefore long after the original Manuscript

1 Proc. Acad. Nat. Sciences, 1854.

2 Nineteenth Century, 188.5, 1886.

^ Nineteenth Century, 188 ), 1886 — Essays upon some Controverted Questions,
1892.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 69^

Bibles were written. The Hebrew Bible used to-day by students is
usually that in which the words are " pointed," the translation of
such words as given in the Hebrew- English Dictionary being that
determined upon by Jews living about 1,200 years ago. No doubt such
Jews, in the pointing of stem words, as well as the translators of
the Bible into English in modern times, were influenced by the
interpretation of the Hebrew as given in the Greek translation
made by the Seventy at Alexandria in the reign of Ptolemy
Philadelphus, and by Aquila, Theodotion and Symmachus, and in
the Latin Vulgate of St. Jerome, all six of which versions, it may
be mentioned, were incorporated by Origen in his famous Hexapla
Bible. The authority, therefore, for the accepted pointed Hebrew
text and for the old and revised versions of the English Bible is
weighty indeed. It is with great diffidence, therefore, that the
author presumes to offer any other interpretation than that usually
accepted of those verses in the first chapter of Genesis relating to
the creation of animal life.

The account of the creation of animal life as given in the first
chapter of Genesis begins with the 20th Verse, which we give in
the original unpointed Hebrew, together with a literal translation
of the same :

n^n tys] Y^'Z* c^d- i^-id*^ d'^-^s* n!2«^i

living creature reptile waters the abundantly produce shall Aleim said and

but which, according to the English version, old or revised, is trans-
lated, " And God said let the waters bring forth abundantly the
moving creature that hath life."

heavens the of expanse the of faces the above earth the above flutter shall birds

rendered according to the authorized version, " and fowl that may
fly above the earth in the open firmament of heaven." Admit-
ting that, while our translation of the Hebrew' is far less beautiful
and elegant than the language of the old or revised version, it is
nevertheless correct, it will be observed that the Hebrew word j*"itt^,
shrtz, is translated by us "reptile" instead of "moving creature,"
and Diy, ouph, "bird "instead of "fowl." The translation of the word
shrtz " reptile " instead of " moving creature " or " creeping creature "
as given in the marginal reading of the English versions is justified
first by its etymology, it being derived from the verb shrtz, " to creep
or crawl or to produce abundantly," and second, from the fact of it
being translated by the Seventy, Aquila and Theodotion tp-sra^

70 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

by Syramachus tp-sr6v, and by St. Jerome in the Vulgate, reptile.
Now while it may be urged by those who favor the text of the
English versions that as a reptile is a moving or creeping creature
the word shrtz may be so translated it does not necessarily follow
that all moving creatures are reptiles. It is obvious, therefore, that
if the order of creation according to Genesis is to be compared at
all with the order of evolution according to the testimony of the
^ocks, precise rather than general interpretations, as far as possible,
must be offered of the Hebrew words in question. The Hebrew
■word ouph, derived from the stem word meaning to vibrate, to flutter,
40 fly, we have translated "birds" rather than "fowl," as there is
nothing in the context to indicate that fowl especially were the first
birds created. According then to the 20th verse of the first chapter
■of Genesis reptiles were created first and birds of some kind afterward.
It is admitted by paleontologists that the earliest formations in
which the remains of reptiles have been found are of Permian age,
the remains found in the earlier carboniferous strata being rather
Amphibian than Reptilian in character. It is also admitted that
the earliest formations in which the remains of birds have been
found are of Jurassic age, a much later formation than the Per-
mian. According to the testimony of the rocks, then, reptiles
appeared first and birds of some kind afterward, and this is true
•even if the supposed footprints found in Triassic rocks should have
been made by bird-like animals, since the Triassic as well as the
Jurassic formations are of later date than the Permian. Such
Iseing the case, the sequence of life as given in the 20th verse of
Genesis is the same sequence as that of the rocks. Continuing now
the exposition in the 21st verse, according to the original Hebrew,

living creature every the and great reptiles the Aleim created and
wing of bird every the and kind their for waters the abundantly produced which moving

■or according to the old and new versions " And God created great
whales (0. V.), the great sea-monsters (N. V.), and every living
creature that moveth which the waters brought forth abundantly
.after their kind and every winged fowl. "

The only two words in the above verse the interpretation of which
■demands especial consideration are tninm and rmsh. The word
tuinm is translated in the Vulgate cete, and in the old English ver-
sion " whales," in the Septuagint jf^yVij, and in the new version " sea-

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 71

monster," the word used in the old English version being apparently
based upon the Latin, that in the new upon the Greek translations
of the Hebrew Bible. The word tninm is derived, according to
some Hebrew grammarians from tne, to shriek or wail, and denotes
in the form of a noun some kind of serpent, on account of the hiss-
ing noise made by such animals. By others, however, the root is
supposed to be tnn, to extend, the noun derived from the latter
indicating an elongated kind of reptile, such as a great serpent or
sea monster of some kind. That the word tninm, however derived,
refers to some kind of reptile is shown by it being rendered in the
148th Psalm, 7 verse, in the Septuagint, dpaxwrs?, in the Vulgate
dracones, and in the English versions " dragons." While the word
tninm might be translated " sea monsters," since reptiles like the
Dinosauria, etc., are regarded as sea dragons in a popular sense, it is
•difficult to justify the rendering of the word by " whales." Further,
if the latter interpretation of the word be accepted the difficulty
will then present itself of reconciling the statement of Genesis that
whales were created before mammals with the evidence of the
rocks that goes far to prove that the whales have descended from
carnivorous mammals like the seals, the Zieuglodon, an extinct
cetacean form combining in many respects the characters of both these
orders. On the supposition, however, that by tninm is meant rep-
tiles of some kind there is no difficulty in reconciling the statements
in Genesis with the facts of paleontology, the reptiles (schrtz)
appearing in Permian and Triassic times, such as Proterosaurus,
Nothosaurus, Khynchosaurus, etc., being followed by very different
kinds of reptiles (tninm) in Jurassic and Cretaceous eras. Marine
monsters like the Plesiosaurus, Ichthyosaurus, Elasmosaurus,
Edestosaurus and land monsters of which Hadrosaurus, Lselaps,
Iguanodon and Megalosaurus are examples. The Hebrew
word rmsht being derived from the stem word rmsh, to move, is
rendered both in the old and in the revised versions by " moveth,"
and in the Vulgate by " motabilem." As rmsh secondarily, how-
ever, means to creep or to crawl it was translated by the Seventy
kpiteroiv. All aquatic animals that moveth, creepeth or crawleth are
not, however, necessarily reptiles since there are mammals that
" moveth " in the water and " creepeth " or " crawleth " out of it.
Indeed, in the reference made in Gen., c. 7 : v. 21, to the death of
all flesh " that moveth upon the earth, both of fowl and of cattle
and of beast," and in Psalm 104, v. 21, " wherein all of the beasts

72 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

of the forest do creep," the word used in the original Hebrew to
express the idea of beasts moving or creeping is rmsh. The word
rrash being so associated with beasts it is as justifiable to suppose that
the moving or crawling animals that the waters so abundantly pro-
duced at this period of the earth's history, "day the fifth " so-called,
were aquatic mammals as that they were aquatic reptiles. Such an
interpretation is consistent with the facts of paleontology, the earliest
mammal yet discovered, Dromatherium, obtained from rocks of
Triassic age and probably of monotrematous nature, being preceded
by reptile-like animals, such as the theromorphric Pelycosauria of
the Permian, described by Cope. Returning to the exposition of the
21st verse it will be observed that while in the 20th verse, in referring
to the creation of birds, the Hebrew word ouph alone is used, in the
21st verse the same word is coupled with another word, kup. The word
knp, being derived from the stem word knp, to cover, when used as a

S ^ y a a un

noun should be translated " wing," the Arabic word v_fl,X> ^°f

having that meaning. The birds with wings, ouph, knp, were
created then, according to Genesis, after the birds ouph, presumably
without wings. The order of creation, however, is that of evolu-
tion, since the reptiles appeared first, being followed by reptile-like
birds, Compsognathus, and bird-like reptiles, Archeopteryx, Hes-
perornis (Marsh.)

Passing now to the consideration of the 24th verse, containing the
account of the creation of beasts, and translating the original
Hebrew literally we would read as follows :

nrj:^ -•'n a^'s: '^-^'^Tx s:tin d^-^« nos"''!

kind its for living creature the earth the forth bring shall Aleim said and

p« in^m tt'ani -Dna

earth the of beasts wild and thing moving and cattle

or as rendered in the old and new Versions " And God said let the
earth bring forth the living creature after his kind, cattle and creep-
ing thing and beast of the earth."

The HebrcAV word bhm is probably derived from a stem word,
bhm, though as a matter of fact there is no such verb in use at the
present day. As the kindred words in the Arabic and the Ethio-
pmn languages signify, however, "dumbness," the word used in
Hebrew as a noun has come to be accepted as meaning "dumb beasts."
According to this interpretation it was rendered by the Seventy,.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 73

T£zpd7:oda, four footed and in the Vulgate, Jumenta, draught cattle.
The word rmsh we have translated " moving thing," consistently
with the interpretation already given of that word in verse 21.
The word was translated ifj-sra iu the Septuagint and reptilia
in the Vulgate ; inconsistently in the latter case, however, as
essentially the same Avord was previously rendered motabilem.
It is difficult to understand why the word " reptile" should be associa-
ted with cattle and wild beasts as the context would lead one to
suppose that at this late period in the creation of animal life beasts
were more particularly created. It is immaterial, however, to the
argument whether rmsh be translated in this verse "reptiles" or
" moving, creeping or crawling creatures," since it is not to be sup-
posed that reptiles at once ceased to appear upon the earth.
The translation of the Hebrew word hitu admits of no discussion,
being translated in the Septuagint 'fr^pta, in the Vulgate bestias and
in the English versions " beasts." It will be remembered that the first
mammalia appearing upon the earth, the descendants of reptiles,
were probably INIonotremata, resembling the Ornithorynchus and
Echidna of the present day. From such lowly organized mamma-
lian forms descended the mammalia of the early Tertiary which in
turn gave place to the mammalia of the later Tertiary and present
geologic epochs. As the " beasts," " mammalia," the bhm of the
Hebrews were created on "day the sixth," that is after the rmsh or
promammalia, the account of the creation of the mammalia as given
in Genesis is therefore consistent with the order of the evolution of
the mammalia as based upon the testimony of the rocks. Resuming
what Genesis states as to the creation of life, it appears, if the trans-
lation just submitted be accepted as correct, that during "day the
fifth " the ancestors of the reptiles, the proreptilia, appeared upon the
earth, being succeeded during that period successively by the ances-
tors of the birds, the pro-aves, reptiles, the pro-mammalia and birds,
and that during the following period, " day the sixth," the mammalia
appeared. The accompanying diagram will illustrate succintly and
genealogically the oi'der of creation as just given.

The order of creation then, as given in the verses of the first
chapter of Genesis just translated, is essentially the same order as
that based upon the remains of animal life preserved in the rocks.
It may be argued, however, that the account of the creation of ani-
mal life as given in Genesis is very meagre, nothing being said as to
the creation or appearance of the lower forms of life, fishes even being

6

74

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1893.

only incidentally alluded to in verses 26 and 28 as among the ani-
mals given to man to rule over. The prescribed limits of this essay

Mammalia
bhm

Aves
ouph knp

Pro-mammalia
rmsh

Reptilia
tninm

Pro-aves
ouph

Pro-reptilia
shrtz

do not permit of the consideration of such meagreness, its object
being simply to show that the order of creation according to the
first chapter of Genesis so far as it is given, is consistent with the
well established facts of paleontology.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 75

THE INHERITANCE OF MODIFICATIONS DUE TO DISTURBANCES OF

THE EARLY STAGES OF DEVELOPMENT, ESPECIALLY IN THE

JAPANESE DOMESTICATED RACES OF GOLD-CARP.

BY JOHN A. RYDER.

The recent experiments in shaking apart the cells produced by
the first cleavage in the eggs of Echinoderms by Driesch, and of
Amphioxiis by Wilson, as well as the experiments of Roux, in the
same direction, with frogs' egga, show that it is possible for a single
one of the two blastomeres resulting from the first segmentation to
produce at once a complete embryo, or at any rate to finally recon-
stitute the missing half by means of what Roux has called post-
generation as in the case of the frogs' eggs.

These experiments, leading to the development of two separate
embryos from the same single egg, have been regarded as so remark-
able that they have caused a good deal of discussion. They are,
however, it seems to me, to be regarded as having much in common
with phenomena that at first thought seem to be widely distinct
from them, namely, the production of monstrosities in invertebrates
and vertebrates. The occasional duplication of peripheral parts
also, such as the tail in lizards when broken off", and an excess of
toes or fin-rays, perhaps, may be regarded as belonging ulti-
mately to the same category of phenomena, with a similar set of
causes operating to produce them, namely, profound disturbances of
the normal processes of karyokinesis during development or at the
moment of the beginning of the regeneration of lost parts.

Weber's experiment, reported many years ago, proving that the
eggs of the common pike, Emx lucius, could be caused to produce
double monstrosities if the recently fertilized ova were violently
shaken, is well known. The experience of fish-culturists in hand-
ling the eggs of Salmonoids is also well known. A man of very
great experience in the fish-cultural establishments of Austro-
Hungary informed me some years since that so great was the danger
in roughly handling or shaking the ova of the Salmonoids, during
the very early stages of their development, that carelessness in this
respect would result in producing monstrosities almost exclusively.
I have myself, while employed as an assistant by the U. S. Fish Com-
mission, seen batches of salmon brood, which were almost entirely
composed of fry that had developed as double or triple monsters,
«ach with but a single yolk.

76 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

The well-known experiments of Dare^te in artificially producing
monstrosities during the incubation of bird's eggs, are also well
known, as well as his methods of experiment, which consisted in
shaking the eggs, varnishing a portion of the shell or placing them
in an abnormal position, upon one end, for example, during the
early days of incubation. Similar experiments have also been made
by others, that abundantly confirm the conclusion that abnormal
conditions or absolute mechanical disturbances during segmentation
are the causes of such duplication of the embryo. Rauber attacked
the problem from a morphological standpoint and indicated in
some measure the method according to which the doubling occurred
in the germinal disk of the eggs of fishes, working upon the blasto-
derm of the eggs of the Pike, Esox. He showed that the embry-
onic axis was duplicated or triplicated, as the case might be, at the
border of the blastoderm. That the distance apart of the two con-
temporaneously developed embryos along the rim of the blastoderm,
determined the degree to which their axes would be ultimately fused
or distinct when the larval development had been completed.

In the study of a series of double monsters of the common lobster,
Homarus Americamcs, I found that some similar law applied in some
way, but unfortunately the very early stages were not seen, so that
it could not be formulated with precision. The evidence for the
existence of such a law was, however, sufficiently complete to war-
rant certain general deductions, since various degrees of fusion were
seen which were perfectly parallel to those of fishes, except that
instead of the ventral aspects being fused where the rudiments of
the embryo had been first formed at 180° apart on the blastoderm,,
it was here the dorsal aspects that were fused, a fact which is as
strictly in conformity with the morphology of the Arthropod series,
to which the lobster belongs, as the fusion of the ventral aspect of
the embryo of vertebrates is in conformity with the morphology of
the adult vertebrate body.

The discovery of Kleinenberg that the embryos of certain earth-
worms studied by him, were sometimes double and coherent, shows
that such a method of double development is widely distributed
within the series of Bilateralia or bilaterally symmetrical animals.

Such a budding or division in the embryo may indeed be looked
upon as somewhat akin to the development of buds or gemmae in
the Porifera or the statoblasts of certain fresh-water Bryozoa which
normally develop double embryos directly from a germinal body.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 77

There may also be a kinship detected in the tendency of Hydrozoa
and Scyphozoa to reproduce themselves in this way, especially the
sedentary or colonial forms. The tendency of star-fishes to bud out
branches from their arms is another illustration of the same thing,
and it has been recently shown that under exceptional conditions
the point where an arm of a star-fish is budded oflT may mark the
point near where a new mouth and a full complement of arms will
appear so as to develop a complete new individual.

As we rise in the scale of organization, this tendency to regener-
ate lost parts becomes more and more restricted to the reproduction
of peripheral parts only, but the tendency to produce monstrosities
in the shape of more or less completely fused embryos, due to dis-
turbances of development, remains in full force. Not only is this the
fact, but I also believe that I have indisputable evidence that an
embryo may undergo partial development within the uterus of a
mammal, when it will be arrested and actual histolysis with conse-
quent destruction and absorption of the embryo takes place. More
remarkable still is the conclusion reached by von Jhering that
certain Armadilloes normally produce several young from a single
fertilized ovum. His view being that in no other way can we
explain the envelopment of the entire litter of young of some of the
species of these animals in a common chorion. In this opinion, I
take it, von Jhering has the support of the opinion of authorities
as eminent as von KoUiker and H. Milne-Edwards.

When certain of the vertebrates such as fishes, batrachians and
reptiles are injured after adolescence is reached, they retain to a
limited degree the power to reproduce lost parts. Not only do they
possess this power, but they tend to reproduce such parts in dupli-
cate, that is, the peripheral part is reproduced double, and as if
diverging from the point of mutilation. An instance of this that I
recall is the case of a fine Amieva^ in the collection of the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, had its tail torn oflT,
and from the point where the tail was removed two new tails were
being produced. Other equally striking instances are the toes of
Salamanders that have been injured. The Axolotl and its kindred,
the species of Amblydorna, do the sarae thing when the toes are
injured or nibbled oflT by fishes ; the tendency is to reproduce them
in duplicate, or even in triplicate. The same thing liappens when
a fin-ray is injured or torn out in the fins of a Malacopterygian fish :
the actinotrichia tend to be reproduced in manifold and radiate

78 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

from the stump of the old ray in a divergent fashion. This fact I
have repeatedly observed, as well as the regeneration, i?i situ, of the
scales, where they have been forcibly removed from the fish by
accident. A case of this kind I traced and described some years
ago, the subject being a fine specimen of the mirror-carp that had
lost one of the large scales of the lateral line. In this case, how-
ever, there is no duplication of the scale during its regeneration.

It is also a notorious fact that when extra toes or fingers are
developed in the human subject, or in a mammal, they tend to
become hereditary. And the same seems to be the case with birds,,
in the instance of the Dorking fowl amongst domestic breeds. It is
my belief from the evidence presented above that such supernumerary
digits have been in the first place produced by disturbances during
segmentation or karyokinesis. While the embryo was developing
its digits in such higher forms and that such disturbances have been
registered, so to speak, as part of the hereditary tendencies of the
organism, and have thus been handed on to offspring as develop-
mental tendencies. The tendency to reproduce supernumerary toes
in the cat is well-known. The same tendency is shown in the dispo-
sition to reproduce extra thumbs or toes in certain human families.
The most extraordinary of these duplications is however presented
by the double or fan-tailed races of Japanese Gold-fishes, where the
duplication sometimes extends even to the anal fin, so that I have
elsewhere been tempted, upon the evidence presented by Dr. Watase
as to the development of these fishes, to put in a plea for the actual
realization of an eight-limbed vertebrate, a thing against which the
learned Professor Haughton, of Dublin, has argued with his wonted
acumen, in a still earlier paper touching the utility of the four-
limbed condition of the higher vertebrates.

I believe, however, noAV that the key to the mystery of the pro-
duction of the double-tailed gold-fishes is within our reach in the
light of the evidence presented above, that we can guess how
the Japanese went to work to produce their singular breeds of
Cco'assiitf' aurafiis. I believe, in short, that their practice was very
simple, and that they have probably antedated the practical appli-
cation of the facts of experimental embryology, as known in Europe
and our still more western civilization, by several centuries. Since
the Japanese records of some of these breeds are very old, as well
as the fact that the work of the Marquis de la Savigny, figuring the
breeds of these fishes, was published in 1790, we can infer for them
an antiquity of, at the very least, a couple of centuries.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 79

Now as to how the Orientals accomplished the production of
double-tailed forms of fishes. I believe they did this by taking the
eggs of the normal species of gold-fishes and shaking them, or dis-
turbing them in some way, as did Professor Weber with the eggs of
the pike. They would thus get some complete double monsters, some
with two heads and a single tail, and some with double tails. Mani-
festly the complete double monsters would be unlikely to survive.
Those most likely to survive would be those with only a duplication
of the tail. These being selected and bred would in all probability
hand onward the tendency to reproduce the double tail, a tendency
which could become very fixed and characteristic if judicious
selection were maintained by interested fanciers and breeders, such
as are said to exist in Japan, where these fishes of the finest double-
tailed races command high prices amongst the wealthy and culti-
vated classes.

If the remarkable peculiarities of the Japanese Gold-fishes were
produced as suggested above, and there seems to be no more likely
method of their origination, the whole question of the inheritance
of mutilations is reopened from a totally new point of view, and one
that cannot be assailed by Weismann and his following with much
show of success from their present attitude toward these questions.
It is clear, however, that we have here a most promising field for
experimental inquiry and one that should be at once cultivated in a
practical way.

That the direction of the regeneration of lost parts may be affected
by the plane of mutilation is sufliciently well attested by the exper-
iments of Barfurth on the tails of tad-poles, some of which I have
successfully repeated. If the tip of the tail were snipped ofl^ exactly
at right angles to the axis of the body, the tail w^as regenerated of
the normal form and straight backward. If at an acute angle,
regeneration took place so that the new tip was directed either
upward or downward, according as the inclined, regenerating cut
surface looked upward or downward. Such facts cannot be dis-
missed as useless in connection with the problem of inheritance in
general, if they have any bearing upon the questions raised in con-
nection with the inheritance of mutilations as viewed in the preced-
ing discussion. It is not unlikely that Barfurth's results do have
some bearing upon these questions as here viewed. If the plane of
mutilation or line of removal of digits affects their direction of
growth, as seems likely from Barfurth's and my own experiments,

80 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

we know to a certainty that there is only one avenue for the access
of new material during the process of regeneration of a digit for
example, and that is its proximal or basal portion. Through this
basal portion alone can new material reach the digit to build up its
distal parts. If growth and its accompanying karyokineses were
interfered with in any way across a narrow line over the stump, the
regenerative energies would be caused to manifest themselves on
either side of that line, and the result would be a tendency to repro-
duce the digits in duplicate beyond the point of mutilation, and in
a divergent fashion from the basal area through which alone new
material could find access by intussusception during the process of
regeneration. We consequently get a mechano-physiological expla-
nation of why it is that doubly reproduced distal parts tend to
diverge from each other radially.

The same principle, together with concrescence, may be invoked,
as it has been in another form, by Rauber," to explain the degree of
fusion of double or triple monsters produced by shaking mesoblastic
ova during their early blastodermic stages of development. But
Rauber's explanation must in this case be supplemented by a
consideration of the physical laws of the interfacial and free surface-
tensions which condition growth during the development of a thin
blastoderm in a meroblastic egg, making, for self-evident physical
reasons, the production of completely separate embryos well nigh
an impossibility, even by shaking or otherwise interfering with
development. Even if separate germinal disks were developed on
a telolecithal egg, there is every reason to believe that, as segmenta-
tion proceeded, the two resulting blastoderms would become fused
by their edges as the latter advanced over the yolk and approached
each other as they necessarily must in order to increase, as they do,
in a geometrical ratio, their power of appropriating the stored nutri-
tive mass of yolk. On a priori grounds, and for mechanical reasons,
therefore, the complete separation of the germinal matter of a
large-yolked meroblastic egg is impossible. The total separation of
the two first blastomeres of the equally segmenting, holoblastic eggs
of echinoderms and Ampkioxus, on the other hand, is easily accom-
plished by mere violent mechanical interference, so that completely
distinct and separate, but smaller, embryos are easily obtainable
if such separated blastomeres are allowed to develop under favorable
conditions.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 81

As stated in the earlier part of this paper, the regenerative power
seems, in low and primitive forms, and also in the very early stages
of the highest, as shown by von Jhering in the development of
Armadilloes, by what he calls temnogeny, or normal division and
complete separation of the cells of the fertilized egg, to be most
completely represented in the early blastomeres or the products
of the early segmentations. In the next grade of organic types,
Porifera and Coelenterata, there appears to be a wider exten-
sion upon the whole organism and its parts of this regenerative
power. In bryozoa and echinoderms there is still in many forms
more or less of this regenerative power distributed throughout the
organism, but as specialization proceeds it seems to become less
marked, and if there is disturbance of the mode of development of
the Bilateralia, besides the apparently normal consecutive or linear
gemmation as in Monotus, Mijrianida and Aidolytus, there is devel.
oped a tendency to double the axis so that branched or coherent
double individuals arise. This reaches a most remarkable expres-
sion amongst Syllid worms, as worked out by Professor Mcintosh,
and may even extend to an early stage, as in the case of the produc-
tion of double embryos in Lumbriciis, according to Kleinenberg.
In both the arthropod and vertebrate series disturbances of early
embryonic development, affecting the order and relations of the
karyokinetic processes in the blastoderm, are productive of double
monstrosities variously fused, according to a law which has been to
some extent defined by Rauber.

As we proceed in our review of the successively higher groups we
find that this purely regenerative power becomes less and less
marked. In some worms, for example, the head may be regenerated
if cut off. It is doubtful whether this would be possible with even
the lowest vertebrate. In the vertebrates and arthropods or highest
Bilateralia, the regenerative power is reduced to the power of repro-
■ducing lost digits or entire appendages, as in Crustacea. In verte-
brates it is finally restricted in fishes, batrachians and reptiles to* the
regeneration of the tail or the distal parts of the extremities in the
adult, and in the highest of these series, namely, birds and mam-
mals, the power of the adult to regenerate lost distal parts of the
extremities is also lost. Nevertheless, there remains in the tolerably
advanced embryos of these forms the power to respond in a remark-
able way to disturbances of the normal hereditary or regenerative
processes involving the distal parts of the extremities, such as the

82 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

digits. The regenerative powers therefore seem to become dimin-
ished with the specialization of a type, and to be manifested last of
all in the distal ends of the extremities. The most marked changes
may occur in the way of duplication, triplicatiou, etc., of the axis,
even in the highest types, provided the development or processes of
segmentation are disturbed early enough, and in some definite way.
The conclusion which is warranted from the whole of the foregoing
is that the regenerative power of organisms disappears as we rise in
the scale of organization, last oj all in the peripheral extremital parts.
A further observation is justified, which is, that the power to produce
monstrosities or congenital aberrations of development due to external
disturbances of segmentation, during growth, diminishes in the higher
forms pari passu with the advance in development. Finally, it may
be affirmed with much show of probability that aberrations of
development produced by disturbances of the processes of segmen-
tation during growth, may become hereditary, as illustrated by the
probable inheritance of partially duplicated axes in the tails of
Japanese gold-fishes, or of supernumerary digits in many mammals
and in Man.

How such new parts, originated as here supposed, can transmit to
the ova of the parent body, of which they form a part, a tendency
to cause them ( the new characters ) to reappear in the off^spring
developed from such ova or germs, cannot be explained without
supposing that the new part of the body of the parent influences at
a distance the characters and potentialities of the germinal matter
produced by it in its gonads. The difiiculties in the case of the
partly double body of the Japanese Gold-fishes are peculiar, in that
we have to assume that hereditary tendencies are transmitted from
a parent body and part of another of each sex, making in all, ten-
dencies transmitted from two bodies and parts of two others, in the
course of the ordinary sexual reproduction of the double-tailed
species, since there cannot be the slightest doubt that, in this case,
we have to deal with partially double monsters (as is proved by
their morphology), with normally developed reproductive powers. I
confess to an utter inability to see how this can be done by means of
gemmules, the oldest hypothesis of heredity, first formulated by
Democritus, then restated in a more modern form by BuflTon, then
by Erasmus Darwin in the Zoonomia, and lastly by Charles Darwin.
This doctrine therefore has a very respectable pedigree, but it is
strange that none of the later writers credit their predecessors with.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 83

having entertained similar opinions. But to recur to my point, it is
clearly certain that the partially double body of the parent in this
case must have influenced the germs it inclosed at some time in the
history of the race, or at the time the latter was originated by the
Orientals. The first partially double, monstrous pair of gold-fishes
to have offspring must have been reared somewhere in the East ;
whether in Corea, China or Japan does not matter. The fact that
they reproduced themselves is indisputable. That they were first
produced by artificial interference with, or mutilation of the normal
processes of their early development becomes, in the light of what
has been said above, a conclusion of the utmost probability. Weis-
mann and his followers can take either horn of this dilemma. The
inevitable conclusions are : first, that new parts of the parent body
at a distance do at once, in the first generation, influence the germ-
cells inclosed by such a parent body ; secondly, the i^robability of
the inheritance of the effects of certain mutilations, injuries, interfer-
ences or displacement of parts, during the early stages of develop-
ment, amounts almost to a certainty.

Moreover, whereas the separation of the early cells or blastonieres
in certain eggs, such as those of Armadilloes, Sea-Urchins and the
Lancelet and Frog is possible, the egg in these cases being essen-
tially holoblastic at the time of the first two cleavages, two or more
completely separate embryos can be developed. The conditions of
development, it must be borne in mind, in the higher series, where a
blastoderm is developed, closely and firmly adherent to the very
large, nutritive yolk, are very different from the foregoing. So dif-
ferent indeed, are the conditions of development in these latter mer-
oblastic forms that it would be extremely improbable that entirely
separate and multiple embryos could be developed from their ova.
At most only such mechanical disturbances would be possible as
would lead to a more or less complete duplication, triplication, etc.
of embryos. That the effects of such embr3'onic mutilations or
interferences may be hereditarily transmitted will hardly be admit-
ted by the anti-niutilationists, but to evade the force of these facts
is impossible.

The coherence of the embryos together in meroblastic eggs, con-
ditioned as it is by the interfacial and free surface-tensions between
the blastoderm and yolk, is, it seems to me, plainly indicative of the
indisputable conclusion that mutilational influences operating upon
meroblastic ova are themselves influenced by mere physical condi-

^4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

tions and. forces, and that even these leave a reminiscence of tlieir
effects upon the germs, the development of which they thus indi-
rectly affect. What again shall be said in such cases of the effect
of such external or physical agencies or conditions in modifying the
development of future generations, as seems to be proved by the
history of the domesticated races of Japanese Gold-fishes? Weis-
mann must now own, if the preceding views can be sustained,
that lie is beaten upon his own ground, and also admit that he has
been in error from the beginning as to the non-transmission to the
germs of characters that have been acquired by the body of the
parent.

The domesticated races of Japanese Gold-fishes outstrip every
known form of domesticated animal in the extent to which they
have been modified, and it is therefore strange that Mr, Darwin
should have devoted so little consideration to them in his works.
In one of his botanical works Mr. Darwin makes the suggestion
that the bilateral halves of the Bilateralia may have arisen by
longitudinal concrescence of two similar individuals of opposite sex.
This suggestion of his, as to the origin of the bilaterally sym-
metrical condition, may be dismissed as exceedingly improbable and
unfortunate, and as in direct conflict, moreover, with the known
mode of the development of monsters with double axes. Such mon-
strous races, as is proved by the morphology of the adult Japanese
Gold-fishes, their known analogies to the development of double
vertebrate monsters, have been produced almost beyond a shadow of
doubt by mutilational interference with the early processes of nor-
mal development, and this monstrous mode of development has
become hereditary.

The procedure by means of which the Orientals originated their
peculiar races of Gold-fishes I believe was more exactly as
follows: After the blastoderm had spread over about one-third or
more of the surface of the yolk, the eggs were shaken or violently
disturbed. This proceeding would cause the production of one or
more new embryonic axes at the rim of the blastoderm near the
original axis, but the new axes would not develop a head, but
would, as a result of the operation of the principle of concrescence,
soon fuse with the caudal end of the original or first-formed embry-
onic axis. This would cause a doubling, more or less complete, of
the caudal end or urosome of the embryo. In this way it may be
siipposed that the partially double urosome of these singular fishes

1893.] NATURAL, SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 85^

was developed, so far at least as to duplicate the hypural system of
bones of the tail, and consequently the tail itself, while this doubling
would also manifest itself farther forward so as to sometimes double
the anal fins as well. The caudal part of the notochordal axis i&
rarely doubled, though there is an evident tendency to do so in some
individuals.

The great exaggeration in the development of the fins in Japanese
Gold-fishes, especially the caudal, is, however, not wholly accounted
for by the theory of the inheritance of tendencies toward monstrous
development. Nor is the obvious degeneration of certain parts of the
muscular system in some of the races thus accounted for. Nor can
we again account for the differences in the relative lengths of the
intestine in the different races on such a hypothesis. Only one
structure, the squamation and the number of myotomes, seems to
have remained constant in the course of the great modifications
which these fishes have undergone. I find that the number of rows
of scales in the lateral line in all the races I have studied, presents
practically no variation ; that is, the number of scales in the lateral
line varies only from 25 to 26. The number of myotomes is
also constant in all the races, and corresponds to the number of
transverse rows of scales. In order to make the facts stated above
somewhat more easy of apprehension, I have tabulated the result 'of
a series of careful measurements, based upon tliree races, viz : (1)
the normal or common gold-fish, Carassius auratus ; (2) a long-
bodied double-tailed variety of great beauty, which has been reared
in the aquaria of Dr. W. H. Wahl, who has kindly let me have
some dead individuals, for study; (3) a short-bodied double-
tailed race with a very protuberant abdomen, which were imported
from Japan, and of which dead examples were furnished me by
Mr. W. P. Seal.

I found that the head in all cases was the least variable part of
the animal. I have accordingly regarded it as a standard of com-
parison in a general final table. The following tables will explain
themselves, and give absolute measurements in millimetres of the
same parts of the three races in parallel columns.

By urosome is meant the part of the trunk behind the body cav-
ity, and between the latter and the base of the caudal fin. 1 have
compared the musculature of the abdomen and urosome to a frus-
tum of a cone with an elliptical cross section. In this way it is
possible to show, taking the absolute measurements in connection

-86

PEOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF
I.

[1893.

Total length
of head, body
and urosome.

Length
of body.

Length
of head.

Length

of
intestine.

Width of
end of uro-
some.

1 Common
race.

90 mm.

62 mm.

28 mm.

364 mm.

15 mm.

2 Long-bodied
Japanese
double - tailed

74 mm.

51 mm.

23 mm.

213 mm.

10 mm.

race.

3 Short-bodied

Japanese
double - tailed

47 mm.

28 mm.

19 mm.

226 mm.

7 mm.

race.

^th other facts, that there has been a process of degeneration at
work in reducing the proportional volume of the musculature of
the body and urosome in the double-tailed races. Table II gives
the height of this frustum of a cone to which I have compared the
musculature of the body, as well as the major diameters of the base
and apex of the frustum in millimetres, for each race in absolute
measurement,

II.

Length of
caudal fin.

Distance
from vent
to caudal.

Width of
base of

muscular
frustum

of a cone.

Height of Width of

muscular a p e x of

frustum, muscular

frustum

of a cone.

Common
race.

36 mm.

25 mm.

37 mm.

62 mm.

15 mm.

Long-bodied
•Japanese doub-
le-tailed race.

80 mm.

19 mm.

28 mm.

51 mm.

10 mm.

Short-bodied
Japanese doub-
le-tailed race.

36 mm.

10 mm.

23 mm.

28 mm.

7 mm.

In a third table I have attempted to represent the proportions of
the several parts to each other, but from tables I and II, I obtain
•data for a more general and final fourth table in which the individ-
uals are supposed to be of the same age, and more nearly of the
«ame size and weight than was the material at my disposal.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

III.

87

Ratio of
he a d to
length o f
intestine.

Ratio of total
length to length
of intestine.

Ratio of length
of the body to
the length o f
the intestine.

Ratio of width
of urosome to
total length of
head, body and
urosome.

Ratio of
total length
of the head,
body and
urosome to
the length
of the tail.

Common
race.

1:13

1:4-45

1 : 5-85.

1:6

2-5:1

Long-bodied
Japanese race.

1 : 9-25

1:2-85

1:4-2

1:7-4

1:8:3

Short-bodied
Japanese race.

1 : 11-75

1:4-6

1:8

1 : 6-71

1-33 : 1

Taking the head as the least variable portion of the three races,
and assigning to it an arbitrary value of 50 mm. in a hypothetical
individual by dividing the actual lengths of the other parts in mil-
limetres by their own length of head in millimetres, then multiply-
ing this product by 50, I get a new set of values in which the parts
are in the proportion of the preceding table, but in which the indi-
viduals are, in the case of each race, of about the same size, age and
condition of volume, and consonant with the modifications that
have been suffered by each one. This table is given below, and
from it it is possible to plot the outlines of the three hypothetical
frustums of cones that will represent approximately the condition
of development of the musculature of the body and tail of the
three races as seen from the side.

IV.

Common
race.

Long-bodied
Japanese race.

Short-bodied
Japanese race.

Length of
intestine.

650 mm.

4625 mm.

587'5 mm.

Length
ofhead.

50

50

50

Height o f
frustum.

110-7 mm.

110-8 ram.

73-65 mm.

D i a m eter
of major
axis of base
of frustum.

66-2 mm.

65 mm.

61-3 mm.

D i a m eter D i s t a n c e
of maj o r of anus from
ax is of apex base of cau-
of frustum, dal.

24-3 mm.

21-7 mm;

18-4 mm.

42 mm.

41 mm.

26-3 mm.

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1893.

These tables aud
the appended dia-
gram based upon
them, it seems to
me, make it tolera-
bly certain that
there has actually^
be e u a marked
degeneration in the
relative p r o p o r -
tional development
of the volumes of"
the musculature of
the body and uro-
some or tail in two
of the three races
examined. 0th e r
facts, however, for-
tify this conclusion
very strongly. The
most important
being the fact that
the vertical rows of
scales just behind
the abdomen, on the
sides of the urosome
of the short-bodied
race, overlap each
A. Outline of frustum of cone representing the mus- O^ner I a r more
culature of body and urosome of common race of Gold- extensively than do
carp. B. Same of long-bodied Japanese race, reared those in the other
byDr. Wahl. C. Same of short-bodied Japanese race. two. When we

come to examine the muscular somites underlying these rows of
greatly overlapping scales in the short-bodied race, we actually find
them markedly shorter than those some distance behind, or those
some distance in front of them. This seems to me to prove conclu-
sively that there has been actual degeneration of the muscular sys-
tem of the body or trunk, and that this degeneration is especially
well marked in the short-bodied race. The intestine in the latter is
also found to be proportionally longer than in the normal, common,.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 89

or in the long-bodied, double-tailed races. This increase in the
length of the intestine is also indicated by the very protuberant
abdomen of the short-bodied race. This short-bodied race, with a
protuberant abdomen, I am informed by breeders, is a very vora-
cious feeder, thus not belying the indications of its large abdomen
and proportionally long intestine.

It is also probable that the bodies of the vertebr;* are shorter in
the short-bodied than in the long-bodied races. This point I have,
however, neglected to determine,

I believe, in short, that the degenerative changes in the muscular
system of the Japanese Gold-fishes is connected with their continued
restraint to small aquaria for many generations, and that their mus-
cular system has degenerated through disuse. That, on the other
hand, the failure to be able to expend energy in the production of
motion of the body in the water has reacted in other ways upon
their organization, and especially upon the growth of the fins. This
has gone on until, in some of the races, it would actually be possible
to envelop almost the entire head and body in the enormous double
caudal. In fact, these members grow so long that they become an
actual hindrance to rapid swimming, and are of less use in pro-
pelling the fish in the water, so that their swimming becomes very
slow, and seemingly performed with some difficulty as compared
with the normal form. All the fins partake of this tendency to
become extended ; the pectorals enlarge and lengthen, and the
dorsal, in some races, becomes so long that it falls over and over-
hangs one side of the body. Fish-culturists also tell me that it is
useless to try to keep these races with other species of fishes in
ponds, because the more active carnivorous forms will soon bite off
and destroy the long, graceful, and lace-like caudals of these help-
lessly modified Japanese races. These races have been so modified
by man's agency, that they have become absolutely unfitted to suc-
cessfully battle for existence, if left to themselves.

Their sluggish habits have been purposely cultivated by Oriental
fish-fanciers. To such an extreme of sluggishness have they been
brought, that, owing to their monstrous development, they are some-
times no longer able to maintain their equilibrium in the water, but
stand on the head or tail in the very small aquaria, in which they
are kept, and in which they would become asphyxiated were it not
for the precaution taken by the Japanese to introduce into the same
7

so PROCEEDI>'^GS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

aquarium small, harmless, but very active fishes of other species, in
-order that the water be kept circulating, and thus aerated for the
Jbenefit of the helplessly modified, but most valued tenant.

These circumstances give, it seems to me, a clew to the explana-
tion, not only of the degeneration of the musculature under domes-
tication, owing to its enforced disuse, but also some indication of
what are the causes of the extension of the fins. The material
saved from expenditure in muscular effort may be expended in
growth iu another direction, and the most advantageous would be
that which would increase the surface of the fins, and thus render
them useful in dermal respiration. The large vessels and numerous
capillaries in the huge tails of very fine specimens of the Kinyiko
race, that I have seen, indicate that the caudal fin may possibly
5erve in a very important way as an adjunct to branchial respira-
tion. The question therefore arises, have not the immense fins of
the Japanese double-tailed gold-fishes been developed partially in
physiological response to artificial conditions of respiration, that
were not as favorable as those enjoyed by their wild congeners?
That the dorsal, anal and caudal fins may be so modified as to min-
ister in an important way to the needs of respiration, is proved by
the development of the richly vascular and exaggerated vertical
£ns of the embryos of fcetal Embiotocoid fishes, as long ago shown
bv Blake, and fully confirmed and elaborated in greater detail by
the writer.

It is also a remarkable fact that the fins and tail of the larvie of the
•double long-tailed races do not show such characters at once, but it is
not until long after thelarval stages-are passed, that the breeder can be
certain of rearing a specimen with a fine long tail, from any given
young fish. The fishes are usually upward of two inches iu length
before the breeder can be pretty sure that the young or half-grown
individuals will develop a great length of tail. This fact shows
that the long tail was originally acquired very late in ontogenetic
development, and is not a larvally apparent differentiation. This
circumstance is also unique amongst fishes, and for that matter,
almost the exact reverse of what usually takes place, since the young
of many marine fishes have certain parts of the fins very greatly
produced, only to be absorbed before adolescence is reached. This
is the case with the larvie of Lophim and Fierasfer. Only amongst
higher animals do we find secondary sexual characters produced at
a late period of growth, such as the deciduous horns of the Deer

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 91

family, or defensive organs, such as the horns of the ox and ante-
lope families, which are produced at a relatively late period.

The fact that the very long fins of the full grown individuals of
the double-tailed races of Gold-carp are only fully developed at a
very late period of the growth of the animal, is in harmony with the
view that the hypertrophy of those organs is associated with a
correlative degeneration of the muscular system of the trunk, and
a possible use of these structures with their great amount of surface
as respiratory organs, in the restricted and badly aerated tanks
and aquaria in which they have been bred for centuries.

Since the above was written, Mr. W. P. Seal has sent me a series
of the "telescope-eyed" double-tailed race of Gold-carp. This,
together with the materials previously supplied by the same gentle-
man and Dr. Wahl, enables me to greatly extend my comparisons
and also, as will be seen below, to add some very remarkable facts to
our knowledge of these singular domesticated races of fishes as com-
pared with their wild congeners, long since introduced into the
Schuylkill, and now native to that river.

The most astonishing peculiarity of the " telescope-eyed " race is
the development of the eyes. The latter are very much larger pro-
portionally than in the common or in any other races, so that the
eyes actually protrude from the orbits in a most grotesque manner.
The size of the eyes on opposite sides of the head even seem to vary
somewhat, and in the extent to which they protrude from the
orbit. In some specimens the eye-balls are a third more in diam-
eter across the equator than in either the common or the other
double-tailed races. A broad band or ring of integument passes
all round the equator of the eye-ball joining the cornea distally
and the margin of the orbit proximally.

The most surprising tact of all, however, is the shape of the eye-
ball in the telescope-eyed race, in that the eye-ball tends to become
greatly elongated in the direction of its optic axis. Sometimes the
diflTerence between the axial and equatorial diameter is as much as
three millimetres, constituting an extremely myopic form of eye-ball.
The form of the eyeball in the common race is flat or hypermetropic
in character. A gradual passage from the hypermetropic form of
eye-ball to the myopic is shown in the following table, as based
upon actual approximate measurements of the eye-balls of indi-
viduals of the three races.

92

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

V.

[1893.

Races.

Total length of
specimen.

Equatorial diame-
ter of eye-ball.

Axial diameter of
eye-ball.

Common.

130 mm.

7 mm.

5 mm.

Short -bodied.

55 mm.

5 mm.

4 mm.

" Telescope-eyed."
No. 1.

63 mm.

6 mm.

6 mm.

No. 2.

70 mm.

6 mm.

9 mm.

The size and shape of the globular lens in the "telescope-eyed"
race is not appreciably different from that of the other races with,
smaller eye-balls. It would therefore, seem impossible for the
image formed by the lens of a distant object in the " telescope
eyed " race, to be thrown upon the retina at all, consequently the
condition is one of near-sightedness, or of an optical adjustment for
very near objects. The conditions of life of these races, in small
tanks or aquaria, where they are bred under conditions of the great-
est protection from man, would in their restricted quarters actually
foster the development of near-sightedness, and any variations in
that direction would actually tend to be preserved. There is a con-
dition of disuse also to be taken into account in this process, since
these fishes no longer need their eyes with which to watch the
approach of their enemies, but only to look out for their food,
which is supplied to them by their human friends and protectors.-
To what extent this factor has been of service in altering the shape
of the eye-balls, it is of course, as yet, impossible to state. The pre-
ceding table V, however, makes the gradual passage from the hyper-
metropic or flat eye of the normal race to that of the myopic or long
eye of the " telescope-eyed " race sufficiently obvious as the series of
measurements given of the eye-balls of the different races proves.

The fact that a race of fishes may become myopic, as would seem
to be indicated by the foregoing data, is most surprising, aud affords
a case parallel in some respects with that of the human race itself;
but in the case of these fishes the myopic tendency has probably
been further developed by the intentional selection of myopic indi-

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 93

vidiials by breeders and fanciers for breeding purposes. A near-
sighted fish is certainly au anomaly, and the name " telescope " fish,
in allusion to the protruding eye-balls, becomes a misnomer, since the
form of the eye is distinctly myopic .and short-sighted, and not
hypermetropic or far-sighted as required of an optical organ having
telescopic capabilities. These facts go still further to support my
assertion that these races of Gold-carp are the most profoundly
modified of any known race of domesticated animal organisms. No
•other domesticated animal, as far as I am aware, shows such pro-
nounced evidence of becoming myopic.

These " telescope eyed " fishes also show evidences of mal-develop-
ment of the dorsal fins, and a tendency to have the vertebral col-
umn curved downward behind in an abnormal way, producing the
appearance of a " hunch-backed condition." Such defective devel-
opment of the dorsal together with a hunched back is also not
infrequent amongst the other short-bodied and long-bodied double-
tailed-races. Such defective development of the dorsal, accom-
panied by a hunched back, is also found in partially monstrous
trout, some of which have been recently figured by a writer in
Forest and Stream (vol. xxxix, p. 562, 1892), from specimens sup-
plied by Mr. Creveling, which measured from 6? to 8 inches in
length. Since these changes in the development of trout are well
known to be associated with injuries inflicted during the early
stages of development, the case that I have made out for the origin
of the double-tailed races of Gold-fish is thus markedly strengthened
by similar facts derived from an entirely distinct family, the Sal-
monidse. All of the foregoing evidence consequently compels me to
abandon the view entertained by me in an earlier paper^ respecting
the origin of the double-tailed races of Gold-carp, in which it was
suggested that the doubling of the anal and caudal was a reversion
to a remote ancestral condition in fishes, in which paired lateral-fin
folds extended for the whole length of the body. This view involves
the conception that the single caudal of existing fishes was primi-
tively a double organ, which has been produced by the concrescence
of a pair of lateral caudals, a doctrine which it is quite impossible
to reconcile with the morphology of the tails of normal fishes, or that
of the tails of the double-tailed races of Gold-carp. What to my
mind makes this view still more improbable is the fact that I find
the double tails of these " telescope-eyed " forms completely divided

^An eight-limbed Vertebrate. American Naturalist, September, 1887, pp. 862-
863.

94 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1893.

up to the vertebral axis, so that, morphologically speaking, there
are parts of two distinct axes, or individuals, present in each speci-
men. This evidence, together with that respecting the defective
development of the dorsal, and the tendency toward a hunch-
backed and deformed condition, perfectly parallel to the conditions
seen in traumatically deformed trout, seems to me to almost conclu-
sively prove that the double-tailed races of Gold-carp have arisen
in the first place as a consequence of injuries inflicted during the
early development of the eggs and embryos, and that the effects of
these embryonic traumatisms have become hereditarily transmissible,
as the facts seem to indicate.

1893.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

95

THE VASCULAR RESPIRATORY MECHANISM OF THE VERTICAL FINS
OF THE VIVIPAROUS EMBIOTOCID^.

BY JOHN A. RYDER.

The young surf-perch, Ditrema laterale, from which this figure i&
drawn, measured about twenty-three millimetres in length. It was
one of several which were removed from the saccular ovary of
the parent, each young fish lying lengthwise and disposed so as to
bring the enormously expanded vertical fins into contact with the
wide ovarian folds and the sides of the ovarian walls. As can be
seen from the figure, the lateral area of the vertical fins quite equals,.

if it does not exceed, the lateral areas of the body. In fact, the
dorsal is as high as the body is deep. In the same way the caudal
fin is as wide at its widest part as the body's greatest width. The
total length of the caudal is not far from a third of the total length
of this larval stage. Another feature which distinguishes this
young fish from the young of all other species is the highly vascu-
lar condition of the inter-radial membranes of the vertical fins.
This vascularity is not only obvious when the object is viewed with
a transmitted light, but also in sections. The most marked devel-
opment of capillary vessels is found in the flattened lobes with
which the fins are bordered. Fourteen very distinct lobes with deep
notches between them are found along the margin of the tail ; about

96 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1893.

twenty-eight smaller lobes can be counted on the margin of the anal
fin. About eighteen well-marked lobes presenting the highly vas-
cular character of the others, already mentioned, are found to bor-
der the dorsal fin, the spaces between the anterior nine rays of
which, unlike the others of the same fins, are non-vascular. In cor-
respondence with this highly vascular condition of the marginal
lobes and the inter-radial spaces in these three sets of fins, there is
found to be developed a system of three sets of large arterial and
venous trunks which send the blood to and carry it away from the
vertical fins.

The caudal termination of the caudal vein and aorta supply the
caudal fin. In the figure it is mainly the venous trunks which are
represented. It is seen that at the point where the caudal vein
enters the caudal fin it divides into two very large trunks, such as
are not met with in any other known type of fish of the same age.
One of these trunks passes in a dorsal and another in a ventral
direction, carrying away the blood from the dorsal and ventral
halves respectively of the caudal fin. The number of branches
which pass from the two trunks mentioned correspond very closely
to the number of inter-radial spaces. A second system of vessels,
much slighter in caliber after death than they probably were
during life, is seen just a little way anterior to the two large venous
trunks already described. These are probably the dorsal and ven-
tral branches of the arterial system into which the posterior termi-
nation of the caudal portion of the aorta divides in order to supply
the caudal fin-membranes with arterial blood. The radiating venous
and arterial inter-radial vessels pass quite to the margin of the
caudal, where they form vascular arcs around the edges of the flat
vascular lobes already described. From within this vascular arc to
the point of insertion of the caudal rays the inter-radial membrane
is found to be traversed by a close plexus of capillary vessels.
This plexus is excavated in a connective tissue which lies between
the epidermis of the opposite sides of the fin.

Four sets of vascular trunks pass from the dorsal ; of these the
three posterior are the most strongly dev^eloped. They take their
rise directly from the caudal vein and caudal portion of the aorta
on the dorsal aspect of these vessels. Each of these vessels upon
reaching the base of the dorsal divides into an anterior and poste-
rior trunk. Each of these trunks gives off" in a vertical direction
nearly at right angles to themselves a series of inter-radial vessels.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 97

The posterior trunk gives off the greatest number of these inter-
radial vessels. The anterior main trunk gives oft' four inter-radial
"vessels. The marginal lobes are highly vascular, although not so
wide nor so long as those of the caudal fin.

The aual fin receives its vascular, supply through four sets of
large trunks coming off from the inferior aspect of the caudal vein
and aorta. These trunks pass nearly straight downward toward
the margin of the anal, their distal portions only being slightly tor-
tuous. The posterior or fourth trunk, as are all the others, is bifur-
cated at the base of the anal into an anterior and posterior branch
much in the same way as the similar vessels divide in the dorsal.
The fourth trunk gives oft" the greatest number of inter-radial ves-
sels. The second and third give oft' a smaller number of such
inter-radial branches. The first anal trunk appears to supply a
portion of the inter-radial spaces at the anterior edge of the anal
fin while branches moi'e or less intimately associated with it, or
derived from it, pass to the greatly hypertrophied hind-gut. At any
rate the vascular supply of this curiously hypertrophied part of the
alimentary tract is given oft" close to this vessel.

In whatever way the blood passes through the walls of the hind
gut H. G. ; it finds its way at last to a large vascular trunk marked
S, lying on the ventro-anterior face of H. G. This large vessel S
is evidently the homologue of the sub-intestinal vein in other fishes.
At the anterior end of S large trunks diverge from it, pass around
the mid gut and find their way into the liver. These trunks repre-
sent the portal system. Little that is noteworthy can be made out
from a transparent view in regard to the way in which the blood
reaches the heart from the jugulars. Sections indicate that the
Cuvierian ducts are very spacious, more so than is represented in
the diagram.

The ventricle of the heart H is well developed with thick muscu-
lar walls. The bulbus arteriosus is a simple thickened muscular
tube extending forward from H. The homologies and relations of
a large trunk ascending obliquely forward and upward, then bend-
ing downward and forward, probably meeting its fellow of the
opposite side before it traverses the median face of the mid brain is
diflacult to determine. A smaller trunk descends from the region
over the body toward the eye and prol)ably joins the ophthalmic
vessels in that region to finally empty into the basilars and jugulars
which pass backward toward the origin of the Cuvierian ducts.

98 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893^

The membrane bones of the skull are already fairly well developed,
as are, in fact, the membrane bones throughout the body generally.
The vertebral rings of the vertebral column are already defined,
and are separated from each other by considerable inter-vertebral
spaces. Their dorsal and vertical outer margins are gently concave.
The ribs, the neural and haemal arches are developed and the com-
plicated musculature of the caudal fin is already well marked. The
hypural pieces of the caudal are well-developed in cartilage and a
partly membranous matrix. The pectoral fins are already well-
developed but present as far as I have been able to make out no
such vascularization as the others. The ventrals are still small and
undeveloped. The lateral line system does not seem to be strongly
marked at this stage ; the small round pore behind the eye repre-
sents its connection with the exterior. The air bladder is devel-
oped and occupies considerable space at the point P in the body
cavity. Just in front of the air bladder is a large highly vascular
mass representing the Wolffian body or kidney. The glandular
portion of the Wolffian body is thus seen to be quite anterior in
position. Cross-sections show that Wolffian ducts are present behind
the region of the Wolffian body as a pair of simple longitudinal
canals. These ducts pass backward parallel with each other as far
as the downward flexure of the hind gut H G. At this point they
suddenly bend downward and gradually converge so as to meet just
before opening to the exterior between the hernia-like protrusion of
the lower portion of the hind gut and the anterior margin of the
anal fin.

As already stated the hind gut is very much enlarged in trans-
verse diameter, as may be seen from the accompanying figure.
Upon being cut open it is found to be filled up with villous or fila-
mentous productions of its lining mucous membrane. These villi
tend to be flattened, and with the widest portion of their bases
extending parallel with respect to each other and in conformity with
the length of the intestine. The anal opening A is found on the
posterior face of the hernia-like protrusion of the abdominal wall
caused by the hypertrophied hind-gut. The mid-gut is separated
sharply from the hind-gut by a pyloric constriction just a little
below and behind P as shown in the diagram. The mid-gut or
gastric portion of the intestinal canal presents no very unusual fea-
tures except that its internal face is thrown into parallel longitudi-

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 99

nal folds, which curve in the direction of the flexure of this part of
the intestine which appears to form a loop upon itself.

The function of the inter-radial and marginal plexuses of capilla-
ries of the young of these fishes, as the accompanying figure shows
must be in large measure respiratory. The figure shows the maxi-
mum proportional development of the vertical fins, but at a stage
about twice the length of the one here figured, the vertical fins
begin to become reduced in size so as to approximate their rela-
tively reduced proportions in the adult. The integuments of the
sides of the body now also become highly vascular, which dermal
vascularity also seems to disappear before the birth of the young.
The great vascular trunks that especially supply the vertical fins
with blood, as shown in the figure, also now atrophy in a measure
and become subservient only to the nourishment and metabolism of
the tissues of the fins. The histological changes in the fins of these
young viviparously developed fishes are therefore very great in the
course of their sojourn in the ovary of the parent. That the highly
vascular fins and the great vascular trunks which supply them,
must in a measure subserve a function in such foetal fishes very sim-
ilar to that of a placenta in a non-deciduate foetal mammal, there
can scarcely be any doubt.

100 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

INVOLUTION FORM OF THE TUBERCLE BACILLUS AND THE EFFECT
OF SUBCUTANEOUS INJECTIONS OF ORGANIC SUB-
STANCES ON INFLAMMATIONS.

By Samuel G. Dixon, M. D.

Prof. Robert Koch announced in 1882 the discovery of the cause
of Tuberculosis. He claimed that consumption was produced by a
peculiar hacillus of a special shape. This he described as a rod-
shaped micro-organism with rounded ends, either straight or curved,
and frequently beaded. This simple form was accejited as a con-
stant character until the summer of 1889, when I first observed, in
an artificial culture on an Agar Agar glycerin nidus, a slight incli-
nation to bud in one or more places along the rod, without the pro-
duction of any particular angle, some relations forming an acute
while others formed a right or possibly an obtuse angle. A single
bud could only be recognized with a high power objective focused
and illuminated with particular nicety. The indications, however,
were so often repeated in each field as the slide was moved upon
the stage of the microscope that I was sufficiently convinced of
the presence of branches to review the life-history of the tube in
which they were found and to speculate upon the factors likely
to have brought about the evident volution. The result was the
production of germs with decided branches, some of which were
quite as long as the parent rods or stems. This result was jjublished
in the Medical News of October 19th, 1889. In 1891, Prof. Allen
J. Smith observed branched forms of tubercle bacilli in human
sputum. Since then Prof. Klein, Herren Fischel, Mafucci et
al., have described the branching of this germ. In the summer of
1892 I observed the bacillus in this cycle of life in the liver of the
Green Jay of Mexico, Xanthoura liixosa. This discovery, coupled
with my observations of 1889, and corroborated by the statements
of other scientists, must now compel the bacteriological world to
recognize a more complex form of the tubercle bacillus than that
observed by the great German bacteriologist in 1882. Since the
discovery of the branched form of the tubercle germs in 1889,
I have been able to continuously reproduce them on artificial
mediums. While the young germs seem to be quite simple in form,
appearing in straight rods and rods bent upon themselves, those
which have arrived at the age of four weeks, particularly in the

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 101

presence of an excess of glycerin and in a temperature of 40° C.»
become branched. The young bacilli, when introduced into the
animal tissues, produce tuberculosis, while the older cultures grad-
ually lose their virulence, in all probability owing to their inability
to reproduce themselves. This fact indicates that the branched
form represents an involution life-cycle of the germ. Notwith-
standing the fact, however, that the devitalized, dying or dead ba-
cilli cannot produce consumption, they, with their products, effect a
decided increase in tubercular inflammation, which inflammatory
process even results in necrosis of the tissues. These phenomena
led to investigations proving the correctness of the hypothesis first
published in my Monograph on Immunity (JNIedical News of Oct.
19, 1889) to wit : " It is possible that, by a thorough filtering out of
bacilli from tuberculous material, a filtrate might be obtained and
attenuated so that by systematic inoculations a change might be
produced on living tissues that would enable them to resist viru-
lent tubercle bacilli. In this line of experimentation I proved
that the presence of the germs was not necessary to produce the
hyper-inflammatory condition of the tuberculous tissue but that it
was a product of the bacillus that caused the reaction upon the
tuberculous animal tissues. .This, since called Tuberculin and
introduced into the human economy for the purpose of curing
tuberculosis when introduced into animals suffering with artifi-
cially produced tuberculosis, often destroyed the condition called
consumption and in many cases appeared to produce immunity to
the poison of tuberculosis." The process, however, was not quite
so successful in animals Avhich had contracted tuberculosis through
one of the natural channels. In these cases, tissues surrounding
that which was recognized as tuberculous afterward became infected
with consumption. While this was and still is discouraging we
have good reason to believe that Tuberculin will be permanently
established as a remedy for this pathological condition. The toxic
albumose causing inflammation of tissues markedly tuberculous,
coupled with the fact that it is found in such tissues, led me to inquire
whether or not some other constituents of animal tissues, patho-
logical or normal, would produce reaction if introduced in excess
into the general circulation. This line of experimentation was
begun by first using an albumose of the goat, a comparatively
immune animal. This material, however, if at all active as a
remedial agent in tuberculosis, is so slow in its effects that I have

102 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

heretofore failed to produce any marked changes. When, however,
in the course of my investigations I overloaded the animal system
with some of its waste products, Dr. William L. Zuill, M. D., D.
V. S., who has kindly carried on the clinical work on animals for
our Bacteriological Laboratory, reported in the Times and Register
of Sept. 26th, 1891, a reaction by the Amide group on inflamma-
tory tissues, the animals experimented on being tuberculous. As
this group included that which we believe to produce the inflamma-
tion of gout, I was led to review my experience with tuberculosis in
relation to lithemia. Studying this field with the lithemic and
tuberculous habits in view I was soon impressed with the fact that
when these diseased conditions were present at the same time in any
individual we could claim it to be an exception to the rule.

To determine the special action of the Amide group upon
inflamed tissues when introduced into the circulation, a case of
Lupus vulgaris was selected and first treated by the subcutaneous
introduction of .03240 Gm. of Kreatinin, alternated twice weekly
with .130 Gm. of Taurin, Urea and Uric acid. The average tem-
perature during treatment was slightly raised, though not to any
very marked degree, under the influence of such small doses. The
more recent patches of Lupus, however, became markedly inflamed,
being accompanied with a burning sensation. On the third day
after the first injection, a marked granulation could be detected
around the outer edge by the aid of a strong amplifying pocket
glass. This apparently healthy granulation has continued for ten
days, in which time the patch has one half of its original area
healed. The result shown at this early stage of the experiment is
sufficiently encouraging to warrant not only a continuation of the
treatment in this case but in other forms of Tuberculosis. The only
other subjects upon which these injections have been tried have been
cases of pulmonary tuberculosis in a very advanced stage, where
there was too much lung-tissue already destroyed to warrant the
expectation of a favorable result. The fact that we apparently
have an action on the Lupus and no marked result with small
doses on advanced cases of pulmonary tuberculosis causes me to
realize that the line of experimentation must not be confined to
tuberculous inflammation but extended to the action of these
organic substances on the entire group of inflammatory growths,
the effect being produced, possibly, by supplying that in which the
pathological tissues are deficient. This line of inquiry, which had

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 103

its origin in the Bacteriological Laboratory of the Academy, has
opened up a new and wide field of important scientific medical
investigation. The main object of this communication, at this time,
is to confirm the original discovery of the branched form of the
tubercle bacillus by recording the observations of the same life-
cycle of that micro-organism found in animal tissues. I have, how-
ever, ventured to advance theories and results regarding the action
of substances far removed from the bacillus, because they were
suggested during my studies of the branched form of that organism.

104 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

CATALOGUE OF THE CRUSTACEANS IN THE MUSEUM OF THE ACAD-
EMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

BY DR. BEXJ. SHARP.

According to the catalogue of Professor Lewis R. Gibbes, of
Charleston, S. C, published in the Proceedings of the Academy for
1850 (p. 22 to 30), the collection of Crustacea contained one hundred
and seventy-five (175) species.

In 1851, additions were made by Mr. McAndrews and Messrs
E. & C. Wilson. In this year Dr. T. B. Wilson presented the col-
lection of Guerin-Meneville, consisting of 413 species (1,482 speci-
mens). Thev were classified and catalogued by Dr. R. Bridges,
and the collection now contained 980 species (2,054 specimens).

In 1852, Edward Wilson, Esq., presented 54 species from Great
Britain, and Dr. T. B. Wilson presented 282 species of the Guerin
Collection. About 64 species were presented during the year
from M. J. Verreaux, of Paris, and Messrs E. Wilson, S. Ashmead,
J. Le Conte and others.

In 1855, Mr. S. Ashmead presented 34 species.

In 1856, 65 species (358 specimens) were received from Messrs
W. S. Wilson, S. Ashmead, Davidson and others.

In 1857, 15 species were received from Dr. W. Stimpson from the
West Coast of America, and 30 species from Drs. W. S. W.
Ruschenberger and Hammond and Mr. Pease.

In 1858, Mr. W. J. Taylor, Dr, J. L. Le Conte and others, pre-
sented 15 species, and Mr. Slack 22 species.

In the beginning of the year 1860 the collection contained about
1,000 species.

In 1861, the Smithsonian Institution presented 55 species, and G.
Davidson 12.

In 1864, the Smithsonian Institution presented 62 species, mostly
collected by Dr. Wm. Stimpson of the North Pacific Exploring
Expedition.

In 1872, a collection was presented by Wm. ]\[. Gabb, from San
Domingo.

In 1873, a fine collection in alcohol from the Fiji Islands was
presented by Mr. A. J. Garrett.

In 1875, many species were presented by Dr. Wm. H. Jones, of
the United States Navy, and during this year the collection was

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 1 OS-

relabeled and mounted by Messrs C. F. Parker and G. W. Tryon, Jr.

Since 1875 but little has been done to the Carcinological Collec-
tion of the Academy and many specimens from want of care have
been damaged. In 1878, Mr. J. S. Kingsley worked over the
Crangonidae and some of the families of the Brachyura, and later
Mr. Walter Faxon renamed the Astacidae of the collection.

A few species were added to the collection by the Bermuda and
Mexican expeditions of the Academy.

During the last three or four years Mr. Frederick E. Stearns
has added a number of specimens from the Bahamas and West
Coast of the United States.

In the following catalogue the first number under a species refers
to the tray or jar in which the specimen or specimens are placed ;.
the second number, in brackets, to the number of specimens cata-
logued under the first number : a, meaning alcoholic and d, dried ;
thus (2d) means two dried specimens, and (xa) more than ter>
alcoholic specimens.

STOMATOPODA.

SQUILLIDAE Latreille.
GONODACTYLUS Latreille, 1825.

G. EDWARDsii Berthold, 1847.
O. japoniciis DeHaan, 1849.

Habitat. Pacific coasts.

23. (Id) China. Dr. T. B. Wilson.

24. (Id) Chili. Dr. T. B. Wilson.

G. FALCATUS (Forskael, 1775).
Cancer falcatus Forskael, 1775.
Squilla chiragra Fabricius, 1793.
G. chiragra Latreille, 1825, and authors.

Habitat. All seas.

25. (3d) Bahamas. Dr. H. C. Wood, Jr.

26. (Id) Key West, Florida. S. Ashmead.

27. (2d) West Indies. Dr. Morton.

50. (8a) Garden Key, Florida. Smithsonian Institution;
51 & 52. (3a & la). No locality. Smithsonian InstitutioniL

53. (la) Bermuda. Heilprin Collection, 1888.

54. (xa) Tahiti. A. J. Garrett.

57. (5a) Lower California. W. N. Lockington.
111. (3d) Mauritius. Dr. T. B. Wilson.

106 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1893.

. LTSIOSQUILLA Dana, 1852.

Coronis Latreille, 1825 (name pre-occupied).

L. GLABRIU8CULA (Lamarck, 1818).
Squilla glabriuscula Lamarck, 1818.
Squilla viltata H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.

Habitat. Eastern coast of North America.

18. (Id) Key West, Florida. S. Ashmead.

37. (la) Hilton Head, South Carolina. J. J. Craven.
49. (la) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.

L. MACULATA (Fabricius, 1793).
Squilla maculata Fabricius, 1793.
Cancer arenarius Herbst, 1796.

Habitat. Indo-Pacific region.

19. (2d) Sandwich Islands. J. K. Townsend.

46. (la) Oahu, Sandwich Islands. Dr. W. H. Jones.

L. scABRiCAUDA (Lamarck, 1818).
Squilla scabrieauda Lamarck, 1818.
Squilla hoeveni Herklots, 1851.
L. inornata Dana, 1852.

Habitat. Eastern coast of America.
20 & 21. (Id & 2d) Key West, Florida. S. Ashmead.
22. (Id) Brazil. Dr. T. B. Wilson.

44. (2a) No locality. No donor's name.

45. (la) West Indies. Dr. T. B. Wilson.

47. (la) No locality. Dr. T. B. AVilson.

PSETJDOSQUILLA Dana, 1852.

P. cERisii (Roux, 1828).
Squilla eerisii Roux, 1828.
Squilla hroadbenti Coco, 1833.

Habitat. Mediterranean.

30. (la) Algiers. Guerin Collection.
P. ciLiATA (Fabricius, 1793).

Squilla ciliata Fabricius, 1793.

Squilla stylifera Lamarck, 1818.

P. stylifera Dana, 1 852.

Squilla quadrispino.^a, Miers, 1880.

Habitat. Indo-Pacific region.

15. (5d) Sandwich Islands. Nuttall & Townsend.

16. (Id) Peru. Dr. W. S. W. Ruschenberger.

28. (la) Mauritius. Guerin Collection.

29. (6a) Oahu, Sandwich Islands. Dr. W. H. Jones.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCKS OF PHILADELPHIA. 107

36. (2a) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.

55. (2a) Tahiti. A. J. Garrett.

P. LESSONii (Guerin, 1830), (type No. 4).
Squilla cerisii Gueriu, 1830.
Squilla lessonii, Guerin, 1830.
Squilla spinifrons Owen, 1832.
Squilla monoceros H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.
P. marmorata Lockington, 1877.

Habitat. Indo-Pacific region.

4. (Id) Mauritius. Guerin Collection (Guerin's type).
10, 11 & 12 (Id, la. Id) Chili. Gueriu Collection.
17. (Id) Peru. Dr. W. S. W. Ruschenberger.

P. MONODACTYLA (A. Milne-Edwards, 1878.)
Squilla monodactyla A. Milne-Edwards, 1878.

Habitat. Pacific region.

56. (la) Lat. 6° North ; Long. 166° West. Dr. W. H. Jones.

P. STYLiFERA (H. Milue-Edwards, 1837).

Gonodadylus sty lifer us H, Milne-Edwards, 1837.

Habitat. Pacific region.

13. (Id) Chili. Guerin Collection,

14. (Id) Sandwich Islands. J. K. Townsend.

58, (la) Valpariso, Chili. Dr. W. S. W. Ruschenberger.

SQUILLA Fabricius, 1798.
including
Chlorida Edyoux & Souleyet, 1841 (name pre-occupied).
Chloridella Miers, 1880.

S. DESMARESTII RisSO, 1816.

Habitat. Seas of Europe.

1. (4d) Mediterranean. Guerin Collection.

S. DUBiA. H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.
S. mantis Desmarest, 1825.
S. ruhrolineala Dana, 1852.

Habitat. Eastern coast of America.

9. (Id) Trinidad, B. W. I. Dr. Samuel Lewis.
S. EMPUSA Say, 1818 (? No. 2 type).
Habitat. Atlantic region.

2. (3d) Rhode Island. W. E. Halloway (probably Say's type).

8. (Id) Gulf of Mexico. C.Bryan.
31. (la) New Bedford, Mass. J. H. Thompson.

108 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893^

32. (la) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.

33. (la) Hilton Head, South Carolina. J. J. Craven.

34. (la) Beaufort, North ('arolina. E. D. Cope.

35. (la) No locality. J. Walton.

39. ('ia) South America. No donor's name.
S. MANTIS Latreille, 1802.
Habitat. European Seas.

6. (3d) Mediterranean. Guerin Collection.

S. NEPA Latreille, 1825.
S. affinis Berthold, 1847.
S. oratoria DeHaan, 1849.
S. laevis Hess, 1865.

Habitat. Indo-Pacific region.

3. (2d) No locality. No donor's name.

7. (3d) China. Dr. T. B. Wilson.

40 & 43. (3a & 2a) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.

41. (2a) Oahu, Sandwich Islands. Dr. W. H. Jones.

42. (la) Malacca. Guerin Collection.

S. PRASiNOLiNEATA Dana, 1852.
S. dufres7iii Miers, 1880.

Habitat. East coast of tropical America.

48. (la) Silam, Yucatan. Mexican Expedition (^(Ze Ives, 1891)^

S. RAPHiDEA Fabricius, 1798.

S. mantis var. B major Lamarck, 1818.
S. harpax DeHaan, 1849.

Habitat. Indo-Pacific region.

5. (Id) India. Guerin Collection.

38. (la) Malacca. Guerin Collection.

Numbers 101 to 110 inclusive, are alcoholic specimens of Stoma-
topod larvae collected by Dr. W. H. Jones in Central and Eastern
Pacific, as far North as Latitude 50°.

PENAEIDEA.

PENAEIDAE Sp. Bate, 1886.

PENAEUS Fabricius, 1798.

P. BRASiLiENSis Latreille, 1817.
P. brevirostris Kingsley, 1878.

Habitat. Atlantic region.

59. (xa) West coast of Florida. Heilprin Collection, 1886 (^de^
Ives, 1891).

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 109

60. (2a) St. Martin, D. W. I. Dr. J. van Rijgersma.

63. (5a) San Domingo, West Indies. W. M. Gabb.

64. (2a) Anclote Bay, Florida. Heilprin Collection, 1886 (fide
Ives, 1891.)

65. (la) Sand Key, Florida. Heilprin Collection, 1886.

66. (2a) Cat Island, Bahamas. Smithsonian Institution.

69. (3a) Rio Janiero, Brazil. Dr. W. S. W. Ruschenberger.
78. (2a) San Domingo, West Indies. No donor's name.

P. BRAsiLiENSis AZTECUs Ives, 1891. (No. 61 types.)
Habitat, East coast of Mexico.

61. (xa) Vera Cruz, Mexico. Mexican Expedition, 1890 (Ives*
type).

62. (la) Vera Cruz, Mexico. Mexican Expedition, 1890.
P. BREVicoRNis H. Milne-Edwards, 1837 (No. 365 type).
Habitat. Indo-Pacific region.

365. (Id) Bombay, India. Guerin Collection (H. Milne-Edwards'
type).

P. cANALicuLATUs (Olivier, 1811).
Palaemon canaliculatus Olivier, 1811.
P. marginaius Randall, 1839.
P.plebejus Hess, 1865.

Habitat. Indo-Pacific region and Red Sea.

70. (la) Sandwich Islands. Nuttall & Townsend.

71. (4a) Mauritius. Guerin Collection.

P. CRASsicoRNis H. Milne-Edwards, 1837 (? No. 366 type.)
Habitat. Indian Region.

366, (Id) Bombay, India. Guerin Collection.
P. iNDicus H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.
Habitat. Indian region.

77. (la) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.

P. KERATHURUS (Forskael, 1775).
Cancer kerathurus Forskael, 1775.
Palaemon sulcatus Olivier, 1811.
P. trisulcatus Leach, 1815.
Alpheus caramote Risso, 1816.
P. caramote Desmarest 1825, and authors.

Habitat. Seas of Europe.

72. (2a) Greece. Dr. T. B, Wilson,
863. (Id) Algiers. Guerin Collection.

110 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

P, MEMBRANACEUS RlsSO, 1816.

P. longirostris Lucas, 1849 (No. 145, probably type).
P. bocagei Johnson, 1863.

Habitat. Mediterranean.

145. (la) Algiers. Guerin Collection (? Lucas' type of P. long-
irodi-is).
P. MONOCEROS Fabricius, 1798.

Habitat. Indian region.

360. (Id) Bombay, India. Guerin Collection.

P. MONODOv Fabricius, 1798.

Habitat. Indo-Pacific region.

74. (la) Mauritius. Guerin Collection.

P. SETiFERus (Linnaeus, 1766).
Cancer setiferus Linnaeus, 1766.
Palaemon setiferus Olivier, 1811.
P. orbignyainis Latreille, 1817.
P. Jiuviatilis Say, 1817.

Habitat. East coast of America.

67. (2a) Hilton Head, South Carolina. J. J. Craven.

68. (2a) New Orleans, Louisiana. Dr. Walker.

75 & 76. (la & 2a) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.

361. (Id) Cuba, West Indies. Gu6rin Collection.

362. (2d) Charleston, South Carolina. Dr. W. Blanding.

P. sTYLiROSTRis Stimpson, 1871.

P. occidentalis Streets, 1871 (No. 73 type).

Habitat. East Coast of Central America.

73. (xa) Panama. McNeil Expedition (Streets' type).
P. viLLOSUS Guerin, 1830 (No. 79 type).
Habitat. Pacific region.

79. (la) New Ireland. Guerin Collection (Guerin's type).
SICYONIA H. Milne-Edwards, 1830.
S. SCDLPTA H. Milne-Edwards, 1830.
Habitat. Atlantic region and Mediterranean.

100. (la) Hilton Head, South Carolina. J. J. Craven.

SERGESTIDAE Sp. Bate, 1886.
SERGESTES H. Milne-Edwards 1830.
S. ARCTicus Kroeyer, 1855.
Habitat. North Atlantic.

112. (la) Lat. 40° 16' 30" North ; Long. 67° 26' 15" West— 828
fathoms. Smithsonian Institution.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Ill

EUCYPHIDEA.

PASIPHAEIDAE Sp. Bate, 1886.
PASIPHaiA Savigny, 1818.

P. sivADO (Risso, 1816).
Alpheus sivado Risso, 1816.
P. savignyi H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.
P. brevirostris H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.

Habitat. West coast of Europe and Mediterranean,
364. (Id) Nice, France. Guerin Collection.

ATYIDAE Kingsley, 1878.
ATYA Leach, 1817.

Atys Leach, 1815 (name pre-occupied).

including

Atyoida Randall, 1839.

A. BisuLCATA (Randall, 1839) (No. 231 type).
Atyoida bisulcata Randall, 1839.

Habitat. Sandwich Islands.

162. (xa) Oahu, Sandwich Islands. Dr. W. H. Jones.

231. (Id) Sandwich Islands. T. Nuttall (Randall's type, dam-
aged).

A. SCABRA Leach, 1815.

Habitat. East coast of tropical America.

229. (Id) Mexico. W. Stirapson.

230. (Id) Martinique, Fr. W. I. Guerin Collection.

CAEIDINA H. Milne -Edwards, 1837.
Caradina Kingsley, 1879.
C. AFRiCANA Kingsley, 1882 (No. 163 type).
Habitat. Zulu-land, South Africa.

163. (xa) Zulu-land, South Africa. S. A. Grout (Kingsley's
types).

C. LONGiROSTRis H. Milnc-Edwards, 1837.
Habitat. Mediterranean.

233. (Id) Algiers. Guerin Collection.
C. TYPUS H. Milne-Ed^vards, 1837.

Caradina typus Kingsley, 1879.
Habitat. Indo-Pacific Region.

232. (Id) Mauritius. Guerin Collection.

112 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

ALPHEIDAE Sp. Bate, 1886.
ALOPE White, 1847.
A. PALPiPES White, 1847.
Habitat. New Zealand and Australia.

234 (Id) New Zealand. Dr. T. B. Wilson.
ALPHEUS Fabricius, 1878.
including,
€ryptophthalmus Rafinesque, 1814.
Asphalius Roux, 1831.
Dienecia Westwood, 1835.
Haplopsyche Saussure, 1857.
Alpheoides Paulson, 1880.

A. BELLiMANUS Lockington, 1876.
Habitat. Coast of California.

118. (3a) San Diego, California. Joseph Jeans.

A. BREViROSTRis (Olivier, 1811).
Palaemon brevirostris Olivier, 1811.
Asphalius brevirostris Roux, 1831.
A. malabaricus Hilgendorf, 1878.

Habitat. Indo-Pacific region.

245. (3d) Yanaon, French India. Guerin Collection.

•246. (Id) Manilla. Dr. Burrough.
A. DENTiPES Guerin, 1832 (No. 239 type).
Habitat. Mediterranean.

239. (Id) Nice, France. Guerin Collection (Guerin's type).
A. DOTO Miers, 1878.
Habitat. Australia.

237. (Id) Australia. Dr. T. B. Wilson.

A. EDWARDSii Audouin, 1810 (?).
? A. monodon Bosc. 1801.
A. pacificus Dana, 1852.
A. edivardsii var leviusculus Dana, 1852.
A. avariis Sp. Bate, 1887.
A. leviusculus (Dana, 1852) Sp. Bate, 1887.

Habitat. Tropical seas.

129. (xa) Bermuda. Heilprin Collection, 1888.
135. (la) No locality. W. N. Lockington.
250. (Id) Australia. Dr. T. B. Wilson.

A. HETEROCHELES Say, 1818 (? No. 240 type).
A.armillatus H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.
Haplopsyche lutaria Saussure, 1857.

11893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 113

A. lutaria Saussure, 1858.

A. hispinosus Streets, 1872 (No. 134 type).

A. equidactijlns Lockington, 1877.

Habitat. East coast of America.

133. (2a) Silam, Yucatan. Mexican Expedition, 1890 {fide
Ives, 1891).

134. (4a) Panama. McNeill Expedition (Streets' types, A.
hispinosus.').

240. (Id) No locality. Thomas Say (probably Say's type —
damaged).

241. (2d) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.

242. (2d) No locality. No donor's name.
-A. LAEviGATUs Guerin, 1830 (No. 251 type).
Habitat. Pacific region.

251. (5d) Timor. Gueria Collection (Guerin's type — damaged).
A. LOTTiNii Guerin, 1830 (No. 249 type)\
A. ventrosus, H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.
A. laevis Randall, 1839 (No. 247 type).
Aljj/ieoides laevis Kossmann, 1880.

Habitat. Indo-Pacific.

115. (xa) No locality (probably from S. Pacific). No donor's
name.

131. (2a) ? Japan. Smithsonian Institution.

247. (Id) Sandwich Islands. T. Nuttall (Randall's type of A,
laevis).

249. (Id) Mauritius. Guerin Collection (Guerin's type).
.A. MALLEATOR Dana, 1852.
Habitat. Brazil.

116 & 243. (la & 2d). No locality. Smithsonian Institution.

244. (Id) Brazil. Wilkes' Expedition.

A. MEGACHELES (Hailstone, 1835).

Hippolyte rubra Westwood, 1835 (not A. ruber H. Milne-
Edwards, 1837.
Hippolifte megacheles Hailstone, 1835.
Dienecia rubra Westwood, 1835.
A. edivardsii H. Milne-Edwards, 1837 (not A. edwardsii of

Audouin).
A. affijiis Guise, 1854.
A. milnei Guerin, 1857.
A. platyrhynchus Heller, 1862.
Cryptophthahnus ruber Costa, 1846.

'See J. S. Kingsley. Bull. Essex. Inst. Vol. XIV. 1882, p. 113.

114 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Habitat. Seas of Europe.

130. (3a) Villa Franca, France. Dr. B. Sharp, 1882.

A. MINUS Say, 1818.

A.formosus Gibbes, 1851.

A. tridentulatns Dana, 1852.

A. saulcyi Guerin, 1857 (No. 236 type).

A. minor Lockiugton, 1878.

Habitat. East coast of America.

117. (xa) Bermuda. Heilprin Collection, 1888.

236. (Id) Martinique. Guerin Collection (Guerin's type, A.
saulcyi).

248. (5d) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.

1006. (la) Port Antonio, Jamaica. W. J. Fox.
? A. NOVAE-zELANDiAE Micrs, 1876.
Habitat. New Zealand.

252. (2d) New Zealand. No donor's name.

A. POEYI Guerin, 1857 (No. 235 type).
A. floridianus Kingsley, 1878.

Habitat. West Indian region.

235. (Id) Cuba. Guerin Collection (Guerin's type).
A. siNuosus Guerin, 1857 (No. 388 type).
Habitat. West coast of South America.

388. (Id) Callao, Peru. Guerin Collection (Guerin's type).
A. THETIS Miers, 1875.
Habitat. Pacific region.

238. (2d) New Zealand. Dr. T. B. Wilson {iide Kingsley, 1882).
ATHANAS Leach, 1815.
A. NiTESCENs Leach, 1815.

Palaemon nitescens Leach, 1815.

Arete diocletiana Heller, 1862.

Arete nitescens Heller, 1863.

Habitat. Seas of Europe.

253. (id) Coast of France. Guerin Collection.

PANDALIDAB Sp. Bate, 1886.
PANDALTJS Leach, 1815.
P. ANNULicoRNis Leach, 1815.
p. leavigatus Stimpson, 1854.
P. montagui Smith, 1879.

Habitat. Circumpolar and North Atlantic.

139. (3a) Lat. 46°, 23' N. ; Long. 52°, 45' W. U. S. Fish Com-
mission, 1885.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 115

140. (xa) Massachusetts Bay. U. S. Fish Commission.

141. (xa) Salem, Massachusetts. Dr. T. H. Streets.

142. (4a) Halifax, Nova Scotia. Dr. T. H. Streets.

255. (2d) Belfast Bay, Ireland. W. Thompson (in exchange).
P. BOREALis Kroeyer, 1838.
Habitat. Circumpolar and North Atlantic.

137. (3a) Salem, Massachusetts, 50 fathoms. Dr. T. H. Streets.

138. (4a) Massachusetts Bay, 40-55 fathoms. U. S. Fish Com-
mission.

P. DANAE Stimpson, 1854.

Habitat. Northwest coast of America.

144. (3a) Marmot Isle, Alaska (45 fathoms). Dr. W. H. Jones.

254. (Id) Coast of Oregon. AV. Stimpson.
P. LEPTOCERUS Smith, 1881.
Habitat. North Atlantic.

143. (4a) Lat. 41°, 48', 45" N., Long. 65°, 47', 00" W. 85
fathoms; U. S. Fish Commission, 1885.

P. PROPiNQuus G. O. Sars, 1869.
Habitat, North Atlantic.

136. (2a) Off Martha's Vineyard, 390 fathoms. U. S. Fish
Commission.

HIPPOLYTIDAE Sp. Bate, 1886.
HIPPOLYSMATA Stimpson, 1860.
H. WURDEMANNI (Gibbes, 1850).
Hippolyte umrdemanni Gibbes, 1850.

Habitat. Coasts of Florida.

164. (3a) Pt. Pinellas, Tampa Bay, Florida. Heiiprin Collec-
tion, 1886 (fide Ives, 1891).

HIPPOLYTE Leach, 1815.

H. CRANCHii Leach, 1815.

Palaemon viicroramphos Risso, 1816.
ff. erasdcornis H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.
H. yarelli Thompson, 1853.

Habitat. European seas.

258. (2d) Rochelle, France. Guerin Collection.

259. (xd) Pembrokeshire, Wales. E. Wilson.
H. FABRicii Kroeyer, 1842.

Habitat. North Atlantic.

166. (4a) Salem, Massachusetts. Dr. T. H. Streets.

116 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

167 & 264. (4a & 3d) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.
265. (Id) Coast of Massachusetts. Dr. T, H, Streets.

H. GAiMARDii H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.
H. gibba Kroeyer, 1842.

Habitat. Circumpolar.

150. (la) Lat. 46°, 09', 30" N., Long. 49°, 48', 30" W. 39 fathoms;
U. S. Fish Commission, 1885.

155. (4a) Spitzenbergen. Guerin Collection (Guerin mss. type,
H. Roberta) .

257. (Id) Maine coast. Dr. J. H. Slack.
H. GiBBEROSus H. Milnc-Edwards, 1837.

H. gibbosus Dana, 1852.
Habitat. Pacific region.

165. (la) Oahu, Sandwich Islands. Dr. W. H. Jones, 1874.

175. (2a) ? South Pacific. No donor's name.

H. GROENLANDicA (J. C. Fabricius, 1775).
Astacus groenlandica J. C. Fabricius, 1775.
Cancer aculeatus O. Fabricius, 1780.
Aljyhens aculeatus Sabine, 1821.
H. aeuleata Owen, 1835.
H. ai-niata Owen, 1839.
If. cornuta Owen, 1839.

Habitat. Circumpolar.

151. (3a) Marmot Isles, Alaska, 45 fathoms. Dr. W. H. Jones.

152. (la) No locality. No donor's name.

153. (la) Godhaab, Greenland. Dr. Hayes' Expedition.

H. LiLLjEBORGii Danielssen, 1861.
H. securifrons Norman, 1863.

Habitat. North Atlantic.

146. (la) Lat. 42°, 41', 00" N., Long. 64°, 55', 30" W. 62 fathoms ;
U. S. Fish Commission, 1885.
H. LiNEATA Lockington, 1876.
Habitat. Coast of California.

174. (3a) San Diego, California. Joseph Jeans.

H. MARMORATA (Olivier, 1811).

Palaemon marmoratus Olivier, 1811.
Alpheus marmoratus Lamarck, 1818.

Habitat. Pacific region.

148. (la) Samoan Islands. J. S. Kingsley (in exchange).
161. (2a) ? South Pacific. No donor's name.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. IIT

263. (3d) Sandwich Islands. T. Nuttall.
H. MACiLENTA Ktoeyer, 1840.
Habitat. North Atlantic.

171. (la) Lat. 47°, 21', 00" N., Long. 51°, 38', 30" W. 81 fathoms r
U. S. Fish Commissiou, 1885.

172. (2a) No locality. Dr. T. H. Streets.

256. (3d) Halifax, Nova Scotia. Dr. T. H. Streets.

H. PHipPsii Kroeyer, 1840.
H. turgida Kroeyer, 1840.
H. ochotensis Brandt, 1849.
H. vibrans Stimpson, 1871.

Habitat. Circumpolar and North Atlantic.

147. (la) Cape Cod, Mass, 90 fathoms. U. S. Fish Commission..
266. (2d) Salem, Mass. Dr. T. H. Streets.

H. POLARIS (Sabine, 1821).
Alpheiis polaris Sabine, 1821.

Habitat. Circumpolar and North Atlantic.
154. (3a) Salem, Mass. Dr. T. H. Streets.

260. (Id) Arctic Ocean. No donor's name.
H. PRiONOTA Stimpson, 1864.

Habitat. North Pacific.

393. (2a) Marmot Isles, Alaska, 45 fathoms. Dr. W. H. Jones.-
H. PUSiOLA Kroeyer, 1842.
Habitat. North Atlantic.

149 & 262. (2a & 4d) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.

261. (Id) Halifax, Nova Scotia. Dr. T. H. Streets.
H. TAYLORi Stimpson, ] 857.

Habitat. Pacific coast of United States.

173. (3a) Santa Cruz, California. J. S. Kingsley (in exchange)^

LYSMATA Risso, 1826.

Melicerta Risso, 1816 (name preoccupied).

L. SETiCAUDA (Risso, 1816).
Melicerta seticauda Risso, 1816.

Habitat. Mediterranean, Japan, Amboina.
271. (2d) Nice, France. Guerin Collection.
SPIRONTOCARIS Sp. Bate, 1887.

S. SPiNUS (Sowerby, 1806).
Cancer sjnnus Sowerby, 1806.

118 PROCEEDIXGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Alpheiis spiniis Leach, 1815.
Hippolyte son-erbaei Leach, 1815.
Hippolyte spinu-s Owen, 1835.

Habitat. North Atlantic.

156 & 267. (6a & Id) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.

157. (8a) Salem, Mass. Dr. T. H. Streets.

158. (7a) Coast of Maine, Dr. J. H. Slack.

159. (la) Bay of Fundy, 10-20 fathoms. U.S. Fish Commission.

160. (8a) Marmot Isle, Alaska, 45 fathoms. Dr. "NV. H. Jones.

VIEBIUS Stimpson, 1860.

V. TARiANS (Leach, 1815).
Sippolyte varian-s Leach, 1815.
Hippolyte smaragdina Kroeyer, 1842.

Habitat. European seas.

268. (7d) France. Guerin Collection.

V. viRiDis (Otto, 1828).
Alpheus viridi-s Otto, 1828.
Hippolyte hrullei Guerin (Xo. 269 type).
Hippolyte viridi-s H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.
Hippolyte m<iuritanicu-s Lucas, 1849.
T'^ hrullei Czerniawsky, 1884.

Habitat. Mediterranean and Black Sea.

269. (Id) Coast of Morea. Guerin Collection (Guerin's type of
H brullei).

RHINCOCYNETIDAE Ortman, 1890.
RHINOCOCYNETES H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.

R. TYPUS H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.
Habitat. Indo-Pacific and Red Sea.

168. (2a) Red Sea. Guerin Collection.

169. (4a) ZSTo locality. Smithsonian Institution.

170. (2a) Chili. Wilkes' Expedition.

270. (2d) Chili. Dr. T. B. Wilson.

272. (Id) Xew Zealand. Dr. T. B. Wilson.

PONTONIIDAE Sp. Bate, 1887.
ANCHISTIA Dana, 1852.
A GEANDis Stimpson, 1860.
Habitat. Coast of China.

176. (xa) Xo locality. No donor's name.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 119

POirrOlfIA LatreiUe, 1829.
Coiu-hodyt-es Peters, 1852.
P. ap.m;ata H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.
Habitat. Xew Ireland and Cuba.
344. (Id) Cuba. Guerin Collection.

P. cusTOS (Forskael, 1775).
Cancer custom Forskael, 1775.
Astacus tifrrhenus Petagna, 1792.
Alpheus tyrrh^nu.^ Risso, 1816.
Gnathophyllum tyrrhenus Desmarest, 1825.
P. tyrrhena Latreille, 1825.
Calliaruissa thyrrhenus Risso, 1826.
Alpheus pinnoplax Otto, 1828.

Habitat. Mediterranean.

177. (xa) Greece. Guerin Collection.

TYPTON Costa, 1844.

Pontonella Heller, 1856.

T. spoNGicoLA Costa, 1844.
Pontonella glabra Heller, 1856.
T. spongiosis Sp. Bate, 1 868.

Habitat. Mediterranean.

178. (la) Villa Franca, France. Dr. B. Sharp, 1882.

HYMENOCERIDAE Ortmann, 1890.
HYMENOCERA Latreille, 1829.
H. LATREiLLii Guerin (No. 367 type).
Habitat. Indian region.

367. (Id) Agalega, Seychelles. Guerin Collection (type).

PALAEMONIDAE Sp. Bate, 1887.
BITHYITIS Philippi, 1860.

P. GAumcHAUDH (Olivier, 1791).
Palaevfvon gaudk-houdii Olivier, 1791.
Palaenwn coemerdarug Poeppig, 1836.
Biihynis longimana Philippi, 1860.
Ma^robrachium africanmn Sp. Bate, 1868.

Habitat. Rivers of Chili and Peru.
98. (la) Chili. Guerin Collection.
359. (Id) Peru. Dr. W. S. W. Ruschenberger.

LEAITDES Desmarest, 1849.

L. ADSPERSUS (Rathke, 1837).
PaZaemon adspereus Rathke, 1837.

120 PROCEEDINGS OF TRj3 ACADEMY OF [1893^

Palaemon squilla (part) H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.
Palaemon fahricii Rathke, 1848.
Palaevion rectirostru Zaddach, 1844,
Palaemon leachii Bell, 1853.
L. rectirostris Heller, 1863.

Habitat. European seas.

128. (la) Liberia. No donor's name.
L. DEBiLis Dana, 1852.
Habitat. Indo-Pacific.

395. (xa) Oahu, Sandwich Islands. Smithsonian Institution.

L. NATATOR (H. Milne-Edwards, 1837).
Palaemon natator H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.
Palaemon latirostris DeHaan, 1849.
L. erraticns Desmarest, 1849.
Palaemon tenuirostris (Say) Carus, 1884.

Habitat. On weed in all seas.

126. (xa) Lat. 23°, 53' N.; Long. 53°, 06' W. Dr. W. H^

Jones.
132. (xa) Lat. 24°, 26' N.; Long. 34°, 32', W. Dr. W. H.

Jones.

345. (2d) Atlantic Ocean. Guerin Collection.

346. (2d) Antilles. Guerin Collection.

L. SERRATUS (Pennant, 1777.)
Astacus serratns Pennant, 1777.
Cancer squilla Herbst, 1796.
Palaemon serratus Fabricius, 1798.
Palaemon squilla Latreille, 1806.

Habitat. European seas.

119. (xa) British. No donor's name.

120. (3a) No locality. Geurin Collection.

348. (3d) Wales. E. Wilson.

349. (Id) Coast of France. Guerin Collection.

L. SQUILLA (Linnaeus, 1758).
Cancer squilla Linnaeus, 1758.
Astacus squilla Petagna, 1792.
Palaemon squilla Fabricius, 1793.
Palaemon antennarius H. Milne-Edwards, 1837 (part).

Habitat. Mediterranean.

127 & 398. (2a & la) Algiers. Guerin Collection.
L. xiPHiAS (Risso, 1816).

Palaemon xiphias Risso, 1816.

Palaemon crenulatus Risso, 1826.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 121

Habitat. Mediterranean.

350. (Id) Nice, France. Guerin Collection.

NEMATOCARCINUS A. Milne-Edwards, 1881.
Eumiersia S. I. Smith, 1882.
N. CURSOR A. Milne-Edwards, 1881.
Habitat. Deep water of the Atlantic.

87. (la) Martha's Vineyard, 551 fathoms. U. S. Fish Commis-
sion, 1885.

N. ENsiFERUs (S. I. Smith, 1882).
Eumiersia ensifera S. I., Smith, 1882.

Habitat. Deep water of Atlantic.

88. (2a) Martha's Vineyard, 1168 fathoms. U.S. Fish Commis-
sioD, 1884.

OPLOPHORUS H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.

Xiphoearis Martens, 1872.

O. ELONGATUS (Gueriu, 1856).
Hippolyte elongata Guerin, 1856.
0. americanus Saussure, 1858.
Xiphoearis elongata Martens, 1872.

Habitat. West Indies.

396. (2a) San Domingo, West Indies. W. M. Gabb.

PALAEMON Fabricius, 1798.

P. ACANTHURUS Wiegmann, 1836.
P. forceps H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.
Bithynis forceps Sp. Bate, 1887.

Habitat. East coast of tropical America.

82. (2a) San Domingo, West Indies. W. M. Gabb.

83. (la) St. Martin, West Indies. Dr. J. Van Rijgersma^
84 & 85. (xa & la) Panama. McNeil Expedition.

P. ACUTiROSTRis Dana, 1852.
Habitat. Pacific region.

124. (xa) Sandwich Islands. No donor's name.
P. AFRiCANUS Kingsley, 1882 (No. 81 type).
Habitat. West Africa.

81. (3a) West Africa. P. DuChaillu (Kingsley's type).

P. CARCINUS (Linnaeus, 1758.)
Cancer cardnus Linnaeus, 1758.

9

122 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

AstaciLs cardnus Fabricius, 1793.
Bithynis carcinus Sp. Bate, 1887.

Habitat. Indo-Pacific region,

347. (Id) Bombay. Guerin Collection (mss. type of P. whitei
Gueriu.)

'358. (Id) Hoogley River, India. Dr. Harlan.
P. FAUSTiNUS Saussure, 1858.
Habitat. Rivers of the West Indian region.

122. (6a) Vera Cruz, Mexico. No donor's name.
P. FLUViATiLis Streets, 1871 (No. 114 type).
Habitat. Rivers of Mexico.

114. (2a) Tehauntepec. No donor's name (Streets' type).
P. GRACiLiMANUS Randall, 1839 (No. 125 type).
Habitat. Sandwich Islands.

125. (la) Sandwich Islands. Nuttall and Townsend (Randall's
type).
P. GRANDiMANUs Randall, 1839 (No. 123 type).

Bithynis grandinianus Sp. Bate, 1887.
Habitat. Sandwich Islands.

123. (2a) Sandwich Islands. J. K. Townsend (Randall's type).

p. HiRTiMANUS Olivier, 1811.
.P. latimanus De Man, 1887.
bithynis hirtimanus Sp. Bate, 1887.

Habitat. Indo-Pacific region.

99. (2a) Mauritius. Guerin Collection.

P. jAMAicENSis Olivier, 1811.

Astacus Jluviatilw Sloane, 1725, (not binominal).

P. carcinusLesich , 1815.

P. brachydactylus Wiegmann, 1836.

Rjmndatus Randall, 1839 (No. 90 type).

P. aztecus Saussure, 1858.

Macrohrachium canericanum Sp. Bate, 1868.

Bithynis javiaicensis Sp. Bate, 1887.

Habitat. West Indies.

90. (la) No locality. No donor's name (Randall's type of P.
jjunctatiis).

91. (7a) St. Martin, West Indies. Dr. J. Van Rijgersma.

92. (la) Cuba, AVest Indies. Dr. T. B. Wilson.

93. (la) Guatemala. W. S. Vaux.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 1?3

94. (8a) San Domingo, W. M. Gabb.

95. (4a) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.
287. (Id) Brazil. Dr. T. B. Wilson.

356. (Id) Cuba, West Indies. Dr. Spackman.

357. (Id) No locality. No donor's name.
1001. (2a) Kingston, Jamaica. W. J. Fox, 1891.

P. LAR Fabricius, 1798.

P. longimanu.i Fabricius, 1798.

P. ornatus Olivier, 1811.

P. vagus Heller, 1862.

P. equidens Heller, 1862.

P. reunionensis Hoffman, 1874.

P. mayottensis Hoffman, 1874.

P. madagascarensis Hoffman, 1874.

Bithynis ornatus Sp. Bate, 1887.

Bithynis lar Sp. Bate, 1887.

P. ornatus var vagus De Man, 1891.

Habitat. Indo-Facific region.

97. (4a) Navigator Islands. Dr. W. S. W. Ruschenberger.
353 & 355. (Id & Id) Mauritius. Guerin Collection.
96 & 181. (8a & la). No locality. No donor's name.

P. MEXicANus Saussure, 1858.

P. dasydactylus Streets, 1871 (No. 89 type).
P. sexdentatus Streets, 1871 (No. 113 type).

Habitat. Rivers of Mexico and West Indies.

89. (2a) Coatzacoalcos River, Mexico. No donor's name (Streets'
type of P. dasydactylus.).
113. (3a) CoatzacoalcosRiver, Mexico. No donor's name (Streets'
type of P. sexdentatus.).
P. OHiOENSis S. I. Smith, 1874.
P. sallei Guerin, mss.(No. 86 type).

Habitat. Ohio and Mississippi Rivers.

80. (xa) Vicksburg, Mississippi. L. C. Rice.

86. (2a) Mississippi River. Guerin Collection (Gu^rin's mss.

type).

P. OLFERsii Wiegmann, 1836.

P. spinimanus H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.

Bithynis spinimanus Sp. Bate, 1887.

P. cubanus Guerin, mss. (No. 182 type).
Habitat. Rivers of tropical America and of West Africa.

121. (la) No locality. No donor's name.

124 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

182. (la) Cuba, Guerin Collection (Guerin's mss. type of P. cu-

banus).
354. (Id) Brazil. No donor's name.

PALAEMONELLA Dana, 1852.
P. YUCATANiCA Ives, 1891 (No. 389 type).
Habitat. East coast of Mexico.

389. (la) Progreso, Yucatan. Mexican Expedition, 1890 (Ives'
type.)

PALAEMONETES Heller, 1869.
P. PALUDOSA (Gibbes, 1851).

Hippolyte paludosa Gibbes, 1851.
P. exilipes Stimpson, 1871.

Habitat. East coast of United States.

352. (4d) Wyandotte Cave, Indiana. E. D. Cope.

390. (la) Caloosahatche River, Florida. Heilprin Collection
1886 (fide Ives, P. exilipes, 1891.).

391. (4a) Lake Hikpoche (canal), Florida. Heilprin Collection
1886 (fide Ives, P. exilipes, 1891.).

392. (8a) Lake Okeechobe, Florida. Heilprin Collection 1886
(fide Ives, P. exilipes, 1891.).

P. VARiANS (Leach, 1815).
Palaemon varians Leach, 1815.

Palaemoti antennarivs H. Milne-Edwards, 1837 (part).
Palaemon lacustris Martens, 1857.
Pelias migratorius Heller, 1862.
Anchistia migratorius Heller, 1863.
Leander antennarius Czernaiwsky, 1884.

Habitat. Seas of Europe.

351. (3d) France. Guerin Collection.

P. VULGARIS (Say, 1818).

Palaemon vulgaris Say, 1818.
Habitat. East coast of United States.

179. (5a) Greenport, Long Island. Smithsonian Institution.

180. (xa) No locality. No donor's name.

1028. (xa) Beasley's Point, New Jersey. Dr. B. Sharp, 1893.

1029. (xa) Nantucket, Massachusetts. Dr. B. Sharp, 1893.

NIKIDAE, Sp. Bate, 1887.
PBOCESSA Leach, 1815.

Niha Risso, 1816.
Nica Stimpson, 1860.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 125

P. CANALicuLATUS Leach, 1815.

Nika edulis Risso, 1816, and authors.
Nika variegata Risso, 1816.
Nika canaliculata Desmarest, 1825.
Nica edulis Stimpson, 1860.

Habitat. Seas of Europe.

273. (Id) Nice, Frauce. Guerin Collection.

368. (7a) Nice, France. Guerin Collection.

CRANGONIDAE Sp. Bate, 1887.

CRANGON Fabricius, 1798.

C. CRANGON (Linnaeus, 1758.)

Cancer crangon Linnaeus, 1758.

Squilla cinerea Klein, 1754 (not binomial).

Astacus crangon Herbst, 1796.

C. vulgaris Fabricius, 1798, and authors.

C. rufopunctatus Risso, 1816.

C. septemspinosus Say, 1818.

Habitat. All seas.

274 & 370. (Id & xa). Mediterranean. Guerin Collection.

275. (2d) Pembrokeshire, Wales. E. Wilson.

276. (Id) England. E. AVilson.

277. (Id) Belfast Bay, Ireland. W. Thompson (in exchange).

278. (2d) California. W. Stimpson.

279. (3d) Salem, Massachusetts. Dr. T. H. Streets.

280 & 372. (2d & 6a) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.

369. (8a) No locality. No donor's name.

371. (7a) Beasley's Point. New Jersey. S. Ashmead.

397. (3a) Coast of Massachusetts. U. S. Fish Commission.
C. FRANCiscoRUM Stimpson, 1856.
Habitat. Coast of California.

373. (9a) San Francisco, California. W. Stimpson.

374. (2a) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.

375. (xa) San Francisco. California. E. H. Kelly.
C. TENUiFRONS Kingsley, 1882 (No. 377 type).
Habitat. Alaska.

377. (2a) Marmot Isles, Alaska, 45 fathoms. Dr. W. H. Jones
(Kingsley's type).

EGEON Eisso, 1816.
Aegean Kinahan, 1862.
E. CATAPHRACTus (Olivi, 1792).
Cancer cataphractus Olivi, 1792.

126 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

E. loricatus Risso, 1816.

Crangon catapradus H. Milne-Edwards, 1837.

Crang on cataphr actus Heller, 1863.

Habitat. European seas.

282. (Id) Algiers. Guerin Collection.

E. FASCiATus (Risso, 1816.)
Crangon fasciatus Risso, 1816.
Aegeon fasciatus Kinahan, 1862.

Habitat. European seas.

281. (4d) Mediterranean. Guerin Collection.

NECTOCRANGON Brandt, 1852.

Argis Kroeyer, 1841 (name preoccupied).
N. ALASKEN8IS Kingsley, 1878 (No. 384 type).
Habitat. Alaska.

384. (la) Marmot Isle, Alaska, 45 fathoms, Dr. W. H. Jones
(Kingsley's type).

N. LAR (Owen, 1839.)
Crangon lar Owen, 1839.
Argis lar Kroeyer, 1843.

Habitat. Arctic seas and North Atlantic.

382. (la) Newfoundland. Guerin Collection.

383. (3a) Halifax, Nova Scotia. Dr. T. H. Streets.

PARACRANGON Dana, 1852.
P. ECHiNATUS Dana, 1852.
Habitat. Northwest coast of America.

387. (2a) Marmot Isle, Alaska, 45 fathoms. Dr. W. H. Jones.

PONTOPHILUS Leach, 1815.

P. NORVEGicus (M. Sars, 1861.)
Crangon norvegicus M. Sars 1861.

Habitat. North Atlantic.

385. (2a) Lat. 43°, 32' N., Long. 59°, 22' W. 110 fathoms
IT. S. Fish Commission.

P. SPINOSUS Leach, 1815.

Crangon cataphractus Olivi, 1792 (part).
Crangon spinosus Lamarck, 1818.
Cheraphilus spinosus Kinahan, 1862.

Habitat. European seas.

283. (2d) Mediterranean. Guerin Collection.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 12T

SABINEA Owen, 1835.

S. SEPTEMCARiNATA (Sabine, 1824).
Crangon septemcarinata. Sabine, 1824.

Habitat. Arctic seas and North Atlantic.

284. (Id) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.

386. (4a) Off Salem, Massachusetts, 35 fathoms. Dr. T. H. Streets.

SCLEROCRANGON G. 0. Sars, 1885.
S. BOREAS (Phipps, 1774).
Cancer boreas Phipps, 1774.
Cancer homaroides O. Fabricius, 1780.
Astacus boreas Olivier, 1791.
Crangon boreas Fabricius, 1798.
Cheraphilus boreas Miers, 1877.

Habitat. Arctic seas and North Atlantic.

285. (Id) Lat. 66° North, 40 fathoms. No donor's name.

378. (2a) Halifax, Nova Scotia. Dr. T. H. Streets.

379. (5a) Spitzeubergen. Guerin Collection.

380. (2a) Smithsonian Institution. No locality.

383. (la) McCormick Bay. West Greenland Expedition, 1891»

S. sALEBROSus (Owcn, 1839).
Crangon salebrosus Owen, 1839.

Habitat. Arctic seas.

376. (la) No locality. Smithsonian Institution.

GNATHOPHYLLIDAE Ortmann, 1890.
DRIMO Risso, 1826.
Gnathophyllum Latreille, 1829.
D. ELEGANS (Risso, 1816).
Alpheus elegans Risso, 1816.
Gnathophyllum elegayis Latreille, 1829, and authors.

Habitat. Mediterranean.

286. (5d) Oran, Algiers. Guerin Collection,

SUMMARY.

Stomatopoda, genera, 4 species 17 (var 0) types 1 doubtful types 1,
Peneidea, " 3 " 15 ( " 1) " 3 " " 1,

Eucyphidea, " 33 " 96 ( " 0) " 12 " " I,

Total " 40 " 128 ( " 1) " 16 " " 3,

128 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

NEW SPECIES OF NORTH AMERICAN FUNGI FROM VARIOUS
LOCALITIES.

BY J. B. ELLIS AND B. M. EVERHART.

*PYRENOMYOETES.

Asterina gramiuicola E. & E.

On living and partly dead leaves of Oryzopsis asperifolia, Lansing,
Mich. May, 1892. (G. H. Hicks. No. 574). Perithecia scattered
or subgregarious, superficial, convex-discoid, perforated at the
apex, 150/^, diam., mycelium reduced to a scanty fringe of spreading
hyphse around the base. Asci obovate, 22-30 x 12-20,^, sessile,
8-spored. Sporidia inordinate, clavate-oblong, hyaline, uniseptate
and strongly constricted at the septum so as easily to separate into
two parts, quite variable in size — in some perithecia 7-10 x 2J/x, in
others 10-15x3-31/7..
Asterina leemingii E. <!!:: E.

On living leaves of Galax aphylla, Marion, Va. June, 1892.
Coll. Miss Helena Dewey Leeming, com. Smith Ely Jelliffe, M. D.

Mycelium hypophyllous, forming black, orbicular spots 2-4 mm.
diam., composed of superficial appressed, radiating, dendroid-
branched hyphse furnished with globose hyphopodia 8-10/ji, diam.
Perithecia numerous, seated on the hyphse, depressed-globose, 150/^,
diam., with a papilliform ostiolum which is soon deciduous leaving
the perithecium perforated and convex. Asci oblong, 35-40 x 20—
24//., aparaphysate, 8-spored. Sporidia crowded, oblong-fusoid,
yellowish-hyaline, uniseptate, scarcely constricted, slightly curved,
18-22 X 5-6/j.. Has the habit of Dimerosporium orbiculare B. & C.
but differs in several respects.

Bosellinia megaloecia E. & E.

On dead willow. Sheridan, Montana. Jan., 1892. (Mrs. Lydia
A. Fitch.)

Perithecia gregarious, globulose, subapplanate above, brown, sunk
in the bark, 1 J mm. diam., the apex erumpent and surrounded by
the lacinise of the ruptured epidermis, ostiolum tubercular-conical,
black. Asci cylindrical, paraphysate, 8-spored, p. sp. about 100 x
6-7/.i. Sporidia uniseriate, oblong, brown, 15-20 x 7-8/.i, not append-
iculate. The walls of the perithecia are thick and solid, coriaceo-

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 129

■carbonaceous in texture, not easily broken. In this respect and in
its larger size it differs from R. mastoidea Sacc.
Melanopsamma corticola E. & E.

On outer bark of living Quercus alba, Newfield, N. J. July,
1890.

Perithecia erumpent-superficial, scattered, hemispherical, black,
small (175-200/^), the papilliform ostiolum situated in a slight
•depression and soon deciduous leaving a small, round opening.
Asci fasciculate, oblong-cylindrical, 50-65 x 10-12//, with filiform,
branched paraphyses, 8-spored. Sporidia bisenate, clavate-oblong,
hyaline, granular and multinucleate at first, becoming uniseptate and
constricted at the septum, 12-15 x 3-32/^.

This was accompanied by Amphisphveria fallax DeNot.
Nectria nipigonensis E. & E.

Parasitic on Diatrypella favacea, on dead birch limbs. Lake
Nipigon, Canada. Aug., 1884. (Macoun.)

Perithecia 15-40, cespitose on the erumpent disk of the Diatrypella,
globose, about j ram. diam., pale reddish-yellow, becoming darker,
collapsing at the apex, scarcely papillate, smooth. Asci cylindrical,
aparaphysate, subsessile, 50-55 x 6-7/j.. Sporidia subbiconic-ellipti-
cal, hyaline, uniseptate, scarcely constricted at the septum, 10-12 x
5-6,^-. Conical stromata (Tubercularia) mixed with the perithecia,
pale yellow, depressed-globose, about 2 mm. diam., sessile, bearing a
peripherical layer of minute (3-4 x 1//), hyaline allantoid, slightly
curved conidia borne on slender, branching sporophores 20-25//
long.
Lasiosphaeria trichopus E. & E.

On rotten wood, London, Canada. (Dearness, 677 D.)

Perithecia densely gregarious, superficial, ovate, about 150/j.,
high, fringed around the base with short (35-60x3//), faintly
septate, spreading, brown hyphie, glabrous above ; ostiolum broad-
papilliform. Asci oblong-cylindrical, or clavate-cylindrical, sub-
sessile, paraphysate, 8-spored, 75-80 x 12-15//. Sporidia biseriate,
fusoid-oblong, slightly curved, obscurely 7-9 septate, granular,
yellowish, 25-40 x 6-7//. L. ccesariata C. & P. has perithecia black
and shining subglobose and twice as large as this.
Trichosphaeria subcalva E. & E.

On rotten wood of Ostrya virginic.a, London, Canada. Aug.,
1892. (Dearness, No. 1,987.)

130 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Perithecia gregarious, ovate, i mm. diam., sparingly pilose around
the base, with rather pale, weak hairs, smoother and bare above,
black. Ostiolum papillose-conic, perforated. Asci clavate-cylin-
drical, lOOxlOv-, with abundant paraphyses, 8-spored. Sporidia
obliquely uniseriate or sub-biseriate, oblong-elliptical, hyaline, gran-
ular, 13-16 X o-'o.'Ji. The sporidia agree with those of Tr. punctillum
Rehm, but that has the perithecia smaller and seated on a distinct
brown subiculum.

Herpotrichia incisa E. i E.

On dead roots of Acer apicatum, London, Canada. April, 1892.
(Dearness, Xo. 1,810.)

Perithecia densely gregarious, superficial on the blackened surface
of the wood, ovate-conical or subpyramidal, 300-400,^, diam., often
stellately incised at the apex, black, roughish, with a few weak, pale,
rudimentary hairs at first. Asci cylindrical, 150-200 x l2-15/-t,
with abundant, paraphyses, 8-spored. Sporidia overlapping-biseri-
ate, fusoid, subhyaline, slightly curved, uniseptate and slightly
constricted at the septum, 35-45 x IS-j..

Chaetomiam glabrescens E. & E.

On a rotten limb (Salix)'^ Rockport, Kansas. Dec, 1892.
(Bartholomew, No. 810.)

Gregarious, surrounded by and nearly sunk in a felt-like, black
subiculum composed of rough, branching black, interwoven hairs
sending up numerous straight, rough, simple bristles, l-l mm. long.
Perithecia ovate-globose about i mm. diam., clothed, especially below,
with long, straight, rough, simple bristles which also clothe at first,
but more sparingly, the upper part of the peritheciuni, but these are
soon deciduous, leaving the apex bare. Ostiolum conic-papilliform,
soon deciduous. The perithecia are very brittle and the upper part
soon falls away leaving the cup-shaped base. Sporidia elliptical, or
almond-shaped, 8-10 x 6-7// (front view'i, 7-9 x 5/-'., "^^hen seen edge-
wise. Asci not seen.
Teichospora gregaria E. & E.

On decorticated Fraxinu-s, London, Canada. Feb., 1892. (J.
Dearness, No. 1,027.)

Perithecia densely gregarious, ovate, 3-2 mm. diam., black, super-
ficial, with a conic-papilliform ostiolum. Asci cylindrical, short-
stipitate, 8-spored, with abundant paraphyses, p. sp. about 75 x 14/i.
Sporidia subuniseriate, oblong-elliptical, about 5-septate with a Ion-

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 131

gitudinal septum often extending through all the cells, constricted
in the middle, hyaline and uniseptate at first, becoming yellow-
brown, 18-22 X 10-12,'Jt, ends obtusely pointed or regularly rounded.
The perithecia are attenuated above into the ostiolum so as to be
subconical.

Teichospora variabilis E. i E.

On dead sage brush {Arlemma), Sheridan, Montana. Jan., 1892,
(Mrs. L. A. Fitch. .

Perithecia scattered, erumpent-superficial, black, rough, depressed-
hemispherical, '-k-h ram. diam., at first partly covered by the loose
fibers of the weather beaten bark, finally collapsing above. Ostiolum
papiliiform, finally perforated. Asci oblong, abruptly contracted
below into a very short stipe, paraphysate, 8-spored, 75-80 x 20-22;/,
Sporidia biseriate or crowded, elliptical, at first of a uniform yellow,
soon becoming a bright golden yellow and 5-7-septate and muriform,
finally becoming almost black and opaque, 20-25 x about 12/1.
Teichospora nantica E. ± E.

On decorticated, weather-beaten, poplar limbs, in Mill Creek,
Sheridan, Montana. June, 1892. (Mrs. L. A. Fitch.)

Perithecia scattered or gregarious, hemispherical or hemispheric-
elliptical, with the flattened base slightly sunk in the surface of the
wood, carbonaceo-membranaceous, about \ mm. diam., black, sub-
shining at the apex. Ostiolum papiliiform, at length perforated.
Asci cylindrical, short-stipitate, 100-1 10 x 12//, paraphysate,
8-spored. Sporidia uniseriate or sub-biseriate, elliptical or slightly
ovate-elliptical, with three main transverse septa, often becoming
5-septate, with 1-2 of the cells divided by a trausverse septum, 18-
22x8-11 /-I.
Teichospora aspera E. k E.

On old weather-beaten, cotton wood boards, Rockport, Kansas.
Jan., 1892. (Bartholomew, No. 853.)

Perithecia gregarious, semi-erumpent, membranaceous, hemispher-
ical or depressed-globose, about h mm. diam., tubercular roughened,
collapsing when dry, with a broad papiliiform ostiolum, finally
broadly perforated or sublaciniately ruptured at the apex. Asci
clavate-cylindrical, paraphysate, subsessile, 75-90x10-12//, 8 s pored.
Sporidia mostly overlapping uniseriate, ovate-oblong, 3-septate, and
constricted at the middle septum (sometimes at all the septa), brown.

132 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

one or both the inner cells divided by a longitudinal septum,
15-20 X 6-8/^-.

Differs from T. muricata E. & E. in its shorter and narrower asci
and narrower sporidia.

Closely allied to T. emilii Fabre.

Teichosporella montanae E. & E.

On drift wood, in Mill Creek, Sheridan, Montana. June, 1892.
(Mrs. L. A. Fitch.)

Perithecia scattered, ovate-conical, i-^ mm., diam., at length
partially collapsing above, emergent-superficial among the loosened
fibres of the wood, membranaceous, black, perforated above. Asci
clavate, short-stipitate, 8-spored, with abundant paraphyses, 80-85-
X 12-15/^, (p. sp. 65-70,y.). Sporidia biseriate, oblong-clavate or
oblong-elliptical, 3-5-septate, with 1-2 of the cells divided by a
longitudinal septum, hyaline, 22-30 x 8-1 2,«, mostly a little curved
and finally more or less constricted at the septa.
Lophiosphaera hysterioides E. & E.

On a rotten log of Carya, St. Martinville, La. Jan., 1890.
(Langlois, 2,215.)

Perithecia densely gregarious, hemispherical, subelliptical on a
transverse section, about J mm. diam,, with their bases slightly sunk
in the wood, black, subcarbonaceous. Ostiolum linear, compressed,
extending nearly or quite across, open, and often with a parallel
groove on each side of the base ; sometimes the ostiolum is only
slightly prominent, then resembling Hysterium. Asci slender-
clavate-cylindrical, 55-60x8/^., (p. sp.) or, including the slender
base, 80-90,a long, with abundant paraphyses. Sporidia subbiseri-
ate above, fusoid, uniseptate and constricted at the septum, slightly
curved, pale yellowish-brown, 16-18 x 4-4 J/v..
Lophiosphaera gloniospora E. & E.

On decorticated willow limbs, among driftwood, in Mill Creek,
Sheridan, Montana. June, 1892. (Mrs. L. A, Fitch.)

Perithecia scattered or gregarious, erumpent, convex-hemispherical,
about I mm. diam., of carbonaceo-coriaceous texture, becoming prom-
inent but not superficial, remaining more or less covered by the
fibers of the wood. Ostiolum narrow, compressed, not apparent in
the young specimens. Asci cylindrical, short-stipitate, 100-110 x 10-
12/i, 8-spored, with abundant paraphyses. Sporidia uniseriate,
obovate, hyaline, uniseptate, constricted at the septum, 12-16 x 6-7,«,

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 133

almost exactly like those of Glonium lineare. The surface of the
wood, in those parts occupied by the fungus, is, for the most part,
uniformly blackened.
Lophiosphsera fluviatilis E. & E.

On decorticated, weather-beaten limbs of (Salix) ? Among drift-
wood, near Sheridan, Montana. May, 1892. (Mrs. L. A. Fitch.)

Perithecia gregarious or scattered ovate-globose or elliptical, about
i mm. diam. (i-^), emergent among the loosened fibers of the wood
which, when the perithecia are gregarious, is generally blackened
on the surface. Ostiola variable, thin, compressed or also sometimes
simply papilliform, at length perforated and sometimes partially
collapsing. Asci clavate-cylindrical, 75-80 x 12/j., short-stipitate,
with abundant paraphyses, Sporidia sub-biseriate, fusoid, hyaline,
uniseptate and constricted, mostly swollen on each side of the septum,
slightly curved, nucleate, 20-23 x 5-6;«.
Otthiaostryaegena E. & E.

On dead limbs of Ostrya virginica, London, Canada. April,
1892. (Dearness, No. 1,782.)

Perithecia erumpent in clusters 1-2 mm. across, surrounded by the
ruptured epidermis, i-i ram. diam., globose, black, granular-rough-
ened, and finally collapsing. Ostiolum papilliform, at length, per-
forated. Asci cyclindrical, 100-120 x 15//, stipitate, p. sp. 90-100/^
long, paraphysate. Sporidia 8 in an ascus, uniseriate, elliptical or
oblong-elliptical, brown, uniseptate and constricted at the septum,
20-25 x 11-13/i.

The clusters of perithecia are larger and more distinctly erumpent
than in Otthia cratcegi and the perithecia themselves are white
inside.
Montagnella acerina E. & E.

On dead limbs of Acer spicatum, near St. Catherine, Ontario,
Canada. May, 1892. (Dearness, 1,860.)

Perithecia subglobose, black, about i mm. diam. erumpent-super-
ficial in small (1 mm.) but dense clusters, or sometimes in elongated
strips one mm. wide and 3-5 mm. long. Ostiola strongly papilliform,
at length perforated. Asci cylindrical, p. sp. 60-65 x 6//, with
abundant paraphyses, 8-spored. Sporidia uniseriate, oblong-ellip-
tical, 3-septate, yellowish or olivaceous hyaline, 10-12 x 4-5/^.

Wallrothiella parvula E. & E.

On bark of birch roots, London, Canada. April, 1892. (Dear-
ness, No. 1,633.)

134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Perithecia scattered or subgregarious, superficial, ovate-conical
black and subshining, minute, 150-200/^. diani., with a conic-papilli
form ostiolura. Asci fusoid, i. e. thickest in the middle and taper
ing to each end, obscurely paraphysate, 8-spored, about 50 x 5-6/x
Sporidia biseriate in the middle of the ascus, uniseriate at each end
oblong-elliptical, hyaline, binucleate, 5-6 x 1^-2^ ;jl.

Sphaerella dircae E. & E.

On living leaves of Dirca palustrls, London, Canada. July, 1892.
(Dearness, No. 1,941.)

Spots amphigenous, dark brown below, dirty white above with a
dark brown border, irregular in shape, 2-4 mm. diam., subconfluent,
often several of the dirty white spots included in a large dark brown
area. Perithecia epiphyllous, scattered on the spots, subprominent,
perforated above, 80-1 10,y. diam. Asci oblong-cylindrical, about
35 X 6,a. Sporidia biseriate, oblong, uniseptate, hyaline, scarcely
constricted, 15-20 x 5-6/j..

A Macrosporium was found on the same spots.

Sphaerella oryzopsis E. & E.

On leaves of Oryzopsis asperifolia, Lansing, Mich. May, 1892.
(G. H. Hicks, No. 573.)

Perithecia scattered or oftener in definite patches about 1cm.
diam., sunk, except the subobtuse, slightly projecting apex, in the
parenchyma of the leaf, small (75-80,a), black. Asci fasciculate,
sessile, aparaphysate, 35-40 x 10-12 /j., 8-spored. Sporidia biseriate,
clavate-oblong, hyaline, uniseptate and slightly constricted at
the septum, 12-15 x 3-32//-.

Apparently closely allied to ;S^. oryzce (Catt.), but difiers in its
oblong-fusoid asci, and sporidia.

Sphaerella solani E. & E.

On leaves of Solanum dulcamara. Ohio, Kellerman, No. 412, and
London, Canada. (Dearness, No. 866.)

Spots numerous, small (1-2 mm.), round, white, deciduous, thin
and pellucid. Perithecia mostly epiphyllous, few on a spot, lentic-
ular, perforated, 80-110// diam. Asci oblong, 35-40 x 10,^ apara-
physate, 8-spored. Sporidia biseriate, fusoid-oblong, uniseptate,
scarcely constricted, 10-12 x 3,a, ends subacute.

Not distinguishable outwardly from Leplosphoeria solani E. & E.
which is found on the same leaves.

189B.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 135

Sphaerella lycii E. & E.

On living leaves of Lycium vulgare, Loudon, Canada. Aug.,
1892. (Dearness, No. 1,984.)

Maculicolous, epiphyllous, on small (1-1? mm.), definite, thin
round, white spots. Perithecia subdiscoid, black, about k mm. diam.
few on a spot. Asci 35-45 x 1 Qii, oblong-clavate, 8-spored. Sporidia
biseriate, oblong-fusoid, inequilateral, hyaline, subobtuse at the ends,
(becoming uniseptate) ? 12-15 x b-Qju
Pleospora carpinicola E. k E.

On dead limbs of Oarpinns americana, London, Canada. April,
1892. (Dearness, No. 1,738.)

Perithecia buried in the bark, gregarious, depressed-globose,
covered by the epidermis which is raised into distinct pustules and
barely pierced by the papilliform ostiolum. Asci cylindrical, short-
stipitate, 100-110 X 8-9/i, paraphysate. Sporidia uniseriate, ellip-
tical, obtusely pointed at the ends, 3-septate, constricted at the
middle septum, one or two of the inner cells divided by a longitu-
dinal septum, pale yellow, 14-16 x 7-8//, ends obtusely pointed.
Pleospora decipiens E. & E.

On decorticated, bleached wood of Azalea, Newfield, N. J. June,
1877, with Cheiromyces comatus E. & E.

Perithecia gregarious, membranaceous, subelliptical, about I mm.
diam., convex, collapsing above when dry. Ostiolum indistinct.
Asci oblong, 55-65 x 15-20,a, sessile, sparingly paraphysate, 4-8-
spored, Sporidia subbiseriate, oblong or clavate-oblong, 5-7-septate
and muriform, hyaline or slightly tinged with yellow, 35-40 x 10-
12/a.

Outwardly this cannot be distinguished from Zignoella diaphana
(C. & E.) but that has the sporidia smaller and in all the species
seen, including those from Moutaua and Oregon, only 3-septate.

Leptosphaeria lasioderma E. & E.

On dead stems of Artemisia tridentata, Sprucemont, Nevada.
Oct., 1892, 8,500 ft. alt. (M. E. Jones, No. 2.)

Perithecia scattered, erumpent-superficial, hemispherical, 5-I
mm. diam., perforated above, shagged with a loose coat of brown,
continuous, flaccid hairs 100-150 x 5-6/ji. Asci clavate-cylindrical,
65-75 x 15-20/x. with abundant paraphyses, short-stipitate. Sporidia
biseriate, broad oblong-fusoid, slightly curved, 25-30 x 10-12/i,
golden yellow, somewhat constricted at the septa, and occasionally
with a short apiculus at each end.

136 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Leptosphaeria lilii Ell. & Deamess.

On leaves of Lilium superbtim, London, Canada. Aug., 1890.
(J. Deamess.)

Spots amphigenous, elliptical, becoming pale, 1-1 cm. long x 3-5
mm. wide, definite, with a narrow, reddish-purple border. Perithe-
cia amphigenous, scattered, black, sublenticular, pierced above,
150-200,^ diam., erumpent. Asci oblong-cylindrical, paraphysate,
with a short, nodular base, 50-60 x 7/j. Sporidia biseriate, fusoid,
3-septate, constricted at the middle septum with the cell next above
swollen, hyaline at first, becoming yellowish, nearly straight 15-18

X S/M.

The spermogonial stage (Phyllostida lilii Ell. & Dearness) occurs
on the same leaves and does not differ outwardly, sporules hyaline
4-5 X 2i-3/^.
Leptosphaeria solani E. & E.

On living leaves of Solarium dulcamara, London, Canada. Aug.,.
1892. (Dearness, No. 886 B.)

Perithecia epiphyllous, on small round, white spots 1-3 mm. diam.
with a narrow, slightly raised reddish-brown margin, depressed-
globose, 150/j'. diam., black, erumpent-superficial. Asci clavate-
cylindrical, 55-60x8//-, subsessile; paraphyses, if any, very obscure.
Sporidia biseriate, fusoid, nearly straight, yellowish, 3-septate, con-
stricted at the middle septum, and the two adjacent cells, especially
the one next above, slightly swollen, 16-20 x 22-3/j.

There is a Phyllosticta on the same spots with smaller, perithecia
and sporules, 5-7 x 3,a. (P. dulcamarcB Sacc.) ?
Metasphaeria maximiliani E. & E.

On dead stems of Helianthus maximiliani, Rockport, Kansas.
Dec, 1892. (Bartholomew, No. 821.)

Perithecia scattered, erumpent and semi-emergent or nearly super-
ficial by the peeling off of the epidermis, ovate, about J mm. high,
black, with a papilliform ostiolum. Asci eylindric-clavate, 75 x 8/^,
paraphysate, 8-spored. Sporidia biseriate, oblong-fusoid, hyaline,
2-septate, and constricted at the septa, obtuse, not appendiculate,.
15-20x4-5//.

Differs from M. helianthi Awd. in its rather longer, 2-septate
sporidia.
Metasphaeria sphenispora E. & E.

On dead culms of Erianthus alopecnroides, near Newark, Del.
April, 1892. (Commons, No. 1,941.)

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 137

Perithecia gregarious, elliptical in a horizontal section, about i
mm. diam., strongly convex, flattened at base and fringed with short
mycelium, strongly prominent but closely covered by the blackened
epidermis, umbilicately perforated above, Asci clavate-cylindrical,
sessile or nearly so, paraphysate, 60-65 x lO-12/x. Sporidia crowded-
biseriate, cuneate-clavate, 3-septate, obtuse above, at length distinctly
constricted at the septa, 12-16 x 3*//, hyaline, not curved.

Differs from M. graminum 8acc. in its much larger, and distinctly
prominent perithecia. The sporidia are about the same as in that
species ; differs also essentially from Leptosphcerla orthogramma (B.
& C.) on the same host.

Metasphseria fuscata E. & E.

On bark of small, dead oak limbs, (Querciis coccmea), Newfield,
N. J. Oct., 1892.

Perithecia gregarious, about ^ mm. diam., covered by the epider-
mis which is blackened over them and raised into rather flattish
pustules, which are pierced by the minute papilliform ostiolum, but
not ruptured or torn. The surface of the bark between the pustules
is of a smoky hue. Asci oblong-cylindrical, sessile, 75-100 x 12-
15,«, 8-.spored, with slender filiform paraphyses. Sporidia over-
lapping-uniseriate, oblong, hyaline, 3-septate and constricted at the
septa, rounded at the ends, straight or nearly so, 19-22 x 7-8//.

Comes near 3f. leiostega, but differs in the blackened epidermis
and narrower, oblong sporidia constricted at the septa.
Metasphaeria micrcecia E. & E.

On dead twigs and limbs of Acer spicatum, London, Canada.
May, 1892. (Dearness, No. 1,829.)

Perithecia scattered or subgregarious, minute, (»-] mm.), white
inside, buried in the bark which is raised into minute pustules and
barely pierced by the minute, papilliform ostiola. Asci oblong-
cylindrical, short-stipitate, obscurely paraphysate, 70-85 x 18-27//,
8-spored. Sporidia biseriate, fusoid, slightly curved, 5-6-nucleate,
constricted between the nuclei, hyaline, 40-45 x 7-1 0/x.

The sporidia are about the same as in M. myricce Pk. but our
species is readily distinguished from that by its minute perithecia.
Zignoella nyssaegena E. & E.

On outer bark of living Nyssa mtdtiflora, Newfield, N. J. Nov.,
1892.

Perithecia loosely gregarious, superficial, membranaceous, black
and subshining, ovate-globose, about 150//. diam., perforated above.
10

138 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Asci oblong, short-stipitate, overtopped by the abundant, filiform
})araphyses, 85-60 x 10-12,a, 8-spored. Sporidia biseriate, clavate-
yyriform, yellowish-hyaline, 1-2-septate, not constricted, subinequi-
lateral, 13-15 x 4-5/^., at first filled with minute nuclei and without
septa. The specimens were not well matured and it may be that the
sporidia become 3-septate, but only 2 septa were seen.

Uassariovalsa caudata E. & E.

On bark of dead C7??nMs, London, Canada. June, 1892. (Dear-
ness, No. 1,901.)

Perithecia subcircinate, 3-8 together, buried in the scarcely
altered substance of the inner bark, coriaceo-membranaceous, i-k
mm. diam., their obtusely couic-papilliform ostiola erumpent in a
small, compressed fascicle through the pustuliform-elevated epider-
mis. Asci broad oblong-clavate, pseudoparaphysate, substipitate,
6-spored, p. sp. 80-110 x 20,^.. Sporidia biseriate, oblong, obtusely
rounded at the ends, hyaline, becoming brown, 3-septate, 25-45 x
12-15,a, with a cornute, mostly curved, hyaline, evanescent append-
age 12-20// long, at the lower end and sometimes at both ends.

The sporidia have a thin, hyaline envelope and remain for a long
time hyaline.
Clypeosphaeria minor E. & E.

On bark of dead birch roots, London, Canada. April, 1892.
,(J. Dearness.)

Perithecia gregarious, about J mm. diam., slightly sunk in the
inner bark and raising the epidermis into distinct pustules pierced
at the apex by the slightly compressed, subconical ostiolum. Asci
clavate, 50-55 x dp., with filiform paraphyses 8-spored. Sporidia
fiub-biseriate, fusoid-oblong, olivaceous-brown, 3-septate, slightly
curved, 10-12 x 2t-3//, attenuated toward each end but subobtuse.
Clypeosphaeria ulmicola E. & E.

On dead limbs of Ulmiis, London, Canada. April, 1892. (Dear-
ness, No. 1,776.)

Perithecia thickly but evenly scattered, buried in the bark which
is raised into minute pustules, about i mm. diam., of a slaty black
color and of uniform soft consistence throughout. Ostiola papilli-
fornij erumpent through the minute, black stromatic shield but not
prominent. Asci (p. sp.) 75-85x8-9/-/., cylindrical, paraphysate.
Sporidia uniseriate, oblong-elliptical, brown, 3-septate and often con-
stricted at the middle septum, 14-16 x 7-8/.*, ends rounded and
obtuse.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 139

Thyridium syringae E. & E.

On dead stems o^ Syringa (lilac), London, Canada. March, 1892.
(Dearness, No. 1,654.)

Perithecia thickly scattered, buried in the bark, about \ mm-
diam., with thick, coriaceous walls. Ostiolum papilliform, black,
barely perforating the bark which is raised into slight pustules but
not ruptured. Asci clavate-cylindrical, 75-80 (p. sp. 65) x 12,a,
(paraphysate) ? 8-spored. Sporidia biseriate above, oblong or
clavate-oblong 3-(exceptionally 4-) septate, with one or two of the
cells divided by a longitudinal septum, yellowish-brown, 12-15 x 5-

Thyridium americanum E. <fe E.

On dead and considerably decayed limbs of Xanthoxylnm america-
num, London, Canada, April, 1892. (Dearness, No. 1,780.)

Perithecia evenly scattered or 2-3 lying close together, buried in
the inner bark, which is blackened on the surface, 200-400// diam.,
globose, homogeneous and white inside, contracted above into short
necks, their globose or conic-papilliform ostiola piercing the epider-
mis and raising it into numerous small pustules. Asci cylindrical,
100-115 X 12-1 5,a, p. sp. 80-90,a long, paraphysate, 8-spored.
Sporidia uniseriate, elliptical or ovate, 3-septate and submuriform,
constricted at the middle septum, 14-17 x 8-9/^.. Very different
from Thyronectria xanthoxyli (Pk.). Accompanying the ascigerous
perithecia are other similar ones, some of which contain minute
spermatia 2J-3xf/Jt, others with sporules oblong-fusoid, hyaline,
2-nucleate, 10-12 x 3/jt, on clavate-basidia 12-1 5,^.. long (Dendro-
phoma) f and others {Hender so )ii a xanthoxylilE!>. &Yi.),'\\ith oblong-
cylindrical, brownish, 3-septate sporules, 10-12 x S/j..

Anthostomella mammoides E. & E.

On dead limbs of Ostrya virginica, London, Canada. June,
1892. (Dearness, No. 1,801.)

Perithecia gregarious, about V mm. diam., with thick, coriaceous
walls, about half sunk in the inner bark, the upper half raising the
closely adherent epidermis into strong, dome-like, hemispherical
pustules about 1 mm. across, the prominent, large, papilliform
ostiola erumpent. Asci cylindrical, paraphysate, 110-120 x 12-15//,
8-spored, p. sp. 90-110//, long. Sporidia uniseriate, elliptical, brown,
15-22 X 10-13//.

140 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Eutypella amorphae E. & E.

On dead stems of Araorpha fruticosa, Rockport, Kansas. Dec,
1892. (Bartholomew, No. 822.)

Stromata scattered, numerous and lying close together, but mostly
not confluent, conic-convex, about 2 mm. diam., formed above from
the scarcely altered but slightly paler substance of the bark, and
closely circumscribed by a narrow, black line which does not
penetrate the wood. Perithecia 6-8 in a stroma, rather less than I
mm. in diameter, globose, with rather thick walls, partly sunk in
the surface of the wood, lying closely crowded together, their slender
necks rising close together and the rather large subtubercular, sul-
cate-clefi, fasciculate ostiola piercing, but not rupturing the closely
adherent epidermis, which is not perceptibly raised. Asci clavate,
36-40 X S-Si/j'. (p. sp. 15-20,^ long), 8-spored. Sporidia subbiseri-
ate, allantoid, slightly curved, hyaline, with a nucleus in each end,
5-6 xU/'..
Diaporthe albocarnis E. & E.

On the smaller dead limbs of Cornus sp, and on Staphylea trifolia
and Ostrya virginica, London, Canada. May, 1891. (J. Dear-
ness.)

Perithecia 2-4 together in a minute, cortical stroma, small {I
mm,), solid and white inside, ovate-globose, attenuated above into
very short necks with their obscure, scarcely prominent, perforated
ostiola united in a flat, black disk, erumpent through the ruptured
epidermis which is raised into little pustules thickly scattered over
the limbs. Asci clavate, p. sp. about 75 x 7-8//. Paraphyses simple
filiform, rather stout, longer than the asci. Sporidia subbiseriate,
fusoid 4-nucleate at first, becoming uniseptate (seldom 3-septate) and
constricted and slightly swollen on each side of the septum, some-
times brownish, 12-20 x 3j-5//.

There is no circumscribing line around the stroma but the wood
to the depth of about 2 mm. is slightly discolored, presenting
a clouded or marbled appearance. The margin of the ruptured
epidermis is at first stained yellowish. Sometimes there is only a
single perithecium in a stroma. This can hardly be Viaporthe
sphingiophora Ouds. On the same limbs occurs Myxosporium niti-
dum B. & C, which may be the spermogonial stage.

Diaporthe apiospora E. & E.

On bark of dead Ulmus, London, Canada. (Dearness), Iowa
(Holway.)

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 141

Perithecia lying in compact, circinate groups on the surface of the
inner bark or slightly buried in it, ovate-globose, black, membrana-
ceous, I mm. diam., necks converging with their obtuse smooth
ostiola in a small fascicle slightly raising and piercing the thick
epidermis, but scarcely rising above it. Asci clavate-cylindrical,
75-80 X 8-10//, pseudoparaphysate, 8-spored. Sporidia obliquely
uniseriate or subbiseriate, obovate, 2-celled, the lower cell very
small, the upper one much larger and elliptical, each with a single
nucleus, hyaline, 11-15 x 6-10,a.

This has the habit of Diaporthe with the sporidia of Ajyiospora.

Diaporthe ulmicola E. & E.

On dead limbs of Ulmus, London, Canada. June, 1892. (Dear-
ness. No. 1,869.)

Perithecia 8-12 in a pustule, globose, about J mm. diam. slate-
color inside, subcircinate, buried in the substance of the inner bark
which is unchanged except in being slightly blackened on the sur-
face. Ostiola cylindrical, about •' mm. long, erect, straight, rising
in close fascicles through cracks in the rough outer bark, often, from
the close proximity of the pustules from which they rise, forming an
almost continuous series for a centimeter or more. Smooth or some-
what quadrisulcate at the apex. Asci (p. sp.) oblong-fusoid, about
40 X 7,"; 8 spored. Sporidia biseriate, oblong-elliptical, 3-4-nucleate ,
not at all or only slightly constricted in the middle, 8-11 x 3-4/j'..

Diaporthe pruni E. & E.

On dead limbs of Prumis virginiana, London, Canada. April,
1892 (Dearness, No. 1,695.) and Iowa (Holway).

Stroma cortical, orbicular or elliptical, convex, 3-4 mm. diam.,
formed from the slightly altered and somewhat paler substance of
the bark. Perithecia 8-12, circinate, ovate-globose, 3-5 mm. diam.,
black, finally subcollapsing, partly sunk in the surface of the wood,
contracted above into short necks with their hemispheric-conical
ostiola erumpent in a whitish disk which is soon obliterated. Asci
clavate-fusoid, 60-65 x 8-10//. (p. sp.). Sporidia biseriate, oblong-
fusoid, hyaline, 4-nucleate, slightly constricted in the middle, with a
short, cornute appendage at each end, straight, 15-20 x 32-5//..

Differs from Cryptospora pemisylvauica, in its larger, appeudiculate
sporidia. The stroma is mostly limited (in the bark) by a black,
circumscribing line which, however, does not (usually) penetrate the
wood. The appendages are mostly a little bent at the tips ; spores
with appendages 18-22// long.

142 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

The spermogonia (Cytispm^a pruni Ell. and Dearness), contain an
abundance of oblong-fusoid sporules, 2-4-nucleate, hyaline, 10-12 x
S/J-. The perithecia appear in the bark, directly beneath the sper-
mogonia.
Diaporthe calosphaerioides E. & E.

On dead stems of Sambucus, London, Canada. April, 1892.
(Dearness, No. 1,744.)

Stroma cortical, convex, 2-4 ram. diam., raising the bark into
broad pustules, sunk to the wood but not penetrating it or sur-
rounded by any black circumscribing line, thin, brownish-black,
mostly coming off with the bark. Perithecia 6-12, circinate, thin
membranaceous and collapsing when dry, about 2 mm. diam., necks
slender, decumbent, converging with their brjad-papilliform, finally
subumbilicate ostiola joined in a flat, brown disk erurapent through
the epidermis and closely surrounded by it. Asci fusoid-clavate, p.
sp. 50-60 X 8-10//, with a fugacious stipe 15-20,a. long, and long,
lanceolate but very evanescent paraphyses. Sporidia biseriate,
allantoid, hyaline, 3-4-nucleate, rounded at the ends, finally uni-
septate, about ] 5 x 3-3?//.

This has an outward resemblance to Pseudovalsa sambucina Pk.,
but differs in its sporidia. The long paraphyses and circinate peri-
thecia barely covered by the thin stroma indicate a relationship with
Culosphceria.

Siaporthe aliena E. & E.

On Cratcegus (hawthorn), London, Canada. March, 1892*
(Dearness, No. 1,793.)

Perithecia 4-6 in a pustule, buried in the scarcely altered bark,
not sunk in the wood, black, subcom pressed, 2-I mm. diam., with
short necks and black, obtuse, coarse ostiola erumpent in a brown,
convex disk which is soon obliterated. Asci cylindrical, 75-80 x
7-8/j'.. Sporidia uniseriate, 8 in an ascus, short and obiusely-ellip-
tical, hyaline, uniseptate and constricted, with a large nucleus in
each cell, 10-13 x l-S.a.

According to the specc. of D. crataegi (Curr.) in Cke. F. Brit.
ser. 1st, No. 380, this cannot be that species, which in the specc.
cited, has smaller perithecia and smaller asci with biseriate, oblong-
fusoid sporidia about 15 x Sip-, 4-nucleate, becoming uniseptate.
There is some confusion in Currey's figures. The ascus he figures
on PI. 48, fig. 135, has uniseriate, elliptical, uniseptate sporidia,.
while the sporidia figured at 135 (a), are oblong-cylindrical.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 143^^

Diaportlie spicata E. & E.

On dead limbs of Acer spicattim, London, Canada. April, 1892,
(Dearness, No. 1,784.)

Perithecia few in a pustule (4-8), small (250-300//), black,
buried in the bark and not penetrating the wood. Ostiola short-
cylindrical or conic-cylindrical, raising the epidermis into little
pustules and rupturing or piercing it, but mostly remaining partly
covered by it. Asci oblong-fusoid, p. sp. 40 x 7,a. Sporidia biseri-
ate, oblong or fusoid-oblong, slightly curved, subacute, about 4-
nucleate, becoming 1-septate, hyaline, 12-13 x 3-3?/^.

Differ? from D. acerina (Pk.) in its smaller perithecia not sunk ia
the wood, and its curved sporidia.
Eutypella coryli E. & E. -

On dead Cor?//tfs, London, Canada. June, 1892. (Dearness, No^
1,872.)

Perithecia 8-15 in a pustule, globose, coriaceous, about } mm.
diam., circinately buried in the unchanged substance of the inner
bark, their 4-cleft ostiola erumpent in a convex, black disk 1-2 mm.
diam., which is soon obliterated. Asci clavate, 20-30. x 4//, 8-spored.
Sporidia biseriate, allantoid, yellowish, moderately curved, 5-6 x

The tufts of erumpent ostiola are distinctly prominent. This seems
quite distinct from any of the other described species on Coryhis.
Fenestella ulmicola E. <& E.

On dead limbs of Ulmiis americana, London, Canada. August,
1892. (J. Dearness.)

Stroma orbicular, convex, about A cm. diam., closely covered by
the epidermis, which is raised into a broad pustule pierced by the
minute, black disk but not laciniately torn. Perithecia 6-12, circin-
ate in the dull yellowish, light colored substance of the stroma, i-f
mm. diam., ovate-globose, their necks converging and their conic-
papilliform or convex, black ostiola erumpent and united in the
small disk, which rises slightly above the epidermis. Asci cylindri-
cal, short-stipitate, paraph y sate ; 110-120x12//. Sporidia uni-
seriate, oblong-elliptical, 5-septate, with a longitudinal septum run-
ning through, brown, 12-16 x 7-8//.

The substance of the stroma is similar to that of i^. vedita, but the
asci and sporidia are smaller.

144 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Valsaria staphylina E. & E.

On dead limbs of Staphylea trifolia, Loudon, Canada. May, 1892.
(Dearness, No. 1.848.)

Stromata orbicular or elliptical, 2-3 mm. diam., convex-hemi-
spherical, buried in the inner bark which is uniformly blackened on
the surface but remains unaltered within, often seriately arranged.
Perithecia subcircinate 6-12 in a stroma, 300-350/^. diam., with
short, slender necks, the papilliform ostiola erumpent in a small,
black, mostly acutely-elliptical disk visible in longitudinal clefts of
the slightly raised epidermis. Asci cylindrical, p. sp. 80-90 x 7/j.,
paraphysate, 8-spored. Sporidia uniseriate, oblong-elliptical, obtuse,
dark brown, constricted, 12-15x7-8/^, each cell with a single
nucleus.

Of less robust growth than V. insHiva not blackening the wood,
and only blackening the surface of the inner bark.

Diatrypella pulcherrima E. & E.

On dead twigs of A^a/ta;, London, Canada. May, 1892. (Dear-
ness, No. 1,875.)

Stromata minute, gregarious, cortical, raising the smooth epider-
mis into convex-hemispherical pustules about 1 mm. diam., and
crowned with a minute, white, orbicular disk which is soon obliter-
ated in the center by the tips of the crowded, black, smooth, minute
ostiola, which do not however rise quite up to the surface of the
disk. Perithecia 8-12, minute (1 mm. or less), lying in a subcircin-
ate manner in the stroma. Asci (p. sp.) oblong 30-35 x 8-10//.,
polysporous. Sporidia inordinate, allautoid, hyaline, moderately
curved, 8-12 x li/i.
H'mnmularia lateritia E. lic E.

On bark of dead Fraximis sambiicifolia, London, Canada. March,
1892. (Dearness, No. 1,283.)

Stroma carnose-carbonaceous, orbicular, discoid, 2-lcm. across,
and about 1 mm. thick, dark reddish-brown, bordered by the mar-
gin of the ruptured epidermis, seated on the surface of the inner
bark and circumscribed by a black line which penetrates to the
■wood. Ostiola papilliform, becoming umbilicate, scarcely jirom-
inent. Perithecia peripherical, ovate 2 mm., or a little more high,
and about i mm. broad, forming a closely compacted stratum.
Asci clavate, paraphysate, long-stipitate, 100-120 x 8/7., p. sp. 55-
j60x8//. Sporidia obliquely uniseriate, navicular, 10-12x4-5/^,

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 145

(exceptionally 12-15 x 5-6/j.), nearly hyaline and 2-nucleate at
first, becoming opaque and nearly black. Has the habit of Nuni-
rmilaria rumpens Ck., but distinguished by its dark red, subcarnose
stroma, inconspicuous ostiola and navicular sporidia.

* * DISCOMYCETES.
Lachnea cervicolor E. & E.

On rotten wood, Canada, (Macoun.)

Ascomata, suborbicular, sessile, 4-10 cm. diam., flattened (shallow
cup-shaped), with the margin entire and incurved when dry ; out-
side clothed with a dense coat of short, dark ferruginous hairs, the
margin with louger, paler, septate hairs 400-600/^. long and decum-
bent or appressed ; disk when dry liver color. Asci cylindrical,
150-200 X 15,a, p. sp. 120-150//, long. Paraphyses abruptly thick-
ened at the apex which is about 5//, thick and hyaline. Sporidia
uniseriate oblong-elliptical, with one large, oblong nucleus or with
two smaller ones, hyaline, 18-22 x 11-12//, epispore smooth or some-
limes very faintly granular-roughened.

Allied to L. lanuginosa (Bull.), L. hainsei and L. anraiittopsis
Ell., but apparently distinct.

Orbilia caulophylli E. & E.

On dead stems of Caulophjihnn thalietroides, London, Canada.
May, 1892. (Dearness, No. 1,825.)

Ascomata scattered or gregarious, sessile, gelatinous, pale rose
color when fresh, orange when dry, about h mm. diam., disk plane
or slightly concave when fresh, more strongly concave when dry,
margin thin, spreading and imperfectly laciniate-toothed when fresh,
outside clothed with short, pale glandular hairs. Asci clavate-cylin-
drical, 40-50 x 5-6//, 8-spored ; paraphyses filiform, not distinctly
thickened at the tips. Sporidia biseriate, clavate-oblong, hyaline,
continuous, 5-6 x li// (at the thick end.)

Helotinm lacteum E. & E.

On decorticated wood, Cazenovia, N. Y. Oct., 1887. O. F.
Cook, No. 201, and Marcellus, N. Y. Nov., 1889. (Underwood,
No. %Q.)

Gregarious and subconfluent. Ascomata stipitate, hemispherical,
\-\ mm. across, outside and the slightly concave disk with a thin
margin, glandular-pruinose, white with a tinge of yellow, the yellow
becoming more distinct when dry. Stipe cylindrical, stout, less in
length than the diameter of the disk, pale and pruinose. Asci

146 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

clavate-cylindrical, 75-80x5//, with a slender stipe-like base*
mostly curved, with filiform paraphyses. Sporidia overlappiug uni-
seriate or biseriate, fusoid-oblong, curved, becoming 1-3-septate, 10-
15 (exceptionally 20) x 2.i-3,a.

This agrees well with the description of H. pallescens, but its
smaller size, acutely margined, more distinctly stipitate pruinose
cups, and its sporidia often 3-septate seem to separate it from that
species.
Phialea dearnessii I^. & E.

On dead stems of Monarda, London, Canada. May, 1890. (Dear-
ness, No. 1,713.)

Erumpent, scattered, substipitate, nearly sulphur yellow. Ascom-
ata about f mm. diam., subolivaceous at first, becoming yellow, sub-
striate, margin subfimbriate, at first incurved then erect, stipe short,
less than diameter of the disk, stout. Asci clavate-cylindrical, sub-
sessile, 75-80 X 10/j'-, with stout paraphyses scarcely thickened above.
Sporidia biseriate, fusoid, slightly curved, with two large nuclei, 30—
35 X 3/i, gradually attenuated to the slender subulate-pointed ends.

Chlorosplenium salviicolor E. & E.

On dead stems of Vitis vulpina, St. Martinville, La. March,
1889. (Langlois, No. 1,679.)

Scattered, subhemispherical at first with the margin incurved,
soon expanding to nearly plane, l2-2 mm. across, dark sage-green,
pruinose outside contracted below into a short stipitate base. Mar-
gin subincurved and subundulate when dry. Asci clavate-cylin-
drical, slender, sessile, 30 x 22-3/-'.. Paraphyses branched above and
conidiiferous. Sporidia biseriate, oblong, minute, hyaline 3-4 x 1-
1?//.. Smaller throughout and of a duller shade of green than C.
ceruginescens Rehm, and does not stain the subjacent wood.

Chlorosplenium canadense E. & E.

In depressions in the rough bark of Tilia, and on the bare wood,
London, Canada. Oct., 1892. (Dearness, No. 2,032.)

Ascomata cespitose or solitary, stipitate, 1-2 mm. diam., closed at
first, then open and umbilicate or concave, hymenium olive-black,
margin grayish and often subrepand orlobed. Stem 2-4 mm. long,
olivaceous, roughish under the leus, becoming black, clothed at base
with a light-olive tomentum composed of sparingly branched hairs,
and finally becoming black. Asci slender clavate, 130-150 x 8-10//,

1893,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 147

8-spored, with filiform paraphyses. Sporidia subbiseriate, cylin-
drical, nearly straight, multi-nucleate, hyaline, 30-60 x S;j..

Goryne ellUii Berk, Stllhum magnum Pk., is probably the conidial
stage.
Niptera lithospermi E. & E.

On dead stems of Lithospermum canescens, Mount Helena, Mon-
tana. Oct., 1889. (Anderson & Kelsey, No. 4.)

Erumpent-superficial, scattered, sessile, about I mm. diam., closed
at first and opening tardily, black-brown outside and granular from
the projecting cells of the external layer, margin whitish. Disk
livid white becoming darker, cup-shaped. Asci oblong-cylindrical,
sessile, 45-55 x 8-1 O/j-., with obscure paraphyses. Sporidia biseriate,
oblong-cylindrical, 1 -septate and mostly broadly constricted in the
middle, hyaline, 12-20 (mostly 12-15) x 3-32y. ends, rounded or
sometimes obtusely pointed. Hardly distinguishable from Pyreno-
peziza nigrella Fckl. outwardly, but the sporidia are very different.

MoUisia trametis E. Si, E.

Parasitic on Polyporns stevendi Berk. On a decaying oak chip,
Newfield, N. J. Dec, 1888.

Growing on the margin and .inner surface of the pores. Cups
obconic, 114-150// diam. honey colored, of fibrous structure, the
ends of the fibers projecting so that the outer surface and the mar-
gin appear granulose-pubescent or as if covered with sharp pointed
granules, convex-hemispherical at first and imniarginate, so as to
resemble Nectria, but soon, becoming concave with a distinct sub-
fimbriate margin. Asci clavate-oblong, 20-23 x 4-5,a, sessile and
without paraphyses. Sporidia biseriate or obliquely uniseriate, nar-
row-elliptical or clavate oblong, hyaline, continuous, 3^-4? x li-2/JL.
The cups are so near the color of the pores of the fungus on which
they grow as to be easily overlooked.
MoUisia nipteroides E. & E.

On dead stems of Smila.r, St. Martin ville. La. March, 1889.
(Langlois, No. 1,674.)

Shallow cup-shaped, 1-1 j mm., across contracted below into a
very short stem (almost sessile). Umber color but whitened outside
by a pruinose coat and a short erect glandular pubescence which is
more abundant toward the margin. Asci oblong-cylindrical, 35-40
X 5-6//, sessile. Paraphyses branched above and bearing minute
globose conidia. Sporidia biseriate, hyaline, 2-3-nucleate, oblongs

148 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

straight or slightly curved, 4-5 x 11-1?//. More or less contracted
with the margin incurved when dry.

Dermatea fusispora E. & E.

On dead birch limbs, Orono, Maine. (F. L. Harvey.)

Ascomata gregarious, obconical, erumpent-superficial, about 1
mm. diam., subolivaceous outside, the subundulate margin and dull
reddish disk white-pruinose ; texture loose and soft. Asci narrow-
clavate, paraphysate, 70-75 x Q;j.. Sporidia biseriate, fusoid, hyaline,
continuous, 15-20 x 2,'j., slightly curved, continuous. Recognized
by its reddish disk and fusoid sporidia.
Dermatea ohionanthi E. & E.

On dead limbs of CMonanthus virginica, Wilmington, Del. May,
1890. (Commons, 1,449.)

Sessile, solitary or oftener cespitose in compact fascicles of 2-4,
dark chestnut-color, obconic, with a narrow margin, 5-I mm. diam.,
disk when dry often subrugose, substance firm and dry. Asci 100-
11 0 X 18-20/j'-. Sporidia biseriate, oblong, continuous, obtuse, slightly
curved, granular, hyaline or nearly so, 18-22 x T-S/Jt.

Dermatella montanensis E. & E.

On small, dead limbs, among driftwood, Sheridan, Montana.
May, 1892. (Mr. and :Mrs. H. M. Fitch.)

Erumpent-superficial, orbicular, discoid immarginate, l-l mm.
diam., livid and subgelatinous when fresh, concave and black with a
thin erect margin when dry. Asci oblong-obovate, short-stipitate,
p. sp. 72-80 X 18-22//, 8-spored. Paraphyses stout, (2-2^// thick),
branched and septate, united above in a dark brown epithecium.
Sporidia crowded-biseriate, oblong or clavate-oblong, obtuse, 3-septate
slightly constricted at the septa, hyaline, becoming yellow-brown,
20-24 X 7-8//.
Dermatella caryigena E. & E.

On dead limbs of Carya, West Chester, Pa. July, 1889.

Cespitose in clusters of 4-8, nearly black, disk slightly convex
when fresh, J-l mm. across with a narrow margin. Asci clavate-
cylindrical, 75-80 x 10//, with abundant subolivaceous paraphyses
slightly thickened above. Sporidia obovate-oblong, subinequilateral,
3-septate, greenish-yellow, 12-14 x 42-6//. The clusters of peri-
thecia which are 1-2 mm. across are erumpent through the epider-
mis but are attached to it and readily peel off with it.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 149

Dermatella fraxini E. & E.

On bark of i^rfmnws, London, Canada. Feb., 1890. (Dearness,
No. 1,454.)

Gregarious and subcespitose, flesh colored, convex, immarginate
f-1 mm. diam., contracted below and slightly obconic. Asci clavate-
cylindrical, 125-150 x 12-1 5,a. Sporidia subbiseriate, oblong-cylin-
drical, subhyaline and uniseptate at first, then brown and 3-5-
septate, 25-35 x 10-12/i.

Dermatella hamamelidis E. & E,

On dead stems of Hamamelis virginiana, West Chester, Pa.
June, 1889.

Subcespitose, subsessile, about h. mm. diam., convex becoming
concave, immarginate, dark reddish-brown, Asci clavate-cylin-
drical, narrowed below into a stout substipitate base, 75-80x12-
15,a, with linear paraphyses. Sporidia biseriate, oblong, subinequi-
lateral, yellowish, crowded with nuclei, 12-15 x 5-6,a. Some of the
sporidia were faintly, 3-septate and it is probable that at maturity
they all become so.

In the same locality and at the same time were found specimens
of D. purpurescens (on dead chestnut limbs as before) with the
sporidia distinctly 3-septate.

Cenangella violacea E. & E.

On an old cottonwood board, Rockport, Kansas. Dec, 1892.
(Bartholomew, No. 833.)

Ascomata gregarious, slaty black, sessile with a thick but narrow
base, about J mm. diam., disk convex when fresh and deeply rugose,
with a narrow obtuse margin, when dry hysteriiform from the rolling
together of the opposite sides. Asci obovate, sessile, 35-50 x 15-20,u,
8-spored. Sporidia inordinate, obovate, hyaline, uniseptate and con-
stricted at the septum, obtuse at the ends, variable in size 12-20 x
5-10//, almost exactly the same as those of Glonium llneare. Para-
physes stout, jointed, swollen above and violet color (under the
microscope), bearing hyaline elliptical, continuous conidia, 5-7 x
3-4,a.

Belonidiam tympanoides E. & E.

On rotten wood, London, Canada. Sept., 1889. (Dearness, No.
948.)

Gregarious, carnose, sessile, black and closed when dry, hemis-
pherical when fresh and i-i mm. diam., disk concave, pallid, with a

150 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

narrow, obtuse margin. Asci clavate-cylindrical, 80-100 xl2,a,
with filiform paraphyses curved at the tips. Sporidia cylindrical,
hyaline, multiseptate nearly straight, 40-60 x 2ia. The perithecia
are at first nearly globose but as the hymenium develops they
become excavated above and finally concave.
Blitrydium sabalidis E. & E.^

On partly living leaves of Sabal palmetto, Bayou Chene. La.
Oct., 1888. (Langlois, No. 1,772.)

Perithecia scattered or gregarious, black, conical and closed at
first, then open exposing the smoky-gray disk which becomes dirty
white, margin sublacerate toothed and subincurved, about 1 mm.
diam. All the upper part finally falls away leaving only a black
circle with a white center. Asci clavate, 40-50 x 15-20//. Para-
physes none ? Sporidia crowded brownish-yellow, oblong, 4-septate
with the next to the upper cell divided by a longitudinal septum,
15-20 X 6-7 p..

This is very distinct from Dermatea sabalidis E. & M. ( Cenangium
sabalidis in Sacc. Syll. vol. VIII, p. 562.)
Diplonaevia melaleuca E. & E.

On decorticated Poplar, Sand Coulee, Montana. Oct., 1889.
(F. W. Anderson, No. 645.)

Perithecia at first closed and buried in the wood, about 1 mm.
diam. carnose-membranaceous, thin and black, soon partly erumpent
with a round opening at the apex, the margin narrowly white lacer-
ate-fimbriate. Disk livid, concave. Asci subcylindrical, subsessile,
75-85 X 6-8,'Ji, surrounded by abundant filiform paraphyses slightly
longer than the asci, their tips bent or curved but not distinctly
thickened. Sporidia 6-8 in an ascus, biseriate, cylindrical, hyaline,
curved, obtuse, 1-septate, 12-15 x 3//.
Stictis schizoxyloides E. <fc E.

On dead limbs among driftwood. Mill Creek, Montana. Jan.,
1892. (Mrs. L. A. Fitch.)

Ascomata scattered or gregarious, about half sunk in the wood,
the upper part convex-hemispherical and pi'ominent, 1-1 2 mm. diam.,
pierced in the center with a small round opening, outside cinereo-
furfuraceous and rough. The apical opening gradually enlarges
till the glauco-cinereous, concave disk is entirely exposed, bordered
by the slightly incurved, prominent margin, appearing then like
little cups sunk in the wood. Asci oblong-clavate, sessile, 8-spored,

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 151

55-65 X G-T/Jt. Paraphyses branched and conidiiferous at the tips.
Sporidia fasciculate, cylindrical, multinucleate, 45-55x3/^-, straight
while lying in the asci, spirally curved when free, hyaline, faintly
4-6 (or more) sej)tate.
Stictis helicotricha E. & E.

On leaves and sheaths of Arundinaria tecta, Stark ville, Miss.
April, 1890. (Tracy, 1,335.)

Purplish-black throughout about 2 ram. diam., closed at first, at
length opening with a small round mouth with the entire border
scarcely prominent. The base of the ascoma projects in a pustuli-
form manner on the other side of the leaf. Asci subcylindrical, attenu-
ated above, 150-170 x 6,a, with abundant filiform paraphyses broadly
recurved at their tips. Sporidia filiforr^, about as long as the asci,
interwoven, multinucleate, becoming multiseptate 1-1 5/^. thick.
Differs from S. arundinacea Pers. in lacking the prominent, Avhite
border around the mouth, and in the strongly recurved tips of the
paraphyses and rather narrower sporidia.

The specific name alludes to the strongly recurved and subinvolute
tips of the paraphyses.
Nsemacyclus culmigenus Ell. & Langlois.

On dea,d culms of Panicum proliferum, Louisiana. June, 1888.
(Langlois, No. 1,443.)

Narrow-elliptical, 1-1 J x 2-I mm., acute at each end bordered by
the ruptured epidermis. Disk livid-white. Asci oblong, obtusely
pointed, 50 x 6fj.. Sporidia linear-fusoid, continuous, about 40,«,
long, faintly nucleolate.
Propolidium fuscocinereum E. & E.

On bark of dead willow limbs, London, Canada. (Dearness.)

Apothecia subcuticular, orbicular, 1-1 j mm. diam., flat, thin,
light slate-color, with a slightly elevated, narrow, white margin
which is not lobed or cleft, soon piercing the epidermis with a round
opening exposing the disk. Asci sessile, clavate-oblong, 50-60 x 12
— 15/ji. Paraphyses branched at their tips and conidiiferous, forming
a slightly olivaceous epithecium. Sporidia inordinate, cylindrical,
curved, 3-septate, hyaline, ends obtuse, 15-23 x 3-3 i/jt. Differs
from P. atrovirens (Fr.) in its thinner substance, different color and
narrower sporidia.

Coooophacidium salicinam E. & E.'

On dead limbs of "SaZia;, Helena, Montana. Jan., 1889. (Rev. F.
D. Kelsey, No. 5.)

152 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Ascomata gregarious, erumpent, orbicular, 1 mm. or a little less
in diam., depressed-hemispheric at first, then open, discoid and
applanate, brown-black outside, margin incurved and finely fimbri-
ate-toothed. Disk slightly concave, (when dry) cinereous. Asci
sessile, oblong-cylindrical, 75-80 x 8;j.. Paraphyses about equaling
the asci, tips brown and bearing small brown, globose 3// diam.,
conidia. Sporidia vermiform-fusoid, curved when free so as to form
a semicircle or even an imperfect spiral, 85-50// long, about 3 or
3*// thick in the middle tapering gradually to each end, nucleate,
becoming 7-10-pseudo-septate, hyaline.

* * * ITREDINE^ AND USTILAGINE^.
Puccinia distichlydis E. & E,

On Distichlys maritima, Helena, Montana. Sept., 1891. - (Rev.
F. D. Kelsey, No. 23.)

III. Sori elongated 2-10 mm. long and 1-2 mm. wide, erumpent,
naked, nearly black. Teleutospores oblong or oblong-elliptical,
45-70 X 15-20//, constricted in the middle, pale-brown, becoming
deep chestnut brown ; epispore smooth, thickened at summit which
is either regularly rounded or subacuminately or mucronately
pointed. Pedicels, 80-100// long, stout (6-7/Jt thick) and persis-
tent, yellowish-hyaline.

Seems distinct from P. graminis, in its longer, more distinctly con-
stricted spores on longer, stouter pedicels.

Puccinia douglasii E. & E.

On \eaxes of Phlox douglasii, Detroit, JJtah. May, 1891. (M.
E. Jones, No. 25.)

III. Sori amphigenous, minute, J-j mm., naked but closely
embraced by the epidermis, rather pale chestnut color or sometimes
darker, mostly seriate, a single series of sori being arranged along
each side of the midrib, the leaf being slightly thickened. Teleuto-
spores oblong-elliptical, 25-55 x 12-15//, chestnut brown, constricted,
rounded at the apex or obtusely pointed, epispore smooth, distinctly
thickened at the apex, with or without a papilla.

Differs from P. ^/^»7?i6an'a Pk., in its smaller, naked sori, which
are also much smaller than in P. giliae Hark.
Puccinia gutierreziae E. & E. (/>. BigelovicB, E. k E., N. A. F. 2,248.)

On leaves of Gutierrezia euthamia, Digway, Utah. June, 1892.
(M. E. Jones, No. 23.)

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 155

III. Sori amphigenous, 5-I mm. diam., slaty black, hemispherical^
erumpent and soon naked, crowded or confluent, often surrounding
and deforming the leaf. Teleutospores oblong, rather palp, brown,
constricted, the upper cell mostly narrowed into a bluntly pointed
apex, the lower cell rounded at base or narrowed into the stout,
slightly colored pedicel, which is 75-100/-t long. Epispore smooth,
thickened at the apex.
Fucoinia ludibunda E. & E.

On leaves of Car ex sparganioides, Rockport, Kansas. Oct., 1892.
(Bartholomew, No. 764.)

III. Sori epiphyllous, dark chestnut-brown or nearh^ black, soon
naked and prominent, l-3xf-lj mm. Teleutospores clavate or
cliivate-elliptical, 40-55 x 12-16/v., constricted at the septum, upper
cell more deeply colored and subelliptical, lower cell mostly nar-
rower and paler, epispore smooth, distinctly thickened at the apex
which is either regularly rounded or prolonged and obtusely pointed
or sometimes truncate and in this case, occasionally crowned with
2-3 short horn-like processes as in P. coronata. Pedicel hyaline^
stout, about as long as the spore. Besides the uuiseptate spores,
quite an appreciable number of spores are found with two septa.

Puccinia tuberculans E. & E.

On leaves of ^p/oj9app»s, Muncy, Nevada. July, 1891. (M. E.
Jones, No. 21.)

III. Amphigenous. Sori scattered or confluent, about 1 mm.
diam., covered by the thick epidermis which is raised into rather
flat tubercles and finally ruptured, color dark chestnut. Teleuto-
spores elliptical or oblong-elliptical, 25-40 x 18-22,^, slightly con-
stricted, epispore smooth, light chestnut-brown, thickened at the-
apex of the spore and generally raised into a subacute papilla.-
Pedicels hyaline, 40-60,^ long.

Seems to be a well marked species on account of the tuberculiforna:
sori.

Puccinia columbiensis E. & E.

On (Etiotliera biennis, Banfi*, British Columbia. July, 1891.
(J. Macoun.)

III. Amphigenous, on yellowish, slightly thickened spots. Sori
minute, not over \ mm. diam., nearly black, erumpent, subconcentric-
ally arranged and crowded in dense, orbicular patches 1 2-4 mm.
across and whitened by the fragments of the ruptured epidermis.

11

154 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Teleutospores clavate, 40-50x18-20/^-, constricted at the septum,
upper cell broader and darker, lower cell, attenuated below and
paler (subhyaline), epispore smooth, strongly thickened at the
rounded or subacute apex. Pedicels as long as or a little longer
than the spores.

Very distinct from P. ceyiotherce Vize.

Puccinia virgata E, & E.

On dead leaves of Panicum virgahim, Rockport, Kansas. March,
1892. (E. Bartholomew, No. 496.)

III. Sori amphigenous but more fully developed on the lower side
of the leaf, linear, often 1 cm. or more long, erumpent and margined
laterally by the ruptured epidermis, dark chestnut-brown, almost
black. Teleutospores mostly wedge-shaped or clavate but also, some
of them oblong, 40-70 x 18-22//, the upper cell shorter and elliptical
or subglobose and dark, the lower cell longer, narrower and lighter
colored, apex rounded and obtuse or subtruncate, and sometimes a
little roughened. Epispore thickened at the apex but without any
distinct papilla.

Has a general resemblance to P. graminis but the spores are
different.
Fuocinia lygodesmiae E. & E.

(P. variolans Hark? var. caulicola in Ell. and Ev., N. A. F.
2,237.)

(I.) ? and III. On stenis of Lygodesmia juiicea, Cheyenne Wells,
Colorado. July, 1887. (C. H. Demetrio.)

III. Sori about ^ or f mm. diam., densely cespitose in elongated
patches partly or entirely surrounding the stems, and sometimes
covered by the whitened cuticle, but finally bare and dark chestnut
color. Teleutospores oblong-elliptical, constricted at the septum,
mostly rounded at each end, epispore smooth, thickened at the apex
and often with a broad, sometimes oblique papilla, 35-45 x 20-23//,
on stout, persistent pedicels, 100-120// long. The mode of growth is
similar to that of P. enormis Fckl., the stems being more or less
swollen where occupied by the clusters of sori.

This is very distinct from P. harknessii Vize (on Lygodesmia
spinosa) but closely allied to P. variolans Harkness, from which,
however, it differs in habit and in the epispore being much thinner
in the middle of the spore.

An jEcidium which may belong here, was found on the same host
in Montana, by Mr. Anderson. The secidia arising from yellow

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 155

swellings on the stems and leaves, are about J or f mm. high, erect
and deeply fimbriate-laeerate above, the membrane thin and white.
Aecidiospores, globose, oblong or irregular in shape, smooth or nearly
so, 18-22,'j. in the longer diameter.

Uromyces macounianus E. & E,

On Euphorbia sp. (E. maculata affinis), Vancouver Island,
British Columbia. Aug., 1887. (Macoun, No. 322.)

II. III. Sori amphigenous, convex or subhemispherical, surrounded
by the ruptured epidermis, mostly crowded, light chestnut color,
becoming darker, about 1 mm. diam. Uredospores globose or
ovate, echinulate, about 15// diam. Teleutospores globose or ovate-
elliptical, pale brown, slightly tuberculo-echinulate especially at the
apex which is not thickened and is mostly without any distinct
papilla, 14-16,a diam. Pedicels shorter than the spores, hyaline
and deciduous.

Differs from U. euphorbia C. & P., in its smaller, less distinctly
roughened spores and crowded, lighter colored sori which often
nearly cover one or both sides of the leaf but are not confluent.
Uromyces sporoboli E. & E.

On Sporobohis asper Rockport, Kansas. Sept., 1892. (Bartholo-
mew, No. 783.)

III. Sori mostly hypophyllous, black or nearly so, elongated or
linear, 1-4 mm. long, soon naked. Teleutospores of variable shape,
subglobose, about 20,«. diam., or obovate, 25-30 x 20-22//, or elon-
gated-piriform or oblong, 30-40x20-22//, evenly rounded at the
apex or oftener with a distinct papilla, epispore smooth, distinctly
thickened at the apex, chestnut-brown ; pedicels 70-100// long
mostly colored.

Differs from U. dactylidis Otth. U. peckianus Fa,r\o\y smd JJ. gram-
inicola Burrill in its more robust growth and larger spores, and from
the two first mentioned in the absence of paraph yses.
^cidium ludwigiae E. & E.

On leaves of lAidivigia sphcerocarpa, Ellendale, Sussex Co., Del,
Sept., 1892. (Commons, No. 1,983.)

Spots amphigenous, purplish-red above, more obscure below,
scattered or subconfluent, suborbicular, 1-3 mm. diam. Aecidia
amphigenous, but more abundant below, either standing singly or
oftener collected in a compact cluster forming a little tubercle 1-2
mm, diam., as in JSj. myricatum Schw. ; single cups minute (i mm.),

156 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

margin sublacerate-toothed, erect or nearly so, component cells sub-
quadrate or pentagonal, about 15/j- diam., the marginal ones more
elongated (20/./.). Spores orange-yellow, subglobose or subangular,.
12-15//- diam.

Berkeley in Grevillea, reports u^eid. epilobii on Ludidgia, but
the Delaware specc. on account of their smaller clustered cups and
smaller spores, can not be referred to that species.
Cerebella spartinae E. <fc E.

On spikes of Sj^artina gracilis, Biloxi, Miss. Sept., 1892. (Tracy,,
No. 1,838.)

Stromata small (2-4 mm.), thin, subconfluent, extending along
one side of the spike, often for its entire length, gyrose- or porose-
plicate, dark olive. Primary spores ovate or globose, 6-10/^. diam.,
pale, with the epispore minutely granular, compound spores sub-
quadrate, composed of 3-4 of the primary spores, brown, 12-16//
diam., mostly with a short, thick pedicel.

Differs from C. androj)ogonis in habit and from C. paspali, in its
smaller differently shaped spores.

Sorosporium solidaginis E. & E.

In the dwarfed and condensed inflorescence of Solidago missouri-
ensis, Rockport, Kansas. March, 1892. (E. Bartholomew.)

Spore masses subglobose, 30-50// diam., consisting of 12-40 or
more, closely conglutinated spores about 8// diam., with the epispore
delicately warted. The color of the spores is nearly that of burnt
umber, rather darker than in «S'. californicum Hark., which this much
resembles, but from which it differs in its larger spore masses and
spores not so distinctly roughened.

* * * * SPHJEROPSIDE^.
Phyllosticta tenerrima E. & E.

On living leaves of Saponaria officinalis, London, Canada. Aug.,
Sept., 1892. (Dearness, No. 1,999.)

Spots small (1-2 mm.), thin, round, white and transparent and
finally deciduous, numerous but mostly not confluent. Perithecia
epiphyllous, depressed-hemispherical, thinmembranaceous, 60-1 OOa^
diam., few on a spot. Sporules elliptical or oblong-elliptical,
hyaline, 4-6 x 2-2iy., abundant.

Easily recognized by its thin, white, transparent spots.

1892.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 157

Phyllosticta astericola E. & E.

On leaves of Aster umbellatus, Kenosha Co., Wisconsin. Aug.,
1892. (Davis, No. 9,212.)

Spots suborbicular, 1-2 mm. diam., dark brown, margin mostly
subrepand and surrounded with a yellowish discoloration, often con-
fluent, paler below. Perithecia epiphyllous, prominent, black, 150-
200,a diam. Sporules abundant, almond-shaped, hyaline, mostly
2-nucleate, 8-11 x 4//.
Phyllosticta perforans E. & E.

On leaves of Solanum dulcamara, London, Canada, (Dearness.)

Spots araphigenous, small (2-3 mm.), thin and transparent, round
or subangular, with a narrow, yellowish, slightly raised border on
both sides. Perithecia mostly epiphyllous, few, sublenticular, black,
perforated, 100-120// diam. Sporules elliptical, subolivaceous
(smoky-hyaline), 82-05 x25//.

Differs from Ph. dxilcamarcB Sacc, in its thin white, mostly smaller
spots and subolivaceous sporules. The spots are sometimes confluent
and finally deciduous and are sometimes seen partly enclosed in the
larger brown spots of Ph. dulcamarce.

Phyllosticta nicotiana E. & E.

On leaves of tobacco. North Carolina. Oct., 1891. (Com. Ger-
ald McCarthy.)

Spots araphigenous, large (i-l^ cm.), irregular in shape, pale
dirty brown, lighter in the center, the margin reddish-zonate. Peri-
thecia araphigenous, numerous, erumpent-superficial, black, depressed-
hemispherical, T mm. diara., with a broad papilliform ostiolum.
Sporules oblong-elliptical, oi-5 x H/-*.. This differs from Ph. tabaei
Pass., in its erumpent-superficial perithecia and smaller, different
shaped sporules. The species of Ph. tabaei in Sydow's 31. marchica
(2,375), has spots much like this but less definitely limited, with
perithecia less numerous and buried in the leaf so that only their
apices are visible, and sporules globose or ovate, 4-6,a in their
longer diameter and about 3-4,a in the their lesser diam.

Phyllosticta maculans E. k E.

On fallen leaves of Populus monilifera, Rockport, Kansas. Aug.,
1892. (E. Bartholomew, No. 682.)

Perithecia mostly epiphyllous, erumpent-superficial, black, sub-
_globose, 50-70// diam., pierced above, collected in groups, 2-3 mm.
in diameter, but sometimes the perithecia are scattered between the

158 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

groups. Sporules oblong-cylindrical, hyaline, continuous, straight
or very slightly curved, 10-14 x S-S^/Jt. There are no distinct spots,
but the numerous groups of perithecia give the leaf a mottled appear-
ance.

Phoma subcircinata E. & E.

On pods of Lima bean, Newfield, N. J. Oct., 1892,

Perithecia subcuticular, 70-90/^ diam., sublenticular, subconfluent
pierced above, membranaceous, black, subcircinately arranged in
large (1 cm.), round, faintly zonate spots, finally spreading and
occupying the entire surface of the pods. Sporules oblong-elliptical,^
hyaline, 2-nucleate, 5-6 x 2-22//, on simple basidia rather longer
than the sporules.

This differs from Phoma leguminum West., in the subcircinate
arrangement of the perithecia and the rather longer, binucleate
sporules.
Phoma caulophylli E. & E.

On dead stems of Caulophylhnn thalictroides, London, Canada.
June, 1892. (Dearness, No. 1,864.)

Perithecia gregarious, elliptical, 5-f mm. in the longer diameter,,
covered by the thin epidermis which is raised and blackened over
them and pierced by the minute, papilliform ostiolum, Sporules
oblong-fusoid, hyaline, 2-nucleate, 5-12 x 25-3//.
Sphaeronema negundinis (E. & E., Ell. & Evrht. North Am. Fungi, 2775.)

On bark of dead Negundo aceroides, Fairmount Park, Phila-
delphia, Pa. June, 1890. Coll. Hugo Bilgram, com., W. C.
Stevenson, Jr.

Perithecia thickly gregarious, conic-cylindrical, black, 1-1-1 mm.
high and about f mm. thick, truncate at the apex and crowned with
a flesh-colored globule of ejected sporules, which are hyaline, fusoid,
3-4-nucleate, 12 x 3//.

S. pruinosum B. & C. has the perithecia acute at the apex and has
larger sporules. In one species the perithecia are nearly cylin-
drical.
Asteroma saxifragae E. & E.

On leaves of Saxifraga bracteosa, St. George Island, Bering Sea.
Sept., 1891. J. M. Macoun.

Epiphyllous. Perithecia globose, 50-80// diam., of coarse cellular
structure densely crowded and connected by stromatic matter, form-
ing a continuous black crust mixed with brown, creeping hyphse and

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 159'

covering the entire upper surface of the leaf. Sporules poorly devel-
oped, apparently oblong-elliptical, 5 x 2ij-, borne on stout sporophores
arising from the inner surface of the perithecia, with oil globules
intermixed.

Actinonema psoralese E. &, E.

On living leaves of Psoralea digitata, Rockport, Kansas. June,
1892. (E. Bartholomew, No. 627.)

Spots amphigenous, definite, suborbicular, rusty brown 2-4 mm.
diam. Perithecia discoid, black, rough, 75-90/j'- diam., mostly con-
fluent, forming a black crust about 1 mm. diam., in the middle of
the spot, mostly amphigenous. Sporules oblong, hyaline, 2-nucleatey
12-15 X 3 U^'/.

Asterinula dearnessii E. & E.

On leaves of Gerardia quercifolia, London, Canada. August,
1892. (Dearness, No. 1,966.)

Perithecia subdiscoid, brownish-black, j-J mm. diam., amphige-
nous, scattered, entirely superficial. Sporules oblong, uniseptate,
olivaceous, abundant, 9-12 x B/j..
Vermicularia ochrochaeta E. & E.

On the lower surface a decaying maple leaf, near Ottawa, Canada.
Sept., 1891. (J. Macoun.)

Perithecia scattered, superficial, black, membranaceous, sub-
globose, astomous, of radiate-cellular structure, about half a mm.
diam., sparingly clothed with long (200-300,«), pale, straight spar-
ingly septate hairs about 8// thick at the base and tapering above.
Sporules subcylindrical, very slightly curved, obtuse, hyaline,
nucleate, 6-7 x H//..

Dothiorella frazini E. & E.

On dead Fraxinus, London, Canada. April, 1892. (J. Dear-
ness.)

Perithecia globose, black, buried in the bark, thickly scattered,
either singly or 2-4 together in subvalsiform groups, their short sub-
papilliform, black ostiola erumpent through the epidermis, with the
general appearance of a minute Valsa. Sporules elliptical, hyaline,
18-20 x 10-12//, on stout basidia.

The ostiola merely rupture the bark but do not rise above it.
Found associated with Endoxyla Jraxini E. & E.

Differs from D. fraxinea Sacc. and Roum., in its buried perithecia
and larger sporules.

160 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Cytispora annulata E. & E.

On dead limbs of Negundo aceroides with Sphcerojjsis albescens E.
<fe E., Brookings, South Dakota. Oct., 1891. (Thos. A. Williams.)

Stroraata minute, convex, multilocular, hardly exceeding 1 mm.
in diam., subcuticular, slate-color inside, furnished with a single
■central pore which opens through the apex of a minute pustule and
is surrounded by a minute light colored ring. Sporules oblong,
straight or only slightly curved, hyaline, continuous, 5-6xl-lia.
The epidermis is finally blackened directly over the pustules, except
the ruptured margin which forms a pale ring around the ostiolum.

This differs from C macilenta Rob. and Desm. as shown by the
specc. in Desvi. exsicc. in its much smaller sporules and more
numerous cells.
Cytispora carnea E. A E.

On basswood bark, Orono, Maine. (F. L. Harvey.)

Stromata convex, 3-4 mm. diam., granulose-tomentose and gray-
ish-black outside, multilocular and grayish-black, streaked with white
within, uneven above and furnished with 3-4 or more stout ostiola
which rupture and raise the epidermis and are crowned with a flesh
colored globule of discharged sporules which are oblong, hyaline
(under the microscope), obtuse, straight, 8-12 x S/j--. The stromata
do not penetrate deeply into the inner bark and are not circum-
scribed by any black line but the bark is more or less blackened.

Ascochyta rhei E. & E.

{Phyllostida rhei E. & E., Journ. Mycol. I, p. 145.)

More perfect specc. on leaves of Rheum rhaponticum from Rock-
port, Kansas (Bartholomew, No. 713), show that this is an Asco-
chyta, the sporules becoming uniseptate ; they are also mostly nar-
rowed in the middle and are larger than in the Newfield specc.
(7-12 X 3j-4,'/.) The spots are about the same only not so distinctly
zonate, but the perithecia are smaller.
Sphaeropsis vitigena E. &. E.

On dead shoots of Vitis (cult.), Rockport, Kansas. Feb., 1892.
(E. Bartholomew, No. 507.)

Perithecia globose, minute, about \ mm. diam., numerous, buried
in the bark and raising the epidermis into numerous small pustules
which are pierced by the papilliform ostiolum. Sporules oblong-
elliptical, brown, 18-20 x 8-10//, not nucleate or septate.

Quite different from S. viticola Cke. in Rav., F. Am., 542 (on
leaves of Vitis), and also from S. uvarum B. & C. (on the fruit.)

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 161

Botryodiplodia acerina E. & E.

On bark of dead Acer rubrum, London, Canada. June, 1892.
(J. Dearness.)

Peritheeia ovate-globose, obtuse and rounded above, 2 mm. diam.,
erumpent in densely compacted clusters, 2-3 mm. across and
bordered by the upturned epidermis. Sporules elliptical, brown,
mostly uniseptate but not constricted, 15-22 x 12-13,a.

This occurs with Valsa multiplex, and may be its pycnidial stage.
Camarosporium mali E. ct E.

On decorticated limbs of aj^ple trees, London, Canada. May,
1892. (Dearness, No. 1,837.)

Peritheeia gregarious, erumpent-superficial, subhemispherical,
mostly about + mm. diam., becoming smooth and subshining at the
apex. Ostiolum papilliform. Sporules variable in shape and size,
from globose to oblong-elliptical or biconical, and 8-16x6-10/^
(mostly 12-15 x6-7/j'. brown, about 3-septate at first, becoming 5-
8-septate with one or more of the cells divided by a longitudiual
septum.

This differs from C. robliiice in its much more variable sporules
and in habit.
Camarosporium graminicolum E. & E.

On dead culms of Ammophila arenaria, Long Island, New York.
July, 1892. (Smith Ely Jelliffe, M. D.)

Peritheeia innate, minute (] mm.), scattered, appearing as black
specks through the slightly raised cuticle. Sporules biconic-ellip-
tical, 20-30x12-15;/, 3-7-septate, Avith one or two longitudinal
septa across the middle cells, pale brown, the terminal cells sub-
hyaline, resembling the sporidia of Fenestella jirinceps Tul.
Hendersonia alternifoliae E. & E.

On bark of dead Cornus alteriiifolia London, Canada. June,
1892. (Dearness, No. 1890.)

Peritheeia scattered, small, subcuticular, raising the epidermis
into little pustules, with the obtuse apex erumpent but not prom-
inent. Sporules oblong-elliptical, hyaline and granular at first,
becoming yellow-brown and 3-septate, large 22-30 x 1 1-12//. There
are also globose sporules 10-15// diam., brownish like the others,
and fusoid-falcate, hyaline spores 35-45 x 3// granular and continu-
ous. Whether this is the pycnidial stage of Massaria cornl Fckl.
we cannot say.

162 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Differs from H.fiedleri West andH.dedpiensThum. iu its much
larger sporules.

Hendersonia staphyleae E. & E. Joum. Mycol. I, p. 151.

On dead twigs of Staphylea trifolia, Wilmington, Del. April,
1892. (A. Commons, No. 1939.)

The following diagnosis of this species is given as supplementary
to the brief notice in Journ. Mycol.

Perithecia evenly scattered, numerous, pustuliform with a flat
base, seated on the surface of the inner bark and covered by the
blackened epidermis, which is not laciniately ruptured, but merely
pierced by the apex of the perithecium. Sporules, oblong-fusoid,
pale brown, 3-septate, and slightly constricted at the septa, narrower
below with the lower cell hyaline, 12-20 (mostly 15-18) x 4-5//, on
basidia about as long as the sporules.

Differs from H. sarmentorum West in not penetrating the inner
bark and in its longer, paler sporules on shorter basidia. The same
thing has been sent from Kansas (Kell. and Swingle, 1,237) on
Euonymus atropurpureus.

Stagonospora strictae E. & E.

On leaves of Carex stricla, Rockport, Kansas. Jan., 1892.
(Elam Bartholomew.)

Spots elliptical, dirty white, 3-5xli-2 mm., with a darker
border. Perithecia scattered on the spots, sunk in the parenchyma
of the leaf, brown, or when dry nearly black, 100-150,^ diam., per-
forated above, visible on the upper surface through the thin epidermis.
Sporules elliptic-oblong, hyaline, 2-septate and constricted at the
septa, 20-30 x 8-lOi/y..

The spots are like those of " Phleospora " (Stagonospora) caricis
E. & E., but the sporules are different.

Stagonospora sclerotioides E. it E.

On decorticated wood of Ostrya virginica, London, Canada.
March, 1892. (J. Dearness.)

Perithecia subseriate, erumpent-superficial, brownish-black, elon-
gated at first, then globose, sometimes subconfluent, about 1 mm.
diam., of horn-like consistence, white inside, seated on indefinite,
subelongated spots limited by a narrow, black, circumscribing line
which penetrates deeply into the wood. Sporules oblong, hyaline,
2-nucleate, 6-7 x \\ii.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 163

Septoria mitellae E. & E.

On leaves of Mitella diphylla, near the ^lich. Ag. College. May,
16th, 1892. (G. H. Hicks.)

Spots suborbicular or irregular rusty brown, becoming white or
whitish in the center, with a rather broad, reddish-brown margin,
2-4 mm. diam., often numerous. Peritheciaepiphylloiis, black, sub-
prominent, scattered or sometimes only 1-3 in the center of the spot,
depressed hemispherical, 75-80," diam., pierced at the apex and
blackened around the orifice. Sporules acicular, hyaline, continuous,
straight or only slightly curved, acute, 15-22 x Ip..
Septoria agropyri E. k E.

On leaves of Acjropyrum repeas, Racine, Wis. July, 1892.
(Davis, No. 925.)

Perithecia about 75//. diam., buried in the substance of the leaf
and only visible as minute, black specks on the upper surface. They
appear at first on narrow, pale yellowish strips soon confluent later-
ally and finally changing to a uniform brown color and occupying
a great part of the leaf Sporules rod-shaped, slightly curved, ends
subacute, faintly nucleate, continuous, 18-25 x li/j., hyaline.

Differs from S. gracilis Pass, on the same host, in its sporules
twice as large, and in its different habit.
Septoria purpureocincta E. <fe E.

On leaves of Prunns americana, Rockport, Kansas. Sept., 1892.
(Barthelomew, No. 709.)

Spots amphigenous, irregular in shape, whitish in the center, with
a broad, shaded dark purple border above, rusty brown and without
any distinct border below. Perithecia epiphyllous, globose, open
above, 75-85// diam., brownish black, numerous, subprominent.
Sporules filiform, hyaline, 20-30 x 2//, with a row of very distinct
nuclei but not septate (in any of the specc. examined.)

The character of the spots will easily separate this from any of
the other species on Prmins.
Septoria aurea E. & E.

On leaves of Bibes aureum, Rockport, Kansas (Bartholomew,
No. 49), and Racine, Wis. (Davis, No. 9,037.)

Spots amphigenous, greenish, definite, darker and mostly zonate
toward the margin, 2-4 mm. diam., often concave below. Peri-
thecia crowded in the middle of the spots, mostly hypophyllous, 80-
100/x diam., subprominent, but innate in the substance of the leaf.

164 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Sporules filiform, rather broader above, multinucleate, becoming 3-
5-septate, hyaline, 30-55 x 15-2,^..

Var. destruens (Bartholomew, No. 703, Sept., 1892), has the tips
of the leaves and often the entire leaf mottled with black and yellow,
becoming brown and dead, and the sporules 40-75 x 2-24/a.

This differs from S. ribis Desm. in its septate sporules and the
different character of the spots.

Septoria gaillardiae E. <t- E.

On leaves of Gaillardia pulehella, Rockport, Kansas. A.ug.,

1892. (E. Bartholomew.)

Spot amphigenous, orbicular, light brown, with a dull white center ;
both the dull white center and the larger, brown spot in which it is
included, are surrounded by a narrow, raised border. Perithecia
amphigenous, 75-90//, seraierumpent, black, either confined to the
white central spot or often scattered over the white and brown.
Sporules filiform, nucleate, 45-65 x 1 i-l*/v..

Septoria glabra E. & E.

On leaves of ^Eseulus (/^aira, Indianapolis, Indiana. Aug., 1880.
(Coll., W. J. Beale, com., G. H. Hicks.)

Perithecia hypophyllous, globose, black, 75-85// diam., scattered
on dark brown spots which are more or less whitened, especially
above, by the thin bleached epidermis. The spots are situated
either in the green parts of the leaf or on dead red-brown areas, and
are rather irregular in outline, 2-3 mm. diam., with a rather broad,
not raised, dark border, the central portion more or less whitened.
Sporules filiform, continuous, nearly straight, faintly nucleate, 30-
45xli-2/...

This is certainly different from S. cesculi (Lib.) which (sec.
specc. in Sacc. M. Ven., Thiim. M. U. and Briosi and Cavarra's
F. Parass.) has only 1-3 perithecia on small (1-1 2 mm.), white
spots, with shorter, thicker sporules arcuate curved and about
3-septate.

Briosi and Cavarra remark that Septoria cescidina Thiim. and S.
hippocastani B. & Br., are hardly more than forms of »S'. cesculi and
the species in our Exsiccati seem to warrant that conclusion.

Septoria lepachidis E. & E.

On leaves of Lepachys columnaris, Rockport, Kansas. June,

1893. (Mr. E. Bartholomew, No. 584.)

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 165-

Spots numerous, dark grayish-brown, 2-4 mm. diam., suborbicular,
definite but without any distinct border, amphigenous. Perithecia
epiphyllous, numerous, subprominent, pale, becoming darker, globose,
75-80,'j'. diam., perforated above. Sporules abundant, fusoid, hyaline,
continuous, faintly nucleolate, straight or a little curved, 12-30
(mostly 15-20) xli-U/^-.

Differs from -S'. infuscata Winter (on Lepachys pinnata), in its
much shorter sporules.
Septoria negundinis E. & E.

On leaves of j\%M«(Zo aceroides, London, Canada. Aug., 1892.
(Dearness, No. 19.)

Spots punctiform, minute, white, amphigenous, with a single peri-
thecium in the center, often confluent forming an irregular shaped,
angular white spot 2-3 ram. diam. Perithecia at first pale, then
black, rather large, the papilliform apex erumpent, amphigenous,
but more distinct above. Sporules cylindrical, mostly regularly
curved, nucleate, then 1-3-septate, 25-50 x 2/7..

This must be closely allied to S. acerella Sacc, but that is said to
have sporules only 20-22,a long, subcontinuous.

Septoria carpigena E. & E.

On dead twigs and fruit of Celtis occidentalis, Mount Cuba, Dela-
ware. March, 1892. (A. Commons.)

Perithecia erumpent in small clusters surrounded by the margin
of the ruptured epidermis, ovate-globose, black, rough, with a conic-
papilliform, smooth, black ostiolum. Sporules abundant, vermicular,
curved or undulate, 4-or more-nucleate, hyaline, continuous, obtuse,
20-30 X 3//.
Micropera fraxini E. & E.

On bark of dead limbs of Fraxinus mnericana, London, Canada.
Apr., 1892. (Dearness, No. 1,808.)

Perithecia (cells) peripherical, minute, immersed, with the apex
slightly prominent and sometimes collapsing, seated on an olivaceous,
hemispheric-tuberculiform erumpent-superficial stroma (paler within)
2-1 mm. diam. Sporules cylindrical, hyaline, curved, nucleate,
obtuse, about 20 x 5//, borne on stout basidia 15-20 x 3/^..

Seems almost to be a stylosporous Dothidea.
Excipula canadensis E. k E.

On bleached wood of elm rails, London, Canada. Aug., 1892,
(Dearness, No. 1,985.)

166 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Perithecia gregarious, erumpent-superficial, thin, black, i--J mm.
diam., closed, globose and smooth at first, soon broadly open above
and cup-shaped, with the margin substriate and more or less distinctly
fringed Avith short, brown hairs. Sporules navicular, continuous,
olivaceous, 5-6 x 21 ii, ends acute, borne on simple, stout, olivaceous
basidia about 12 x 2\ij..

Excipulina hicksiana E. & E.

On bleached, decorticated wood, Michigan. (G. H. Hicks.)
Perithecia, scattered, globose or oblong and hysteriiform, i-| mm.
in the longer diameter, thin, membranaceous, obsolete below, darker
and more coarsely granular toward the margin, at first closed, soon
opening with a longitudinal dehiscence like a Hysterium, base
adnate to the wood, hymenium, pale. Sporules oblong-cylindrical,
hyaline, obtuse, 2-3-septate, 8-15 x 3-4//, straight or slightly
curved ; texture loosely cellular, thin, not fibrous.

Catinula saligna E. & E.

On dead limbs of Salix, London, Canada. Feb., 1890. (Dear-
ness. No. 1,420.)

Perithecia scattered, erumpent, short cylindrical or obconical, sub-
stipitate, about 1 mm. high, broadly perforated or open at the apex,
black and subshining. Sporules oblong-cylindrical, hyaline, con-
tinuous, 15-20 X 6-7/t, on basidia 15-20 x 3//.

This differs from C. turgida Desm. only in its more elongated
perithecia and rather narrower sporules. A form occurs on Car-
pinus (Dearness, No. 1,565) that cannot be distinguished from G.
turgida, and it may be as well to consider our C. saligna as only a
robust form of that species.
Hainesia borealis E. & E.

Ell. & Evrht. N. A. F., 2,785.

On leaves of Galium boreale, British Columbia. July, 1889.
(J. Macoun.)

Acervuli hy^jophyllous, scattered, convex-discoid, 175-200/^-
diam., flesh-colored becoming darker when dry, subcuticular at first
but soon erumpent-prorainent. Conidia allantoid, hyaline, slightly
curved, 5-6 x 1;/ on simple, slender basidia 12-15 x l-H/J-

The parts of the leaf occupied by the fungus soon become pale
brown and dead. Hainesia rubi (West.) has been sent from
Ontario, Canada, by Mr. Dearness.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 167

Gloeosporium davisii E. & E.

On pods of Vicia amerieana, Berry ville, Wis. July, 1890.
(Davis, No. 927.)

Occupying small (1--2 mm.), dead spots on the pods. Acervuli
innate, erumpent in small, pale rose colored pustules. Conidia
oblong-elliptical, hyaline, continuous, 5-8 x 3-4/-'..

Distinguished from G. vicice E. & E., as well as from G. legumi-
nis C. & H., by its much smaller conidia.
Glceosporium americanum E. k E.

On leaves of Vida amerieana, Berry ville, Wis. July, 1892.
{Davis, No. 928.)

Spots amphigenous, dull green, 2-3 mm. diam., suborbicular and
rather indefinitely limited, only two or three on a leaf. Acervuli
innate, about 80,a diam., pale rose color, erumpent above. Conidia
oblong, obtuse, 12-16 x 3-3 J/x, on basidia of about the same length.

Comes nearest G. kurzianiim Niessl, but a comparison with species
of that species in Rab. F. Eur. shows the habit to be quite different.
Gl. vicice Fauntrey and Roum. has conidia, 16 x 12/j..
Gloeosporium ribioolum E. & E.

On fruit of Ribes (English goosebery, cult.), Wilmington, Del.
June, 1892. (A. Commons, No. 1,961.)

Acervuli minute, numerous, crowded, pale, soon erumpent and
subconfluent in orbicular patches 5 cm. across and of a pale orange
-color. Spores oblong, 7-12 x S-Sifj., on stout, densely fasciculate
basidia about 20,'j. long. Seems most nearly allied to G. phomoides
Sacc.

Gloeosporium caryae E. & E. (N. A. F., 2783.)

On leaves of Carya alba, London, Canada. (Dearness.)

Spots amphigenous, suborbicular, indefinite, brown, 1-2 cm. diam.

Acervuli hypophyllous, numerous, 80-1 50/t diam. Sporules oblong,

continuous, hyaline, 7-10 x 1-1 J/j.

Cylindrosporium phaceliae E. & E.

On leaves of Phacelia sericea, Basin, Montana. July, 1892.
(Kelsey, No. 1.)

Amphigenous. Acervuli minute, buried, numerous, the exuding
conidia making the surface of the leaf white-farinose. Conidia
oblong or cylindrical, variable in length (15-40 xS-Sh^-)

168 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Cylindrosporium caryigenum E. it E. N. A. F., 2451.

On living leaves of Carya amara, London, Canada. (Dearness.)
Hypophyllous, spots indefinite, pale at first, finally brownish and

visible on both sides of the leaf. Acervuli, minute, numerous, pale.

Sporules erumpent below, cylindrical, curved, with a row of nuclei,

25-40 X 3//-.

In the early stage of growth, this has the aspect of a Ramularia.

Marsonia rhabdospora E. & E.

On leaves of Populxis grandidentata, Newfield, N. J. Sept.-Oct.,
1892.

Spots araphigenous, numerous, subangular, 1-4 mm. diam., with
a cinereous-white center and definite, narrow, dark margin, sur-
rounded with a yellow aureola. Acervuli hypophyllous, flesh
colored, erumpent, often seated around the margin of the spot with
one or more in the center. Conidia cylindrical, nearly straight,
uniseptate, 20-30 x 2?/^., ends obtuse, much resembling the sporules
of Septoria populi Desm. which is quite difierent from this, having
true perithecia which are also epiphyllous and nearly black.

The spots in our fungus are at first minute and brownish-black,,
but even then surrounded by the yellow aureola.
Coryneum comicolum E. & E.

On the inner surface of dead bark of Cormis alternifolia, London,
Canada. June, 1892. (Dearness, No. 1,892.)

Acervuli erumpent, various, tubercular, pulvinate or convex,
black, punctiform or 1 mm. or more in diam., and subconfluent,
appearing much like the masses of erumpent spores of some Melan-
conium. Conidia vermiform-fusoid, 6-8-septate, the end cells
hyaline, the others brown, mostly curved, 35-45 x 7-8//, on basidia
about half as long or even less.

***** HYPHOMYCETEJE.
Botrytis pannosa E. .1 E.

On rotten maple, Seattle, Washington. March, 1892. (Miss
Parker, No. 60.)

Hyphje efiiised and interwoven, brown, subcontinuous, and sub-
oppositely branched, the ends of the branches mostly a little swollen
and spiculiferous, bearing the abundant, ovate, hyaline conidia, 5-
6x3-3|/i.

The tufts of hyphffi form, an olive-brown, rather thick, loosely
felted layer several centimeters in extent.

This is ^.fairmani E. & E. in Herb.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 169

Botrytis affinis E. A; E.

On decorticated wood of a decayiug, white ash log, London,
Canada. Nov., 1892. (Dearness, No. 2,073.)

Forms a thin olive-black velvet-like coating on the surface of the
wood. Hyphie erect, brownish-olive, sparingly and obscurely septate,
more or less minutely rauriculate-roughened, about 4// diam., sub-
dichotomously branched, the branches near the summit mostly
opposite, short (12-15,a), erect, slightly swollen and roughened at
their tips where are attached in loose clusters the olive-brown,
globose or elliptical conidia which are 4-5/-/. in their longer
diameter.

Scarcely distinguishable externally from B. JuUginosa C. & E.,
but the mode of branching is different and the conidia larger.

Ramularia lethalis E. & E.

On living leaves of ^cer ruhriim, London, Canada. June, 1890.
(Dearness, No. 1,730). Sent also from Michigan by G. H. Hicks.

Hypophyllous, forming at first small, irregular shaped, lead-
colored patches along the midrib and nerves, generall}' toward the
apex of the leaf, which soon turns black in these affected spots and
soon spreads over the upper half of the leaf which then becomes black
and dead, and soon crumbles away. The blackened areas enclose
paler, whitish spots. Hyphse subfasciculate, simple, continuous,
hyaline, 10-15 x l2-2/v., bearing at their tips the subcatenulate,
oblong, hyaline continuous, 5-10 x 2-2 2 ,« conidia.

The fungus is very destructive to the leaves,
Clasterisporium pulchrum E, & E.

On bark of dead Carpinxis americana, London, Canada. June,
1892. (Dearness, No. 1,900.)

Effused, velvety, black. Creeping hyphse, septate, branched,
interwoven, with here and there tufts of paler, straight, erect-spread-
ing lance-shaped hyphse arising from a membranaceous, perithecium-
like base. Conidia clavate, mostly a little curved, truncate or 3-4-
cleft at the apex, 7-9-septate, the upper cell paler and armed with
about 4 lateral boss-like tubercles or short horns. The whole prob-
ably forms the conidial stage of some Pyrenomycete, of the family
Lasiosphcerieoe.
Dendryphium sphaerioides E. & E.

On Bigelovia douglasii, Sprucemont, Nevada. Oct., 31, 1892.
(M. E. Jones, No. 6.)

12

170 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Forming black tuberculiform tufts on the dead stems, about
1 mm. across and composed of closely packed chains of conidia about
120a long and 10-12/j'- broad, the single conidia being elliptical,
brown, uniseptate and constricted, about 20 x lO-12/Jt, placed end to
end without any connecting cell,

Cercospora nicotianae E. & E.

On leaves of tobacco, Raleigh, N. C. Oct., 1891, (com., Gerald
McCarthy.)

Spots amphigenous, pale, becoming white, 2-5 mm. diam,, with a
narrow, inconspicuous, reddish, slightly raised border, often concave
below, Hyphse tufted, amphigenous, 75-100 x A-dfi, 2-3-times
geniculate above and sometimes with a short, lateral branch brown,
septate. Conidia slender, 40-75 x 3-3^/^, hyaline, slightly curved,
multiseptate (mostly about 6-septate.)

Cercospora nesaeae E. & E.

On leaves of Nemea verticillaia, Milford, Del. Sept., 1892.
(Commons, No. 1,984.)

Spots amphigenous, scattered, suborbicular or irregular, 2-4 mm.
diam,, with a shaded, purple border. Hyphae epiphyllous, tufted,
35-45 X 2i-3,y-, continuous, olivaceous or srnoky-hyaline, geniculate
above, Conidia clavate-cylindrical, hyaline, 3-5-(mostly 3-) septate,
25-75 X 2A-3,a.

The minute black tufts of hyphse under the hand lens resemble
the perithecia of some Septoria or Phyllostida.
Cercospora weigelae E. & E,

On leaves of Weigelce (cult.), Newfield,N, J, Sept., 1889. Sent
also from Washington, D. C, by Miss E. A. Southworth.

Spots small (1-2 mm.), white, with a broad, shaded, dark purple
border. Hyphse in small tufts scattered thickly over the central
part of the spot, geniculate and toothed above 70-90 x 3 5-4 J//, brown,
continuous. Conidia terminal slender clavate, hyaline, nucleate,
50-75 X 2*-3,a.
Cercospora crotonis E. & E.

On leaves of Croton texensis, Rockport, Kansas. Aug., 1892.
(Bartholomew, No, 359,)

Spots indistinct, pallid, not definitely limited, finally subconfluent
and brownish, giving the leaf a dirty withered look. Tufts mostly
epiphyllous, in small but dense fascicles, appearing under the lens
like minute, black grains thickly scattered over the spots. Hyphae

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 171

olive-brown, continuous, nucleate, torulose above 35-50 x 4,a.
Conidia obclavate, brownish, obtuse, nearly straight, faintly 1-4-
septate, 40-90 x 4-5//.

Quite distinct from C. crotonifolia Cke. which is on definite spots
and has much shorter hyphse and smaller conidia.

Cercospora ditissima E. & E.

On leaves of Gnicus undulatus, Rockport, Kansas. June, 1892.
(E. Bartholomew, No. 605.)

Spots dirty brown, subindefinite, suborbicular, 3-5 mm. diam.
Hyphse amphigenous, densely tufted on a dark colored, tubercular
base 75-85,a diam., short (15-20x25-3/Jt.), subhyaline, toothed
above and subobtuse, simple, continuous, 30-75 x 4:-6fj., subhyaline,
straight, oblong or obclavate, 3-5-septate.

Cheiromyces comatus E. & E.

On decorticated Azalea, Newfield, N. J. June, 1877.

Gregarious on the bleached surface of the wood. Acervuli minute
(s-J mm. long), subhysteriiform-erumpent, black. Conidia multi-
partite, the divisions (nearly 100 in number) subcylindrical, some-
what attenuated above, 35-40 x 2-2 J//, 5-7-septate, hyaline, united
at base so as to form a brush-like tuft 15-20// thick. The tufts
arise directly from the cells of the i^roligerous layer, without any
distinct basidia. The habit is the same as that of C. beanmontii B.
& C. as distributed in N. A. F., 762, and like that species and C.
tmctus Pk., differs considerably from the species figured by Berk, in
Int. Crypt. Bot. in the absence of any pulvinate stromatic base.
Volutella bartlioloinsei E. & E.

On leaves of Sporobolus asper, Rockport, Kansas. Sept., 1892.
(E. Bartholomew.)

Sporodochia evenly scattered, hemispherical or oblong-hemispher-
ical, olive-black, i-i mm. diam., made up of closely packed, oblong-
cylindrical, olivaceous, 2-nucleate, 9-11 x 22// conidia arising directly
from the proligerous layer, without any visible sporophores, the
whole surrounded by an imperfectly developed, membranaceous ring
or border subtended by a few (3-6) erect-spreading olivaceous, con-
tinuous bristles 4-5// thick at base and tapering to the obtuse, sub-
hyaline apex.
Stigmina liriodendri E. & E.

On fading leaves of Lirlodendron tulipifera, Saltillo, Mississippi.
Oct., 1892. (Tracy, No. 1,829.)

172 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Spots amphigenous, subindefinite, dark brown, with a yellow-
shaded border, 3-5 mm. diam. Aeervuli numerous, hypophyllous,
standing circumferentially on the spots so as to leave the center
bare. Conidia oblong-cylindrical, brown, 1-3 (mostly 3-) septate,
10-15 X 35-4/^., not constricted at the septa, 3-4-or more-catenulate,
catenulse sometimes branching above.

1893.] natural sciences of philadelphia. 173

March 7.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Fifty-four persons present.

March 14.
Geo. H. Horn, M. D., in the chair.
Thirty-five persons present.

The deaths of Mrs. Louisa J. Roberts and Geo. De B. Keim,
members, were announced.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication : —

" The Glandular Hairs of Brasenia peltata Pursh," by Ida A
Keller.

"Notes on Choeropsis liberiensis Morton," by Henry C.
Chapman, D. D.

March 21.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Fifty-one persons present.
The death of Wra. B. Rogers, a member, was announced.

March 28.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.

Forty-six persons present.

The following were elected members :

Samuel R. Shipley, Henry Winsor, Thomas H. Dougherty,
Edgar W. Earle, Henry Hazlehurst, John A. Brown, Jr., Frank
Thomson, George B. Roberts, Enoch Lewis, Francis B. Reeves,
Thomas McKean, Edw. H. Coates, Sutherland M. Prevost,
Hampton L. Carson, Crawford Arnold, Sydney F. Tyler, Richard
M. Cadwalader, Robert Wain Ryers, Joshua L. Baily, J. Bayard
Henry and Charles Chauncey.

The following were ordered to be printed : —

174 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

NOTES ON SOME MINERALS AND ROCKS.
BY E. GOLDSMITH.

PiMELiTE. The material was found by Mr. Theo. D. Raud on bis
property at Radnor, Delaware Co., Penna., at a moderate depth. It
is soft and very finely micaceous, having an apple green color and is
greasy to the feel. Specific gravity was found with the Tboulet
solution to be 2*596.

Beneath the microscope it shows irregular outlines. Dichroism
none. Interference colors brilliant. A cleavage is noticed in a direc-
tion apparently at right angles to the plates which give an inclined
extinction on rotating the object. The mineral is therefore defined
as crystallized and may belong to the monoclinic system.

It is not fusible. "With carbonate of soda on charcoal it aflfords a
black mass containing nickel. With the fluxes it shows silica, nickel
and iron. Hydrochloric acid decomposes it on boiling, leaving
some mixed sand ; after repeated boiling with the acid the insoluble
portion was found to be 3ri per cent, of the whole mass.

The soluble part, which is supposed to be the pimelite, being so
intimately mixed with the insoluble impure sand, I analyzed
quantitatively with the following result :

Silica 45-93 percent 0=24-49

Magnesia 34-44 percent 0=:rl3-771

Nickeloxid 7-69 per cent 0= 1-66 j- =25.81

Water 11-68 percent 0=10-38 J

Which gives the ratios of Si02 : RO : : 1 : 1-05. A unisilicate,
which may be represented in this form : (Mgx + Niy -|- HJ O-
SiO,.

If ever the mineral pimelite is found and analyzed in a purer
state it may possibly have the above composition ; but the Radnor
mineral is a mixture.

AsBEFERRiTE. This variety of amphibole occurs mixed Avith
cobalt and nickeliferous pyrites on calcite. It occurs abundantly as
a secondary product in the iron mine near the Falls of French Creek,
Chester Co., Penna. It is mostly on the calcite, but some of it has
crystallized within it, giving the calcite a greenish tint. The
asbeferrite, when dry, has a faint green color ; if wet, as it comes out
of the mine, it appears dark green. The best designation may be

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 175

grayish-green. Apparently it is amorphous macroscopically, in
reality crystallized in fine fibres which lie in all directions as if
felted together. The crystals as seen under the microscope are
mostly very thin and appear colorless, but those which are thicker
show a green color and with one nicol prism ; when the object is
rotated, a second color, yellow, is observed. The thicker crystals
are therefore dichroic. These latter, when viewed parallel with the
orthodiagonal plane, show this dichroic property particularly, but it
is extinguished parallel to their longer axis, between the crossed
nicols. The extinction parallel to the clinodiagonal I determined
to be equal to — 28°. The color of interference of this latter plane
was a bright yellow, but parallel to the orthodiagonal it was blue.
These optical characters indicate that this variety of amphibole is
nionoclinic.

The hardness is not determinable. Specific gi'avity=2'6.

Heated in the oxidizing flame it assumes a rusty color, fusing with
difficulty to a black mass; in the reducing flame it becomes gray.
AVith the fluxes iron and silica are indicated.

The analytical result was as follows :

SiOj 48'45 per cent.

Fe^Og 33-90 per cent.

. CaO 11-80 per cent.

MgO 6-23 per cent.

A trace of manganese w^as observed but not determined quantita-
tively.

The composition of byssolite of Saussure is nearly the above, but
this variety occurs as stiff", shining, bristle-like crystals, not felt-like
as is the case with the dull, soft material under discussion. At any
rate it is but a variety of amphibole and compares better with the
Scandinavian mineral asbeferrite.

Cacoxenite. This species occurs on limonite at Beartown, Lan-
caster Co., Penna. The reddish-yellow radiating tufts are made up
of very fine, fragile crystals whose hardness cannot be determined.
It is entirely soluble in nitric acid, and the solution gives reactions
for phosphoric acid and iron. It also contains Avater.

Beneath the microscope the orthorhombic forms are clearly
observable, as (110) (001). They are dichroic ; gray when parallel
with the lower nicol and yellow when at a right angle to it. Between
the crossed nicols superb interference colors of orange, yellow, blue
and violet appear. This seems singular because the crystals do not

176 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

show much difference in thickness. Extinction invariably parallel
to the longer axis.

Sericite-schist, also called hydromica schist, has been observed
on several outcrops about one mile north of Berwyn, Pa. It is a
glistening soft schistose rock much interspersed with quartz.
Parallel to the layers it is smooth and fatty to the touch ; at right
angle to it, rather sharp and rough. It is so brittle that trans-
parent sections are difficult to make.

With the microscope the section gave indications of the fragmental
nature of its constituents. These are the peculiar leaflets of sericite,
very irregular in outline and in distribution, and fragments of a feld-
spar, which is probably orthoclase, and quartz. As accessories I found
some chlorite having faint dichroic properties playing between
green and brown. A multitude of acicular crystals is strewn
through the mass which seem to be apatite. Phosphoric acid and
lime were found by chemical tests.

Amphibolitk. This is a perfectly black rock found at Swarth-
more, Delaware Co., Penna. There are lines which indicate strati-
fication and it may be therefore of metamorphic origin. The
fracture is curved. The hand specimen is of an even, crystalline
structure throughout the mass, but the crystals are not lying all
in the same direction. It is very compact and sound without any
sign of weathering or decomposition. It is apparently nothing
but amphibole, so far as the ordinary vision goes. In thin section,
however, there are, beside the amphibole, small irregular shaped frag-
ments of feldspar, mica and quartz, and magnetite in fair quantity.

Gabbro-Phonolite. Mr. Theo. D. Rand showed me in a not
very deep ravine near Radnor Station, Delaware Co., Penna., a rock
of very dark color, fine-grained and tough which had not been
determined. He is of the opinion that the rock is in its original
position, which may be correct, although I have not been able to
see the proofs of it. It seems to me to be an isolated boulder.

If struck with the hammer it does not give a metallic sound, but
its mineralogical composition seems to indicate a phonolite. The
thin section magnified 100 diameters gave the following result:
Figure 1, sanidiae, plagioclastic feldspar, diallage and magnetite.

Phonolite. About a mile east of French Creek Falls Station^
Chester Co., Penna., occurs a dyke whose rock splits in slabs after
heating it and marking with the chisel and hammer the direction in
which the division shall take place. I have seen plates of t inch in

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 177

thickness. When struck with a hammer it gives a clear metallic
sound ; even the knuckles or the finger nails produce an audible
ring. It is fine grained, compact, tough, rough to the touch and of
dark gray color ; not weathered.

The thin section exhibits under ordinary light much colorless
material with some dark, irregularly outlined patches. Dichroism
hardly any. Between the crossed nicols the following minerals
became visible : Plagioclastic feldspar, sanidine, augite, diallage,
amphibole, ilmenite with borders of leucoxene. Glass was not
found.

Similar thin slabs of the same material were found in two other
localities. The one near the dyke at Schwenksville near Perkiomen
Creek and the other on the dyke near Tylersport, Montgomery County,
Pa. Both slabs were about i inch thick and weathered. The mere
touch with the fingers emitted a sound. The mineral composition in
general is the same as the rock from Little French Creek Falls.

An Altered Phonolite. A flat slab, of about a 1 inch in
thickness, having the appearance of micaceous gneiss and a decided
metallic sound when touched or struck was found not far from the
dyke at West Conshohocken, Montgomery County, Pa. A thin
section observed under the microscope indicated a glassy feldspar
having the characters of sanidine. This latter species was compared
with the sanidine bearing trachyte from Sicily and Vesuvius and
seems to be identical therewith. Besides this glassy orthoclastic
feldspar a mica and quartz are present. There are also some very
thin fibrous microlites, which are probably a silicate, and ferric oxid.
In the whole the mixture of minerals present in this peculiar slab is
fine grained and very brittle. If the glassy feldspar should prove
to be true sanidine, the rock would be a new variety of gneiss, and,
since sanidine occurs only in eruptive rocks a somewhat singular
derivation would be indicated. It is evident that the glassy feld-
spar resists the action of metamorphic influences longer than the
plagioclastic feldspars ; the latter having entirely disappeared in this
altered phonolite, being, as it seems,changed into mica and quartz.
This is believed to be possible, since labradorite contains about 53
per cent, of silica, muscovite 46 per cent. The difference of the silica
would be liberated and, in the course of time crystallize into quartz.

Gabbro-Phonolite. About ten miles east of Quakertown,
Bucks County, Pa., a conical hill rises, named by the people, Haycock
Mountain. On the slope, near the top of this hill, is an outcrop of

178 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

igneous rock in the form of slabs and huge boulders. These were
generally called trap by our geological friends, but the people call
them ringing rocks ; or, what means the same, klinkstones. The
exposure is a large one, but, on inspection it was found that the trees
encroach upon it and have already conquered a considerable area of
the outcrop. They will probably in time cover the entire locality
which is called the Stony Garden by the people who go there on
picnics.

The klinkstones, as they are called (or, more properly speaking
phonolites), produce a metallic sound when struck by a hammer,
and the sound differs with almost every block or slab.

It is known that these rocks are basic in their chemical relations
and this fact was fully established by my having, after a careful
examination of some specimens, obtained 52'15% of silica (SiOj.)

These phonolites, if not affected by atmospheric influence, are of
a dark color ; but they become ash-gray externally whenever exposed
to the air. They are tough and mostly fine-grained ; so much so
that, macroscopically, it is utterly impossible to determine their
mineralogical composition, although, with the aid of the pocket lens,^
a few crystals may be seen. The thin section (fig. 2) had to be
magnified 100 diameters to make the components visible. It was
compared with standard rock slides: diallage, plagioclastic feldspar,
sanidine, amphibole and magnetite.

Inasmuch as the composition embodied in these rocks constitutes
a gabbro, I have proposed the name gabbro-phonolite for this, the
first American i^honolite.

Another dyke of phonolite, of essentially the same character and
of nearly the same composition, is exposed in Bucks County near
the Delaware River, opposite Holland Station, New Jersey.

Three miles north of Pottstown, Montgomery County, Pa., is a fine
exposure of the same kind of phonolite as described above. The
people of the town call it the Ringing Hill. As it is easily reached
it is used as a pleasure grove. The encroaching trees will, in all
probability cover the entire outcrop, the greater part having already
been covered up.

In PI. II, figure 3, I have tried to illustrate a thin section of
gabbro-phonolite collected from the dyke through which the North
Pennsylvania Railroad passes. The point is about two miles north
of Quakertown, Bucks County, Pa. A description may appear
superfluous because the composition is so nearly like the one from

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 179

Haycock Mountain except that the sound emitted is not so highly
metallic as in the case of the latter. There are, however, twins of
diallage in the section which will easily be recognized by those inter-
ested in the subject. The sanidine is present in less quantity than
the plagioclastic feldspar which seems to be labradorite. Huge
blocks, rounded by weathering, occur in the neighboring fields in
great abundance. Specimens collected and studied in the same way,
gave the same general results, and have therefore not travelled any
great distance.

Mr. Theo. D. Rand collected two specimens of rock which he sub-
mitted to me for determination. The one was found at Buck Run,
2 miles southwest of Mortonville, Chester County, Pa. ; and the other
from 2 miles south-southeast of Thorndale, Chester County, Pa.
Both specimens proved to be the same kind of gabbro-phonolite.
Slight differences are noticed in the Mortonville rock ; beside the
sanidine, plagioclastic feldspar, the diallage and augite, there is some
hematite beside the magnetite.

The Thorndale rock is the same in composition except that
some chlorite was recognized in the mixture.

Granulite. The specimen was collected in the quarry at Pigeon
Cove, Mass., by Mr. Theo. D. Rand who told me that the quarrymen
complained of the extreme hardness of the rock, which they could
not account for. I was requested to investigate it and to ascertain
what the cause of the extreme hardness might be.

The hand specimen is a coarse grained, mostly light colored rock
intermixed irregularly with large black patches having a metallic
lustre. The rock contains no mica.

The thin section (PI. II, fig. 4) as observed beneath the microscope
showed the constituent minerals to be orthoclastic feldspar, quartz
and magnetite. It is essentially the same rock which is so exten-
sively used in Philadelphia for Belgian block pavements.

The feldspar and the quartz are interpenetrated and can be best
recognized by reflected light ; when so examined the quartz appears
dark and the feldspar light. With the aid of the polarized ray the
interference phenomena of the two mineral species are clearly shown ;
the reflected ray however, shows it to the best advantage especially
for the shading in the illustration. The contour was drawn with
the pen and the aid of a rectangular prism (Dr. Piffards) which
projects the picture of the slide upon the paper. Under these con-
ditions the contour can be drawn with accuracy and ease, provided

180 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

one has enough light. The section as drawn shows how intimately the
quartz and feldspar are mixed. The two species are so commingled
as to indicate that they must have crystallized simultaneously, the
greater hardness seeming to be due to a somewhat greater proportion
of quartz.

Explanation of Plates I and II.

Figure 1. Gabbro Phonolite, Kadnor. Magnified 100 diameters
shows, (1) Sanidine, (2) Plagioclastic Feldspar, (3) Diallage, (4)
Magnetite.

Figure 2. Gabbro Phonolite, 10 miles east of Quakertown.
X 100 ; (1) Diallage, (2) Plagioclastic Feldspar, (3) Sanidine, (4)
Amphibole, (5) Magnetite.

Figure 3. Gabbro Phonolite, north of Quakertown, X 15 ; (1)
Diallage, (2) Plagioclastic Feldspar, (3) Magnetite, (4) Amphibole,
(5) Sanidine.

Figure 4. Gran u lite, Pigeon Cove, Mass. Xl5; (1) Orthoclas-
tic Feldspar, the dark portion quartz, (3) Magnetite.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 181

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE HERPETOLOGY OF BRITISH COLUMBIA.
BY E. D. COPE.

The present paper records the species contained in two collections
made in British Columbia. The first and less extensive was made by
Dr. and Mrs. G. F. Bodington, at Hatzic in the Matsqui Country, on
the Frazer River, near to the Uniited States line. The fauna is that
of the Pacific Coast. The other and more considerable collection
was made by Samuel N. Rhoads, of Philadelphia, during an exten-
sive exploration of the country, made in the interest of zoological
science. His route extended from Tacoma (Washington) to Vic-
toria on Vancouver Island, and thence to Ashcroft in the arid
region east of the Cascade Mountains. Then it led one hundred
and fifty miles north to Lake La Hache about lat. 52° ; and then
returning to Ashcroft it extended eastward to the western base of
the Selkirk Range at Sicamoos, and to Vernon a little further
south. Mr. Rhoads returned to Revelstoke on the Columbia River,
and descended that stream about two hundred miles to Nelson, on
Kootenay Lake. Thence he went east to Field, near the summit of
the Rocky Mountains. The species collected represent a great
variety of climate and altitude. Thus species from Tacoma and
Victoria represent the humid coast fauna, and those from Ashcroft
eastward, belong to an arid and elevated country. No species were
found as far north as Lake La Hache. The species from the Rocky
Mountains represent a more elevated and less arid condition than
those prevailing at Ashcroft.

BATRACHIA.

Amblystoma macrodactylum Baird.

Large specimens from Hatzic.
Diemyctylus torosus Eseh.

Specimens from Tacoma, Hatzic, and Victoria, B. C.
Bufo columbiensis B. & G.

Hatzic and Field, B. C, in the Rocky Mountains.
Hyla regilla B. & G.

Numerous specimens from Tacoma and from Hatzic.
Rana agilis aurora B. & G.

Abundant at Tacoma and Hatzic.

182 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Rana temporaria pretiosa B. & G.

Sicamoos, B. C, and Field, B. C, in the Rocky Mountains —
numerous specimens.

Rana virescens Kahn.

A small specimen, having the general appearance of the sub-
species brachycephala Cope, but with the length of the head entering
the total less than three times. From the plains east of the Rocky-
Mountains.

Spea hammondii iutermoutana Cope.

A single specimen from Vernon, B. C. The frontoparietal
fontanelle is closed, and the supraorbital borders are thickened,
so as to give the profile a distinct convexity. The discovery of
this species, so far north, greatly extends its range.

REPTILIA.

Pityophis sayi bellona B. & G.

Vernon.
Eutaenia leptocephala B. & G.

An interesting series of eight specimens was obtained by Mr.
Rhoads, five from Tacoma and three from Victoria, B. C. He did
not obtain it from any locality east of the latter point. In my paper
on the Characters and Variations of the Snakes of North America,^
p. 660, 1 state that of the specimens in the National Museum, rather
less than half have two preocular plates, and one half have seven-
teen and the other half nineteen rows of scales. Of the eight speci-
mens brought by Mr. Rhoads, six have two, and two have three
preoculars; one of the latter coming from Tacoma and one from
Victoria. Six have seventeen rows of scales, and two have nineteen,
both the latter from Tacoma. The distinctive characters of the
species are thus confirmed. The ground color in two of the Tacoma
specimens is black, and the others brown. All of the Victoria
specimens are brown, and two of them have a red dorsal stripe.
Eutaenia sirtalis trilineata Cope, 1. sup. cit. 662-6.

Four specimens, two from Tacoma, and one each from Hatzic
and Sicamoos, B. C. The last two specimens are typical E. s.
trilineata, but in the two from Tacoma the dorsal stripe marks only
a single row of scales, and the lateral is principally on one row,
and partly on another. It is not unlikely that the two subspecies

1 Proceeds. U. S. Natl. Museum, 1892, p. 589 (pub. Sept. 1, 1892).

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 183

— E. s. pickeringii and E. s. irilineata — may have to be united.
In my key of subspecies of E. sirtalis, the E. s. picker iyjgiiy^as -placed
inadvertently in section III, while it should have been placed in
section IV.

Eutaenia sirtalis parietalis Say.

Three from Hatzic, two from Sicamoos, B. C, and one from
Nelson and Vernon, B. C, respectively. Constant to its characters
in the interior, but the three specimens from Hatzic show an approach
to the trilineata form. This is produced by a diminution in the size
of the red spots anteriorly, and their obliteration on the posterior
part of the body and on the tail.
Eutaenia elegans linealata Cope.

Two from Tacoma, and one from Sicamoos, B. C.
Eutaenia elegans vagrans B. & G.

Three from Nelson, B. C.
Crotalus confluentus lucifer B. & G.

Vernon.

Total number of species obtained, thirteen, of which eight are
batrachiaus and five snakes, two of the latter rej^resented by two
subspecies each.

An interesting feature in this collection is the remarkable exten-
sion of the northern range of the Sjjea liammoncUiintermontana,&Xid
the Pltyophis sayi hellona. The former had not been known pre-
viously north of Pyramid Lake, Nevada, and the latter, north of
the Humboldt River in the same State.

Both are restricted to the Great Basin, and their northern range
indicates the extension of the fauna to a higher latitude than has
been hitherto known. This is consistent with the physical charac-
ters of the count'^y, and with the indications furnished by the bird-
life, as I am informed by Mr. Rhoads. A.nother peculiarity is the
occurrence of Crotalus conjiuentus lucifer in the same region, instead
of the Great Basin form C. c. lecontei. The former is the coast
species, and has never been detected in the Great Basin.

The species are distributed according to districts, as follows :

PACIFIC COAST.

Diemyctylus torosus.
Hyla r eg ilia.
Rana agilis aurora.

184 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Eutaenia leptoeephala.
Eutaenia sirtalis pickeringii.
Eutaenia elegans lineolata.

ARID REGION.

Spea hammondii interviontana.
Pityophis sayi hellona.
Eutaenia sirtalis parietalis.
Crotalus confluentus lucifer.

ROCKY MOUNTAINS.

Rana temporaria pretiosa.
Eutaenia sirtalis parietalis.
Eutaenia sirtalis trilineata.
Eutaenia elegans lineolata.
Eutaenia elegans vagrans.

THE PLAINS.

Rana virescens.

Bufo columbiensis was sent from tlie coast and from the Rocky
Mountain region. It occurs also in the arid region in Oregon.
Eutaenia sirtalis parietalis has the same distribution.

Amhlystoma maerodadylum has not been previously recorded from
British Columbia, although its occurrence at Puget Sound would
lead us to expect it.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 185

NOTES ON CHOEROPSIS LIBERIENSIS (Morton).
BY HENRY C. CHAPMAN, M. D.

It is well-known that the late Dr. Samuel G. Morton, regarding cer-
tain peculiarities presented by the skull of the hippopotamus inhab-
iting the west coast of Africa as specific in character, proposed in
communications made to the Academy' that the latter should be
distinguished from that of the east coast as Hippopotamus minor,
afterward liberiensis, the former retaining the name of Hippopot-
amus amphihius given to it by Linnaeus." The Academy having
afterward acquired an entire skeleton of theLiberian hippopotamus,
the late Dr. Leidy took up anew the study of its osteology
and more especially of the skull. After a most cai'eful com-
parison of the skulls of the two species, Dr. Leidy came to the
conclusion that the hippopotamus of Liberia differed so much
from that inhabiting the Nile, the Cape of Good Hope, etc., that the
Liberian animal should be considered as constituting, not only a dis-
tinct species, but a distinct genus, and proposed^ that the new
genus should be named Chaerodes. Learning, however, that this
name had already been appropriated, having been previously given
to an insect. Dr. Leidy suggested that the name Chaerodes should
be changed to Choeropsis.* While Dr. Leidy's views as to the
generic distinction between Hippopotamus and C/ioero;;siS have been
accepted by such high authorities as Gratiolet,^ Milne Edwards* and
Huxley', by many zoologists Choeropsis is regarded as a species of
Hippopotamus, and by some only as a variety of Hippopotamus

1 Proc. Acad. N. S.. 1844, Vol. 2, p. 14 ; Journal A. N. S., Vol. 1, 1849, p. 231.

^Syst. Nat. 12 ed., Vol. 1, p. 10, 1766.

3 Proc. A. N. S., 1852, Vol. 6, p. 52.

* Journal A. N. S.. 2 Ser., Vol. 2, 1853, p. 213.

^Recherches sur I'anatomie de I'Hippopotanie, Paris, 1867, p. 202. Gratiolet
apparently ignorant of Leidy's description, named the Liberian hippopotamus
Ditomeodori.

^ Recherches sur les Mammiferes, Paris, 1868-1874, p. 43.

' Huxley, Anatomy of Vertebrated Animals, 1872, p. 319. At least, Huxley
says, " The Hippopotamidae are represented at present only by the genera Hippo-
potamus and Ckaeropus.'" " Chaeroptis has only two incisors in the lower jaw "
— by Chaeroptis is, presumably, meant Choeropsis.

13

186 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

amphibius.^ Thus, for example, Flower," a very high autkority,
does not consider the difference in the shape of the cranium and in
the number of the incisor teeth in the lower jaw as warranting the
establishment of the genus Cfioeropsis. The difference presented by
the crania in the two kinds of hippopotamus, Flower regards as
similar to those " between the Tiger and the smaller species of
Felis, the Gorilla and Baboons and the siualler allied apes." In
the judgment of the author, however, it may be at least questioned
whether the differences existing between the smaller species of Felis
do not justify separating them into distinct genera. On the
other hand, although the Gorilla has descended in all probability
from some Baboon-like form, zoologists do not as yet recognize these
two apes as species of the same genus. The fact that Hippopotamus
amphibms syn. Tetraprotodou has, according to Gaudry,^" exhibited
in one instance unilateral hexaprotodontism and Choeropsis, accord-
ing to Flower," in one instance unilateral tetraprotodontism would
influence but few palaeontologists in regarding, like Lydekker,^^
Hexaprotodon, Tetrajyrotodon and Choeropsis as merely species of
one genus Hippopotamus. Hexaprotodon and Tetraprotodon, with
the incisor formula l-f and |-| respectively, are still consid-
ered either as sub-genera, as they were originally by Falconer and
Cautley," or as genera, as by the greatest of British palaeontologists,
the late Sir Richard Owen." The latter view being accepted by
the author, Choeropsis, with the incisor formula f-f, and differing
in other respects far more from the living hippopotamus (^Tetrapro-
todoii) than the latter does from the extinct one (Hexaj^rotodon),
should certainly be regarded as a genus distinct from Hippopotamus.
It appears to us that too much importance has been attached by
Lydekker and Flower to the presence of an extra incisor tooth in
the lower jaw of Hippopotamus amphibius and Choeropsis respect-
ively, especially as it has only been noticed once in either case. We
would rather regard the presence of such an incisior tooth as an
individual peculiarity and as an instance of redundancy than of
reversion. In view of what has already been urged by Leidy,

sCarus, Zoologie, 1868, p. 145.
9 Pro. Zool. Soc. London, 1887, p. 612.
"Bull. Soc. Geologique, Ser. 3, Vol. 4, p. 504.
" Op. cit.

12 Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India, 1884-1886, Vol. 3, p. 47.

13 Falconer, Palseontological Memoirs, Vol. 1, 1868, p. 140.
" Odontography, 1840, p. 566.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 187

Gratiolet, Milne-Edwards in favor of distinguishing Chueropsis as a
genus distinct from Hippopotamus, there is but little further to be
added. It may be mentioned, however, in this connection, that the
brain of Choeropm as described by Macalister'^ differs very con-
siderably from that of the adult hippopotamus dissected by Garrod^®
and of the young animal dissected by the author,^^ the differences
between the two brains being essentially the same as those presented
by the casts of the cranial cavities described and figured by
Milne-Edwards. The above remarks are made on the occasion
of the presentation to the Academy by Mr. W. E. Rothery, Consul
of the Liberian Government, through Mr. Arthur E. Brown, of
a fine skin and skeleton of the Choeropsis Uberiensis. The value
of this generous gift will be better appreciated when it is known
that the only specimen of Choerop)sis liberiensis ever exhibited
abroad was the one that lived only five minutes after its arrival
at the Zoological Garden of Dublin, and which constituted the
subject of the dissection made of that animal by Macalister. So
far as known to the author, with the exception of the skin presented
to the Academy this evening, there are but two others in col-
lections— those referred to by Milue-Edwards and Flower. Our
Choeropsis, of which we give an illustration taken from a photo-
graph, (Plate. IV) is 5 feet 3 inches in length, and 2 feet 5 inches in
height, the latter measurement being taken from the shoulder.
The color of the skin appears to have been originally of a bluish
black, fainter in some parts than others, and presenting, therefore, a
somewhat mottled appearance. The difference in color from that of
the Choeropsis described by Milne-Edwards, which is represented
as of a reddish hue, may possibly have been due to the liquor in
which the skin was preserved. It is more probable, however, that
Choeropsis varies in color. In other respects, our specimen resembles
that described and illustrated by Milne-Edwards.

'» Proc. Royal Irish Acad., 2d Ser, Vol. 1, 1873, p. 494.
i« Trans, of Z. S. London, 1880.
"P.A.N. S., 1881, p. 126.

188 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

THE GLANDULAR HAIKS OF BEASENIA PELTATA PURSH.
BY IDA A. KELLER.

The thick coating of jelly with which certain parts of J??'asenta
peltata are covered can not have escaped the attention of any one
who is familiar with that member of the family of Nymphseacese.
In my search for descriptions of the method of formation of this
secretion, for such we must term the jelly-like mass, I have found
but one brief statement in explanation of the development of it.
This is by Asa Gray, who says " The jelly by which the stalks, etc.,
are thickly coated, I find to arise from the rapid formation and
rupturing of successive epithelial cells, in the same way that muci-
lage is formed on the surface of animal mucous membranes."^ This
explanation is wholly inadequate, and I might also say entirely
incorrect, as will become apparent further on.

Turning our attention first of all to the distribution of the jelly,
it may be noticed in the plant represented on Plate III, fig. 1, that
there is none of this coating substance to be found on the older parts
of the creeping rhizome, and particularly not at such portions which
were not of this year's growth, nor is any of the secretion observ-
able on the petioles and blades of the older leaves still alive and
vegetating. Three such leaves are represented by B, C, & A, in
fig. I. On these, none of the jelly except perhaps slight traces of
it, was perceptible to the touch. The next two leaves, D, & E, in
fig. I, evidently younger and less well developed, show a thick film
of jelly-like substance on the petioles, and this film extended also
over the under surface of the leaf blades. The leaves of Brasenia
peltata are alternate and elliptical in shape, and centrally peltate.
The long diameter of each of the three older leaves above referred
to as destitute of the coating of jelly was about 8 cm. The long
diameter of each of the two leaves with the jelly-like coating on the
petioles and under leaf-surfaces was 7 cm. and 62 cm. respectively.

The leaves are involute in vernation, and the next younger leaf
having not yet expanded, fig. I F shows the sides rolled inward,
parallel to the longest diameter. This latter measured 5 cm. The
entire leaf in this case seemed to be enveloped in a gelatinous sheath.
On unrolling the sides I found, however, that the secretion originated

^ A. Gray, Genera Florae Americas Boreali-Orientalis, Vol. I, p. 96, Note.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 189

from the under leaf surface only. The upper leaf surface was
almost completely hidden from view and consequently protected by
means of the peculiar infolding of the leaf in the early stages of its
development. The long diameter of the next younger leaf, with its
sides similarly rolled in as in the case of the preceding one, meas-
ured 1 cm., fig. 1, G, and the thick gelatinous mass which coated
it, extended also over the adjoining petioles and the punctum vege-
tationis. To the naked eye, this secretion appears as a transparent
colorless jelly. Held up to the light it can be observed that numer-
ous very fine hair-like processes extend into it from the plant. On
magnification, these processes appear as represented in fig. II, A,
B, C, D. It becomes at once appai*ent that these processes belong
to the category of trichomes being outgrowths from the epidermis.
In spite of the variety of form as represented in fig. II, these
trichomes show a certain uniformity of structure. They consist in
the main of one large cell, fig. II, X, and of a group of smaller
cells uniting the large terminal cell with the epidermis below. Only
two of this group of cells are shown in fig. II, A, Y. The trichomes
are either unbranched, fig. II, A & B, or else they are branched
or rather forked, fig. II, C & D. There cannot be the slightest
doubt that these trichomes are the organs which are active in the
secretion of the jelly, and they may therefore be termed glandular
hairs. Since, at the time of collecting, it has been impossible for me to
examine carefully the structure of these glandular hairs, the mater-
ial was placed in 50 per cent, alcohol, and the observations which I
here record were made entirely on alcohol material. The gelatin-
ous coating suffered no perceptible change through this new medium.
From a leaf 1 cm. long, a portion of the epidermis of the under
leaf surface was removed and examined. The glands were closely
crowded, leaving no spaces between them. What I shall call the
gland proper is represented in fig. II, A X, plus the group of
smaller cells at the base already referred to, and two of which are
represented by Y of fig. II, A. The gland of fig. II, A was of
about the average size, and measured .205 mm. in height and .0369
mm. in width. Surrounding the gland proper will be noticed what
I shall in distinction from this and for convenience merely term
sheath, fig. II, A. S., which measured, in this particular case .2337 mm.
X .0943 mm. The size of the sheaths varies considerably, and the
explanation of this variation of size is found in the peculiar signifi-
cance of these structures which will be dwelt upon immediately.

190 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

At the apex of the gland proper, a cap is noticeable, fig. II, A, Zr
which was more highly refractive than the remainder of the cell wall.
Directly below it the protoplasm seemed more dense, the proto-
plasm itself was yellow or brownish, granular and in part showed
reticulations. Since I did not examine fresh material, I cannot, at
present, say how far the protoplasm had been affected or altered
in appearance by the alcohol.

The outer envelope or portion which I have for want of a better
term called " sheath," is delicately walled, sometimes closed at the
top, fig. II, A, and sometimes open, fig. II, B, C, D. The wall
is transparent — almost colorless. This sheath, in all probability,
represents the " epithelial cells " of Gray, but instead of being epi-
thelial cells rapidly formed and ruptured, the observation of the
method of development of these sheaths indicates a totally different
explanation regarding their true nature. The method of secretion
witnessed in glandular hairs is generally as follows : " The secre-
tion regularly occurs first at the apex and spreads from there, lifting
off the thin cuticle in shape of a bladder whose contents are then
filled with the secretion."^ Regarding fig. VI, where a sheath is
just beginning to be formed, S", and where another has already
attained a considerable size, S', there can be little doubt of the
fact that the method of secretion in case of the glandular hairs of
Brasenia peltata is entirely in accordance with that observed in
glandular hairs generally. The sheath then is nothing more nor
less than the cuticle lifted off by the secretion. The cuticle, as will
be seen on comparison of the figures, is capable of growing or
becoming stretched to a remarkable extent; this may be especially
well seen in fig. VI and fig. VIII, both glands being taken from
near the vegetative point where secretion seemed most active. The
cuticle finally becomes broken, indistinct, and eventually seems to
dissolve, as indicated in fig. II, C & D. A peculiar rupture of the
cuticle witnessed in a few cases is shown in Fig. II, B. This was
perhaps caused by some external agency, since, usually, the sheath
seems to become indistinct rather gradually instead of a portion
breaking off with a smooth edge.

According to Hanstein, the cuticle of glandular hairs in case of
unopened leaf-buds after rupture is often regenerated, and the form-
ation of new secretion begins.^ This process is particularly evident

•Julius Sachs, Vorlesungen iiber Pflanzen Physiologic, Leipzig, 1887, p. 195.
^ DeBary, Vergleichende Anatomic, Leipzig, 1877, p. 104.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 191

in case of the glandular hairs of Brrisenia peltata, especially so in
hairs from near the vegetative point. On these successive sheaths
may be frequently seen, as in fig. VI, S' & S", the next one appear-
ing before the preceding one is dissolved. Fig. VII represents the
apices of three such sheaths, the innermost always being the one last
formed.

In accordance also with observations on similar organs of other
plants, the secretion and secreting organs are most thick on the
youngest and most tender parts as already described and represented
in fig. I. The activity of the hairs evidently decreases from the
punctum vegetationis backward, and ceases entirely on the older
fully-developed parts. The hairs, although they cannot dry up in
the manner usually to be observed on land plants, seem to die oflT
and finally disappear, as indicated in fig, IV, a cross section of an
older portion of the rhizome which no longer possessed any or,
perhaps, slight traces of the gelatinous coating. Fig. V represents
a surface view of the epidermis taken from about the same point
as the cross section represented in fig. IV. In fig. V the places
where the glandular hairs had once been active, are represented by
H.

Fig. Ill, on the other hand, shows the great quantity of glands
which beset a petiole which is thickly coated with jelly, and the
more closely the vegetative point is approached, the more closely
the glands are packed together, in fact, as has been stated before, at
the points of greatest activity they are crowded to such an extent as
to leave no spaces between them.

The glandular hairs of Brasenia peltata are then, as plant hairs
are very apt to be, transitor}"^ organs, disappearing in the course of
the development of the part which produces them. In function
they are no doubt comparable to the " Colleters " of Hanstein.^
This name Hanstein applies to the more massive trichomes which
are found on the epidermis of leaves while still in the bud, and
secreting during that stage different substances, such as gum or gum
and resin, and by this means causing the parts to adhere to each
other and protecting them from unfavorable external agencies. This
active secretion must have been noticed by every one who has ever
observed the opening of the buds of the horse-chestnut, poplar, etc.
It may also be seen in the case of Salvia, Polygonum, Helianthiis
and other herbaceous plants.

^ DeBary, Vergleichende Anatomic, Leipzig, 1877, p. 104.

192 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

It is interesting to find in Braseniapeltata, a member of the water-
lily family and living therefore as an aquatic under entirely
different conditions, similar means of protection for the younger
parts as observed in the case of the terrestrial plants just referred to.

Although the chemical composition of the substances secreted by
means of the " Colleters " varies considerably in different land plants,
Hanstein applies the name " Blastocolla " indiscriminately to the
product. There is no reason why this name should not also apply
to the gelatinous coating found on the younger organs of Brasenia
peltata. It may be expected that a plant surrounded by air
requires totally different means of protection from one whose sur-
rounding medium is water, and it may be taken for granted that
the gelatinous coating of Brasenia peltata is one peculiarly adapted
to the conditions in which that plant lives. At present, it is impos-
sible for me to state the chemical composition of this substance.
The only point which I can state with certainty is that the princi-
pal constituent of the secretion is water, which fact indicates that
the secretion is one of those plant products Avhich are capable of
imbibing great quantities of water. It must be remembered that in
water plants the principal water-conducting tissue, thexylem of the
fibro-vascular bundles, is usually reduced to a more or less extent.
In case of Brasenia peltata, I notice that this reduction is carried to
an extreme degree, the xylem being entirely obliterated in the leaf
petioles. There is, therefore, in this plant, no tissue particularly
adapted to the rapid transportation of great quantities of water. The
question naturally arises, how, under the circumstances here prevail-
ing, in a plant entirely surrounded by water, containing within no
xylem or water-conducting tissue, par excellence, is this imbibition
process accomplished ? The determination of this matter is, as I
believe, of considerable importance, and requires a most critical
observation. Two methods naturally suggest themselves : the secre-
tion may draw the water from within, the water would then have to
be taken in at other points of the surface of the different parts of
the plant, and transferred from there to the glandular hairs ; or the
secretion may draw the water, or a part of it, directly from the out-
side. This latter, under the circumstances, seems to me the most
probable explanation of the phenomena here witnessed. The ques-
tion must, however, for the present, remain an open one. So far as
I know, the imbibition of water from the outside by means of gland-
ular hairs, has nowhere, as yet, been observed. Should the method

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 193

of secretion here suggested as probable for the glandular hairs of
Braseyiia peltata in truth prevail, I believe that this plant would
prove most valuable in adding to our knowledge of the processes of
secretion as observed in the vegetable kingdom.

194 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

NOTES ON THE OCCURRENCE OF QUARTZ AND OTHER MINERALS IN

THE CHEMUNG MEASURES. NEAR THE LINE OF LYCOMING

AND TIOGA COUNTIES. PENNSYLVANIA.

BY ABRAHAM MEYER.

Ascending the " Roaring branch " of Lycoming Creek, the upper
Catskill measures may be seen. After passing two or three thou-
sand feet of red and gray rocks we reach the upper measures of the
Chemung Vlllf and Vllle. Below, these dip from 10° to 80°
beyond which they are nearly horizontal.

In these horizontal strata which rise to heights of from one hundred
to three hundred feet above the stream, may be seen peculiar undula-
tions or rolls, some being slight short curves, others semi-circular^
while some form an entire circle with the layers concentric. These
are most apparent near the base of No. Vllle, in shales and fossili-
ferous limestone and iron ore. The rolls differ from the rock, which
surrounds them, though the latter follows to a certain extent the
convexity of the rolls.

Xear one of these rolls a drift was made in search of ore. On
the east side appeared a seemingly vertical wall of dark metamor-
phosed fossiliferous rock of considerable hardness, containing much
carbonaceous material and iron pyrites, with cavities holding
drusy quartz, calcite, chalcopyrite, etc. On the west side was a soft
(pyrophyllite) slate, with calcite and quartz crystals near the line of
contact.

In the four or five feet between these was a heterogeneous mixture
of hard and soft rocks of varying character, from a soft bluish clay
to a very compact quartz resembling novaculite, a breccia together
with geodes containing quartz crystals, calcite in the form of dog-
tooth spar, pearl spar, chalcocite, chalcopyrite, galena and blende
with possibly siderite, fluorite and millerite.

The quartz crystals are generally attached to the rock in the
usual manner ; some, however, are loose and nearly perfect, often
smoky and usually containing remarkable inclusions both solid and
liquid. There is much carbonaceous material, quite loose and soil-
ing anything with which it comes in contact. The shale impreg-
nated with this is sometimes metamorphosed into an excessively
hard material approaching carbonado in its character.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 195

This material was penetrated lor between 40 and 50 feet when
the body of the roll was met, dipping about 15°. Here, at the
bottom of the drift, on the east side, was a Avhite granular quartz
with intermingled quartz crystals some of them rolled. In three
feet this increased from a half inch to three inches in thickness
accompanied by a harsh silicious carbonaceous I'ock containing
pyrites and chalcopyrite and some steel gray crystals not determined.
This seemed to continue, but water coming in, the exploration was
abandoned. The quartz crystals exhibited show among other things
as follows :

1. A transparent, doubly terminated smoky crystal with a fluid
inclusion and also small pearly crystals ; also a rectangular and a
hexagonal prism beside moss-like aggregates. Near the apex of the
pyramidal termination there is a pearly crystal in form resembling
a twin of selenite.

In another position, the same crystal shows a vast number of
inclusions, some mere points, others fine lines, circles and rosettes,
colorless, yellow, orange and black, A group of twelve quartz
crystals associated with chalcopyrite and perhaps ilmenite. These
under the microscope show octahedral crystals included, with fluid
and bubble-containing cavities.

2. Crystals, colorless and transparent, also smoky and some
opaque, containing inclusions in fine lines and other figures. These
were obtained in a loose blue clay, arising from the decomposition
of the soft blue shales of the Chemung formation, and also from a
cylindrical chimney, six inches in diameter and two feet long which
was found near the top of the drift. The crystals were loose, in a
mass of decomposed ferruginous calcite and clay.

3. Similar crystals in ferruginous calcite, found between con-
glomerate and dolomitic spar in the roll.

4. A white and grayish-white laminated or tabular quartz in quite
thin plates, the surface studded Avith minute quartz crystals with
occasional larger transparent or milky crystals.

The slates accompanying these gave evidence by slickensided
surfaces of movement under pressure.

5. Quartz crystals upon crystallized calcite and dolomite ; the
surfaces coated with minute crystals.

6. These occurred with the tabular quartz described above and
are in nodular masses of metamorphosed slate and shale. Some
crystals are transparent, others dark smoky to black. Some of the

196 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1893.

black crystals are much harder than common quartz, and have
centers of prismatic colors, which by reflected light assume an
aster iated form.

7. Associated also with the tabular quartz is a browmish-red
ferruginous quartz one piece of which showed crystals of intense
black color, except two zones at the base, which showed prismatic
colors, and under the microscope the asterism. The point of this
crystal was extremely hard.

8. On a line with the rolls, but 125 feet above them topographic-
ally, was ferruginous calcite and massive quartz with rough quartz
crystals, the surfaces pitted and filled with clay. The massive
quartz breaks very readily into angular fragments, the surfaces
coated with dendrites. Some of the crystals are coated with druses
of black color and metallic lustre, some crystalline, some quite rough.
Under the microscope some of these show crystalline forms of light
straw color resembling millerite.

My theory of the formation of these rolls is that a subterranean
force acting over an oval area ten or twelve miles by four culmin-
ated in making them; the zone of most active force being about
two and a half miles in diameter. That steam and water carrying
carbon, lime, iron, etc., penetrated the crevices, formed and deposited
the minerals and crystals; unfortunately for mining interests this
action was scattered over a considerable extent of country whereas
had it been confined to a narrow vein, a valuable mine might have
been the result.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 197

PYROPHYLLITE SLATES IN NORTHERN PENNSYLVANIA.
BY ABRAHAM MEYER.

The following coramunication was read from Mr. Abraham Meyer
as part of the Proceedings of the Mineralogical and Geological
Section :

The Pyrophyllite slates of Lycoming and Tioga Counties occur in
the Formation No. YIII, g. Chemung, and Formation No. IX
(Red), Catskill.

The first exposure in the Chemung formation shows that these slates
are found where there has been an evident disturbance of the original
stratification with some infiltration of water, possibly steam, and the
measures at such points seem to have undergone a great change from
their usual conditions in having the coarser silica eliminated and the
softer homogeneous aluminous material with a small per cent, of very
finely divided silica remaining (generally) very evenly disseminated
throughout the mass. This class was found near the rolls in the
Chemung measures, Tioga County (where the quartzes, etc., referred
to were found) it occurred in layers from one-half inch to two inches
in thickness, and resembled the Vermont and Deep River, N. C,
pencil slates, but did not retain its homogeneous nature for any
distance. Upon the measures approaching the disturbance in the
horizontal strata near the rolls, it became permeated with silica,
which also formed cylindrical and ovoid masses of silicious matter,
so as to cause it to undergo a complete change, unfitting it for the
commercial purposes for which a perfectly homogeneous aluminous
shale would be desirable.

The second exposure was observed in the middle member of
Formation No. IX, Red and Gray Catskill, in Cogan House and
Pine Townships, Lycoming County, and both under similar condi-
tions but in varying quantities. In Cogan House Township the slate
was observed under the concretionary ferruginous limestone (corn-
stone of Old Red Sandstone series), in company with black shaly cop-
per ore and a mass of light gray shales mixed with silicious and
granitoid paste, the gray shales being sprinkled with a thin film and
specks of green and blue carbonate of copper (no copper-ore of com-
mercial value being observed). These slates were from one-fourth
to one inch thick, and were slightly more silicious than those of the
first exposure found, the whole thickness of deposit not exceed-

198 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

ing six inches, except the soft sbaly measures occurring in Pine
Township, which were from fifteen to eighteen inches thick. The
measures, however, were very much crushed and broken up — no
regular layers, but accompanied with a light sprinkle of copper green.
This form of exposure was observed at three localities.

The third exposure occurs near the mouth of Otter Run, Pine
Township, under a heavy mass of concretionary limestone, quite
thick (and was very similar to the Vermont and Deep River, X. C,
coarse pencil slates), but, being in the bed of the stream, it was
difficult to ascertain the thickness and extent of deposit. Good
sized plates were obtained, large enough for a medium-sized school
slate, three-fourths of an inch thick.

The fourth exposure was observed near the head of a small run
entering Larry's Creek, northeast of Cogau House P. 0. The
measures occur about fifty feet above the bed of the stream, the
overlying rock being a soft, calcareous red sand rock, in places
having cavities containing nodules of green sand, which, upon short
exposure, disintegrate into a bluish and green sand. This bed has
been observed five to eight feet thick, the washing of the overlying
surface soil and rock obscuring the true thickness. The upper
layers being in the bed of a run, are quite soft and shelly, but layers
are quite regular at the top, being from one-fourth to one-half inch
thick, while lower in the measures they are from one-half an inch to
one inch in thickness. A marked peculiarity near the surface is
that a number of layers have a rounded, irregular surface on the
upper side and assume a great variety of concretionary forms.
The observer can find regular squares faced outsideof layers, but on
disturbing them they fall apart into all kinds of odd and
regular oval, ovoid and irregular forms, from a rough-cast for skin-
ning stones fitted for instant use to the aborigines' hand, to others
that a little labor by rubbing would soon have converted into the
same form. Some of the shales have the impressions of algse (?)
upon them. Toward the bottom the measures change and merge
into a pale, reddish and gray, micaceous, sandy shale, some of the
laminae curved with rough, shallow cavities over the surface. These
are followed by a shale which is somewhat cellular in appearance, but,
where exposed, there is nothing in the cavities. This, in turn, is suc-
ceeded by a more highly ferruginous shale and silicious layers, gray
and red in color. Among the gray measures, some are observed
quite micaceous, having a bluish film over the surface, while others

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 199

are black on the line of the fossil markings; and, as this exposure
is all above any heavy body of water, it forms a good point of obser-
vation for a full order of superposition, though narrowness between
the banks of the run, with green timber growing thereon, is a bar
to any extensive investigations as to quantity or extent of the same.
The measures are all somewhat irregular on their bedding planes,
but give a nearly flat surface on one plane. The entire deposit is
ten to twelve feet in thickness, of which the pyrophyllite slates proper
occupy about five feet of the upper portion of the measures, and is
the only full section that has been seen.

The fifth exposure occurs on Bear Run, a tributary of Little Pine
Creek, about two and a half miles from the mouth of the Run, on
the south bank above the forks. It adjoins the edge of the
Run, and is partly below water-level, a great hindrance to the
full and proper study of the section, which presents itself under
more inviting surroundings than any of the preceding exposures
in the extent and quality of the outcrop, as well as its very
interesting occurrence. It occurs at the foot of the side hill, about
1,400 feet above tide, in a cliff" ten to twelve feet high, and fifteen to
twenty yards in length. The overlying rocks are red and gray shales
and sandstones, of Formation No. IX, Catskill group, and the roof
rock is a calcareous ferruginous sandrock (with small nodules of red
oxide of iron disseminated through it) in part coming in as a wedge,
while another portion of the measures farther west — a brownish,
rotten sandrock — is the cover, immediately under which occurs a
thin, shelly, fissile, red slate, six to eight inches thick. This is
followed by two feet of very soft, gray, fissile slates, tV to i-inch in
thickness, increasing to ]-inch with much exfoliation. These may
be only the result of weathering at the surface, as it was observed
in going in on the measures a short distance, they became somewhat
thicker and more solid. The slates on the outcrop were quite soft
and aluminous (hardening on exposure). In a few of the layers
were impressions of algae (?) ; on others, numerous rough accretions
on the surface, simulating small fossil shells. Proceeding downward,
the slates assumed a more distinct layerlike appearance, and became
thicker, being }-inch to I2 inches — one surface was generally quite
smooth and flat, while the other would be somewhat irregular. Upon
getting into these thicker layers, the removal of them opened up
many odd and interesting forms resembling aboriginal stone imple-
ments. Below these the slates became thicker to water level, with

200 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

more layers containing fossil impressions of plant life. The layers
now becoming more uniform in their bedding planes, with one, and
sometimes both planes, smooth and parallel to each other, of a thick-
ness of 1 to 2? inches, the surfaces having a slight film of a rusty,
ferruginous color, sometimes bearing arborescent forms. These
layers were observed 6 to 10 inches wide, and would evidently get
more massive working into the side hill. The total thickness of the
pyrophyllite slates is about six feet to water level. This exposure
is on lands of R. J. C. Walker and Wm. Weightman of Philadelphia.

Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Pliila. 189^.

Plate I.

Goldsmith, del.

GOLDSMITH ON MINERALS AND ROCK.

Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. 1893.

Plate II.

1: >| "S n j»

Goldsmith, del.

GOLDSMITH ON MINP^RALS AND ROCK.

PROC. ACAD. NAT. SCI. PHILA. 1333.

PL. III.

KELLER ON BRASENIA PELTATA.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 201

April 4.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Forty-nine persons present.

The death of Isaac Burk, a member, March 30, was announced.

A paper entitled " Description of the Lower Jaw of Tetrabelodon

Shepardii Leidy," by Edw. D. Cope, was presented for publication.

April 11.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Ninety-eight persons present.

A paper entitled " A Contribution to the Flora of Greenland,"
by William E. Meehan was presented for publication.

Prof. Stephen P. Sharples made a communication on the
Phosphate Beds of Florida, illustrated by lantern views. (No
abstract.)

April 18.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Forty-seven persons present.

The death of Alphonse De CandoUe, a correspondent, the
9th inst., was announced.

April 25.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Thirty-five persons present.
The following were elected members :

William M. Kerr, Joseph Leidy, M. D., James Brown Markoe,
Miss Elizabeth Wilson Fisher and Miss Lydia T. Morris.

J. Victor Carus of Leipzig, Germany, was elected a correspondent.
The following were ordered to be printed : —
14

202 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

DESCRIPTION OF A LOWER JAW OF TETRABELODON SHEPARDII

Leidy.

BY E. D. COPE..

This species has been known hitherto by a third inferior molar
only. This has been described or fignred at the following places of
reference :

Mastodon shepardii Leidy, Proc. Acad. Philadelphia, 1870, p. 98;
1872, p. 472. Cope, American Naturalist, 1884, p. 524.

Dihelodon shepardii Cope, Proc. Amer. Philosoph. Soc, 1884, p. 5,
partim.

Madodon observus Leidy, partim. Report U. S. Geological Survey
Terrs. I, p. 330, PI. XXI, 1873.

A lower jaw of this species, lacking the condyles and supporting
the second and third true molars, was taken from the bluff in Crosby
County, Texas, from the same excavation that yielded the Pliau-
chenia spatula Cope, and within fifty feet of that at which the tooth
of the Dihehdon praecursor was obtained. It came into posses-
sion of Mr. M. M. Cox, of Estacado, from whom I obtained it by
purchase after my return from Texas. The acquisition of this
specimen is important as enabling me to determine the true charac-
ters of the species. Besides the last inferior molar, Leidy has
referred to it provisionally a fragment of a tusk, which, like the
molar, came from California,

The second true molars are much worn, but they show, as was
to have been expected from the character of the third molar, only
three cross-crests without a rudimental fourth. The third true
molar exhibits exactly the simple characters of the typical specimen
described by Leidy ; that is, it has four well separated cross-crests,
and a very rudimental heel. The external half of each cross-crest
wears into a trefoil, while the internal half is simple and undivided,
and is a little anterior in position to the external half. The tooth
continues its width posteriorly, so that the transverse diameters at
the first and fourth cross-crests are equal. A marked character of
the species is the elevation of the anterior part of the ramus and the
decurvature of the symphysis, from which it results that the superior
face of the symphysis, or the spout, descends very steeply to its
extremity from the second true molar quite as in the proximal part
of the spout of Dinotherium. It has a very short horizontal por-

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 203

tion anterior to the second true molar to represent the long hori-
zontal production in Dihelodon tropicus, Mastodon americanus, etc.
The symphysis is also much compressed above, so that the spout is
narrow. The extremity of the spout is produced and contracted,
and slightly recurved at the extremity, and there issues from the
right side a well developed, vertically compressed mandibular tusk.
On the left side is the empty alveolus of its counterpart, which was
of much larger diameters than that of the right side. The portions
of superior tusks found in California are stated by'Leidy to possess
an enamel band. As there are mandibular tusks, I refer the species
to Tetrahelodon raihQT than to Dihelodon as heretofore.

The contracted symphysis steeply descending forward and
expanding downward at the base from a posterior elevation, dis-
tinguishes this species from any of those of the genera Tetrahelodon,
Dihelodon or Mastodon known to me. Hence there is no question
of its difference from T. pro dud us Coidc, with which it was identified
by Leidy,^ where the symphysis is flat and much longer. In
Dihelodon cordillerarum, according to D'Orbigny and Burmeister,
the symphysis is not elevated behind, is produced and decurved
at the extremity, and has a wide spout — all characters quite differ-
ent from what is seen in T. shepardii. The symphysis is totally
distinct in D. tropicus, where it is toothless and not decurved,
and the last true molar is much more complex in the latter.
I formerly identified the species so abundant in the Equus Beds
of the valley of Mexico with this species. This determination
must now be reconsidered, since the form of the mandibular sym-
physis is entirely different ; there is no mandibular tusk, and the
last lower molar is not identical in form,' though I formerly thought
it not so different as to preclude the possibility of the species being
identical did no other differences exist. The differences observed in
this tooth may, however, be of sj^ecific value. The relative width
of the crown is greater, especially anteriorly, and the lateral borders
of the latter are not parallel, as in T. shepardii, but converge pos-
teriorly, as in M. praecursor. The lobes of the cross-crests are
opposite, as in the latter species. From M. praecursor this tooth
differs in the more tubercular and less crest-like character of the
cross crests, and in their more profound division on the median line,
especially in the third and fourth crests. M. jJraecursor is zygolo-

* By reference to it of specimens of T. productus from Santa Fe, New Mexico,
in Report U. S. Geol. Surv. Terrs. I, 1873, p. 5.
' Proceeds. Am. Philos. Soc, 1884, p. 5.

204 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

phodont, while the Mexican species is bunoloj)hodont. The various
characters just mentioned also distinguish 31. praeciirsor from
T. shepardii. There is no evidence that the Mexican species
possesses an enamel band on the superior incisors. My assertion to
this effect was based on a specimen which presents this character
which is preserved in the Esquela das Minas of Mexico. This
specimen came from Tehuichila, in the State of Vera Cruz, from a
formation which I subsequently determined to be of Loup Fork
age, so that the identity of the species with that found in the Equua
beds of the valley of Mexico is highly improbable. I therefore
refer the latter to the genus Mastodon under the specific name of
M. oUgobunis Cope. It differs from Dihelodon tropicus in the
smaller number of cross-crests of the last molar, and their greater
simplicity, since they are not divided at all, and the external halves
of the first and second only have anterior and posterior buttresses,.
in some of the individuals at least.^

Measurements of T. shepardii.

-> ^ MM.

Length of right ramus and symphysis 730

Length of right ramus to symphysis 515

Depth of ramus at posterior end of M. iii 135

Depth'of ramus at anterior end of M.ii 175

Width across both rami at posterior end of M. iii 420

Width of right ramus at posterior end of M. iii 140

Width of both rami at base of symphysis 214

Width of spout at proximal end 65

Width of distal extremity of symphysis 120

Length of spout 215

^. „ -, ..(anteroposterior 125

Diameters oi M. u ^ . , ,, _^

(. transverse at middle 75

^, ^-, ... (anteroposterior 164

Diameters 01 M. Ill i ^ . .,,, ^p-

( transverse at middle 75

Diameters of right symphyseal tusk \

(transverse 27

Diameters left symphyseal alveolus \^

(transverse 45

' A figure of this tooth is given by Felix in Paleontographica, Vol. xxxvii,
pi. 30, 1891.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 205

A CONTRIBUTION TO THE FLORA OF GREENLAND.
BY WILLIAM E. MEEHAN.

Early in 1891 the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia
endorsed Lieutenant Peary's proposition to explore Northern Green-
land, and organized the West Greenland Expedition under the
leadership of Professor Angelo Heilprin, to take the explorer and
his party to the spot chosen for their winter quarters. Dr. AVilliam
H. Burk, one of the Associate Editors of the Public Ledger was
appointed botanist of the escorting party.

The two expeditions left Brooklyn on June 6th, 1891, in the steam
whaler " Kite " and reached McCormick Bay, in latitude 77° 43'
about the 29th of July. Here Mr. Peary and his party were left in a
comfortable frame structure which was erected on landing and which
is known in the annals of the expedition as the " Red Cliff House."

The plants collected by Dr. Burk had barely been determined at
ihe Academy when there were indications that another expedition
might be sent to the same region, and it was thereupon decided not
to list the plants till the second collection should have been made.

Lieutenant Peary had made his own arrangements to return and
events showed that he might, perhaps, have been able to carry out
his plans ; but the rumors of possible disaster led to a search expedi-
tion. This was also placed in charge of Professor Angelo Heilprin,
who had before demonstrated his capabilities for that position, and
the writer, like Dr. Burk, a member of the editorial staff of the
Public Ledger, was accepted as Botanist.

The " Kite " was again chartered for the expedition that left St.
Johns, Newfoundland, on the afternoon of July 5th, 1892. It reached
the Island of Disco on the evening of July 14th and anchored before
the settlement of Godhavn, the capital of the Northern Inspectorate
of South Greenland, where the party remained until the evening of
the 16th.

Collections of plants were made by the writer here, and subse-
quently at the following points farther north and south ; Uperuavik,
Cape York, Wostenholm Island, McCormick Bay, about the
abandoned Etah Eskimos settlement near Littleton Island, Sontag
Bay, Robei'tsons Bay, Nunatak in the Verhoeff Glacier, the borders
of Inglefield Gulf, table land of Greenland near McCormick

206 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Bay, and Godthaab, the capital of the Southern Inspectorate of"
South Greenland.

Dr. Burk's collections were made at Godhavn, Upernavik, Duck
Islands, Cape York and !McCormick Bay.

The range of territory covered by the writer and Dr. Burk, there-
fore, was between about latitude 63° and above 78° or between God-
thaab and Littleton Island.

In the catalogue prepared, a copy of which with remarks is
appended, those which were collected only by Dr. Burk are so stated,
as also are those collected only by the writer. As nearly the whole
collection was repeated by each collector, it may betaken as a fairly
complete flora of that portion of the territory of Greenland.

Before starting in their respective journeys, both Dr. Burk and
the writer were instructed to examine as far as possible the influence
of ice sheets on the geographical distribution of plants. Professor
Thomas Meehan, the father of the latter, in a " Catalogue of Plants
collected in July, 1883, during an Excursion along the Pacific Coast
in Southeastern Alaska " ' had given reasons for believing that plants
did not merely advance in the wake of retreating glaciers, or push into
growth from material brought down in their advance, but that when
caught under the mass of flowing ice, would remain for an indefinite
period, retaining vitality, and push again into growth when the ice
retreated. Professor ]Meehan was led to this conclusion from finding
no annual plants among those collected in the immediate Avake of
retreating glaciers in Alaska, while the actual number of species of
perennials collected in such locations would be as great as if much
time had been given for a floral advance. He had but little oppor-
tunity for actual observation as to the plants brought down with the
earth carried on the ice, but so far as this went only E])ilobiu7n
latifoliwn and Dryas octopetela were found in this condition, and
scarcely any plants were observed on recently deposited moraines.
These and some other facts led to the hypothesis that the plants were
not migratory, but had held their position through the whole icy
period.

The writer believes he has added to these facts by the determina-
tion of the existence of much the same flora in isolated spots of land
recently bared by the neve of the inland ice, as grow away from the
margins of the ice sheet, while the finding of living willow trunks^
grass and perennial plants of many years growth close to the edges»

1 Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philada., 1884.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 207

of retreating glaciers, seem to place the point beyond any reasonable
doubt, especially when after careful survey, through the construction
and positions of the glaciers, there was the absolute certainty that
the plants could not have been deposited by lateral, medial or
terminal moraines, though they might have been by ground
moraines, — a circumstance which would settle Professor Meehan's
position affirmatively beyond dispute, since the ground moraines
are borne under the flowing ice rivers. Abundant vegetation was
also found in nunataks, — peaks of land projecting above the glaciers
or ice cap, — but little significance was placed on this circumstance
since all such nunataks visited were within a reasonably close
proximity to the main land masses, and the vegetation might readily
have sprung from seeds blown there by the winds or brought by mud
on the feet of birds. But the demonstration of aged living plants
in the other situations named must have a strong bearing on the
discussions involved as to the influence of the ice age on the distribu-
tion of plants over the surface of the earth.

The abundance of lichens is characteristic of the flora of Green-
land. Rocks supposed from a distance to be naturally colored are
found on closer inspection to derive their hue from a complete
investiture of some lichen. In this particular the crimson cliffs,
beginning at Cape York and extending many miles northward, are
a conspicuous example. These cliffs, rising sheer from the water's
edge to heights of from seventeen hundred to two thousand feet or
more, though of gray granite, show no spot of the intrinsic color even
on being nearly approached, but present a uniform red appearance
over their whole surface from a large orange red lichen Avhich covers
them.

In view of Schwendener's theory that lichens are but symbiotic
forms of algae and fungi, it is to be regretted that the probably rich
fields afforded by the latter named great families in this region
have yet to be investigated.

Mosses are even more abundant than lichens. They grow in such
vast quantities in spots, that their light or dark greens are visible
often for some miles away, brightening the otherwise bleak shores
wonderfully. Their persistence in growth under apparently adverse
circumstances is also remarkable. No obstacle save the sea seems
sufficient to stop their progress. Even dead glaciers have been and
are being buried under the steady march of these cryptogamous
plants. Mosses fulfil the same duty in Greenland that other forms

208 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

of plant life perform in more favored climes, and the amount of rich
vegetable matter being deposited by them may be of great value in
the future to that great arctic island.

The Academy is indebted to Mr. Stewardson Brown, Correspond-
ing Secretary of its Botanical Section, for the determination of the
flowering plants ; to Dr. John W. Eckfeldt for the determination of
the lichens, while for the naming of the mosses the Academy is
indebted to the kindness of Mrs. N. L. Britton of New York, whose
knowledge of this department of botany is conceded to be pre-emi-
nent.
Ranunculus Lapponicus L.

Dr. Burk.
Ranunculus nivalis L.

Etah, in great abundance, and with great vigor, a point char-
acteristic of the vegetation about this ancient Esquimo settlement.

Ranunculus pygmaeus Wahl.

Apparently confined to swampy places.
Papaver nudicaule L.

Common everywhere in Greenland. A remarkably variable
plant. On the table land, back of McCormick Bay (Prudhoe Land)
a white flowered form is somewhat common ; it has a more compact
habit and smaller flowers than the yellow or more prevalent form.
On Wostenholm Island, the compactness of growth is particularly
marked. The number of petals varies, and the margins are not
unfrequently fimbriate. In the vicinity of Disco the peduncles are
hairy. At Upernavik forms with hairy and smooth peduncles grow
together.
Cheiranthus pygmaeus Adams.

Dr. Burk.
Arabia alpina L.

Found only on Disco Island — only two specimens on soggy
ground, one in flower the other in fruit.

Cardamine pratensis var. alpina L.

Not in Dr. Burk's collections, and a single specimen only
gathered in wet ground on Disco Island.

Vesicaria arctica Rich.

Inglefield Gulf in dry places between rocks, in fruit middle of
August.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 209

Draba alpina L.

Several varieties. McCormick Bay.
Draba hirta L.

Varying remarkably in different localities. At Disco more tall
and slender than at Etah. In company with Papaver nudicaule, Dryas,
several Ranunculi and other flowers, with a luxuriant growth of
some Hypnum, it formed a striking feature in the flora of a " Nun-
atak," or suowless peak, arising out of the Verheeff glacier.

Draba rupestris R. Br.

Dr. Burk.
Cochlearia officinalis L.

At Disco usually but about 3 inches high, but at Atanekerdluk,
in Waigat Strait, opposite Disco, double the size. A favorite food
of the Eskimos both North and South.

Braya glabella Richards.

McCormick Bay and Inglefield Gulf.
Xychnis apetala L.

Remarkably variable. Sometimes with quite showy petals.
Flowers often singly on scapes, at others in 5-6 flowered capitate
heads, and again with flowers scattered along the stems. One spec-
imen at Inglefield Gulf close to the front edge of a receding glacier,
which spot had been covered by solid ice within a year or two.
Silene acaulis L.

Everywhere in very wet or very dry places indiscriminately.
Cerastium alpinum L.

At Disco spreading. At Upernavik sub-erect. Above Melville
Bay, at Wostenholm, and northwardly in small compact erect
masses.
Stellaria longipes Goklie, var. Edwardsii R. Br.

On the Verha^ff Nunatak the plants were but two inches high.
Much larger elsewhere in Greenland.
Stellaria humifusa Rottbl.

Seems scarce, only one small specimen from Disco.
Arenaria Groenlandica Spreng.

McCormick Bay.
Arenaria peploides L.

Disco. July 14th. One flower with a remarkably large colored
<;alyx ; the sepals being three quarters of an inch long. The cause
of this abnormal growth not determined.

210 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Fotentilla emarginata Pursh.

Wostenholm Island, Upernavik, and on the Nunatak in the
Verhccff glacier.

Fotentilla nivea L.

Dr. Burk.
Fotentilla pulchella R. Br.

Disco.
Fotentilla maculata Pourr.

Disco, not in Dr. Burk's collection.
Fotentilla tridentata Ait.

Godthaab, and as far North as Disco.
Dryas octopetala L.

Next to Papaver perhaps the commonest flower of Greenland..
Sometimes in clumps of a foot across, with sometimes a hundred
flowers open at once. Also on the Verhoeff" Nunatak.
Alchemilla vulgaris L.

Varying in size. At Disco preferring wet places.
Saxifraga csespitosa L.
Saxifraga cernua L.

Disco. On the Verhoefi" Nunatak.
Saxifraga flagellaris Willd.

McCormick Bay. Appears to be rare. I only found a few
plants here, and only one specimen was seen by Dr. Burk, and that
in the same locality. ^

Saxifraga oppositifolia Willd.

Growing in great masses, and giving great beauty to the rocks
about the " Redcliff" House," Lieutenant ^Peary's winter quarters.
Saxifraga nivalis L.

Disco.
Saxifraga rivularis L.

Above Meville Bay, not half the size of those at Disco.
Saxifraga tricuspidata Retz.

Common everywhere. On the Verhoeff Nunatak.
Saxifraga azoides L.

Wostenholm Island and McCormick Bay, not in Dr. BurkV
collection.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 211

Saxifraga stellaris L.

Not in Dr. Burk's collection, but not rare at Disco. Much
larger than specimens from Point Barrow, on the Northwest
Pacific coast.
Sedum Rhodiola D. C.

Rocks at Godthaab.
Cornus canadensis L.

Godthaab specimen not collected though observed by me.
EpiloMum angustifolium L.

Not collected by Dr. Burk.
Epilobium latifolium L.

Found on cliffs close up to the ice cap.
Erigeron alpinus L-

Found only by Dr. Burk.
Erigeron oompositus Pursh.

Inglefield Gulf. It is interesting to note that while the plants of
Greenland vary much according to location, these are exactly like
Rocky Mountain specimens, and specimens of Nuttall from Walla
Walla on the Columbia River.

Matricaria inodora L.

This indomitable traveler has gained a foot-hold in Disco, Soil
was brought from Denmark for the Inspector's garden, and the seed
probably came in that way.
Antennaria alpina Gsertn.

Varying in no degree from those in American alpine heights.
Artemisia borealis Pall.

Disco. Not in the collection of Dr. Burk.
Arnica alpina Olin.

In great abundance on the Verhoeff Nunatak.
Taraxacum officinale Web.

The lividum form common at Disco.
Campanula uniflora L.

Disco.
Campanula rotundifolia L.

Disco. Nearly always with a single large flower on the scape.

212 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Vaooinium uliginosum L.

Some of the plants have the leaves colored with rose. These are
always sterile ; only the fully green-leaved plants produce berries.
These are gathered and prepared for food by the Esquinios. To
us the berries seemed tasteless.
Rhododendron Lapponicum Wahl.

Collected by Dr. Burk. I did not meet with it in flower, but a
specimen was among some given me by the Inspector at Disco,

Bryanthus taxifolius Gr.
Cassiope hypnoides Don.

Almost everywhere where the ground was dry.
Cassiope tetragona Don.

Only in dry places. Emitting a delightful odor, like that of a Lily
of the Valley ; overhanging rocks in long spreading masses ; collected
and preserved for fuel by the North and South Greenland Esquimoa.
Ledum palustre L.

" Labrador tea " and used as tea by the South Greenland Esqui-
mos.

Pyrola rotnndifolia var. pumila L.
Diapensia Lapponica L.

Disco.
Armeria vulgaris L.

Disco.
Mertensia maritima Don.

Sea Beach at Disco.
Veronica aipina L.

Disco.
Bartsia aipina L.

Disco.
Fedicularis oapitata Adams.

Disco.
Fedicularis flammea L.

Disco. Found only by myself.
Pedicularis hirsuta L.

McCormick Bay. Variable. Now growing to a foot high and
bi'anching, and now but an inch or two high, with a simple stem.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 213

Fedicularis Lappouica L.

Disco.
Pedicularis versicolor Wahl.

Disco. Dr. Burk.
Polygonum viviparum L.

Sometimes with leaves in dense tufts with leafy flower stems.
When not viviparous the j^lant is dwarf and the flowers bright
rosy-red. In the inconspicuous state the scapes are tall and usually
leafless.

Oxyria digyna Willd.

Widely distributed throughout Greenland.
Betula nana L.

Common in company with the arctic willow at Disco and south-
wardly, growing about six inches high, and forming tufts of several
feet radius. It is found from Cape Farewell to Duck Islands, the
south border of Melville Bay. This is probably its limit. I found
it no further north. Saved for fuel by the South Greenland
Esquimos.

Salix arctica R. B.

Average height 6 inches but spreading often to 6 feet in the circum-
ference of its branches. But its short stem grows quite thick. At
Disco, I saw one with the short trunk as thick as one's wrist, hang-
ing from a crevice in a rock. Grows at all altitudes from the Beach
line close to the ice cap. In Inglefield Gulf found large old plants
up to within 20 feet of a receding glacier, and on a spot which had
certainly been covered by ice less than two years before. There
were no lateral or medial moraines to bring the plants, and all the
facts on the spot led to the conclusion that the willows had been
buried when the glacier flowed over the spot and had been dormant
until the ice receded. Professor Heilprin coincided with me in this
conclusion. Catkins used by Eskimos for tinder.

Salix herbacea L.

Disco and Upernavik.
Abies obovata Loud.

In sheltered fiords near Godthaab and southwardly. Only seen
and not collected by me or Dr. Burk. In some situations growing
from four to eight feet high.

214 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Empetrum nigrum L.

The Eskimos are very fond of the fruit. Women and children go
out to gather it, as they would blackberries or strawberries with
us. I was told that at Disco and Godthaab the natives make pre-
serves of it. It is kept for fuel.

Tofieldia palustris Hudson.

Disco.
Luzula arcuata Mey.
Luzula spadicea D. C.

Disco. Not in Dr. Burk's collection.
Eriophorum polystachyon L. var. latifolium.

Called by the natives Ewiekswa — " Rabbits-foot grass." Used
by the Eskimos as punk or tinder. It is first ignited by a sparky
and then blown into a flame on dry moss. It grows in vast quantities
in low wet places. From Melville Bay south it reaches a foot high,
— but only about six inches above that point.

Scirpus csespitosus L.
Dr. Burk.

Carex vulgaris Fr. var. hyperborea.
Carex atrata Boott.

Not in Dr. Burk's collection. Specimens in the Herbarium of the
Academy collected in latitude 81°, 82° by Dr. Emil Bessels of the
ill-fated Polaris expedition are barely 2 inches high. These from
McCormick Bay are about one foot.

Xobesia scirpina Willd.

Dry places, McCormick Bay. Plants remarkably stout and
stocky, but culms scarcely reaching three inches high,

Hierochloe alpina R. & S.

McCormick Bay. Making a close herbage nearly one foot high.
Alopecurus alpinus L.

This seems to be the prevailing grass around Eskimo settlements.
It grows in such wild luxuriance, with herbage a foot in height, and
of such a vivid green that it can be seen for two or three miles from
the shore. Some of my specimens wei'e 18 inches in length. At
Godthaab hay is made from it.
Poa alpina L.

Near Disco it grows from 18 inches to 2 feet high, but the leaves
are comparatively short.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 215

Poa arctica R. Br.
Poa nemoralis L.

Upernavik.
Poa pratensis L.

Not ill Dr. Biirk's collection. Abundant in .McCormick Bay.
At Disco it makes culms 18 inches to 2 feet.

Trisetum sesquiflorum Trin.

Collected only by myself. McCormick Bay.
Glyceria fluitans.

Only by Dr. Burk.
Testuoa ovina L. var. brevifolia.
Festuoa ovina var. vivipara.

At Godthaab, but growing only about six inches high.
Arctagrostis latifolia Griesb.
Elymus mollis Trin.

Disco. Not in Dr. Burk's collection. At Atanekerdlut, reach-
ing three or four feet high along the Sea Beach.

Equisetum arvense Lin.
Equisetum variegatum.

Dr. Burk.
Woodsia ilvensis Br.

Disco. In crevices of rocks.
Cystopteris fragilis Bernh.

Disco. About 12 inch fronds, in crevices of rocks. Not in Dr.
Burk's collection.

Nephrodium spinulosum Mul.

Crevices of Rocks at Godthaab. Among the few things cultivated
by the Danes at Godthaab. Not in Dr. Burk's collection.

Lycopodium annotinum L.

Disco, reaching close to the edge of the ice cap.
Lycopodium Selago.

Disco, reaching about two inches high.

Lichens.

The collection has been kindly determined by Dr. John M. Eck-
feldt. Those marked * were also collected in the first expedition by
Dr. Burk. f Collected only by Dr. Burk.

216

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1893.

The profusion of Lichens strikes the visitor to Greenland at once
on reaching its shores. Many species seem to have preferences
for peculiar situations, and give the rocks when at some distance the
appearance of being variously colored.

*Cetraria nivalis (L.) Ach.
fCetraria Islandica.
Cetraria cucullata (Bill.) Ach.
•■ Alectoria ochroleuca Nyl.

vav. rigida Fr.
Theloschistes lychneus Nyl.
Parmelia saxatilis (L.) Fr.

McCormick Bay.
Parmelia conspersa (L.) Wallr.

McCormick Bay.
Parmelia lanata (L.) AVallr.

McCormick Bay.
Parmelia incana (Pers.) Fr.

McCormick Bay.
Physcia pulverulenta Schreb.

McCormick Bay.
TJmbilicaria proboscidea (L.) Stin.

McCormick Bay.
TJmbilicaria rugifera Nyl.

McCormick Bay.
*Umbilicaria hyperborea Ho£F,

McCormick Bay.
TImbilicaria anthracoria Wulf.

McCormick Bay.
Nephroma arctica (L.) Fr,

McCormick Bay.
fPeltigera canina (L.) HofFm.
fPeltigera aphthosa L.
Solomia saocata (L.) Ach.

Solomia crocea (L.) Ach.
fPannaria hypnorum (Hoff.) Kolb.
CoUema melaenum Ach.

McCormick Bay.
Placodium vitellinum Ehrh.

McCormick Bay.
Placodium elegans Link.

McCormick Bay.
Lecanora lentigera (AVebb.) Ach.

McCormick Bay.

Lecanora ventosa (L.) Ach.
Einodina sophodes (Ach.) Nyl.
Pertasaria coriacea (Th.) Fr.
fPertusaria paradoxa Lindb.
Gyalecta peziza Mont.
tStereocaulon alpinum Lam.
Cladonia pyxidata (L.) Fr.
Cladonia gracilis (L.) Nyl.

var. elongata, forma macroceris Tuck.
Cladonia deformis (L.) Hoff.
Lecidia platycarpa Ach.

McCormick Bay.
Buellia geograpMca (L.) Tuck.

McCormick Bay.
Sphaerophorus globiferus (L.) D. C.

McCormick Bay.

Coniocybe furfuracea L.
Verrucaria pygmaea Koelt.

Parasitic on Cladonia gracilis.
Tbamnolia verinicularis (Sw.) Ach.

1893.] natural sciences of philadelphia.

Mosses.
Collected at McCoiinick and Robertson's Bay.

217

Andraea Blythii Schimp.
Aulacomnion palustre L,
Aulacomnion turgidum Wahl.
Bryum argenteum L.
Bryum inclinatum.
Bryum nitidulum Lindb.
Bryum pendulum.
Bryum pyriforme L.
Dicrauoweisia crispula Lindb.
Grimmia apocarpa Hedw.
Hypnum nitens Schrd,
Hypnum Richardsoni Mitt.
Hypnum splendens Hedw.
Hypnum uncinatum Hedw.

Onchophorus polycarpus Bi-id.

Onchophorus Wahlenbergii var.

Orthothecium chryseum Brid. A Sch.

Orthotriclium arcticum Schimp.

Philonotis fontana Brid.

Pottia Heynei var.

Pogonatum alpinum and var. Roth.

Pohlia cucullata.

Pohlia nutans.

Racomitrium lanuginosum Brid.

Sphagnum fimbriatum var. Wils.

Swartzia montana var. Lam.

Tetraplodon bryoides Lindb.

Funaria hygrometrica var. Sib.

16

218 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

May 2.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Fifty persons present.

A paper entitled " Observations on the Japanese Salamander,
Cryptobranchus maximus (Schlegel)" by Henry C. Chapman, M. D.,
was jjresented for publication.

May 9.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.

Forty-seven persons present.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication : —

" Observations on Vallonia," by Dr. V. Sterki.

" Some new and little-known Palaeozoic and Jurassic Fishes," by
Edw. D. Cope.

The death of J. Gibbons Hunt, M. D. on the 29th ult., having
been announced at the last meeting the following minute submitted
by a committee appointed for the purpose was unanimously
adopted : —

Resolved, That the members of this Academy have learned with
profound sorrow of the death of their late associate, Professor J.
Gibbons Hunt, M. D., who, as one of the founders of the Biologi-
cal and Microscopical Section of the Academy and the first Profes-
sor appointed by the Academy under its by-laws, as amended a few
years since, to the Chair of Histology and JNIicroscopical Technol-
ogy, has rendered lasting services to the Society that are held in
grateful remembrance by his associates.

That we also give expression to our sense of appreciation of the
late Professor Hunt as a pioneer teacher and master in the most
refined methods of modern microscopical research, for which, how-
ever, owing to his native modesty and reserve, he never received a
large share of popular recognition, though known throughout the
country to all specialists for the important improvements and dis-
coveries in technique, by means of which he had enlarged the possi-
bilities of a science but little cultivated amongst us when he began
his work upward of thirty years ago. That we vividly recall the

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 219

power and grace with which he could paint in spoken or written
words, the aspects and moods of that world of nature, great and
small, in field and forest, that he so dearly loved and enjoyed with
all the sincerity and philosophical sobriety of an Emerson. That
these traits and his readiness also to offer advice and help to
beginners in the fields of animal aud vegetable histology (in both of
which he was a deservedly recognized authority), his uniform
kindness of manner, uprightness and purity of character, have
endeared his memory to his fellow-members of the Academy.

Cretaceous Ammonites and other Fossil-s near Moorestown, N. J.
Their stratigraphic jjosition shoivn by an Artesian Well Section at
Maple Shade, N. J. Incidental reference to Water Horizons. — Lewis
WoOLMAN stated that during the fall of 1892 there had been placed
in his hands for identification by Joseph AValton of Moorestown, N.
J., an interesting set of cretaceous fossils collected by him at the
clay pits belonging to A. A. Reeve upon the left bank of the north
branch of the Pensauken Creek, two miles very slightly south of
west from Moorestown station and between ISFaple Shade and Lenola
stations on the Burlington County R. R.

The fossils are mainly in the form of casts, and are remarkably
well-preserved in comparison with similar fossils from other locali-
ties in the State.

The most noticeable among them are two species of Ammonites
each about twelve inches in diameter, being considerably larger
than any of the same species now in the Academy's collection from
the State of New Jersey, though there are in the Museum two
individuals of one of the forms from the Delaware and Chesapeake
Canal that measure respectively 16 and 18 inches across.

The number of species collected by Joseph Walton numbered
twenty-three, all raollusks except one — an Echinus.

More recently visits to the locality have been made by C. W.
Johnson with a class from the Wagner Institute, by Prof. A.
Heilprin with the Academy's Geological Class and by the speaker
accompanied by Professors Smock and Salisbury.

These parties collectively obtained not only all the molluskan
forms found by Joseph Walton but also forty-two additional ones
mostly of the smaller forms. This makes the total number of
species of mollusks sixty-four.

There were also found fish remains consisting of teeth belonging
to the genus Pycnodus, and also undeterminable fragments of bones
and portions of crab's claws together with considerable lignite. The
latter was in some cases much bored by the Teredo and the cavities
frequently lined with minute crystals of iron pyrites. A number
of specimens of Martesia cretacea showing the shell were also
found in burrows they had themselves made in the wood.

220 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Through the courtesy of several members of the two classes a
considerable number of the specimens they procured were sub-
mitted for examination. These together with those previously
collected were carefully compared by H. A. Pilsbry and the
speaker with the figures and text of Whitfield's Paleontology of
New Jersey and with the works of other authorities, and also with
the types and other specimens in the INIuseum of the Academy.

One form, Voluta delawarensis, was identified by Professor R. P.
Whitfield. Professor A. Heilprin kindly assisted in the final
determination of a few forms. In nomenclature we have followed
Whitfield, to whose work the specialist is referred for synonyms and
references to other literature. For convenience the volume, page,
'plate and figure where each is described and illustrated are noted.
The list is as follows :

CEPHALOPODA.

Ammonites {Placentaceras) placenta DeKav.' Vol. II, page 255
pi. XL, fig. 1, XLI, figs. 1 and 2.

Ammonites delawarensis Morton. Vol. II, page 252, pi. XLII, figs.
6 to 9.

Seavhites hippocrepis DeKav. Vol. II, page 262, pi. XLIV, figs.
8 to 12.

Scaphites nodosiis Owen. Vol. II, page 261, pi. XLIV, figs. 13 and
14.

Baculites ovatus Say. Vol. II, page 275, pi. XLVI, figs. 3 to 9.

GASTEROPODA.

Cerithium (Potamides f) Sp. ?

Dentalinm subarcuatum Conrad, internal casts. Vol. II, page 166,
pi. XX, figs. 19 and 20.

Dentalium subarcuatum Conrad, external impression. Vol. II,
page 166, pi. XX, figs. 21 to 24.

Alaria rostrata Gabb, (numerous). Vol. II, page 119, pi. XIV,
figs. 5 and 6.

Gyrodes infracarinata Gabb. Vol. II, page 125, pi. XV, figs. 13
to 16.

Lxinatia halli Gabb. Vol. II, page 130, pi. XVI, figs. 13 to 16.

Natica abyssina Morton. Vol. II, page 123, pi. XV, fig. 9 to 12.

Turbinella parva Gabb. Vol. II, page 80, pi. IX, figs. 4 to 6.

Turritellavertebroides 'Morton (J). Vol. II, page 146, pi. XVIII,
figs. 13 to 18.

Voluta (?) delawarensis Gabb. Vol. II, page 84, pi. X, figs. 5 to 7.

Volutoderma abbotii Gabb. Vol. II, page 173, pi. XXI, figs. 4 to 9.

Volutomorpjha — Sp. ?

Avellana bullata Morton. Vol. II, page 163, pi. XX, figs. 1 to 4.

1 The rererences are to Whitfield's Palaeontology of New Jersey.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 221

Cithara crossivickensis Whitfield. Vol. II, page 107, pi. XIII,
figs. 7 and 8.

Odontofusics slachi Gabb. Vol. II, page 66, pi. VI, figs. 8 and 9.

Gyrodes obtusivolva Gabb. Vol. II, page 129, pi. XVI, figs. 9
to 12.

Gyrodes altisjnra Gabb. Vol. II, page 128, pi. XVI, figs. 7
and 8.

Margarita abysdna Gabb. Vol. II, page 133, pi. XVII, figs. 1
to 5.

Modulus lapidosa "Whitfield. Vol. II, page 152, pi. XVII, figs.
6 to 8.

Pyropsis alabamensis Gabb.

Pyropsis naticoides Whitfield. Vol. II, page 43, pL II, figs. 5
to 7.

Rostellites nasxdus Gabb, Vol. II page 86, pi. XI, figs. 1 and 2.

Rostellites texturatus Whitfield. Vol. II, page 88, pi. XI, figs.
5 and 6.

Rostellites angulatus Whitfield. Vol. II, page 88, pi. XI, figs,
3 and 4.

Scalaria tJwmasi Gabb. Vol. II, page 137, pi. XVIII, fig. 1.

Scalaria sillimani Morton. Vol. II, page 138, pi. XVIII, fig. 2.

Scalaria sp ?

Turritella encrinoides Morton. Vol. II, page 143, pi. XVIII,
figs. 19 to 22.

Turritella lippincotti Whitfield. Vol. II, page 145, pi. XVIII,
figs. 23 and 24,

Turritella puviila Gabb. Vol. II, page 187, pi. XXIII, figs.
5 and 6.

Endoptygma umbilicata Tuomey. Vol. II, page 136, pi. XVII,
fig. 30.

LAMELLIBRANCHIATA.

Calliste delaivarensis Gabb. Vol. I, page 153, pi. XXII, figs. 8
to 10.

Cardium (Criocardiimi) dumosHm Conrad. Vol. I, page 133, pi.
XX, figs. 9 to 13.

Cardium (Fragum) tenuistriatum Whitfield (numerous). Vol. I,
page 139, pi. XX, figs. 15 and 16.

Cyprimeria heilprini Whitfield. Vol. I, page 160, pi. XXII, figs.
14 and 15.

Campto)iectes (^Amusixim) burlingtonensis Gabb. Vol, I, page
58, pi. VIII, figs. 3 to 9.

Gouldia conradi Whitfield. Vol. I, page 125, pi. XVIII, figs. 1
to 3.

Idonearca antrosa Morton. Vol. I, page 96, pi. XIII, figs. 6 to 11.

Leiopistha j^rotexta Conrad. Vol. I, page 140, pi. XX, figs. 1 to
3.

Neithea quinquecostata Sowerby. Vol. I, page 5(j, pi. VIII, figs.
12 to 14.

222 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Pinna laqueata Conrad. Vol. I, page 81, pi. XVI, figs. 1 and 2.

Pholadomija occidentalis Morton. Vol. I, page 175, pi. XXIV,
figs. 1 to 3.

Plicatula urticosa Morton. Vol. I, page 61, pi. IX, figs. 1 and 2.

Ten ea ping wis Conrad. Vol. I, page 163, pi. XXII, figs. 1 to 3.

Anoraia tellinoides Morton. Vol. I, page 43, pi. IV, figs. 12 and
13.

Axinea mortoni Conrad. Vol. I, page 99, pi. XI, figs. 23 to 25.

Aphrodina tippana Conrad. Vol. I, page 154, pi. XXII, figs.
6 and 7.

Cyprimeria densata Conrad. Vol. I, page 157, pi. XXII, figs.
19 to 21.

Clavagella urmata Morton. Vol. I, page 192, pi. XXV, fig. 24.

Exogyra costata Say. Vol. I, page 39, pi. VI, figs. 1 and 2.

Idonearca vulgaris Morton. Vol. I, page 98, pi. XIII, figs. 1 to
5.

Mytilus oblivius Whitfield. Vol. I, page 64, pi. XVII, fig. 1.

Martesia cretacea Gabb. Vol. I, page 190, pi. XXV, figs. 20 to
23.

Panopea decisa Conrad. Vol. I, page 181, pi. XXIV, figs. 5 to 8.

Trigonia mortoni Whitfield. Vol. I, p. 112, pi. XIV, figs. 5 and
6.

Teredo irregularis Gabb. Vol. I, Dage 191, pi. XXV, figs. 18
and 19.

Teredo tibialis Morton. Vol. 1, page 201, pi. XXVI. figs. 19 to
22.

Veniella conradi Morton. Vol. I, page 144, jdI. XIX, figs. 8 to
10.

Included in the total number of molluscan species as above
stated, and therefore to be added to this list, are two forms of
Gasteropoda pronounced by Prof. R. P. AVhitfield to be new to the
New Jersey fauna ; one of these, in a preliminary note received, he
inclines to regai'd as a Volutoderma and the other he states is
probably a Ceritliinm and much resembles C conradi Whitfield,^ the
type of which came from the cretaceous of Syria. These forms have
been again referred to him for further detailed description.

ECHINODERMATA.

Hemiaster parastatus Morton. Morton's Cretaceous Fossils, page
77, pi. Ill, fig. 21.

It may here be noted that one specimen of Ammonites delaicaren-
sis has the outer Avhorls on one side broken off so as to show the
inner whorl. This initial whorl is identical in sculpturing with
Morton's figure of A. vanuxemi which was doubtless named by him

2 See Bulletin New York Museum of Natural History, Vol. Ill, No. 2, page
428, pi. IX, figs. 11 and 12.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 223

either from imperfect or from young specimens. This double nam-
ing of what is really one species has been noted by other Avriters.

Respecting Dentalinm subarcuatum above listed numerous casts
occur that have generally been referred to that species. Most such
casts were obtained in nearly straight short fragments. Examples,
however, were noted in the specimens under study that were from
four to five inches long, more or less bent and irregular in some
parts of their length, while quite straight in other parts. This
irregularity suggests that instead of belonging to the genus
Dentalmm they may very probably represent casts made by the
filling in of the borings of some worm. This idea was suggested
by Professor A. Heilprin. These remarks do not, however, refer to
the external impressions listed as Dentalium which undoubtedly
belong to that genus.

Most of the fossils occur in a bed of black sand about three feet
thick, interbedded between two clay beds, the lower one a thick bed of
black clay somewhat micaceous, and the upper one composed of two
divisions, as follows : that next the black sand, a ferruginous clay
with ironstone crusts, and the one above this, a soft, yellow clay.
Over these are the superficial or yellow gravels. A few fossils how-
ever are found both above and below the black sand but not in the
gravels.

The yellow and the black clays are used for making bricks. The
black clay has been dug into or otherwise tested at the pits to
the depth of about 25 feet without getting through it. Its entire
thickness has, however, been ascertained to be 44 feet from a well-
boring recently made at Maple Shade, one mile west.

The relative position of the fossiliferous horizon is shown in the
following section, which gives the thickness of strata as ascertained
at Reeve's clay-bank, and at the well as learned from a record
furnished by those interested in its boring.

Surface gravel 5 ft.

Yellow clay 8 ft. 13 ft.

Ferriferous clay and ironstone crust 4 ft. 17 ft.

Fossiliferous black sand, containing Ammo-
nites, Scaphites, Baculites and other Mol-
lusks 3 ft. 20 ft.

Black clay 44 ft. 64 ft.

(A) Fine and coarse gray sands at the top,
changing to medium and then to coarse

and pebbly gravels at the bottom 33 ft. 97 ft.

Green sand marl 6 ft. 103 ft.

(B) Fine, gray sand and coarse gravel, simi-
lar to A 27 ft. 130 ft.

White clay 100 ft. 230 ft.

Red clay 10 ft. 240 ft.

Alternations of sand and clav, sometimes

reddish \ 20 ft. 260 ft.

224 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

(C) White saud 40 ft. 300 ft.

White sand, fine, with streaks of clay 15 ft. 315 ft.

White sand, coarse 15 ft. 330 ft.

White sand, medium coarse 20 ft. 350 ft.

White gravel, coarse 10 ft. 360 ft.

White gravel, coarser 10 ft. 370 ft.

(D) White gravel very coarse, with large

pebbles and boulders 5 ft. 375 ft,

The sands and gravels marked A, B, C and D, all furnish water,
and may be regarded as water horizons ; that marked A being the
one reached by wells dug in this neighborhood and which pene-
trate through the black clay.

Excepting the few feet of surface gravels which are of more
recent date, it may be premised that all the beds in the section are
below the lower green sand marl bed, since they are\vest of the out-
crops of the same, as mapped by the New Jersey Geological Survey.
In the report of the survey for 1868, Professor G. H. Cook describes
next below the lower -green sand a series of beds of "clay marls,"
with an estimated thickness of 277 feet, of which the upper 170 feet,
he states, is composed of laminated sands and thin clay seams, and
the lower 170 feet of heavy, dark clays and green sands.

These "clay marls," in turn, rest upon another group of strata,
composed largely of white, yellow and red clays, termed plastic
clays, and which form the base of the cretaceous as it exists in New
Jersey.

These plastic clays have a thickness, as shown in the report on
clays (N. J. Survey, 1868), of 347 feet. The plastic clays can be
distinguished from the " clay marls " by the entire absence of green
sand grains in them.

Referring to the section, it may be noticed that beneath the black
clays there are 66 teet of fine and coarse sand and medium, coarse
and heavy gravels, including a parting near the middle six feet
thick, largely composed of green sand. The presence of the green
sand would seem to class these gravels with the laminated sands and
clay marls, rather than with the plastic clays. The division
between these two groups therefore occurs at the depth of 130 feet.
Allowing five feet for the surface gravels, we have 125 feet as the
thickness at this locality of the lower or dark clay and green sand
division of the group of laminated sands and " clay marls." The
thickness of the overlying gravel is, however, probably greater than
five feet upon the more elevated portions of this region, so that a
greater depth would have to be gone through in some places to
reach the yellow and black clays of the clay marl series.

Remarks on Hcnvaiian Crania. — Dr. C. N. Peirce remarked
that Dr. I. M. Whitney of Honolulu, S. I., to Avhom the Academy is
indebted for the collection of crania presented this evening, had
informed him that the ancient Hawaiians had two quite distinct

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. • 225

modes of burial of their dead, some being deposited in caves in the
rocks, which are numerous, while others are placed in the sands of
the sea-shore, which are frequently thrown up into hills of consider-
able size by the trade winds. Tradition places burial in caves as
the earliest and most important. The chiefs and men of note were
here laid away with great secrecy and care.

In search of these, Dr. Whitney, after receiving the speaker's let-
ter of request, set out, in company with a friend, to the island of
Hawaii. After reaching the locality, they procured with difficulty
and at considerable expense, a couple of old native men to act as
guides.

They were led over miles of rough, desolate land to a hollow,
which, to the uninitiated eyes of the explorers, looked like hundreds
of other similar places. The men threw out several large stones,
exposing a small opening. This, when enlarged as much as possi-
ble, admitted them into Egyptian darkness below. They crawled
upon their stomachs until a space was reached where they could
walk in a stooping position, carrying with them lighted can-
dles and bags in which to bring away anything of interest they
might find. This passage-way at last opened into a cave eight or
ten feet high and twenty feet wide, with ledges upon the sides. It
was here, wrapped in the tapa or Hawaiian cloth, specimens of which
are presented with the crania, they found what they had so long and
laboriously sought. These caves were dry and seemed pervaded by
some antiseptic influence.

Dr. AVhitney thought that owing to the difficulty of reaching
these sacred precincts, the body was disemboweled, the legs were
doubled up, the head bent down, and the whole wrapped in thicknesses
of tapa cloth, so as to occupy as little space as possible. With the
bodies were found a great variety of objects, including a quantity of
ava, a root used for the preparation of a mild intoxicant, and sup-
posed to have been oflfered as food for the departing spirit, cala-
bashes, sticks used by bird-catchers, and some elegant large tapas
the size of a bed-spread.

Dr. Whitney was assured that the cave had not been opened for
over seventy years, and that many of the crania were probably
several centuries old.

Dr. Whitney has been, for many j^ears, a careful student of these
old burying places, but he had never before found any locality so
interesting as the cave from which he obtained the specimens pre-
sented to the Academy.

The bleached crania are from the sand burial places, and were
partially or wholly exposed. The knees were flexed against the
breast and all tied closely about and buried in a sitting posture.

226 proceedings of the academy of [1893.

May 16.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Fifty-four persons present.

Rev. F. C. Morsell, in connection with the meeting of the
Biological and Microscopical Section, made an illustrated com-
munication on polarized light under the title "Taking a Sunbeam
apart," (No abstract.)

May 23.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Forty persons present.

]May 30.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.

Twenty-three persons present.

The deaths were announced of Edward Bancroft, a member,
May 22, 1893, and of Dr. Robert Hartmann a Correspondent,
April 21, 1893.

Paj)ers under the following titles were presented for publication : —

" Descriptions of two new species of North American Bombycidse"
by Herman Strecker.

" The Measurement of the Radius of Curvature of the Cornea by
means of the Helmholz Ophthalmometer," by Henry C. Chapman,
M. D.

Morris L. Orura and Ernest B. Sangree, M. D., were elected
members.

Otto Staudinger of Dresden, Germany and F. Ducane Godman
of London, England, were elected Correspondents.

The following were ordered to be published : —

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 227

OBSEEVATIONS ON THE JAPANESE SALAMANDER, CRYPTOBRANCHUS

MAXIMUS (ScWegel).

BY HENRY C. CHAPMAN, M. D.

Questions as to what constitute a good or a bad species, whether
a species should be elevated to the rank of a genus, or degraded to
that of a variety, concerning which naturalists at one time dis-
puted so vehemently, have lost much of their interest in the light of
evolution. Indeed, if all the extinct forms of animal life could
be reproduced, the gaps now separating living ones would be so
bridged over that the species, orders, families, etc., of the systematic
zoologist would cease to have any significance whatever.

As an illustration of such conflict of opinion may be cited the
difficulty experienced by naturalists in assigning to the great Japan-
ese salamander its proper position in relation to other batrachia, it hav-
ing been named successively Salamandra maxima,^ Megalohatrachus
sieboldii,' Sieboldia max'ima^^ Cryptohranehus japonicii-'<,* Mec/aloba-
trachus ma.vimus,^ and, finally, if the author's interpretation of its
organization be accepted, Cryptobranchiismaximus. Inasmuch as the
Japanese salamander is not a salamander, as was supposed by
Schlegel, the name Salamandra was soon set aside, as it gave an
erroneous idea as to the aflRnities of the animal. Tscbudi, regarding
the form as sufficiently peculiar in its organization to Avarrant plac-
ing it in a distinct genus, designated it as MecjalobatracJms sieboldii.
Bonaparte, afterwards, wishing to do honor to the distinguished
naturalist Siebold, who first introduced the Japanese animal to the
notice of Europe, and regarding it also as a distinct genus of
batrachia, named it Sieboldia. The name Cryptobra7ichtis was
given as long ago as 1821 by Leuckart'' to our common Allegheny
hell-bender. That animal having been described, however, a few
years later by Harlan," first as Abranchus, a name soon given up, it
having been previously given by Hasselt to a mollusk from Java,

1 Schlegel, Fauna Japonica, Lugd. Bat. 1838, p. 127, pis. 6-8.

^Tschudi, Batrachia, Neuchatel, 18H8, p. 96, Taf. viii.

^Bonaparie, Fauna Itilica, Tomo II, Roma 1832-1841. Sheet 131 * * * see
Euproctus.

■'Van der Hoeven, Proc. Zoo. Sec, London, 1838, p. 25.

^ Bou'enger, Catalogue of the Batrachia Gradientia, London, 1882, p. 80. Cope,
The Batrachia of North America, Washington, 188i(, p. 37.

* Isis von Oken, Jena, 1821, p. 2-')9.

'Annals of the Lyceum of Nat. History, New York, 1824, pp. 222, 27(1.

228 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

then as Menopoma alleghaniensis, naturalists, at least in this country,
in speaking of the hell-bender usually refer to it even now as the
Menopoma, of course improperly, as the name Cryptobranchus, hav-
ing priority, should be used in preference. Van der Hoeven^
regarding the so-called Japanese salamander as essentially in its
organization nothing but a big hell-bender or Menopoma, named it
Crypjtobrauchus japonicus, the Menopoma of Harlan being then con-
sistently designated as Cryptobranchus alleghaniensis, and the name
Menopoma was set aside.

Boulenger and Cope, high authorities on the subject of the batra-
chia, regarding, however, as Tschudi and Bonaparte did, the Jap-
anese animal as differing sufficiently from the American hell-bender
(Cryptrobranchus syn. Menopoma) to warrant placing it in a distinct
genus, have revived in recent times the old name and designate it
now Megalobatrachus maximus.

In dissecting recently a fine specimen of the Japanese animal,
measuring 46 inches in length (115 cent.) which lived for a number
of years in the Philadelphia Zoological Garden, the author was much
impressed with the similarity of its organization to that of our com-
mon hell-bender, of which he has dissected numerous specimens. It
may not be sujDcrfluous therefore to call attention to such parts of
the anatomy of the Japanese batrachian as have not been already
described, to those points in which the organization of the Japanese
and American forms agree and disagree, finally, as to why, in the
judgment of the author, the Japanese batrachian should be regarded
as a big hell-bender, a kind of Cryptobranchxis or Menopioma, rather
than as a distinct genus Megalobatrachus.

The myology, splanchnology and nervous system of the Japanese
animal have been described by Goddard, Schmidt and Van der
Hoeven.*' Peculiarities of the hyoid apparatus and of the muscular
and nervous systems are incidentally alluded to by Fischer,'" more
particularly in their relation to the corresponding jiarts in the Per-
ennibranchiata and Derotremata. The osteology and splanchnology
are well considered by Hyrtl'^ in his beautifully illustrated mono-

* Tijdschrift voor Natuurlijke Geschiedeni';, 1837-1838, p. 375.

^ Aanteekenigen over de anatomie van den Cryptobranchus Japonicus, Haar-
lem, 1862.

1" Anatomische Abhandl. iiber die Perennibranchiaten und Derotremen, Ham-
burg, 18(34.

^^Cryptobranchus Japonicus, Vindobonae, 1865.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 229

graph, while the blood corpuscles have been studied by Van der
Hoeven,'- Harting/^ Crisp'* and Gulliver.''^

The Japanese batrachian having attracted the attention of so
many eminent anatomists, as might naturally be supposed there
remains but little to be said that is new concerning its organization.
The author would, however, call attention to the fact that while
Hyrtl's description of the disposition of the pulmonary and branch-
ial arteries is such as observed by himself, nevertheless his figure
(op. cit. Plate II, fig. 4) illustrating the same is apt to mislead, as it
gives the impression that the two branchial arteries that unite to
form the aorta lie above the heart, whereas their natural position is
such as is represented in Plate V, fig. I ; 2, 3. Again, in reference
to the course of the pulmonary vein that conveys arterialized blood
from the lungs to the left auricular part of the heart especially dis-
posed to receive it, Hyrtl (op. cit. p. 94) simply says: " Foramen
venae pulmonalis in atrio sinistro, nullam valvulara praetextam
habet, ambitus ejus calami tenuioris introductionem concedit."

In order to remove any obscurity that may prevail on this point,
the author takes occasion to observe that the common pulmonary
vein (indicated by the bristle, Plate V, fig. 2, a), formed by the
union of the two pulmonary veins passes along the inner side of the
common sinus, fig. 2, S, receiving the blood from the two pi-e-caval
and post-caval veins, without, however, communicating with it, and
enters the left auricular part of the heart, L A, by a distinct open-
ing, the sinus S just referred to entering the right auricular part,
R A, of the heart by an equally distinct one.'*' It is needless to add
that the author found the delicate septum separating the auricles
incomplete.

The blood corpuscles having been previously described by a num-
ber of observers, it would be superfluous to dwell further upon their

'^ Tijdschrift voor Natuurlijka Geschiedenis. etc., 8, 1841, p. 270.

1^ Verslagen, Amsterdam, 1858, p. 368.

'* Proc. Zoological Sociely, London, I860, p. 204.

•^ Proc. Zoological Society, London, 1873, p. 162.

'" At the time that the above was written, the author had not seen the Aante-
kenigen of Van der Hoeven. Through the courtesy of the Smithsonian Institu-
tion a copy of that work having been kindly placed at his disposal, he learned that
his description of the pulmonary vein was essentially the same as that previously
given i)y the Dutch anatomists — p. 43 : " De daardoor ontstane vena pulmonalis
communis is nog 57 mms. lang. en geheel vergrceid met de vena cava, met welke
zig opklint, zich lang zamer hand naar de regter zij de slingeiende; de in mond-
ing in dec linker voorhof is aan deszelfs achterwand gelegen, en lets meer naar
boven dan de opening der vena cava in den regter voorhof, der halve geenszins
in de onmiddellijke nabijheid van de spleet vormige opening onder aan bet septum
atriorum."

230 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

characters. In this connection it should be stated, however, as the
previous measurements made differ very considerably, that those of
the author, viz. iV nim. in the longest and zh mm. in the shortest
diameter, agree most closely with those of Gulliver. The disposition
of the genito-urinary apparatus is essentially the same as that
■which generally obtains in the male derotrematous batrachia. The
form, position and relation of the testicles, their ducts passing into
the upper part of the Wolffian bodies, the ducts from the latter pass-
ing in turn into the common genito-urinary duct, the openings of the
latter and that of the bladder into the cloaca, are so well shown by
the representations from nature, Plates VI, YII, and the accompany-
ing diagrammatic figure, Plate VII, fig. 2, that any particular
detailed description of the same is unnecessary.

Whatever may be the views of zoologists as to the natural affini-
ties of the Japanese batrachian, there has never been any difference
of opinion among anatomists on this point ; at least all those who
have had the opportunity of dissecting the animal have regarded it
as a large Cryptobranchus or Menopoma, the two animals resembling
each other so closely in their organization. Thus, for example, the
skull of the American Menopoma is a miniature of that of the Jap-
anese form. The hyoid apparatus in both animals consists of the
basi-hyal, glosso-hyal and cerato-hyal constituents. The glosso-hyal
is, however, sometimes subdivided into two pieces in Cryptobranchus,
while the cerato-hyals in the Japanese animal differ from the homo-
logous parts in the American one in being usually'" unsegmented,
gristly and joined to the glosso-hyal. While it is true that in the bran-
chial arches of the Japanese form only the first and second pair per-
sist, the remaining two pairs, corresponding to the third and fourth
pairs of the American form, disappearing, it will be observed that
those pairs which persist in the former agree with the corresponding
ones in the latter in that the first pair is unsegmented and that the
second pair is segmented and ossified. It should be mentioned
in this connection that the first pair of arches in the Japanese
animal unite at their inner ends, whereas the corresponding pair
in the American animal remain ununited. The uro-hyal bone is,
however, absent in both animals.

i^Stannius, Handbuck der Zootomie, zweiter Theil, Btrrlin, 1856, S. 64 — "Auch
Salamandra maxima besitz drei Bogen : einen vordersten knorpeligen, dessen Sei-
tenschenkel je aus zwei Stiicken bestehen."

1893.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

231

Except in the points of disa-
greement just mentioned, condi-
tioned through the absence of
the gill opening, it will be ob-
served that the hyoid apparatus
of the Japanese batrachian
agrees essentially with that of
the American one. The general
character of the brain and the
manner in which the cranial
nerves arise and are distributed,
are essentially the same in both
batrachians.

As might be expected on ac-
count of the similarity in the
skeleton of the two animals the
disposition of the muscles is essen-
tially the same. Indeed, as re-
gards the cranial muscles, the
only noticeable difference is the
absence in the Japanese batrach-
ian of the constrictores and adduc-
tores arcuum and the modifica-
tion of the levatores arcuum conditioned by the absence of the gill
opening. The remaining important muscles of the skull and hyoid
apparatus, such as the temporal, masseter, digastric, sub-mentalis,
sterno-hyoid, genio-hyoid and cerato-hyoid, are distributed in much
the same manner in both animals.

The alimentary canal with its appendages, does not differ in the
Japanese batrachian in any respect from that of the American form
except that in the former animal, just within the lower jaw, two
larger racemose glands, about two inches long, were found, the
ducts of which opened on the floor of the mouth. From their
position and structure it is to be inferred that these glands
are salivary in function. Up to the present time, however, neither
submaxillary nor any other kind of distinct salivary glands have
been observed in the amphibia. The only notable difference in the
disposition of the vascular system in the Japanese animal as compared
with the American is that in the former there are three branchial
vessels, 1, 2, 3, Plate V, fig. 1, while in the latter there are four.

Brain of Cryptobraiuhns niaxiimis.

C H, cerebral hemispheres ; op, optic
lobes; Cr, cerebellum; M, medulla ; S,
spinal cord; I, II, III, IV, V, VII,
cranial nerves.

232 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF ' [1893.

The manner, however, in which the blood passes to and from the
lungs is the same in both animals. The genito-urinary apparatus of
the Japanese Menojjoma does not differ from that of the American
animal. As in the case of the skull, the latter is but a miniature
of the former.

From the above resume of the organization of the two batrach-
ians, it will be observed that the Japanese differs from the American
animal in one essential respect, and only one, viz. : in the absence of
the spiraculum or gill opening, and the modification of the hyoid
apparatus conditioned thereby. That little or no importance can be
attached to the presence or absence of the spiraculum as serving as a
generic character or as warranting the establishing of the distinct
genus Megalohatraclms, is shown by the fact of the spiraculum not
being always present in Menopovia. At least, in one instance, its
absence was observed by Boulenger."^

If the views here advanced as to the nature of the Japanese
batrachian be accepted, if it be admitted that it is a large Menopoma
— a Cryptobranchns — it will illustrate once more the truth of the
Linntean maxim : " una nota non facit genus," the true affinities of
an animal being determined, not by the presence or absence of a par-
ticular structure, but by the character of its entire organization.
The position occupied by the Japanese Crypto branchus or Menopoma
among the Urodela, if the animal be admitted to be such, would
then be between the Derotremata and Myctodera, according to the
old classification of Stannius," bridging over the gap between these
groups to such an extent that their taxonomic value loses most of
its significance.

r Siredon

1 yiren
f Perennibranchiata '| Proteus

j L Menobranchus

Urodela -{ . .^ . , fAmphiuma

( ueiotiemata ^^ Cryptobranchus alleghaniensis

I Abranchiata -| Cryptobranchus maximus

Uyctodera {l^Z..ir.

In conclusion it may not be uninteresting to call attention to the
fact that the Japanese Cryptobranchus was not always restricted to
Japan and China as it appears to be at present, it having, at one

i» Op. cit. p. 82.
"Stannius, Op. cit. S. 4.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 233

time, a much wider geographical range, a very similar species, the so-
called Andrias scheuchzeri, living in Miocene times in Europe. This
celebrated fossil, discovered in the CEnigen quarries of Switzerland
and described in 1726 by the Swiss physician, Scheuchzer,^" is so evi-
dently a batrachian that it is astonishing that it should ever have
been regarded, at least by a physician, as the remains of a man — of
one who had witnessed the deluge, " Homo Diluvii testis," and that
it should have been reserved for Cuvier' to have correctly inter-
preted its nature.

Explanation of Plates.
Plate V.
Fig. 1. — Bulbus arteriosus and branchial arteries.

ba, bulbus arteriosus.

1, 2, 3, branchial arteries.

4, pulmonary artery,
a, aorta.

Fig. 2.— Heart.

5, sinus.

bristle a indicates course of pulmonary vein.

bristle b indicates course of sinus.

L A, left auricle.

R A, right auricle.

V, ventricle.

Plate YI.
Fig. 1. — Urogenital apparatus, anterior view.

vd, vas deferens.

T, testicle.

dd', ducts.

W, Wolffian bodies.

R, rectum.

B, bladder.

cl, cloaca.

Plate Vn.
Fig. 1. — Urogenital apparatus, posterior view; letters as in Plate

VI.
Fig. 2. — Urogenital apparatus (diagrammatic), dd' ducts ; remaining

letters as in Plate VI.

2" Philosophical Transactions, 1726, Vol. 34, p. 38. Homo Diluvii testis et theo-
skopos, Tiguri, 172G.

^1 Ossemens Fossiles, Paris, 1836, Tome Dixieme, p. 360.

16

234 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

OBSERVATIONS ON VALLONIA.
BY DR. V. STERKI.

The genus Vallonia, established by Risso' as early as 1826, has
been generally accepted only of late years. It has been ranged
under different groups of Helix by various writers, and later
regarded as a subgenus. In America, Morse^ was the first to treat
it as a genus, and he was followed by W. G. Binuey (Manual Am.
Land Shells, p. 76).

Acanthinula Beck and Vallonia have been united by Kobelt, and
after him by Dr. v. Ihering^ to form Theba, a subgenus or genus of
Helix. Pilsbry, in his Check-List,* has placed Acanthinula as a
section under Patula, and Vallonia as a section under his subgenus
(or genus) Polygyra (Say), but subsequently'' he regarded Vallonia
as a genus.

There are a few points known of the anatomy. The absence of a
secondary ureter, according to Braun and Boehme, as cited by v.
Ihering,® is characteristic. As to the genitalia, a dart sac is said to
be present, and there is a flagellum to the penis ; glandules mucosse
Avere not found by Lehraann or by Moquin-Tandon, as cited by v,
Ihering (/. c), yet appear to be present, as Pilsbry (I.e.) ranges our
genus under the group Belogona (" with dart sac and mucous
glands "). Further anatomic examinations of all the soft parts of
the body are necessary. My own observations are not ready for
communication.

The comparatively large number of species and forms known at
present, all somewhat similar as to the shell and the rather charac-
teristic and uniform configuration of the radula and jaw, tend to
prove the individuality of the group as a genus, and that it is a well-
defined one.

1 Hist. Nat, de I'Eur. Mend., iv, 1826.

- Observations on the Terrestrial Pulmonifera of Maine. Journ. Portl. Soc. of
Nat. Hist., 1864, pp. 4 and 21.

^ Morphologic und Systematik des Genitalapparates von Helix. Zeitschr. f.
wiss. Zool., 1892 (pp. 386-520, pi. xviii and xix) p. 480.

* Nomenclature and Check-List of North American Land Shells. Proc. Acad.
Nat. Sc. Philadelphia, 1889, pp. 191-210.

^ Preliminary Outline of a new classification of the Helices, Ibid., 1892, p. 396.

^ L. c. and Les relation snaturelles des Cochlides et des Ichnopodes. Bull. Scien-
tifique, Paris, 1891, p. 214. — Unfortunately, Lehmann, lebende Schnecken, is
not accessible to me.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 235

As with the genus so it was with the species ranged under it.
Miiller" described " Helix " pulchella and costata, and for nearly a
century, even up to Our own time, ahiiost all writers united them
in one species, under one or the other of the two names, generally
pidchella, regarding the other form as varietal. The fact alone
that the two forms, evidently of very ancient origin like the whole
genus, have persisted as such, side by side almost everywhere, over
a very wide area, is sufficient to prove their distinctness, not to
speak of the really marked differences of the shells. Only in the
last decades, however, has this conviction become prevalent ; and in
America, Morse (I. c.) was the first to express this opinion. On
closer study, conchologists admitted that there are quite a number
of other species besides the two " standard " ones.

But of many of them it is difficult to judge. 1. Their anatomic
characters have not, especially the genitalia, been studied suffi-
ciently, and it is not known whether they pi'esent any specific pecu-
liarities'* apart from those of the jaw and radula. 2. The material
at hand, considering the shells alone, is insufficient to allow the
formation of a judgment whether certain forms are species, varie-
ties, or mere local variations and mutations. 3. The shells in this
genus are so uniform in size, shape and color, that it takes careful
comparison to become familiar with the forms and their peculiar
features, as well as the ranges of variation.

When Mr. Pilsbiy requested me to study the genus, I knew very
little about it, and was disposed to decline. After a conscientious
study of the material at hand, and the literature accessible, I
believe I have effected something to promote our knowledge of
these minute and interesting mollusca. This paper, in the absence
of anatomical study and of specimens of many published species, is
not a monograph of the genus. It may, however, serve as a guide
to further investigations.

To Mr. H. A. Pilsbry I am especially indebted for much informa-
tion, references to literature, etc., and I take this opportunity of
tendering him my hearty thanks.

GENERAL DESCRIPTION.

Soft parts. — They are, in general aspect, like those of Helix, but,
as already pointed out, there is no secondary ureter. A few other

''O. F. MuUer, Vermium Historia, 1774, pp. 30, 31.

* Such difference, however, may be looked for as probable, as such have been
found among nearly related species of other groups; co/i/. e. g. v. Ihering's book
on the genital apparatus of Helix, cited above.

236 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893,

features have been indicated above and will not be repeated here.
Owing to the kindness of several couchologists, I have had living
examples of a number of species — V.pidchella, excentrica, costata, par-
vula, albula,perspectiva — and I have, besides observing the animals,
examined the jaw and radula, necessarily deferring further anatomi-
cal studies.

The foot is small in proportion to the shell, being scarcely as long
as the diameter of the latter in the species seen. It is colorless,
translucent, as is also the head, so that the internal parts are seen
rather indistinctly from above — the jaw, buccal body, oesophagus,
with morsels of food and numerous minute air bubbles at times
passing it, and even the cerebral ganglia being observable with a
good lens. A fine, raised median line extends from the head over
the neck. A very fine but distinct line makes a narrow margin
or seam above the longitudinal edge of the disc or sole, which
show's about 8 to 10 distinct crenulations on either side from head to
posterior end. The raised parts are separated by very fine lines,
grooves or hyaline septa, which, on the posterior part, have some-
what the appearance of an inverted honey-comb, as the septa are
impressed. At the tail a slight groove, like a rudimentary mucous
pore, seems to be present. I could not determine distinctly separa-
ted or defined longitudinal areas in the sole, so that there is no true
locomotive disc as described by W. G. Binney, the whole sole being
probably comprised in such a disc, since the lateral parts are want-
ing, as in many Hyalinia, etc. The locomotive waves or undula-
tions extend over the whole width of the disc, and even on the mar-
gin above, succeeding each other rapidly and often somewhat irregu-
larly, advancing from the posterior end, about five at the same time.
They were seen when the animal was retiring in the shell and only
the posterior part of the foot still projecting and not attached to
anything. In the sole are seen numerous very small white dots,
such as are found in almost all our land and fresh water Gastero-
poda.

The eye-peduncles are slender, very little if at all thickened at the
ends, glassy, with very finely granulated surface ; inferior tentacles
short but distinct. There are two rather large horizontal flaps or
lappets at either side of the mouth, but their margins are not cren-
ulated Si^ m Acmithinula harpa. In several species, such sls pul-
cliella, excentrica, alhula, I found the edge of the mantle slightly
colored with a rusty pigment at the periphery, but varying in the
different forms ; probably it will be found in all species.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 237

The liver in jndchella and other species is light yellow, uormally,
but lighter or darker brown in some specimens. The latter color I
first thought to be caused by certain kinds of food, or by a certain
stage of digestion, but it lasted for several days, and even weeks,
during which the snails were confined and apparently not feeding,
therefore too long to admit of this explanation. It is probable
that the deeper coloration is caused by a degeneration, or incipient
decomposition of the organ due to old age, as I have seen it in
dead as well as in living specimens of this and other species and
genera of land shells. Observations in this line, checked by
microscopic examinations, should be made on Vallonla and other
forms.

The ovotestis is extended all along the liver, up to the apex,
making numerous intersections. The ganglia were not examined
thoroughly. They seem to be of a somewhat peculiar type. In V.
parvula (and other species) the cervical masses are adjacent to each
other in nearly their entire length, and from these short commis-
sures are seen to be closely connected, probably visceral ganglia on
either side, while from the latter, long commissures extend to the pedal
ganglia respectively. These are of the form figured by Leidy in
Binney's Terr. Moll. I, PI. IX, f vii (of V. pulcheila). The rather
large, pear-shaped stomato-gastric ganglia are not adjacent to each
other. It may be added that I found parasitic worms, such as
probably infest all mollusca, in a half grown V. pulcheila ; there
were several comparatively large species.

Thejmv is more or less arcuate, about 4-6 times wider than high
(in V. pulcheila, e.g. 0*23 wide, 0*064 high) rounded or slightly
angular at the ends, comparatively strong and partly of deep horn
or chestnut color in some; thin, flexible and pale in others (e. g. in
pempectiva and albula). The coloration is always deepest in the
inferior part, gradually fiiding from about the middle upward, so
that the superior edge is nearly or quite colorless. Sometimes it has
a slight, wide median projection to the cutting edge, as in F. excen-
trica (Plate VIII, fig. M), and as also indicated by Moquin-Tandon
for V. pulcheila. If this character be constant in exceutrlca, we
must suppose that the French author chanced to examine an exam-
ple of this species, which is widely distributed over Europe and has
been confounded with pulcheila. The anterit)r surface is somewhat
convex perpendicularly, as seen in figs. K and L, PI. VIII, and
bears more or less fine and crowded ribs, about 18-25 in number,

238 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Stronger and somewhat irregularly distributed, irregularly denticu-
lating the superior and inferior or cutting edges. In fig. I, Plate
YIII, they are exactly drawn from a jaw of V. pulehella, enlarged
about 300 diam., and it is distinctly seen that one rib stands
regularly on either side of the not otherwise marked median line,
being more distant in the superior part, then approximating to
near the cutting edge. The other ribs, about 12 on either side,
stand somewhat irregularly, sometimes in pairs. Xear the ends
of the jaw they become, rather abruptly, quite fine, visible only
under strong enlargement, so that otherAvise these parts appear to be
smooth. Whether this formation of the jaw is derived from a
goniognathous one in the embryonal stage remains to be determined,
but it is probable, the more so if we compare it Avith the jaw of V.
parvula (Plate YIII, fig. R). There the ribs, especially those on
the middle of the lateral parts, were not simply and symmetrically
raised, but their sides are steep, abrupt outward, more gently slop-
ing inward. Thus they give the impression of plates originally sep-
arated and grown together by subsequent growth.

In the middle and upper ])art of the jaw, very fine, dense, some-
what irregular, horizontal " striie," apparently undulating, evidently
lines of growth, corresponding w^ith the ribs, are visible.

From the main plate or jaw proper, a rather strong posterior
plate springs from the whole inferior or cutting edge, extends back-
ward without interruption and tapers into the long and strong
hyaline tenaculum 'membrane of the jaw. It evidently serves to
reinforce the jaw, and especially the cutting edge. Plate VIII, fig.
I, shows it as seen from the front through the main plate, from a to
b, on one side, both its contours being plainly visible. When the
jaw is resting on its front side the posterior plate may conceal the
cutting edge from sight, and then the latter appears to be quite
even, not denticulated, especially so in the median part. How far
this formation of the jaw is present in other land-pulmonates, I do
not know — very probably there are many intermediate stages. In
Patula striatella I have found it almost exactly the same as in Vallonia
and in the Zonitidce ; in Zonitoides lirjera Say, there is a distinct
indication of it, though with some modifications.

The jaw, especially in the species where it is comparatively stout,
presents quite different aspects, according to the side and direction
from which it is viewed. Thus we may understand partly the fig-

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 239

ures of Morse (l. c, V. viinuta), of W. G. Binney/ in which, in har-
mony with the descriptions, the superior and cutting edges have
evidently been mistaken for each other. The jaw was somewhat
softened by strong caustic alkali, and the object drawn was evidently
extended by pressure.

The radula, or lingual membrane, bears markedly different cen-
tral, lateral and marginal teeth. I found from 23-33 in a trans-
verse row, the former number in cyclophorella and perspediva, the
latter in parvula. Morse counted 23 mminxda, W. G. Binney 21 in
pulcheUa. The difference may be partly explained by the rather
strong enlargement used by me, and partly by local variations.
The number of transverse rows varies from 63 m cxjclophorella to 84
in excentrica, and there is, as everywhere, some individual variation.
The size of the radula is not always in proportion to the shell. In
pulchella it is about 0"68 mm, long, and 0*24 wide ; in excentrica
with the shell rather smaller, the dimensions were found 0'79 and
0*24 respectively. One transverse row measures OOl-0'Oll in length,
while only 0*009 in perspediva.

The central tooth is small, its plate of attachment narrow, as long
as the row space, the posterior end somewhat wider in various
degrees. If not carefully examined, this may appear so in a higher
degree than it really is, since the plate is not exactly in the same
level. The side edges of the posterior end are curved up
and the angles are projecting like cusps. Plate VIII, fig. P,
shows a central tooth of V. parvula viewed in half profile with
these angles projecting almost beyond the level of the cusps. The
reflection at the front end is small, short, and bears 3 cusps, the
median about 1-J as long as the plate. The side cusps are very
small, sometimes hardly perceptible. There are, as a rule, 3-4 per-
fect laterals, bicuspid, a larger mesodont and a small ectodont, the
former with a distinct free cutting point, the latter with just a trace
of it. The plate of attachment is almost as wide as long, and the
posterior part of the edge is curved up, as in the centrals, with the
angle projecting, also like a cusp. It doubtless acts as such, since
in the oldest teeth, where the cusps are nearly worn off, the same
is true of these posterior distal angles, including those of the central
tooth as represented in PI. VIII, fig. G. On the fourth or fifth
tooth sometimes the remains of the two cusps are no longer coherent,

* It is evidently tlie same cut, but in different position ; and it must be noted
tliat Morse, /. c.,\n alibis tigures, has the cutting edges above, while W. G. Bin-
ney in his Manual, has them directed downward.

240 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

but isolated in this state. In the first lateral the mesodont is large,
as long as the plate or more so ; then it becomes gradually shorter
till in the last perfect lateral it scarcely reaches beyond the middle
of the plate. The ectodont is always small, but in some instances I
have seen it longer in the last lateral than in the one preceding.
W. G. Binney says (J. c.) that the posterior mesial (inner) angle of
the plate is suppressed. As a rule, I could see that angle well
formed in isolated teeth, although not projecting.

Outside of the laterals follow 2 or 3 transition teeth, of which at
least the first mesial might range with the laterals, as there is a
well formed though somewhat shorter plate with the distal angle
not projecting and two cusps ; the mesodont becomes longer
again and the ectodont simple or subsimple, but finely double-
pointed, which splitting becomes more marked in the next follow-
ing tooth, thus resembling more the true marginals (PI. A'lII, A, 5
and 6, B 5, C 5 and 6, D 7, E 6, F 6.)

The mesodont is of a peculiar formation in these transition teeth.
As illustrated in PL VIII, A 4, B 5, C 5,D 5 and 6, F 4 and 5, it
becomes obvious that the true mesodont is rather disappearing,
while, in fact, a different cusp, another element, grows out from it,
or rather, on the mesial side of it, in close connection with the plate
of attachment, which then becomes the mesial cusp of the true mar-
ginals, in which the plate of attachment does not reach beyond the
reflection. In these, the distal cusps, corresponding to the multi-
plied ectodont, increase in number up to 3-5 and even 6, gradually
becoming smaller and obsolete toward the distal end of the single
tooth as well as of the row ; so that, as a rule, the last tooth is
simply a small, wide, transverse bar, without any perceptible cusps.
At the same time these cusps become longer, like the teeth of a
comb, so that the marginals may be said to be YdiihQV pectinate than
serrate. In some species, there is a peculiar formation of the middle
marginals, especially in V. excentrica (PI. VIII, fig. B, 7-1 0), in
which the cusps do not stand singly on the base, but on a common
socle, thus giving the tooth a fan-like appearance. The same is
seen, but in a lesser degree, in V. cyclojjhorella, PI. VIII, fig. E, 7-
11. In these teeth the mesial cusps are particularly directed in-
ward.

Shell. — It has already been said that the shells of all the Vallonia
species are remarkably uniform — there is moderate diversity in size,
the smallest averaging 2-0 (some si^ecimens 1"7) the largest about

1893.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 241

3"5 mm.; all are openly and rather widely umbilicated ; the number
of whorls varies only between 3 and 4? at most; the coloration is
from colorless to pale or reddish horn, or to light gray. Yet there
are some features likely to sufficiently characterize the different
forms, even better than are those of most groupsofi/e/i.r with much
larger shells. The umbilicus may be rather narrow from its begin-
ning, or very wide, distinctly showing all the volutions, as in V. per-
spectlva and some varieties of costata. Usually it widens consider-
ably and rather abruptly, with the last ^-i whorl receding to the
periphery below ; sometimes this receding 'is not effected in the
part of the last whorl close to the aperture, but earlier, to keep in
a more regular circular or spiral direction in the last part, or even
to turn inward and thus again narrow the umbilicus ; it is thus in
, V. cyclophorella and iemdlahvis (i. e., the Kroellwitz shell, Man.
Conch., PI. 33, fig. 31) for instance. The peripheral outlines of the
shell, as well as the umbilicus, sometimes are distinctly elongate in
direction, not of the lai'ger diameter, but of one cutting off a part of
the last whorl (Man. Conch., PI. 33, fig. 35). There is also in the
species named and in F. costata var. pyrenaica, a slight but dis-
tinctly marked obtuse angle in the peripheral outline, about ^ of a
volution above the aperture (Man. Conch., fig. 30, 34). In V. excentrica
the umbilicus is narrowed by the last whorl, and then widened (fig. 8)
while above, the aspect of the shell is quite different from that of
the species mentioned (Man. Conch., PI. 33, figs. 32-35). These
characters may appear trifling, but they essentially characterize the
different forms, and must impress themselves upon any one examin-
ing and comparing great numbers of Vallonia. In comparatively
few forms the umbilicus shows a regular or approximately regular
spiral, as in T^. declivis (and alfi/is), and also in some varieties of
costata (^helvetica).

As has been pointed out by different authors, the last whorl is often
decurved or descends toward the aperture, and that in the majority
of species. But it does so in different degrees and ways which are
very characteristic and deserve our special attention. 1. The lateral
i-i whorl may simply, gradually and steadily descend, without a
marked curvature of the middle upper part or " back," as it will be
called hereafter, of the whorl, and without a deepening of the
suture, such as is seen in T . declivis (Man. Conch. PI. 32, figs. 13,
16, 17), and in V. pollinensis Paul, (from the description). 2. In
other forms only the suture descends or deepens, rather shortly and

242 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

abruptly to the aperture, while the back of the whorl keeps straight,
horizontal (Man. Conch., PI. 32, fig. 25) or even a little ascending, to
the very margin, as we see it in V. parvula, and in some forms of
V. costata, while in most of them, (3) as a rule, the whole whorl
descends slightly (Man. Conch., PI. 32, fig. 21). 4. Still others have
the last whorl near the aperture markedly and decidedly entirely des-
cending, so as to form a distinct curvature of the back as in V.
perspediva (Man. Conch. PI. S3,&g.42),cyclophorella (Man. Conch.,
PI. 33, fig. 37) and others. The suture either descends comparatively
more than the other part, or not so decidedly, as in the Kroellwitz
V. tenuilahris (?) These formations have a marked influence on the
shape and direction of the aperture, for the latter will necessarily
be more inclined where the last whorl is strongly decurved. Where
only or principally the suture descends, the aperture will be more .
circular, and less crescentoid, as becomes apparent at once if we
compare V. pulchella and excentrica with parvula and costata.

In diflTerent forms the last whorl not only descends to the aper-
ture, but previously to that rises more or less gradually to or above
the niveau of the penultimate whorl (Man. Conch., PI. 33, fig. 33,
37), thus causing the spire to appear somewhat papilliform, if the
shell is viewed from the front. This we find most marked in V.
iyclophorella, tenullabris (Man. Conch., PI. 33, fig. 32), and others in
which the penultimate whorl appears narrowed above (Man. Conch.,
PI. 33, fig. 30). This ascending is directly associated with rapid
recession outward as seen in those species at the base. The same
thing, though less strongly marked, is found also in many speci-
mens of V. costata, and, not infrequently, in pidchella. We have in
Helix (Pedmogyra) cunninghami Gray,'" a very illustrative model
of the described configuration of the last whorl, especially on the
upper side.

The aperture is described as being more or less oblique. We
must here distinguish its direction as compared with the vertical
axis of the shell, which may be called its incUnation, from its direc-
tion compared with the horizontal axis, or its obliquity. The latter is
very marked in V. parvula 2inA perspediva (Man. Conch,, PI. 33. fig.
42) and others, where a prolonged horizontal line through the aper-
ture would just touch the circumference of the shell, that is, would
be tangential, or cut oiF a very small part of it. We find the con-

10 In Tryon-Pilsbry, Man. of Conch., (2) VI, pi. 2, fig. 30, it is well shown,
although not especially mentioned in the text (p. 12).

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 243

trary in V. altilis (Man. Couch., PI. 32, fig. 17), where the aperture
is also very little inclined.

As to the shape of the aperture, there are two principal groups of
species — in one it is nearly circular, no wider than high or rarely
so ; in the other the transverse diameter is greatest, and the aperture
is ovoid or pear-shaped. Most forms of the latter group have no
thickeued lip, as a rule, while those of the former may be of the
same character, or provided with a more or less strong white lip.
In a few forms the peristome is simple and straight, as in V. pollin-
ensis and V. altilis, while in most it is everted (or " reflexed ") in
various degrees and rather abruptly, as in pulchella, costata, etc., or
more gradually as in cyclophorella. It must be specially noted that
in all instances the peristome is straight above, not everted, at the
suture and for a greater or less distance from it. This will not be
repeated as a general character in the sj^ecial descriptions.

It remains to say a few words in general about the structure of the
surface of the shell. Ribbed and plain species have been distin-
guished, but there are all possible intermediate forms between these
extremes, and it may be added at once that even in the same species
considerable variation may be found, e. g., in V. p)ulcliella and cos-
tata. What we generally call ribs are membranous elevations or
duplicatures of the epiconch, and, properly speaking, they do not
deserve that name. They vary from very coarse and rather distant,
and equidistant, as in some forms of V. costata, to quite fine and
crowded, and more or less irregularly set. I counted from 22 ( F.
costata var. amurensis) up to nearly 70 (in V. cyclophorella) on the
last Avhorl. These membranous ribs generally stand on stronger
striie or fine ribs of the shell itself. But in some species there are
rather strong true ribs devoid of membranes, as in F. gracilicosta
Reinh. To what degree the variability may go is seen in F. costata
var. helvetica, which has not a trace of membranous ribs and the
"shell ribs" are very fine stride, visible only with a good lens. It
is not sufficient, then, to say in descriptions, that a shell is "ribbed "
or " not ribbed," but the character of the ribs must clearly be
stated, as this is a prominent character. On the dead shells, and
sometimes partly on the living, the epiconch loosens and becomes
lost by the action of the water or atmospheric influences, and with
it disappear the membranous ribs. Such specimens, mixed with
more or less perfect ones, are esjDecially found in drift materials
along rivers and streams. It is unnecessary to say that fossil shells

244 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

are almost always in this condition, and it may be impossible to
know whether they originally had such ribs or not, if they be of a
form not represented in the recent fauna.

It seems that there are also differences in the surface sculpture of
the nucleus or the (about IJ) embryonal whorls. While in the rib-
less species — V. pidchella, excentrica, declivis — it is, as a rule,
smooth, the ribbed V. eostata and related forms have it marked
with fine, rather dense revolving, raised lines (Man. Conch., PI. 33,
fig. 54), about 10 or less, on the visible part. AVhether they are
also present below the periphery of the embryonal shell I am
unable to say.

Habits of the animals. — I have seen living specimens only of V.
pulchella, excentrica, eostata, albula and perspeetiva (of the latter only
one). They were kept in confinement for weeks. As we find
mature and young specimens at all times, it seems that their propa-
gation, as well as the duration of life, are not bound to a certain
season. Their movements are slow and somewhat unsteady — evi-
dently it is not easy to carry the comparatively large and heavy shell.
It occupies 15-30 seconds in transversing a space corresponding
to the diameter of the shell. They shun light decidedly, as do most
of our ISTorth American land snails. I repeatedly observed individ-
uals, when brought into day- or lamp-light, moving slowly with
head and disc only a little projecting, the eye peduncles quite short ;
when they were shaded, the latter stretched out and the motion
grew more lively ; when in full light again, the animal became
evidently uneasy, made a few quicker motions, and changed its
direction. It was generally several seconds before perception was
followed by motion. To judge also from other experiments, sight
seems to be very imperfect. It is not only in this group of molluscs,
but in others, quite unlike the sense of feeling, which is more acute.

The heart is, as in other mollusca, strongly influenced by tempera-
ture and the degree of general activity or rest. In a temperature
of about 50-60° F., it contracts at a very slow rate, about 20-
25 per minute, but variously in different individuals, as will be seen
from the following observation : Of two mature V. pulchella lying
on the table at a temperature of about 65° F., one had the heart
contracting 72, the other 32 times per minute; after they had been
on my warm hand for about two minutes, the heart of the former
made 110, of the latter 68 contractions per minute. They are able
to live under water for a considerable time, even for several hours;

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 245

it may be possible that the small body absorbs air or oxygen from
that contained in the water. In one example which had been sub-
merged for more than half an hour, the pulmonary cavity was com-
pletely filled with water, and the heart contracted at a rate of 74
per minute, in a temperature of about 65° F. The foot was
stretched out and moving about, trying to get a hold, but the tenta-
cles kept deeply retreated, the dark eyes being visible above the
buccal body.

Vallonia has a very wide geographical range, being distributed all
over the temperate region of the Northern Hemisphere. It is evi-
dently an old genus, geologically, as it has been found fossil in many
places, and its wide distribution in itself is an evidence of antiquity.
Three or four species are found on both continents. Of several
forms or species, we have yet little information, since they are
known only from single or a few localities. A few species have also
been found on the southern half of the globe — V. eostata in Aus-
tralia, jmlchella in Australia and Mauritius ; whether they are
endemic there, or introduced by trade or plants, etc., it is impossible
for us to decide at present, but the latter seems to be the more prob-
able.

Of their station, we do not know enough to speak in a general
w'ay. They are mostly found under wood, stones, at the roots of
plants, etc., and seem to be gregarious. They are frequent on
mossy cliffs, and often in wet meadows, always, as it seems, more in
open places than in deep forests. They are therefore likely to be
washed off by heavy rains, and immense numbers of them, especially
dead shells, are carried to the water courses and then found in the
fine drift — always a matter of importance in collecting shells.

The materials upon which the present paper was written, are:
the Draw^er series of Vallonia in the collection of the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia ("Acad. Coll."), about 35 lots,
kindly communicated by Mr. Henry A. Pilsbry ; the reserve ser-
ies of the collection of the National Museum, of Washington, D. C,
forwarded by the kindness of Mr. Wm. H. Dall, about fifty parcels,
and my own collection, now about 100 vials, comprising valuable
contributions from MM. O. Staudinger and A. Bang-Haas, of
Blasewitz, near Dresden, Germany. Several conchologists of this
country, as already stated, were so kind as to collect and send, at my
request, living examples of some of our American species.

246 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

SPECIAL DESCRIPTIONS.

Since the number of species has increased considerably in the last
decades, they should be described as exactly as possible, especially in
view of the above facts. Thus I think allowable the alteration of
previous descriptions of several species, especially V. puhhella and"
costata, in some points which proved to be essential in exactly
characterizing them ; and there is no use in citing the older
descriptions,^' or in especially mentioning the changes made — the
former are found elsewhere, and a comparison will show the
latter at once.

In spite of some striking differences in the formation of the shell,
it appears to be impossible to divide the species under well-defined
subgenera or sections, as there are intermediate forms everywhere,
and the anatomy, especially of the jaw and radula, furnishes no
reason for doing so. An attempt, however, has been made to
arrange them in natural groups, in the table after the special
descriptions.

It might be thought useless to name many varieties ; but this
could hardly be avoided after careful study of the forms, and more
of this has been done among larger mollusca.

Judging from Morse's and W. G. Binney's description of Patula
{Planogijra) asteriscus Mse., I supposed this species might be a
Vcdlonia. One specimen was not softened sufficiently to be exam-
ined thoroughly. The radula, however, showed the essential char-
acters of Vallonia. Fresh specimens must be studied. Yet the
finer surface structure of the shell is different from that of all true
Vallonia I have seen : the nucleus is thickly set with minute pits
somewhat elongated radially, and the post-embryonal whorls show
microscopic revolving lines, as figured by Morse (L c). To judge
from Morse's (I. c.) figure 51. p. 24, of the front part of the animal,
this Avould also not agree with that of Vallonia.

v. pulchella Muller. PI. VIII, fig. A, G. H, I, K, L. Man. Concb., PI. :i2, fig. 15.i 2

Hel. piilchella Muller, Verm. Hisl., II, 1774, p. 30.

Hel. puhhella Auct.

Hel. paludosa Da Costa, 1780.

Hel. C7ystallina DiUwyn, 1817.

^' It may be mentioned that they do not always agree among themselves, and
that different forms have been comprised under one name and different characters
regarded as essential or otherwise by various authors.

1^ Plates 32 and 3-i, referred to throughout this paper, will be found in Tryon
and Pilsbry's Manual of Conchology (2j, VIII.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 247

■ Hel. pulchella var. lavigata Moq.-Tand., 1855, a. o.
Hel. mututa Say, Journ. Acad. Phila., 1817, p. 123.
Hel. 7nimita Sny, Nichols. Enc, ed. 3, 1819.

Valhniia iiiinuta Morse, Pulmonifera of Maine, 1S64, p. 21 (p^ft).
Vallonia ininnta Tryon. Am. Journ. Conch., Ill, 1867, p. 36 (?).
Vallonia pulchella W. G. Binney, Terr. Moll. V., p. 344.
Vallonia pulchella W. G. Binney, Man. Am. Land Shells, 1885, p. 77.

Shell of medium size, first moderately, then for the last \ whorl
widely umbilicated, convex or depressed conic above, pale horn or
straw colored, transparent or milky opaque, finely and densely
striate, somewhat stronger and rather regularly at the suture and
the umbilicus, shining, smooth at the nucleus ;'" whorls 3J-4, rather
rapidly increasing, with a rather deep suture, the last comparatively
large, well rounded, little expanded toward the aperture, not de-
scending in front or slightly so at the suture ; aperture moderately
oblique and inclined, I circular with umbilical margin a little
more straight and slightly protracted ; peristome decidedly and
rather abruptly everted, with a strong, white lip, thinner at either
end.

Diam. maj. 2'4, min. 2*0, alt. 1"2 mm."

Soft parts as described above for the genus. The liver was found
quite various in color : light yellow to lighter or darker brown, as
has been noted above. The action of the heart also is described in
the general description.

The jaw (PI. VIII, figs. H, I, K, L) is rather strongly curved
with obtuse ends, and no median projection on the cutting edge.
The latter is riiore or less denticulated, irregularly, corresponding
with the 18-25 variously coarse, rather sharp, longitudinal ribs
irregularly distributed over the front plane of the jaw. For details
see general description, p. 235. The width of the jaw was found to be
0-1 3-0-23, the height 0-065-0-07 mm.

The radula (PI. VIII, figs. A, G) has 65-70 transverse rows of
27 teeth ; it has already been said that Morse and W. G. Binney
counted 23 and 21. There are three perfect laterals, with rather strong
mesodonts, rapidly diminishing in size fx"om the first to the third.
The fourth and fifth make the transition, and at least the former is
diflferent from the true laterals only by the longer mesodont of the
peculiar formation described above. In the fifth, which still has a
■well-formed though smaller plate, the mesodont is of the same char-

^^ Yet, in a single specimen, I have seen few indistinct short lines.
"The altitude given here, and for all the following species, is of the whole
shell, since it is almost impossible to reliably measure in any other way.

248 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1893.

acter as in the true marginals. Sometimes in tlie fourth, and even
in the third tooth, the ectodont, though essentially simple, is finely
double-pointed, and in the same longitudinal rows single- and
double-pointed ectodonts may be seen irregularly alternating. The
sixth, though a marginal in its configuration, still makes the transi-
tion, sometimes having an indication of a plate reaching beyond the
reflection, and bearing only two outer cusps, rather short and a pro-
longation distal-ward Avith room for additional cusps, of Avhich there
is sometimes just a trace in the form of a very short blunt fourth one.
The true marginals show 5-6 cusps, moderately long, in the 7th-
9th, the mesial one being somewhat longer than the second,
and slightly directed inward. The 12th tooth, like the following, is
a fine transverse bar, only finely serrate, while the 13th or last,
generally shows hardly a trace of cusps.

One example showed a peculiar feature of the radula: At the
front end, for about 15 transverse rows, the cusps were Avorn oflT
almost entirely by rasping, as usual (compare fig. G, PI. VIII), but
here the cusps of the last few rows were less so than the others. For
this there can be no explanation but that after a period of com-
parative rest one of greater activity followed.

The following dimensions of the radula were found in several
fresh individuals, as well as in those treated with alkali : length
0"68-0'71, width 0"24 mm.; length of transverse row about 0"01
ram.

A younger specimen, of about 1"5 mm. diam., had the radula
with 60 transverse rows of 23 teeth, the first 3 on either side being
perfect laterals, the fifth a marginal, Avith only 2 or 3 small distal
cusps. The last 4 marginals are Avide and thin transverse bars,
with quite small cusps, the last Avith none at all.

The striation of the shell is somewhat unequal Avhile quite fine
and irregular over the most part of the whorls, it is stronger and
rather regular at the umbilicus, and also at the suture ; here the
strife appear, under the microscope, like ribs, about 0'03-0035 mm.
apart.

Westerlund says in his diagnosis (I. c.) of the present species:
" distinctly angular at the groove-like deepened suture." It made
the same impression on me; but after examining numerous exam-
ples in different stages of growth, it Avas found that the Avhorls are
equally rounded to the A^ery suture, and that the apparent angle
Avas an illusion caused by the reflection of the light.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PniLADELPHIA. 249

Our species has a wide geographical distrihxdion. It is found all
over Europe, in Northern Africa/^ the Azores and Madeira, in at
least "Western and Northern Asia, and the greater part of North
America. It seems to be absent or scarce in Eastern Asia, as well
as on the Pacific slope of North America, and considering the rela-
tions of those faunas, this coincidence would not be surprising.
From California, I have seen only specimens taken in a green-house
at San Jose, and they may have been introduced there with plants.
I can not remember having found a report of them from the Pacific
coast, although Vallonia has been found on the Sierra Nevada. It
has not been reported from some of the Gulf States. It has been
reported from Florida, but Dall, in his paper on Florida land and
fresh water mollusca, does not enumerate it. I have received
several specimens lately from Mauritius, labeled as an unknown
Helix. There are specimens from New South Wales, Australia,,
in the National Museum. As already said, they are probably
introduced from Europe.

It must be borne in mind that many faunal reports, especially
the older ones, should be received with reserve, since several species-
have been included under this name, which for a long time repre-
gented the entire genus. In collections, two or more diff^erent spe-
cies are generally confounded. In our country the name pidchella
was partly replaced by (^Helix) viinuta Say, the validity of which
name will be found discussed under V. excentrica.

Our species has also been found fossil in the loess, etc., over a
great part of both continents, often associated with V. costata, teiiui-
labris and probably other species.

It may be mentioned that about eighteen specimens from Pitts-
burgh, Pa., in the Academy's collection, are all darkened with a
distinctly sooty coat, an eflfect of civilization upon snails !

V. pnlehella is variable in size. While the average size is 2"4 mm.
or rather less, the smallest specimens measure 2*0, the largest 2'7,
but either extreme is exceptional, and I have seen none of 3 mm.'®

1^ Dr. W. Kobelt, in the report on his collecting trips in Tunis, Algeria and
Morocco [Excursionen in Nordafrica, Nachrichtsbl. d.' D. Mai. Ges., 1884-86,
Eine Excursion nach Nord-Marocco, ibid. 1881, p. 149] does not mention this or
any other species of V^allonia. They seem, consequently, to be at leaht scarce
there.

^®The following are measurements of specimens from different localities :

Average. Largest. Smallest.

Hermannstadt, Transylvania., 23 23 22

Montecchio, Italy 23 2-o 2-1

Sicily 2-3 24 22

17

250 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

jSTow aud tlieu one is found with a small shell, rapidly increasing last
whorl aud comparatively large aperture, strongly recalling similar
examples of Helix thyroides Say. The whorls are, as a rule, S^-Si
in number, and only the largest shells have 4 or nearly so. There
is some variability in the size and shape of the umbilicus, being in
some nearly as in excentrica, while in others it is almost regular or
funnel-shaped ; yet a marked widening near the aperture is almost
always found.

It has been accepted as a character of pulchella that the last
whorl does not descend at the aperture. This is only approximately
true because while not in such a degree as in some other species,
the last whorl descends distinctly, especially at the suture, in
about one- third or one-fourth of the specimens from different places in
Europe and North America. The last whorl, moreover, slightly
ascends more at the back than at the suture, and specimens are even
found with the last whorl first ascending and then descending
slightly but distinctly at the suture, a character which is found more
constant and more marked in V. cyclophorella, temdlahris and
others.

There is some variation also in the size and shape of the lip ; it is
almost typically stronger in the upper outer part, so as to modify
the shape of the actual aperture, as shown in Man. Conch., PI. 32,
figs. 3 and 5, the same as in V. costata, fig. 22, and pulchellula
Hde., fig. 53. lu the upper part also the lip often protrudes
beyond the margin, and specimens are not uncommon where the
strong lip projects on the whole circumference, except at the ends
(fig. 4). While fresh shells are usually of pale horn color and trans-
parent, some may be found whitish or milky opaque. I found a
colony of about a hundred exclusively so colored some years ago, in

Average. Largest. Smallest.

Aargau, Switzerl. (drift) 2 3 20 2-1

Lvons, France (the largest) 2"5 2-7 2*3

Madeira .«. 24 2-.5 23

Washington, D. C 2-3 24 2-2

Saco, Maine (2 examples, only) 22 22 22

Quebec, Canada 2-3 2.4 2-1

Branlford, Ontario 24 2-5 22

Tremont, Pa 24 26 22

New Philadelphia, Ohio 2-3 2-6 2-1

Joliet, III 2-4 2-5 20

Iowa City, Iowa 2-4 26 22

Greenville, Tenn 23 24 2-1

San Jo'.e, Cal. (greenhouse) 23 2-4 2-1

Mauritius 23 2-4 2-3

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 251

a garden of New Philadelphia, all living, while at other places in
and around the city they were of the ordinary appearance. I have
seen the same form from other localities, yet it seems not to
represent a true variety.

V. pidchella may be mistaken, when young or immature, for
Hyal. minuscula Binn., in North America only, having the same lip-
less, glassy shell and the same color of the soft parts. Yet the
somewhat exjjerienced collector will know the latter by the com-
paratively smaller, more gradually increasing (and so more
numerous) whorls, the generally stronger striation and the umbili-
cus being wider from beginning. On the Old Continent, there is
no land snail, as far as I know, which our species closely
resembles, even when immature, except other species of Vallonia.

v. pulchella var. enniensis Gredl. Tirol's Conehylien, 1856,

A form with strong, rib-like stride, but without membranous ribs.
It has been found in Tirol, at Neumarkt, Hall and Botzen. I
found' two specimens, evidently of this form mixed in a lot of V.
costata from Grasse, France (Acad. Coll.). The strise are very
strong, but the other characters of the shell are those of V. 'pulchella.

V. pulchella var. hispanica, n.

Shell small, diam. maj. 2"0-2*3, averaging 2'1, pale horn colored
or whitish ; whorls 3-3?, the last little predominating, somewhat
expanding toward the aperture ; the latter f circular ; peristome
moderately everted, with a moderately strong lip, little or not
thinner at the ends ; spire little elevated, in some examples
almost flat ; umbilicus as in typical pulchella ; surface strongly,
rather regularly striate, rather ribbed (ribs without membranes) ;
nucleus with rather strong revolving lines. Spain (no special hab-
itat), ten specimens in the Nat. Mus. Coll. Anatomical examina-
tion would be very desirable and possibly might show the form to
be a distinct species. Resembles the preceding variety.

V. pulchella var. persica Rosen. Nachrichtsbl. 1). Mai. Ges. 1892, p. 123. i'^

Differs fi'om the type by the last whorl descending to the aper-
ture, with a flat [^planol, widely expanded peristome. Hab.
Schamhala, Prov. Chorassan, Persia.

I have seen no specimens, but think this might be a form distinct
from pulchella.

^^ Beitrage zur Kenntniss der Molluskenfauna Transkaspiens und Chorassans,
von Baron Otto Rosen, Ashabad.

252 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

2. V.excentrica n. sp., PI. VIII, fig. B, M. Man. Conch., PL .32, figs. 6-9.
Vallonia minitta Say, Morse, Pulmonif. Me., p. 21 (part.).

Shell of medium size, with maj. diam. markedly longer, and with
irregular, somewhat elongated umbilicus at first rather narrow, then
for the last \ whorl raj^idly widening ; slightly rounded convex
above, smooth or very finely and irregularly striate, strongly and
regularly at the umbilicus ; nucleus smooth ; pale horn colored,
transparent or slightly opaque, with a somewhat fatty gloss ; whorls
3-3j, rather rapidly increasing with a moderately deep suture, the
last comparatively large, well rounded, expanding near the aper-
ture, not descending, or very little at the suture ; aperture moder-
ately oblique and inclined, t circular, subangular at the base ; the
umbilical margin somewhat protracted ; peristome not everted
above, very little at the periphery and moderately below, with a
rather strong white lip, thinner at the ends, visible through the
shell.

Diam. maj. 2*o, min. 1'8, alt. 1*1 mm. *

I was enabled to see the soft parts in a few specimens from Que-
bec, kindly forwarded by Mr. H. W. Hauham. The foot is, com-
pared with that of costata, a little less transparent and of a slight
yellowish tinge, as is also that of pulchella. But this difference of
tint is perceptible only when the animals are side by side. The Jaw
(PI. VIII, fig. M) is moderately curved above ; the cutting edge
with a slight, wide median projection and almost straight side
parts ; the ends are rounded. The front bears rather fine, dense,
sharp, slightly irregular ribs, all over. Size of jaw 0"08 mm. high,
0'28 wide, when depressed.

The radula (PI. VIII, fig. B) has 81-84 transverse rows of 29
teeth. There are four perfect laterals ; the fifth marks the transi-
tion ; it distinctly shows the peculiar formation of the mesodont,
has smaller though well-formed plate of attachment, and two small
distal cusps, the ectodont being already split. The sixth is a mar-
ginal but still marks the transition: it is triangular, with 3-4 cusps.
AVith the exception of the last 1 or 2 which are hardly serrate, the
marginals are pectinate with 5-7 cusps, and the 7th-10th are
placed in a peculiar way, as at least the 3-4 mesial cusps are stand-
ing on a common socle. The radula is 0*79 mm. long., 0'29 wide ;
one transverse row measures, as usual, nearly O"01 mm.

The animal seems to be somewhat less lively and more timid than
V. costata.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 253

The geographic distribution is a wide one — all Europe and the
Atlantic side of North America. I have seen it from the Pyrenees;
France: Lyons, among a lot o^ pidchella, collected by Locard ;
Great Britain (no loc, in Nat. Mus. Coll.) ; Germany : Metz, Dres-
den and Neu Haldensleben in Saxony ; Austro-Hungary : Brosteni
in the Karpathian Mts. ; Switzerland: Jura Mts. near Brugg;
Caucasus. In North America : Washington, D. C.,mih piilchella ;
New Jersey : Princeton, Cape May, etc. ; Pennsylvania: near Phil-
adelphia ; New York : Staten Id., Litchfield, Mohawk and other
places; Massachusetts: New Bedford, etc.; Maine: Saco, Cape
Elizabeth, etc. ; Halifax, N. S. and Quebec in Canada ; Ohio ; New
Philadelphia, not found in loco, but in drift on the Tuscarawas
River. Further west it has not been noticed, so far. Among
numerous lots of V. pulchella from Indiana, Illinois, Michigan,
Wisconsin, Iowa, Tennessee and other States, I have not seen one
example.

It is distinguished from the last-named species by its size, aver-
aging a little smaller, by the somewhat elongated outline of shell
and umbilicus, the last whorl more expanding toward the aperture,
the smaller and less elevated spire, the less deep suture, the peristome
little and not abruptly everted ; the difference in this is most marked
at the periphery (as clearly shown in fig. 9, compared with 2).
There are also differences in the jaw and radula, as pointed out in
the respective descriptions. One marked characteristic of V.
excentriea is the white lip shining through the shell above and at
the periphery, as it does in no other species.

There is another peculiar feature : quite frequently, especially
from certain places, there are very small, whitish dots on the sur-
face of the shell, round, or irregularly shaped, single or confluent.
They are effected by the loss of the epiconch and evidently indicate
a change in the structure of the shell and may be caused by the
invasion of a fungus organism. This is the more probable as over
many of the spots, especially those less marked and noticeable, the
epiconch is apparently intact; probably they would show only
microscopic defects. These abrasions often become so extended as
to cover a great part of the surface.

Our species is variable only Avithin narrow limits. The size varies
little above or below the average. Some specimens and local
forms show less of that characteristic elongate outline of shell
and umbilicus, and yet are not to be mistaken. There is also some

254 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

variability in the transparency of the shell — the New York and
New England specimens are, as a rule, more glassy and shining
than those from Washington, D. C. and from Europe.

In a lot of Vallonia from the Pyrenees (no special habitat or
region is noted), belonging to the Academy Collection, there was
one poor weathered specimen of V. pidchella and a number of V.
costata, together with a peculiar variety, and the present form,
which then struck me for the first time as probably being a distinct
species.

At Washington, D. C, I collected in February and again in
March, 1889, under granite stones, numerous Vallonia which then
were simply placed as pulchella. Many of those collected there
in March, under bricks in an old brick-yard were in company
with Hyallnia minuscula Binn., and Pupa procera Gould, of
which, it may be mentioned, I secured about 800 specimens in
a few hours by brushing the bricks. When I began to study
Vallonia specially, these shells were looked over carefully,'- and
then I was surprised to find both si>ecies, pulchella and the one
under consideration, in both of the two former lots, while those from
the brick-yard were pulchella exclusively. They were so exactly
like the Pyrenean shells that there could not be the least doubt as
to their identity ; they were so distinct from jyulchella as to be sep-
arated one by one at first glance, there being no doubtful or inter-
mediate examples. Subsequently I looked over every specimen of
more than 90 parcels of Vallonia containing either j^ulchella or the
new form, or both, coming from Europe and North America, and
the result was to establish the certainty that the present is a good
species, for which I propose the name V. excentrica. It is of a wide
geographical distribution, its shell being readily discerned when
once attention has been directed to its peculiarities. But it must be
added that specimens are found occasionally in which the distinc-
tion is somewhat obscure ; these are generally small pulchella which
had been damaged and restored more or less imperfectly, with little
everted peristome. I have several such examples : one from Illinois
which, at first sight, would be taken for excentrica, but by close
examination proves to be jndchella. On the other hand, one exam-
ple of V. excentrica, from Washington, D. C, has a rather strongly
everted lip, caused by a breakage near the aperture.

It is somewhat surprising that this form has been overlooked in

^^ As I have sent specimens to several conchologists, they should now be revised.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 255

Europe, being taken for jii'ichella. In North America we meet the
ohl question of the validity of V. {Hel.) minuta Say. When Say
described this species, "he was probably unacquainted wiihVallonia
pidchella of Europe, as he makes no remarks on the resemblance of
this species to the European form," as Morse (I.e.) justly
remarks, continuing: " Stimpson, Kirtland, and De Kay retain the
specific name of mimda for this shell, while Binney, Gould, W. G.
Binney, Adams, Mighels and all the European writers unite it with
pulchella."

Among writers since Morse's publication, opinion is still divided.
Say's descrij^tion {I. c.) is as follows : " Shell rather thick ; spire con-
vex, little elevated, with three volutions ; suture well-defined,
impressed ; whorls obtusely wrinkled across ; aperture nearly orbi-
cular; lip much thickened, reflected, white, distant from the umbili-
cus; umbilicus large, exhibiting the volutions. Breadth less than
one-tenth of an inch." The description decidedly points to pulchella
in nearly every particular and can not be applied to excentrica.
Say, himself, however, later acknoAvledged the identity of his
viinuta with pidchella,^^ and these are reasons enough for not apply-
ing this name to a species distinct from jndchella.

Morse- (I. c.) expresses the opinion that the American shell,
minuta, is distinct from the European, /)t</c/ie//a, and proves it,
mainly from the shape of the aperture and the angle formed by the
latter with the axis of the shell, the American form being more
translucent, and the epiconch somewhat different.

J. W. Thomson'"' refers only to F. minuta, and adds : " I cannot
consider this species to equal H.pulchelhx Miill." It certainly is prob-
able that Morse had ourF. excentrica before him, as it, as well as jnd-
chella, is frequent in Maine, but it is surprising that he did not
speak of other differences, especially the peculiar shape of the
umbilicus, the outline of the whole shell, and the fact that the peris-
tome is very little everted in comparison with jJidchella. The trans-
parency of the shell differs in each species, and I have seen excen-
trica rather more opaque than usual in pulchella. The form of the
uppej part of the aperture is also variable in pulchella as well as in
excentrica, especially in the suture slightly descending to the aper-
ture in many specimens, while in others it does not. The difference
in the inclination of the aperture I have not found so constant and

19 See W. G. Binney, Terr Moll. IV, p. 69-

20 The Land Mollusca of Bristol Co., Mass., Journ. Conch., 1S85, p. 372.

256 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

marked after comparing numerous specimens from many localities
on both continents.

Morse also speaks of differences in the lingual dentition and buc-
cal plate (jaw) between minuta ?ind ptdcJiella,hnt it seems not from
his own observations ; and it must be said that his description and
figure''^ of the radula seem rather to be drawn from pulchella than
from what we consider excentrica. The latter has the formula 14-
1-14, or 29 in a transverse row against 2^-1-23 in jndchella. I
would have drawn the marginals (or uncini, as he calls them) differ-
ently, had he then really had excentrica before him. Since the two
species live together along the Atlantic coast, it is probable that
they were mixed, as is the case in nearly every lot coming from the
coast from Maryland to Nova Scotia. The mistake was very likely
to occur, even in the case of such a careful observer as Morse.

W. G. Binney,^- as well as other writers, is of the opinion that
there is only one species, pulchella, and his own description as well
as figures represent the same. Evidently he examined only exam-
ples of the species referred to.

Has V. excentrica been introduced from Europe? It is found only
in the East, in the oldest settled jDarts of the country, where also
several European Limaces are common. But the latter live almost
exclusively in and about dwellings, while Vallonia seems to be
spread all over the region. Thus it may be considered native here
as well as V. pulchella and costata.

3. V. adela Westerlund.

BeL adela Wesierlund, Ofversigt af K. Vet. Ak. Forh., 1881, 4, p. 37.
Hel. adela Westerlund, Fauna der in der Palaearklischen Region lebenden
Binnenconchylien, I, Berlin, 1889, \>- I*!-

" Shell openly umbilicated, depressed trochiform or convex, very
indistinctly, finely striate or smooth, whitish ; whorls 4-4 i, rather
convex, not at all angular at the rather deep suture, rather rapidly
increasing, the last comparatively large, rounded, not expanded,
not descending in front ; aperture crescentic-circular, with mar-
gins separated, peristome very narrowly everted or almost straight
and without a lip. Size 2? to 3 : 1 h to If mm. (Suabian Alps ; fossil
in a sub-marine peat-bog, near Ystad, in southern Sweden.")

The above descrij^tion is translated from West. Fauna, I. c. I
have seen no specimens. Two examples, in a vial, with the label :

■^iL. c.,p. 21, fig. 57, PI. 8.

^- L. c. and Invertebrata of Mass. ed. II, p. 428. The outlines of the upper fig-
ure in the latter rather strongly resemble ihose of V. costata ; generally the
umbilicus is not as regular as shown in the lower figures of either work.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 257

" Vallonia adela West., Ystad ; ex aiictore," kindly forwarded by
Mr. Pilsbry, are evidently incorrectly named. One of them is V.
pulchella with rather elevated spire, and a well-formed lip ; the other
costata with (for the species) also an elevated spire and strongly
descending last whorl.

The species has not been figured.
3a. V.declivis (?) n. sp. Man. Conch., PI. 32, fig. 10-13.

Shell of medium size, depressed conic, widely and regularly
umbilicated, whitish, transparent, surface with fine, dense stria?,
nucleus smooth ; whorls 4, gradually increasing, with a rather deep
suture, the last well-rounded, not predominating, slightly expanding
toward the aperture and gradually descending in its last third to the
periphery of the penultimate whorl or rather below it ; aperture
moderately inclined and oblique, nearly f crescentic-circular, the
inferior end of margin slightly protracted ; peristome straight
above, and very narrowly everted at tlie periphery and the inferior
part, with a thin but distinct lip.

Diam. maj. 2"6, min. 2*4, alt. 1"4 mm.

Soft parts not seen.

Distribution : Central Europe. I received, about 12 years ago,
from Mr. S. Clessin, as Hel. tenuilahris Braun, 3 examples from the
drift on the Danube River, in Bavaria. Although dead shells,
they are fresh and well-preserved, and all exactly alike. I found
another specimen in drift on the Aar River, in Switzerland, also in
good condition, and of the same size and shape as those from the
Danube, except that it has no lip, and the margin is simple and
straight ; it may not, however, be mature.

This form is evidently not V. tenuilahris of A. Braun, as it does
not correspond at all in several different points, \vith the description
of that species, nor any other known to me. It would, consequently,
not be amiss to propose a specific name for it.

It is not " densely and acutely, finely ribbed," but very finely
striate, appearing almost smooth and shining; the peristome is not
everted, or very narrowly and indistinctly so, while in tenuilahris it is
" widened " (which evidently means everted) and the inferior margin
reflexed ; the aperture is not " transversely oval-rounded," and not
"very oblique," and the margins are not " very approximate," but,
for a Vallonia, markedly distant ; the shell is not " grayish-horn
with peristome yellowish horn colored," but whitish transparent
throughout.

258 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

It differs from T". pulchella in its somewhat larger size, the
wider and more regular umbilicus, the whorls being J more in num-
ber and more slowly increasing, the last comparatively narrower,
gradually descending entirely to the aperture, and the peristome
being straight or just perceptibly everted with a much thinner lip.

V. declivis var. altilis, nov. Man. Conch., PI. 32, fig. 14-17.

This form differs from the above in its somewhat larger size, nar-
rower and deeper umbilicus, more elevated spire, the last whorl
descending below^ the circumference of the penultimate; the peris-
tome being quite straight and thin, without a lip ; the aperture is
very little oblique, in fact, the least so of all the Vallonia I know,
and moderately inclined, rather higher than wide, subangular
inward at the base ; whorls 43 ; the color is whitish, the surface
densely, rather regularly striate.

Diam. maj. 29 min. 2*5, alt. I'T mm.

This form might represent a species, but, from its similarity to
declivis, and the few examples known, I prefer, for the present, to
regard it as a variety.

I found one specimen in 1882, also in drift on the Aar River,
Switzerland. Another has been kindly forwarded by Mr. Pilsbry,
it is from drift on the Main River, in Middle Germany, and bears
also the name H, tenuilahris Braun. They are exactly alike.

I found, in 1882, while in Switzerland, among drift shells from
the Doubs River, on the western slope of the Jura Mountains, a few
specimens of either declivis or altilis, having then labeled them also
H. tenuilahris A. Br.

All the examples of this species extant, though dead shells and
found in drift, are fresh and in good condition, and it is to be
expected that living specimens will be found in those countries. Tf
a new species has been established on the few specimens, it is
because they could not reasonably be brought under one of those
already known without modifying their diagnoses so that they would
have been valueless.

I believed for a time that this might be the V. adela of Wester-
lundjjudging from the description. Butthe author says expressly that
the last whorl does not descend at all,-'^ while in the forms under
consideration this is just the prominent feature. Since I failed to

23Conf. Wesierlund Fauna, I Suppl. 1890, p. 120, -f/. tenuilabrisyzr.nndtT V.
mionedon Bttg., also cited below. No. 1-1.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 259

obtain authentic specimens of adela, some doubt in regard to this
question will yet remain.

4. V. pollinensis Paulucci.

Ilel. pollinensis in Westerlund, Fauna, I Suppl., p. 120.

Shell with a rather narrow, funnel-shaped umbilicus (the same at
the aperture, little and gradually widening), convex, with obtuse,
prominent apex, light horn colored, exceedingly finely striate,
adorned with more distant, acute, lamelliform, regular fine ribs ;
whorls 4*, regularly increasing, convex, with impressed suture, the
last gradually increasing and not at all expanded at the apei'ture,
rather constricted, scarcely wider than the penultimate, slightly, and
gradually descending above ; aperture little oblique, crescentic-cir-
cular, descending [?], margin straight, simple ; only the columellar
margin somewhat everted high up. Size 2* by Ij m. (Italy, Monte
Pollina in Prov. Potenza : Paul, ex.) Not figured.

Translated from Westerlund, I.e.

I have seen no specimeus. To judge from the description, it
seems to be a somewhat intermediate form between the above
species and the costate groups.

5. V. costata Muller, PI. VIII, figs. C, N. Man. Conch., PI. 32, figs. 18-22, 27, PL 33,
fig. 54.

Helix costata Muller, Verm. Hist., II, 1774, p. 31.
Helix costata Ro>sm. Icon., 439.
Helix costata Dupuy, Hist. 1848, p. 162, T. 7, fig. 4.
Helix costata Westerlund Fauna, I, p. 14 — a. o.
Helix pulchella var. costata of most authors.
Vallonia rosalia Risso, 1826 (ex. West. /. c).

Shell with a moderate umbilicus more widening for the last \-\
whorl, depressed convex above (or nearly flat), grayish to light) or
reddish horn colored, with rather regularly set membranous ribs and
irregular microscopic stria^ between them ; nucleus with fine revolv-
ing lines; whorls 82, slightly flattened above and below the periph-
ery, at the latter somewhat angular, with a deep suture, rather
rapidly increasing; the last expanding near the aperture and
shortly descending, more so at the suture than on the back ; aper-
ture rather inclined and oblique, almost circular, a little flattened
above and angular at the base, with ends of margin much approxi-
mate, slightly protracted and auricled, connected by a thin callus;
peristome strongly and abruptly everted, except near the suture,
with a .strong, white lip evanescent at either end.

Diam. maj. 2*5, rain. 2'1, alt. I'l mm.

260 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Soft parts: the foot is about as long as the diameter of the shell,
quite transparent, a little more so than in F. jmlchella and excen-
trica. The jaw, PI. VIII, fig. N, is rather strongly curved moder-
ately high, stout, chestnut colored in the inferior part, with 16-18
rather strong ribs on the front side, leaving about i of either side at
the end ribless and smooth. The cutting edge is denticulated, and
sometimes appears a little more straight in the median part, but
there is no projection. The lines of growth are distinctly visible.
Width of jaw 0-25, height 0-088 mm.

The radula has 69-72 transverse rows of 27 (or 29) teeth. In
the central the side cusps are very small, barely perceptible, and
the side margins of the plate are curved up in nearly their entire
length. There are 4 perfect laterals with the mesodont compara-
tively thin, the ectodont very small, scarcely half the size of the
same in V. excentrica. The fifth makes the transition, but resembles
rather the laterals, having a well-formed plate of attachment with a
projecting posterior distal angle. Its mesodont shows an indication
of its transformation and the ectodont is essentially simple, but, at
least in some jmrts, with two points. The sixth or first marginal is
somewhat triangular, and with a distinctly backward extended plate
of attachment, and the reflection with 2 or 3 short distal cusps, as it
is still in the following or seventh tooth. On the other marginals
the cusps are comparatively small and stand immediately up on the
bases. Length of the radula 0*71, width 0"22-0'23 mm.

V. costata is distributed over a wide geographical area, being
found all over Europe, Northern Africa, and the most part of Asia.
In North America it seems to occupy a wide area also, though it is
not as common as V. pulchella. It has been cited from Philadelphia
and Cincinnati. I have seen it from Washington, D. C, from
Quebec, Canada, and Isle d'Orleans, near that city, collected by
Mr. A. W. Hanham, also from Iowa, Nebraska, Kansas and Colo-
rado. All reports of distribution must be received with reserve,
and especially those from high altitudes in western North America,
as under the name of costata doubtless different forms are com-
prised, such as gracilicosta, parvida, cyclophorella and others. It
has also been found in Australia, by Cox, as reported by Brazier
(Journ. Conch., 1879).*

Until recently, and even now, T . costata has been considered a
variety of pulchella. The characters of the shell, decidedly and

* See Appendix.

1893.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 261

constantly different from those of that species, prove it to be
altogether distinct. One of the main distinguishing features is
the presence of very fine, raised revolving lines on the nucleus, or
the I'T embryonal whorls, while those of T". pulcliella are smooth.
The generally much more depressed spire, the deeper suture beside
the rather flatter whorls above, the last whorl more rapidly expand-
ing toward and descending to the aperture, especially at the suture,
the more approximate margins rendering the aperture nearly circu-
lar, are sufficient to distinguish costata from pulchella, even in the
absence of the membranous ribs, the most striking character of the
average shell.

Our species, however, has these ribs and most of the other charac-
ters in common with several other forms, mostly found in Asia and
North America, while in Europe T". costata seems to be more iso-
lated. On the other hand, several of those related species seem to
be intermediate between this and the tenuilahris-cydophorella, etc.,
groups. All these forms need much more careful study.

When seen under the microscope, the epiconch ("epidermis")
shows between the membranous ribs, 4-6 finer raised strise, and, in
addition, very numerous microscopic lines in a general radial direc-
tion, but mostly intercrossing in various ways, except near the
suture where usually they are parallel (Man. Conch., PI. 32, figs. 27,
28.)

V. costata is quite variable, and a number of extreme forms must
be regarded as varieties. It may even prove to be difficult to draw
a line between this species and some others nearly related. In size
it averages 2*5 mm., few specimens measuring 2'7 or more, and the
smallest are 2*l-2"2. The number of whorls is almost constantly
3j, hardly more in the largest examples, and somewhat over 3 in the
smallest. There is variation also in the elevation of the spire — in
many specimens it is almost or quite flat and very low in the aver-
age. In those from Quebec, Canada, it is comparatively elevated.
As to the descending of the last whorl, it must be repeated that the
suture always descends more decidedly than the whorl in its totality,
and specimens are not scarce in which the back of the whorl keeps
nearly or exactly horizontal to the very margin, as in V. parvida
(Man. Conch, fig. 25, PI. 32). Some diversity is also found in the
size and closeness, or number of the ribs : I counted from 23-35 on
the last whorl in different specimens which may be regarded as
typical. The lip also is variable, but always rather strong, and

262 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

specimens with a tliin or wanting lip are likely to be either
immature or erroneously identified. Occasionally the lip protrudes
strongly with a sharp edge, beyond the level of the aperture, as it
occurs also in V. pulchella.

The following forms are more distinct, and must be regarded as
varieties :

V. costata var. helvetica, n.

Shell small, colorless, glassy-transparent, shining, with rather
regularly set, stronger (yet fine) stride, but without membranous
ribs ; umbilicus regularly spiral ; diameter averaging 2*2 mm.

This is a very peculiar and beautiful VaUonia. It might be
taken for a diflferent species or for j^ulchella, but the deeper and,
at the aperture, descending suture, the more approximate margins,
and the regular though very fine rib-strise, range it near costata.
Those striffi are perceptible rather more by their being whitish in the
glassy shell than by their size.

The originals were collected in 1882 on the Geissberg, Jura
Mountains, near Brugg, Switzerland, by Dr. R. Haeusler. After
the description, it is hardly necessary to add that they were quite
fresh, not weathered ; the epiconch, though very thin, was not
wanting. In drift on the Aar River, then being in the Jura
range, I found some more specimens the same year, together with
V. jyulchella, decUvis, typical costata, and intermediate specimens
between the latter and the present variety.

V. costata var. amurensis, n. Man. Conch., PI. 33, figs. 50-52.

Shell small ; umbilicus rather regular, wide perspective from the
first volutions ; spire nearly flat; ribs strong and distant, about 22 on
the last volution ; last whorl very little or not at all descending on
the back ; color deep horn ; diameter 2"2 mm.

The. specimens are from Kassakewitsch on the Amur (Northeast-
ei'n Asia) and were kindly forwarded by MM. 0. Staudiuger and
A. Bang-Haas.

V. costata var. pyrenaica, n.

Shell large; umbilicus wide, perspective rather regular; whorls
4, more gradually and regularly increasing than in the type, the
last less expanding at the aperture, moderately or not at all descend-
ing in toto ; ribs small, hardly membranous. The outline is some-
what peculiar : there is a slight angle in the circumference of the
last whorl about i volution above the apertui'e, much as in V.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 263

cydophorella (Man. Conch., PI. 33, fig. 30). Diam. 2-6-2-8 ram.
It is a form decidedly different from the type, but, as it seems, con-
nected by intermediate specimens..

Pyrenees (Acad. Coll.; see under V. j)erspectiva, p. 271).

V. costata var. montana, n.

Shell rather small and thick, colorless translucent, a little opaque,
spire a little elevated ; surface with rather crowded rib-striie, but
without membranous ribs ; last whorl slightly and gradually ascend-
ing, not at all or very little descending to the aperture in toto,
shortly and decidedly at the suture ; lip very strong.

There are two specimens, not quite fresh, in the Acad. Coll.,
marked " H. minuta Say, Rocky Mts., E. Hall," with the above
characteristics. They cannot be ranged under typical costata, yet
they have the general appearance of that species, so that they may
be placed as a variety under it until more and better specimens are
obtained.

6. V. albula n. sp., PI. VIII, figs. D and 0. Man. Conch. PI. 33, figs. 48, 49.

About the middle of Nov., 1892, Mr. A. W. Hanham sent me a
third lot of fresh Vallonia from St. Joseph, Quebec," Canada.
Among them were four beautiful examples, three of them living,
which I first somewhat doubtfully referred to V. gracilicosta. After
repeated comparison I find that they differ essentially from this
species. I cannot, with certainty, range them under any other.

The shell is rather large, 2"7-2*8 mm. gr. diam., whitish translu-
cent, with a somewhat elevated spire; whorls 35-4; the last
whorl and aperture are rather well rounded, the latter resembling
that of costata. The lip is moderately strong. The ribs of the shell
are distinct but small, crowxled, about 55 on the last whorl, and
bearing fine membranes which give the surface a beautiful silky
gloss as in some cydophorella. There are differences in the eleva-
tion of the spire and the ascending of the last whorl among the
four specimens, as is the case in most other forms.

In outer aspect the soft parts are much like those of other species.
The liver is pale yellowish or horn colored. The jaw and especially
the radula show some peculiarities, both being comparatively large.
The jaw is 0'31 mm. wide, of pale horn color, and appears some-

** Mr. Hanham's assiduous collecting brought to our knowledge four different
Vallonia from the vicinity of Quebec: pulchclla, excentrica, costata, and the one
under consideration.

264 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

what thin and flexible, with rather crowded, strong, irregular rib-
strise, evanescent toward the upper and strongly denticulating the
cutting edge ; the posterior duplicature appears also rather thin and
soft ; PI. VIII, fig. 0, shows it extended by pressure.

I could not measure exactly the length of the radula nor count
the transverse rows in the specimen examined ; it is 0"27 mm. wide.
Formula R : 4+2 : 10 (11) ; there are, consequently, 33 (35) teeth,
the highest number seen in a Vailonia. The central tooth is of
common shape, rather wide but not much wider posteriorly, its
lateral edges curved up for the most part of their length. On the
4 perfect laterals the cusps are stout ; the fifth and sixth are transi-
tion teeth having a smaller though distinct plate, hut with hardly
projecting posterior distal angle. Their mesodonts are marked
of the formation pointed out in the general description, while the
ectodonts are simple in most, finely two-pointed in some inter-
spersed teeth. Of all laterals the ectodonts are larger than the same
in V. costata. The marginals are as usual, but with comparatively
few cusps. The seventh tooth from the center is a true marginal in
its whole configuration, though with only 2-3 short distal cusps ;
here the transition from laterals to marginals is more abrupt than in
any other species seen. The last marginals (1-2) are quite small
and with hardly any perceptible cusps.

The shell is related on one side to costata, on the other to cyclo-
phorella, and seems to be intermediate. It resembles the latter in
its size and general appearance, the umbilicus being rather wide
and considerably expanding for the last J whorl, the latter distinctly
ascending before descending ; in the fine dense ribs, which are
stronger and sharper on the shell itself and bear smaller mem-
branes than in costata and in the coloration. It has, however, some
features allying it to costata — the aperture although less trans-
versely elongated, is not circular. The presence of a lip is charac-
teristic, and the peristome is rather abruptly and strongly everted, as
in costata. These characters, together with the formation of the jaw
and radula place this Vailonia in a peculiar position. I regard it
as a distinct species, for which I propose the name alhula, because
of its whitish shell.

Mr. Geo. W. Taylor, of Victoria, B. C, sent me recently a few
Vailonia for examination, among which there was one specimen
from the Rocky Mountains, B. C, resembling in size and shape the
Quebec specimens, although it was weathered and had lost its epi-

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 265

conch. Two examples, in the same condition, from Winnipeg,
Manitoba, are related to these, but are somewhat smaller, and
resemble V.rcostata. V. albiila, therefore, seems to be widely dis-
tributed over the northern part of our Continent, and more speci-
mens will probably be found in that region.

7. V. parvula, n. sp.,2 5 PI. VIII, fig. R. Man. Conch.. PI. 32, figs. 23-26, 28.

Shell small, widely umbilicated, especially for the last i-k whorl,
quite flat above or with very little prominent apex, thin, horn-
colored to nearly colorless, with rather fine, dense, membranous
ribs (about 30-38 on the last whorl), and microscopic, intercrossing
lines between them ; nucleus with fine revolving lines; whorls a lit-
tle over 3, slightly flattened above and below the periphery, with a
deep suture : the last much wider than the penultimate, rather rap-
idly expanding toward the aperture and descending only at the
suture in front ; aperture veiy oblique, tangential and rather
inclined, almost circular with ends of margin much approximate;
peristome with a rather strong, pale horn colored lip. Diam. maj»
2*0, min. 1-6, alt. about 0*8 mm.

I was enabled to examine the soft parts through the kindness of
Mr. Jas. H. Ferriss.'® The jaw is rather strongly curved, of about
the same configuration as that of V. costata (PI. VIII, fig. N), stout,,
of chestnut color, with about 18 strong, coarse ribs, strongly denticu-
lating the cutting edge. They are of the formation described
above (PI. VIII, fig. R). The side ends show hardly a trace of
ribs and appear smooth.

I counted about 67 transverse rows of 23 teeth on the radula. There
are 3 perfect laterals, and the fourth may well range with them, being
very little modified by a somewhat small plate of attachment, the meso-
dont being nearly normal and the ectodont still simple but two-
pointed in most teeth. The fifth is formed like the marginals, but
the 2-3 distal cusps are very small and short. Thus the transition
is more rapid here than in any other species. There are 4 well-
formed marginals, with 4-5 comparatively short cusps ; the tenth
tooth bears hardly any perceptible cusps, and the eleventh (last)
not a trace of such. PI. VIII, fig. F, shows a central tooth in half
profile with the strong and cusp-like prominent posterior angles of

»5See notice in Nautilus, V, No. 3, p. 100.

*^ Wiio, upon my request to send living specimens, not finding any at Joliet^
made a trip of 8 miles in the worst of weather to secure them.

18

266 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

the plate of attachment. A radiila was 0"58 mm. long, 0*2 wide,
thus one transverse row measures about 0*009 mm. in length.

The ganglia are described above.

This is a North American species, occurring apparently almost
exclusively in the prairie States. I have seen specimens from Joliet
and Ottawa, Illinois ; Davenport and Bonair, Iowa ; numerous
examples in drift on the Missouri River, collected at Eastport,
Iowa, together with T". codata and a few perspediva ; Nebraska;
Wichita, Kansas; Indian Territory. Doubtless many of them are
in collections under the name costata, etc.

F. parvida much resembles costata, but it is decidedly and con-
stantly smaller, having scarcely half the bulk of the latter, and dis-
tinguished by the comparatively wider umbilicus and by the last
whorl not descending, the peristome, as a rule, being quite straight
on the back to margin, as shown in Man. Conch., PI. 32, fig. 25.'
Sometimes it is gradually and slightly ascending, as in T". costata,
jndcheUa, excentrica. Never have I seen a doubtful specimen
between j)arvula and costata, and they inhabit the same region.
Our species also resemble ^^er-spec^tra in color, size and presence of
the ribs ; the diiferences will be pointed out in connection with the
latter species.

V. jMTVula shows a little variation. The average size is scarcely
2'0 mm. ; one is found with 2"1, but some are as small as 1'7. The
lip is almost always comparatively strong, and the aperture always
rather circular, sometimes as shown in fig. 26. One specimen
from Bird's Bridge, Will County, Illinois, among about eight which
I owe to the kindness of Mr. Ferriss, has the last whorl descending,
the peristome continuous and free from the penultimate, thus resem-
bling F. persjiectiva ; but the strong lip and the rather circular, not
transversely elongate aperture characterize it as ]jarvida. The
abnormity may be caused by a breakage, as in other species.

For a time 1 regarded this Vallonia as americana of Ancey (ms.)
Mr. Theo. D. A. Cockerell kindly furnished me a copy of Ancey's
ms. description which I communicate here: Y. americana differs
from cyclophorella by its " taille plus faible, son ombilic tres-grand
aussi [?] et fortement dilate au dernier tour, ses tours a croissance
plus rapide, et en nombre moiudre (31 seulement) son dernier tour
nuUement descendant, plus ample a sa terminaison, son peristome
fortement epaissi, son ouverture a bords distants et beaucoup plus
grand," etc. From costata it differs " par I'ampleur de sou dernier

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 267

tour vers rouveriure, le charactere de son orabilic qui est aiissi un
peu plus grand ; la croissance plus rapide des tours qui sont un peu
moius nombreux, enfin par sa taille plus faible." The size is not
giv'^en.

This description would fairly well correspond with T^^ jmrvula,
but for one point. Ancey says: "son ouverture a bords distant,"
while in our species they are much approximate, even more so than
in costata and in cydophorella. We can hardly understand how
Ancey would characterize T^. americana by comparing it with cydo-
phorella if it were the present species, since the two are very differ-
ent. There is no description of the color or the structure of the
surface. I did not succeed in procuring specimens for comparison.

There is a note in Mr. Cockerell's letter worth communicating :
" costata var. minor — very small, diam. I5-II mm., compact, aper-
ture round, ribs very prominent." This small form, Avhich may,
perhaps, fall as a subvariety under americana, was found by Mr. D.
B. Cockerell at Niagara Falls, on the Canadian side. When send-
ing it to me he remarked : " The only place I found this variety
was on the Canadian side, although the type was common every-
where else but where I found var. costata." I confess that the mean-
ing of the last sentence is somewhat obscure to me. But the fact is
stated of the existence of a small costate form in that locality. Any
conchologists visiting Niagara Falls should be on the lookout for
this Vallonia, as well as for others. Mr. Cockerell wrote me that
the specimens in question had been accidentally destroyed.

8. V. tenera Reinhard.

I/e/. tenera Reinhard, Jahrb. D. Mai. Ges., 1877, p. 322, T. XI, f. 4.
(?) Hel. pulchellula Heude, Moll. Terr. Fl. Bleu, 1882. p. 20, T. 8. f. 17."
{i) Hel. pidcheliula Hilber, Sitzungsber. K. Acad. Wiss. Wien, LXXXVI, p.
3.2'

(?) Hel. pulchellula O. v. Mcellendorff, Jahrb. D. Mai. Ges., 1884, p. 315.

Unfortunately, the original descriptions are not accessible to me.
From two authentic specimens in the collection of the Academy,
fresh and evidently mature, or nearly so, we can characterize F.
tenera as follows :

Shell rather small and of the general appearance of F. costata,
with spire little elevated, very depressed, conic, light grayish horn
colored, thin and transparent, somewhat shining; surface with
rather fine and dense membranous ribs, al)out 33-43 on the last
whorl ; umbilicus rather wide and regular, a little more widened for

^^ Cited from Mcellendorff, /. c.

268 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

the last i> whorl; whorls rather more than 3 J, regularly increasing,
a little angular at the periphery, with a rather deep suture, the last
moderately wide, distinctly flattened above and sloping outward,
somewhat expanding toward the aperture, ascending before, moder-
ately descending in front, a little more so at the suture ; aperture
very oblique and inclined, transversely elongate, markedly flattened
above, moderately curved below (not subangular) somewhat angu-
lar at the periphery, margins approximate, the superior more
advancing in front than the inferior ; peristome, except above,
moderately and abruptly everted with a rather thin, almost glassy
transparent, hardly white, lip.

Diam. maj. 2-3 (2-2) min. 1-9, alt. I'O mm.

Soft parts not examined.

Shanghai, China ; Kobi, jSIiphon, Japan (Acad. Coll.) Dunca
Yosky, (?) Japan (Nat. Mus. Coll.).

As far as I can judge from the few specimens seen, I believe V.
tenera Reinh. is a Avell-characterized species.

To the kindness of Dr. O. v. Moellendorfl^, 1 owe three specimens
of V. pnlchelhila Heude, from Shanghai, China. One of them has
a diam. maj. of 2'3, the others of scarcely 2'2 mm.; the former corre-
sponds exactly with those of tenera Reinh., described above, while
the two smaller ones are somewhat diflferent in coloration, which is
rather yellowish horn, and in their umbilicus being a little narrower
in the upper part and then more rapidly widening. In the collec-
tion of the Academy there are two specimens of V. pulchelhda Hde.
from China said to be authentic ; one although not quite mature,
agrees in every particular, as far as it goes, with V. tenera; the other
is not quite fresh, diam. scarcely 2'2, and here also the umbilicus is
first a little narrower and more rapidly widens in the latter part ;
the lip is quite thin, though distinct, the coloration somewhat indis-
tinctly yellowish horn, the si:)ire somewhat more elevated, and the
last whorl descending vei-y slowly, yet the suture being below the
periphery at the aperture. This form is represented in Man. Conch.,
PI. 33, fig. 53.

From all this we may conclude that V. pulchelhda Hde. is not
specifically distinct from tenera Reinh., the latter name having pri-
ority. The somewhat diflTerent form noted above, and rather
closely corresponding in the two lots, which possibly or even prob-
ably, are from the same place, may represent a var. pidchelhda
Hde., if they agree with the original description, which I have not

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 269

seen. V. tenera is, at all events, distributed over eastern China as
well as in Japan.

9. V. patens Reinhard.

//el. patens Reinhard, Sitzungbber. Nat. Fr. Berlin, 1883, p. 43.
//el. patens O. v. Moellendorfif, Jahrb. D. Mai. Ges., 1884, p. 315.
//el. pulchella MuUer and n. sp. O. v. Moellendorff, ibid. 1881, p. 36.

" Shell small, flat, with scarcely projecting apex, with wide, per-
spective umbilicus, grayish white. Whorls 3?, somewhat depressed,
moderately increasing in width, separated by a deeply impressed
suture, and with distant membranous ribs ; the last scarcely descend-
ing toward the aperture. Aperture very oblique, transversely oval,
with everted but scarcely thickened peristome ; upper margin
almost straight, lower margin symmetrically curved, insertions at
the margins approximate. Diam. 2, alt. scarcely 1 mm.

"The species recalls H. cosiata as to the ribs, but differs from it in
its smaller size, wider umbilicus, and more oblique aperture with
slightly thickened peristome. It has been found by Dr. O. v. Moel-
lendorff on the Powentschan, Prov. Chi Li, China, in company with
H. tenuilabris A. Br., a species which seems to be widely distributed
in northeastern Asia, while in our regions (Central Europe) it is
only found fossil in the pleistocene loess. This fact is interesting in
connection with the results of Nehring's investigations concerning
the vertebrate fauna of the loess." (Original descr., translated ; no
figure).

Dr. O. V. Moellendorff (^. c, 1884) thinks V. patens may be iden-
tical with V. pulchellula Hde. (see tenera Reinh.). I have seen no
specimens. ,

10. V. gracilicosta Reinhard.

V. gracilicosta Reinh,,^* Sitzungsber. Nat. Freunde, Berlin, 1883, p. 42.

Shell flat, with little prominent apex, widely umbilicated, of
whitish-gray color. Whorls 3j, convex, separated by a deep
suture, with fine but distinct, rather crowded ribs; last whorl
slightly angular around the umbilicus, strongly expanding toward
the aperture, slightly descending to the same. Aperture moderately
oblique, transversely oval, with strongly everted and broadly white-
lipped peristome ; upper margin little, lower margin more curved,
almost obtusely angular. Margins at the insertions approximate
and connected by a callus. Diam. 2*5, min. 2*0, alt. about 1 mm.

™ O. Reinhard, iiher die von den Herren Gebr. Krause auf ihrer Reise gesam-
melten Pupa-, Hyalina- und Vallonia-Arten.

270 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Collected on the Little Missouri, by JM^M. Krause. (Orig. descr.,
translated).

I have seen no authentic examples of this species. But there are
four fresh specimens of a form from Logan Canyon, Utah, collected
by Mr. Henry Hemphill, in the collection of the Academy labelled
^'H. lyulehella var. costata Miill.," certainly not costafa, but which I
take to be V. graeilicosta, as they rather conform to the description.

The spire is quite low, but distinctly conic. The ribs of the shell
itself are rather regular, about 40 on the last whorl, without mem-
branous appendages. Such are not w^orn off, since there is no trace
of them to be seen at the suture or umbilical part. Nucleus with
indistinct microscopic revolving lines. The last whorl is slightly
flattened above and below the periphery, thus being somewhat
angular at the periphery and base, in its last i slightly but dis-
tinctly ascending before it descends in front, somewhat more at the
suture. Aperture of the form given in the above description,
appearing slightly triangular. .Diam. 2'6 mm.

A corresponding lot of four specimens from the same place and
the same collector is in the National Museum Collection.

Near the preceding we have to range some fossil forms. In
the southern part of New Mexico, near Eddy, in a diy " Salt Lake,"
some fine quartz sand with numerous minute fossil, or semi-fossil
shells, was collected by a party of the Texas Geological Survey.
The shells were picked out and kindly forwarded to me for exami-
nation by Mr. J, A. Singley. There were about fourteen land and
fresh water species, extremely fragile and bleached. Among them
was a number of Villoma which I then named costata var., but
they diflTer from that species in the more elevated spire,, the last
whorl markedly ascending, and the surface rather densely and
somewhat irregularly striate, quite unlike costata. Whether they
had membranous ribs when fresh, it is, of course, impossible to tell,
but, from analogy with recent forms, it is probable that they had.

Two specimens, much like those from Eddy, were found among a
number of minute land and fresh water shells in the same con-
dition and with the same white quartz sand seen by Mr. W. F.
Cummins, of the Texas Geological Survey, in Osborn's Julia Can-
yon, N. "\V. Texas, near the top of the bluff.

Both these finds are said to be quaternary, and it is believed
that the species are not represented in the recent fauna of that part
of the country. As a whole they suggest parts of a more northern
fauna. A list of them will be published in another article.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 271

Further studies of more material of all these forms will be neces-
sary.*

11. V. perspectiva, n. sp.,-* PI. VIII, fig. F. Man. Conch., PI. .33, fig. 39-46.

Shell small, with very wide perspective umbilicus, more widening
for the last •} whorl, flat, or a little elevated above, with rather dense,
somewhat regularly set, moderately strong membranous ribs (about
35 on the last whorl) and with finer strise between them ; nucleus
without revolving lines ; pale horn to colorless, thin, translucent ;
whorls 3;}, gradually increasing, a little flattened above and below
the periphery, with a deep suture, the last rounded, comparatively
narrow, little expanding toward the aperture, rather rapidly
descending in toto ; aperture very inclined and oblique, almost tan-
gential, transversely (short) ovoid or oblong; peristome continuous,
shortly but not abruptly everted except near the suture, without (or
with a very thin) lip.

Diam. maj. 2-0, min. 1"7, alt. 0'7 mm.

Soft parts as usual in the genus; the liver, as seen through the
shell, appears grayish brown. Jaw slightly arcuate, with rather
fine irregular ribs. Radula with 77 transverse rows of 25 teeth :
R : 3-f 2 : 7. There are 3 perfect laterals and the fourth resembles
them closely, yet forms the transition from laterals to marginals,
and even the fifth might rather range with the former, as its plate is
distinct though small ; its ectodont is two-pointed, and the pecul-
iarly-formed mesodout rather long. The sixth is a marginal, with
2 distal cusps ; the other marginals are wide and short, with 4 to 6
slender cusps, the mesodont being moderately longer than the
others. The last 1 or 2 are very small, and their cusps indistinct even
when highly magnified.

This is a North American species, which I saw first from Knox-
ville, Tennessee, where it had been collected by Mrs. Judge
Andrews in damp moss on the cliflfs above the Holston River.
Later it was found in Jackson County, Alabama, by Mr. H. E.
Sargent, and, among the specimens sent, there were a few living, so
that I could observe the animal and examine at least the jaw and
radula. Doubtless our species will be found at more localities in
the Appalachian Mountains. In the jNIissouri River drift, from
Eastport, Iowa, mentioned under V. parnda, there w'ere four exam-
ples of this species, somewhat small, 1*8 and 1*9 mm. diam.

*See Appendix.

2'S. notice in "Nautilus," V, No. 4, p. 101.

272 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Those from Tennessee and Alabama show some slight variation.
The size is from 1*7-2"1 mm. gv. diam., 2*0 being the average. On
some specimens the aperture is not pear shaped as in most, but
rather broadly rounded at the left side, as shown in Man. Conch.,
PI. 33, fig. 44. There is also some difi'erence in the more or less
strongly everted peristome. A few specimens from Alabama show
a thin lip, but from its appearance it seems to be caused by some
disease.

V. perspediva can not be mistaken for any other species except
parviUa, which it resembles in size, coloration and the membranous
ribs. But it is sufficiently distinguished by the wider umbilicus,
the comparatively narrow last whorl, less expanding and descend-
ing in toto to the aperture, which is smaller and not circular; the
continuous peristome and the absence of a lip. It holds a singular
position also among the species with strongly descending last whorl
and transversely elongated aperture by the comparatively more dis-
tant and regularly standing membranous ribs, and its small size.

12. V. cyclophorella Ancey, PI. VIII, f. E. Man. Conch., PL .33, f. .34-38, PI. 32, f. 29.

" Resembles temdlahris A. Braun, in its rather slight peristome,
and costata in its sculpture. Umbilicus large (about 1 mm. diam).
Whorls about 4, the last depressed above. Costulations fine ; aper-
ture oblique, nearly round. Diam. 21, alt. 1 mm." This description
has been communicated by Mr. Theo. D. A. Cockerell, with the
note : " V. cyclojjhorella, collected at West Cliff, Colorado, has the
animal entirely translucent, white (except the dark eyes). The
liver, seen through the shell, is red-brown."

As noted, this species has been collected over a wide range of the
Rocky Mountains, and is in collections under different names. Col-
orado : North Park, Ingersoll collection, received from Mr. J. H.
Thomson ; E, A. Barber, Aug., 1 874, in collection of the Academy
(as T". minuta Say), West Cliff, Mr. Cockerell ; South Park ; Utah :
American Fork Canyon, J. D. Putnam; Montana: Helena, Mr.
Henry Hemphill (in Acad. Coll.); Idaho ; Wyoming: FortBridger,
Dr. Jos. Leidy ; AVashington : Walla Walla, Mr. Hemphill ;
Nevada : Hamilton (in Nat. Mus. Coll.) ; New Mexico (or Arizona),
in Nat. Mus. Coll.

The above description would be insufficient to characterize the
species. By the kindness of Mr. Theo. D. A. Cockerell, who sent
me some authentic specimens from Colorado, and Mr. J. A. Thom-
son, who presented me his examples, collected by Ingersoll, I was

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 273

enabled to identify it, and now would add the following: Sliell
rather thin, pale or grayish-horn colored, or whitish translucent,
ribs on the shell small, crowded (about 60 on the last whorl), with
fine membranes, rather regular, often irregular (as in Man. Conch.,
PI. 32, fig. 29), with fine strise between them ; nucleus with slight,
irregular, nearly obsolete revolving lines ; suture moderately deep ;
last whorl somewhat widening toward the aperture, in its last i dis-
tinctly ascending (Man. Conch., PI. 33, fig. 37) then rather rapidly
descending, somewhat more at the suture, so that the margins are
much approximate ; aperture transversely elongate ; superior mar-
gin markedly less curved than inferior ; peristome slightly everted,
except near the suture, thin, without a lip. Most specimens are of
a rather dull surface, but those from Walla Walla are shining, the
shell almost colorless, thin and transparent, and rather large.

Greater diam. 2*7, lesser 2*2 alt. 1"2 mm.

I have seen no living animals. The jaw and radula were exam-
ined in softened specimens. The former appears rather low, some-
what truncated at the ends, with rather stout, irregular rib-striae,
except near the side-ends, which are smooth. The radula (PI. VIII,
f. E) has 63 transverse rows of 25 teeth ; 5 laterals, the fifth though,
having a small plate; its ectodont is simple in most, slightly two-
pointed in a few teeth. The first marginal (sixth tooth) is some-
what difl^erent from the following : the plate is distinctly visible
behind the "reflection," the latter markedly tapering from the
proximal end ; the mesodont comparatively large, the others 2-3,
small. In the following marginals the cusps are comparatively
small, about 6, the mesodont little exceeding the others, and only in
the 2-3 first teeth ; the last ones are very short and with very small
cusps.

There is some variation in the configuration of the shell as has
already been pointed out. Some specimens from Hamilton, Nevada,
in the Nat. Mus. Coll., have a distinct though not strong lip.

13. V. tenuilabris, A. Braun.

//e/. teimilahris. Vers. D. Naturf., Main, 1843, p. 14.3.

Hel. tenuilabns .Sandberger, Conch, d. Vorw. p. 891, T. 36, f. 14.

Hil. tenuilabris Woterlund, Fauna, I, p. 15.

" Shell with umbilicus open, and rapidly widening at the aper-
ture, depressed convex, with prominent, almost papilliform apex,
with fine and acute, crowded ribs, grayish horn-colored ; whorls 4-
4i, somewhat convex, the last somewhat expanding in front, grad-

274 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

ually deep descending ; suture rather impressed ; aperture very
oblique,little crescentic, transversely oval, rounded with the margins
much approximate; peristome widened [everted], thinly lipped,
yellowish horn-colored, inferior margin reflexed. Size 3 : 2f-2
mm.

(Siberia : Jarzowa, Selo at 60° 10', and AVerschininski 68° 55' ;
fossil in southern Germany.)" Translated from Westerlund, Fauna.

I have seen no recent Asiatic specimens. From Europe there is
a fossil from Kroellwitz, near Halle on the Saale, Saxony. Ten speci-
mens before me, obtained from two different parties under the name
of Hel. temdlahris A. Br., are nearly alike except for slight
differences in size, represented in Man. Conch., PI. 33, fig. 30-33.
This is a shell probably well-known among European conchologists,
but there are some characters which do not agree with the above des-
cription. They are in good condition, appearing remarkably fresh
for fossils, more or less translucent, and in most the epiconch is pre-
served. The surface is rather finely striate, but not acutely ribbed.
There is also no trace of a difference in coloration of the apertural
part and the rest of the shell ; this would, of course, be of little
importance if the shells are weathered and opaque, but in the state
of preservation they present, it is significant. The whole shell is
equally colorless, and must have been glassy transparent when fresh.
There is also no trace of a lip. The size is somewhat larger : greater
diam. 3-1-3-3, lesser 2-4-2-6, alt. I'T mm.

From all this it is evident that the Kroellwitz shell can not be
identical with temdlahris as described. It would be hasty to
take it for a different species before authentic specimens can be
compared. We may eventually propose for the fossil the varietal
name saxoniana. The last whorl is very distinctly ascending before
it descends to the aperture, as shown in Man. Conch., PI. 33, fig. 33 ;
this is also seen from above (fig. 30). Very probably T''. tenuilabris
presents the same character; apex almost papilliform, which
becomes apparent at once if we compare fig. 32. But this, as has
been pointed out, appears to be a characteristic, not of a single spe-
cies, but of a whole group. From its size, color and the ribbed
surface we may conclude that V. temdlahris is related to F. cyclo-
phorella.

It has been noted above that I received another form under the
name of T". tenuilahris, from Germany. This is of quite a different
type (see under V. declivis p. 257).

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 275

14. V. mionecton Boettger.

Hel. adda West. var. mionecton Bttg , Zool. Jahrb. IV, 1SS9, T. 27, f. 11.
Hcl. (cmdlabris var. mionecton (Bit";.,), West. Fauna, I. Sup], p. 120.
Vallonia mionecton Bttg, cit. in Nachr. Bl. D. Mai. Ges. 1892, p. 125 (O.
Rosen.)

"Smaller, more depressed, almost regularly, very finely rib-
striate ; whorls only 3, the last, as also the upper margin of the
peristome, somewhat angular above; size 21-2} : \\ mm. (Trans-
Caucasia, on th6 summit of the Agh-dagh in the Kopet-dagh, at 9-
10,000 feet). Dr. Boettger ranges this form under ray adela, but
the excellent figures show the last whorl much widened in front,
deep descending above, margins much approximate, almost con-
nected, etc." From Westerlund, Fauna, /. c. translated.

In Baron O. Rosen's article, evidently influenced by Dr. O.
Boettger, V. viionecton is treated as a species, and published.

v. mionecton var. schamhalensis Rosen.

Differs from the type in the shell being smooth [jjo/ito] not rib-
striate. Schamhala, Prov. Chorassan, Persia.

I have seen no specimens of either the type or variety.

15. v. ladaoensis Nevill.

Scient. Res. of the Sec. Yarkand Miss., Moll., p. 4 — Mts. Centralasiat. Moll.,
1882, p. 3, T. 3, f. 3.— Westerlund, Fauna, I, p. 15.

" Shell widely umbilicated, depressed, with little elevated spire,
densely and finely ribbed (ribs sometimes almost obsolete), grayish
white ; whorls Si, somewhat convex, the last rounded, descending
in front ; aperture very oblique, transversely pear-shaped, peristome
everted (" reflexed "), rather thin, with margins much approximate,
inferior margin more curved. Size 8j : 1} m. (Central Asia, near
Iskardo in Tibet)." Descr. from Westerlund, I. c. translated.

V. ladacensis var. (?) asiatica Nevill.

/Je/. losfata var. asiatica Nevill, /. c. '

Vail, ladacensis var. asiatica Nevill, Reinhard, iiber die von den Herren Gebr.
Krause aufihrer Reise gesammelten Pupa-, Hyalina-und Vallonia- Arten; Sitzungs-
ber. der Ges. Naturf. Freunde, Berlin, 1883, p. 42.

Keinhard says {I. c.) that on Pyramid Island, Alaska, a Vallonia
has been collected by MM. Krause which is identical with asiatica,
except for its somewhat smaller size. He states that the latter
comes nearer ladacensis than costata, under which it has been
ranged by the author. Mr. Pilsbry believes that the Alaska form
is not the same as the Asiatic.

276 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

I have seen no specimens of either the type or the variety, which
also has been regarded as a species, and am unable to judge about
them.-

KEY TO SPECIES OF YALLONIA.

It is necessarily difficult to give a synopsis of the species of Val-
lonia based on the shell alone. The characters are quite interwoven
among the groups and species, and several attempts to found natural
groups upon one, or even a few prominent features proved to be
failures. Yet there are such natural groups, though not well-
defined, and the following table may serve to characterize them
and the subordinate groups, at the same time affording a means of
identifying specimens, definitely or approximately, without going
over all the descriptions.

Group I (of pidchella). Aperture crescentic, forming | to | of
a circle (not transversely elongated), with ends of margin distant,
little or moderately inclined and oblique ; suture not markedly
descending to the aperture or not more so than the last whorl ; shell
of medium size; surface rarely or never ribbed ; nucleus, as a rule,
smooth (?).'^°

A. Last whorl not, or scarcely descending

1. Peristome with a strong white lip,

a. Peristome decidedly everted ; shell and umbilicus rather
symmetrical ; surface finely striate pulchella.

aa. Peristome scarcely everted ; shell and umbilicus elongate,
surface smooth or very finely striate ; spire small and low

excentrica.

2. Peristome without a lip, little everted ; whorls 4-4j diam. 2*5-
3 mm. adela.

B. Last whorl gradually and steadily descending in toto, peristome
not everted ; lip thin or wanting

1. Surface microscopically striate, appearing almost smooth ; lip
thin or wanting dedivis.

2. Surface with fine membranous ribs, peristome straight and
thin, without a lip pollinensis.

Group II (of costata). Aperture almost circular or transversely
elongate, with margins approximate ; peristome distinctly everted,
with a white lip; last whorl moderately or not descending in front,
suture more descending, surface (as a rule) with distinct ribs or rib-
strise.

^^ In aiMa a.nd />o//inc'iisis the nucleub is unknown.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 277

A. Aperture rather circular, surface with membranous ribs (rarely
smooth, with fine strite in place of ribs)

1. Of medium size or small, pale or reddish horn colored.

a. Of medium size (average 2'5 mm.) last whorl usually a little
descending in front costata.

aa. Small (2 mm. or less), back of last whorl not descending.

parvula.

2. Rather large (2*7 mm.) whitish ; riblets membranous, very fine
and crowded albida.

B. Aperture transversely elongate ; superior margin much less curved
than inferior.

1, Rather small (2"3 mm.) and thin shelled, with fine membranous
ribs, light grayish, transparent ; lip moderate tenera.

2. Rather stout (diam. 2*6 mm.), with ribs on the shell without
membranous appendages ; lip strong, white gracilicoda.
a. Last whorl not descending ; umbilicus very wide ; diam. 2

mm.; otherwise like group III, surface with membranous
ribs patens.

Group III (of cyclophorella). Aperture transversely elongate,
elliptic or pear-shaped, inferior margin more curved, but not angu-
lar; last whorl descending in toto after ascending previously ; peris-
tome moderately everted, Avithout a lip (as a rule).

A. Small, diam. 2'0 mm. or less; hof^n colored; umbilicus very
wide, perspective, surface with membranous ribs, peristome con-
tinuous perspectiva.

B. Larger, with very fine crowded ribs, or almost smooth ; peris-
tome not continuous.

1. Diam. 2'4-2'5 mm.; whorls 3; very finely rib-striate

ynionedon.

2. Diam. 2-6-3-3 mm; whorls 3]-4.

a, Diam. 2"6-2'8 ; surface with fine, somewhat irregular,
crowded membranous ribs ; color grayish-white to grayish-
horn (rarely with a thin white lip) cyclo])horeUa.
aa. diam. 3'0 or more ; surface finely ribbed

b. spire rather elevated ; diam. 3 mm. tenuUabris.

bb. spire little elevated ; diam. 3'5 mm. ladacensis.

TABLE OF geographical DISTRIBUTION.

1. V. piilchella Miill.: circumboreal (eastern Asia? Pacific
slope of North America?) Australia, Mauritius (introduced.?).

2. V. excentrica Sterki : all Europe ; eastern North America.

278 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

3. V. adela West. : Central Europe ; fossil in Sweden.
3a. T^. declivis Sterki : Central Europe.

4. V. pollinensis Paul. : Italy.

5. V. costata MiiW. : circumboreal ; Australia.

6. V. alhula Sterki : Northern North America.

7. V. jyccrvida Sterki : North America.

8. V. tenera^einh.: China, Japan.

9. V. patens ^einh.: China.

10. V. gracillcosta Hemh.: Rocky Mountains.

11. V. persjyediva Qterki: North America.

12. V. cyelophorella Anc. : Western North America.

13. T^. tenuilabris A. Br: Asia; fossil in Germany.

14. V. mionedon Bttg. : Western Asia.

15. T^. ladacensis Nev. : Central Asia; Alaska.

APPENDIX.

After this paper had been written, Mr. Wm. H. Dall kindly
forwarded me many additional specimens of Vallonia from the
National Museum. I would add the following notes upon them : —

V. pulchella Miill was largely represented from INIadeira and
Bermuda. The specimens from the latter locality are of a somewhat
peculiar form, being composed of only three comparatively large
whorls, the umbilicus is first quite narrow, rapidly widening for the
last J whorl.

V. excentrlea seems to be Avidely distributed in Great Britain,
being represented from diflerent places.

V. costata: The specimens assigned to this species reported from
Iowa, Nebraska, etc., must be referred to the following, the dis-
tribution of which in the United States should be further studied.

V. gracilicosta. There was among the National JNIuseum material
over a hundred specimens from drift on the Missouri River,
collected near Fort Berthold, Dak. They are all dead shells, yet
some of them are in good condition, of 2'5-2'8 mm. diam. They,
especially the smaller, somewhat resemble V. costata, while the
fresh examples of the two lots from Utah mentioned above are
decidedly different. As far as I am able to judge from the material
seen, the two species are distinct, constantly differing in a number
of points. In V. gracilicosta, also averaging larger, the whorls,
especially the last, are more depressed above, the aperture is more
inclined and oblique, much more curved below than above, and

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 279

somewhat angular at the periphery ; the shells show distinct ribs
and the membranous "ribs" upon them are quite small and fine,
while in costata the ribs are quite small ; the membranes are as a
rule, coarse. In the former, the ribs are also more numerous, and
more oblique, especially as seen from above. The lip, in fresh
specimens, is pure white, never so in costata, and of a somewhat
different form.

As said above, the specimens seen from the states west of the
Mississippi, must be referred to V. gracilicosta instead of to costata.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIII.

(Plates 32 and 33 referred to throughout the text will be found in
Pilsbry's continuation of Tryon's Manual of Conchology (2), VIII.

Fig. A-F Radula, enlarged about 900 diam. The first laterals and
last marginals are always represented, so that the last
gives the number in the half transverse row.

Fig. A. Radula of V. pulchella; 3 is nearly like 4 in B.

Fig. B. Radula of T'^ excentrica.

Fig. C. Radula of Y. costata.

Fig. D. Radula of T". alhula.

Fig. E. Radula of T'. cycloiihorella.

Fig. F. Radula of T'. perspectiva.

Fig. G. Radula of V. pulchella, the central and first lateral in the
first (anterior) transverse rows, with cusps worn off.

Fig. H. Jaw of V. pulchella as seen under moderate enlargement,
cutting-edge below, as in all figs: scale about 150 : 1.

Fig. I. The same, another specimen, enlarged nearly 300 diam. ;
a b the posterior plate, extending backward into the tena-
culum membrane 1 1.

Fig. K. The same, another specimen, as seen in profile.

Fig. L. The same, median section (partially diagrammatic).

Fig. M. Jaw of V. e.vcentrica.

Fig. N. Jaw of V. costata.

Fig. 0. Jaw of V. alhula, extended.

Fig. P. Central tooth of the radula (of V. parvula), half profile
view.

Fig. R. One-half jaw of V. parvula, seen obliquely from above.

280 proceedings of the academy of [1898.

June 6.

Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.

Twenty-four persons present.

A paper entitled "Xotes on the Physical Geography of Texas,"
by Ralph S. Tarr, was presented for publication.

The paper entitled "New and little known Paleozoic and Jurassic
Fishes," by Edw. D. Cope, was ordered to be printed in the Journal.

June 13.
Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.

Thirty-eight persons present.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication : —
" New North American Myxomycetes," by Geo. A. Rex, M. D.
" The Phylogeny of the Docoglossa," by AV. H. Dall

June 20.
Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.
Twenty-six persons present.

The death, May 29, 1893, of Prof. Carl Semper, a correspondent,
was announced.

June 27.
Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.

Thirty-six persons present.

The death on the 25th inst., of James J. Levick, M. D., a member,
was announced.

A paper entitled " Contributions to the Life-Histories of Plants,
No. 9," by Thomas Meehan, was presented for publication.

Note on the mechanism of the act of the expulsion of secretion from
the amd sac in Mephitis. — Dr. Harrison Allen invited attention
to the anatomy of the anal region in Mephitis. Jeffries Wyman
(Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. History, 1844) briefly recorded the muscular
nature of the act of propulsion of the secretion w'hich was assigned

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 281

to a muscular coat of the sac itself. He mentions a " band " which
extends from the tuberosity of the ischium to the sac, but does
not state that it is muscular in character. He probably thought it
was not muscular since the term ' band ' is not used as one synony-
mous with fascicle.

The point is one scarcely worth noting were it not for the fact that
Hudson in his work entitled " The Naturalist on the La Plata "
describes the act of expulsion of the fluid to be involuntary. It
would be possible for fluid to escape without control of the will, as
feces or urine might be voided involuntarily if the sac was endowed
with no musculature outside of its own walls. But it was held by
Dr. Allen as a conclusion drawn from his dissections that the semi-
tendinous muscle is an important factor in the act of expulsion, and
he believed it to be true that the demonstration proved, even if we
lacked evidence from the behavior of the animal at the time of
expelling the liquid, that the act is strictly voluntary. The semi-
tendinous muscle exhibits a constriction at its proximal third, from
which a muscular slip (as wide as the main muscle itself) arises.
The slip passes upward and backward to be inserted upon the sac ot
the gland.

The following was ordered to be printed : —

19

282 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

DESCRIPTIONS OF TWO NEW SPECIES OF NORTH AMERICAN
BOMBYCIDAE.

BY HERMAN STRECKER.

Cossus Ore.

$ Light grayish. Antennfe pectinated. Head and thorax
heavily clothed with coarse, dark brown and whitish scales ; abdo-
men with grayish hair, beneath somewhat paler.

Primaries. Ground color light gray but more or less suffused with
brownish especially on the basal two-thirds. The whole wing is
striated, mottled might almost be the better term, with fine intersect-
ing lines of various thickness which connect and interlace producing
a curious and notable effect ; there is a sort of submarginal jagged
band (but scarcely deserving to be so-called) formed by the lines
there being heavier ; there is also conspicuous mottling interior to the
middle of the wing produced by the same cause. The mottling, for
it is more mottled than striated, is unlike that of any other species
I know of whether native or foreign and will readily and strikingly
distinguish this from all others. Secondaries gray, reticulated with
fine lines, but with little of the tendency to semitranspareney that is
shown in some other species.

Expands 2] inches.

The 9 is like the $ but broader winged and expanding 3 inches.
The antennae but very slightly pectinated. This is a true Cossus
nearer to the European ligniperda which it more resembles, except
in the style of mottling of the wings, than any species occurring in
this country.

Hab. State of Washington ; captured by Prof. O. B. Johnson
from whom I received it.

Hepialus Los.

Head and body unicolorous pale smoky gray, tarsi pinkish.

Primaries same color as head and body with four dark grayish-
brown somewhat oval almost connected spots extending from costa
at base obliquely to the inner margin about two-thirds the distance
from the base, a small silver spot or dot is the second of these from
the costa. On the inner margin another not so conspicuous spot, on
the costa two spots or marks, one at the middle and the other interior
to it, beyond the first of these, commencing at the costa, an irregular

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 283

band which extends inward half way between the costa and interior
margin. A large subapical patch only partially separated from the
broad exterior marginal baud by a broken irregular patch of the
paler gi'ound color, this marginal baud encloses a paler semi-band
on the inner half, and a row of pale lunate spots on the margin
which are largest at the anal angle and become smaller and more
indistinct the nearer they approach the apex. All the dark spots,
etc.. are margined with a lighter color. In the centre of the sub-
apical patch is a small rouud silver dot, on the marginal band inte-
rior to the latter two very small silver marks.

Secondaries almost uniform smoky gray, darker toward apex near
which, touching outwardly on the costa, is a pale elongate mark. A
row of indistinct lunules at exterior margin.

Expands nearly 4 inches. Taken near Bangor, Maine.

This differs from other known North American species which I
here diagnose.

Hepialus argenteomaculatus Harris, Cat. Ins. Mass., p. 72, 1864.

A pale olivaceous species with darker bands, etc., inclining in part
to a golden tinge, occurring from Maine to Wisconsin, and in
Canada.
H. argentata Pack., Proc. Ent. Soc. Phil. Ill, p. .392, IS64.

I know only by the description which leaves little doubt but that
it was founded on a dark example of the preceding.
H. quadriguttatus Grote, 1. c, p. 73, t. 1, f. 6, 1864.

The large yellowish salmon colored species found in Maine and New
Hampshire. In Can. Ent., Vol. XXV, p. 124, 1893, it has been claimed
that this insect was never really described and that Quadrigut-
tatus is synonymical with argenteomaculatus. On this assumption it
was there described as argent, var. semiaiiratus n. v. but on looking
carefull}' at Grote's description it will be seen that it fits the salmon
colored species at least as well as the other and his figure undoubtedly
represents that one. His description says plainly "Posterior
wings entirely pale salmon color " etc. " Abdomen pale salmon
color"; etc. " Under surface of both wings tinged with salmon
color." Now none of this applies to argenteomaculatus which has
grayish or pale ochraceous brown posterior wings and abdomen, and
whose under surface is also ochraceous or brown, varying in depth
of color in different examples but entirely destitute of any indica-
tion of the fleshy red tint kiiowu as salmon-color — from this it seems

284 PEOCEEDIXGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

easily to be seen that there are very insufficient if any grounds for
the sinking of Grote's name, or for making this, his species, a
var. of Harris', as any one will see by comparing a suite of the two
that they are very different in size and color and in markings, as
much as is the case with species of the same group in this interesting
family. I have received argenteomacidatus from Maine, Canada, New
York, Michigan, Illinois and Wisconsin. Quadrigtdtatus only from
White Mts. of Kew Hampshire and Maine. In the last named State
the two occur at same time and in same localities.

H. purpurascens Pack,, Bost. Jour. Nat, Hist., p. 598, 1863.

Unknown probably save from tbe type and description. I have
never seen the former, but from the description it must be a large
species (" expands 4'20 inches ") unique in appearance it being des-
cribed as " dark sable brown with irregular bands of silvery purple.
Head and body deep sable brown ", etc. It was " captured by
Mr, S. H. Scudder at the base of Mt. Washington " and is a 9 .

H. thule Str&ck,, Lep. Rhop, Het, p. 105. t, XII, f. 6, 1S75,

A large white species with but little of the usual ornamentation on
primaries and that little confined mostly to inner half of costal part.
The type was taken in a park in Montreal by the late Mr. F. B.
Caulfield of that city from whom I received it. Another was
taken later, I think near the same city, and a third one was captured
in Wisconsin. The remaining species of North American Hepialidse
of small size and, excepting auratns Grote, are inconspicuous insects
presenting little affinity in appearance to those here enumerated.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 285

THE PHYLOGENY OF THE DOCOGLOSSA.
BY W. H, DALL.

In his concluding fasciculi contributed to complete Troschel's
classical " Gebiss der Schnecken " Dr. Johannes Thiele dissents very
emphatically from some suggestions of mine in regard to the deriva-
tion of the true Limpets, made many years ago. At that time it
appeared to me that the Lepetidce might represent the stem, some-
what degenerated, from which the Doeoglossa were derived. While
I attach, even in the present state of our knowledge, comparatively
little importance to speculations of this kind, which can only be
placed on a firm footing by extended embryological researches, it
still seems to me that there is a solid basis for the hypothesis which
I then suggested.

There can be little doubt that the early type of Gastropod gill was
situated much as in Fissurella on the "back of the neck" behind
the head and that it was constituted of a stem with lateral lamellae.
Originally paired and symmetrical, by circumstances incident to
growth and torsion one gill of the pair has in most cases become
aborted, though its " smelling organ " frequently remains, as in the
limpets. There is also no doubt whatever that the Protolimpet was
derived from a form having a spiral shell. I have shown that Pi-o-
pilidlum by its dentition is closely allied to Lepeta. Now Propilid-
ium is said to have two gills but certainly has at least one, of the
type of Acmcea. It retains a spiral nucleus through life, though it
is partly cut off by a small septum which is never completed. Other
Lejietidce also show a spiral nucleus when very young, but it is cut
off completely and lost later. These other, mostly deep or cold water
forms, have lost their gills and eyes by degeneracy and the principal
teeth of the radula show a tendency to become cemented together,
while in Propilidium they are more or less isolated. Now in the
Acmceidce and Patellidce the nucleus is limpet-shaped from the
beginning; the uncinal teeth (well developed in Lepeta) are
degenerate and often lost in the Acmteas but appear again in the
Patellas, not, however with the individuality and completely chitin-
ous nature which is found in the corresponding teeth of Lepetidce.
We find therefore in Lepetidw the greatest number of archaic char-
acters (somewhat masked by degeneration of other organs) which

286 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

remain in any of the tbree groups, and whether most ancient or not,
so far as these characters go the Lepetidce are nearest to the Proto-
limpet.

In my work on the Blake Mollusks (II, p. 436) I said that Acmce-
idce, of all the groups of Docoglossa, is the most typical ; that is,
within the limits of that family are found assembled, sometimes in
one and the same animal, the greatest number of organs which taken
singly are characteristic of Docoglossa. This is strictly true, but Dr.
Thiele (Gebiss, p. 340, vol. II) has mistranslated me to the extent of
saying that I have regarded the Acmceidce as the most " primitive"
group, in opposition to my earlier views ; which is quite inaccurate.
I have in the Blake Gastropods (p. 436-7) shown why the Patellicke
may reasonably be regarded as derived from Acmceidce, the original
ctenidia having been wholly lost. The row of lamellae within the
mantle edge have taken up the branchial function and in some
species, as in Ancistomesus, become arborescent proliferations. The
branchial cordon is occasional in Acmceidce, I have seen it complete
in Scurria mesoleuca ; it is present but incomplete in the common
Lottia gigantea of California ; and even if Dr. Thiele was correct in
supposing that it was absent in Scurria scurra there would still be no
ground for his conclusion that its absence in the latter species indi-
cates a failure of the grounds upon which I united in one group, as
Proteobranchiata, the Acmandoe and Patellickr.

But there is excellent reason for believing Dr. Thiele to have been
misled by an exceptionally contracted specimen of Scurria scurra
and to be entirely wrong in his conclusion that the species is without
a branchial cordon. The latter is figured and described by Orbigny
from living specimens (Am. Mer., p. 478, pi. 64, figs. 11-14). I
have seen sketches by Couthouy made from life fully confirming
Orbigny, and lastly I have seen, but do not now remember where, an
alcoholic specimen which showed them clearly. Dr. Thiele's spec-
imen only appeared "etwas wulstig," somewhat puffed up, in the
place where the cordon should be, but there can be no doubt that
this puffing up simply represented the alcoholically contracted
laraellpe of the cordon, rendered indistinct by improper preparation.

Many of the minor details in which Dr. Thiele's observations
differ from mine may be reasonably explained by the variation which
is exhibited by individuals; and my chief criticism upon what is, in
the main, a praiseworthy and useful work is that Dr. Thiele has
failed to take account of this factor, which more extensive experience

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 287

with the radula of a single species would have undoubtedly revealed
to him. The result has been, not only has he estimated too highly
the constancy of minor details of the radula in single species, but he
has made an excessive number of so-called " generic " distinctions,
the names of which in many cases will simply enlarge our catalogues
of synonyms.

In conclusion I may point out that the relations of the radula in
Lepetella to that of Lepeta, etc., offer additional reasons for thinking
that the Lepetidce are of the limpets those most nearly allied to nor-
mal or more usual types of gastropods, and also that the similarity of
the shell of the silurian Tryblidium to that of some recent limpets
( Olana, etc.) by no means authorizes us to conclude that the soft parts
of Tryblidium were also similar to those of recent Patellidce. Indeed,
when the almost incalculable length of time intervening between our
days and the Silurian is considered, together with the similarity of
recent limpet shells which are secreted by widely different animals, it
is almost inconceivable that the Silurian form should have any closely
allied recent representative. The rhythmical manner in which the
adductor scars of Tryblidium are arranged in pairs, clearh" indicates
a peculiar disposition of the organs which might, indeed, have
paralleled in some particulars the organization of some of the Chitons
of that ancient time.

For the rest, many of the ancient limpets are represented by shells
which might well have belonged to Lepeta or Acmcea, yet of the
relations of which, as in the case of many recent limpets, we are not
permitted to arrive at any dogmatic opinion for want of the requisite
data, a deficiency which, in the case of the fossils, must remain for-
ever unsupplied.

288 proceedings of the academy of [1893.

July 4.
Kev. Henry C. McCook, D. D., Vice-Presideut, in the chair.
Five persons present.

July' 11.
Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.
Nineteen persons present.

July 18.
George H. Horn, M. D., in the chair.
Ten persons present.

July 25.
George H. Horn, M. D., in the chair.
Thirteen persons present.
Miss Maria Blanchard, Miss Harriet Blanchard and Miss Anna
Blauchard were elected members.

Dr. O. Boettger of Frankfurt a. M., Germany, Dr. H. von
Ihering of Rio Grande do Sul, Brazil, and Charles Hedley of
Sydney, N. S. W., were elected Correspondents.
The following was ordered to be printed : —

1893.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 289

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE LIFE HISTORIES OF PLANTS, NO. 9.

BY THOMAS MEEHAK.

POPULUS TEEMULOIDES. — A MONQXIOUS CASE.

Noting on a young tree of Populus tremuloides on my grounds,
which I had supposed to be a male, that a few of the catkins were
still green when the most of them were faded, I was led to exam-
ine and found they were female. There were thirteen of these
female catkins, and one hundred and fifty-one males. Seven of the
pistillate aments had about one-third of the scales bearing stamens
only, and about two-thirds Avith pistils only. Two were solidly pis-
tillate with but a few stamen-bearing scales at the base. One had
staminate scales for about one-third of its length from the base, the
remaining two-thirds of the catkin being uniformly pistillate; while
one was almost wholly male, there being but three female scales
among the whole number. Two were purely pistillate, no trace of
a staminate scale could be observed. The tree was seven years old,
and growing freely, having made a growth of about three feet each
year, for three years past. Some of these bisexual aments will be
preserved in the herbarium of the Academy of Natural Sciences of
Philadelphia. Bisexual scales were sought for but did not appear
to exist.

Changes of sexual characters in dioecious plants are not uncom-
mon, but have probably not been recorded before in connection
with Salicaceous plants. The author has a large number of species
of willow growing on his grounds. All these were subsequently
examined carefully, but no similar case of sexual change was found
among them.

Extra-Axillary Branching in Mertensia maritima.

Of this plant, as " Steenhammera maritima (R.')," Babington,
in his " Manual of the British Flora," remarks that in habit, " it is
sui-generis." I know of no attempt to explain the singularity. A

^It may have been noted that in these biological papers, the name of the
author of the species is seldom quoted. This omission is intentional though con-
trary to modern custom. In a treatise on systematic botany, such quotations are
certainly in full place. But in public addresses or in everyday language, no one
would think for a moment of repeating an author's name every time a plant was
referred to, and there seems no reason why a scientific treatise when written in a
conversational way, should not follow conversaiional rules.

290 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

study of the plant at Seal Harbor, Maine, on July 9th seemed to
make its peculiarity clear.

It may first be noted that when a leaf starts from its parent stem
we may look for a bud in the axis. If a leaf be present without an
axillary bud, we conclude that there has been or ought to have
been one, and look for some reason for the seemingly abnormal con-
dition.

As already noted by the author, the common peduncle opposite
to a leaf in Boraginaceous and other plants, means simply that the
arrested axis has been pushed aside by the strongly developed
growth of the axillary bud, which then assumes the leadership until
"history repeats itself,'' and it also is pushed aside to make way for
a new leader. But Mertenski maritima does not seem to follow this
rule, and seems wholly exceptional. Everything proceeds for
awhile in the usual way. The leaves are all alternate as a well-
behaved Boraginaceous plant should be. But when in the flower-
ing stage there are a pair of opposite leaves, and at the same node,
three branches — one bearing flowers, and the other two continuing
each an axial growth. How is it possible that three axial growths
should have been developed from only a pair of leaves ?

When these leaves are carefully examined, however, the axillary
buds are found to be still there. They have not followed the Bor-
aginaceous habit of pushing at once into growth, and, assuming
leadership, pushing the parent shoot aside. The pair of leaves are
not exactly opposite, and the branch bearing the flowers seems to
occupy a space of its own on the stem, between the pair of leaves.

DicoTOMOus Branching in Spergularia media.

Noting that every flower was abundantly fertile, and suspecting
from this fact self-fertilization, investigation followed and it was
found that the pollen is shed just at the time of opening, thoroughly
covering the stigmas, and absolutely insuring self-fertilization.

Comparing the inflorescence with some Boraginaceae nearby,
along the coast at Seal Harbor, an interesting lesson is taught as to
how the dichotomous arrangement is produced from the opposite
leaved, and the extra-axillary from the alternate leaved character,
respectively. In Spergularia media, when the arrestation of axial
growth occurs previous to the advent of the floral condition, the
next pair of axillary buds start at once into growth and we
thus have two actual centers of axillary growth, the arrested

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 291

flower branch remaining in the dichotomous fork. In Boragina-
eece with its alternate leaved system, there is but a single bud to
push into growth and become the main axis, which it does, push-
ing the arrested flowering branch wholly to one side, and which, in
technical language becomes extra-axillary.

Missing Virticel in Glaux maritima.

Examining on July 14th at Seal Harbor some specimens of
Glaux maritima, commenting on the well known and remarkable
alternation of the stamens with the lobes of the calyx, a friend
remarked that this arrangement would necessitate the lobes of the
corolla being opposite the lobes of the calyx if the flowers had not
been apetalous, which would be an anomaly in floral structure.
But as the stamens in Primulacece are opposite the lobes of the
corolla, we might naturally look for the same phenomenon in Glaux
had the corolla been developed. Yet there is one point in this con-
nection worth noting. In Sainolus and some allied genera there are
imperfect anthers in between the lobes of the corolla, and the
opposite stamens are therefore easily accounted for when we under-
stand that a series between them and the corolla has been sup-
pressed. The position of the stamens alternate with the sepals in
Glaux, again proves the existence of two series, as the suppression
of both would bring the stamens just where they are between the lobes
of the calyx. Another point is that the ease with which the outer
series of stamens, united with the corolla in Primulacece generally,
has been suppressed, causes no surprise when we see the corolla
itself wholly suppi'essed in Glaux.

The tendency to suppression of parts and general irregularity is
particularly striking in this genus. Though I examined many
flowers of this plant on the north Pacific coast, I did not note any
that were not 5-lobed and 5-stamened. Fully one-fourth of the
flowers at Seal Harbor were tetramerous.

The irregularity of the leaves is well known — opposite until the
flowering stage is reached, when they become alternate and fre-
quently three-whorled.

Every flower is fertile ; but all the flowers I could examine were
expanded, and aflbrded no opportunity to observe the condition of
affairs before opening.

Morphology is much aided by a study of the acceleration and
arrestation of parts in erratic plants like these, and I regretted

292 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

that my opportunities for further observations on this plant were
so limited. It affords a promising field for others more fortunate.

The Relation between Rhythmic Growth and Variety
IN Citrus Fruits.

The recognition that growth is rhythmic, and not one continuous
act, affords a ready explanation of many phenomena otherwise
inexplicable ; and this is well illustrated by a comparison of vari-
ous forms of fruit in the orange and other varieties of the citrus
tribe.

Occasionally an orange may be found wholly formed inside of
another orange, and more frequently an orange will be found pro-
jecting from the apex of another — that is, but partially enclosed —
while in another which has been propagated as a distinct variety
and called the Navel orange, a very small attempt to form another
fruit at the apex is generally seen giving the navel or umbilical
appearance from which the variety derives its name.

The morphological unity of the foliaceous and floral parts of a
plant being conceded, we conceive of the axis as being arrested in
its longitudinal development when a flower is being formed. In
most oranges we find the axis still extending a considerable distance
into the fruit, but varying very much in consistency in different
varieties. Sometimes it is quite woody, in others it is found cellu-
lar and so soft that it can be compressed between finger and thumb ;
while in some — notably in a variety known as the Tangerine — there is
rarely but a few lines of axis, usually no axis at all.

The rhythmic waves of growth are not all of equal measure.
As in jumping a ditch, a boy may now rest exactly where he lands,
and now have to continue several paces before final rest, so does the
wave force in growth vary in intensity. In the process of the
metamorphosis of a branch with its various nodes into a flower and
finally a fruit, the expenditure of force in the arrestation of axial
growth and the development of the appendages to petals, stamens
and carpels is exactly meted to the results — now it is short of the
mark, and the axis starts under another rhythmic movement
the next time to be arrested for good and all.

It is this succession of growth rhythms that produces the double
fruit oranges, but the phenomenon is not confined to the citrus
tribe. In the formation of cones in the coniferous family the
branch in its axial growth is usually w'holly suppressed ; but occa-

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 293

sionally, especially in the Larch where the tree is young and in a
very vigorous condition, the growth-wave not being wholly
exhausted, will make another venture, and a weak shoot from the
apex of the cone results. In Rosacepe the same phenomena are by
no means uncommon. One rose blossom will push out from the
center of another, and a small branch bearing a miniature pear has
been known to spring from the crown of a pear of normal char-
acter beneath it.

The main purpose of this paper is to note the remarkable origin
of the variety of orange known as the Tangerine, and this by rea-
son of a singular variation in the character of the force in the
rhythmic wave. In the primary wave, for some reason yet obscure,
it is remarkably weak, and sends the greater part of its effort into the
secondary one. What is usually the small orange within the larger
in the double orange, or the minute orange in the apex of the navel
variety, becomes the leading and only original fruit !

Once in a while nature furnishes the absolute proof of this mor-
phological conception. It is not rare to have specimens of Tanger-
ines in which are from five to ten abortive carpels at the base
of the fruit. In these cases the well defined axis, usual in the com-
mon orange, runs through the lower abortion, to be suddenly and
finally suppressed when the upper cycle of organs takes its turn to
become fruit. The Tangerine has always a flattish or oblate form.
The utter suppression of the axis at the point of its formation nat-
urally favoring a lateral growth.

The key herewith furnished, will doubtless disclose to us the
secret of the many forms which the citrus tribe often assumes. The
length of the lemon as compared with the more globular orange is
evidently due to a more rapid advance of the growth wave. This
naturally leads to a more elongated form. This hypothesis is sup-
ported by examining a half section of the lemon taken longitudi-
nally. The axis is much more apparent and more woody than in the
orange. It will be found to have come to a rest at the apex of the
oval, starting again as from a regular node on the branch, to form
a new and weak axis through the nipple which forms such a distin-
guishing mark of the lemon as compared with the orange. The
nipple is possibly the result of the secondary rhythmic growth,
which in the Tangerine orange was able to advance to a perfect
fruit. From the limited opportunities of examining large quanti-
ties of lemons from seedling trees, I have not been able to demon-

294 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

strate this as an actual fact as in the case of the orange, but I feel
sure some one may meet with an abnormal specimen which will
prove the point.

The varying intensity of rhythmic waves of growth may come
to be regarded as a leading factor in the development of form.
These waves certainly have to do with the varying sexual characters
of trees, as I have shown in other papers. The fact brings us near to
a certain knowledge of the origin of form, though we have still to
learn what causes the variations in the intensity of these waves.
Even in these different forms of citrus fruits the varying forces
affect fertility. In the case of the Tangerine orange, in which the
secondary rhythm has been accelerated to such an extent as to
cause abortion in the whole of the lower carpellary system, the
seeds necessarily are not formed. In the case of the Navel, where
the secondary wave has only drawn part of the force from the lower,
it usually results in so much weakening of the latter's power that
few or no seeds result. The Navel is usually a seedless fruit.

Morphology of the Stipule in Comarum palustre.

I have claimed that when axial growth is arrested to form the
inflorescence, a suppression of leaf-blade, and a corresponding
development of stipule or dilated petiole usually occurs in the mor-
phological conception of a flower. In other words, instead of pet-
als and sepals being metamorphosed leaves, they are more critically
metamorphosed stipules.

This is well illustrated in Comarum palustre. Examining a
branch we find only a stipule at the lowermost node. Ultimately a
leaf with two pairs of leaflets and one odd one. Then growth
becomes suppressed as the flowering stage approaches. The next
node has the leaf trifoliate, the next with only a single terminal
leaflet, the next with the stipule only. It is seen that all the next
nodes have stipules only and the sepals are but stipules. I have
before noted that Eosacea^. afford the best illustration of the fact
that petals are but enlarged and modified stipules, and not trans-
formed " leaves" as generally understood.

Fertilization of Malva rotundifolia.

Prof. Herman Mueller, in his work on cross-fertilization of
flowers, indicates that Maha rotundifolia invariably fertilizes itself
in case insects should not visit the flower in its earliest stages.
Unless, as I think may be the case, flowers behave differently in

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 295

one stage of growth, or at one season, from another, I must con-
clude that it is fertilized before expansion, and that insects in no
way assist the operation.

Early in October I noticed a plant, five feet in diameter, that
had evidently been blooming for months previously. It had many
hundreds of capsules, and there were no indications that a single
flower had failed to be fertile. With my own proposition before me
that perfect fertility indicates close fertilization, I was led to place
the plant under close observation many times a day for a week.

During all this time I did not notice a single insect visitor.
Watching the plant a few times by night, no nocturnal visitors were
seen. At seasons more pregnant with insect life the plant would no
doubt be visited, for no flower is slighted in case of necessity by
honey or pollen gatherers. There were none at this time, but the
seeding Avas still going on, and continued till the first severe frost in
December. It can be surely stated as a matter of fact, that there
were no insect visitors during the last half of the season, and yet
the plant was abundantly and unfailingly fertile.

An interesting result of my close observation was the discovery
of three great periods of rest and of growth-resumption during anthe-
sis. In the early morning of one day is seen the folded pink corolla
in the position of a small cone peeping through the green calyx.
Commencing watch at this stage, growth progresses till about noon,
when there is a rest till the next morning ; again there would be the
same period of advance to rest, and the third day again an advance,
followed by the withering of the floral organs.

Returning to the first period, the unopened bud, dissected at 8
A. M., showed no indications of pollen having been discharged.
By 10 A. M., the flowers were still tightly closed, but the anther
sacs had become ruptured, and the pretty purple styles, nestling in
the center of the mass of stamens, were completely covered by pol-
len. By 11 A. M,, the corolla had so far untwisted that a slight
glance of the stamens and styles could be had in some flowers. By
12, noon, the corolla had taken on a narrow campanulate form, as
wide at the bottom as at the top. By 1 P. M., it had again closed,
so that the flower was expanded but about an hour only during the
whole i^eriod of its existence. If it were desirable, therefore, for
any insect to aid it in fertilization it would have but an hour at
noon in which to work ; but as we have already seen, the pollen had
reached the stigmas a short time before.

296 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

From this time until near noon the next day, everything seems
absolutely at rest; but at 11 A. M., the corolla again expands so as
to be widely campanulate, and the pistils are found advancing
beyond the line of the anther cells, carrying along with them the
comparatively large pollen grains that had been deposited the day
before. By 1 P. M., the corolla has again closed, drawing up and
closely pressing the pistils and the anther cells together. It is at
this period of the observations that the most beautiful phenomenon
of the whole may be observed. Along the inner face of the style
from apex to base is a single line of minute hairs. The pollen
grains attach themselves to these hairs and are thus arranged in a
single line like bright pearls along a curved silken thread. Dr.
Ida A. Keller, who has kindly repeated some of the observations I
here record, finds indications of pollen tubes entering the pistils
through the papillse or hairs.

On the third day, toward noon, though the petals remain closed,
the pistils will be found withering, and the carpels enlarging, thus
indicating that fertilization has been accomplished.

In the Proceedings of the Academy, 1889, page 55, in a paper
entitled " On Secund Inflorescence," I have shown that in a number
of flowers with a convolute aestivation, the spiral line in closing is
directly the reverse of that followed in the opening. A surprising
fact was noted in connection with this Malva that in closing, the
twist might be either from left to right or right to left — both lines
existing on the same plant. All attempts to form an hypothesis
accounting for this remarkable behavior failed.

One fact strongly developed by these observations is that fertili-
zation may be accomplished before the pistils have completed their
gi'owth, thus confirming the observation of Dr. Ida A. Keller in her
paper on Monarda fistulosa in the Proceedings of the Academy,
1892, p. 452.

The Peduncle in Streptopus amplexifolius.

The point I have strongly presented in connection with " extra-
axillary " branches, that these are but arrested leaders which have
been supplanted in leadership by the strong growth of the axillary
bud, is remarkably well illustrated in StrejJtopus amplexifolins. Dr.
Asa Gray says of it " it has small (extra) axillary flowers, either
solitary or in pairs, on slender thread-like peduncles, which are
abruptly bent or contorted near the middle." And further, " the
peduncles, as in the next, are opposite the leaves, rather than truly

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 297

axillary, and are bent round the clasping base beneath them."
From what I have already recorded there will be no difficulty in
perceiving that the " peduncle " is but a depauperate and displaced
central axis, but the great disparity in the strength of the displaced
and succeeding axes is very remarkable. The peduncle itself goes
through the same metamorphosis. It is an arrested branch, and at
the point where it is " abruptly bent or contorted near the middle,"
there would, under more vigorous vegetative conditions, be a node.

With a good lens we can see a minute bract, with an axillary
bud, which latter seems now to terminate the straight or lower por-
tion of the peduncle, and which bud in its develoi)ment seems to
have pressed or bent over the original axis, which has become a
pedicel bearing the flower.

The peduncle, by a peculiar twist, turns around the stem, and
gives the appearance of being axillary instead of truly "extra"
axillary. This arises from the plant being an incipient twiner ;.
some of its allies having actually achieved this habit. The midrib
of the leaf curves more than 30° from a sti-aight line, showing the
strong convolutionary character of the plant.

During my short stay at Seal Harbor I had no opportunity to
observe as closely as desirable ; but it seems certain that the ovarium,,
though tlyee-celled, has its walls made up of six original leaves.
The series of three outer leaves have become so thoroughly blended
with the three inner ones, that no one would suspect their existence,
except by watching the young fruit through the several stages of
ripening. The three outer ones color before the three inner ones.
At this stage their outlines are distinctly seen. At this time, also,
there is a slight tendency to a hexagonal form, which has been
noted in Trillium, though the hexapetal character seems not to have
been suggested.

The Anthesis of Brunella vulgaris.

Little new could be expected from a plant so common as Brunella
vulgaris, but noting at Seal Harbor, on July 18th, that every flower
was fertile, close fertilization was suspected.

Pulling off" at night-fall all expanded flowers, it was found the
next morning that all the flowers to expand that day were open
before 8 A. M. There is a total rest after this till a little before 8
A. M., the next morning. Opening a flower before its normal time
it was found that the anther cells were already ruptured, and one —

20

298 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

the lower lobe of tlie forked style — pressed into it, and covered with
pollen. A number of flowers were opened, all exhibiting the same
phenomenon. The branched filament, as is well known, bears an
anther cell on one fork only. At the time above noted the arms
diverge in nearly opposite directions ; but eventually the barren
one becomes nearly erect, which has led some authors to describe
the stamen bearing the anther on a lateral horn-like process.

The opening of the flowers is the work of the lower lip alone.
In the unexpanded bud it extends inward and under the upper lip,
and falls over, seeming to clasp the anthers. When the opening
time arrives this lower lip is withdrawn till it presents a right angle
with the upper lip, and finally falling back till it reaches the tube
of the corolla. Soon after mid-day the style branches close — an
indication that fertilization has been accomplished. The style, how-
ever, continues to lengthen. The corolla only continues about 24
hours, as early the day following they drop out of the calyx tube.

A small species of bumble-bee, rather numerous, paid constant
visits to the flowers. Hypothetically one might reasonably regard
the flower as arranged for cross-fertilization by insect agency. The
branches of the style seem favorably situated to receive pollen from
the back of au insect visitor. As a matter of fact, however, none
of these visiting bees were seen touching the style branches in any
way, though I watched them closely for a long time. As the lobes
close at noon, there could be no benefit if they did touch them after
that. Insect aid could be given between 8 A. M., and noon. If in
any other part of the world they are of service they must be larger
than these bees were ; but as the flower certainly fertilizes before
opening at this season, in this place, it is not conceivable that the
hypothetical arrangements are theoretically correct.

The head of flowers is a contracted spike, and is composed of
numerous verticils in which there are three flowers to each axil.
The central flower of these three is always the first to open, and
hence the anthesis is centripital. Though this would thus seem to be
the general plan, strange to say, the first flower to bloom on a head
may be from any part — either near the apex or near the base.
They appear from any part without any regard to order or system.
No explanation of this disorderly blooming seemed satisfactory.

It has been a point with the author of these " Contributions " that
a leaf does not originate at the node from which it seems to spring,
but at some indefinite point on the axis below. In Brunella the

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 299

edges of the leaves are ciliate. The stems are bifariously hirsute.
No explanation of this seems to the author reasonable but that
this results from the meeting of the cilia on the edges of the narrow
bases of the foliar organs, and which, at the node above, expanded
into a laminal condition — a leaf blade.

Branching of Euphorbia hypericifolia and E. maculata.

There are some peculiarities in the branching of these two species
of Euphorbia difficult of explanation in each case, but very clear
when studied in comparison with each other. As a general princi-
ple in plants we look for an axillary bud at the base of every leaf,
or we can usually conceive some reason why the axillary bud has
not been developed. Taking a branch of Euphorbia hypericifolia
Ave find the leaves opposite, but one somewhat stronger than the
other. The main stems are somewhat flexuose. On the one side of
the main shoot an axillary bud has developed from the base of the
leaf into a weak lateral branch, but there seems to be no trace of
an axillary bud at the base of the leaf opposite. We ask, what has
become of the bud which should have been at the base of that leaf?

In E. maculata the branches are not flexuose. A straight stem
proceeds from the main branch, having many pairs of leaves at the
nodes. At the base of one of the leaves there is an axillary bud,
no bud at the base of the leaf opposite, which seems very closely
attached to the straight central axis or main stem.

Returning to E. hypericifolia we find, toward the end of llie sea-
son's branch, a very weak peduncle between the forks of the
branches, having at the apex a head of flowers. We now see that
this pedicel was the original main stem, and that what we have
before taken for main stems were the products of axillary buds in
cases where the main axes were wholly suppressed. With this total
suppression came the effort on the part of one of the axillary
branches to supply the loss, and this is the one which has given the
impression that the subtending leaf had no axillary bud. There
was a bud, and that bud pushed so strongly as to become a substi-
tute for the suppressed central stem. The weaker bud, axillary to
the weaker leaf, either continues as a bud or pushes into a weaker
axillary growth. It is, however, of sufficient strength to compete
somewhat with the opposite stem growth, which cannot, therefore,
become perfectly straight, and the result is, as we see, a necessarily
flexuose habit.

300 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Now reverting to E. maculata we find a much greater disparity
in the size of the opposite leaves, and necessarily in the size of the
strength of the axillary bud. The large leaf, which seems to have
DO axillary bud has really had one so strong in proportion to the
leaf opposite that it has pushed it wholly aside, has succeeded
in forming a perfectly straight stem. The straight stem in Euphor-
bia maculata, is really made up, therefore, of an axillary branch
which at each node has wholly taken the place of the main axis
which has become totally suppressed at each point.

As, however, the vegetative growth becomes more under the con-
trol of the reproductive force, the vigor of the side branches which
proceed from the axillary buds along the main stem is checked ; and
with this the axial growth develops sufficiently to form a peduncle
and flower-head as already noted, and these central axes bearing
the flowers get stronger and stronger, just in proportion to the
development of reproductive agencies.

We are taught by these illustrations the great lesson that the
power of an axillary bud to draw to itself nutrition at the expense
of the main axis and opposite axillary bud is the chief cause of the
varying characteristics of the branches. In the same plant it
causes a variation from a merely flexuose stem in the lower portion
to an almost perfectly forked condition finally — while it equally
accounts for a wholly different character of straight main stems in
an allied species.

The exact manner in which an axillary bud can achieve such a
power of nutrition as to entirely obliterate and supplant the main
axis, and how again that main axis can still again overthrow its
lateral competitor and advance sufficiently to become a flower-bear-
ing peduncle is yet a grave question which cannot be answered.
But a consideration of all the facts brings out the safe conclusion
that the achievement of greater power in some buds to advance
over others by drawing to themselves nutrition at their expense
is a powerful factor in the origin of form.

As every flower head produces seed, it is safe to assume
on my theory that the flowers self-j)ollinate. An examination
shows that this is the case. Long before the involucre unfolds the
staminate flowers have scattered their pollen over the pistils of the
female flower, thoroughly dusting them. The glands are gener-
ously nectariferous, larger and more productive of fluid in E. mac-
ulata than in E. liypericijolia. All effort to form a conception of

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 301

the function of this honeyed secretion has utterly failed. At no
time have I ever seen a solitary insect visit these flowers. The
beauty of the involucre can only be seen by a strong lens. While
the nectariferous glands are larger in E. maculata, E. hypericifolia
has the larger and the prettier involucre. The observations were
made during September and October in Germantown.

Dimorphic Forms of Lythrum Salicaria.

An extended notice of the several forms of flower in Lythrum
Salicaria occurs in Mr. Darwin's "Forms of Flowers," pp. 137-248.

My observations and deductions vary somewhat from those of
this eminent naturalist. I have noticed in my own general investiga-
tions that the behavior of plants is not always uniform at all times
and seasons. It is best to say that my investigations extended over
the four days of July 30, 31, and August 1, 2. The first three days
examination refers to a plant in my own garden — the last day to wild
plants half a mile away from my garden plant.

The plant at this date had been in bloom for probably a month,
but the upper portion of the central spike, and the upper portions
of the lateral branchlets, were still growing and blooming freely.
The first observation was that the lower half of the central spike
was barren and the upper portion was seeding, but indifferently.
The lateral branchlets had every flower fertile. I set myself to
discover the reason for this difference. I found the flowers to be all
of what Mr. Darwin called his long-styled kind. Mr. Darwin
found the long-styled kind fertile though growing by itself. The
point is confirmed in this case, and yet there remained to be disclosed
why so many of the earlier flowers were infertile. In a three days'
close watching of this plant I found no insect visitors except one
Lepidopter.

This seemed fond of the flowers, and numerous individuals of
the species were in constant attendance. I could not satisfy myself,
however, that the stigma was ever touched by it, and I suspected
some arrangement in the bud for self-fertilization. The style jDUshes
through the bud before the corollas expand and the glutinous
stigma is in receptive condition. On opening an uuexpanded bud from
which a style had thus protruded, it was found that none of the anther
cells had become ruptured. Neither Mr. Darwin nor anyone appears
to have opened an uuexpanded bud. The disposition of the style in
this condition is one of much interest. The ujiper portion represents

302 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

two coils of a spiral, and the whole pistil resembles in miniature a
ramrod when in use cleaning a gun. As soon as the stigma emerges
from the closed corolla, the coil straightens out in a very short time.

The flower seems to have taken a rest at this stage in all its
departments. At 9 A. M., the next day, an unopened bud of the
same age as the former, had still not ruptured the pollen sacs. It
was the same at 10, 11, and again at 12, noon. The unbroken
anthers on the short stamens, were do.uble the size of these on the
longer stamens, in this respect differing from the observations of
Mr. Darwin. At 2 P. M., the anther cells of the lower stamens
were polliniferous : up to 6.30 P. M. the upper anther cells were
entire. At 8 A. M., of Aug. 1, the upper series of anthers had
still closed cells. At 12 noon, of this day, five unexpanded flowers
with long exserted styles were examined. In three axes the anthers
of the short stamens had shriveled without ejecting pollen — in one,
two were pollen-bearing, while four had shriveled — in the remaining
one, the whole six Avere abundantly polliniferous.

The mass of wild plants is not extensive, but it furnished a good
bunch of specimens with long-styled flowers, and another bunch
with styles exserted only half the length of the calyx tube. None
with the very short styles figured by Mr. Darwin were growing in
this mass. It occurred to me to note the relative fertility of the
long and medium styled plants. Of the shorter styled, one branch-
let had seed vessels from 55 axils, with from 4-6 seed vessels in each
axil, and four others, 45, 48, 45 and 66, respectively. Of the
longer styled 57, 35, 45 and 44.

So far as comparative fertility is concerned there is no material
difference between the two classes.

It is clear to my mind that the flowers in these two classes do
not furnish each one its own pollen, nor do they receive much aid
from diurnal insects. Possibly nocturnal ones may assist, but if so,
no moth hair is Aasible on the stigmas, as there should be. As the
styles remain without withering for some days, showing that they
have not received pollen, the great probability is that the pollen is
in some way scattered from the upper flowers on the stigmas which
continue in a vital condition long enough to profit by it. Strong
vegetative vigor prevents seeding in the lower parts of the stronger
branches, even though the flowers were fertilized.

1893.] natural sciences of philadelphia. 303

Structure of Florets in Bidens bipinnata.

Watching closely, on August 28, the anthesis of Bidens bipin-
nata, precisely the same phenomena were observed as is recorded of
HeUopsis Icevis. The style pushes up the staminal tube, starting at
night-fall. During the next day the pollen is pressed through the
divisions of the incurved staminal appendages, the style branches
protrude the following nightfall, the staminal tube retires the next'
day, followed the following day by the retreating style.

In the arrangement of the floral parts there seems more definite-
ness than in many Compositse. Normally there are five outer
" involucral bracts " with foliaceous scales, — and these spread, some
time before the rest of the flowers open. But sometimes only three
of this verticil spread, in which case the other two remain erect
and are not distinguishable from the inner series of involucral
scales. Cutting away these five carefully we find no sign of an
axillary bud at the base of these bracts. Then we have another series
of five (seven in appearance, where the two lower bracts have become
" scales "), at the base of these five we find axillary buds. By
examining a number of heads, it is soon seen that these axillaiy
buds develop to florets. The buds develop equally in the axis of
each scale, when they rest, apparently for about a day, and growth
is resumed, when, strange to say, one leads off" in rapidity of
growth, outstripping the rest. Occasionally another will nearly equal
it, but two at least exhibit a very puny growth. These form the
ligulate rays, and in consequence of the irregularity noticed, there
are often only two fully formed ray florets, the others remaining
beneath the outer series of scales in an independent state. Inside
of this series, another series of five scales appear, the axillary buds
of which develop to fully formed disc florets. The next series of
five, however, seldom all perfect, — usually only two.

Taking the theoretical structure of the flower to be on the plan
of five, we look for indications of this numeral in the ovarium. I
have, however, never found traces of five awns. Four are usually
present; but one or two so weak that unless searched for, two only
might be supposed present. The weakest is at the base of the scale
and the next weakest opposite. The two stronger are in the lateral
positions fronting the scales, and give eventually the bidentate char-
acter to the akene. At times there are only three teeth. We may
probably assume, in the theoretical conception of the floret, that
five '' involucral scales " primarily formed the calyx which becom-

804 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

ing adnate with the ovarium formed the akene, but that one of
these became wholly absorbed before the final growth of the struc-
ture. The scales are the dilated bases of leaves, and the awns abor-
tive petioles or laminre. When but two awns remain, it is simply
the result of the total or partial suppression of three of the original
members of the five-leaved verticil.

Rhythmic Grow^th in Flowers of Heliopsis l.evis.

It must be well known to observers that the column of stamens
in many Compositee is drawn up far beyond the mouth of the floret
by the advancing pistil, and that subsequently it descends, and is
included in the floret. I believe I am the only one who has called
particular attention to this behavior in Compositre, though others
before me have noted a shrinking tendency in the filaments of
some Chicoracese, which has been attributed to an irritable habit.
Noting in a large mass of Heliopsis Icevis growing near my
house in German town that the elevation and depression of the
staminal column occurred at stated hours during the day, I started
on the 1 6th of August to devote observations several times a day
for a week to an examination of the behavior of the flowers.

The first observation was that of the hundreds of flower-heads
that had flowei'ed during the summer season, not a floret could be
found infertile. This with me is indicative of self-fertilization.
But I believe it is conceded by all biologists who have given atten-
tion to this large order of plants, Compositse, comprising a tenth
part of the vegetable kingdom, that the florets are mostly self-fertil-
izers. Where there is a tendency to dioecism, and where there are
ray florets pistilliferous only, these — the very small minority — must,
of course, have florets requiring aid in pollination from other
flowers. The most that has been claimed for Composita3 is
that they are i' adapted to cross-fertilization ;" but even this state-
ment is derived from a theoretical conception of the plant's behav-
ior, for every practical test made by excluding insects has found
the florets just as fertile as if insects had been allowed free access to
them. It was, however, well worth while to keep this topic in view
while making my notes. The date of the observations is given,
as I have a suspicion that the phases of growth are not iden-
tical in different seasons or localities, though the uniformity goes on
with tolerable regularity.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 305

The lobes of the corolla expand soon after daylight, resting at
once when open. But the style continues to lengthen. The appen-
dages to the stamens, similar in form to the lobes of the corolla,
bend over, and completely cover the apex of the style, forming a
cap like the apex of the finger of a glove. Pressing against this
cap the whole column is carried upward by the style growth. At
length the filaments' will stretch no more — the style still advances
— the pollen is brushed upward by the plumose stigmas, and at
length the appendages of the anthers are forced apart, and through
the crevices the pollen is thrust. Pollen gathering insects have a
rich field throughout the day, collecting the material thus forced to
the top of the staminal tube. By sunset the stigmas appear, cov-
ered by pollen ; and it is interesting to note, by examination of a
floret at this stage, how nearly clean the pollen has been brushed
out by the upward movement of the style. At sunset the pollen-
covered style commences to expand, and, curving over, seems to aid
in pressing back the column of stamens to the interior of the floret.
It was clear to my mind that the withdrawal of the staminal column
was not wholly due to elasticity of the filaments or it would go down
rapidly on the egress of the style which had raised it. But to make
the matter more certain, I slit the column, so that it might be entirely
free of any help from the style, but this did not add to the descent.
The filaments are as long as the tube Avhen the latter has attained
its greatest elevation ; but when examined in the morning after the
above observation, when wholly withdrawn into the tube of the
floret, they had drawn down to but one-fourth the length. The
lowering is due, not to irritability nor to elasticity, but the
shrinkage common to all maturing structures.

Pollen grains were of course more numerous on the dorsal side of
the style branches, but there was abundance for all fertilizing pur-
poses on the stigmatic surfi:ices. At any rate, as the expansion com-
mences at sunset and continues throughout the night, any fertil-
ization which insects might aid would be due to nocturnal insects
and not honey bees or others which liave hitherto received the credit,
siniply because they were pollen gatherers from the unopened
florets.

The morning following the expansion of the style branches, the
style itself follows the stamens, and by nightfall of the second day
the style has wholly withdrawn into the corolla. During this day
the flower is visited by bees and other insects for nectar, but the

306 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADE3IY OF [1893.

shriveling of the style shows that fertilization had been accom-
plished during the night, and that the furnishing of the honeyed
sweets to the insect visitors was a purely gratuitous act, for which
the plant seemingly receives no compensation.

The style is bulbous at the base. The style on withering disar-
ticulates at the apex of the bulb which remains as part of the seed
vessel. Morphologically the bulb may represent an arrested node
of growth, and it would not be surprising in some monstrous
forms to find appendages develop from it or closely related gen-
era, with some form of structure in which some organs developed
from a position such as the bulb occupies.

The strongly adhesive power of the gelatiuous pollen is indicated
by the difficulty the style branches have in separating. The lower
portion spreads while inside the staminal tube ; but the apex still
remains in contact, so that after the style branches have become
quite clear of the tube, the branches, still together at the apex, form
a diamond-shaped termination to the style. If a lance separates
the mass of pollen, and thus liberates the apices, the style branches
fly back with considerable force.

The style branches, after being drawn down into the corolla tube,
were still of the same proportionate length with the undivided por-
tion of the style, as when fully expanded : again showing that the
withdrawal was not due to any irritating or contracting power at
the base, but to a uniform shriveling in all its parts. These
advances of the different parts of flowers and rests while others
advance, are extremely interesting. It is now tAventy-three years since
I recorded similar behavior in the flowers of the compass plant, Sil-
phium laciniatum,^ and I regret that neither I nor others have fol-
lowed far in the path of observation there marked out.

Floccose Leaves of Antennaria pi-antaginifolia.

In the midst of a large quantity of Antennaria plantaginifolia in
Mount Desert Island, ]SIe., while numbers had the leaves green on
the upper surface, many plants were so densely floccose that no
green could be seen. The deprivation of the light was complete, and
I could form no conception as to how the green could be equally
dense beneath this thick growth of wood, as in the leaves exposed.
The text-books say " leaves silky-woolly when young, at length green
above." But the woolly plants seem woolly to the last, while the

' Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences, 1870, p. 117-

1893.] NATURAL SCIEKCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 307

green-surfaced leaves seem on wholly different plants. The latter
has undulate, and occasionally crenate serrate, leaves ; and the leaves
are minutely dotted in places where hair should have grown.

Endurance of Portulaca oleracea.

In early autumn light white frosts occur, the tenderer plants
being injured in patches. Blackened leaves occur at intervals,
and considerable areas will have escaped, though of the same
species as those injured. This erratic character of an early light
frost is usually referred to atmospheric currents, the atmosphere
being a trifle higher or lower according as injury or escape from
injury may result. This is probably the case, though no absolute
tests by self registering thermometers have been made to my knowl-
edge.

After one of these early frosts, the past October, I noted that a
large area covered with Portulaca oleracea, the common Purslane,
had a large number blackened by frost, while possibly an equal
number were unharmed. I was about passing over the fact under
the explanation already noted, when I observed that in many
instances healthy plants and plants blackened by frost would be
found together, their branches interlacing. In every case of the
kind examined, not a single leaf would be injured in the one case,
while in the other case the whole plant would be destroyed. The
destruction in these cases could not have been by any variation in
the intensity of the cold wave, but must have been from a less
power of resistance in the plant itself.

The facts detailed furnish valuable lessons and suggestions. May
not the varying effects of a first " white frost " be as often from
varying powers of resistance as from varying intensities of the cold
wave ?

Again it is frequent to have increased hardiness, as well as many
other characteristics, referred to the effects of environment. As the
plants here, and their ancestors for many generations, must have
been under like conditions, the unequal results can scarcely be
attributed to environment, but to the elasticity of character pos-
sessed by the whole organized world. In Portulaca oleracea we may
safely say some ])lants are hardier than others; yet over the whole
northern world where it is found, the plants are yet totally destroyed
by a comparatively light frost. Ages of existence under severe
climatic conditions have not rendered it, on the whole, hardier than

308 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

when it first ventured on its hyperborean march, — for the great
home of the family is undoubtedly sub-tropical. The seeds of this
and other plants with a similar home, are frost-proof. They will
live in the ground, under any degree of frost. Hence sub-tropical
plants that can perfect their seeds before frost arrives, can travel
very far northward. It is to this power and not to any change of
original character by environment that the northward march of
these plants has been due.

Early Fertilization of Scutellaria galericulata.

Wishing to study the teleology of the crest or pouch on the calyx
lobe of Scutellaria, a large number of specimens of S. galericulata
in various stages of growth were collected at Seal Harbor, Me., on
July 13. No additional light could be thrown on the purpose of
this curious process, but some facts not generally known in relation
to the behavior of the flower during anthesis were noted as being
worth recording.

Of all authors at the command of the writer, Bromfield^ is the
only one that notes in this species that " the stamens as well as the
style included, and lodged with it in the oblong inflated convexity
or crown of the upper lip." I had noticed that every flower was
fertile, and from this inferred self-fertilization. The style is never
longer than the stamens, and the anthers and upper portion of the
style are bound together in their " lodging." The anthers burst
their sacs simultaneously with the expansion of the flower, and
cover the whole upper portion of the style with pollen. Portions of
the corolla fold so tightly over the upper portions of stamens and
style that no insect can reach them. Even when an attempt is
made to press open this portion of the corolla with a light twig, the
expansion is unwillingly performed.

A remarkable circumstance is that the flower falls soon after full
expansion, carrying the style with it, thus showing that full fertili-
zation of the ovarium had already taken place. It is probable that
the pollen grains are active much earlier in the unopened flower,
than seemed to be the case from my few hours of observation.

Fertilization of Tri folium pratense.

At my own residence, Philadelphia, I have never been able to
notice humble-bees entering Red Clover by the mouth of the corolla,

^ Flora Vectensis, p. 383.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 309

—all that I have seen visiting the flowers perforate the tube. It was
interesting to note at Seal Harbor, that the species comparatively
abundant on July 13, always entered by the mouth. I could find
no flowers with the corolla tube perforated. It was interesting fur-
ther to note that though there were cases of light colored flowers,
the prevailing tint was of a much brighter rose than clover fields
further south present.

310 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

August 1.
Rev. Henry C. McCook, Vice-President, in the chair.
Eight persons present.

A paper under the following title was presented for publication : —
" Certain Sand Mounds of the St. John's River, Florida. Part I,"
by Clarence B. Moore.

August 8.
Mr. Charles Morris in the chair.
Eleven persons present.

August 15.
Mr. UsELMA C. Smith in the chair.
Twenty-two persons present.

The Publication Committee reported in favor of publishing the
paper by Clarence B. Moore entitled " Certain Sand Mounds of the
St. John's River, Florida, Part I," as the first paper of Volume X
of the Journal of the Academy.

Remarks on a New Species of Cyprcea. — Mr. John Ford, in pre-
senting the types of a new species of Cyprcea remarked that his
conclusions regarding their distinctive specific character were based
upon the careful study of a large number of specimens of various
sizes and stages of growth, all of which could be readily separated
from any other species belonging to the genus.

In the first description, published by him in The Nautilus, Feb.,
1893, the shells were defined as a variety of C. cruenta Gmel., the
suggestion being made, however, that most students would have
given them specific standing. For this reason this change has since
been made, and any further reference to their previous varietal
standing is deemed unnecessary. It may be said, however, that
the shell appears to have been figured by Kiener^ as a variety of
C. varlolaria ham. (C. cruenta Gmel.) and possibly by Sowerby,^
and Melvill,'* the two latter authors apparently differing in opinion
as to its relative varietal standing, the former referring it to

* Iconographie Co(iuilles Vivantes, page 57, pi. 27, fig. 2.
^ Thesaurus Conchyliorum. Plate 23, fig. 190.

3 1st Vol. 4th series of Memoirs and Proc. of the Manchester, (Engd.) Lit.
and Phil. Society, 1887-8.

1893.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

311

C. caurica Linn. Melvill, if one may judge hy his published state-
ment, appearing somewhat doubtful as to whether it was the off-
spring of C. cruenta, of C caurica, or of both species.

No description of the shell other than that published by the
speaker, was given until July, 1893, when a summary of the speaker's
observations over Mr. ^lelvill's signature appeared in the Quarterly
(English) Journal of Conchology.

The full description of the species (published in The Nautilus,
August, 1892,) is as follows: —

Cypr^f.a Greegori Ford, n. sp.

Shell depressed, orbicular oval in form, callus on the sides and
ends remarkably thickened. That on the sides light salmon in color,
with irregular purple-brown spots, having a blotchy appearance.
Dorsal surface similar to that of cruenta, but lacking the whitish
spots typically present in that species. Base semi-translucent, spot-
less, dark buffer salmon colored, darkest in the interstices. Teeth
on outer lip very strong, long and whitish ; on inner lip finer, with
exception of the anterior fold and one or two adjacent teeth, the first
of these latter being very prominent and notably transverse. Space
between the anterior fold and the following tooth wide and bright
red; posterior teeth of inner lip prolonged outward upon the base.
Dimensions of average specimen : length H, breadth i inch.

That C. Greegori is more nearly related to C. cruenta than to
any other species, Mr. Ford had no doubt. Nevertheless, the fact
remains that the former possesses several characters altogether
distinct from those belonging to the latter.

C Greegori is for instance, more translucent, less variable, more
rugged, much smaller and rounder in form, different in general
color, and in the peculiar variations of the teeth ; also in the
remarkable thickness and brilliancy of the callus with which it is
rimmed.

With exception of one poor specimen, the shell was unknown to
the late Mr. Tryon, and for the same reason perhaps, it was not
noticed by ]Mr. Roberts in his catalogue of the species.

312 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

The speaker had good reasons for believing that Mr. Tryon had
at one time almost decided to name and describe this one poor
specimen as a new species, but finally concluded that the material
at hand was insufficient for the purpose.

Had he seen the brilliant suite of specimens now in the Academy,
it is not likely that he would have hesitated a moment to follow
his first intention. The shells are doubtless quite rare in collections,
both in the United States and Europe, those known here, in fact,
having chiefly come in one lot of mixed species of Cyprcea, from
Southern India and Ceylon. The latter region, judging from all
available evidence, may be considered the habitat of the species.

It may be safely said that among all the smaller species of Cyprcea
none are more brilliant or more distinctly specific than G. Greegori
Ford. It is not strange therefore that this new species has already
been endorsed by a number of our most eminent conchologists.

August 22.
Mr. Lewis Woolman in the chair.
Eleven persons present.

August 29.
Mr. Lewis Woolman in the chair.
Thirteen persons present.

A paper entitled " Change with Age in the Kadula of Land-
Mollusca," by V. Sterki, was presented for publication.

The following was ordered to be printed : —

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 313

NOTES ON THE PHYSICAL GEOGRAPHY OF TEXAS.
By Ralph S. Tarr.

Preface.

This paper is based in part upon personal observation, in part
upon the published results of others.' Free use has been made of
the results of the several geologists who have studied the Texas
region, and in most cases direct reference has been made to the
sources of information. I am particularly indebted to the publica-
tions of Prof. R. T. Hill for many geological facts and interpretations,
chiefly in the Cretaceous regions where this author has done so much
valuable work. With few exceptions, however, the work done by
others has been geological rather than physiographic, and con-
sequently I have been in many cases forced to rely upon my own
observations alone. Since these were made in sections only, it has
not been possible in all cases to make the results as definite as
could be desired. My observations were made in 1889 and 1890,
the time occupied in field work being almost eight months, the
larger part of which was spent in the Central Denuded Area.
Aside from this and short excursions and railroad journeys, I also
made a wagon journey across the State of Texas from north of
Austin to the Guadalupe Mountains in the Trans-Pecos region, and
spent several weeks in and about these mountains.

The results embodied herein must therefore be understood to be
the results of reconnoissauce, — preliminary exploration of a great
and interesting field. Were it possible that in the future I should
again have the opportunity of studying the region 1 would delay
the publication of this still longer; but this seems to be entirely
out of the question, and I believe that I am justified in placing the
results of my study on record to serve as a possible basis for future
work.

Part I. — General Description.
1. — General Geography.^

(a) Topography. — The State of Texas consists, in the portion
which lies east of the Pecos river, of a series of plains, and west of

1 The appended bibliography is a paitial li.'-t of works consulted.

-I shall follow in general the classification offered by Prof. R. T. Hill, (Am.
Geol., V, 1890, pp. 0-29,) since this is tlie only classification offered, and is both
natural and accurate.

21

314 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

that river of a great plateau broken by mountain ranges, southern
spurs of the Rocky mountains. The plain east of the Pecos is
broken in only one ])lace, where the Palteozoic rocks are exposed
by the removal of the Cretaceous covering, and this has been called
bv Professor Hill, the Central Denuded Area.

On the Gulf coast are the Quaternary beds, forming the Coastal
Prairies, a great, level tract of land chiefly swampy and but
slightly elevated above the Gulf. A forested region of Tertiary
sands and clays, carved into gently undulating topography is
interposed between the Coastal Prairies and the great Cretaceous
plain. The Cretaceous plain, commencing at an elevation, in the
vicinity of Austin, of not far from four hundred feet, though vary-
ing in different parts, forms one of the greatest geographical units of
Texas. It is a treeless prairie, with a few exceptions, and occupies
nearly one fourth of the state, rising gradually away from the coast
and reaching an elevation of two thousand feet and more.

Partly enclosed in this Prairie is the Central Denuded Area, a
region of hilly, sparsely forested Carboniferous and older rocks,
which to the west merge into the Red Beds of Permian age. These
beds on the east have something of the topographic diversity of the
older rocks, but to the west change gradually in topographic form
and merge, geographically, almost imperceptibly into the lake or
inland sea beds of the Staked Plains, the Llano Estacado. These
plains, treeless and arid, form a true plateau with an elevation of
from 3,000 to 4,500 feet. The Pecos river flows along the base of
the Llano Estacado plateau which ends abruptly in a steep west
facing escarpment. To the west there is another plateau, broken by
mountain ranges, the Trans-Pecos Mountain and Basin region of
Hill.

There are, therefore, six great topographic divisions in Texas: —
1st, the Coastal Prairies; 2nd, the Rolling Forested Tertiary Area;
3rd, the Grand Prairie ; 4th, the Central Denuded Area ; 5th, the
Llano Estacado ; 6th, the Trans-Pecos Mountain and Basin Region.
To this might be added many minor divisions dependent upon minor
topographical or geographical features. East of the Pecos the coun-
try is one of plateaus, plains, and prairies, forested only in one of its
parts (with one or two exceptions to be hereafter noted). The Cen-
tral Denuded Area alone is hilly and in no place are there mount-
ains. Buttes, chiefly of Cretaceous strata, form the only striking
elevations and these are dignified by the name of mountains by the

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 315

settlers, in the absence of more striking elevations. West of the Pe-
cos the country is truly moiintainous.

(6) Drainage. — The drainage naturally fells into two classes, the
western, including the Rio Grande and Rio Pecos which receive
their water supply from the mountains of New Mexico, and whose
Texas tributaries are withered channels favored with water only at
rare intervals; and secondly, those of the east, including the Color-
ado and Brazos, whose headwaters are withered channels in the Llano
Estacado and the Permian plain, and whose lower tributaries, flow-
ing in a humid or sub-humid climate, are the source of constant sup-
ply.

2. — General Climatic CoNDnioNs.

Texas is humid in the east, excessively so near the Gulf Coast.
The climate in this region, for instance near Galveston, is semi-
tropical. Proceeding inland, with increasing elevation comes more
temperate conditions. Snow falls, and frost occurs in the greater
part of the State, this being due to the cold north winds, " the
northers " which are not uncommon during the winter. Even as
near the coast as Austin the decrease in rainfall is noticeable, and
it is necessary to travel inland from here but a hundred miles or so
to reach a subhumid belt. The town of Abilene lies in this sub-
humid region, and to the west of this the climate becomes rapidly
more arid until truly arid conditions are met with, and with this
change there is a change in the character of vegetation. The Trans-
Pecos region is arid, so is the Llano Estacado and the western
Permian. More than a third of the State is arid or subhumid.

3. — General Geologic and Geographic Development.

(a) Pre- Carboniferous Land. — This statement is necessarily
generalized and, with the present imperfect state of our knowledge
of the geology of large parts of Texas, it may in some details be
incomplete. I shall attempt nothing more than seems warranted
by the facts at present at hand ; but these are sufficient for our
present purpose which is to trace the general development of the
Texas region.

The oldest part of Texas is the Central Denuded Area, and this
has had a very complicated history. There is a Pre-Cambrian area,
referred by Mr. Walcott to lower Cambrian' and later to Algonkian*

3 Am. J. Sci., XXVIII, 1884, pp. 431-33.

* Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey, No. 30, 1886, pp. .=)7-64.

316 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

aae and which Dr. Comstock^ considers true Archeaa. The extent
of this area is at present limited and there is no means of determin-
ing its former boundaries. The strata are highly metamorphosed,
in part by intrusions of Plutonic rocks. About this core are Cambrian
and Silurian strata, according to Dr. Comstock folded and faulted in
an extremely complicated manner. These older rocks obtained most
of their complication and metamorphism before the beginning of
the Carboniferous period, for the strata of the latter age rest with
marked unconformity on the northern slopes of the Silurian hills.

What was the limit of this Pre-Carboniferous land we have no
exact means of determining, but that the present exposure by no
means expresses the original extent of outcrop seems certain from
the vast quantities of material in the Carboniferous and later strata.
Moreover the conglomeratic and sandy nature of the lower Carbon-
iferous deposits, along their eastern margin, indicates very strongly
that beneath the Cretaceous not far distant from this, the older
land exists. I believe it more than possible that this buried land
extended to the areas of Indian Territory and Arkansas, thus con-
necting them Avith the central core of Texas.

Be this as it may, there was, in one part at least, a land area in
immediate Pre-Carboniferous time. This land was mountainous in
type, so far as structure is concerned, and had practically its
present degree of metamorphism.* Whether the land was topo-
graphically mountainous or not I cannot say. It certainly was not
so in the immediate neighborhood of the Carboniferous, for the
valleys and hills which were buried beneath the Carboniferous strata
were low and well rounded, being mature in type, much more mature
than the present topography of the same district, and quite closely
like that of the less hilly parts of New England. For this reason
I assume that all the land in the neighborhood had undergone long
continued denudation and was mature in geographic form. It was
a mountainous area worn to its roots in Pre-Carboniferous time.

(6) Carboniferous Modification of the older Pakeozoic Land. — The
next event in the history is the oncoming of the Carboniferous de-
pression and period of sedimentation, a period introduced apparently
in Sub-Carboniferous times and continuing with slight interruption
to the close of the Permian. The evidence of a Sub-Carboniferous

' 1st Ann. Rept., Texas Geol. Survey, 1889, pp. 255-82.

8 This fact is proved hy the exisience of maible and flint pebbles in ihe
Carboniferous, with the same stiucture that tlie mateiials at preterit have in the
neighboring Silurian.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 317

bed consists, so far as worked out, in an unconformity of marked
extent between a series of limestone and an overlying series of sand-
stone and limestones, an unconformity in which more tlian 4,500 feet
of upper Carboniferous beds are involved. ' These lower beds and
the upper Carboniferous beds, filling, at the shore line, the bays of
the older land, extended far to the westward and were represented in
west Texas, in the Trans-Pecos region, by the deeper water strata
which form the present Guadalupe iNIountains. At first the deposits
were those of an open sea but in the upper beds different conditions
are indicated.

That part of the Carboniferous which lies immediately beneath
the Permian, and which I have called the Coleman division of the
Texas Carboniferous indicates mediterranean conditions, a fore-
shadowing of the oncoming of the Permian inland sea. The older
land was skirted by a coastal strip formed by the recent Carbonifer-
ous strata now elevated above sea level. There was a gathering in of
shore lines, and I conceive the conditions of this period to have been
not unlike those of the present Gulf of INIexico. The southern and
northern shores were older Palaeozoic rocks skirted by a coastal strip
of Carboniferous strata, and these two areas were noAv, if not before?
connected areas. The other enclosing sides are at present unknown.**

The gathering in of shore lines thus early indicated, continued with
no break, or at most with only a slight break, until a completely
land locked sea was formed. In this the Red Beds of Permian age»
consisting of a series of inland sea deposits, frequently gypsum bear-
ing and saliferous, were deposited. These salt bearing beds more-
over indicate an arid climate for this section, Avhich would lead us to
infer a considerable area of land. The land was made, however,
without distortion of noticeable extent, except possibly in the older
Silurian and pre-Silurian strata.

(c) Jura-Trias Period of Denudation. — The condition of Texas
during the Jura-Trias period is but vaguely understood. In the
main it was a land area, and the denudation of the period reduced
it well down to base-level. This is proved by the contact of the

' Tarr, l-t Ann.. Rept., Geol. Survey Texas, 1S89, pp. 201-203.
Tarr, Am. T- Sci., XL., p. 404.
Tarr, Am. J. Sci., XLIII , 1892. pp. 9-12.
Tarr, Am. (leol. Sept., 1890, pp. ] 45-153.

' For a more complete discussion of this phase of the ])iol)lem I refer to an
article by the author on "The Permian of Te.xas," Am. J. Sci., XLIII, [an.
1892, pp 9-12.

318 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Cretaceous overlap, which is everywhere, on the Carboniferous, a
gently undulating line, with no sharply defined buried topographic
features. It was a plain and probably a base-leveled plain. The
older Palreozoic core formed the highlands of the region, and here,
in consequence of the harder nature of the rocks and their more
variable character with reference to hardness and altitude, the
topography was distinctly more diversified.

{d) Cretaceous Subsidence. — With the beginning of the Cretaceous
period there ca,me an extensive and rapid" subsidence, during which
both the upper and the lower Cretaceous beds were deposited. The
history of this period has been so fully worked out by Prof Hill and
so clearly described by him in various places that I shall do no
more than state the fact. This part of the history of Texas is already
known to geologists. The several thousand feet of Cretaceous com-
pletely buried the older Palseozoic land as first pointed out by Prof.
Hill." This fact has been disputed by Dr. Comstock'^ who has spent
several years in a study of the older Palaeozoic rocks of the Central
Denuded Area. Prof. Hill reiterates his statement later and is sup-
ported in the conclusion by Mr. Walcott'' and Dr. Curtice.'' I have
studied the problem from a standpoint different from that of the
geologists above referred to and am convinced of the accuracy of
Prof. Hill's deductions, and, in the paper on this subject above referred
to, have given ray reasons for this conclusion, these being both
geographic and geologic. Since they do not fall within the scope
planned for this joaper I make no further reference to them here.

This complete transformation of a large area of nearly base-
leveled land to a condition of deep sea sedimentation lasted until mid
Cretaceous time when there was an elevation followed by another
depression in which the upper Cretaceous beds were formed. There
was at this time, that is during the upper Cretaceous epoch, a period
of volcanic eruption in the vicinity of and southwest of Austin, the
relics of which remain now as low necks of nepheline basalt.
These, the Shumard Knobs, are, according to Hill, '* marine vol-
canoes in the Cretaceous Sea,

9 For proofs of the rapid subsidence I refer to an article by the author in the
American Geologist, Vol. IX, 1892, pp. 169-178.

10 Am. J. Sci.. XXXVII, 1889, p. 283.

11 Fir^t Ann. Rept., Texas Geol. Survey, 1889, pp. 31 0-318.
Second Ann. Rept., Texas Geol. Survey, 189li, pp. 663-664.

12 Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., 1890, Vol. II., pp. 522-3.
1 a Bull. Geol. Soc. Am.. 1890, Vol., II., pp. 526-.S.
1 Am. Geol. Nov. 1890, pp. 286-292.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 319

(e) Post Cretaceous Changes. — With the close of the Cretaceous
period of deposition there began the mountain building work which
culminated in the formation of the Kocky ^Mountains and to which
the present form of Texas is in large measure due. In the
the East it caused the bodily uplift of the great Cretaceous plain,
the remnant of which forms the Grand Prairie. An extensive fault,
the Balcones fault of Hill, occurred possibly at this time, and is at
present an important feature in the topography of eastern Texas.
It is, however, such a striking feature and so well marked that it more
probably occurred during the Tertiary or possibly even during the
Quaternary uplift, to be mentioned presently.

The Rocky Mountain uplift which formed the plateaus and plains
of central Texas, by a bodily uplift more pronounced in the west,
took, in the Trans-Pecos region, the form of mountain building.
Little is known of these mountains, but the Guadalupe Mountains
which the author has studied, are monoclinal in structure, faulted on
the western side. Others are more complicated, and some are asso-
ciated with igneous eruptions or intrusions. Little is known about
this region other than that it is a mountain range and basin region
in which Tertiary lakes lingered until the period of Quaternary des-
si cation caused them to disappear.

A period of sedimentation following the Cretaceous uplift admit-
ted of the deposition of the Tertiary clays and sands, which, by their
elevation, added another strip to the Texas region, that which Prof.
Hill has designated the Eocene Lignite or Forest region. Again,
in Quaternary time, another strip was added, and the Coastal Prairie
is so recent that shells now living in the Gulf are enclosed in the
strata as fossils. A slight submergence of very recent date is indi-
cated by the fjorded character of the streams on the Texas coast.

The Llano Estacado plateau is said by Prof Hill"' to be capped
by lacustrine sediments of late Tertiary or Quaternary age and this
forms anotlier chapter in the history of Texas, but we have few
details in regard to this most interesting episode.

(/) Post Cretaceous Drainage. — It has been my effort in the pre-
ceding pages to trace as briefly as possible the geological history
of the development of the Texas region — the steps by which it has
come to assume the present form. The minor details of the land
sculpturing as revealed by the river histories registered in the topo-
graphy remain to be considered. A few general points on the sub-
1 5 Am. Geol. , V, 1890, pp. 27-2!<.

320 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

ject may well be stated here before taking up the detailed study.
With a few exceptions this study is of necessity confined to east and
central Texas for the reason that west Texas, or Traus-Pecos Texas,
is practically an unknown land. That part which concerns us
most at the present time, is the portion elevated during the begin-
ning of the formation of the Rocky Mountains as a great plain,
chiefly if not entirely Cretaceous covered, and dipping eastward.
Upon this the streams have developed, being revived by the Tertiary
and Quaternary uplift. They have in places cut through the Cret-
aceous covering and, in the Central Denuded Area, have revealed
great areas of buried I*akeozoic rocks upon which they are super-
imposed. The reason Avhy the streams have cut through to the
Palseozoic at this their most elevated portion is not now definitely
cei'tain. It may have been the result of mere chance, or it may be
that this region, having a thinner cover than the other region, was
first reached, and, being more resisting because relatively elevated
and diversified, and consequently a region of excessive denudation,
became a center of drainage. Another possibility is that the
Palaeozoic Highland was expressed in the Cretaceous sea by a dome-
like bulging in the Cretaceous sediments, and consequently was the
first land to be made and the first and most ra])idly denuded.
For a discussion of the subject I refer to my paper on the Cretaceous
Covering of the Central Palaeozoic of Texas.'"

Part II. — Physiographic Description.

1. — Gr.XERAL.

The different geographic units above mentioned exhibit different
phenomena and it seems, therefore, best to divide the discussion so
as to give each geographic unit a separate consideration. This divi-
sion of the subject cannot be adhered to rigidly because the various
regions merge one into the other and the physiography of one very
often resembles closely that of another. Yet each geographic unit
presents unique features and, for this reason, it seems necessary to
consider them as units. Moreover it is the only method of treat-
ment which seems possible without the introduction of much confu-
sion.

2 — The Quaternary Coastal Prairies.

(a) Geographic Description. — Of this plain Hill writes/' " It is

i6Am. Geol., Vol. IX, 1892, pp. im»-17S.
I'Am. Geol., V, p. 11.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 321

perhaps the best example of a newly born topographic plain iu this
country." Of the same region Penrose says^"^ "the coast prairies
reach inland along the Sabine about fifty miles, but as we go west
they spread farther and farther toward the interior, until when we
come to the Brazos, they reach up the river for over a hundred
miles. Near the Gulf shore they are flat and low, rising twenty to
thirty feet above the water, thickly covered with grass and cut bj'^
steep-sided channels of man}'^ rivers and creeks. The monotony of
the scenery is broken only by the narrow strips of timber which fol-
low the meandering course of the streams down toward the Gulf of
Mexico. " On its inner or western margin it becomes undulating
and merges into the rolling timber area.

Where I crossed the plain from Houston to Galveston it is little
more than an undrained swamp. The steep sided stream channels
are sunk but a few feet beneath the surface and between these are
great flat-topped, undrained divides upon which water stands dur-
ing the greater ])art of the year. Rushes and swamp grass have
possession and even cattle find the plain too inhospitable for habita-
tion. Now and then, though very rarely even along the railroad,
on some slight elevation a settler has placed his house and a few cat-
tle graze in the vicinity. Everywhere else there is one monotonous
stretch of dead-level plain. So young is the plain that I'ecent fossils
at present living in the Gulf are preserved in the prairie strata.

(b) Young, Consequent, and Extended Drainage. — Two types of
rivers exist upon this coastal plain : the extended rivers, having
their supply in the interior, and the young consequent streams which
are developing between these. The Brazos, Colorado and Trinity
are instances of the former and innumerable creeks are examples of
the latter.

The extended rivers, receiving their supply of water and sediment
from the inland plains, reach the Quaternary prairies as full sized,
well developed streams and they monopolize the drainage of the
plain. As the plain was elevated they grew out across it and
by their power, resulting from size and priority of location, they
have seized upon the major part of the plain as their own. The
extended course is consequent on the original slope of the phxin ;
that is, Gulf- ward. In the spaces left undrained by these larger and
stronger rivers consequent streams are now developing. The
extended streams grow at their mouth, the smaller young streams

'^First Am. Kept., Texas (ieol. Survey, 1SS9, p. 7.

322 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

are growing at their headwaters. The time of occupancy by these
two types of streams has been so short that the intei'spaces are flat-
topped and undrained, and the channels steep-sided and caiiou-
like.

(c) Estuarine Condition. — Even in this brief period the streams of
the coastal prairie have been subjected to an accident. All the
larger streams are at their mouths estuarine. They are also flow-
ing, even on the plain many miles from the shore, in channels with
little slope. These facts record a slight submergence since the
greatest elevation, though the phenomenon is also due in part
to the overburdened condition of the streams.

(d) Young, Growing Coast Line. — The extended rivers helped to
form the coastal plain when the shore line was farther inland, and
they are now at work with the aid of tides, waves and currents in
the construction of a similar plain along its margin. Each large
river is overburdened with sediment derived from the Tertiary
clays, the Cretaceous, and Palaeozoic rocks, and this sediment is
being used by the waves and tides in the construction of land. The
coast line is growing outward. Shoals, bars, and islands are regis-
ters of this growth, and the beaches, even the much boasted beach
at Galveston, upon which the surf rolls laden and muddy with river
furnished sediment, show the progress of outward growth. The har-
bors of Texas exist because the river mouths are fjorded, and
because protective bars and islands have been thrown across the
mouths of the estuaries, by the currents laden with sediment brought
down by the rivers. They are poor harbors because the excess of
sediment thus furnished is being deposited in the estuaries. The
engineering improvements proposed for the harbors of the Texas
coast must take into account this outward growth of the coast
line.

The bars thrown up along the Gulf coast line have enclosed
lagoons, sometimes quite completely, and here is formed one of the
few kinds of lacustrine basins in Texas.

3 — The Rolling Forested Tertiary Area.

(a) Topographic Description. — This country ^^ consists largely of
the inshore part of the bottom of the old Tertiary Sea, which once
covered the whole Gulf coast. This area has been elevated into a

^'The description in tiiis paragraph is abstracted from Penrose's report on the
Gulf Tertiary of east Texas. (Kirst Ann. Kept., Texas Geol. Survey, 1889, pp.
7-13), the abstracts in most cases being verbatim quotations.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 323

table-land one hundred to seven hundred feet above the sea level,
sloping gradually to the southeast and emptying its waters in the
same direction into the Gulf of Mexico. Since its elevation it has
undergone great erosion and is still being denuded at a tremendous
rate. The strata are all composed of sands and clays, and succumb
very readily to the eroding action of atmospheric agencies. The
result is that all that is left of the once level surface of this table-
land are a few flat-topped hills and ridges. The highest points,
locally called mountains, are buttes or mesas having their summits
capped by an almost horizontal bed of iron ore or sandstone, and to
this covering they o\Ye their existence. A large part of this area is
a heavily timbered region, and marks the southwestern terminus of
the great Atlantic timber belt, extending from the Arctic regions
continuously along the coast of the Atlantic Ocean and the Gulf of
Mexico until it finally disappears in the mesquite and cactus prai-
ries between the Colorado River and the Rio Grande.

(6) Mature, Consequent and Extended Drainage. — The conditions
described above, under the Quaternary, in all probability are repe-
titions of similar conditions in the Tertiary area in earlier times.
This area is composed of horizontal and cross-bedded strata, now
partly consolidated clays and sands, which undoubtedly formed a
coastal strip at the close of the late Tertiary uplift. Streams which
had developed on the Cretaceous plains and had uncovered portions
of the buried Paljeozoic, extended across the coastal strip of Ter-
tiary strata, and between them young consequent streams began
their development. The Brazos, Trinity and Colorado were here,
as in the present coastal strip, extended rivers. The then young
consequent streams of the older plain, such as the Neches and Ange-
lina, are now extended across the Quaternary plain.

The elevation of the old coastal strip was greater than that of the
more recent one for it now rises on its inner margin, in some places,
to an elevation of seven hundred feet above sea level and there is
evidence that it extended farther inland at one time. The topo-
graphic development of this region of Tertiary strata has proceeded
to the point of producing a rolling country of low and gently slop-
ing hills with broad valleys. In other words it has proceeded as
far as early maturity. It may seem at first thought that this is at
variance with the description of the Cretaceous area which follows.
Here the streams are topographically young, yet this land is vastly
older. This apparent anomaly is due to three causes: first, the fact

324 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

that the streams on the Cretaceous have been rejuvenated by the late
Tertiary and Quaternary elevation in the first of which the area
under consideration was elevated above sea level as a young
unscored plain ; secondly, that the streams on the Tertiary are
chiefly extended, hence well developed lower portions of streams
and their development is more rapid than the headwater sti-eams
which are also higher above sea level and hence have a greater
depth to cut through before reaching base level ; and thirdly,
the fact that the Tertiary strata are unconsolidated while those of
the Cretaceous are in large part indurated. Topographic age is a
relative term varying according to circumstances, not the least
important of which is the character of the strata. In soft strata
topographic maturity will be reached much sooner than in hard
strata, other conditions being equal.

(c) Origin of the Flood Plains. — The broad flood plains of the
forested area are worthy of some attention. In the spring and early
summer such streams as the Brazos in this region overflow their
banks and transform the swampy malarial plains upon either side
into impassable lakes, very much as does the Red River of Arkan-
sas. The immediate cause of this is the excessive floods which come
from the rains at the headwaters. The reason why such excessive
flooding is possible is that the rivers of Texas are overburdened
streams. The sands and clays of the Permian and Carboniferous
areas cause the streams which flow through them to be overbur-
dened far up toward the headwaters, and this condition continues
and increases through the Cretaceous and Tertiary areas. In the
forested region, the slope being diminished as the sea is approached,
much of the sediment burden can be carried no farther. This ten-
dency to deposit the sediment in the stream beds has been exagger-
ated by the recent slight submergence indicated by the fjords and
estuaries at the river mouths in the Quaternary plain. In this way
the deposits near the mouths of the streams have been brought
about in the effort to restore the profile of equilibrium, and secure a
channel-way to the sea through which the sediment load can be
transported. This establishment of the profile of equilibrium is now
in progress and the flood plains are growing up stream.

For some reason there has been a change in conditions of recent
date. Formerly the rivers flowing through this Tertiary area were
able to keep their channels clear and carve them deeper. Now they
are building them up, and this in spite of an elevation of some fifty

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 325

feet. This change is greater than can be accounted for by the
recent slight submergence, and there is evidence that it began before
the submergence, for the flood plains are broad and deep and conse-
quently old, whereas the estuaries are so recent that they have
hardly begun to be filled.

AVhatever be the explanation it must be one whose chief factor is
an increase in sediment, and for this two hypotheses suggest them-
selves. In the normal development of a stream there comes a time
when, by the growth of headwaters, the supply ot sediment exceeds
the power of the stream to transport it and the stream becomes
overburdened. Under different circumstances this condition ap-
pears at different times. In such rivers as the Platte it is a long
eniluring condition, in others it may never occur, but in general it is
a stage in development. It is possible that the Texas streams have
reached this stage.

From my knowledge of the Texas rivers I am inclined to believe
that the explanation must be modified by the introduction of the
second hypothesis. It is quite certain that the climate of west and
central Texas has not long since changed from a moderately moist to
an arid climate. This is indicated by the old lake basins, now
nearly dry, in the Trans-Pecos region ; and, in central Texas, by
the headwaters of the Colorado, well defined valleys now abandoned
through dessication, to be described later. Probably this change
of climate was coincident with the change registered in Lake
Bonneville, and consequently with the disappearance of the conti-
nental glaciers. During the moist period the soil was clothed with
vegetation and the rains were more uniform and less violent than at
present. Under the present conditions nearly every rain in the
serai- arid region comes as a heavy fall, and, striking the barren
plains, transports much sediment. An arid type of arroyo-like
drainage has replaced the more perfectly developed drainage of the
earlier period.

It seems to me quite certain that the extensive flood plains of the
forested area are the result jjartly of a change in climate to more
arid, partly of a stage in development when the overburdened con-
dition of the rivers has been reached. "What effect the Llano Esta-
cado, which Professor Hill considers Quaternary Lake beds, may
have in this connection I am unable to say. It would in all proba-
bility add one more factor to the pioblem and this another source of

826 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

sediment supply. The slight submergence of the coast line has
merely increased the tendency to build flood plains.

(d) Origin of Forests. — The rolling Tertiary area is a forested
area unlike the coastal prairies on the one side and the Cretaceous
plain on the other. I am unable to say definitely why this is so.
The soil is more sandy and consequently more porous than that of
the Cretaceous and this in all probability is the reason why forests
exist here.'"" The coastal strip is entirely too wet for forest growth.

(e) Rio Grande Embayment. — I have entirely omitted the con-
sideration of the Rio Grande embayment for the reason that I have
no personal knowledge respecting it, and indeed little is known
about it. It is evident that the lower Rio Grande was estuarine in
Tertiary times, but of the extent and nature of this I am unable to
speak.

4 — The CRtTACEOUs Grand Prairie.

(a) Topographic Description. — Professor R. T. Hill has so fre-
quently described this region^ ^ from various standpoints that I feel
called upon to make in large measure merely a brief summary of
his results. This great Ci'etaceous plateau is in reality made up of
two plateaus separated by a quite continuous scarp, the Balcones
scarp of Hill, in part. That portion of the plateau which lies to the
east of this escarpment is called by him the Black Prairie region,
while the name Grand Prairie is assigned to that part which lies to
the west. The Black Prairie is a gently undulating plateau with
varying width, merging to the east into the forested area, to the
west ending abruptly at the base of the scarp. The soil is black
and sticky when wet, whence its name, the Black Waxy Prairie.

The scarp is in part a scarp of erosion, but a fault scarp in the
vicinity of Austin, and to the southwest as far as the Rio Grande.
It forms a marked topographic feature, a rather abrupt wall rising
to a height of two or three hundred feet. The fact that the fault is
so plainly indicated in the topography seems to point to a recent
origin, though this is advanced only tentatively. A number of large
springs occur along the fault line.

'"'Penrose states (First Ann. Rept., Texas Geol. Survey, 1889, p. i)) that the
early settlers found this rer;ion much less densely timbered than at present. This
was piriiCLilarly the case on the uplands. He suggests as an explanation of this
the habit which the Indians had of burning the tall grass in their search for
game.

2iSee particularly. Am. Geol., Vol. V, 1890, pp. 9-29-

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELrillA. 327

Nearly coincident with this line are a series of volcanic knobs,
the Shumard knobs of Hill, and referred by hini-^ to marine vol-
canoes in the Cretaceons sea. It is not impossible that there exists
here an old Cretaceous fiiult line, a line of weakness which in the
Tertiary elevations furnished a slipping plain from which the pres-
ent fault of the Balcones resulted. The Shumard knobs at present
exist as a series of low, w^ell-rounded hills rising out of the prairie,
and made up of nepheline basalt.

The Grand Prairie proper consists of a series of nearly horizontal,
gently east-dipping, alternating hard and soft beds of lower Creta-
ceous. Its eastern margin is regular, and coincides with the western
margin of the Black Prairie. On the western edge, on the other
hand, the escarpment is one of extreme irregularity and vveird
beauty. The Colorado River and its tributaries have here cut
through the Cretaceous and reached the underlying Palaeozoic rocks ;
and the young drainage, intensified by the sub-humid conditions of
rainfall, has caused a marvellous complication of buttes, mesas,
irregular parks, and projecting promontories. The young drainage
has cut down to the base of the Cretaceous, but subrenal denudation
has not been able to keep pace with the down-cutting, and flat-top-
ped divides remain between the streams. A hard stratum of lime-
stone caps these buttes and mesas and is largely responsible for the
type of topography. This irregular escarpment almost completely
surrounds the region, so aptly called the Butte or Denuded region
by Professor Hill, and far away from the scarp, out on the Carbon-
iferous strata, isolated buttes, remnants of the former Cretaceous
covering, still remain.

(6) Tlie Cross Timbers. — This Grand Prairie region is treeless
except for two narrow strips, the Cross Timbers, which extend
approximately north and south across the prairie. Along the
streams and in the rougher parts of the area live-oaks and other
Texas trees grow in small groves or in isolated patches. The Cross
Timbers early attracted the attention of the settlers and many spec-
ulations have been indulged in to account for their existence.
Loughridge, for instance, in the Tenth Census report states that
these occupy two old abandoned river beds. Hill has, however,
shown- ^ that this is not so, for the timber areas occupy two sandy
strips which are not river beds but merely the outcrop of sandy
layers in the Cretaceous.

'■".■\m. Geo!., Nov. 1891. pp. :>8r)-294.
^'Am. J. Sci., April, LS87.

328 rPvOCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Hill ascribes their presence here to the influence of the sand
which, by its porous nature and the fact that it is a storehouse for
moisture, renders tree growth possible, whereas the clays of the prai-
rie are too close grained for forest growth. I find myself unable to
agree with Prof. Hill on this point, for I believe the cause of
the absence of forested areas on these plains is to be found in the
habit which the Indians had of setting fire to the prairies in order to
facilitate the search for game."* INIy reason for the belief is that
wherever in this region, for any reason, the growth of grass is sparse,
forests or groves or scattered trees grow. In the Carboniferous
area, enclosed in part in this Grand Prairie, the hill sides are
almost invariably covered with a sparse tree growth, whereas the
low undulating divides are treeless, although there is very little if
any difference in character of soil, except that the hill sides are
more rocky. This is true on both limestone and sandstone soils. It
seems to me much more reasonable to suppose that, being sandy,
these areas supported a growth of vegetation too sparse to readily
spread the prairie fires and were consequently protected from them
and therefore are forested. From my view of the Cross Timbers in
a drive across them I feel confident that a fire could not long burn
in them, for they are low scrub oaks and very much scattered.

(c) Rejuvenated Peneplain. — The drainage of the Cretaceous pla-
teau is young, or, more i^roperly, rejuvenated. There are great
areas of Cretaceous removed, so much indeed that I think it
extremely unlikely that it has all been removed in the present cycle.
The stripping of the covering from the central Palaeozoic prairie,
the removal of the upper Cretaceous beds from the Grand Prairie,
and the uncovering of the Shumard Knobs and their subsequent
denudation are hardly in keeping with the supposition that this
work has been done by young streams. My acquaintance with the
drainage of the Cretaceous Grand Prairie is so slight (being confined
to the vicinity of Austin with the exception of one or two trips
across it on the railroad) that I cannot state as a definite fact the
history of the region which I suspect ; but there is a line of reason-
ing which renders it highly probable that before the Tertiary eleva-
tion the Cretaceous was reduced nearly to sea level. It is as follows: —
In the first place the vast denudation mentioned above suggests
long continued erosion. At the beginning the Cretaceous was at
least seven hundred feet lower than at present, and this condition
2*Shaler,— Aspects of the Earth,— New York, 1889, p. 287-

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 329

remained at least until the close of the Eocene, possibly to the begin-
ning of the Quaternary. Such a lapse of time must have been
represented by erosion amounting almost if not quite to base-level-
ling. It is moreover probable that the interior of Texas was very
different from the present as regards geography. Portions of it
were beneath the sea or in an inland sea condition. This applies par-
ticularly to the Trans-Pecos region and the Staked Plains. It was
also, in all probability, much lower than at present, even more than
seven hundred feet lower, for as yet the growth of the Rocky ]Mount-
ains had hardly begun. It was probably this growth which raised
the Tertiary above the sea, this elevation being represented by
seven hundred feet or more at the margin of the Tertiary sea. Since
the elevating force was to the west the elevation consisted in a tilt-
ing, the elevation increasing in the interior. This is shown by the
dip of the beds of the Cretaceous and Tertiary.

If this line of argument is correct the interior of Texas Avas lower
than at present by more than a thousand feet, hence the land to be
base-leveled was less both in thickness and in areal extent. This
renders base-levelling of Tertiary times more probable. An exami-
nation of the field with this possibility in mind ought to show evi-
dence of this condition. The only field evidence corroborative of
this hypothesis Avhich I am able to give is a point which is very
noticeable in the region which I have studied in some detail, namely,
the Carboniferous. The rivers in this section, though young at
present and consequently very rapid in flow, instead of pursuing
direct courses, follow rock walled channels remarkable for their
meandering. This is strikingly shown in the Brazos and the Colo-
rado in the region under consideration. It seems difficult to explain
these meandering courses upon any other supposition than an
inheritance from a former plain.

I believe that further physiographic studies of the Texas region
will show that at the close of the Cretaceous there was an elevation
due to a recurrence of the mountain growth of the old buried
mountainous areas of central Texas, which raised a portion of the
Cretaceous above the sea. This portion, now known as the Cen-
tral Denuded area was a moderately low land, which, during Ter-
tiary times, suffered extensive denudation, becoming a peneplain. The
Rocky Mountain elevation added to this area the plateau to the
west and the Tertiary to the east, and by rejuvenation gave the
streams new life and new tasks with which they are now wrestling.

21

330 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Whatever the former condition of this area, the drainage is at
present in a state of youth or early adolescence. Larger rivers,
such as the Colorado, flow in deep canons, sometimes with almost
vertical walls and with small flood plains, sometimes with none.
The river flow is rapid, and the channel is at times obstructed with
rapids. Into these larger valleys side streams empty through nar-
row canons with rapid slope, and the divides have not been
reduced to a state of tolerable permanency but often remain gently
rounded broad topped areas. This is particularly true of that jtart
of the prairie immediately to the west of the Balcones scarp, —
another suggestion of the recency of this fault. In the denuded
Palaeozoic area other conditions exist, as I shall attempt to show
shortly ; in the lower lying Tertiary area to the east, the beds being
softer, the elevation less, and the streams overburdened, the topo-
graphy, as has been already stated, is less abrupt, less distinctly
young, and the streams, though rapid, are not carving their chan-
nels deeper but are building them higher in order to establish a pro-
file of equilibrium, a slope down which the sediment load can all be
carried.

5. — Central Pal.t.ozoic Denuded Area.

(a) Topograjilnc Description. — In this region there are three dis-
tinct classes of topographic relief, the result of erosion upon three
different classes of rock, the Silurian, Carboniferous and Cretaceous.
The Silurian, with its inherited rugged topography of pre-Cretaceous
age, has, since the removal of the Cretaceous, been exposed to quite
rapid denudation, because of its greater elevation. Consequently
the Silurian area is a region of marked topographic diversity, and
this feature tends to be preserved because of the great durability of
the rock. Not only is this varied outline brought about by eleva-
tion, inherited relief and the hardness of the rock, but also because
of the complicated stratigraphy which in a measure guides the ero-
sion.

One can, in a measure, tell the differenee between the Silurian
and Carboniferous by the topographic outline, for the hills of the
latter are more broadly flat-topped, though by no means as strik-
ingly so as the Cretaceous. The butte and mesa type of erosion so
characteristic of the Cretaceous in this region is so entirely absent
from the Carboniferous that generally no difiiculty is experienced
in discriminating between Cretaceous and Carboniferous by the
topographic features alone.

1893.] XATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILABELPHIA. 331

The Carboniferous has inherited from Pre-Cretaceous time a base-
levelled surface, and where the Cretaceous has only recently been
removed the Carboniferous hills are broad and flat-topped. All of
the Carboniferous, excepting that close to the larger streams, might
be said to have been recently uncovered ; but generally the surface
is more or less carved by recent erosion which has destroyed much
of the inherited topographic individuality. In San Saba county,
however, about midway between the Colorado and San Saba Rivers,
there is a long flat-topped divide extending for a distance of twelve
miles in an east and west direction, but in places somewhat destroyed
by the headwater erosion of some small creeks. This divide is
approximately the Pre-Carboniferous land surface, and that it has
very recently been uncovered is proved by the fact that these hill-
tops are all somewhat littered with pebbles of the Trinity (lower-
most Cretaceous) conglomerate — the last remnant of the Cretaceous
covering. The flat-topped divide is less than a mile in width.
For the conquest of this the small tributaries of Richland Creek are
combating with some small creeks tributary directly to the Colorado.
The latter have previously had the best in the contest and have
pushed the divide back to within three miles of Richland Creek.

Away from the divide, and nearer to the center of strong erosion,
that is near the large streams, the Carboniferous is very much cut
up into sharp hills and deep valleys and this feature is now extend-
ing into the higher and more remote regions. Where denudation
of this strong type has been for some time in progress in the Car-
boniferous area, two distinct types of topography have arisen, one
in sections where the bed rock is of quite uniform character, the
other in regions of greater lithologic diversity. The great sandstone
area of San Saba county is a typical example of the former ; and
here sharply rising hills with deep valleys on the several sides have
resulted. In portions less exposed to denudation the surface is
gently undulating.

Where the lithologic character is diverse, long hills running
northeast and southwest with steep blufts on the southeast side
result. This is the direct result of the effect of strike and dip, and
furnishes an excellent example of monoclinal shifting of divides.
In Coleman County the topography is distinctly of this type because
here there are alternating beds of soft clays and hard limestones
with a gentle dip to the northwest. The hills are step-like, and in
travelling across the county one rises by a steep slope from one

332 proceedi>:gs of the academy of [1893.

plain to another, the face of the slope being clay, littered with
bowlders dropped down from the overlying limestone stratum which
forms the floor of the plain above. If these beds were horizontal
there would be here a butte and mesa topograpliy instead of a step-
topography.

Almost completely surrounding this area is the irregular Creta-
ceous escarpment with its buttes and mesas, and, upon the Carboni-
ferous itself, often many miles from this scarp, are degraded rem-
nants of Cretaceous in isolated buttes, or small mesas, or in degraded
patches the last remnants of former buttes. These buttes are cap-
ped by a hard limestone and once this is cut through and destroyed
the complete destruction of the Cretaceous is easy, since the major
part of the beds beneath are soft and quite incoherent. These
buttes and mesas are here because they are divides between streams,
and, as at the divide the development of the stream is least rapid, so
here at the divides the removal of tlie Cretaceous covering has been
least complete.

(6) Peculiarities of Creek Erosion. — The stream valleys of the
central Texas region furnish interesting peculiarities, the result, in
large measure, of the peculiar rainfall conditions. During the
winter which I spent there, from November to February inclusive,
there was not a single rain that raised the volume of the stream per-
ceptibly; but in the spring and summer the country is liable to
excessive rains and the streams to excessive floods. For the greater
part of the year little erosive work is done but occasional floods do
much more in a few days than is done during the entire year in a
rainy country. The violence of this erosion is everywhere shown in
the creeks both by the character of the bars and other deposits and,
in the larger streams, by the presence of rafted logs well up in the
tops of the pecan trees. On the Colorado I have seen large logs
lodged in the trees fully fifty feet above the low water surface of the
river.

Creek erosion under these circumstances differs in some minor
respects in different parts of the region, ])articularly in the sandstone
and limestone regions. In the Silurian, for instance, where the
rocks are chiefly marble, the creek valleys are deep, precipitous and
jDicturesque, with blufl^s and isolated columns of limestone, and, over
all, a beautiful mat of moss and ferns. Some of these valleys are
fully seventy-five feet deep, yet, during the greater part of the year
no water flows in these creeks, or, at the best, only a small, clear
stream slowly trickles down. The water stands in pools and slowly

1893.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 333

trickles for a short distance from pool to pool. The pools are gen-
erally rock walled but have not been formed in the manner of pot
holes. The original beginning of a pool may have been after the
manner of mechanically formed pot holes or may have been from
some chemical weakness of the rock. Some of these pools which are
many yards in extent and very irregular, are plainly the result of
corrosion chiefly, a process which is continually extending the area
of the pool since the water is constantly standing in it. Small
waterfalls of similar origin are quite prevalent ; but nothing shows
the effect of corrosion as well as the undercut terraces common in
the limestone of the Silurian, Carboniferous and Cretaceous. These
terraces, which are in the form of long caves parallel to the course
of the stream, mark the ordinary high water stage of the stream.
They bear a general resemblance to some sea caves and in some
cases are of mechanical origin where the high water stage coincides
with some lithologic weakness, as is often the case in the Cretaceous,
but, more frequently, and particularly in the Silurian and Carboni-
ferous, they are the direct result of corrosive action of flood water.
Sometimes one or two of these benches, somewhat destroyed, by sub-
»rial denudation, exist on the bluffs above the one at present form-
ing, marking former high stages when the river bed was higher. In
these creek bluffs, from ten to fifty feet above the creek bed, may
also be seen actual caves extending far into the wall, marking the
former existence of underground streams or springs at a time when
the bed of the creek was much higher than at present. Springs,
perhaps similar to what these formerly were, are quite common in
the Silurian, as for instance, in Wallace Creek where several large
springs bubble up from the creek bed at the base of a high bluff" of
Silurian magnesian marble.

The streams of the sandstone region, of which Antelope Creek in
Mills County may be taken as a typical example, present the same
general features as those in the limestone ; but the walls are rarely
as steep and high and caves are seldom seen. This is the natural,
result of the difference in lithologic character, and for the same rea-
son the pools are not of corrosive but of mechanical origin. In the
great supply of sediment produced, frequently from the denudation
of the Trinity conglomerate and sands of the lower Cretaceous, the
floods iind more material than can be carried away and the stream
bed is littered with bars and small deltas, which, during the greater
part of the year, form the enclosing sides of temporary pools, some-

334 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

times several liundred feet in length. Where the creek flows
through a flood plain of gravel the channel is between gi'avel
banks, generally less than thirty-five feet wide and twenty-five feet
deep. At flood time not only is the channel filled, but the sur-
rounding plain is covered with water for some distance, and during
these times the erosive work of the year is done.

(c) Effect of the Superimposition of the Colorado on the Silurian.

(?) Temporary Base Level. — The Colorado River and its tributa-
ries which drain this region, are superim2:»osed through the Creta-
ceous upon the buried Palseozoic. It so happens that the Colorado
itself has found, in its down cutting, a hard spur of Silurian marble
and it is now wrestling with this obstacle. Over this spur the cur-
rent flows with numerous rapids, and the stream is here very busy
deepening its channel ; the precipitous walls of its caiion, which
begin here, show that the work has for some time been in progress.
The softer Carboniferous rocks upstream from this, yield much more
readily and the stream above the Silurian is waiting for the pro-
gress of the work beh)W. The river is eroding on the Silurian but
is building up on the Carboniferous for a score of miles above the
natural dam, since the river is always heavily burdened.

This accident to the river has given rise to several interesting
peculiarities, not only the river itself but all its large tributaries being
influenced by the retardation. They have reached a temporary
base level, their mouths are widening and extensive flood plains are
being built. This is seen in the Pecan Bayou and in the San Saba
River. The latter in its upper course flows in a deep canon in the
Silurian where it is still at work eroding, but for eight or ten miles
from its mouth it has reached the temporary base-level and is not
at work eroding its channel.

The flood plain of the Colorado is frequently fifty feet deep and
is being rapidly built up. This is proved by buried trees, both dead
stumps and partly buried living pecans. In flood-time great quan-
tities of sediment are brought down from the headwaters and
deposited here and during the winter very little is done toward
removing this material, for even then the river is heavily burdened.

In a river of such habits as the Colorado the valley is, as would
be expected, j^eculiar. The ordinary channel, though quite wide
and deep, is incapable of holding even the ordinary floods. Such
floods, which may occur several times in a year and last for several
days, do not rise to the level of the flood plain proper, but

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 335

have carved out a channel in this flood plain nearly twice as Avide
as the natural channel. The greater spring floods extend even
above this channel and cover the neighboring flood plain. Thus
the valley of the Colorado is terraced, the first terrace being about
thirty-five feet above the bed of the low-water channel, and the sec-
ond, or flood plain proper, fifteen feet or thereabouts above the first.
The first or high water terrace is sometimes on both sides of the
river, though generally on one side better developed than on the
other. The second or flood plain terrace is usually well developed
on both sides. This form of terrace is not without its significance
in connection with some of the river terraces of the glacial belt.^^

The Colorado wdiich, as suggested above, is a young stream prob-
ably because of the rejuvenating influence of the Tertiary uplift,
shows all the signs of youth. In the hard Silurian not only is the
valley a canon, but the channel is marked by numerous rapids. On
the softer Carboniferous the canon is disappearing, particularly
where the retarding influence of the hard Silurian barriers is felt.
The tributaries, and the river itself above the temporarily base-
levelled parts, are rapidly at Avork, and deep and narrow canon val-
leys with rapid slope are the result.

(ii) Loss of Drainage Territory. — The influence of the Silurian
barrier has made itself felt in another respect. As has been stated,
the eastern border of the denuded area is an escarpment of Creta-
ceous of irregular form — a region of buttes and mesas. This
escarpment is a part of the valley of the Colorado and the minor
details of sculpturing are the result of the erosive work of the tribu-
taries to the Colorado. Only a few miles from the main river (six
to ten miles) there is a flat-topped divide separating the waters of
the Brazos from those of the Colorado. The former has tributaries
here that have to flow seventy-five miles before emptying into the
main river. In other words, the Brazos has pushed its conquest, by
headwater erosion, into the territory of the Colorado and has placed
the divide only a few miles from the latter.

The reason for this seems quite certainly to be the influence of
the Silurian barrier. This explanation will be found in more detail
elsewhere.-'' It is, briefly, that the two rivers, the Brazos and the
Colorado, are superimposed through the Cretaceous on the Pal?eo-
zoic, but the latter, encountering the hard Silurian, has had its down
cutting retarded, whereas the Brazos has had only the much softer

2»Tarr, Am. J. Sci., XLIV, 1892, pp. 59-61.

336 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Carboniferous beds to cut through, and these higher up in its
course. This has consequently given to the Brazos tributaries much
more power than is possessed by those of the Colorado. The Colo-
rado flows in a channel between eleven and twelve hundred feet
above sea-level, just above the Silurian, whereas the Brazos east of
here is only half that elevation.

(cZ) Adjusted Stream Cour-ies. — The valley of the Colorado in this
vicinity is remarkable for its serpentine course. In one place the
river flows in a bend six miles long where a cut-off" would reduce the
distance to two miles. Along the boundary of San Saba county the
river flows fifty miles, and, at the end of this distance, is only thirty
miles from the first point. The valley here is a canon, somewhat
degraded it is true, but nevertheless the serpentine course is one in
rock walls, not upon a flood plain. I have suggested in an earlier
part of this paper that this course may be in a large measure an
inherited course from a Tertiary peneplain, formed before the eleva-
tion recorded both by the Tertiary forested area and by the rejuven-
ated condition of the streams in the Cretaceous. The fact that the
Brazos has much the same peculiarity supports this hypothesis.

While I believe this to be a true cause I am equally convinced
that it is not the sole cause. The entire drainage system of the
Colorado in the denuded area is superimposed."' It is in conse-
quence not in accord with the revealed structure, for its course was
originally consequent on a Cretaceous surface, and this course is
now enforced upon it in spite of the altered condition. It is, how-
ever, a habit of rivers to attempt adjustment under such conditions
and to be influenced by the revealed structure ; and, as time goes
on, this adjustment becomes more complete. As I have shown in
the article cited many of the tributaries to the Colorado are quite in
accord with the Carboniferous structure, particularly in the regions
that have been longest exposed, and in the smaller streams. This
has given rise to strike valleys which, in the vicinity of the Creta-
ceous, change to unadjusted courses.

Dr. Comstock^' has called attention to the quite perfect accord of
the streams on the Silurian to the more complicated structure, this
being the result, in a large measure, of the longer exposure of this
region, by the early removal of the Cretaceous.

^STarr, Am. J. Sci., XL, 1890, pp. .359-362.

2"For a discussion of this subject see an article by the author in Am. J. Sci., XL,
1890, pp. 359-86:i.

28Second Ann. Report, Geol. Survey Texas, 1890, p. 064.

1893.] NATURAL scIE^'c^•:s of piiiladelphia. 337

The Colorado itself shows signs of attempts at adjustment. The
general course of the Colorado is across the strike of the Carbonifer-
ous, but in several of the loops the two long sides are in the direc-
tion of the strike while the short side is at right angles to this. The
river is there locally in adjustment. While this may be accidental,
it seems hardly possible when we take into consideration the
number of instances where it may be noticed.

(e) Summary of the History of the Colorado. — To briefly summa-
rize the history of the Colorado in this region, as I interpret it, it
may be said that the river appears to have begun upon the Creta-
ceous which in this region was first to be raised above the sea, at the
close of the Cretaceous. The long stand indicated by the Tertiary
dei)osits gave the rivers time to reduce the elevated portion approx-
imately to base-level, and the present serpentine courses of the
streams are an inheritance from this period.

The late Tertiary elevation of seven hundred feet, and probably
more, rejuvenated the streams, and this accounts for the signs of
youthfulness now apparent. The later Quaternary elevation has pro-
duced no marked effect here. The Colorado, being superimposed
upon the Silurian, is retarded in its development and has been
robbed by the Brazos of much of the drainage territory which would
normally belong to it. It has also, above the barrier, been reduced
to a temporary base-level and its canon is being degraded and its
channel even being built up. Both the smaller tributaries and the
Colorado itself are adjusting themselves to the structure of the Car-
boniferous upon which they have been superimposed.

G. — The Arid Plateau.

(a) Topographic Description. — My knowledge of the plains is
confined to a single journey across them by wagon and this descrip-
tion must therefore be very general ; but the plains are very monot-
onous and one becomes acquainted with their general physical fea-
tures even in such a hasty reconnoissance. It is a great semi-arid
phuu, truly arid in the west, with isolated buttes here and there.
These buttes are in part of Cretaceous strata, but there are many
formed of Permian beds. They are the remnants of layers which
were once continuous. The greater part of the area is Permian
and the soil is red while the water is alkaline or saline for the rea-
son that these beds are inland sea depcsits.

The Staked Plains cross the line of the Texas and Pacific railway
in the neighborhood of jNlarienfeld presenting here a low wall or

338 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

escarpmeut ; and about fifty miles west of here is another escarp-
ment, facing west, which makes the western edge of the Llano Esta-
cado. These plains are narrow here, this being the southern angle
of the triangle formed by these bounding escarpments. The plains
themselves are gently undulating and unscored by erosion. Farther
north they are traversed by deep canons, but here almost no drain-
age lines are apparent,

(b) River Valleys Abandoned through Dessication. — A careful
study of these plains along the eastern part of the Llano Estacada
will reveal some interesting facts, and I believe it is to the drainage
lines that we will have to look for a solution of the history of this
region. I can do no more than throw out a hint. The streams have
carried more water than at present. This may show nothing more
than a decrease in rainfall, or it may be the key to a complicated
history.

From the Red Fork of the Colorado River, near Colorado City,
to the Pecos, a distance of not less than one hundred and seventy-
five miles, there was not, in April, 1890, a single flowing stream, yet
the maps show several large branches of the Colorado crossing the
line travelled. Three of these in particular, Girard Creek and
two branches of the Concho River, are on the map made to rise far
up in the Staked Plains. The Concho I crossed without being
aware of the fact, for the valley of each branch is a broad valley
with gently sloping sides and no channel. This is not a case of
" arroyo " type of drainage, that is, a channel which occasionally
carries floods. It is an old abandoned valley.

Girard Creek, which I was able to study more carefully, is of the
same type, but less distinctly dessicated, being intermediate in degree
of abandonment between the Colorado proper and the Concho.
From Big Springs westward for six miles the valley averages a mile
in width and is bounded by degraded bluffs from fifty to one hun-
dred feet in height. There is no channel, but the valley bottom is
a series of alkaline flats of the playa type, between cone deltas
formed by the wash from the valley sides. These alluvial cones
frequently extend completely across the valley and are overgrown
by mesquite, showing quite plainly that no flow of water occurs in
the valley. The flats between these cones resemble in appearance
the estuarine marshes of the northeastern coast. Below Big Springs
the channel is clear, and the drainage is young, being of the strong

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 339

arroyo type of the arid regions. I am puzzled to know the reasons
for these peculiarities.

(c) ^Eolian Deposits i)i the Pecos Valley. — At the western base of
the Staked Plains, along the escarpment of the Pecos Valley there
is an extensive teolian deposit about fifteen miles in width. Profes-
sor Hill" states that this strip of sand is fully one hundred miles in
length, extending up into Eddy County, New Mexico. It is plainly
due to the prevailing west winds (as suggested by Hill) which have
heaped the sands here at the base of the escarpment. It is the most
absolute desert waste I ever chanced to see. Crater-like pits and
cones of the sand dune type are here most perfectly developed, and
the sparse sand-plant growth serves only partially to keep the sand
in place.

It was my ill-fortune to be obliged to study this deposit quite
carefully, for my team Avas unable to carry the loaded wagon over
the sandy trail into which the wheels sunk, often to the hub. The
difficulties of the trip were increased manifold by the sharp grades
caused by the pits and cones, and by the shifting sands. Abandoned
wagons proved that I was not the first to find the difficulties of the
sandy strip. Being informed of the existence of a ranch a dozen or
fifteen miles to the north I started on horseback in search of aid.
Mile after mile I travelled in the hot sun with the drifting sand
blowing in my face. Everywhere the same scene was before my
eyes, the escarpment to the east being my only topographic guide.
At last I turned back unsuccessful in my search. My tent was
banked up with sand, sand was on everything and in everything.
At night the eddies of wind would start whirls of sand within the
tent, and cooking was quite out of the question. "With four horses
I was barely able to get ray wagon, not a very heavy one, across this
strip of sand.

80 far as I know this deposit is unique in this country in point of
size. Blown as it is quite constantly at the face of the escarp-
ment it must be a powerful agent of erosion, and it is not impossi-
ble that this escarpment owes its present position in large measure
to seolian action. The Pecos River is tw'enty-five or thirty miles
away and though this was undoubtedly the originator of the escarp-
ment, its present position is due to recession, and, I believe, recession
brought about in part by the continual blowing of sand at its base.

29Hill, Am. Geol., Vol. VII, 1891, p. 369.

340 PROCEEDIXGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

7. — The Trans-Pecos Region.

(a) Topographic Description. — This is almost a terra incognita.
It is in brief a region of mountains and basins, the highest mountains
being the Guadalupe Mountains which extend from New Mexico
into Texas. This is a faulted monocline, rising to the south, where,
at Guadalupe Peak, it has an elevation of fully 8,000 feet above sea
level and 3,000 feet above the plateau, being terminated by a sheer
precipice 2,000 feet in height. It is a mountain of Carboniferous
limestone faulted in the Avestern side. Other mountains are associa-
ted with igneous action, but our knowledge of them is extremely
limited.

(i) Erosion in the Guadalupe Mountaiiis^'^ — I introduce here a
few notes on the topography of the Guadalupe Mountains taken
during a brief sojourn there. The dip of the strata is to the east,
gently at the base of the mountains, increasing to an angle of fifteen
degrees or thereabout, then becoming nearly horizontal to the west
bounding fault beyond which the dip is steeply west. The west
dipping rocks, the downthrow of the fault, form the western foot
liills. The drainage is chiefly to the east, being consequent on the
structure, and therefore long canons enter from the east well up
to the western edge of the mountains, and the Avest floAving streams
are small and short.

Of the east flowing streams McKitterick canon is a typical exam-
ple. For two miles from its exit from the mountain, this mountain
gorge is accessible to wagons, but beyond this travel on foot is possi-
ble only Avith difficulty. It is extraordinarily rough, being bounded
by precipices and steeply sloping sides rising to a height of fully
two thousand feet, and the valley is littered Avith huge bowlders and
fragments of the cliff' Avhich have dropped down fiom the valley
side. The slope of the valley walls is rarely less than thirty degrees
and there are sheer precipices of magnesian limestone rising to a
height of from one thousand to eighteen hundred feet. There are
several hundred of these precipices and it is only rarely that the
mountain top is accessible from the interior gorges. There is no
soil on these slopes which are either bare bed rock or bowlder
strewn. The vegetation is of the arid type, except in the shaded
valleys or well up on the mountain top, Avhere fair sized pines and
cedars grow. Snow accumulates in the canons but disappears in

^ See Bull. 3 Texas Geo!. Survey, 1892, Reconnoissance of the Guadalupe
Mountains, by R. S. Tarr.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 341

early spring, and high up in the mountain rains are frequent during
the spring and summer. In nearly all the canons there are ever-
flowing springs which furnish a stream of cold water ; but this dis-
appears near the exit of the mountain stream and bevond the
mountain the valley is a broad bowlder-strewn channel carrying
water only spasmodically. A rain in the mountains suddenly fills
the channel with a seething torrent, which advances with a solid
front like a Avave, and the force of these floods is shown by the large
pebbles and small bowlders of the mountain limestone in the stream
channel, many miles from the mountain.

That the valley is being rapidly deepened in the mountain is
proved by the occurrence of a cemented conglomerate, a river bed
conglomei-ate, clinging to the sides of the canon at an elevation of
fifty feet above the present channel. A similar conglomerate is
now forming in the channel. Most of the annual erosion is done in
a very short period of time, since during most of the year only a
small, clear stream of spring water flows for a short distance. Dur-
ing the remainder of the year the down cutting is chiefly done by
corrosion and this mainly in the upper course. The stream is
strongly impregnated with lime, and as it descends and is subjected
to evaporation the lime solution becomes supercharged and a tufa-
ceous deposit is formed. Thus in the lower two or three miles the
stream flows in a cemented pebbly bed while above this it flows
chiefly on bed rock in a corroded valley. The tufaceous deposit
encloses vegetable remains as well as pebbles.

Corrosive work is well shown in the hillsides, for the compact
limestone is ridged and furrowed into an almost perfect imitation,
in miniature, of mountain structure of accentuated topography.
So roughened is the surface from this cause that the rock has the
feeling to the feet and hands of a slaggy lava flow, and so perfect
is this resemblance that the ranchmen compare it with glass and
call it porphyry and granite, which led me to expect to find eruptive
rocks in the mountains.

(c) Quaternary Conglomerate. — Along the eastern base of the
mountains, extending well out on the [)lateau, is a conglomerate
composed of mountain pebbles and often cemented with a tufaceous
cement. This deposit is frequently many feet in thickness and
rests uuconformably on the Carboniferous. As the source is
approached, that is near the mountain base, the fragments become
larger and more angular. It has been inferred by some that this

342 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

represents a marine formation of Quaternary age, but Avithout being
able to disprove this I would suggest another cause which seems
equally possible. It seems to me that this is no more than a gravel
slope formed in part from the wash from the mountains, but having
chiefly been brought down by the mountain streams and deposited
in their channels, which have since been abandoned. Just such
deposits are at present found in the broad stream valleys and if they
should abandon their course the jjresent stream bed deposits would
remain to cap the hill tops when the general level of the region was
lowered.

(c?) Dessicated Quaternary Lakes. — There are in this region many
lake basins of Quaternary age. One of these. Crow Flat Valley, I
have studied in part. The fiiult scarp of the Guadalupe Mountains
and the foot of the hills at its base form the eastern boundary of
this lake. The other enclosing walls I have not seen. It is in part
a synclinal valley formed by the dragging up of its strata on the
east by the Guadalupe fault. The Crow Flat is a level plain,
deeply filled with silt, at least forty feet deep, of a very fine quality,
and having shore lines and deltas on either side. Its extent I am
unable to state even approximately.

The lake is not quite extinct. It is a catchment basin for a large
area and water is found throughout the valley at a depth of from
five to forty feet in the lake silts. It is invariably alkaline, fre-
quently saline. In the lowest portion of the valley the water comes
to the surface in a great salt, marshy area, upon which a crust of
salt exists. Alkaline flats and marshy areas are common, and gyp-
sum deposits occur iu several places. There is a gypsum stratum
quite uniform in extent and in one place a dune-like accumulation
of gypsum sand. This is but one of a series of dessicated lake
basins in this region, none of which have been studied except in a
hurried reconnoissance.

(e) The Rio Grande and Bio Pecos. — I am unable to say any-
thing about the Rio Grande and Pecos Rivers in Texas. Both of
these rise in the northern regions, in the mountains, and enter
Texas as well defined and overburdened streams. Their Texas
tributaries are nearly all of the arid arroyo type, carrying water
only in times of heavy rains. Of these two large rivers I have seen
only enough to convince me that they have an interesting history,
but my knowledge of them is too indefinite to admit of the statement
of my suspicions concerning this history.

1893.] NATURAL SCIEN'CES OF PHILADELPHIA. 343

S. — AissEN'cE OF Large Lakes in Texas.

It is a striking fact, that in a State covering an area as great as that
•of Texas, there is not a single large lake. Almost every other geo-
graphic form is represented, often in great variety, and the climatic
■conditions vary from moist to arid.

The lagoons of the sea shore near river mouths and in other
favorable situations are perhaps the nearest approach to lakes in the
state. The young land, as yet hardly land, encloses temporary
lakes of saline water, which on the one hand are liable to destruc-
tion by the sea, or on the other to be quickly filled by the sediment
of the streams.

The Tertiary and Cretaceous plains have been raised above the
sea without sufticient structural features for lake formation. They
-consist of gently dipping strata and the lakes, which may have
-originally existed in early shallow inequalities, have been long since
removed by the establishment of drainage. In the flood plains of
the Tertiary district there are lakes of small size, according to Pen-
rose who writes^ ^ "lakes are of a very rare occurrence, and are
never seen except in river bottoms, where they form muddy lagoons
abounding in fish and generally fed by springs. They are often of
considerable depth, and are connected with the main river by nar-
row channels. " It seems probable that these lagoons are unfilled
portions of abandoned river channels. Penrose states that in the
Tertiary district he saw but one lake in the uplands, this amounting
to little more than a large spring, having a diameter of about two
Iiundred yards.

In central Texas the river erosion has uncovered the Carbonife-
rous from beneath the Cretaceous, and the drainage, although super-
imposed, is establishing itself without the presence of lakes. In this
section, in places where side streams have been held back by the
-effort of the main stream to overcome some barrier below, exten.-ive
flood plains have been built up in the lower part of the valley of
the small stream and here lagoons and oxbow lakes are sometimes
found. This is the case in the lower Pecan Bayou and San Saba
River, both tributaries to the Colorado. These streams are laked in
their lower course by the upbuilding of the flood plain of the Colo-
rado due to the retardation in its down-cutting caused by the
Silurian barrier. During the dry season all the medium sized
•Streams of the semi-arid belt become a chain of lakes of extremely

^'First Ann. Report, Texas Geol. Survey, L'^89, p. IL

344 PROCEKDI>'GS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

small size, for the water stands in pools of varying size and trickles
from one to another in a tiny stream. These pools are enclosed
sometimes by bars and deltas, sometimes by walls of solid rock, the
pools themselves being the result of corrosion.

The elevated plateau region west. of this and east of the Pecos
River contains a number of lake basins of sink-hole type, but no
water, or at best very little, stands in them. Very probably there
are sink-hole basins on the Cretaceous limestone in east central
Texas. Still farther west, in the Trans-Pecos region, there are
several large lake basins, abandoned either in part or entirely, by
dessication. Here lakes of consequent origin, the result of mountain
deformation, have existed and will exist again if the conditions of
rainfall become favorable.

Hence it is that Texas contains no large lakes : first, because there
are no regions of striking structural features, except one (the older
Palteozoic area) in which erosion has long been in progress, and its
lakes long since destroyed, and one in a region too dry for the
existence of lakes; and secondly, because erosion has tapped the
shallow lakes that formerly, no doubt, existed on the new Cretaceous
and Tertiary land. Sink holes in limestone regions frequently con-
taining small and shallow bodies of water, lagoons on the sea shore,
and oxbow lakes in the flood plains, constitute the major part of the
Texas lakes. To these might be added the expanded springs, the
laked streams caused by the overburdened condition of the main
stream (Pecan Bayou and San Saba River tributary to the Colo-
rado), and the chain of pools of the sub-hu^iid region, formed by
the dessication of the river. The salt lakes, playas and alkaline
marshes and flats of the Trans-Pecos region are the dessicated rem-
nants of lakes, formerly of greater size, just as the pools are the
result of the annual dessication of normally continuous streams.

9. — Summary.

The State of Texas is a series of prairies, plains and plateaus, low
coastal plains in the east, elevated plateaus in the center, and in the
extreme west a plateau broken by mountain ranges. A buried
land, now uncovered, forms a central hilly district. In climate the
State varies from the moist Gulf coast to the truly arid Trans-Pecos
region.

The evolution of the Texas region began, so far as our present
records can show, with an old Pala?ozoic or Pre-Palicozoic mount-
ainous land which was denuded at the beginning of Carboniferous

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 345

times to an old topographic form, not unlike the hilly region of
southern New England. The Carboniferous beds were added to
this land, by elevation, first as a coastal strip, even before the end of
the Carboniferous. A gathering in of shore lines formed a great
interior sea, later a completely land-locked dead sea in which Per-
mian beds were deposited ; and from the close of the Permian to the
beginning of the Cretaceous there was a period of denudation dur-
ing which the younger Palaeozoic beds were reduced to base-level
and the older mountainous areas still farther degraded. A rapid
subsidence lowered the entire region beneath the Cretaceous sea,
then at the close of the Cretaceous the land was elevated, possibly
by a renewal of the mountain-building forces of the central area.
The Rocky Mountain uplift caused an uptilting, raising the land
still higher, and adding the Tertiary coastal strip to the Cretaceous.
A later uplift added the coastal prairies and a recent slight subsi-
dence has completed this record of change, and has given us the
Texas region.

Drainage, established upon the part first raised, has stripped off
the Cretaceous covering from a portion of the buried Palaeozoic.
The consequent streams reduced this to an approximate base-level,
and by the more recent elevations these streams have been rejuve-
nated in the older region and have become extended streams in the
newer regions, and, in the latter, young consequent streams have
also been formed. The entire drainage is consequent, but the streams
of the central Palaeozoic are superimposed, and this has given rise to
several interesting peculiarities, among others the reaching of a
temporary base-level by the Colorado and its tributaries above the
Silurian barrier, the consequent degradation of its caiion, and the
formation of extensive flood plains. The Colorado through this
cause has also lost some of its drainage area, and the tributaries, and
the Colorado itself, are adjusting themselves to the revealed structure
upon which they are superimposed.

The climate of western Texas has also become more arid and
the effect of this is shown by the dessication of lake basins in the
Trans-Pecos region, the abandonment of streams in central west
Texas and in the growth of flood plains in the Tertiary forested
area.

23

346 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

BIBLIOGRAPHY.

Comstock, T. B. — Preliminary re^iort on the Geology of the
Central Mineral Region of Texas. First Ann. Kept., Geol. Survey
Texas, 1889, pp. 239-391.

Comstock, T. B. — Report on the Geology and Mineral Resources
of the Central Mineral Region of Texas. Second Ann. Rept., Geol.
Survey Texas, 1890, pp. 553-664.

Curtice, Cooper. — Discussion. — Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. 2,
1890, pp. 527-8.

Hill, R. T. — Present Condition of Knowledge of the Geology
of Texas. Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey, No. 45, 1887, 95 pp.

Hill, R. T. — The Topographv and Geology of the Cross Timbers,
etc. Am. J. Sci., 1887, Vol. 33, pp. 291-303.

Hill, R. T. — A portion of the Geologic Story of the Colorado
River of Texas. Am. Geol., Vol. HI, 1889, pp. 287-299.

Hill, R. T. — Events in Korth American Cretaceous History,
illustrated in the Arkansas-Texas Division of the Southwestern
Region of the United States. Am. Journ. Sci., XXXVII, 1889, pp.
282-90.

Hill, R. T. — A Preliminary Annotated Check List of the
Cretaceous Invertebrate Fossils of Texas, etc. Bull. 4, Geol. Sur-
vey Texas, 1889, pp. I-XXXI.

Hill, R. T. — A Brief Description of the Cretaceous Rocks of
Texas, etc. First Ann. Rept., Geol. Survey Texas, 1889, pp. 105-
141.

Hill, R. T. — Classification and Origin of the Chief Geographic
Features of the Texas Region. Am. Geol., V, 1890, pp. 9-29;
68-80.

Hill, R. T. — Pilot Knob: A Marine Cretaceous Volcano,
(with notes on its Petrographv by J. F. Kemp). Am. Geol., Vol.
VI, 1890, pp. 286-94.

Hill, R. T. — The Comanche Series of the Texas Arkansas
Region. Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. II, 1891, pp. 503-524.

Hill, R. T.— .Eolian Deposits of Eddy Couutv. New Mex-
ico. Am. Geol., Vol. VII, 1891, p. 369.

Hill, R. T. — Preliminary notes on the Topography and
Geology of Northern Mexico and Southwest Texas and New Mexico.
Am. Geol.. Vol. VIII, 1891, pp. 133-141.

Hill, R. T. and Penrose, R. A. F., Jr.— Relation of the
Uppermost Cretaceous Beds of the Eastern and Southern United
States. Am. Journ. Sci., XXXVIII, Dec, 1891, pp. 468-73.

Hill, R. T. — On the Occurence of Artesian, etc.. Waters in Texas,
etc. Washington, May, 1892.

Loughridge, R. H. — Report on the Cotton Production of
the State of Texas, etc. Tenth Census, United States, Vol. V, 1884,
pp. 658-831.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 347

Penrose, R. A. F., Jr. — A Preliminary Report on the Geol-
ogy of the Gulf Tertiary of Texas, etc. First Ann. Rept., Geol.
Survey Texas, 1889, pp. 5-101.

Penrose, R. A. F., Jr. and Hill, R. T.— Relation of the
Uppermost Cretaceous Beds of the Eastern and Southern United
States. Am. Journ. Sci., XXXVIII, Dec, 1891, pp. 468-73.

Shumard, Geo. G. — A Partial Report on the Geology of Western
Texas, Austin, Texas, 1886, 145 pp.

Taff, J. A. — Cretaceous Deposits of Trans-Pecos Texas. Second
Ann. Rept., Geol. Survey Texas, 1890, pp. 714-738.

Tarr, R. S. — Origin of Some of the Topographic Features
of Central Texas. Am. Journ. Sci., XXXIX, pp. 306-311.

Tarr, R. S. — A Preliminary Report on the Coal Fields of
the Colorado River. First Ann. Rept., Texas Geol. Survey, 1889,
pp. 201-216.

Tarr, R. S. — The Carboniferous Area of Central Texas. Am.
Geol., Vol. VI, 1890, pp. 145-153.

Tarr, R. S. — Superimposition of the Drainage in Central Texas.
Am. Journ. Sci., XL, 1890, pp. 359-62.

Tarr, R. S. — The Permian of Texas. Am. Journ. Sci., XLIII,
1892, pp. 9-12.

Tarr, R. S. — The Cretaceous Covering of the Texas Palaeo-
zoic. Am. Geol., Vol. IX, 1892, pp. 169-178.

Tarr, R. S. — A Hint with respect to the origin of Terraces in
Glaciated Regions. Am. Journ. Sci. XLIV, 1892, pp. 59-61.

Tarr, R. S. — Reconnoissance of the Guadalupe Mountains. Bull.
3, Texas Geol. Survey, 1892.

Walcott, C. D.— Discussion.— Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., Vol. II,
1891, pp. 526-7.

34s proceedings of the academy of [1893.

September 5.
Geo. H. Horn, M. D., in the chair.
Twenty-six persons present.

September 12.
Mr. Charles P. Perot in the chair.
Thirty-six persons present.

A paper entitled "A Tempered Steel Meteorite," by Edw.
Goldsmith was presented for publication.

The death of Prof. John M. Maisch, a member, the 10th inst.
was announced.

September 19.
Mr. Charles P. Perot in the chair.
Thirty-two persons present.

September 26.
Mr. Charles P. Perot in the chair.
Thirty-one persons present.

A paper entitled " The Odonate Genus Ortholestes," by Philip
P. Calvert, Avas presented for publication.

The death of Henry L. Taggart, a member, the 22nd inst. was
announced.

Julia B. Piatt of Chicago was elected a Correspondent.
The following was ordered to be printed : —

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 349

THE RADIUS OF CURVATURES OF THE CORNEA.
BY HENRY C. CHAPMAN, M. D. AND ALBERT P. BRUBAKER, M. D.

The classification of the sciences has at various times engaged the
attention of philosophers. Whether or not the thoughts of students
of biology have ever been directed to the mei-its of the classifications,
among others, of Bacon,^ Comte,^ Spencer,' the most superfiicial
thinker must have been impressed by the fact that whatever be the
logical order of the study of the sciences, the progress of any one
branch of science has depended largely upon the simultaneous
advance made in some closely or even remotely allied branch.

The influence exerted by the progress of physics upon that of
astronomy and biology through the invention of the telescope and
microscope respectively, the stimulus to mathematical research exci-
ted by astronomical discoveries, the influence of physics upon chem-
istry, may be cited as familiar examples. As a special instance
of the manner in which the diflerent branches of science are related
to each other, it may be mentioned that the method of measuring
the radius of curvature of the cornea by mean* of the ophthalmo-
meter is essentially the same as that made ase of by astronomers in
determining the angle subtended by the apparent diameter of a
celestial body by means of the heJiometer.

Though not perhaps generally known, there was submitted as long
ago as 1743 to the Royal Society a communication by Savery, giv-
ing an account of his invention of " A new way of measuring the
difference between the appareutdiameter of the sun .... with a micro-
meter placed in a telescope invented for that purpose." Savery's
paper was not, however, published at that time, it having been
apparently entirely forgotten by Bradley to whom it was referred.
Ten years afterward, during the year 1753, Short having learned
that Bouguer had given an account in 1748 to the Academy of
Sciences of Paris* of his invention of the heliometer, and wishing to
secure for his countryman the credit of the invention, called the
attention of the Royal Society, in whose Transactions^ it finally
appeared, to the long neglected communication of Savery.

1 De Augmentis Scientiarum.
^ Cours de Philosophic Positive.
•^ Genesis of Science Essays, 1808.

* Historie de L' Academic Royalc des Sciences a Paiis, MDCCLII, pp. 87, Mem-
oires p. 11.

^ Piiilosopliical Transactions, Vol. XLVIII, p. Kio.

350

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1893-

The construction of the heliometer is based upon the fact that while
an object appears single (Fig. 1) when viewed through two
object glasses of equal focal length placed side by side at the end of
a tube provided with a single eye piece, it will appear double
(Fig. 2) when the object glasses are displaced. As the two images
(Fig. 2) at the focus are separated from each other by a distance
equal to the distance of the centres of the object glasses, the dis-
placement of the latter as measured by a micrometer screw will give
the displacement of the angular diameter, (Fig. 2,
c d) of a celestial body. The angle subtended by
the apparent diameter of the sun, for example Fig.
2, c d, can then be determined by simply bringing
the two images of the sun in contact (Fig. 2) and
measuring the displacement necessary to accom-
plish this by a filar micrometer, the angular value
of the revolution of the screw being known.
A few years after Bouguer invented his heliometer which Lalande
used to determine the diameter of the sun, Dollond substituted for
the two object glasses the two halves of one object glass (Fig. 3, A B).
By means of this arrangement two images (Fig. 2, a b) are seen as in
Bouguer's heliometer, each semi-lens giving
an image except when the two serai-lenses
are juxtaposed, the two images being then
superimposed. By fixing the semi-lens A
and making the semi-lens B(Fig. o)slide over
it, the image a (Fig. 2) due to the semi-lens
A becomes also immovable. The distance
through which the semi-lens B (Fig. 3) is
moved in order to bring the image b (Fig.
2) due to it, in contact tangentially with
the image a and equal to the apparent
diameter sought, is measured by means of
a micrometer screw as in Bouguer's instrument. The value of the
angle under which the apparent diameter of the object (Fig 2, c d)
is seen can be thus determined.

In connection with the invention of the heliometer, it is interest-
ing as illustrating the influence of the progress of astronomy upon
physiology that the Observatory of Kouigsberg, to which Helmholtz
was attached as assistant when a young man, possesses one of the
finest heliometers ever constructed : that by Fraunhofer. Doubtless
this instrument suggested to Helmholtz the invention of the ophthal-

1893.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA,

351

mometer. It should be mentioned, however, that in the ophthal-
mometer as devised by Helmholtz" the two images of the object
are produced by means of two glass plates such as were suggested
by Clausen to obtain two images of a star. The ophthalmometer
as constructed by Meyerstein of Gottingen
consists of a small telescope (Fig. 4, T) the
objective of which, b, is enclosed within a
brass box C, the latter supported upon a
tripod and capable of being leveled in all
azimuths. The brass box contains two plane
parallel glass plates P^ P^ which are situated in
front of the objective of the telescope. By
means of a screw mechanism the glass plates
can be so turned around a common axis that
they can be brought either into the same plane
(Fig 5) or into two different planes (Fig. 6).
The angular deviation produced by the move-
ment of the glass plates just referred to can be determined by two
graduated wheels which rotate as the glass plates diverge from each
other to the one-tenth of a degree, the instrument being provided
with a verniei'.

By means of the ophthalmometer we are enabled to determine
the size of the virtual image produced when rays of light emanating

Mt=tl

a

d.

Fig. 4.
from an external object are allowed to fall upon the cornea and,
further, as we will show presently, by determining from the size of
such corneal image the radius of the curvature of the cornea. The
principle by which the size of the corneal image is determined by
the ophthalmometer is the same as already mentioned asthat of obtain-
ing the apparent diameter of a heavenly body by means of a helio-
meter. The only essential difference in the theory of
the two instruments is that while in the heliometer
one semi-lens alone moves, and moves in the same
plane with the other fixed semi-lens, (the displace-

Fig. 5.

^Archivfur Ophihalmologie. Uand ], Abth. II, S 1.

352

PEOCEEDIXGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1893.

ment being measured by a micrometer screw), in the ophthalmometer
both glass plates move, and move in different planes, the displacement
being deduced from the formula 1=2 T sin (a-b) in which a=the

cos b
angular deviation of the glass plates obtained experimentally.
Before developing the formula just mentioned and which is indis-
pensable for the working of the ophthalmometer let us first consider
the paths of such rays of light as, emanating from a luminous
object or its reflected image, pass through its two glass plates, the
latter making an angle with each other."

From a consideration of Fig. 7 it will be seen

^ that as the rays of light from the object a, falling

upon the glass plate P^ are projected subjectively

back to a^ those falling upon P- to a^ the object will

Fig. (i. be consequently seen double as a' a'-. Now if the two

images a^ a^ are brought into contact with each other tangential ly,

their total displacement, that is the sum of the displacement of the

r/ ,» A two images to the right and to the left,

will be equal to the size of the object.

That such must be the case becomes

at once apparent, if the object and

the two images are round bodies as

represented in Fig. 8, in which a b is

the displacement to the right, c d the

displacement to the left and a d the

diameter of the object.

It will be observed that while the
total displacement — a b + c d=a d the
diameter of the object, the distance
c b between the outer edges of the
two images is twice a d, or twice the
diameter of the object.

Such being the case it is evident
that if we can measure the total dis-
placement of the two images of the
object when the images are in contact we will then obtain the size of
the object.

Fig.

' It is unnecessary to say that as long as the two gla<is plates' are in the same
plane the luminous object being seen as a single image it is unnecessary to con-
sider the paths of the rays of light under these conditions.

1893.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

353

Let us consider now the development of the formula, I^^2 T
sin (a-b) in which I is the total displacement, T the thickness of

cos b
the glass plates, a the angle of incidence or angular deviation, b the
angle of refraction. Let A B C D (Fig. 9,) be one of the glass plates
placed in front of the objective of the telescope and a c an incident

ray emanating from the image
of the luminous object whose
size is to be determined. Such
being the case the ray a c,
according to the law of refrac-
tion, Avill be bent as c I toward
Fig. 8. the perpendicular u K as it

passes through the glass and away from the perpendicular as 1 1 and

parallel with a c as it emerges
from the glass. The angle
a c u will be equal to the angle
1 I m, parallel rays falling
upon parallel surfaces. Call-
ing the angle of incidence a
c u, A, and the angle of refrac-
tion I c K,B,we will have sin A
sin B
=iiidex of refractional '524
or sin A=sin B, from which

1-524
equation we can obtain the
value of B and cos B from
•'^'S- 9- trigonometric tables, A being

obtained by observation. Such being the relation of the ang-
les of incidence and refraction the point a to the eye of an
observer at 1 would appear to be at b, the glass plate effecting
therefore a lateral displacement of the point a to an extent a b
which is measured by determining the equal distance c f.

Inasmuch, however, as c f=c I sin c I f , i t follows that if we can
determine c I and sin c I f we will obtain c f or its equal a b. As K c
=cl cos B, it follows that cI=K C and as K C=the thick-
cos B

354 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893,

ness of the glass plates which is
kuown, we may call it T and
say therefore that CI= T .

cosB
Further the angle clf=h If
— h i c, but as h I f = u c a or A,
their sides being parallel, and
h i e=I c K or B they being
alternate angles it follows that
sin c I f=sin (A-B). Substitut-
ing now these values of c I and
sin c I f in the equation c f=c I
sin c I f we obtain c f or a b=T
sin (A-B). Inasmuch, however,

cos B
as there ai-e two plates in the
ophthalmometer and the size of
the image is equal to the dis-
placement to the left, plus that
Fig. 10. to the right, the size of the image

or I will be equal to 2 a b=2 T sin (A-B)

cos B
As it is essential in the working of the ophthalmometer by means
of the formula just developed, that the thickness of its two glass
plates as well at their index of refraction should be determined as
accurately as possible, the methods by which these contrasts were
obtained will be briefly described.

In determining the thickness of the glass plates a Pfister sphiiro-
meter was made use of, the general construction of which is well
shown in Fig. 10. The object to be measured in this instance, the
glass plate, was placed upon a little table at the top of the screw
(not represented in fig.) and the latter elevated until the glass plate
came in contact with the knife edge a. The level being then in
adjustment, the extent of the separation of the little table and the
upper knife edge or the thickness of the glass plates was then
obtained by observing the distance through which the screw had
descended, as given by the divisions on the scales and on the grad-
uated circle, each division of the scale corresponding to 2^ millimeter
each division of the circle to 1^7 millimeter. The following resume
of 25 determinations of the thickness of each glass plate proves the
accuracy of the method made use of: —

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 355

As the average thickness of the two glass plates is the same, viz. :
4"4015 mm., the result is what might have been anticipated since
the two glass plates were the halves of one plate.
Resume of 25 determinations of the thickness of the rir/ht and left glass
plates of the Ophthalmometer by the Spharometer.

Readings from the Instrument.

Corrected and reduced.

^—81

80
81

80

81

R.

1 error TO

5

4

2

0

1 error 1*0

0

8

0

8 error 0"7

1

2

3

6

1 error 0'9

1

4

2

3

8 error 0-8

9

0 error 0"8

L.

R.

L.

mm.

mm.

—81-2

4-4005

4-4010

•5

25

25

•6

20

30

•0

10

00

•1

00

05

•0

05

00

•8

00

40

•3

40

15

•2

40

10

•0

00

00

■0

05

15

•6

20

45

•0

25

15

•1

30

20

•0

45

15

•0

10

05

•6

10

35

•3

25

20

•2

15

15

•2

25

15

•0

00

10

•1

05

15

80-8

00

00

•9

00

05

•9

10

05

4-4015 mm. 4-4015 mm.
In determining the index of refraction of the two plates of the
ophthalmometer the sphiirometer was also made use of, its applica-
tion for this purpose being based upon the principle of the index of
refraction being equal to the ratio of the actual thickness to the
apparent thickness when viewed normally to the surface. Let us
suppose that a number of equidistant, parallel lines ruled upon a

356 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

glass, e. g. a stage micrometer, be viewed under the microscope and
when seen in focus, that a spirit level be placed upon the upper
ends of the microscope and of the screw of the sphiirometer,
the spirit level of the latter having been temporarily removed.
The upper ends of the two instruments being now at the same
level, let a reading be taken off the spharometer and, for
example, suppose it to be 46'16. Kow place upon the stage micro-
meter one of the glass plates of the ophthalmometer, the latter being
interposed between the lines and the objective of the microscope.
The tube of the microscope must now be elevated in order that the
lines may be brought again into focus. The upper end of the micro-
scope being now at a higher level than that of the spharometer, the
screw of the latter must now be raised until the upper ends of the
two instruments are again at the same level and a second reading be
taken which we will suppose, for example, to be 43"14. The differ-
ence between the two readings, 302=1"510 mm.,^ will be the distance
through which the microscojie was elevated in order to see the ruled
lines when the plates of the ophthalmometer were interposed between
the lines and the microscope. Now if this difference, 1-510 mm., be

deducted from the thickness of
the glass, 4*4015, and the remain-
der, 2*8915 mm., be divided into
the thickness of the glass, the
quotient, 1*5222, according to the
principle above enumerated, will
be the index of refraction sought.
Thus, for example, let Fig. 11,
represent the micrometer resting
upon the stage of the microscope,
A G, the actual thickness of the
plate of the ophthalmometer
interposed between the lines and
the microscope, then according
to theory and experiment A G —
A B=B G or 4*4015 mm.— 1*510

Fig. 11.

* Each division of the scale equals ^ of a millimeter.

Note. — The methods just described of delermining the thickness of the glass
plates of the ophthalmometer and their index of refraciion were suggested to the
authors by Professor A. W. Goodspeed of the University of Pennsylvnnia,
whose well known experimental skill is a sufficient guarantee of the accuracy of
the data submitted and the results obtained.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 357

mm.— 2'8915, A G=^ index of refraction or 4'4015 mm.=

BG 2-8915 mm.

l'5222=index of refraction.

The average index of refraction as obtained from ten experiments
with each plate of the ophthalmometer by the method just described,
was 1"5249, as shown by the following resume : —

Resume of experiments with sphdrometer and microscope to determine

the value of the index of refraction of the glass plates of the

ophthalmometer.

R. L.

1-5222 1-5276

1-5222 1-5276

1-5249 1-5249

1-5276 1-5249

1-5276 1-5222

1-5222 1-5222

1-5249 1-5276

1-5276 1-5249

1-5249 1-5222

1-5276 1-5222

1-5252 1-5246

1-5252
1-5246

2)3-0498

l-5249=index of refraction.
For the sake of simplicity, we have hitherto assumed that the
luminous object was single, two images being then seen by means of
the ophthalmometer when the glass plates of the latter were made
to diverge. In the practical working of the instrument it will be
found, however, that if three luminous objects be used, three gas jets
for example, placed at right angles to the long axis of the telescope,
six images being then perceived, the plates diverging, that it will be
easier to determine the displacement of the images than if one be
used. The principle involved, however, is the same whether one or
three luminous objects be used. This will be made apparent by
Fig. 12, in which the distance between the first image and a point
midway between the second and third images corresponds to a single
image, and 1 C and C 8' to the displacement of the images to the right

358

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

[1893.

and left respectively. The subject of the experiment upon whose eye
the light from the three gas jets falls, sits with the head resting in a
frame at a distance of about 90 centimeters from the ophthalmome-
ter, and looks directly at the center of the
frame supporting the three gas jets. Three
corneal images being then perceived by
the observer looking through the ophthalmo-
meter erect virtual, but reversed as in a look-
ing glass, the plates of the ophthalmometer
are made to diverge until the image 1'
reaches a point just midway between the
images 2 and 3. The original images, or
the distance between 1 and a point midway
between 2 and 3, being then doubled, the
angle of deviation of the plates, or A, is
then read off. The angle A, so obtained
experimentally, being substituted in the
formula 1=2 T sin (A-B) the size of the

cos B
image or I is then obtained by calculation
as shown by the following example :

1=2 T sin (A-B)

cos B
A=:32° 48', T=4-4015 mm. Index of refraction=l-5249
sin A
=index of refraction=r5249

sin B

sin 32° 48'

sin B

1-5249
log sin 32° 48'=9-733765
log 1-5249 =0-183241

log sin B =9-550524

B =20° 48' 30"
A— B=ll° 59' 30"

log sin (A— B)=9-317582
log cos B =9-970707

log2T

log I
I

9-346875
=0-944631

=0-291586
=1-957 mm.

1893.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

359

D

It has already been incidentally mentioned that the size of
the corneal image having been determined, we are enabled

thereby to deduce
the radius of the cur-
vature of the cornea.
This is accomplished
by means of the for-
mula d — I : I : : D :
R or R=2 D I in
•2 d— I

Fig. 13. which Fig. 13 R is

the radius .sought, D the variable distance of the luminous
object, the three gas jets, from the cornea C, I the size of the corneal
images as determined by the ophthalmometer, and d the constant
length of the luminous object 480 mm., that is the distance between
the first gas jet and a point midway betw^een the second and third
gas jets, the latter being separated by a distance of 80 millimeters.
The following example will illustrate the manner in which the
formula is used : —

R=2DI

d— I
D=900 mm. d=480 mm.
d=480-000
1= 1-957

1=1-957 mm.

d— 1=478-043
2 D=1800-
Log 2 D= 3-255273
Log I = 0-291506

3-546779
Log (d— I)r=. 2-679467

Log R == 0-867312

R = 7'367 mm.==radius of curvature of the cornea.
In connection with the formulae just made use of in determining the
radius of the curvature of the cornea, it may not be superfluous to call
attention to the extent to which the result so obtained will be affec-
ted by small errors made in determining the values of T, n, I, D, d,
incidental to experimentation. Thus, for example, if an error of
0'02 mm. be made in T, the error in n will amount to 0-0002 mm.
It is not necessary, therefore, to use the value of the thickness of the

360 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF " [1893.

glass plate T beyond the second decimal place, since the value of n,
or the index of refraction, cannot be measured beyond the third
decimal place. While an error of 2 mm. in the measurment of D
will affect R to an extent only of 0"016 mm., the same amount of
error in d will affect R as much as the 0*032 mm. An error of 0"02
mm. in T will involve only an error of 001 mm. in I, but an error
of 0"01 mm. in n will change I by as much as 0"02mm. Finally as
an error of 0'02 mm. in I will change the value of R by as much as
0"07 mm. it follows that of these different values that of n, or the
index of refraction, is the most important, the value of n affecting
that of R through I.

Resume of 50 experiments with the ophthalmometer.

Name.

Age.

Horizontal Meridian
Radius of Curvature.

Vertical Meridian
Radius of Curvatun
mm.

1.

A. E. H.

25

7-367

7-312

2.

J. B. L.

20

7-833

7-747

3.

E. E. S.

23

7-744

7-345

4.

W. W. K.

36

8-240

8-001

5.

C. E. P.

26

7-938

7-851

6.

W. H. S.

27

7-935

7-819

7.

C. R. C.

32

7-654

7-172

8.

W. H. L.

24

7-921

7-606

9.

A. A. E.

22

7-882

7-790

10.

G. J. M.

23

7-845

7-816

11.

E. J. C.

36

7-753

6-637

12.

S. R. H.

24

7-670

7-527

13.

S. J.

26

7-815

7-527

14.

M. W. M.

22

7-321

7.209

15.

H. 0. S.

20

8-259

7-305

16.

G. S.

20

7-438

7-212

17.

G. M. K.

25

7-890

7-629

18.

M. L.

26

8-993

7-789

19.

H. L.

27

7-572

7-430

20.

0. A.

19

7-861

7.572

21.

J.N.

27

7-648

7-676

22.

C.R.

24

7-803

7-515

23.

L. L.

24

7-249

7-277

24.

M. C. S.

22

7-745

7-377

25.

F. K. P.

21

7-816

7-498

26.

G. W. H.

26

8-170

7-935

IV. .c. Arad . X'a I . Sn , Plula . | rW) ,

Plate V.

Kdwin Sheppard.del.

■■jrn'.; Ha;ri?*SM,£ l.ith Phila

("IIAFM.W ON ('inP'l'OnnAXCIlIS

I'mc-.Mml Nal SriPlulu. |a!)3

CHAPMAN OX CRYP'roUH.WCIiUS.

;V»d.Nal.Sci.Plula.U10.1

fiiAPiMAX ON frAT'TcnjnAXcuirs^

Proc.Acad.Nat.Sci.Phila.1893.

Plate VIII.

i^^nni

M

A 1 2 4

5 6

,/J 13

^

<f^

12

10

3 4.

5 6 7

flffl ®0^^^'

u in

1 4 5

5 6 7

tf^

l?f

30 mi^j^ ^

E r^ 4 5 6

F 1 34

Edwin .bT-ieppard, del . OecS Harris ftScns t.ithPhiU

STERKI CWVALLONIA.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 361

7-962
7-678
7-448
7-436
7-441
8-190
7-180
8-166
7-336
7-799
7-012
7-637
7-399
7-384
7-596
7-519
. 7-361
7-421
7-433
7-743
7-405
7-345
7-572
7-543

27.

H. B. K.

20

8-169

28.

J. W. K.

25

8-087

29.

B. E. H.

21

7-736

30.

W. C.

21

7-531

31.

B. L.

22

7-613

32.

A. McG.

25

8-482

33.

C. R. G.

22

7-666

34.

J. B.

25

8-286

35.

C. K. F.

21

7-449

36.

G. H. J.

19

8-122

37.

W. N. H.

23

7-233

38.

W. B. R.

44

7-841

39.

H. E. C.

25

8-013

40.

J. H. W.

27

7-670

41.

E. L. H.

22

7-799

42.

A. C.

23

7-748

43.

F. 0.

20

7-760

44.

c. c.

24

7-791

45.

w. c.

23

7-659

46.

J. c.

25

7-802

47.

D. E. A.

24

7-605

48.

M. P.

21

7-803

49.

M. P. W.

27

7-744

50.

J. G.
Mean

19
1213=24-3

7-861

389-832=7

797 377-580=7-552

50 50 50

From the above resume it will be observed that, on the average in
young men at least, the radius of curvature of the cornea amounts
in the horizontal meridian to 7-797 mm., in the vertical meridian to
7-552 mm.

In conclusion it should be mentioned that the importance of deter-
ming the radius of curvature of the cornea, depends upon the fact
that its value, together with that of the indices of refraction of the
various refractive media of the eye, constitute the experimental data
for determining the cardinal points of the eye. By means of the
latter, the paths of the rays of light })assing through the media of
the eye, the position and size of the retinal images, etc., can be con-
structed or calculated, data indispensable to the comprehension of
vision and tlie practice of ophthalmology.
24

362 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

October 3.
Mr. John H. Redfield in the chair.
Thirty-two persons j^resent.

Papers entitled as follows were presented for publication: —
"On a Collection of Batrachia and Reptilia from South West

Missouri," by E. D. Cope.

"On the Batrachia and Reptilia of the Plains at Latitude 36**

30'," by E. D. Cope.

October 10.
Rev. H. C. McCooK, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.
Thirty members present.

Additions to a paper entitled, " New and little known Paleozoic
and Jurassic Fishes," by E. D. Cope, was presented for publication
in the Journal.

October 17.
Mr. Charles Morris in the chair.
Thirty-eight persons present.

A paper entitled, "On Cyphornis, an extinct Genus of Birds,"
by E. D. Cope was presented for publication.

The Publication Committee reported in favor of publishing an
addition to a paper entitled "New and little known Paleozoic and
Jurassic Fishes," by E. D. Cope in the Journal.

October 24.
Mr. Charles P. Perot in the chair.
Thirty-seven persons present.
The death of Charles Hacker, a member, was announced.

October 31.

The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Thirty-seven persons present.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 363

A paper entitled " Notes on some Snakes from Tropical America
lately living in the Collection of the Zoological Society of Phila-
delphia," by Arthur E. Brown.

The Publication Committee reported in favor of publishing a
paper entitled " On Cyphornis, an extinct genus of Birds," by
E. D. Cope, in the Journal.

The following were ordered to be printed: —

364 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

NEW NORTH AMERICAN MYXOMYCETES.
BY GEO. A. REX, M. D.

The Myxoraycetes described in this paper are in part new and
hitherto undescribed species, and in part well marked and stable
varieties of existing species.

OpMotheca wrightii B. &C. var. stipitata n. var.

Sporangia stipitate, reniform, globose or ellipsoidal ; stipes vari-
able iu height, sometimes mere plasmodic thickenings of the bases of
the sporangia, sometimes attaining through intermediate grades a
height of '5 mm., slightly tapering from below upward, of medium
thickness, black, and granulose or occasionally rugose on the surface ;
capillitium deep yellow, freely branched and combined to form a
long loosely meshed net ; threads provided with scattered short,
sharp and either straight or slightly curved spines; spores yellow,
10-12,7. in diameter delicately spinulose.

Fairmount Park, Philadelphia, Pa. (Harold Wingate.)

This very unusual and interesting variety is probably the first
recorded instance of a stipitate species occurring in the Perichoenacese.

It differs from the typical form of the species in the presence of
stipes, in the closer meshes of the net of the capillitium, and in the
shorter spines on the threads of the cai)illitium.

The sporangia, however, excejoting the stipes, are similar in every
respect to the globose and reniform sporangia of the ordinary sessile
form.
Arcyria magna n. sp.

Sporangia shortly stipitate, densely aggregated, growing either in
small clusters or in large effused masses many square inches in area;
individual sporangium elongated, cylindrical, tapering toward the
end, evanescent above with a small, pale yellowish-gray, funnel-
shaped permanent base or calyculus ; inner surface of calyculus
smooth, except very rarely a few scattered spinules are found under
high amplification ; stipes one mm. in height, tubular, the cavity
being filled with rounded plasmodic masses; capillitium much
elongated, about 12 mm. in length relaxed, drooping, tawny gray or
drab in color, attached slightly by a few threads to the bottom of the
calyculus, and forming a loose large-meshed network ; threads of
capillitium cylindrical, of uniform thickness, coarsely sculptured

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 365

with mingled lialf riugs and blunt spines. Spores dull gray (not
cinereous) in mass, colorless with reflected light, 7'5 to 8,a in
diameter ; epispores very thin showing under a high amplification
from 10-12 isolated irregularly scattered hemispherical papillse.

A. magna var. rosea.

Capillitiuni equally long as in the previous form, but less robust
in habit and more cylindric in shape: color of capillitium and
spores bright rose-red when recent ; sculpturing of spores and
capillitium like that of the previous form ; calyculus smooth ; spores
7'5,a in diameter.

Fairmount Park, Philadelphia, Pa.

The association of these two forms under one specific head is
justified by the history of the species considered in connection with
the fact of the essential accordance of the characters of the two forms
in their totalit}'.

The robust gray form was first found by the writer, growing
separately. A few days later it was found again on the same log
with clusters of the red form growing beside it. One month later in
another locality about a mile from the first, an extraordinarily large
growth of the gray form in large effused masses was found by Mr.
H. Wingate, also associated in a similar manner with clusters of the
red variety. In neither instance was there any intergradiug of
colors, nor did any of the clusters contain individuals of both colors-
AVhile these parallel histories might be considered as mere coinci-
dences, the correspondence of all the essential specific characters of
the two forms has led the writer to the belief of their specific connec-
tion at least, although not necessarily of their development from the
same plasmodiura.

This species is allied to A. mdans in the relaxed elongated capil-
litium, bi\t differs from it in the sculpturing of the capillitium and
calyculus. The capillitium-threads lack the minute vein-like retic-
ulation which covers the interspaces between the coarser half rings
and spines in A. nutans.

The calyculus of the red form is absolutely smooth except the lon-
gitudinal plications common to the eu-arcyrirc. In the gray form it
is practically smooth, there being but a few isolated spinules on its
inner surface. In A. nutans, however, the inner surface of the
calyculus is covered with an exquisitely beautiful sculptured reticula-
tion, coarse and venose below but grading above into a fine net with
polyhedral meshes sometimes having spinous prolongations project-
ing inwardly from the intersections.

366 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

The peculiar spore wartiug of ^. magna can be found with a high
degree of amplification in A. punicea, A. nutans and several other
species of the eu-arcyrise. It may practically be considered the type
of the spore-sculpturing of that section of the genus.

Trichia pulchella n. sp.

Sporangia substipitate or sessile with a narrow base, globose,
averaging "B mm. in diameter, bright vitelline yellow, growing either
singly or in small scattered clumps containing but few sporangia,
but not upon a common hypothallus; sporangium-wall clear, trans-
lucent, rupturing irregularly at the top ; capillitium and spores
vitelline yellow in mass; capillitium composed of cylindrical
threads 3'5-4*5/j'. in diameter, terminating in pointed ends from one
to one and one half times the diameter of the thread in length ;
spirals three to four in number, winding more or less irregularly ;
interspiral filaments absent or very rudimentary ; threads occasion-
ally branched and having occasionally bulbous expansions in their
course; spores 11 to 12o// in diameter; epispores provided with a
sculptured reticulation composed of very narrow rounded thread-like
raised bands combined into more or less broken polygons numbering
from five to seven to the entire epispore.

Adirondack Alts., N. Y.— Chestnut Hill, Philadelphia, Pa.

This species is allied to the group of Trichias of which T. chryso-
spernia inay be said to be the central form. It differs from them all
however, in the solitary or individual habit of growth of the spor-
angia, which are not developed on a common hypothallus, and in
the absence of interspiral ridges even under high amplification.

The very delicate thread-like character of the reticulations of the
epispores is remarkable. The threads forming the sides of the
polygons are sometimes simple, sometimes zigzag or broken in out-
line enclosing minute rhombic interspaces, or sometimes marked by
a row of rudimentary pits like those often found in the epispores of
T. chrysos2)erma. The spores of the two gatherings from which the
species is described are identical, but the capillitium varies, being
more bulbous and irregular in one gathering than in the other, due
to the fact that it was developed in colder weather. In neither of
the specimens could the sporangia be said to be stipitate, but the
character of the dark plasmodic bases of the few subsessile sporangia,
warrants the belief that under specially favorable conditions, stipit-
ate sporangia may be developed analogous to those of the neighbor-
ing species T. varia, var. nigripes.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 367

Comatriclia typMna Roth. var. heterospora n. var.

Sporangia stipitate, cylindrical with rounded apex, or expanded
above and terminating in a point curved to one side, about 2 mm.
in height including stipes ; sporangium-wall evanescent ; capillitium
composed of slender, sinuous threads arising from the columella,
branched many times at irregular intervals and joined together
forming a dense tangled network extending to the surface ; spores
purple-brown in mass when recent, fading in time, 5-6,a in diameter ;
epispore sculpturing complex and only evident with high amplifica-
tion, consisting of about 10 to 12 dark violet colored hemispherical
papillae irregularly scattered over the surface between which may
be found a delicate reticulation of narrow raised bands forming
rhombic or irregular quadrilateral meshes.

New York, Pennsylvania, Virginia, North Carolina.

As this variety is seen in the herbarium, it resembles closely the
usual form of C. tijphlna. There are however, well marked and
positive differences. The capillitium is more slender and forms a
denser network which is branched and combined to the veiy surface,
giving the impression, without a close examination, of a parallel
peripheral network. It is generally found also in small isolated
clumps containing but a few closely aggregated individuals. In the
spores of the typical form the larger scattered papillae are also found
but the intervening spore surface is not reticulated but very minutely
verruculose.

This variety is not a mere sport or temporary variation, but
occurs frequently and is constant in character, so that an observer
familiar with it can always identify it in the field without difficulty.
The spore sculpturing, however, is so evidently an evolution from
that of the regular form of the species, that it seems to be entitled
only to varietal distinction.

Diachaea thomasii. Proceedings of Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1892, p. 329.

Plasmodium ochre yellow, immature sporangia pure white, mature
sporangia metallic, either silvery or gold-bronze in lustre, sometimes
iridescent, 2 to f of a mm. in diameter, scattered or grouped in
clusters, stipitate or sessile, globose when stipitate but flattened at
the base when sessile; stipes variable, usually short but sometimes t
of mm. in height, thick, rugose, dull ochre yellow containing lime ;
columella ochre-yellow, rough, penetrating from 1 to I the height of
the sporangium, varying in shape from bluntly conical to cylindrical
or cylindric-clavate, containing minute round or oblong ochre

368 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

colored granules of lime ; spores pale brown 11-12,'j. in diameter;
epispores sparsely covered with minute papillse interspersed with a
variable number of from four to eight large irregular dark violet
papillae apparently, which are resolved by sufficiently high ampli-
fication into dense clusters of from five to eight closely aggregated
small papillte ; capillitium sparse, brown-violet in color, composed of
rigid, straight, tapering threads arising from the columella and base
of the sporangium, joined by a few lateral branches in the middle
and near the ends into a loose open network ; threads 3-7// in thick-
ness at the basal point of attachment, tapering to a point at their
attachment to the sporangium-wall ; hypothallus variable, usually
membranous with scattex'ed deposits of ochre-colored lime granules,
but thick and crustaceous with lime when the sporangia are sessile.

Mitchell Co., North Carolina (Lancaster Thomas.)

This species and the two other distinctively North American
species D. splendens Pk. and D. subsessilis Pk. are characterized by
peculiarly specialized spore sculpturings, which would sufficiently
serve to distinguish them from the cosmopolitan species D. leiicopoda,
even if their general characters were not equally well marked.

The spore markings of D. thomnsil as given above, differ greatly
from the others.

In D. splendens the epispores are studded with irregularly scattered,
long, projecting columnar processes which are truncate or flat at the
end, not spinose or rounded. These are sometimes joined at various
angles forming elongated or angular bars.

In D. subsessilis th6 epispores are marked Avith diffusely branched
rows of minute dark bead-like papillae ranged side by side in a
moniliform manner, sometimes terminating in free ends, sometimes
running in a zig-zag irregular manner, but usually combined into a
loose reticulation with large irregular meshes.

The epispores of D. leiicopoda are delicately warted in a uniform
manner, like those of many species of the Calcareie and Stemonit-
ace^e.

Chondrioderma roanense n. sp.

Sporangia stipitate, discoidal, either circular or irregularly
elliptical in outline, thin, flattened or slightly convex above, plane
or plano-concave below, about one mm. in diameter when circular,
or one by one-half mm. when elongated; upper surface of sporangia
mottled, presenting the appearance of large irregular spots of dark
umber joined by narrow bands of a paler brown color ; under sur-

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 369

face dark umber shad iug to black in the center; sporangium-wall
smooth, brittle, rupturing irregularly, basal fragments more or less
permanently reflexed, apparently double, or at least composed of
two easily separable layers ; outer layer umber, mottled, colored by
the innate granules of lime, inner layer pure white throughout
except a narrow ring of pale umber brown around the columella,
inner surface pitted with numerous minute indentations as with a
needle point; columella flat, discoidal '5 mm. in width, pale ochra-
ceous color on surface; capillitium sparse, white or colorless
composed of simple rarely forked sinuous threads, occasionally
joined by lateral branches, attached below to the columella and
adjoining portion of the basal sporangium-wall and above to the
upper sporangium-wall; stipes variable, sometimes scarcely evident,
sometimes one mm. high, black, longitudinally ridged, more or less
flattened laterally according as the sporangium is elliptical or
circular; spores dark violet 12-1 4/* in diameter, epispores thick,
distinctly warted with sufficient amplification.

Roan Mt., Tennessee.

The affinities of this species are with the section of the genus
represented by C. radlatum. It ditfers from the other discoidal or
orbicular sj^ecies in its dark chestnut umber color, its well marked
discoidal columella and jet black irregular stipe.

Chondrioderma rugosum n. sp.

Plasmodium gray ; sporangia grayish or dusky white becoming
brownish at the margin of the base, shading into chestnut-brown
around the point of insertion of the stipe; sporangia stipitate, nearly
hemispherical, flattened and slightly umbilicate at the base, 2 to f
mm. in diameter at the base ; sporangium-wall single, papyraceous,
much wrinkled or traversed by ridges which mark the lines of
rupture and dehiscence and are combined so as to divide the wall
into twenty-five to thirty shallow irregularly polyhedral portions
which fidl away on the scattering of the spores ; stipes subulate, lon-
gitudinally rugose, brownish-black becoming brown above, one-half
to two-thirds of a mm. in height; columella chalky or yellowish-
white, clavate, much roughened in the upper portion, penetrating to
one half the height of the sporangium ; capillitium white or color-
less, composed of simple tubules freely forked and combined by
lateral branches into a loose network attached to the columella and
basal wall of sporangium below and the upper sporangium-wall
above; spores 10// in diameter, warted, violet-brown in color.

370 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1893.

Cranberry, North Carolina (Lancaster Thomas.)

This species is also allied to C. radiatum. The ridges which cause
the peculiar shrivelled appearance of the surface of the sporangia are
not the result of the drying of immature sporangia, but are pres-
ent in all cases. They are morphological in character, their loca-
tion being indicated by grayish lines on the chalky white surface of
the immature sporangia from a very early period of their develop"
ment while they are still in a soft and plump condition.

Craterium rubescens n. sp.

Sporangia stipitate, about one mm. high including stipe, cylin-
droid or elongated cyatbiform, apex convex; sporangium-wall single,
dark violet-red, smooth except at the upper portion which is
slightly roughened by an external deposit of scattered lime
granules of a pale lilac color; lower third of wall ridged longi-
tudinally ; on spore dehiscence the apex falls away separating
by an irregular line in a circumscissile manner; stipe violet-
black, one-half the height of the sporangium, wrinkled longitu-
dinally, the ridgesbeingcontiuuous with those upon the sporangium ;
capillitium composed of an irregular, branched central mass of
violet-red lime granules, the branches connected with the sporangium-
wall either directly or by a scanty network of delicate colorless
tubules with long angular knots of red lime granules at the
nodes ; spores 7'0-S'0,'j. in diameter, brown-violet, epispores thick,
minutely warted with dark violet warts.

Louisiana (A. B. Langlois, com. J. B. Ellis.)

This species is allied to both C. aureum and C. leucocephalum,
more especially in their elongated and cylindroid forms. It is
distinguished from them by the Badhamia-like character of the
capillitium and by the color which exhibits some shade or tone of
red or violet-red in every part of its structure. The color of the
sporangium-wall is due largely to the violet-red innate lime granules
which it contains.
Craterium concinnum n. sp.

Sporangia usually minute, stipitate, broadly funnel shaped, one-
half to two-thirds of a mm. in height including stipe, and one-fifth
to one-half of a mm. wide at the top, dehiscing by a regular cap or
operculum ; color variable, sometimes light or dark umber uniformly
diffused over the entire sporangium, sometimes dark brown on the
lower half of the sporangium, abruptly shading into brownish-white

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 371

in the upper half, operculum brownish-white, darkest in the center ;
operculum always more or less convex, rarely approaching a hemi-
spherical shape; sporangium-wall smooth, simple, variously colored
by the innate lime granules ; stipe equalling the sporangium in length,
dark brown, longitudinally ridged; capillitium composed of a close
meshed, all-sided network with small rounded or slightly angular
nodal masses of ochre brown lime granules, averaging about 25-30m
in diameter; no true columella, but the central nodes larger than
the others; spores Q-lO/Jt, brown, delicately warted.

Fairmount Park, Philadelphia, Pa.

This species differs from the various forms of Craterium vulgare to
which it is most nearly allied, by its habit of growth, its generally
different shape, its convex operculum and especially by the very
different capillitium with its minute nodes which are invariably of a
dull brownish-ochre color. Like Lachnoholus globosus with which
this species is frequently associated, it is usually found upon chestnut
burs lying upon the grouud in moist places.
Physarum variabile n. sp.

Sporangia scattered, stipitate, substipitate or sessile, about one
mm. high ; regularly or irregularly globose, ellipsoidal, obovate or
cvlindric-clavate in shape ; sporangium-wall sometimes apparently
thick, of a dingy yellow or brownish-ochre color, slightly rugulose
on surface, crustaceous, brittle, rupturing irregularly, sometimes thin,
translucent covered externally with flat circular lime masses falling
away in patches; stipes nearly equal, occasionally much expanded
at the base, rough, longitudinally rugose, variable in size, some-
times one-third of a mm. high, sometimes a mere plasmodic
thickening of the base of the sporangium; color of stipes varying
from a yellowish-white to a dull brownish-gray ; capillitium a small
meshed network of delicate colorless tubules with large many angled
rounded masses of white or rarely yellowish-white lime granules at
the nodes; no true columella but often a central irregular mass of
white lime granules ; spores dark violet-brown, verruculose 9-10/^
in diameter.

Adirondack Mts., New York.

A comparison of several gatherings of this species shows a great
diversity of forms, the most curious of which is the erect, subsessile
cylindroid form. Nevertheless the essential characters are the
game in all, making them referable to one species. The crustaceous
semi-glazed sporangium-wall and similar capillitium ally this species

372 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

to P. citrinellum Pk. most nearly. It differs from the various forms
of P. sehumaeherl Rost. in the absence of a columella.

Badhamia orbiculata n. sp.

Sporangia stipitate or sessile, orbicular, discoidal, irregularly
elongated or plasmodiocarpous ; averaging about one mm. when
simple but of larger size Avhen plasmodiocarpous ; when stipitate
flattened or depressed above and plane or slightly umbilicate below ;
sporangium-wall single, more or less translucent from the varying
number of innate lime granules ; external surface sometimes covered
with scattered flat circular masses of lime granules, gray in color
except a small area about the attachment of the stipe which is dark
brown ; inner surface also gray except an area of brown becoming
brown-black in the center of the base ; stipes short, 'Smm. high, deep
black, rough, ridged longitudinally ; capillitium composed of an
irregular central network of tubules containing Avhite lime granules,
attached above and below by slender straight sometimes forked
tubules, to the sporangium-wall ; spores 14-16// in diameter, dark
brown, warted under high amplification.

Fairmount Park, Philadelphia, Pa. — Nebraska (H. AVebber) Ohio
(A. P. Morgan.)

The discoidal character of the simple sporangia of this species is
constant and there is but rarely, in any form, any noticeable degree
of convexity of the upper surface; on the contrary some sporangia
exhibit a somewhat double concave surface, the upper and lower
walls nearly coalescing in the center.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHII-ADELPHIA. 373

A TEMPERED STEEL METEOKITE.
BY E. GOLDSMITH.

Among the many objects brought to Philadelphia by the Peary
Expedition to Greenland in 1891 was a meteorite weighing about 267
pounds. It was found by Professor Angelo Heilprin near Godhaven,
Disco Island. The mass is somewhat pear-shaped and irregularly
pitted. When received at the Academy it appeared to be solid and
devoid of cracks or any signs of distintegration. This condition soon
changed. The mass increased in volume, cracked, and began falling
to pieces, apparently remaining dry during these changes. No drops
of moisture or chloride of iron could be detected.

The assumption that the crumbling was due to oxidation was based
on the fact of the existence of a higher temperature and a greater
quantity of ozone in our latitude than in that of Greenland.

Professor Heilprin presented to me for examination some of the
pieces which had separated from the mass. They were dull and
gave evidence of oxidation. A little hammering sufficed to separate
the substance into granules and powder, the distinction between them
being marked. The granules are hard, metallic and tough, whilst
the powder is capable of reduction to any degree of fineness. The
separation, howevei% was not perfect, as the granules retained some
oxide and the black powder included some of the finely divided
particles of the metal. An attempt to separate the metal from the
oxide with a bar magnet was unsuccessful because the whole mass
was practically magnetic.

A determination of the separated quantities revealed: Granules
=73'8%, Powder:^26"2%. Specific gravity of the granules=^6'14 ;
that of the powder=4.73.

A portion of the specimen was reserved for grinding and etching;
the process involved considerable difficulty because of the extreme
hardness of the mass. The rotating stone, driven l)y a belt, appeared
to be soft and powerless to reduce the meteorite, but by adding sand
to the wet stone I succeeded, after hours of patient labor, in producing
a plane surface. Further grinding with coarse and fine corundum
and polishing with rouge produced a surface on which the etching
would reveal its terrestial or celestial origin. A new three edged saw-
file was blunted by the first contact with the mass and no filings
could be secured. Upon passing a sharp edge of the mass over a

374 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

plate of soft iron it made an impression alike visible to the eye and
sensible to the touch. These three physical proofs would seem to
warrant calling the object a tempered steel meteorite.

How the metal became tempered can only be explained hypothe-
tically. Meteorites, in their passage through the atmosphere, become
red-hot and if they fall into a pool of water or a deposit of snow or
ice they are quickly cooled. Should the chemical composition be
such as to form steel, the mass, under such conditions, becomes
hardened. On heating one of the granules to redness and allowing
it to cool slowly, its softness under the file-test conclusively demon-
strated that natural steel is similar to the artificial product.
The sharp-edged steel tool of a planing machine would doubtless
have been broken by contact with the hard mass while in motion.

The extreme hardness might be sujiposed to indicate the presence
of diamonds, but that mineral is never found in any of these suspected
meteorites. The Widmanstatian figures are small, as might be
expected when we consider the quick cooling ; only small crystals
forming under such circumstances.

Upon magnifying the figures about twenty diameters, by
reflected light, the rectangular figures of the cube forming at times
rod-shaped elongations and also triangular outlines of the octahe-
dron, sometimes with sharply defined cleavage lines, were observed
together with very acute triangles, which may belong to the tetra-
hexahedron.

A second surface on the same specimen, nearly at right angles to
the first, was ground with greater ease on a corundum wheel running
at great speed in order to determine whether the crystallization could
be recognized to better advantage, but without result, as the second
surface was no better than the first. That the structure might be
presented to better advantage, the polished, etched surface was
magnified about three diameters and photographed. (Plate IX, fig.
1). The lines, although faint, are apparent and, generally, the
angular outlines of crystal forms can be easily traced. The half
tones in the picture are the portions of the surface eaten out by the
nitric acid. The shining surfaces are the reflections of the nickel
steel and the dark pits are the crude untouched material. Cleavage
lines predominate throughout the whole surface. A few of the
regular outlines were drawn and appear in figure 2. The most
common outline appears in figure 4. The dark crystalline figure
was etched out by the acid treatment, as was also the larger dark

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 375

spot with peculiar markings within. Tlie straight lines which cross
each other are cleavages and have, in all probability, a structural
meaning. If we focus into the deep pits of the specimen, crystalline
bodies appear, of which a few have been drawn, (figure 3). These
solid crystals, sometimes show a pale yellow color and may be
troilite; some, however, have a deep blue tint, similar to the thin
coat of oxide produced on heating iron or steel much below
redness.

The microscopic investigation, which could be n)ade only by
reflected light, revealed some additional points. The mass is so very
cellular and the cells, if the term be allowed, so close together as to
require magnifying power in studying them. The quasi cells are
filled out with the other material, thus constituting the whole mass.
It is not difficult to recognize the faint brass (or yellow) colored
troilite and the jet-black magnetite, the latter sometimes filling cells
having a distinct crystalline contour as shown in figure 4.

The nickel is probably not evenly divided through the whole of
the metallic mass, as part of the metal is readily affected by the
nitric acid, while the rest is not. The tempered steel meteorite is,
therefore, not homogeneous but highly compound.

Results were obtained by the qualitative chemical analysis show-
ing conclusively the distinct difference between the granules and the
separated dark powder. The former contains a sulphuret, probably
troilite ; the latter contains no sulphuret but, instead, a sulphate.

Iron, nickel, sulphur, traces of carbon, chlorine, phosphorus and
chromium were found; also a silicate in which were recognized lime
and magnesia. Copper and cobalt were searched for, but in vain_
This leads me to direct attention to the Disco Island terrestial iron,
in which, according to Professor A. E. Nordenskiold and J. L.
Smith, are found copper, cobalt, phosphorus and comparatively
large quantities of carbon, differences too great to be overlooked
in comparing analytical work.
Composition of the granules :

Iron .... 86"66 per cent.

Nickel .... 2-32 per cent.

Sulphur .... 0'19 per cent.

X Silicate . . . 4'41 per cent.

Oxygen . . . 642 per cent.

If the sulphur is combined with iron to form troilite and the oxygen
to form magnetite we have :

376 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Iron .... 66'79 per cent.

Nickel .... 2-82 per cent.

Troilite (fe S) . . 0-52 per cent.

Magnetite (fe, 0^) . . 25'96 per cent.

X Silicate . . . 4'41 per cent.
Composition of the separated magnetic powder :

Iron . . . . 68*18 per cent.

Nickel . . . . O'ol per cent.

Sulphuric anhydrite . 1-75 per cent.

Water .... 3-43 per cent.

X Silicate . . . lOiO per cent.

Oxygen . . . 16'23 per cent.
According to well known theoretical affinities we may expect the
mixture to be :

Iron .... 25-58 per cent.

Nickel . . . . 0'31 per cent.

Magnetite (fcg OJ . . 5630 per cent.
Magnetic sulphate (fe^O^, 2 SO3) 4'28 per cent.

X Silicate . . . lO'lO per cent.

Water .... 3'43 per cent.

As long as there is any troilite in the mass a further oxidation
and disintegration may be expected. The cellular structure of this
steel meteorite seems to permit of such a process continuously.

My statement regarding the magnetic sulphate of iron, is made
because, first: the whole of the powder is magnetic, whilst the basic
sulphate of iron is not ; and, secondly : when I tried to compute it as
basic ferric sulphate I invariably obtained a numerical result whose
aggregate was 1*05% too high. When regarding it as magnetic
ferric sulphate no such discrepancy occurred.

My thanks are due to Professor xVngelo Heilprin for the opportu-
nity of investigating the first tempered steel meteorite.

Explanation of Plate IX.

Fig. 1. Photographic projection of the polished and etched
surface of the hard steel meteorite magnified about three diameters.

Fig. 2. Cubic and octahedral forms.

Fig. 3. Solid crystal forms as seen in the pits of the specimen.

Fig. 4. One of the many irregular outlined forms ; the crossed
lines represent the cleavages.

Figs. 2, 3 and 4 are magnified about twenty diameters.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 377

THE ODONATE GENUS ORTHOLESTES.
BY PHILIP P. CALVERT.

In Entomological News for December, 1891 (Vol. II, p. 199), I
briefly described an Odonate from Jamaica as Ortholedes clara
new genus and species, and added that a detailed description would
appear later. The present paper is a fulfillment of that promise.
Since then I have seen two additional specimens of 0. clara and
have f )und a new species, 0. ahhoitl, from Hayti. OrtJiolestes is an
Agriouine of the legion Lestes Selys.

Generic Characters. — (1) Wings ceasing to be petioled about as
far in front of the basal post costal cross vein as the latter is long.

(2) Median sector separating from the principal at less than one-
third the distance from the arculus to the nodus, the subnodal aris-
ing one cell after the median.

(3) Quadrilateral distinctly trapezoidal, superior side longer
than one-half the inferior, (4) internal side one-third to one-fourth
the inferior.

(5) Ultra-nodal sector unbroken or but very slightly angulated ;
(6) subnodal and short sectors hardly more angulated.

(7) Nodal sector arising from two and a half to four cells after
the nodus.

(8) No supplementary sectors between the median and short
sectors.

(9) With supplementary sectors forming an irregular network
(7-16 marginal cells) between the subnodal and median sectors.

(10) Pterostigma three times as long as wide.

(11) Hairs of the feet long (more than twice as long as the spaces
separating them).

(12) Prothorax with the hind margin rounded and but very
slightly, if at all, emarginated in the middle.

Until the publication of Ortholestes, the legion Lestes Selys was
known to contain but five ("sub-") genera: 3Iegalestes of Southern
India, Archilestes of tropical America, the cosmopolitan Lestes, the
Palsearctic Sympycna, and Platylestes of Southern India. The genua
Ortholestes, while undoubtedly belonging to this legion, differs from
some of the minor legionary characters as laid down by De Selys
(Bull. Ac. Roy. Belg. (2) xiii, pp. 288-338, 1862) by those above
25

378

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1893.

5

2

0

£

ra

<X)

^

'^

5«

e

0)

-^

-u

«

a

CO

<ii

CO

c^ <y

Ml

c3

Pm

cc

^

^

c3

S

o

S-l

03

pR

-Q

Pq

^1 i

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 379

numbered as 3, 5, 6 and 8, and from the genera, in addition to the
legionary differences, as follows :

From Megalestes by 9.

From Archilestes by 1, 2, 4, 7 and 10.

From Lestes by 1.

From Sympycna by 1, 4, 7, 11 and 12.

From Flaty lestes hy 1.

Additional differences from Megalestes and Plaiylestes may exist,
as I have not seen examples of these two genera.

Other details of generic structure in Ortholestes are : the absence
of supplementary sectors between the ultra-nodal and the principal,
although the last one or two intervening cells may be divided.
Archilestes, Lestes and Sympycna also agree here.

Between the ultra-nodal and nodal sectors are two or more sup-
plementary sectors which are quite broken and form an irregular
net work with 4-8 marginal cells. In Archilestes, Lestes^ and Sym-
pycna there are usually but two supplementary sectors between
ultra-nodal and nodal; they are quite distinct and regular; the
upper one commences 1-2 cells before the lower one and is usually
unbroken (Lestes and Sympycna) or somewhat broken (Archilestes) ;
the lower one is usually much broken ; the number of marginal
cells between nodal and ultra-nodal is 3-6.

The ultra-nodal sector arises at about the level of the fifth or
sixth post-cubital, and therefore at about one-third the length of the
post-cubital series. In Archilestes, Lestes and Sympycna, the same
sector more usually arises near the middle of that series.

Two to eight marginal cells may be present between the nodal
and subnodal sectors, depending on the degree of development of
supplementary sectors.

The supplementary sectors between the subnodal and median sec-
tors are much broken.

The basal postcostal cross-vein is placed distinctly nearer the
level of the second than of the first ante-cubital ; the reverse is usu-
ally the case in Archilestes, Lestes and Sympycna. These relations
may be stated in another way by saying that in Ortholestes the first
ante-cubital lies but little beyond half way from the base of the

^The statements here made for Lestes are based on the following 17 species;

unguiculata, uncata, disjuncta, forcipata, ineqiialis, vigilax, rectangidaris, for-
ficula, curina, congener, and teniiata of North America ; viridis, nynipha, sponsa,
virens and barbara of Europe ; Colensonis of New Zealand.

380 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

wing to the second ante-cubital, while in the other tliree genera it is
usually at two-thirds that distance.

The ninth abdominal segment is at least twice as long as the tenth ;
the appendages are longer than the tenth. In Lestes the appendages
of the females are shorter than 10.

Recently, I have expressed the opinion' that the Calopteryginse
are to be looked upon as representing the most primitive of the liv-
ing subfamilies of the Odonata, that from them the Agrioninje are
descended, and that of the latter group the legion Lestes is phylo-
genetically the oldest. De Selys long ago suggested^ that the Calop-
terygine genus Amphipteryx, of tropical America, stands in near
relationship to the Lestes. Whether we look upon Amphiptei-yx as
most nearly approaching the ancestral form of the Lestes or not, if
we accept the general phylogenetic series above sketched, Ortholedes
possesses more primitive characters than any other genus of its
legion in those above numbered 3, 5 and 6. If we go a step farther
and attach a direct ancestral importance to Amphipteryx, then may
we look upon characters 1, 9 and 11 as relatively long inherited,
while 8 appears to be much more lately acquired and quite distinc-
tive of Ortholedes.
Ortholestes clara Caheit, Ent. News 11, p. 199, 1S91.

$ . Head. Teueral : labrum, clypeus, middle only of top of
head brown with a slight metallic, bluish reflection; labium, man-
dibles, yellow ; gense, sides of frons and vertex bright yellow, but
with a brown patch adjoining the margin of the eyes opposite the
vertex; antennae yellow. Adult: labrum, clypeus, frons and vertex
dark metallic blue or black, a small orange spot on the outer side of
each posterior ocellus, a pruinose spot around anterior ocellus, a
small pruinose postocular spot each side ; labium, mandibles except
at tips, gen se, pale luteous (perhaps yellow or even blue in life) ;
antenuce black, first and second articulations yellowish.

Thorax. Teueral: brown ; prothorax with a small yellow spot
each side on middle lobe, hind margin yellowish; remainder of
thorax with the following yellow: an antehumeral stripe not attain-
ing the antealar sinus, a complete humeral stripe, a lateral stripe in
front of the metastigma with a small spot above, the two forming
a reversed! all behind the second lateral suture, pectus. Adult:

2Tran-=. Am. Ent. Soc. XX, p. 212, 1893.
^Monog. Calopt. p. 241, 1854.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 381

dark blue or black with a metallic reflectiou, thorax almost entirely
priiinose, yellow markings obliterated.

Legs brown, paler interiorly, yellow at bases (teneral) ; darker,
somewhat pruinose (adult).

Abdomen rather slender. Teneral: brown; base of 1 yellowish
on dorsum ; 3-9 with a transverse, basal, yellow ring, interrupted
on the middle line on 3, on 9 very small and connected by a mid-
dorsal line with a larger apical, yellow spot; greater part of dor-
sum of 10 and a lateral stripe on 2 and 3 bright yellow. Adult :
black; yellow markings less distinct anteriorly, obliterated on 8-10,
dorsum of 9-10 pruinose.

Superior appendages as long as 9, somewhat forcipated. Each
has on its upper outer margin, just beyond the middle, 5-6 small
spines; lower inner margin much dilated and with two teeth in the
apical half, the more basal of which is rounded and lies opposite
the spines of the upper margin, while the more apical tooth is

Fig. 2. Profile view, appendages of (9. I'/um cT

smaller, somewhat triangular, its apex slightly notched ; beyond
this second tooth the remainder of the appendage, about one-sixth
of the entire length, continues as a cylindrical piece with a rounded
apex.

Inferior appendages about half as long as the superiors ; viewed
from the side, each is rather thick at the base, becoming slender dis-
tally, with a small acute tooth near the middle of the upper margin,
apical half slender, curved upward, apex acute. Viewed from
below, the two inferiors are closely approximate in their basal
halves, the slender apical halves separated from each other at first,
converging posteriorly.

Wings hyaline. Pterostigma and reticulation luteous (teneral)
or black (adult), the former surmounting 3-4 cells. 18-23 post-
cubitals on front wings, 15-19 on hind wings.

9 similar in coloring to the teneral S from which it diffei's as
follows: humeral stripe and that in front of the metastigma conflu-
ent at their upper ends, but with the spot of the reversed ! distinct ;
a short, oblique, isolated, brown stripe behind the second lateral
suture ; abdomen somewhat thicker ; basal ring on 3-8, very small
on 8, interrupted on 3 and sometimes on 4 ; a small lateral spot on

382 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

4; a small lateral spot on 8, apical dorsal half of 9 and the lateral
stripe on 2-3, yellow; yellow spots on dorsum of 10 extremely
small or absent. Appendages dark brown, longer than 10, not
denticulated. Genital valves brown, margins not denticulated.
Pterostigma luteous (teneral), light brown (adult). 18-23 post-
cubitals on front wings, 17-20 on hind wings.

Measurements. Total length $ 41-5-47 mm., 9 37-40. Abdo-
men (including appendages) ^ 34-38, $ 29-31*o. Front wing 5
25-5-30, 9 26-29. Hind wing $ 245-29, 9 25-28. Ptero-
stigma 2-2-25- Superior appendages i 1-1.33. Appendages 9 '8-

Described from the original four types, viz., one male, one female,
Kingston, Jamaica, May, 1890, by E. M. Aaron (Collection of P.
P. Calvert) ; one male, Kingston, by W. J. Fox (Coll. American
Entomological Society) ; one female, Jamaica, by C. AY. Johnson
(Coll. Wagner Institute of Science) ; and from two addi-
tional males, both from the Bath district of Jamaica by Mrs. Swain-
son (one in Coll. Institute of Jamaica at Kingston, the other in
Coll. P. P. C).
Ortholestes abbotti n. sp.

^ closely resembling 0. dara. Differs by the shajje of the supe-
rior appendages in that the more basal of the two inferior teeth is
not so clearly distinct from the dilatation of the lower margin,.

Fig. 3. Profile view, appendages of O. abbotti $
while the more apical tooth is transformed into a slender, acute,
somewhat curved spine, situated on the apical side of the basal
tooth, and directed backward; the c^'lindrical terminal portion of
the appendage forms about one-fourth the entire length.

Measurements. Total length 39 mm. Abdomen (inch app.)
31-5. Front wing 24. Hind wing 23. Pterostigma nearly 2.
Superior appendages 1-3. Female unknown.

Described from one male from Hayti, by Dr. W. L. Abbott (Col-
lection of the American Entomological Society).

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 383

ON A COLLECTION OF BATRACHIA AND EEPTILIA FROM SOUTHWEST

MISSOURI.

BY E. D. COPE,

The zoology of the Ozark Mountain country is less known than
that of some more remote regions of our country. The fishes have,
however, been pretty fully investigated by the ichthyologists of the
United States Fish Commission, and the mammals are now claim-
ing the attention of the zoologists of the Bureau of Animal Industry
of the United States Agricultural Departments. In the present
paper I contribute something to the knoAvledge of the herpetology
of the region.

BATRACHIA.

Amblystoma punctatum L.
Spelerpes maculicaudus Cope,
Spelerpes melanopleurus sp. nov.

This species is near to the S. bilineatus Green, but differs in both
proportions and coloration, and is also smaller, being the least spe-
cies of the genus. I took five specimens among the stones on the
banks of Raley's Ci*eek, one of the head tributaries of the White
River.

The width of the head enters the length to the groin 4*5 times
(nearly 6 times in S. hillnentus), and the length to the axilla enters
the same 2'3 to 2"5 times (2"7 times in S. bilineatus). The limbs
and all the toes are well-developed, and the anterior and posterior
meet when applied to the side of the body ; they are separated by
three full intercostal spaces in S. bilineatus. There are always
only 13 costal grooves (14 in S. biliyieatvs). Tail strongly com-
pressed. The sides of the head, body and tail are black, with gen-
erally sparse white spots ; the upper border of this band is darkest,
representing the dorsolateral line of S. bilineatus. A few black
spots along median dorsal line. End of muzzle and chin black.
Limbs closely reticulated with black. Belly white in life (yellow
in S. bilineatus). Measurements of largest specimen : length to
angle of lower jaw, 4"5 mm. ; do. to axilla, 10 mm. ; do. to groin, 23
mm, ; do. to end of tail, 57"5 mm. ; do. of fore-limb, 65 mm. ; do. of
hind limb, 8 mm.

384 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

Although this species is smaller than S. bllineatus, it is more
robust and less sepsiforni in its proportions. In life, the white belly
constitutes a conspicuous color-character.

Typhlotriton spelseus Stejneger, Proceeds U. S. Natl. Museum, Vol. XY, 1893.

I obtained several specimens of this interesting species from the
proprietor of the Marble Cave, Mr. T. Powell. In spirits it has a
pale yellow color, as described by Dr. Stejneger, but in life it is
white. It occurs in a stream that flows at least 300 feet below the
surface. I examined this and other parts of the cave, which is a
very extensive one, and observed very little life in it. It seems
difficult to understand how the salamander, which is by no means
small, could find subsistence, but Mr. Powell states that a species of
" fly" inhabits the cave, and is sometimes very abundant.

The vertebrae, as observed by Stejneger, are opisthocoelous,
although the ball of the centrum remains cartilaginous. The tarsus
is cartilaginous, although the elements are distinct. These consist,
as in Desmognathus, of ulnare, intermedium, radiale, centrale, and
five tarsalia, of which the first is on the inner border of the sole.
The location of the genus Typhlotriton in the Desmognathidse by
Stejneger is thus justified, and the addition of the genus Thorius to
the same family, as proposed by Boulenger, is sustained.

The temporal muscle divides a short distance above its insertion
in the coronoid process of the mandible after passing under a malar
ligament. The inferior and most robust belly is attached to the infer-
ior part of the parietal bone. The superior and more slender belly
passes over the parietal bone, lying in a groove between the inferior
belly and the low sagittal angle of the skull, and is inserted into
the spine of the atlas vertebra, as is the case in the genus Desmog-
nathus. It difl^ers from the corresponding muscle in Desmognaihus
in not developing a tendon where it passes over the parietal bone,
the point of insertion into the atlas only showing this character.

REPTILIA.

Sceloporus undulatus Daud.

Crotaphytus collaris Say. C. baileyi Stejneger, North American Fauna, tS90, p. 103.

This species is quite abundant near Galena, Missouri. It has not
been hitherto noted as existing in Missouri, the nearest localities
recorded being the Neosho River, I. T., and the Arkansas Eiver in
Western Arkansas.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 385

Ophisaurus ventralis Daud,
Eumeces fasciatus L.
Carphophiops vermis Kenn.
Ophibolus doliatus doliatus L.
Ophibolus getulus sayi Holbr.
Coluber confinis B. & G.
Coluber obsoletus Say.
Bascanium flagelliforme Catesby.

I have no previous record of this species from Missouri, the near-
est approach being the Red River in southern Arkansas.
Storeria dekayi Ilolbrook.
Natrix fasciata sipedon L.
Eutaenia sirtalis sirtalis L.
Ancistrodon contortrix L.
Crotalus horridus L.

386 rROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

ON THE BATRACHIA AND REPTILIA OF THE PLAINS AT LATITUDE

36° 30'.

BY E. D. COPE.

The following species were obtained by the writer and Professor
A. P. Brown, of the University of Pennsylvania, at the following
localities: Fort Supply, in northwest Oklahoma; Miami and Mo-
beetie in the northeastern part of the Panhandle of Texas, and Hen-
nessy, in central Oklahoma. For the greater number of species
obtained at Fort Supply, I am indebted to Dr. Corbusier, U. S. A.,
whose material aid I hereby gratefully acknowledge.

BATRACHIA.

Amblystoma tigrinum Green.

Fort Supply ; Hennessy.
Bufo lentiginosus americanus Loee.

Fort Supply.
Chorophilus triseriatus clarkii Bd.

Abundant and noisy in pools near the Cimmaron River, at Tucker,
Oklahoma. Similar to the individuals reported by me from Claren-
don, Texas.^

REPTILIA.

Cistudo ornata Agass.

Fort Supply.
Cinosternum flavescens Agass.

Professor Brown found a living specimen of this species about six
miles west of Mobeetie, Texas. This is much the most northern
locality recorded for the species.
Chelydra serpentina L.

Hennessy, Oklahoma Territory.
Crotaphytus collaris Say.

Fort Supply and Miami.
Holbrookia maculata B. <t G.

Fort Supply and Mobeetie.

^ Proceedings Academy Natural Sciences of Philada., 1892, p. 333.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 387

Phrynosoma cornutum Ilasl.

Fort Supply, Mobeetie, and Hennessy.
Cnemidophorus sexlineilus L.

Fort Supply and Miami.
Ophisaurus ventralis Daud.

Hennessy.
Ophibolus doliatus sysputus Cope.

Hennessy, Oklahoma Territory.
Ophibolus getulus sayi Holbr.

Mobeetie.
Pityophis sayi sayi Schleg.

Fort Supply.
Coluber spiloides D. & B.

Fort Supply.
Bascanicum flagelliforme testaceum Sav.

Fort Supply.
Diadophis amabilis docilis B. & G.

Hennessy, Oklahoma Territory.
Heterodon nasicus nasicus B. & G.

Fort Supply.
Tropidoolonium lineatum Hallow.

Hennessy.
Eutaenia elegans marciana B. & G.

Fort Supply.
Crotalaphorus catenatus edwardsii B. & G.

Mobeetie and Hennessy. These localities extend the range of
this species. It is characteristic of the sandy country that extends
from Mobeetie eastward, and which is also seen about Hennessy in
central Oklahoma.
Crotalus confluentus Say.

The Staked Plain west of Mobeetie.

388 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

GEOWTH CHANGES OF THE RADULA IN LAND-MOLLUSKS.
BY DR. Y. STERKI.

The radula, or lingual membrane of the glossophorous moUusca
has been most assiduously studied, being a very attractive and
interesting object in itself, and a valuable character for systematic
distinctions. Its features in the land mollusca of America have been
investigated by W. G. Binney ;^ but thus far the adult animals only
have been considered, and conclusions regarding the morphology of
the teeth have been based chiefly upon these. Of the development
of the radula and its changes 'nith advancing age, very little is known.
The writer published some years ago, a short article on the subject,"
but the considerations then advanced prove to be quite insufficient.

During the last few months a number of species have been
examined with special reference to these changes, and the results
prove to be of unexpected value. The subject has been studied from
a morphological standpoint only. For histological details the pub-
lications of Kcelliker, Semper, A. Ruecker and others must be con-
sulted.

The special cases to be described in detail below may be more
readily understood by attention to the following general considera-
tions. If we carefully examine a well prepared and extended radula
of a young specimen, it will be seen that in the anterior, or older
part (which was formed, however, by the animal when younger), a
transverse row contains fewer teeth than a row in the posterior or
more lately formed part. In other words, new teeth, one or more
new longitudinal rows, are added. The new teeth are at first mere
traces, resembling the outermost marginals in general form, being
small, roundish nodules, transverse or longitudinally elongated
plates, which, by gradual changes in each succeeding transverse row,
develop into true marginal teeth. At the same time it may be
found that there are, in a transverse row at the anterior, one or more
laterals fewer than in a row at the posterior part ; and a closer

^Terr. Moll. U. S., Vol. V.; and Jaw and Dentition of Pulmonatc Mollusks,
Annals X. Y. Acad, of Sci., Vol. III.

^ Altersverschiedenheiten der Radula bei Hra/iitia, Xachrichtsbl. d. Deutscben
Malak. Gesellschaft, 1882, p. 172-177.

1893.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 389

attentiou Avill show that in a certain longitudinal row at the margin
of the " central field," a transition tooth gradually transforms into a
well shaped lateral, a marginal into a transition tooth, and finally, in
turn, into a lateral.

In these few lines the development and transformation of the radula
is briefly outlined. This organ is not, as has generally been supposed,
always of the same formation, number of teeth, etc., in a given
species, and only smaller in the young examples, but there are
actually fewer transverse rows in the young, and fewer teeth in each
row. Moreover, the teeth at first are of very simple form, and by
gradual changes by replacement they assume their final shape. The
transformation is never simple, but is accomplished through one or
several intermediate stages, sometimes widely ditt'ereut ; and more-
over, the process diflers widely in the various species and groups.

The general considerations above presented are based upon the
examination of the few species with which the present communica-
tion deals. This paper must be regarded as the beginning of a long
series of examinations, which should comprise all species. Such a
research will doubtless give results not only highly interesting in
themselves, but also of great taxonomic value. Certain characters of
the radula which are very indistinct in the adult, or even overlooked
by careful observers, become of characteristic value in the light
gained by the examination of the earliest stages of growth. In the
embryonal animal we find forms of teeth present then and there
only, disappearing entirely in post-embryonal life; so we maj''
properly speak of a true metamorphosis of the radula.

The species examined with reference to this metamorphosis are as
follows: Limax carapestris Say ; Zonitoides arboreus Hay ; Z. ligeriis
Say ; Zonitoides sp. undet. from Tennessee ; Z. siippresstis Say ;
Patiila striatella Anth.; alternataSay ; solitaria Say; Polygyra (Trio-
dopsis) tridentataSay ; P. (Stenotrema) hirsidaSay. Of most of these
I had no embryos at hand for examination, but veiy young speciiuens.

Limax campestris Say. PL 10.

This species, and probably all of the genus, are very favorable sub-
jects for our purpose, since oviposition is continued throughout the
season, so that ova, young, adolescent and adult examples may be
found and compared at almost any time. The ova are not usually
deposited in clusters consisting of great numbers, as in most other

390 Proceedings of the academy of [1893.

land mollusca, hut singly or few aggregated. They are at first not
glohular, hut distinctly ellipsoidal, the shell heing perfectly glassy
and transparent, so that yolk division and the formation and devel-
opment of the eml^ryo may he observed through it.

The buccal body and radula develop rather rapidly. In an
embryo taken from the ovum, about 2 -5 mm. long when extended,
not quite mature, with the caudal bladder still rather large, but the
heart formed and regularly contracting, the shell measured about 0-35
mm. long. The radula was 0-35 mm. long and had as many as 34
transverse rows of teeth. In the first of them there were 3 teeth, the
central and a lateral on either side, appearing as thin, barely visible
plates, or mere traces (0\ in fig. 1). Other specimens showed the
same more distinct, as represented in fig, VI. In the following
transverse rows they are larger, and rapidly develop in shape, while
at the margin new teeth of the same character are added, at first
with each row, then at greater and greater intervals, so that, in the
radula mentioned above, the formula was 12-C-12 in the twenty-
fifth transverse row. The development of the radula proceeds com-
paratively very fast, in this and other species, faster than the growth
of the animal, so that even very young specimens have the radula
far advanced and show nothing more of the earliest formed teeth.
The addition of new teeth is not always regular and symmetrical on
both sides ; thus, the fifth longitudinal row may begin at the sixth
transverse row on one side, and with the seventh on the other, so
that the formula for the sixth would then be 5-C-4.

Not all of the teeth are formed and transformed in the same way,
in this and other species, as may be seen by the figures. But Limax
campestris, and other Lhnaco- Zonitidce and Helicidce, show such new
and unexpected features that they must be considered more in
detail.

For a better understanding and easier reference the following table
gives the particulars of a series of the specimens examined, all of
them, except two, being represented in figs. I-V on PL 10.

Embryo 2"0 mm. long ; radula 0'3 mm. long, with 27 transverse rows.

Fig. 1. Embryo 2"5 mm. long ; radula 0'35 mm. long, with 34 transverse rows.

Animal 3'0 mm. long ; radula 0'55 mm. long, with 56 transverse rows.

Fig. 2. Animal 3"5 mm. long ; radula 072 mm. long, with 65 transverse rows.

Fig. 3. Animal 7 mm. long ; radula 1'15 mm. long, with 86 transverse rows.

Fig. 4. Animal 15 mm. long ; radula 2'24 mm. long, with 104 transverse rows.

Fig. 5. Animal 27 mm. long ; radula 272 mm. long, with 105 transverse rows.

* They were first overlooked, and afterward designated as O in the original
drawing, of which the present is a copy.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 391

THE CENTRAL TEETH.

The central tooth is first formed as a simple, rouudish or oval
nodule, with a blunt point directed backward (fig. I and VI),
rapidly increasing in length in the following rows. At the same
time one or two somewhat irregular side cusps appear on either side,
which on about the eighth tooth become more constant, more marked,
and single on each side. There are, however, occasional exceptions
as shown in the tenth of fig. VI, where on the right* side there are
again two side cusps. Thus it attains its final shape, but is some-
what uusymmetrical, and so it remains, not only in one specimen,
but as a rule in all (see figs. II- VI). This is also the case in other
species. In some individuals the right side cusp is more posterior,
in others the left. It early becomes noticeable that the central tooth
stands more posteriorly than the laterals on either side of it, as repre-
sented in fig. VI. Comparatively early the plate of attachment
extends backward, at first quite small, barely noticeable, and only
on the side bearing the anterior side-cusp; but later it extends on
both sides.

These facts make it evident that the central tooth is simple prim-
arily, not formed by the coalescence of two original laterals as has
been supposed.

THE LATERAL TEETH.

An adult specimen of Limax campestris has about 11 to 18^ lateral
teeth. And to my surprise I found that, although they are exactly
alike in their final shape, they are formed in two widely different
ways :

(1). The 6 or 7 mesial laterals on each side first appear as thin,
simple, transverse, nearly rectangular plates, each as a rule preceded
by a short, nodule-like "trace," (see figs. I and VI). They soon
become longer at their inner ends, more triangular, and the mesodont
forms, being at first short and blunt, but immediately growing longer,

* Eight and left are liere given as they appear under the microscope.

5 These limits are exceptionally Tvide and may be considerably narrowed by
subsequent careful observations. The specimens with fewer laterals may very
likely be immature. In the slugs there is no definite criterion of maturity, except
probably in the genital organs, which should be consulted in every case. W. G.
Binney found the tooth formula to be c. 18"22 in one specimen, c. 11"25 in another ;
I counted c. 14xl'31 in an individual 27 mm. long but still probably not fully
mature.

392 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

more slender, sharp pointed and spine- like. At the same time 2 or
3, or even 4 smaller cusps are formed on the outer side, and one (an
endodont) or sometimes two cusps on the inner, so that there are
typically 4 or 5, sometimes 6 or even 7 cusps on a tooth (see fig. VI
first lateral in the second and fifth transverse rows. ) This peculiar
formation of the inner group of laterals is found in the embryonal or
larval stage of the animal only ; and in order to have an appropriate
name for this form of tooth, we may properly term it echinate.

The teeth, passing through the echinate stage, gradually again
change in form ; the body of the tooth becomes longer, the mesodont
loses its spine-like form, becoming wider, and its free cutting point
shorter ; the endodont becomes more coalescent with the mesodont,
with a short and less acute point ; but it remains constant, being
visible in all specimens in different stages of growth which were
examined, from this locality."

Further modifications are that one or two of the distal cusps dis-
appear, and the one or two remaining are transformed into the single
ectodont of the adult (conf. fig. VI, the first lateral in the eighth to
eleventh transverse rows); moreover the plate of attachment begins
to be prolonged backward, at first being ver}" thin and small, barely
visible. The outcome of this series of changes is the perfect lateral
tooth of the adult Lhna.v.

All of the forms above described may be seen in one transverse
row, (as represented in the fifteenth row of fig. I), and the different
stages of transformation are shown in every longitudinal row of the
same figure and fig. VI ; but it must be added that the transverse
rows, especially in the anterior part of the radula, are closer together
than represented in the drawing, in which they are separated for the
sake of distinctness ; and the cusps reach further backward over the
body of each following tooth. The individual teeth are fully as wide
in the front part of the radula as more posteriorly.

(2). The distal laterals are evolved through other intermediate
stages much resembling those undergone by the later aculeate mar-
ginals, as illustrated in figs. II- V. Fig. II represents at A the
thirtieth, at B the forty- fifth transverse row of teeth from a spec-

^ It may be noted here that in the persistence of the endodont, Liniax cam-
pestris offers no distinctive character from Li»iax agrestis Linn.; and it may be
added that in drawings made in 1882, of the radula of Limax tenellus Nils.
and /-. cinereiis Lister, from the Swiss Alps, the endodont is distinctly shown.

lM!)o.] XATFRAL SCIENCES OF PiriLADElJ'HIA. •^•'•^

imen which had been hatched a few days. Tliis radula measured
0-72 mm. long, and was in the posterior part 0-28 mm. wide. It has
65 transverse rows of teeth numbering T-cT in front, 10"8c8*10
in the posterior part ; so that the new longitudinal rows formed dur-
ing its growth are 11 on either side. The first transverse row of this
radula corresponds approximately to the twelfth in fig. I or VI, thus
the thirtieth to the forty-second, the forty-fifth to the fifty-seventh of
the whole series ; the teeth of about the 1 1 first formed transverse
rows were cast off.

All teeth present in fig. II would become typical laterals in the
adult animal. They are primarily transverse bars ; at the inner end
of each bar the mesodont is formed, at first quite small, and then two
or threee ectodonts appear, which, as the mesodont grows, come to
stand on the latter ; (figs. II, 45: lo-ll ; III, 18) with the exception
of one which remains upon the conmiou reflection, and is transformed
into the final ectodont. Of the endodont not a trace is present
originally ; and it forms only later when the tooth passes through
the intermediate or "transition" stage to become a true lateral.
The consequent stages may be seen in comparing the teeth with
corresponding numbers in figs. II-V ; thus tooth 15 is shown from
its beginning almost to full maturity ; and the figures give a better
idea of the changes than any description. A main factor in the
development of the tooth is the growth of the plate of attachment,
forward and backward from the "body" of the tooth.

THE MARGINAL TEETH.

The marginals, although much resembling the outer laterals in a
certain stage, are somewhat different from the first. Instead of being
a transverse bar, the base of attachment is longitudinally elongated,
as seen in figs. Ill, 28; IV, 40, 41; and V 45, 46. The aculeate
mesodont is at first very small, but it grows rapidly, and is at once
directed obliquely inward.

The marginals are not all alike. I'hose toward the inside are seen
quite early to bear ectodonts (fig. Ill, 20-27). The ectodont
becomes rather large, but subsequently disappears (fig. V, 25).
There is, however, a decided irregularity in this character, for in the
same longitudinal row there may be teeth with, and others without
an ectodont (fig. IV, 80). The distal marginals seem always to be
simple, without an ectodont (fig. IV and V). It may be noted for
2(5

394 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

comparison, that in Limax tenellus Nils., all (32) marginals were
found to have a distinct "outer cusp"; but on the marginals of L.
dnereid^ Lister ( about 130 ou each side ) no ectodouts were seen.

A similar formation of the earliest teeth will i)robably be found
in other Limaces, and in such ZoniUdce as Hiialinia radkdula Gray,
petrophila Bid., capsella Gld., etc., species in which the laterals bear
distinct endodonts.

Zonitoides arboreus Say. PI. 11, figs. I. II.

No embryo of this species was obtained, but a very young spec-
imen with shell and soft parts nearly colorless, the former measuring
1-1 mm. diameter, with Ij whorls. The radula (fig. I), was 0'39
mm. long, and had 48 transverse rows, of which, however, some of
the youngest, at the posterior end, could not be clearly seen. Here
there are 7"c-7 teeth, three of which are rather well formed laterals.
Very few rows and teeth could have been lost from the front end of
the radula, and the first present in the specimen examined were evi-
dently of primitive shape, and a type entirely different from that
of Lima.r, rather resembling those of Patiila strlatella, couf. fig.
VIII.

The central teeth iiave a wide, short base or "body," with a dis-
tinct mesodont and at least quite early a side cusp on each side.
Comparatively soon the plate of attachment is seen [wsteriorly,
though very small. The laterals (about o in the adult) are wide
transverse plates, somewhat irregular, longer in the mesial half, with
a short, wide, blunt mesodont gradually becoming longer and more
slender, and 2 or 3 small cusps in place of the later ectodout. No
trace of an endodont is seen. As the teeth without much change
gain their definite shape, the plates of attachment also develop.

Fig. II represents the radula of a nearly adult specimen, the shell
having a diameter of 4 '3 mm. The radula is l"0o mm. long, 0-35
wide, and has 77 transverse rows of 17"0 c. 5T7 teeth. Only the
first marginal bears an ectodont. Another example, of 4-3 mm.
diameter, had a radula 1-33 mm. long, U-45 wide, with 19-1x5- c.
oxl'U* teeth. Another of a peculiar form from Alabama gave the
formula 20-lx4-c. •4x1-20.

Embryonic 3j)ecimens remain to be examined, and the earliest
form of the central and inner lateral teeth ascertained.

IS!);).] NATUKAJ^ SCIKXCKS OK PH FLAl )KI,1'I I I A . oii5

Zonitoides ligerus Say. PI. 11, tigs. III. IV.

We have in Pennsylvania and Oliiu, a very small t'orni measuring
9-10 ram. diameter, which lias been considered Z. li(jerii.% although
with some doubt. Besides other diti'erential characters, there are two
accessory glands near the head of the dart sac, while W. G. Binney
found only one in typical ll(/ern.-<.

No embryo has been secured thus far. The smallest examples
found measured about o mm. in diameter ; and the radula of one
of these is represented in fig. Ill, having 2U- c -20 teeth, of which 6
are perfectly formed laterals and the 7th and 8th nearly so, the
latter corresponding with the loth of an adult, and the "transition
tooth" 9 to 14. At least 9-18 then, of the younger specimen, will be
transformed into laterals. In either example all the teeth showing
the transition from the aculeate marginals to the laterals have been
represented in my figures, 14-7 in III, 17-11 in IV,' so that
the transformation can immediately be seen by comparing the
teeth bearing the same numbers. We specially notice: first, the
total absence of endodonts in all teeth, just as in Z. arhoreus ; second,
the absence of ectodonts in the distal, newly formed, aculeate teeth —
/. e. in most marginals except a few mesial ; and third, the longitud-
inally elongated plates of the youngest marginals.

Besides Z. liyerns, young and adult examples of a few other
nearly related species were examined, one from Tennessee probably
new, and Z. suppirssiis Say. They gave essentially the same results
as /i</erus.

Patula striatella .\iitli. PL 11. tigs. YII. VIII, IX.

Several end)ryos from the eggs were examined. Fig. IX shows
the buccal body of a quite young specimen with tlie commencement
of the radual, in optical section. Diameter of the buccal body 0*12
mm. The spindle-.shaped cells above are the developing retractor
muscle.

Of an eiHi)ryo more advanced, about 1 mm. long, and nearly
mature, having a shell of 1 '. whorls, and the caudal bladder small
but .still slowly contracting, the radula is represented in fig. VIII.
It is 0T4 mm. long, with 21 transverse rows, in the last 9-c*9 teeth.
But the formation of new teeth is somewhat irregular on the two sides

' For (ti.stiiiftiicss tlicy arc separated in tlic draw iiig ; in nature tliey lie close
together; tliis is indicated 1)y the sign.

396 PROCEEDINC4S OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

in tliis as well as some other species. The first transverse row is
represented only l\v the first lateral on the right ; the second by 1 "C'l
and so on, as shown in the figure. The transformation is rather
simple and decidedly slow. The centrals are wide and short, at first
with a short, wide, blunt median projection which develops into the
mesodont, and very slowly, like the side cusps. All other teeth are
first formed as simple transverse bars or plates, the laterals gradually
assuming their definite shapes without intermediate stages : even the
ectodonts seem to be alwaj's single. Otherwise there is much sim-
ilarity to Z. arboreus, but the forms are somewliat more plump.

The fir.«t formation and development of the )nar'ji)ial.< has not yet
been observed with sufticient exactness. The mesodont and partly
the ectodont are "double- pointed," and it appears probable that the
mesial small cusp of the former is really the entodont, as it first
stands near the liase (fig. VII, 15) and then gradually ascends on
the mesodont and becomes evanescent, as seen in fig. VII, 12-8.
This figure represents the radula, 1 -4 mm. long, from a specimen hav-
ing a shell of o-o mm. diameter, apparently not quite mature. Yet in
all the 94 transverse rows, no new teeth are added; the formula is
c. 6x1:10. There is very little change in the shapes of the single
teeth, except that the plates of the sixth and seventh laterals are
noticeably longer in the posterior than in the front part of the radula.

Of Patula alfernata Say, a number of examples were examined.
One having a shell of 20 mm. diameter had a radula 4-5 mm. long,
1 •-) wide, with 143 transverse rows of 34"C-34 teeth, with alwut 15
laterals. In a young specimen of 3 mm. diameter the radula was 0*88
mm. long, and had 72 transverse rows of 11-c-ll in the anterior,
12-c'12 in the posterior part.

The radula of Patula solitaria Say, extracted from a shell of 23
mm. diameter, is 5 mm. long, 1*8 wide, with 142 transverse rows of
31"c-31 teeth, 16 laterals, In a young one, the shell of 5-3 mm.
diameter, I counted 68 transverse rows of 13-C-13 teeth in the
anterior 15-C-15 in the posterior part.
Polygyra " (Triodopsisi tridentata S;iy. I'l. 11. tij;s. V. VI.

No embryo or quite young specimens were at my disposition.
The smallest found had a shell measuring about 6 mm. in diameter,

"See Pilsbry, Preliiuiiiary outline of a new classification of tlie Helices.
Proc. Acad. Xat. Sc, Phila., 1892, p. 400.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 397

and its radiila was 1 "63 mm. loug, 0-70 wide, with 88 transverse
rows. lu a mature specimen of 15 mm. diameter, the radula was
3-85 mm. long, 1*34 wide, with 112 transverse rows. The former
had (in the middle part) 20"c-20 teeth, of which five were laterals and
two very nearly so; in the latter part there were 30*c*30 in the
anterior, 31*c-31 in the posterior part, about 10 of them laterals.
They are represented in figs. V and VI, and the form of the teeth
is essentially the same in both. The centrals have distinct side
cusps ; in the laterals there is not a trace of the endodont, while the
mesial cusp, adjacent to the mesodont of the "marginals," seems to
be an endodont, since it stands nearly isolated on the base in the
younger teeth, as shown in 29, fig. VI, and then (as in many other
species of this genus, of Patnla, and of Helicidtv generally), gradu-
ally coalesces with the mesodont, ascends upon it, and finally becomes
obsolete. There is, however, considerable vai'iation as to this in the
distal laterals, even in the same longitudinal row, as shown in fig.
VI, 25-29,

Polygyra (Steuotrerna) hirsufa Say gave essentially the same result.

As already said, the observations presented above have been made
on but few species, and not complete even in most of these. They
must be carried further. Yet the results obtained appear to be for
the most part new and valuable ; they may briefiy be comprised in
the following conclusions :

1. The radula in land mollusca is quite different in the various
stages of life, both as to the number and the shape of the teeth.

2. As to number : there are very few teeth in the first formed
transverse rows, and new ones, forming new longitudinal rows, are
added at the lateral margins, at first rapidly, then at greater and
greater intervals. The development of the radula goes on faster than
the growth of the animal, comparatively, so that in young examples
it is larger in proportion to the size of the animal than in the adult.

3. As to shape : the first formed teeth are of very simple shape
and by gradual transformation give place to teeth of the final form.
This transformation may go through different stages, or by different
modes in cases where the form becomes ultimately the same.

4. The question whether the addition of new teeth and the trans-
formation of teeth goes on as long as life lasts, or ceases with ma-
turity is not yet decided.

398 I'HoCKKDrNfiS ol' THK ACADEMY ()F [1893.

5. In certain species and gi'oups there are forms of teeth in the
emhrvonal, or larval staire. entirely diftereut from those fonnd in
post- embryonal life, so that we may i)roperly speak of the change as
a metamorphosis.

(i. The new formation and transformation of teeth is, as a rule,
not exactly symmetrical on the two sides of the radula, so that a
formula of one side is often only approximately true.

7. The width of the individual teeth, (and of the longitudinal
rows), is the same from the earliest formation to the later stages and
the increase in width of the whole radula is effected exclusively by
the addition of new longitudinal rows.

8. The central teeth seem to be" (and in some species are doubt-
less) simple from their first formation ; not a product of the coales-
cence of two original laterals.

9. They are, as a rule, more or less markedly asymmetrical.

10. The terras ''lateral' and "marginal" teeth are not of alv
solute significance : The "marginals" of a younger specimen, or a
part of them, will have transformed into laterals when the animal is
adult.

11. It is also quite inadmissible to speak of- the marginals as
modified laterals, for a transformation never takes place in this
direction. We should not say, as has been usual, tliat the simple
mesodont of the laterals becomes split, or bicuspid, in the marginals;
but the contrary is true : the "double pointed mesodont" of the
marginal loses its endodont and becomes simple as the tooth is grad-
ually replaced by a lateral. It is incorrect to say: "The teeth
become smaller towards the margins," as they virtually increase in
size from the margin toward the middle.

12. The expression "transition teeth" between marginals and
laterals (not the reverse) has become of a real, actual meaning, just
as the word "relationshi])" among organisms has gained its proper
meaning by the theory of descent,

18. The diffierent ways in which the teeth are formed and trans-
formed will probaldy furnish valuable hints for systematic mala-
cology.

*• At If'ast ill the land Puliinniata ( X<'i)hn)]Piuii^;ta v. 111.): in sioiiic Liniiiaci-
dae, I'. >;. Livnuca palustiis .Miill.. thrvf is a siniiif; i)r()l)iil)ility that the cen-
trals arc double iu first fonnatiou.

1893.] NATURAL SCIENCFS OF PHILAPELPHTA. 399

14. The rate of increase in iuinil)er of the teeth will furnish the
means for calculating the rate of the new formation of the radula as
a whole. This is more rapid than is generally supposed.'"

1."). It is evident that the morphology of a radula can be
thoroughly understood only by examining and comparing the diti'er-
ent stages of its formation.

In the text nothing has been said about the methods of pi-eparation
and manipulation of the raduUe, — not much is necessary. As
far as possible, the radula has been removed from the fresh
animal unchanged. Caustic alkali has been used where necessary.
By careful desiccation, and also by the action of chromic acid solu-
tion, for staining, valuable results may be obtained, as the teeth
and especially the plates of attachment shrink somewhat and thus are
separated from each other, and seen more exactly. But it is almost
unnecessary to add that this means can only be used in connection
with observations on the intact radula, for without this check artificial
might be mistaken for natural features.

EXTLAXATION OF Pl>ATES 10 AND 11.

I'l.ATK 10, Fig. I — Kadula of an embryo of LImax cam pest ns Sa,y,
not quite mature, showing first part of radula
formed.
II — Radula of a specimen a few days old (after hatch-
ing), and measuring 3-5 mm. long.

A. 30th transverse row (about 42nd of total
number).

B. 45th transverse row (about 57th of total
number).

Ill — Radula of a specimen 7 mm. long, one- half of

a transverse row, formula c. 10'18.
IV — Radula of a specimen 15 mm. long, one- half of a
transverse row, formula, c. 14'27.
V — Radula of a specimen 15 mm. long, one-half of
a transverse row, formula, c. 14-32.

'"Without repi'iitiiif; tlio calciilatidns Iicvc. it may he said that I fouuil the
radula of Liiiia.i' raiiiprslris to form alxuit soo traiisvt'rsc rows in all- — i)rohahly
consideral)ly more ; thi.s would mean that the radula is about eight times entirely
ehangod during life. For Polygyra {Mesodon) thyroides about 2000 transverse
rows were found, corresponding to about 16 to 18 total renewals.

400 PROCKEDJNOS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

VI — Left side of first part of radula of another embryo.
Plate 11, Fig. I — Zonitoides arboreus Bay, quite young, anterior part;
X 600.
II — The same, nearly mature; x ca. 750.
Ill — Zonitoides ligerus Say, young, 3 mm. diara. ; x 400.
IV — The same, adult, 9-5 mm. diam. ; x 400.
V — Polygyra tridentata Say, young, 6 mm. diam.; x 400.
VI — The same, adult, 15 mm. diam. ; x 400.
VII — Patula striatelfa Anth., adult, 5-3 mm. diam.;

X 470.
VIII — The same, embryo, 1 "0 mm. diam. ; x 400.
IX — The same, very young embryo, buccal body, 0'12
mm. diam.

1893.] NATl'KAL SCIENCES OF PHTI.ADEJ.PHIA. 401

November 7.
Rev. Henry C. McCJook, I). D. , Vice-President, iu the chair.

Twenty-eight persons present.

Papers' under the following titles were presented for publication : —

"Description of two new Pocket Mice from the United vStates,
with remarks on the identity of allied forms," by Samuel K. Rhoads.

''On some Leech-like Parasites of x\merican Crayfishes," by J.
Percy Moore.

"On extinct Bovidjc, Canida> and Felida' from the Plistocene ot
the Plains," by E. D. Cope.

November 14.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.
Thirty-seven persons present.

The death of Francis T. Steel, a member, Sept. 20, 1893, was
annnounced.

November 21.
The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.

Eighty- seven persons present.

A paper entitled "Geographic Variations in Bassariscus astutus,
with description ot a new subspecies," by Samuel N. Rhoads, was
presented for publication.

Fossil Fishes Jrom British Cobnnbia. — Prof. Edw. D. Cope
states that Dr. G. M. Dawson, of the Geological Survey of the
Dominion of Canada, had submitted to him for determination some
S[)ecimens of fossil fishes from British Columbia. Some of them are
fnmi a hai'd shale from near Tranquilla, and others are from a shale
of softer character from the north fork of the Smilkameen River,
which is a tributary of the Columbia. The specimens from the
former locality are too imperfect for determination, while one from
the latter locality may be named. It is a species of Aiayzon, which

402 PJ{OCEKI)IN«8 OF THK ACADKMV OF [189)).

differs from those already known in the shortne.<s of the dors^al fin,
etc. The characteri^ of the species so fiar as determinable are as
follows :

Amyzon brevipixxe sp. nov. — Form, medium ; depth of body
equal length of liead. Fin radii ; D. 22-3 ; A. 8 ; V. prol)ably 11,
an interruption in tlie order of the rays making tlie location of these
rays uncertain. Seventeen vertebne may l)e counted anterior to the
caudal region, of which 10 are anterior to the anterior l)ase of the
dorsal fin. Space for two additional vertebric exists at an interrup-
tion of the dorsal series, so that the total number of precaudal ver-
tebrte is probably nineteen, as the dorsal fin is uninterru})ted.
Distal caudal vertebrje and fin absent. Pectoral, ventral and anal
fins well separated from each other. Length anterior to caudal
vertebne 57 mm. ; length of base of dorsal fin, 23 '5 mm. ; depth at
anterior base of dorsal fin, 2.") mm. Tiie species difiei-s from.tho.-<e
alreadv desci'ibed in the smaller nund^er of dorsal fin-rays, and of
dorsal vertebrte. The specimen on wliich it is based is of smaller
size than tho.se of most of the other species, but some of the frag-
ments of the collection indicate larger individuals.

The discovery of tliis species, extends the distribution of the
Amyzon beds beyond its previous limits. The localities at present
known are the South Park, Colorado, and Osino, Elko Co., Nevada.
Dr. Dawson informs me that ])oth insect and plant remains occur in
tliese fish-shales and that Prof. Scudder finds the former to belong-
to species different from those of other localities.

November 28.

The President, General Isaac J. Wistar, in the chair.

Forty-seven persons present.

Papers under the following titles were presented for publication : —

"North American Larridie," by Wm. J. Fox.

"New Species of Fungi from various localities," by J. B. Ellis and
U. M. Everhart.

"Critical List of Mollusks collected in the Potomac Valley," by
H. A. Pilsbry.

The Committee on the Hayden Memorial Geological Award
reported that the medal and the interest arising from the fund had
been this year voted to Thomas Henry Huxley, L. L. D., F. R. S.,
Professor of Biology in the Koyal College of Science of London.

1893.]

NATIHAI- SCIKNCKS OK I'l Ill.A I )KI,I'H I A.

403

REPORT OK THE C'OMMITTKE ON THE IIAYDKN MEMORIAL
(4EOL()(;l(AL AWARD.

The Coniniittee ou the Hayrien Geological Memorial Award in
fiilfillinu' the trust confided to it hv the Academy recommends that
the Hayden ^Memorial Medal and the balance of the interest arisini:
from the fund be awarded this year to Thomas Henry Huxley,
Ph. D., LL. D., D. C, L., F. K. 8., F. L, S., F. G. S., Professor
of Biology in the Ivoyal College of Science of London, in recognition
of the great services wliich he has rendered to science and especially
to geology, during the long period of his valuable original researches.
In doing this the Conunittee is but acting as the agent of the
Academy, but it desires in addition and on liehalf of its mendiers
whom his labors have assisted and enlightened, to add a tribute of
its own to the high scientific value of Dr. Huxley's achievements.

Pkrsikok Frazer,

Angelo Heilprin,

J. Peter Lesley,

Ben.l Smith. Lyman,

Cbmmittee.

IVii/ftanophoni coJnha ii. ^ji. — Mr. H. A. Pilskry exhibited
specimens of a minute land snail from Polvon, Nicaragua, which had
been for many years in the collection of the Academy under the name
Helix iciUiehnI Pfr. He stated that it was not that species, but a
new form of the genus T/ii/-miiujihoj<t, lor which the name coloba was
pro})osed. He defined the species as follows:

Sp.fhdv.: — Shell minute, depressed, with slightly cou-
oidal spire; thin and fragile, light reddish horn colored.
Umbilicus open but narrow, one-sixth the diameter of
the base ; whorls 3], convex, the first one smooth, the
others very finely and closely striated, the strijie
oblique, arcuate, on the last whorl becoming small,
wrinkle-like riblets; Under a high magnification (50
diameters) an excessively close, fine sculpture of revolv-
ing lines becomes visible. A])erture rounded-lunate,
ol)ii(jue; lip thin, sharp, the columellar margin dilated.
Alt. l"16mm., diam. 1 -^4 mm. The specimens are
from Polvon, Nicaragua, collected by the McNeil ex-
pedition. This species seems nearly allied to T. (jnatc-
iiialnisis C. and F. , but it is much more depressed,
more widely und)ilicated and snialler.

Henry C. fiercer and Susanna M. Gaskell were elected mend)er8.
The following were ordered to be printed: —

404

PROCEKDINOS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1893.

DESCRIPTIONS OF NEW SPECIES OF NORTH AMERICAN MAMMALS
WITH REMARKS ON SPECIES OF THE GENUS PEROGNATHUS.

By SAMUEL X. RHOADS.

The pocket mouse from Texas here described as new was obtained
during the past year by Prof. E. D. Cope and placed in the collec-
tion of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.

The specimens of Perognathns lordi on which I have leased the
duplicate description of that species, so imperfectly characterized by
Gray, were taken during a collecting trip in Washington and
British Columbia last year, and are included in the author's private
collection at the Academy.

By the i-ediscovery of P. lordi of Gray I am enabled to throw
some light on certain questions of synonymy propounded by Dr.
Merriam in his monographic revision of the genus.'

The figure of skull of P. femoralis here given completes the

illustrations of known species of the genus.

1. Perognathus copei. s]>. uov. (tyije Xo. 1612, ad. ^, Col. Acad. Xat. Sci.,
Phila., Staked Plaius near :Mobeetie. Texas. August 26tli, 189.3: col. bv Prof.
E. D. Cope).

Description. — Size small, somewhat greater than Baird's measure-
ments of P. Jiavus. Colors similar to Baird's description of P. mon-

Ears destroyed. Tail thickly covered with
coarse hairs, concealing the annuli ; grayish
white above, pure white l)elow, with terminal
pencil, slightly crested- penicillate.

Beneath, including whisker patch and feet,
white. Upper back and head grizzled blackish
fawn, the lilack tips coarsely predominating.
Rump and thighs strongly washed with cinna-
mon, this color forming a broad posterior band
diminishing laterally to a faint line at fore-
legs; soles nearly naked, heel clothed with
bristly hairs halfway to toes, as in Jiavus; skull
similar to f^aviis but longer and narrower, the

mastoids less pronounced both laterally and
Fig. 12 posteriorly, the interparietal a squarish pen-

ticola but smaller.

1 X. Amer. Fauua, Xo. 1, 1889.
- All figures twice natural size.

lSi)o.] NATURAL SCIENCKS OF PPIILADELPH I A. 405

tagonal as iu P. inornatns. In fiavns the coronoid process is short
and hhmt, iu copei it is long and sharply attenuate. The condyle
in copei extends far beyond the tip of angle and its upper line is
horizontal, instead of oblique, as in favus. In the latter the ratio
of length to breadth of interparietal is 78, in copei it is 62.

P. copei belongs to the fascinti(s group of the sub-genus Perog-
nathus.

Measurements.-' — Total length, 114; tail, 49; hind foot, 15.
Skull, total length, 19-5: basilar length of Hensel, 14-5; greatest
mastoid breadth, 1 0 ; length of nasals, 7 ; interorbital constriction,
4-5; length of mandible, 9-7; height of coronoid process from angle,
4-2; ratio of length to breadth of interparietal, 62.

Remarks. — Dr. Merriam thinks the specimen from Mason, Texas,
on w Inch he bases his description and figure of fiavKs in N. Amer.
Fauna, No. 1, may possibly not prove typical. In any case it is
evident that copei is in no sense identical with it, either cranially or
externally. So far as can be determined from Baird's description of
fiaviis there is nothing to prove its dissimilai-ity to the Mason specimen,
whereas copei shows essential differences from either ; fii*st in color,
second in color- pattern, third in hairiness of the tail.

Baird did not define or figure any cranial characters. The

specimen of copei was taken by its discoverer from the stomach of a

rattlesnake captured by him on the eastern slope of the Staked Plains

near the headwaters of the North Fork of the Red River, in Wheeler

County, Texas. Owing to its passage through the snake the specimen is

probably abnormally long. The skull had been forcibly compressed

but not enough to prevent its restoration as seen in the figure.

2. I'erognathus lordi (Gray). Ahj-o)iiys lordi Qy-av. Proc. Zool. .Soc Loiuluii.
(Ion. May. 1868. 202. (Duplicate type. No. 447, $ ; Col. S. N. Elioads: Vcruou,
head of" Lake Okanagan. Hristish ('oliuiil)ia. July 28, 1892; col. hy S. X. R).

Description. — Size medium, })elage soft, full and silky, ears rather
small, tail slightly longer than head and body, sparsely and coarsely
haired at base, the hairs longer and more silky toward the slightly-
crested- penicillate extremity. Above grayish buff, softly grizzled
with black, the individual hairs, as described by Gray, being
basally "dark lead color with short gray band and minute
(slender J black tip." The feet, lower half of tail, chin, throat,
chest and belly and a spot on inferior margin and posterior

•'All moasurciiients in millinictres.

406

PROCEEDINGS (»K TlIK ACADK.MV OK

[l.si)8.

V^

Fis

base of ear, white. .Sides of clieek. neck,
belly, thighs and tail washed witli pale
buff, this color often broadly encroaching
upon the pure white ol throat and belly.
Upper third of tail colored same as back,
darkening to black at the tip.

Measurements. — Total length, 17!> ; tail,
1)2; hind foot, 24; eai", from crown, 4-5.
Skull. — Total length, 26; basilar length
17 '5 greatest mastoid breadth, 14;
length of nasals, 10*7; interorbital con-
sti-iction, 6-2; length of mandible, 12;
height of coronoid process from angle, 5 "2.
Ratio of mastoid breadtli to basilar length,
82 ; of mastoid breadth to total length,
5.3-9 ; of length to breadth of interparietal,
71. Lower premolar larger than the
last molar; audital bullae not united by
a symphysis but separated by ] mm. anteriorly ; bullae not project-
ing beyond ])lane of occiput.

Remarks. — Eight specimens of this species were trapped on the
semi-arid foothills at the head of Lake Okanagan. They abundantly
freijuented the open hill.«ides of bunch grass and sage-bush up to
timber line and down to near the lake levels, driving their myriad
tunnels without difficulty through the dry, indurated and stony soil.
Their habits seem to more closely resemble those of Tliomomii^
than any other genus of burrowing rodent. Owing to their halnt of
pushing a load of dirt ahead of them it wa? difficult to catch them in
their retreats but a trap set by the mouth of certain foraging exits
was more successful. In tlie daytime they keep undergi-ound, coming
forth nightly to replenisli tlieir larder with the seeds of weeds and
grasses. This species was not found in similar localities farther
north. It is probably limited to the soutliern parts of the Great
Basin fauna of British Columbia as defined by me in the Proceedings
of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. l^Ho, page
25, aud extends soutli into Northeastern Wasliingtou. It is very
doubtful if its habitat reaches farther west than the more arid
foothills of the Cascade ^lountains ; the Selkirk Range would form a
natural barrier to its dispersion ea.stward.

1808.]

NATTER AI. SCIENCES OF PHTI^ADELPHIA.

407

3. Perognathus femoralis J. A. Allen.

I)i*. Allen described this species in 18!)1/ Its cranial characters
never having been figured, I take this opportunity of illustrating
them from three specimens taken at the type locality during the past
year (189o). Femondh differs from its allies /W/Z^.r, califoDticus and
(irmafiis in essential cranial peculiarities, as may be seen by a com-
parison of the figure with those of Mer-
riam. Its skull is most like that of califor-
iiicns, from which it diffei's in the square-
cornered interparietal, the mastoid and
zygomatic breadths being equal and the
plane of occiput being on a line with the
postero- mastoid angles; the mastoids are
relatively larger in femoralis and the
coronoid process of mandible is longer
and sharply hooked. It may be further
remarked that the three California species
under consideration are a striking illus-
tration of the wonderful fertility of the
region they inhabit in the diffei'entiation
of species, externally similar, but ana-
tomically distinct. P. femoralis probably
belongs to the penicilldfus group of the
sub-genus CliaiodipKS, as defined by

%^^

Mr. Merriam.

y^otes oil the Affiiiifies of P('ro(jiiiif/iii--< lordi, P. iiioUipilosiis and
Cricetodipiis jxirivis. — In his admirable Revision of the North
American Pocket Mice Dr. Merriam enumerates three species whose
identity it was then impossible to determine, viz., the Abromijs lordi
of Gray, the Perognatlnis mollip'dosns of Coues and the Cricetodipas
parrii.s of Fenle. Dr. Merriam, in sunnning up his conclusions, refers
to these as follows: "My opinion is that this animal, (P. inollipilo-
sus), will prove to be identical with P. lordi and both may be the
same as /^ parmis of Peale." In another place (page 27) he states:
"all three come from the Pacific province, from Northern C'alifornia
northward. ' '

Taking the above description oi lordi as a basis, it remains to be

< Kul. Am. Mils. X. H., Vol. :i No. 2, 281.

408 proc'p:kijincjs of the acadkjiv ok [181)8.

decided, (1) whether the British Columbia Pocket Mice taken hv me
are identical with the type of lordi. ( 2 ) If so, can the^^ be identical
with mollipilosasf (3) What is their relationship to P. montico/a ol
Baird? (4) Are any of these the same as Cncetodipiis parvus f (5)
To what faunal areas do these species belong?

(Ij. To the first query I can answer without hesitation in the
affirmative. I cannot find the slightest discrepancy between Gray's
original description and the specimens from Vernon. This is further
confirmed by Mr. Oldfield Thomas's letter quoted by Dr. Merriam
iu his remarks on lordi in American Fauna No, 1.

(2). Perognathus mollipi/osiis differs from lordi in the following
particulars : (/, smaller size ; h, tail one-third longer than head and
body; c, cinnamon tints; d, color of upper parts descending to
wrist ; e, it inhabits a different faunal region. Its only affinities to
lordi, so far as can be determined from Coues's description, consist
in the non-penicillate tail, soft and smooth pelage, white lower parts,
pale fulvous lateral stripe and bicolor tail. In lordi, however, the
tail is slightly crested- penicillate aud plainly tricolor, the latter a
a peculiarity I have not noticed in any other murine rodent.

(8). The characters of lordi coincide more closely with those of
P. nonticola of Baird and Merriam than with any other. Mr.
Thomas wrote Dr Merriam, after examining the type of lonli iu the
British Museum, that, "so far as (he could) make out from Coues's
description (it) is the same as P. inoitticold/'

The description of Coues referred to was made on the supposition
that a specimen from Fort Crook, California, was the same as Baird's
type which is supposed to have come from St. Mary's Mission, Mon-
tana. Dr. Merriam refers to this Foil Crook specimen without
hesitation as inollipilosus, (Coues's provisional name for it), and says
the P. ■iiwuticola oi' Baird "is a very different animal." We have
seen that lordi and mollipilosus are not synonymous, aud Dr. Mer-
riam thinks iiiiiUipiloxii^ and moiificola are quite di.stinct, while Mr.
Thomas thinks the type of lordi answers Coues's hybrid description
of moHticolit «'l mollipilosus.

As the description of monticola has .«everal year's priority over
/orr^/ the stability of the latter in our nomeuchiture depends on its
S})ecific dissociation from moiificola. That they arc different species
I have very little doubt, uotwithstandiug their ap})arent resemblance.

As compared with lordi, moidicola may be distinguished by a,

1893.] NATURAL SCIKNCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 409

smaller size; b, cinuamon of upper parts; c, cinnamon of sides ; d,
plumbeous bases of belly hairs; e, outside of foreleg dusky to wrist;
/, smaller skull ; (j, mastoids projecting behind plane of occiput ; /(,
audital bullae united by an anterior symphysis ; i, relatively broader
interparietal; j, shorter and blunter coronoid process; A', lower pre-
molar smaller than last molar.

(4). Having shown that the evidence is against considering lordi,
mollipllosus and monticola synonymous and that their closest affinities
are not between moUipilosus and lordi, as suggested by Dr. Merriam,
but between moUipilosus and mouticola, let us consider their relation-
ships to Crlcetodipus parvus. If Peale's "mouse" can ever be proved
to be a Perog)iathus I should predict, on geographical grounds, that
it is more likely to be the same as mollipilostix than any other of
the trio, liut there is strong evidence in Peale's minute description
that Cricefodlpiis parvus is not a Perognaf]ni>^ at all, but a suckling
Perodipus, or five- toed kangaroo rat.

This evidence may be briefly summed — a, Dr. Merriam proves it
to be, (Amer. Fauna., p. 8), a "very young" animal; see also
Baird, (Mam. M. Amer., p. 425); />, "head and body equal ;" pro-
portions never (?) seen even in half-grown Pero(/)iat}ius but correlated
witli the proportions of adult Perodipus; c, "whiskers numerous,
white, a tuft of white hairs or bristles on the chin ;" this tuft is pre-
sent in Perodipus aijliix; I do not detect it in Perogiudhux; d,
"fore-legs small, feet moderate, * ''' -'^ hind legs long, the feet large
and strong, five- toed;" almost the reverse of this obtains in Peroij-
in(fliu.-<, the fore feet in that genus being, as compared with the hind
ones, unusually large and powerful; r, the very "long hind legs and
long tail" are again commented on, "leaving little room to doubt that
its hal)its are similar to those of the jumping mice, Merionex lahni-
dorivs,'' a comparison not so a[)plicable to a Pocket Mouse as a
Kangaroo Hat, in fact not applicable to Perogu(dhux at all, so far as I
have examined them; f, the long tail (11 times length of head and
body) is applicable to both genera; its absence of ci'est or pencil
usually seen in Perodipus may have been due to immaturity : the so-
called '' Dipodoiiii/s heenuaniii,'" of Leconte, from the "Sierra
Nevada," does not seem to have had the usual penicillate tail : f,
"color above, sepia brown, beneath, white, a dark line crosses the
cheeks beneath the eyes; " to no specimen or description of Prroyna-
flius 1 liave .seen will this characteristic color combination apj)ly, on
27

410 PROfEKDTNGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1893.

the otliei* liaiid it is peculiarly diagnostic of Perodipii.^ from Cali-
fornia and Oregon; g, C. parvus came from Oregon; Perodipus has
also been taken there and in southeastern Washington but I am not
aware of any records of Pero(/naf]iiis from these States.

If the type of Peale's mysterious rodent, like other priceless and
ill-used novelties of tlie Audubonian period, "cannot be found," to
disprove the above interpretation, it cannot be denied that there is
much evidence in favor of its being the type of a five-toed Kangaroo
Rat instead of a five-toed Pocket Mouse. As such, Crlretodipns
Peale, 1848, antedates Perodipus Fitzinger, 1867.

( 5). Dr. Merriam's statement that lordi, mollipilosus and C. parvus
all came from the Pacific Province now needs qualification. While
this is probably true of the last two, lordi should certainly be assigned
to a region quite devoid of the faunal peculiarities of the Pacific
slope.

Previous to my rediscovery of /ordi its precise liabitat in Britisli
Columbia could only be conjectured, and so far as it went Dr. Mer-
riam's supposition tliat this type came from the West Cascade region
was reasonable enough.

From the nature of its chosen habitat at Vernon, and the absence
of a similar environment west of the Cascades it is more than probable
that tlie type came from the same region farther south and that the
species is essentially a Great Basin form.

The "following species of North American mammals have recently
been added to the collections of the Academy of Natural Sciences of
Philadelphia. They were taken by Mr. R. B. Herron, who is at the
present time continuing a collecting trip in California in the interests
of the Academy. Other novelties which may be taken by Mr.
Herron, as well as a circumstantial account of the entire c-ollectious of
birds and mammals made by him. will appear in a future number oi'
the Proceedings.

4. Dipodomys simiolus, ' s]>. iiov. ( TvikNo. Kilti. 9 Col. Acad. Nat. Siicnccs.
I'liila. : Ajrua Calicntc California. Oct. 19. 1S93. col. by R. B. Herron ).

Description. — JNIiuature of D. deserti with very similar colors,
CO I or- pattern and proportions. No white terminal pencil, tlie dark

•^ Si'mi an ape or mimic ; olus diminutive.

l-'^'U').] XArCHAL SCIKXOKS OK I'M I LADKIJ'II [ A. 4H

ashy upper fourth of tail extending to tip; a faint streak of brownish-
black on under side of middle third of tail disappearing toward either
extremity. Soles scarcely darker than white feet. Tail strongly
crested-penicillate, the vertel)ne one and one- half times as long a^
head and body. General shade of upper parts slightly darker tlian in
(leserfl, inclining to cinnamon on rump in adults.

Measurements. — Total length, 241 ; tail vertebra', 149; pencil, o5 ;
liind foot, 08; ear from crown (dry; i». Skull — Basilar length,
21 -S; mastoid breadth, 24; iuteorbital constriction, 14-."); length
of nasals, lo; length of mandible to base of incisor, 13"H ; height
of coronoid process from angle, o-6.

Six specimens were taken, all in the Mohave Desert at Agua
Caliente. The average measurements are less than those given
above. This species is easily distinguishable from deserti by small
size, slightly darker coloration and lack of white tip to tail ; from
>'('»n7/.s' by its lack of black on rump, tail, soles and hind legs.

.">. Dipodomys similis, sp. iiov. (Type Xo. 1017. P Col. Acad. Nut. .Sciences.
I'liila.: Wliitc Water. Sun Diego Co., Califoniia. "Oet. 24. 1893. col. by E. B-
Herroii ).

Description. — In size and color pattern almost an exact counter-
[)art of Perodlp\ix (i(/{/is. Colors similar to 1). >/»a'o///.s and D.
deserti but darker than either and with tail and lind)S relatively
shorter than the latter. Above light tawny tipped and lined
Sparingly with blackish, the latter color more pronoiniced on rump.
Posterior surface of thigh to heel, soles, ring around eyes, base of
whiskers, tO)) of nose and upper and lower fourths of tail to tip,
blackish. The remainder of body wliite, including small spot above
eye, a larger one at [posterior base of ears and stripe across thighs.
Ears grayish. Tail crested-penicillate.

Measurements. — Total length, 241; tail vertebras 14.'); pencil,
2."); hind foot, -l^ , ear (dry) above crown, lO-o. Skull — basilar
length, 22; mastoid breadtli, 24-r); interorbital constriction 14;
length of nasal.*, 14; height of coronoid process from angle, ■"). Skull
similar to that oi' .■<iiiil()it(K but with smaller mastoids and wider across
ante-orbital processes of maxillary. In .s'/i/t/V/.^- the lower premolar is
narrower anteriorly than ])o.*teriorlv and as long as wide, in ■■<iiiu'(>/u.-<
it is of e<pial width on both faces and much wider than long. In
siml/ls the extremity of angle of mandible is prolonged and acum-
inate, in ^'iniiohis it is sliorter and rounded at the extremity.

412 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OK [1893.

A male aud female from White Water on the western side of

Mohave Desert represent the species. They are alike in all im})or-

tant respects.

I). Perognathus alticolus, sp. nov. (T>'pe Xo. 1615. $ , Col. Acad. Xat. Scieuces,
Phila.; San Beruardiuo Mts., California. Sept. 22. 1893, col. by R. B. Herron).

Description. — Most similar to P. apache and P. iitornatus, differ-
ing cranial ly, aud in larger size from either, less yellow than apache
and more decidedly lined with black than inoniatus. Size small,
tail equals length of head aud body, or longer, slightly crested
penicillate. Above yellowish brown heavily but finely lined with
blackish. Pelage very soft aud full. Bases of hairs above plumb-
eous for three-fourths their length. A tawny lateral stripe from
nose to aud including upper half of tail. Distal third of tail above
becoming l)lackish. One- fourth of heel end of soles, haired. Lower
parts, feet, fore legs aud lower edge of ear white to roots of pelage.

Measurements (from dry skin). — Total length, 157; tail vertebra',
77; pencil, 9; hind foot, 20; ear from crown, •"). Skull — Basilar
length, 16; mastoid breadth, 12-5: interorbital constriction, 6;
length of nasals, 8-6; length of mandible, 10-5; height of coronoid
process, 4'6.

Cranially ultlco/ns may be distinguished from both its allies by the
well defined separation of audital bullae below. Its lower premolar
is similar to that of inoniatus, but the mastoids of the latter are very
much larger than those of alticolus. The same may be said of apache.
P. alticolus belongs to the /ascia^HS group of the subgenus Perogna-
thus.

Skull figures of this species autl the two Dipodomijs above described
will probably appear in the final report of Mr. Herron' s collection.s.

1893.] XATI'HAJ- SCIENCES OF PHI I,A DKI.PH I A. 41o

GEOGRAPHIC VARIATION IN BASSARISCUS ASTUTUS. WITH
DESCRIPTION OF A NEW SUBSPECIES.

By SAMUEL X. EHOADS.

The recent accession of three specimens of B(i.<mrlscits^ to the
museuni of the Wagner Free Institute of Science in Philadelpliia
makes four individuals of the genus known to have heeen taken
in the State of Oregon.

The first record was made by Dr. Coues in the American
Naturalist in 1878. This specimen was taken in southwest Oregon
on the Rogue River; the rest were captured by Mr. Geo. Kenzer
near Grant's Pass in Josephine County, a tew years ago. Thev
were mounted by him, and, since arriving in Philadelphia, two of
them have been remounted and their skulls removed for examina-
tion.

Antedating these, the most northern records, we have the state-
ment of George Gibbs, Esq., in the Natural History of Washington
Territory, that in 18,52 he "found their skins quite conunon- on the
Lower Klamath River" but we have no positive evidence that any of
the skins were taken on that part of the Klamath River lying north
of California.

The dark colors of the Rogue River specimen are commented on
by Dr. J. A. Allen in his paper "On the Species of the Genus
Hassaris"" as follows: "The extremes of variation in color are in
si^ecimens No. 11,84!* from Camp (^rant, Arizona (E. Palmer) and
No. 12,849, from Oregon (A. H. Wood). The Arizona specimen is
pale brownish gray above, varied with blackish principallv along
the median line, caused by the black tips of the long hair. Below, it
is pale yellowish white. The tail is mostly white below but above
is crossefl by alternate rings of black and white of nearlv equal
breadth. The Oregon specimen has the prevailing tint of the dorsal*
region intense black, quite obscuring the brownish gray ground color.
Below, it is strongly brownish yellow, deepest on the throat and chin.

I J>'tiss(iri.\ .if Liclil(iist<-in. Is:>7 (ls:5()) |in(i(rii|iic.l ))y Ih/s.uir/s. Hiilmcr I81(i.
Sfc Science. No!. !l. ISST. V. .")!(;.
-Art. Will I'.ull. r. S. (le.il. Siir. Terr, LS'iJ.

414 l'f!(K KKDINOS OF TffK ACADK.-MV ol- [189').

The tail is inostly black above, the white being mostly half-rings con-
fined to the lower surface. These two specimens accord with the
peculiar phases of geographical color-variation commonly character-
izing the mammals and birds of the two regions in question. Should
the Oregon specimen here described prove to indicate the average
condition of the specie* along the Pacific coast to the northward, as
seems probable, the form there prevailing may require to be
varietally distinguished under the name raptor Baird, this name
doubtless referring to the Pacific coast form as already explained.
Five specimens from near the southern border of Texas agree in
being rather darker than the Arizona specimen and present only a
mo<lerate range of color variation."

The three additional specimens from ( Jrant's Pass sufficiently con-
firm the color characters alluded to by Dr. Allen to make the
question of subspecific sej)aratiou worth careful consideration. With
this in view I have, through the courtesy of Mr. F.W. True, secured
the loan of the Smithsonian Institution series of B(iS'<((ri.sciis axfidns.
The series consists of eighteen specimens; of the.«e the majority are
hunters, or flat skins, lacking skulls. Skulls accompany eight,
measurements and data, five, and the whole series is labeled with the
locality of capture.

Beside these and the ( )regon specimens, I have examined four in
the museum of the Academy of Natural Sciences, making a total of
twentv-five. Among them is the type, skin and skull, of Baird's ' B.
raptor.' A most valuable and important addition to the series con-
sists in a set of five (2 <?s, 2 9s and 1 juv. S i finely prepared skins
and skulls from Cuernavaca, ^lorelos, Mexico, taken in 1892, by
Mr. P. L. Jouy.

Apart from their excllent preservation and full data these speci-
mens are unique in being the only ones in the series taken in the
southernmost range of B. (isfiitii.% where it overlaps the habitat of />.
.■<iiinichra--<fl.

We must first determine from what locality came the type speci-
mens of astutii-!. Lichtenstein .states in his description that these
were sent to the l>erlin ^lu.^euni by one Dr. Deppe during the
residence of the latter in ^Mexico. We are left to our imagination
as to the precise locality of Dr. Deppe's residence, and, while it is
reasonable to believe that the type specimens were taken in the
"vicinitv" and that it is very probable the doctor "practised"

1^93.] NATIKAL SCTKXrKS OK I'Hl r.Ar>Kr,I'II I A. 415

south of the twentieth parallel in those early days, direct evidence
is wautiug.

But we have in Lichtenstein's conscientious description and plate
oi' astntiis in Darstellungen der Saugethiere der zoologisohe Museum,
(1827-34, pi. 43; so exact a reproduction of the peculiarities of
the C'uernavaea specimens taken by Mr. Jouy as to leave us in no
reasonable doubt that the type of a.'^fufii!^ came from southern ^Mexico.
Lichtenstein's description makes no allusion to variations from the
type in the numerous examples at his disposal. If however, we
com])are therewith specimens from northern Mexico northward we
find an increasing departure from the characters assigned to typical
t(.ifiifns until, in the Oregon examples, we have a form to all appear-
ances quite distinct.

It is quite proper that the two should be separated, perhaps
specifically, though there is some pi'obability that a complete series
will insensibly connect the two extremes. Such cranial differences
as I iiave detected may all come within the range of individual and
geographic variation. At any rate the skull series is too incomplete
as yet for a decided answer.

In either case the question arises as to the tenability of the name
'raptor'' for the northern form. It was originally proposed for a
Pacific Coast species.

The value of the name is, in the first place, lessened by the fact
that it was applied to an animal escaped from confinement in the east
and "supposed" to come from California.

The distinctive characters assigned to 'raptor' by Baird are: a,
small number of black rings on tail and of greater extent compared
with white rings ; h, black rings nearly complete below ; e, no
difference in colors of remaining j)arts of body ; d, ears decidedly
smaller ; ^, cranium I)roader, more constricted behind post-orbital
processes;/, temporal crests closer together; g. ])terygoids farther
apart; /), rati(j of greatest breadth to length 63 to 100 instead of 59,
as in a female from Texas. Dr. Allen has shown, and the series in
my possession verifies his view, that these cranial differences are
accountable to age, sex and individual variation. The skull of
raptor is nearly duplicated by No. 35,254 from Texas. I find that in
onlv one respect, the relative width of white and black tail- rings does
Baird's diagnosis as given above ai)ply to the Pacific coast form as
contrasted with those from Texas. lUit even in this particular

416 l'U(K'KEI)lN(iS OK TJIK ACADEMY oJ- [1893.

typical B. astutiis is very variable. I tliei-efore propose, for the
Bassarisk of Northern Mexico aud the United States the name
Bassariscii-< astvfiis fin cits. Should the so-called asfutns of the United
States and northern Mexico prove a distinct sjiecies, the small, dark
coast form from northern ('aliforuia northward (not of central and
southern California) should be made a sub-species oi tennis. In that
i-ase it should be called Brisxuriscii.^ fianis oregoniis.' It is possible
that Dr. Merriam has enough material in his custody to decide the
(juestion at an early date.

So far as they may now ])e distiniiuished, the Civet Cats belonging
to the iistiitiis group are characterized :
1. Bassariscus astutus ( Lic-ht. I

I)escrij)ti()u. — Size lai'ge, fur scant and harsh. Tail vertebnc
lonuer than head and body, 14 to 16- ringed exclusive of tip, black
rinu'S below interrupted by a broad, continuous mesial band.

Upper parts of body uniform blackish gray, often tinged with
pale fulvous on sides of rump an<l belly, the black hairs of the dorsal
region disappearing laterally. Under parts clear gray with dirty,
pale yellowish suffusion. Underiur and roots of hairs ashy. A
roundish spot above the eye, a larger one beneath it and a semilunar
si)Ot at the entrance of ear, white. Top of head, forehead, band
around nose and soles of hind feet, blackish. Skull large, sti'ong
and angular; zygomatic fossic wide and deep; post- orlntal processes
small and deflected downwards ; rostrum broad, canines widely sepa-
rated ; saiiittal crest well developed in adult males, frontal bones
narrowed and long-waisted behind tlie supraorbital processes ; canines
sulcate on the inner- })osterior and anterior edges above, on the
anterior edge below.

Measurements. — Total length, (Jouy. ) <S()2 to 855, (Licht.) 850;
tail (Jouy) 360 to 420, (Licht.) o68 ; hind foot, (Jouy) 76 to 79
(Licht.) 72; length of ear (Jouy) 45 to 49, (Licht.) 84(?) ; breadth
of ear, (Jouy) 52 to 59, (Licht.) 25(?).

(^1^^]1_ — Total length, 82 to 87 ; greatest breadth 58-5 to 59.
Interorbital constriction 17' from tip to tip of postorbital processes
27. Taken from adult male skull.

The above is about equivalent to a translation of Lichtenstein's
two original descriptions oi' ((■■<futii'i. The cranial diagnosis is chiefly

^The tyjie will bo Ni>. l.iiU. Col. Academy of Natural Sciencos of Phila.

1898.] XATIHAI. SCIKXCKS OK IM 11 LA DKLPII F A. 417

based on the four adult skulls of the C'uernavaca specimens. The
variability in the width of the pterygoids is striking-, the two female
skulls showing the greatest width in this respect. In one of them it
is nearly as great as in the skull of " raptor. " The same variability
is seen in fianiK, but in two instances the widely separated pterygoids
are present in male skulls, showing the peculiarity has no sexual
significance. In two of the Cuernavaca specimens the up))er termi-
nal fourth (127 to 150 mm.) of the tail is wholly black, the remain-
der about equally white- and- l)lack- ringed above. In this variation
there is an approach to sitmiclirdsfl but the color of the under side of
the tail in dstiitus is in quite the opposite direction, being as broadly
white as in any examples of fix r us.

In general terms (/■•<( iit us may be distinguished from ffurus bv its
greater size, light gray colors of uniform distril)ution, the total lack
or slight trace of fulvous admixture, paleness of the fur at base and
the scantiness and harshness of the pelage.

2. Bassariscus astutus flavus, subsp. iiov. (Typf No. 972 Col. Academy of
Natural Scieuces of Phihi. ; Texas, 18tjl, t-ol. l)y i)r. Heennanu).

Description. — 8ize smaller ; fur long, full and soft. Tail verte-
brte somewhat shorter than head and body, tail 14 to 16 ringed
exclusive of black tip, the black rings often nearly encircling it, (in
the Oregon series the three terminal black rings completely encircle
tail). Upper part of body blackish tawny, blackest medially,
yellowest laterally. Top of head and neck like middle of back.
L'nder parts tawny, lightest on throat and neck, uiiderfur and roots
of body hairs everywhere sooty. Spots above and below eyes and at
entrance of ear, tawny, the blackish mai-kings of face indistinct or
obsolete.

Skull smaller, rounded, the zygoma' relatively narrower pos-
teriorly, postorbital processes relatively wider apart, closely
approached posteriorly by the forward development of the brain case
the temporal bone widening suddenly at or near this point and
rarely showing the waist- like configuration of asfufus, rostrum short
and tapering, the canines lying well within its contour as viewed
from above, sagittal crest absent, canines less sulcate, groove disap-
pearing in Oregon specimens.

Measurements. — Total length, 680 to 800; tail, o04 to :\S{) ;
hind foot, 55 to 60 ; size of ears undeterminable.

Skull. — Total length, 80, greatest breadth, 50; interorbital con-
striction, 20 ; tip to tip of postorbital processes, SO.

418 PROCEKmXOR OF I'HK A( ADKMY OF [189o.

The rauge in the variation of external characters among the
Bassarisks from northern Mexico and the United States, excluding
the Oregon specimens, is not great, but variation in the size and pro-
portions of the skull in animals of the same age and sex from a
stated locality (Texas) is perplexing, seeming to connect flurus with
typical adufii.'<.

Color characters and l)ody measurements on the other hand are
constant enough to establish their title to separate specific rank.

Some cranial points seem to confirm this view, the molar dentition
of the two forms, however, is identical. A bona- fide Califbrnian
specimen is as light-colored or lighter than Baird's pseudonymous
one, the latter (whose sole claim on our notice consists in its bare
name) sharing the same characteristic tawny seen in darkest Texan
examples. The light hued C'amp Grant specimen, mentioned ( -^mpra
cif.) by Dr. Allen is in all respects only a small, pa.\e finrus.

The Oregon series on the other hand are almost as different,
externally, from average Texas skins as the latter are from true
astiifuK. The diminutive size, brownish black color, nearly black
upper tail, completeness of the terminal black rings mesially, etc.
are subspecific characters apparently separating ore(io)iiis from its
nearest conueners in the Inited States.

1 H9;>. ] XATIHAI, SCIKXCKS OF IM I I LA I )i:i.l'l I I A . 419

ON SOME LEECH-LIKE PARASITES OF AMERICAN CRAYFISHES.
By J. PERCY MOORE.

Ill IIS;")! Dr. Leidy described in the Proceedings oftliis Academy
the external characters of A.sfacohdel/a philadejphicn, which he
found occupying generally the exterior of ('anihnnis Ixirfoiiii. This
account was quoted in full in the Synopsis of .\nierican Freshwater
Leeches published in 1^74 by Verrill, who adds no observations of
his own. Other tlian tliese the writer is acquainted with no
published accounts of American Discodrilida- (Vejdovsky). At-
tracted by the peculiar structure, the uncertain affinities, and most
of all, by the remarkable variability of these parasites, a score
of zoologists have been led to contril)ute to our knowledge of
the Euro|)ean forms. The question of the specific distinctness or
unity of the several forms which take up tlieir abode on Asfacnx
j{.iirlafih(ii has led to consideral)le discussion, which has not yet
reached a definite settlement. \'ejdovsky l)elieves the three or
four forms which have l)een described as distinct species to be but
varieties of one extremely variable species — a view to which a strong
support is lent by the elaborate tables of variations prepared by
Voigt. Whitman has found living on the crayfishes of Japan a
similar multiplicity of forms, which have been regarded as constitut-
ing three distinct species, but which have not, the writer believes,
been described.

It now appears that our American crayfishes likewise carry about
with them a heterogeneous burden of leech- like parasites (or mess-
mates?). Our common Cambarus hartonU, for example, is affected by
at least four forms, which are easily distinguished, and which will be
here described as specifically distinct. Other and different forms have
been found by the writer on C. affini^ and on C. which in-
habits the larger mountain streams of western North Carolina. These
being the facts, the writer thought it well to present for publication
the present short account, which is entirely preliminary to a more
complete discussion of the structure and affinities of the.se Annulata,
the first instalment of which will soon appear. It is hoped that this
paper will serve to direct tlie attention of zoologists to this neglected

420 PKOCKKDINOS OF THE ACADEMY Ol- ' [189.'5.

group, and lead to the collectioD of the numerous forms which it
seems reasonable to suppose must attach themselves to the bodies of
our many species of crayfish. The monographic study of such a
group as this would doubtless furnish us with data of great value in
the consideration of our theories of variation. The writer would he
especially indebted to anyone who will kindly furnish him with
material collected in other localities or from other species of crayfish.

Regarding the specific distinctness of the forms here described it
may be said that the writer has examined several hundred sj^ecimens
ranging in size and age from individuals just emerged from the
cocoon to those of the largest dimensions, and while each species ex-
hibits a considerable range of variation (which will form the subject
matter of a subsequent })aper), no important transitional forms have
been discovered, the diagnostic characters here given being main-
tained with as much constancy as is usual amongst closely allied
animal species.

Even should the views of Vejdovsky and Voigt prove to be
correct for the European species, which seems probable, this would
in no way affect the status of the American forms ; for other cases are
not wanting where a group of animals which in one region is
represented In' a single variable species, in another has numerous
specific representatives. This would then be only another fact in
support of the view, now almost universally conceded, that species are
but more widely separated varieties, which under the stress of changing
conditions have continued to diverge from a common origin. Indeed,
it is not certain that these species should be placed in the same genus
even, for they are distinguished from one another by anatomical char-
acters of such importance as would, in some groups of animals, rank of
generic value. The several species are here referred to the single genus
BranchiobdeJIa chiefly because the writer is uncertain as to the legiti-
mate limits of a genus in zoology, and because in this preliminary paj)er
it is sufficient to recognize the existence of distinct forms without
attempting to fix the exact conventional value of the gap which
separates them — a labor which belongs more rightly to the system-
atist, whose work of sorting and arranging would be quite premature
in a group of which only a very small portion of the probable
number of existing species have been examined. Moreover it should
be borne in mind that much confusion has resulted from the un-
necessarv multiulicatiou of genera.

189o. ] NATURAI. SCTENCKS OF PHTLADELPHIA. 421

The four species of Bnnichiohdclla here considered aji-ree with one
another, and differ from the Euro|)ean species (7>. rariaiis of Voiirt
= B. asfaci Oilier, + jxiraslfd Braun, + p('iif(>di)iit<i Wliitnian, +
hexodoiifa Gruber) in the possession of two pairs of vasa deferentia,
in the fifth and sixth post-cephalic seaments ; while B. ('(trieiiK, as
described bv Dorner. whose account I have not seen corrected, has
but one jjair.

Our four species aroup themselves somewhat naturally in psiirs. IL
j)lill(iilrlplilca and B. ilhniiinnfd agree in the terete cross-section of the
body, the posteriorly directed posterior sucker, the common- external
openina- by means of a vesicle (which is pulsatile in 7>. jihila-
(Iclpliicd, at least) of the anterior pair of nephridia, and the unlike
form of the dorsal and ventral jaws. B. pulchen-'nmi and B.
iiidabiJIa ayree in havina' the body depressed and more or less laterally
expanded posteriorly, in the ventral direction of the face of the
sucker, the distinct external openings of the anterior two nephridia,
and the similar dorsal and ventral jaws. The second group is much
more closely allied to the European forms.
Branchiobdella illuminata, sj). uov.

Fig. 111., Plate XII, external outline of the animal of its usual
resting form, showing also the outline of the alimentary canal, the
principal trunks of the vascular system, the series of clear glands of
the right side, and the conmion nephridial vesicle opening to the
exterior on the dorsum of the third post-cephalic segment, x'i.'i. drawn
from a living pecimen. Fig. lb, the two jaws in normal relative
positions, x400. Fig. Ir, outline of a cocoon, x4.5.

This species has been named iJhnniiKifn in allusion to the double
series of clear glands which in mounted specimens viewed by trans-
mitted light ajjpear like rows of pale-lighted lamps.

I^ody very slender in complete extension, but robust in contrac-
tion, tapering from the seventh segment very gently toward the head,
and suddenly to the posterior sucker ; terete in ti'ansverse section in
all regions, lii-aunulation of segments very conspicuous throughout
the entire length. Posterior sucker small and weak, on the same
axis as the body segment. Head small, sletuler, and elongated; the
post-oral part distinctly bi-anuulate. Lips long and weak, of nearly
equal size ; ridged within by longitudinal folds. Mouth opening
with its longest diameter transverse. No circumoral or other luiirs
have been detecte<l in the adults of tiiis species ; and in the young a

422 ]'H<)(KKI)IX(;S OF THK ACADK.MV 1)1" [1^ 5'-^

single small hunch in the ineiliun reiiion of each lip is all that is
)) resent.

The jaws are remarkable, and althouiih lariie, are inconspicuous
on account of their transparency and lack of color. On the dorsal
one, which is much the larger, a high median ridge is developed,
which liears three strong teeth, the points of which are directed
posteriorly fdown the throat). The ventral jaw is shaped like a U
each limb of which is bent out of the common plane into a boomerang
shape. The angle of the boomerang on each side is uppermost and
bears a very strong curved tooth, the two bounding a tleej) groove
which accommodates the dorsal dentigerous ridge.

The stomach is comparatively small, and behind it the evenly
tubular inte-stine is thrown into loops, which l)ecome more obvious
with the greater degree of contraction of the animal.

In connection with the vascular system is developed a reniarkal)le
shallow sinus which covers almost the entire surface of the alimentary
canal. This presents dorsal and ventral longitudinal enlargements
into which the principal vascular trunks are received. The extensive
vascular surface with the contained bright red blood thus i)resented
gives the animals a delicate pinkish hue which distinguishes living
individuals at a glance from the other species herein descril>ed.

In each of the nine post-cephalic segments is a pair of peculiar
translucent glandular bodies composed of large nucleated cells, and
communicating with the exterior by slender ducts having ventro-
lateral openings.

The anterior two nephridia open into a gourd-shaped vesicle having .
an opening to the exterior in the mid-dorsal region of the major
annulus of the third segment. The spermatheca is short, cylindrical
and bifid : the penis-sac short-pedicled and spherical, and the atrium
clavate and curved. The spermatheca, penis, ovaries, posterior paired
nephridia and anus open respectively on the fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth
and ninth post-cephalic segments. Length of full grown individuals, 4
mm., niaximuiu diameter ( 7th segment ) •!• nun., diameter of aceta-
bulum 'o") mm. The figure represents an individual of maximum
size.

The cocoon is regularly ellipsoidal in shape and bears an anchoring
pedicle at each pole of the major axis. Length of cocoon, ••").> mm.,
diameter. •40 mm., length of pedicles, -'.VA nun.

This s|)ecies is verv connuou and has been found in the l>ranchial

189.').] XATCHAL SCJENC'ES OK PHILADKIJMI I A. -42o

chamber of nearly one-half of the larger individuals of < '. haiiunii
tliat I have examined. It appears never to leave the branchial
chamber during the life of the crayfish, except at the time ot moult.
The cocoons are found tliroughout tlie year attached to the branchial
tilaments, esi)ecially the inner ones. Philadelphia, Pa. and Watauga
Co., North Carolina.

B. pulcherrima, sp. nov.

Fig. 2«, Plate XII, outline of the entire animal as seen from the
side, showing the adhesive organs on the eighth and ninth segments.
x2o. Fig. 'lb, the same specimen from the dorsal aspect, with an outl
ine of the alimentary canal, x23. These drawings are from a
medium sized preserved specimen. Fig. 'Ic, one of the jaws of the usual
form, xliOO. Fig. "If, a cocoon, x4.").

The beautiful transparency of the anterior segments, which enables
one to see with great distinctness the internal organs of that region
suggested the name given to this species.

Form rather stout, the l)ody depressed, especially in the posterior
region. The segments increase regularly in width to the seventh,
which is the broadest; and behind which they rapidly narrow to the
acetabulum. Each post-cephalic segment consists of an anterior
larger and a posterior smaller annulus. The ventral surfaces of the
eighth and ninth segments ai'e strongly flattened, and each bears on
its extreme lateral margins a cup-shaped adhesive organ, into the
central depression of which a conspicuous gland opens. These are
directed ventralward and doulitless serve as accessory organs of
attachment to aid the rather weak sucker. Those on the eighth
segment are usually the larger, but a considerable range of variation
is exhibited in this respect. The structures become proportionally
larger and more conspicuous in older individuals.

The head is urn-shaped, slightly longer than broad in j)reserved
s])ecimens, and its greatest width less than or just equal to that of the
first body segment. The breadth of the head varies greatly with the
degree of contraction of the specimen, but m the living individual
always ai)pears narrow, and to form part of the generally even
tapering outlines of the l)ody, never abruptly expanded as in />'.
hixfdhUiii. The oral region is separated from the cephalic region In
a deep constriction, which completely encircles the head. The
mouth is envel()p('(l bv a ])air (dorsal and vt'Utral ) of distinct thick

424 PKOCEEIWNGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1898.

muscular lips, of which the dorsal oue is the larijrer and droops down-
ward, partially enclosing the ventral lij). Each presents a slight
median emargination, but is otherwise entire. The lips and head, as
well as the sides of the principal annuli of the body, are provided
with a fringe of delicate